Donate
   
Select your preferred input and type any Sanskrit or English word. Enclose the word in “” for an EXACT match e.g. “yoga”.
Root Search
di has 3 results
        Root Word (Pāṇini Dhātupāṭha:)Full Root MarkerSenseClassSutra
√ḍīḍīvihāyasā gatau1684
√ḍīḍīvihāyasā gatau426
√dīkṣaye425
 
 
di has 7 results
Root WordIAST MeaningMonier Williams PageClass
√डीḍīflaying, passing through the air / vihāyasā-gati1003/1, 347/3Cl.10 and 4
√दीshaving one's head / mauṇḍaya836/3Cl.1
√दीsacrificing / ijya164/2Cl.1
√दीinvesting scared thread / u-panayana201/2Cl.1
√दीthe practising of self-restraint / niyama552/1Cl.1
√दीdedicating oneself to, or vowing / vrata1042/2Cl.1
√दीconsecrating, initiating / ādeśa137/3Cl.1
Amarakosha Search
128 results
WordReferenceGenderNumberSynonymsDefinition
abhram1.3.6-7NeuterSingularmudiraḥ, ambubhṛt, jaladharaḥ, stanayitnuḥ, dhūmayoniḥ, jīmūtaḥ, vāridaḥ, dhārādharaḥ, vārivāhaḥ, jalamuk, ghanaḥ, taḍitvān, balāhakaḥ, meghaḥcloud
amaraḥ1.1.7-9MasculineSingularnirjaraḥ, vibudhaḥ, sumanasaḥ, āditeyaḥ, aditinandanaḥ, asvapnaḥ, gīrvāṇaḥ, daivatam, devaḥ, suraḥ, tridiveśaḥ, diviṣad, ādityaḥ, amartyaḥ, dānavāriḥ, devatā, tridaśaḥ, suparvā, divaukāḥ, lekhaḥ, ṛbhuḥ, amṛtāndhāḥ, vṛndārakaḥimmortal
antikam3.1.67MasculineSingularnediṣṭam
apadiśam1.3.5MasculineSingularvidikintermediate point
arimedaḥ2.2.50MasculineSingularviṭkhadiraḥ
aruṇaḥ3.3.54MasculineSingularmeṣādiloma, bhruvauantarāāvartaḥ
asuraḥ1.1.12MasculineSingularditisutaḥ, indrāriḥ, daityaḥ, suradviṣ, śukraśiṣyaḥ, danujaḥ, pūrvadevaḥ, dānavaḥ, daiteyaḥgiant
ātañcanam3.3.122NeuterSingularkrīḍādi
bhakṣitaḥMasculineSingularglastam, annam, khāditam, liptam, bhuktam, grastam, abhyavahṛtam, gilitam, carvitam, aśitam, jagdham, psātam, pratyasitam
bhayadrutaḥ3.1.41MasculineSingularkāndiśīkaḥ
bhrūṇaḥ3.3.51MasculineSingularmaurvī, dravyāśritaḥ, sattvādikaḥ, śuklādikaḥ, sandhyādikaḥ
bhūḥ2.1.2-3FeminineSingularkṣmā, mahī, dhātrī, kumbhinī, ratnagarbhā, bhūmiḥ, rasā, dharā, kṣoṇī, kṣitiḥ, vasudhā, gotrā, pṛthvī, medi, gahvarī, ilā, bhūtadhātrī, sāgarāmbarā, anantā, sthirā, dharaṇī, kāśyapī, vasumatī, vasundharā, pṛthivī, avaniḥ, vipulā, gauḥ, kṣamā, jagatī, acalā, viśvambharā, dharitrī, jyā, sarvaṃsahā, urvī, kuḥ
bhūriḥ3.3.190NeuterSingularagāram, nagaram, mandiram
buddham3.1.110MasculineSingularmanitam, viditam, pratipannam, avasitam, avagatam, budhitam
caṇḍālaḥ2.10.19MasculineSingularantevāsī, janaṅgamaḥ, plavaḥ, pukkasaḥ, śvapacaḥ, divākīrttiḥ, cāṇḍālaḥ, niṣādaḥ, mātaṅgaḥ
cāṣaḥ2.5.18MasculineSingularkikīdiviḥ
cet2.4.12MasculineSingularyadi
channaḥ3.1.97MasculineSingularchāditaḥ
chinnam3.1.104MasculineSingularchitam, chātam, vṛkṇam, lūnam, kṛttam, dātam, ditam
daivam1.4.28NeuterSingularniyatiḥ, vidhiḥ, diṣṭam, bhāgadheyam, bhāgyamdestiny or luck
dāritaḥ3.1.101MasculineSingularbhinnaḥ, bheditaḥ
dāyādaḥ3.3.95MasculineSingulartrātā, dāruṇaḥraṇaḥ, sārāvaḥ, ruditam
dhruvaḥMasculineSingularauttānapādithe polar star
didhiṣūḥ2.6.23MasculineSingular
dig2.4.22MasculineSingular
dig3.5.2FeminineSingular
digdhaḥ2.8.90MasculineSingular‍viṣāktaḥ, liptakaḥ
digdhaliptahaḥ3.1.89MasculineSingularliptam
diggajāḥ1.3.3MasculinePluralelephant
dikkariṇyaḥ1.3.4FemininePluralthe female elephant
dikpatayaḥ1.3.2MasculinePluralthe lord of quarters and the points
dināntaḥMasculineSingularsāyaḥevening
diśFeminineSingularkakup, kāṣṭhā, āśā, haritquarter or region pointed at/ direction
diṣṭam3.3.41NeuterSingularsūkṣmailā, kālaḥ, alpaḥ, saṃśayaḥ
diṣṭyā2.4.10MasculineSingularsamupajoṣam
diśyamNeuterSingularrelating to the quarters of the sky or to the horizon
di2.4.6MasculineSingular
divaukasaḥ3.3.234MasculineSingularhitāśaṃsā, ahidaṃṣṭraḥ
divyopādukaḥ3.1.49MasculineSingular
dṛṣṭāntaḥ3.3.69MasculineSingularśleṣmādi, aśmavikṛtiḥ, rasādi, śabdayoniḥ, raktādi, mahābhūtādi, mahābhūtaguṇāḥ, indriyāṇi
dyāvāpṛthivyauFeminineDualrodasī, divaspṛthivyau, rodasyau, dyāvābhūmī
gajabhakṣyāFeminineSingularsuvahā, hlādi, surabhī, rasā, maheraṇā, kundurukī, sallakī
gañjāFeminineSingularmadirāgṛham
gāyatrī2.2.49FeminineSingularbālatanayaḥ, khadiraḥ, dantadhāvanaḥ
ghasraḥMasculineSingulardinam, ahaḥ, divasaḥ, vāsaraḥday
granthitam3.1.85MasculineSingularsanditam, dṛbdham
gṛham2.2.4-5NeuterSingularagāram, vastyam, sadma, geham, ālayaḥ, gṛhāḥ, bhavanam, niśāntam, veśma, nilayaḥ, mandiram, sadanam, niketanam, udavasitam, nikāyyaḥ
hṛṣṭaḥ3.1.103MasculineSingularprītaḥ, mattaḥ, tṛptaḥ, prahlannaḥ, pramuditaḥ
indraḥ1.1.45MasculineSingularmarutvān, pākaśāsanaḥ, puruhūtaḥ, lekharṣabhaḥ, divaspatiḥ, vajrī, vṛṣā, balārātiḥ, harihayaḥ, saṅkrandanaḥ, meghavāhanaḥ, ṛbhukṣāḥ, maghavā, vṛddhaśravāḥ, purandaraḥ, śakraḥ, sutrāmā, vāsavaḥ, vāstoṣpatiḥ, śacīpatiḥ, svārāṭ, duścyavanaḥ, ākhaṇḍalaḥ, viḍaujāḥ, sunāsīraḥ, jiṣṇuḥ, śatamanyuḥ, gotrabhid, vṛtrahā, surapatiḥ, jambhabhedī, namucisūdanaḥ, turāṣāṭ, sahasrākṣaḥindra, the king of the gods
jhaṭiti2.4.2MasculineSingulardrāṅ, maṅkṣu, sapadi, srāk, añjasā, āhnāya
kaladhautam3.3.83NeuterSingularyuktam, kṣmādi, ṛtam, prāṇī, atītaḥ
kālaḥ1.4.1MasculineSingularsamayaḥ, diṣṭaḥ, anehātime
kaṇaḥ3.3.52MasculineSingularstutiḥ, akṣaraḥ, dvijādi, śuklādi
kaṣṭam3.3.45MasculineSingularutkarṣaḥ, sthitiḥ, diśā
kīlālam3.3.208NeuterSingularchadi, netraruk, samūhaḥ
kiṣkuḥ3.3.7MasculineSingularsitam, khadiram
kranditamNeuterSingularruditam, kruṣṭamweeping
kṣamam3.3.150MasculineSingularādi, pradhānaḥ
kumudvatī1.10.38FeminineSingularkumudia place abounding in water-lillies
labdham3.1.105MasculineSingularāsāditam, bhūtam, prāptam, vinnam, bhāvitam
lakṣmīḥ1.1.27FeminineSingularbhārgavī, , haripriyā, padmā, kṣīrasāgarakanyakā, ramā, lokamātā, śrīḥ, padmālayā, lokajananī, kṣīrodatanayā, indi, kamalālaxmi, goddess of wealth
mahat3.3.85MasculineSingularrāgi, nīlyādi
mṛtyuḥ2.8.118Ubhaya-lingaSingularantaḥ, ‍‍diṣṭāntaḥ, maraṇam, atyayaḥ, kāladharmaḥ, nāśaḥ, pralayaḥ, pañcatā, nidhanam
nadī1.10.29-30FeminineSingularkūlaṅkaṣā, sravantī, dhunī, śaivalinī, rodhovakrā, apagā, dvīpavatī, hradi, taraṅgiṇī, nirjhariṇī, nimnagā, srotasvatī, taḍinī, sarit, sarasvatīa river
nāgaḥ3.3.26MasculineSingularsukham, stryādibhṛtāvahaḥ, phaṇaḥ, kāyaḥ
nagnaḥ3.1.38MasculineSingulardigambaraḥ, avāsāḥ
namaskārīFeminineSingulargaṇḍakālī, samaṅgā, khadi
nandīMasculineSingularbhṛṅgī, riṭiḥ, tuṇḍī, nandikaḥ, nandikeśvaraḥ, śṛṅgīnandi
nāpitaḥ2.10.10MasculineSingularkṣurī, muṇḍī, divākīrttiḥ, antāvasāyī
nirastam1.6.20MasculineSingulartvaritoditamsputtered
odanam2.9.49MasculineSingulardiviḥ, ‍bhissā, ‍bhaktam, andhaḥ, annam
pādasphoṭaḥ2.6.52MasculineSingularvipādi
padātiḥ2.8.68MasculineSingularpādātikaḥ, pa‍dājiḥ, padgaḥ, padikaḥ, pa‍ttiḥ, padagaḥ
paṭalam2.2.14NeuterSingularchadi
prāthitaḥ3.1.96MasculineSingulararditaḥ
pūjyaḥ3.3.158MasculineSingularyasyayojñātastatraśabdādikam
punarbhūḥ2.6.23FeminineSingulardidhiṣūḥ
rodasī3.3.237FeminineSingularkhagaḥ, bālyādi
rūkṣaḥ3.3.233MasculineSingularrāgaḥ, dravaḥ, śṛṅgārādi, viṣam, vīryam, guṇaḥ
sādhīyān3.3.243MasculineSingulartulāsūtram, aśvādiraśmiḥ
śampā1.3.9FeminineSingularcañcalā, taḍit, hrādi, vidyut, kṣaṇaprabhā, śatahradā, capalā, saudāminī, airāvatīlighting
samunnaddhaḥ3.3.110MasculineSingulardivākaraḥ, raśmiḥ
sandānitam3.1.94MasculineSingularmūtam, uhitam, sanditam, sitam, baddham
sāraṅgaḥ3.3.28MasculineSingularvāk, svargaḥ, bhūḥ, dik, paśuḥ, ghṛṇiḥ, vajram, iṣuḥ, jalam, netram
śrīparṇikā2.4.40FeminineSingularkumudi, kumbhī, kaṭaryaḥ, kaṭphalaḥ
sṛṇikā2.6.67FeminineSingularlālā, syandi
surā2.10.39FeminineSingularva‍ruṇātmajā, halipriyā, madyam, pari‍srutā, prasannā, para‍srut, kaśyam, ‍‍kādambarī, gandhokṣamā, hālā, madi, irā
sūraḥ1.3.28-30MasculineSingularsahasrāṃśuḥ, raviḥ, chāyānāthaḥ, jagaccakṣuḥ, pradyotanaḥ, lokabāndhavaḥ, aryamā, dhāmanidhiḥ, divākaraḥ, braghnaḥ, bhāsvān, haridaśvaḥ, arkaḥ, aruṇaḥ, taraṇiḥ, virocanaḥ, tviṣāṃpatiḥ, haṃsaḥ, savitā, tejasāṃrāśiḥ, karmasākṣī, trayītanuḥ, khadyotaḥ, sūryaḥ, bhagaḥ, dvādaśātmā, abjinīpatiḥ, ahaskaraḥ, vibhākaraḥ, saptāśvaḥ, vikartanaḥ, mihiraḥ, dyumaṇiḥ, citrabhānuḥ, grahapatiḥ, bhānuḥ, tapanaḥ, padmākṣaḥ, tamisrahā, lokabandhuḥ, dinamaṇiḥ, inaḥ, ādityaḥ, aṃśumālī, bhāskaraḥ, prabhākaraḥ, vivasvān, uṣṇaraśmiḥ, mārtaṇḍaḥ, pūṣā, mitraḥ, vibhāvasuḥ, aharpatiḥ(53)the sun
svaḥ1.1.6MasculineSingulardyauḥ, svarga:, dyauḥ, nākaḥ, triviṣṭapam, tridivaḥ, tridaśālayaḥ, suralokaḥheaven
tundilaḥ2.6.44MasculineSingularbṛhatkukṣiḥ, picaṇḍilaḥ, tundikaḥ, tundī
tunnaḥMasculineSingularkuṇiḥ, kacchaḥ, kāntalakaḥ, nandivṛkṣaḥ, kuberakaḥ
uktam3.1.108MasculineSingularuditam, jalpitam, ākhyātam, abhihitam, lapitam, bhāṣitam
ulūkaḥ2.5.16MasculineSingularpecakaḥ, divāndhaḥ, kauśikaḥ, ghūkaḥ, divābhītaḥ, vāyasārātiḥ, niśāṭanaḥ
unmādaḥ3.1.21MasculineSingularunmadiṣṇuḥ
ūrīkṛtam3.1.110MasculineSingularupaśrutam, viditam, āśrutam, samāhitam, saṅgīrṇam, aṅgīkṛtam, upagatam, saṃśrutam, pratijñātam, urarīkṛtam
uta3.3.251MasculineSingularprakāśaḥ, ādi, samāptiḥ, hetuḥ, prakaraṇam
vādyamNeuterSingularditram, ātodyama musical instrument
varcaḥ3.3.239NeuterSingularkṛcchrādikarma
vaśā3.3.225FeminineSingulardivyaḥ, kuḍmalaḥ, khaḍgapidhānam, arthaughaḥ
vataṃsaḥ3.3.235MasculineSingularcauryādikarma
viṭapaḥ3.3.138MasculineSingulardivyagāyanaḥ, antarābhavasattvaḥ
vitardiFeminineSingularvedi
vivadhaḥ3.3.103MasculineSingulardoṣotpādaḥ, prakṛtyādivinaśvaraḥ(vyākaraṇe), mukhyānuyāyīśiśuḥ, prakṛtasyānuvartanam
vṛjinam3.3.116MasculineSingulararthādidarpaḥ, ajñānam, praṇayaḥ, hiṃsā
vṛṣākapāyī3.3.164FeminineSingularkriyā, devatā, dhanādibhiḥbhedyaḥ
vyāḍaḥ3.3.48MasculineSingularninditaḥ, vargaḥ, avasaraḥ, vāri, daṇḍaḥ, bāṇaḥ
hlādiFeminineSingulardambholiḥ, śatakoṭiḥ, kuliśam, śambaḥ, paviḥ, vajram, aśaniḥ, svaruḥ, bhiduramthe thunderbolt of indra
apadiśam1.3.5MasculineSingularvidikintermediate point
durdinamNeuterSingulara cloudy day
āmodin1.5.11MasculineSingularmukhavāsanaḥa perfume for the mouth made up in the form of a camphor pill etc.
parivādi1.7.3FeminineSingulara lute with seven strings
kranditamNeuterSingularruditam, kruṣṭamweeping
nadīmātṛkaḥ add devamātṛkaḥ both are different2.1.12MasculineSingular
vitardiFeminineSingularvedi
nidigdhikāFeminineSingularrāṣṭrikā, kulī, bṛhatī, duḥsparśā, pracodanī, vyāghrī, kṣudrā, kaṇṭakārikā, spṛśī
agredidhiṣūḥ2.6.23MasculineSingular
tundilaḥ2.6.44MasculineSingularbṛhatkukṣiḥ, picaṇḍilaḥ, tundikaḥ, tundī
pracchadi2.6.55FeminineSingularvamiḥ, vamathuḥ
vedi2.7.20FeminineSingular
nītivedināṃ trivargaḥ2.8.19MasculineSingular
carmaprabhedi2.10.35NeuterSingularārā
kalādikam2.10.35NeuterSingular‍śilpam
pratyādiṣṭaḥ3.1.39MasculineSingularnirastaḥ, pratyākhyātaḥ, nirākṛtaḥ
śatādikāt3.1.62-63MasculineSingular
ādi3.1.79MasculineSingularpūrvaḥ, paurastyaḥ, prathamaḥ, ādyaḥ
dinaḥ3.3.114MasculineSingularkeśaḥ
hrādi3.3.119FeminineSingularkṛtyaḥ, ketuḥ, upanimantraṇam
sapadi2.4.9MasculineSingularsadyaḥ
Monier-Williams Search
4216 results for di
Devanagari
BrahmiEXPERIMENTAL
didambhiṣumfn. ( darnbh- Desiderative) wishing to deceive View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diddāf. Name of a princess of kaśmīra- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diddākṣemam. "promoting welfare of diddā-", Name of kṣema-gupta- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diddāpālam. "protector of diddā-", Name of a man View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diddāpuran. Name of a town built by diddā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diddāsvāminm. Name of a temple built by diddā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diddibhaprob. wrong reading for ṭiṭṭibha-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dideviṣumfn. ( div- Desiderative) desirous of playing View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
didhakṣmfn. Nominal verb dhak- ( dah- Desiderative), wishing to burn View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
didhakṣāf. desire to burn View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
didhakṣumfn. desirous of burning View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
didhif. (Prob. wrong reading) firmness, stability View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
didhikṣmfn. Nominal verb dhik- ( dih- Desiderative) wishing so smear View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
didhīrṣāf. ( dhṛ- Desiderative) the wish to hold or support View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
didhiṣāyyamfn. ( dhā- Desiderative) "to be gained", to be sought to be sought (agni-) (equals dhārayitṛ-,supporter ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
didhiṣumfn. wishing to gain or obtain, striving after, seeking View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
didhiṣum. a suitor View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
didhiṣum. a husband View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
didhiṣum. the second husband of a woman twice married (also ṣū-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
didhiṣuf(u-or ū-). a widow remarried or an elder sister married after the younger (both of whom having the choice of their husbands may be compared to suitors). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
didhīṣuf. equals didiṣū- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
didhiṣūpapatim. her paramour (Cf. agre-didhiṣu-and edidhiṣuḥ- pati-.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
didhiṣūpatim. the husband of a woman so married View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diditsumfn. ready to give or sacrifice (accusative) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
didivi equals dīdivi-, the sky View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
didīvi equals dīdivi-, boiled rice View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
didṛkṣāf. ( dṛś- Desiderative) desire of seeing View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
didṛkṣāvatmfn. having a desire to see View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
didṛkṣeṇya mfn. what one likes or wishes to see, worth seeing, attractive View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
didṛkṣeyamfn. what one likes or wishes to see, worth seeing, attractive View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
didṛkṣitamfn. what one has wished to see View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
didṛkṣitan. the wish to see View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
didṛkṣitṛmfn. desirous of seeing (accusative) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
didṛkṣumfn. idem or 'mfn. desirous of seeing (accusative) ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
didṛkṣumfn. wishing to examine or try View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
didyotiṣumfn. ( dyut- Desiderative) wishing to shine View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
didyum. (2. div-,or 1. -) a missile, weapon, arrow (see aśma--) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
didyum. the sky, heaven View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
didyutmfn. shining, glittering
didyutf. an arrow, missile, thunderbolt of indra- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
didyutf. flame View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
didyutf. Name of an apsaras- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
digin compound for 2 . diś-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
digadhipam. equals dik-pati- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
digāgatamfn. come from a distant quarter View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
digambaramfn. "sky clothed" id est quite naked View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
digambaram. (also -ka-) a naked mendicant (especially of the jaina- or bauddha- sect see 1. kṣapaṇa-) etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
digambaram. Name of śiva- or skanda- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
digambaram. of a grammarian View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
digambaram. darkness View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
digambaratvan. entire nakedness View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
digambarīf. Name of durgā- (see -vastra-and -vāsas-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
digaṅganāf. equals dik-kanyā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
digantam. "the end of the horizon", remote distance
digantamfn. being in remote distance View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
digantaran. another region, a foreign country etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
digantaran. a quarter of the sky View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
digantaran. (also plural) space, the atmosphere View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
digavasthānan. air View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
digbandham. equals grahana- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
digbhāgam. equals dik-provibh- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
digbhedam. difference of direction View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
digbhramam. perplexity about points of the compass View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
digbhramam. mistaking the way or direction View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
digdāham. glowing id est preternatural redness of the horizon View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
digdaivatan. equals -devatā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
digdantinm. equals dik-karin- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
digdarśanan. the act of looking to every quarter, a general survey View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
digdarśinmfn. looking round on all sides, having a general view View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
digdeśam. a distant region or country View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
digdeśam. in gaRa region, country View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
digdevatāf. equals dik-pati- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
digdhamfn. ( dih-) smeared, anointed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
digdhamfn. soiled, defiled View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
digdhamfn. poisoned etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
digdham. a poisoned arrow (see below) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
digdham. fire View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
digdham. oil View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
digdham. a tale View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
digdhahastamfn. (a hunter) having (in his hand) or using poisoned arrows View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
digdhahastamfn. having the hands smeared or soiled View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
digdhahatamfn. hit by a poisoned arrow View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
digdhāṅgamf(ī-)n. having the limbs anointed or smeared with (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
digdhaphalan. the point of a poisoned arrow, . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
digdhasahaśayamfn. lying in mud or along with any soiled person Va1rtt. 2 View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
digdhaviddha(di-) mfn. pierced by a poisoned arrow View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diggajam. equals dik-karin- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diggrahaṇan. observing and fixing the quarters of the compass View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
digibham. equals dik-karin- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
digīśa() () m. equals dik-pati-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
digīśvara() m. equals dik-pati-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
digjayam. the conquest of various countries in all directions (see -vijaya-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
digjyāf. the azimuth cosine of a place, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diglābham. profit or gain in a distant region View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
digmaṇḍalasee, diṅ-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dignāgaSee din--. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
digvadhūf. equals -aṅganā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
digvakrasaṃsthamfn. standing apart from the right direction View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
digvalayam. n. the universe, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
digvāraṇam. equals dik-karin- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
digvasanam. a jaina- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
digvasanan. nakedness View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
digvāsasmfn. equals -ambara- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
digvāsasm. a naked mendicant View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
digvāsasm. Name of śiva- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
digvāsasm. of a grammarian View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
digvastramfn. equals -ambara- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
digvastram. Name of śiva- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
digvastram. of a grammarian (equals deva-nandin-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
digvibhāgam. quarter, point, direction View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
digvibhāvitamfn. celebrated or known in all quarters View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
digvidhānan. Name of a chapter of the View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
digvidiksthamfn. situated towards the cardinal and intermediate points, encompassing View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
digvijayam. equals dig-jaya- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
digvijayam. Name of a section of the describing the victories of yudhi-ṣṭhira- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
digvijayam. of a work by śaṃkarācārya- describing his controversial victories over various sects View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
digvijayakramam. going forth to conquer the world, invasion View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
digvilokanan. equals dik-prekṣaṇa- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
digviratif. the not passing beyond boundaries in any direction View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
digvratan. equals -virati- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
digvyāghāraṇan. sprinkling of the quarters of the sky , View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
digvyāpinmfn. spreading through all space or every quarter View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
digyātrāf. a procession in different directions , View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dih cl.2 P. A1. degdhi-, digdhe- (subjunctive -d/ehat- ; perfect tense dideha-, didihe- ; future dhekṣyati-, degdhā- ; Aorist adhikṣat-, ta-,3. plural ṣur- ; adigdka- ) to anoint, smear, plaster etc. ; increase, accumulate : Causal dehayati-, te- etc. ; Aorist adīdihat-: Desiderative didhikṣati-, te- ; dhīkṣate- (), to wish to anoint one's self: Intensive dedihyate-, dedegdhi-. ([Fr. originally dhigh-; confer, compare, , ; Latin fingo,figulus,figura; Gothic deigan,gadigis; O.E.da1h; English dough; German Teig.]) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dihSee su--. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dihlāf. Name of a woman (see dilha-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dikin compound for 2. diś-, p.480. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dikamind. gaRa di-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dikcakran. the circuit of the quarter of the compass, the horizon View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dikcakran. the compass, the whole world View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dikcakravālan. the whole range of sight, the scenery all around View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dikchabda(for śabda-) m. a word denoting a direction View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dikka in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' = diś-2. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dikkam. equals karabha- (varia lectio dhikka-and vikka-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dikkāminīf. () equals -kanyā-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dikkāntā() f. equals -kanyā-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dikkanyāf. a quarter of the sky deified as a young virgin (varia lectio kāntā-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dikkaramf(ī-)n. youthful, juvenile (literally making, id est changing quarter continually, restless) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dikkaram. a youth View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dikkaram. equals aruṇa- (as making a quarter for the sun) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dikkaram. equals sambhu- (granter of space, promoter?) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dikkaravāsinīf. a form of devī- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dikkarīf. a young woman View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dikkarikamfn. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') equals -karin- and (at, once) equals -karikā- f. the mark of a bite or of a nail View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dikkarikāf. Name of a river, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dikkarinm. "elephant of the quarter", one of the mythical elephants which stand in the four or eight quarters of the sky and support the earth View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dikkumāram. plural "the youths of the quarter", a class of deities (with jaina-s) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dikkuñjaram. equals -karin- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dikpālam. equals -pati- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dikpālastutif. (in dramatic language) praise of the guardians of the world (a kind of introductory ceremony). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dikpatham. "the path of the horizon", the surrounding region or quarter View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dikpatim. a regent or guardian of a quarter of the sky (often identified with loka-pāla- q.v) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dikpravibhāgam. a quarter, direction Scholiast or Commentator on View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dikprekṣaṇan. looking round in all directions (from fear etc.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diksādhanayantran. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diksamamfn. equals -tulya- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diksāmyan. sameness of direction View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dikṣitāvedanan. equals ta-vāda- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diksraktimfn. having the angles or corners towards the quarters of the compass Scholiast or Commentator on View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diksudṛś() f. equals -kanyā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dikśūlan. "sky-spear", any inauspicious planetary conjunction View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dikśūlan. Name of particular days on which it is not allowed to travel in certain directions View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dikśūlalakṣaṇan. Name of chapter of the View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diksundarī() f. equals -kanyā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diksvāminm. equals -pati- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diktasind. from the regions of the sky View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diktaṭam. the line of the horizon, remotest distance View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diktulyamfn. having the same direction View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diktulyatāf. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dilham. Name of a man (also -bhaṭṭāra-) (see dihlā-.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dilīpam. (fr. dilī-= modern Delhi[ see ḍilli-]+ pa-protector?) Name of certain kings (especially of an ancestor of rāma-, son of aṃśumat- and father of bhagī-ratha-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dilīram. or n. equals śilīndhraka-, a mushroom View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dimbh cl.10 A1. dimbhayate- idem or ' cl.10 A1. dimpayate-, to accumulate in ' P. ti-, to order, direct idem or ' cl.10 A1. dimpayate-, to accumulate in ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dimp cl.10 A1. dimpayate-, to accumulate in View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diin compound for 2. diś-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinamfn. ( do-) cut, divided, mowed (see svayaṃ--). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dina(3. -). See a-saṃ-- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dina(accented only ) mn.(gaRa ardharcādi-,only occurring as n.) a day etc. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' also in Vedic texts) in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' f(ā-). [ confer, compare Latin peren-dinus,nUndinusetc.; Got.sin-teins; Lit.de0na; O.Pr. accusative sg. deinan; Slavonic or Slavonian dr2ni1.] View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinabalam. "day-strength", Name of the 5th-8th, 11th and 12th signs of the zodiac collectively View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinabandhum. "day-friend", the sun View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinabhartṛm. equals -nātha- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinacaryāf. daily-work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinacchidrān. change of moon at the beginning or end of a half-day View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinacchidrān. a day View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinacchidrān. a constellation or a lunar mansion View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinādhinātha m. "day-lord", the sun View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinādhīśam. "day-lord", the sun View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
didim. daybreak, dawn View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinaduḥkhitamfn. "afflicted by day" View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinaduḥkhitam. the cakra-vāka- bird View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dināgamam. day-break View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinagaṇam. equals ahar-- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinagaṇitan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinagraham. day-planet View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinaikam. one day View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinajyotisn. daylight, sunshine View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinakaramf(ī-)n. making day or light View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinakaram. the sun etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinakaram. Name of an āditya- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinakaram. of the author of the work candrārkī- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinakaram. of a Scholiast or Commentator on (miśra-d-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinakaram. of other men View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinakarabhaṭṭam. Name of an author View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinakarabhaṭṭīyan. his work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinakaradevam. Name of a poet View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinakaratanayam. "son of the sun", the planet Saturn View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinakaraṭippanīf. Name of a commentator or commentary View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinakarātmajam. "daughter of the sun" patronymic of the yamunā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinakarīf. (scilicet ṭīkā-) Name of commentator or commentary on the and siddhānta-muktāvalī- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinakarīyan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinakaroddyotam. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinakartavyan. "day-duty", ceremonies to be performed daily View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinakartṛm. "day-maker", the sun View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinakāryan. equals -kartavya- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinakesara(also written śara-) m. "day-hair", darkness View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinakeśava m. "day-hair", darkness View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinakṛtm. equals -kartṛ- etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinakṛtsutam. equals -karatanaya- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinakṛtyan. equals -kartavya- (printed diva-k-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinakṣayam. "day-decline", evening View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinakṣayam. equals tithi-- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinakṣayam. Name of a chapter of View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinamalan. "day-refuse (?)", a month View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinamaṇim. "day-jewel", the sun View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinamaṇisārathim. the sun's charioteer, aruṇa- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinammanyāf. a full-moon night, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinamukhan. "day-face", daybreak View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinamūrdhanm. "day-head", the eastern mountain (see uday/a-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinanaktamind. by day and night View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinanātham. "day-lord", the sun View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dināṇḍan. "day-egg" (id est day-veil or day-cover) , darkness View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinaniśf. dual number day and night View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinānśa m. "day-portion", day-time View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinānśakam. "day-portion", day-time View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dināntam. "day-end", sunset, evening View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dināntakam. "day-destroyer", darkness View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinapam. the regent of a week-day View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinapākinmfn. being digested within a day View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinapatim. idem or 'm. the regent of a week-day ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinapatim. "day-lord", the sun View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinapāṭikāf. a day's wages (varia lectio) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinaprabhāf. equals -jyotis- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinapraṇīm. "day-leader", the sun (see tithi--) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinarājam. "day king", the sun View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinārambham. daybreak View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinarāśim. a term of days (see ahar-gaṇa-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinaratnan. equals -maṇi- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinārdham. "day-half", noon View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinārdham. half a day View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinārdham. half the days or time View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinasaṃcayam. equals -rāśi- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinaspriśn. a lunar day coinciding with three week-days View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dināstran. "day-missile", Name of a magical formula View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinaugham. equals dina-rāśi- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinavāram. week-day View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dināvasānan. "day-close", evening View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinavyāsadalan. "day-radius", the radius of a circle made by an asterism in its daily revolution
diṇḍior diṇḍin- m. Name of a man connected with the worship of the sun or of śiva- (he is called also gaṇa-nāyaka-or tripurāntaka-) (see ḍhuṇḍhi-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dindimam. Name of a man View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diṇḍīra varia lectio for hiṇḍīra-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diṇḍīyam. Name of a man View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dineśam. equals na-pati- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dineśātmajam. "son of the Sun", the planet Saturn View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dineśvaram. equals na-tha- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinikāf. a day's wages View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinīkṛto reduce to days View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diṅkam. the nit of a louse View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diṅmaṇḍalan. equals dikcakra- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diṅmaṇḍalan. var. (varia lectio dig-m-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diṅmārgam. a country road or a road to a distant country View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diṅmātaṅgam. equals -nāga- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diṅmātran. a mere direction or indication View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diṅmoham. equals dig-bhrama- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diṅmūḍhamfn. confused about the quarters of the compass View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diṅmūḍhamfn. anything about the direction of which one is doubtful View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diṅmukhamf(ī-)n. facing any point or quarter View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diṅmukhan. any quarter or point of the heavens View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diṅmukhan. place, spot View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diṅmukhamaṇḍalan. plural the countries all around View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diṇṇaa Prakrit form for datta- See deva--. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinnaprob. equals diṇṇa- (q.v) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diṅnāgam. equals dik-karin- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diṅnāgam. Name of a Buddhist author (varia lectio dig-n-) etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinnāgrāmam. Name of a village (see dharma--.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinnāram. () idem or 'f. (), () idem or 'm.' ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinnasūrim. Name of a man View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diṅnātham. equals dik-pati- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinodayam. daybreak, dawn View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinopavāsinmfn. fasting by day View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinv cl.1 P. dinvati-, to gladden, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dip cl.1 A1. depate- ( tip-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dipsumfn. ( dabh- Desiderative) intending to hurt or injure View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dir( dṝ-) in kalaśa-d/ir- (q.v) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dirātyayam. equals na-kṣaya- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diripakam. or n. a ball for playing with View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diś cl.3 P. d/ideṣṭi- (Imper. d/ideṣṭu- ; cl.6. diś/ati-, te-[later the only present tense stem]; perfect tense did/eśa-, didiś/e-; future dekṣyati-, te-[ deṣṭā- ]; Aorist adikṣat- etc.; adikṣi-, /adiṣṭa- ; infinitive mood deṣṭum- etc.; d/iśe- ) to point out, show, exhibit ; to produce, bring forward (as a witness in a court of justice) ; to promote, effect, accomplish ; to assign, grant, bestow upon (dative case ; genitive case ; locative case ) ; to pay (tribute) ; to order, command, bid (infinitive mood) : Passive voice diśyate- etc.: Causal deśayati-, te- ; Aorist adīdiśat-, to show, point out, assign ; to direct, order, command ; teach, communicate, tell, inform, confess : Desiderative didikṣati-, te-, to wish to show etc.: Intensive d/ediṣṭe-, 3. plural śate-, (parasmE-pada f. plural śatīs-) to show, exhibit, manifest ; to order, command : Passive voice dediśyate-, to show or approve one's self. [ confer, compare Z.dis; Greek ; Latin di1co,in-dr2careetc.; Gothic teihan; O. E.te4on(fr.ti4han).] View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diśf. quarter or region pointed at, direction, cardinal point etc. (four in number, viz. prācī-,east; dakṣiṇā-,south; pratici-,west;and udīcī-,north , dhruvā- ; and a 6th, ūrdhvā- ; and a 7th, vy-adhvā- ; but oftener 8 are given id est the 4 cardinal and the 4 intermediate quarters, S. E., S. W., N. W., and N. E. [ see upa--]; and even a 9th, and 10th, tiryak-or adhas-and ūrdhvam- ; diśām pati-[ see dik-pati-below]= soma- ,or= rudra- ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diśf. quarter, region, direction, place, part (plural,rarely eg. the whole world exempli gratia, 'for example' diśi-, diśi-,in all directions, everywhere ; digbhyas-,from every quarter ; diśo diśas-,hither and thither ; diśo'valokya-,looking into the quarter of the sky id est into the air d/iso 'ntāt-,from the extremities of the world )
diśf. country, especially foreign country, abroad (see dig-āgata-and -lābha-,below) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diśf. space (beside kāla-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diśf. the numeral 10 (see above) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diśf. a hint, reference, instance, example ; precept, order, manner ([ see O. H.G.zeiga(See also diśā-)]) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diśf. mark of a bite View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diśf. Name of a river View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diśa vulgar form for dṛś-, to see Va1rtt. 13 View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diśāf. direction, region, quarter or point of the compass (see antara--and avāntara--) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diśāf. Name of the wife of rudra-bhīma- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diśācakṣusm. "sky-vision", Name of a son of garuḍa- , View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diśāgajam. equals dik-karin- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diśamind. = diś-2 in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' (gaRa sarad-ādi-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diśānam. an instructor in sacred knowledge, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diśāpālam. equals dik-- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diśāpālam. equals dik-karin- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diśasf. region, quarter etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diṣṇumfn. equals deṣṇu- liberal. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diśo equals diśas- (genitive case of 2. diś-) in compound View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diśobhāga wrong reading for View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diśobhājmfn. one who runs away in all directions View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diśodāham. equals dig-- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diśodaṇḍam. "sky-staff", a particular appearance in the sky. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diśoyāyinmfn. spreading in all directions View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diṣṭamfn. shown, pointed out, appointed, assigned (diṣṭā gatis-,"the appointed way" id est death ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diṣṭamfn. fixed, settled View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diṣṭamfn. directed, bidden etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diṣṭam. time View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diṣṭam. a sort of Curcuma View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diṣṭam. Name of a son of manu- vaivasvata- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diṣṭan. appointed place View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diṣṭan. aim, goal View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diṣṭan. allotment, assignment, decree View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diṣṭan. fate, destiny View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diṣṭan. direction, order, command View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diṣṭan. a description according to space and time (id est of a natural phenomenon) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diṣṭabhāvam. "appointed state" id est death View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diṣṭabhujmfn. reaping the appointed results of one's works View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diṣṭadṛśmfn. looking at fate or at one's lot View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diṣṭagamanan. dying, death (confer, compare diṣṭā- gatiḥ-,), View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diṣṭakārinmfn. executing an order or acting according to fate View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diṣṭāntam. "appointed end" id est death View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diṣṭaparamfn. relying on fate, fatalist View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diṣṭif. direction, prescription, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diṣṭif. auspicious juncture, good fortune, happiness (especially instrumental case ṭyā-,thank heaven! I congratulate you on your good luck! often with vardhase-,you are fortunate) etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diṣṭif. a kind of measure of length on View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diṣṭivṛddhif. congratulation View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diśyamfn. relating to the quarters of the sky or to the horizon, being there View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diśyamfn. relating to space View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diśyamfn. foreign, outlandish View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diśyāf. Name of a kind of brick View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ditamfn. (3. -) bound (see ud--, ni--, saṃ--). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ditamfn. ( do- ) cut, torn, divided (see nir--). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ditif. Name of a deity answering to a-diti- (q.v) as sura- to a-sura- and without any distinct character View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ditif. in Epic daughter of dakṣa- and wife of kaśyapa- and mother of the daitya-s (See sub voce, i.e. the word in the Sanskrit order) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ditif. (the marut-s are also described as her progeny or derived from the embryo in her womb divided into pieces by indra-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ditif. see View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ditif. cutting, splitting, dividing View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ditif. distributing, liberality (also personified see 1. d/iti-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ditim. Name of a king View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ditim. a king View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ditijam. son of daitya-s, a daitya- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ditijārātim. enemy of the daitya-s, Name of viṣṇu- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ditinandanam. equals -ja- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ditisutam. idem or 'm. equals -ja- ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ditisutagurum. the planet Venus View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dititanayam. equals -ja- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ditsāf. (1. - Desiderative) desire or intention of giving View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ditsitamfn. wished to be given View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ditsumfn. wishing to give or grant or perform (accusative) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ditsyamfn. what one is willing to give , View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dityam. a son of diti- (wrong reading for daitya-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dityauhīf. See above. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dityavahm. (in strong cases vāh- Nominal verb vāṭ-; instrumental case dityauhā-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dityavahf. tyauhī- ( ) a two-year-old steer or cow (Prob. from ditya- equals dvitīya-+ vah- see turya-vah-.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
div cl.1 P. -devati- cl.10. P. -deyavati-, to cause to lament, to pain, vex ; to ask, beg ; to go ; A1. te-, to suffer pain View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
div cl.4. d/īvyati-, te- etc. (perf. did/eva- ; future deviṣyati-;cond, adeviṣyat- ; Aorist adevīt- ;etc.; infinitive mood devitum- etc.; ind.p. devitvā- ; -dīvya- ) to cast, throw, especially dice id est play, gamble (akṣais- ; akṣān- ), with (instrumental case ), for (instrumental case, ; accusative ; dative case ; genitive case [ śatasya-] ) ; to lay a wager, bet with (rdham-), upon (dative case) ; to play, sport, joke, trifle with (accusative ) ; to have free scope, spread, increase ( vardhati-) ; to shine, be bright [ Zend di1v;(?) Lit. dyvas-] ; to praise, rejoice, be drunk or mad ; to sleep ; to wish for ; to go : Causal devayati-, to cause to play (Scholiast or Commentator) or to sport : Desiderative dideviṣati- and dudyūṣati- : Causal of Desiderative dudyūṣayati-, to incite to play : Intensive dedivīti-, dedyeti-, dedeti- etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
div, dy/u- m. (Nominal verb dy/aus-; vocative case dyaus-[ ]; accusative dy/ām- d/ivam-; instrumental case div/ā-or d/īvā-[see below]; dative case dive-[ dyave- ]; ablative genitive case div/as-[rarely dy/os- exempli gratia, 'for example' ]; locative case div/i-, dy/avi-; dual number dyāvā- sub voce, i.e. the word in the Sanskrit order [ dy/avī-as vocative case only ]; plural Nominal verb dy/āvas-[ divas-only ]; accusative dy/ūn-[rare, d/ivas-, div/as- exempli gratia, 'for example' ]; instrumental case dy/ubhis-;native grammarians give as stems div-and dyo-;the latter is declined through all cases like go-,but really does not occur except in forms mentioned above and in dyo-salila- , while div-and dyu-regularly alternate before vowel and consonant) (rarely f.) in Vedic or Veda f. in later Skr. heaven, the sky (regarded in Vedic or Veda as rising in three tiers[ avama-, madhyama-, uttama-or tṛtīya- ] , and generally as the father(dy/auṣ- pit/ā-,while the earth is the mother[ see dyāvā-pṛthivī-],and uṣas- the daughter) , rarely as a goddess, daughter of prajā-pati- )
divan. heaven, sky View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divan. day, especially in div/e-dive-, day by day, daily and in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' (gaRa śaradādi-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divan. wood [ confer, compare /ahar--, tri--, naktaṃ--, naktaṃ-- bṛhad--. rātrim--, su--; confer, compare also Fo in Latin (?)biduum.] View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diind. (for div/ā-,instr. of 3. d/iv-) gaRa svarādi-, by day (often opposed to n/aktam-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diind. used also as substantive exempli gratia, 'for example' divā bhavati- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diind. (with rātris-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diind. especially in beginning of compound View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divābhītamfn. timid by day View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divābhītam. an owl , a thief View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divābhītam. a flower closing itself by day View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divābhītif. "having fear by day", an owl View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divābhūtamfn. turned into day, become bright (night) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divācaramfn. going by day View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divācārinmfn. idem or 'mfn. going by day ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divadarśam. plural Name of a school of View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
didiSee under divā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
didi(di-or d/i-?) m. beginning of day, morning View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divāgaṇam. equals ahar-- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divaḥśyenīf. Name of particular sacrifices, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divākaram. "day-maker", the sun etc. (with niśā--among the sons of garuḍa- ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divākaram. a crow (see divāṭana-,below) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divākaram. Calotropis Gigantea (see ark/a-)
divākaram. Name of an āditya- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divākaram. of a rakṣas- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divākaram. of a prince (equals divārka- ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divākaram. of the founder of the sūrya-bhakta- sect View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divākaram. of other men (also -bhaṭṭa-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divākaramitram. Name of a man View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divākarasutam. "son of the sun", the planet Saturn View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divākarasutāf. "daughter of the sun", Name of the river yamunā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divākaravaralocanam. a particular samādhi- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divākaravatsam. Name of an author View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divākaroddyotam. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divākīrtim. (or āk-) a caṇḍāla- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divākīrtim. a barber View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divākīrtim. an owl View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divākīrtyamfn. to be recited by day View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divākīrtyan. Name of particular recitations View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divākīrtyan. (a day) having such a recited View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divākīrtyam. a caṇḍāla- (in antar-di- additions) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divākṛtamfn. done by day View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divakṣas(v/a--) mfn. living in heaven, heavenly View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divāmadhyan. midday, noon View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divāmaithuninmfn. cohabiting by day View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divāmaṇim. "day-jewel", the sun View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divāmanyamfn. passing for day, appearing as day (night) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divaṃgamamfn. going or leading to heaven (?fr. divam- accusative of3. div + going) . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divanm. a day (see prati--). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divānaktamind. adverb (older d/ivā n/aktam-) by day and night View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divānaktamind. (as a substantive form) day and night View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divāndhamfn. blind by day View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divāndham. an owl View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divāndhāf. a kind of bird (equals valgulā-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divāndhakīf. the musk-rat View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divānidrāf. sleeping by day. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divāniśamind. day and night , View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divāpatim. "day-lord", Name of the 13th month View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divāpradīpam. "day-lamp" id est an obscure man View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divāpuṣṭam. "day-nourished", the sun View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divaratha wrong reading for divi-- (q.v) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divārātramind. equals -niśam- etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divārātramind. as a substantive day and night View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divārkaSee under divā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divārka(r-?) m. Name of a prince (of. diva-kara-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divas genitive case of 3. d/iv- in compound View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divasam. (or n. gaRa ardharcādi- ) heaven View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divasam. a day [ confer, compare in , for .] View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divasabhartṛm. "day-lord", the sun View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divasacaramfn. "day-walking"(opp. to niśā-cara-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divasacchidran. equals dina-- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divasakaram. "day-maker", the sun View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divasakriyāf. the religious performances of the day View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divasakṛtm. idem or 'm. "day-maker", the sun ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divasakṣayamfn. "day-end", evening View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divāsaṃcaramfn. equals -cara- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divāsaṃketam. appointment (of lovers) by day View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divasamudrāf. "day's coin", a day's wages View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divasamukhan. "day-face", daybreak, dawn View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divasanātha m. "day-lord", the sun View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divasanirīkṣakam. a kind of ascetic View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divasāntaramfn. only one day old View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divasatithithe day-part of a lunar day View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divasātyayam. the passing away of day, evening View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divasavāram. week-day View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divasāvasānan. "day-close", evening View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divasavigamam. the departure of the day View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divasavyāpāram. day-work (washing etc.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divāśayamfn. sleeping by day View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divāśayatāf. sleep by day View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divāśayyāf. idem or 'f. sleep by day ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divaseśvaram. "day-lord", the sun View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divasīkṛto convert the night into day View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divaspatim. "sky-lord", Name of indra-, nahuṣa- and viṣṇu- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divaspatim. of the indra- of the 13th manv-antara- , View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divaspṛśmfn. (Nominal verb spṛk-) heaven-touching View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divaspṛthivyauf. dual number heaven and earth (genitive case div/as-pṛthivy/os- ; see dyāvā-pṛthivyau-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divastambhanamf(ī-)n. sky-supporting, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divāsthānamfn. standing during the day, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divāsuptamfn. asleep by day View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divāsvāpam. idem or 'm. (n. only ) sleep by day ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divāsvāpamfn. sleeping by day, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divāsvāpaf. a kind of night-bird (= valgulā-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divāsvapanan. sleeping by day View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divāsvapnam. (n. only ) sleep by day View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divātana(t-) mfn. idem or 'mfn. idem or 'mfn. going by day ' ' m. a crow View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divātanam. a crow View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divātanamf(ī-)n. () daily, diurnal View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divātara(d/i-) mfn. idem or 'mf(ī-)n. () daily, diurnal ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divātithiSee under divā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divātithi(t-) m. a guest coming in the day-time View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divaukaḥpatim. Name of indra- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divaukasm. "sky-dweller", a deity etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divaukasm. planet View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divaukasm. the cātaka- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divaukasm. a deer View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divaukasm. a bee View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divaukasm. an elephant View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divaukasam. (equals kas-) a god View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divaukasam. Name of a yakṣa- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divāvasāna= (and prob. wrong reading for) dināv- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divāvasumfn. beautiful by day (?) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divāvihāram. rest by day View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divim. the blue jay (equals kikīdiv/i-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divi locative case of 3. d/iv- in compound View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dif. a species of insect (equals upa-jihvikā-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divicara(div/i--) mfn. moving in the sky (as a planet) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divicārinmfn. idem or '(div/i--) mfn. moving in the sky (as a planet) ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divicārinm. an inhabitant of the sky View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dividhuvaka Name (also title or epithet) of a tree, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divigamanam. "sky-traveller", a planet, star View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divigamanaratnan. "star-jewel", the sun View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divigatamfn. being in heaven View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divigatam. a god View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divijamfn. () heaven-born, celestial View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divijam. a god View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divijāmfn. "sky-born" View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divijātamfn. idem or 'mfn. "sky-born" ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divijātam. Name of a son of purū-ravas- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divikṣayamfn. heaven-dwelling View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divikṣitmfn. idem or 'mfn. heaven-dwelling ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diviram. a husband's brother (equals devara-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diviram. chief clerk or secretary (also -pati-) Scholiast or Commentator View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divirakiśoram. Name of a poetry or poetic View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diviratham. Name of several men (varia lectio diva--) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divīśam. lord in lord in heaven plural Name of the āditya-s, vasu- and rudra- (For other compound See under div/as-, divā-,2. div/i-, divo-3. dy/u-.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divīśaSee div-īsa- under 3. d/iv-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diviṣadmfn. sitting or dwelling in heaven View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diviṣadm. a god View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divisadand equals -ṣ/ad- and -ṣṭha-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diviṣadadhvanm. the gods' path, atmosphere, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divispṛśmfn. heaven-touching View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divispṛśatmfn. idem or 'mfn. heaven-touching ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diviśritmfn. going to heaven View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diviṣṭambhamfn. resting on the sky View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diviṣṭhamfn. dwelling in heaven, celestial View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diviṣṭi(d/iv--.) f. longing for heaven, devotion, worship, sacrifice (generally locative case plural) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divitmfn. going to the sky View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divitmatmfn. going in or to the sky, heavenly View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divitmatāind. instrumental case heavenwards View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diviyajmfn. praying to heaven View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diviyoni(div/i--) mfn. sky-born (agni-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divoin compound for vas-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divodāsam. (di-) "heaven's slave", Name of bharad-vāja- (celebrated for his liberality and protected by indra- and the aśvin-s ;the son of vādhry-aśva- ;his father is also called bhadra-sva-, bahv-aśva- etc., and his son mitra-yu- or mitrā-yu- )
divodāsam. of the father of su-dās-
divodāsam. of a king of kāśi- surnamed dhanvantari-, founder of the Indian school of medicine
divodāsam. of the father of pra-tardana-
divodāsam. of a descendant of bhīma-sena-
divodāseśvaraliṅgan. Name of a liṅga-
divodāsopākhyānan. "the episode of dhanvantari-"in
divodbhavamfn. "sky-born" View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divodbhavaf. cardamoms View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divoduhmfn. milking from the sky (varia lectio) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divojāmfn. born or descended from heaven (uṣas-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divokasm. (see vau-,) a god or the cātaka- bird View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divolkāf. "sky-firebrand", a meteor (see vyo-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divorucmfn. shining from heaven View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyaNom. P. yati-, to long for heaven View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyamfn. (d/ivya- ) divine, heavenly, celestial (opp. to pārthiva-, āntarīkṣa-or mānuṣa-) etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyamfn. supernatural, wonderful, magical (aṅgāra- ; auṣadha- ; vāsas- ; see -cakṣus-, -jñāna-etc. below) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyamfn. charming, beautiful, agreeable etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyam. a kind of animal (equals dhanvana-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyam. barley View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyam. bdellium View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyam. Name of a prince View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyam. of the author of View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyāf. Name of plants (equals harītakī-, bandhyā-, karkoṭahī-, śatāvarī-, mahā-medā-etc.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyāf. a kind of perfume equals surā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyāf. Name of a deity View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyāf. of an apsaras- Scholiast or Commentator View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyan. the divine world or anything divine View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyan. plural the celestial regions, the sky, heaven View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyan. an ordeal (10 kinds, viz. tulā-, agni-, jala-, viṣa-, kośa-, taṇḍula-, tapta-māṣa-, phāla-, dharmādharma-, tulasī- see ss.vv.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyan. oath, solemn promise cloves View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyan. a sort of sandal View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyan. Name of a grammar, [ confer, compare Greek for ; Latin di1usfordiviusinsub@dIo.] View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyacakṣusn. a divine eye, supernatural vision View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyacakṣusmfn. having a divine eye View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyacakṣusmfn. fair-eyed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyacakṣusmfn. having (only) the divine eye, (in other respects) blind View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyacakṣusm. a monkey View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyacakṣusm. a kind of perfume View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyadarśanamfn. of a divine aspect View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyadarśinmfn. having a divine vision View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyadeham. a divine body View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyadevīf. Name of a goddess View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyadharminmfn. "having a divine nature", virtuous, agreeable View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyādivyamfn. divine and not divine (id est partly divine partly human) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyādivyāf. the heroine of a poem (as sītā- etc.) of mixed origin or character, a goddess
divyadohadan. divine desire, the object of a deity's desire View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyadohadamfn. fit for an offering or oblation View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyadṛśmfn. seeing divine things View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyadṛśm. an astrologer View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyadṛṣṭif. equals -cakṣus- n. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyagandham. "having a divine odour", sulphur View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyagandhāf. large cardamoms View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyagandhāf. a kind of vegetable (equals mahā-cañcu-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyagandhan. cloves View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyagāyanam. "divine songster", a gandharva- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyajñānan. divine knowledge View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyajñānamfn. possessing it View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyakam. a kind of serpent View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyakam. another kind of animal (equals divya-, dhanvana-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyakālinīf. a kind of non poisonous snake, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyakānanan. celestial grove View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyakānanadarśanamfn. in aspect like to it View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyakārinmfn. undergoing an ordeal, taking an oath , View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyakaṭan. Name of a town View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyakriyāf. the application of an ordeal View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyākṛtimfn. of divine form, very beautiful View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyakuṇḍan. Name of a lake View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyalatāf. "the divine creeper", Sanseviera Zeylanica (equals mūrvā-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyamānan. measuring time according to the days and years of the gods View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyamantram. "the divine syllable", Om, 20. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyamānuṣam. "divine man", demi-god View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyāṃśum. "having divine rays", the sun View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyanadīf. a divine stream View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyanārīf. a divine female, an apsaras- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyāṅganāf. equals vya-strī- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyapañcāmṛtan. "the five divine ambrosias", viz. ghee, milk, coagulated milk, honey, and sugar View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyapāṭalam. "having a divine pale-red colour", Name of a plant View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyaprabhāvamfn. having celestial power View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyaprajñānan. equals -jñāna- n. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyaprajñānaṣālinmfn. = idem or 'n. equals -jñāna- n.' mfn. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyapraśnam. inquiring into divine phenomena, augury View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyapuruṣam. "a divine man", ghost View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyapuṣpam. Nerium Odorum View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyapuṣpāf. a kind of plant View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyapuṣpikāf. a kind of Calotropis View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyarasam. "divine fluid", quicksilver View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyarasendrasāram. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyaratham. "divine car", vehicle of the gods View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyaratnan. "divine gem", the fabulous gem cintā-maṇi- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyarūpa mfn. of a divine aspect, beautiful, handsome View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyarūpinmfn. of a divine aspect, beautiful, handsome View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyasaṃgraham. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyasaṃkāśamfn. having a divine appearance View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyasānum. "divine eminence", Name of one of the viśve- devā-s View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyasāram. "having divine juice or resin", Thorea Robusta View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyasraganulepinmfn. adorned with divine garlands and unguents View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyaśrotran. "a divine ear"(which hears everything) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyastrīf. a divine female, an apsaras- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyasūrim. Name of a man View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyasūricaritan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyasūriprabhāvadīpikāf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyatāf. divinity, divine nature View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyatattvan. "divine truth", Name of a work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyatejasn. a kind of plant View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyatumbīf. a kind of plant View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyatvan. equals -ta- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyaugham. plural "the divine hosts", forms of śiva- and durgā- (with the śākta-s) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyauṣadhan. heavenly herbs or medicine, a magical potion View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyauṣadhif. red arsenic View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyāvadānan. "divine achievements", Name of a well-known Buddhist work from Nepal (written in Sanskrit). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyavākyan. a divine voice. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyavarmabhṛtmfn. wearing divine armour View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyavastram. "divinely dressed", a kind of flower (equals sūryaśobhā-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyavijñānavatmfn. equals -jñana- mfn. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyayamunāf. "the divine Jamna", Name of a river in kāma-rūpa-, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyelakam. a kind of serpent (equals devyaka-?). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyodakan. "divine water" id est rainwater View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyonmādam. Name (also title or epithet) of a modern drama. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divyopapādukamf(ī-)n. divinely born, celestial, supernatural View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diyamfn. deserving of gifts (equals deya-,or dānārha-, durga- on ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diyan. (prob.) a gift View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diyan. diy/ānām p/ati- lord of gifts, a very liberal man. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ābdikamfn. annual, yearly View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
abdimatmfn. possessed of clouds (abdi- equals abda-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
abhedinmfn. not different View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
abhidadiSee abhi-- 1. -.
abhidadim. an oblation of boiled rice (caru-) upon which ghee has been sprinkled View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
abhidigdhamfn. polished, glazed (in the fire, t/apasā-) id est sharp View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
abhidihto wrap up, envelop in View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
abhidipsumfn. (dips- Desiderative of dambh-),"wishing to deceive", inimical, cunning View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
abhidiśto point out View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
abhimardinmfn. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') oppressing View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
abhimardinmfn. one who devastates. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
abhinandinmfn. rejoicing at, wishing, desiring (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
abhinanditamfn. delighted, made happy, saluted, applauded, etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
abhinanditṛmfn. gladdening View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
abhinirdiśto point out, indicate etc. ; to appoint, characterize ; to settle, fix View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
abhipradiśCaus. -deśayati-, to urge on View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
abhiruditamfn. cried, uttered in a lamenting manner View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
abhiśabditamfn. announced, mentioned View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
abhiśabditamfn. named View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
abhiṣyandi n. a smaller city appended to a larger one, suburb View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
abhiṣyandin mfn. oozing, trickling View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
abhiṣyandinmfn. laxative View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
abhiṣyandinmfn. causing defluxions or serious effusions View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
abhiṣyandinsyandinmfn. oozing, trickling View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
abhiṣyandinsyandinmfn. laxative View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
abhiṣyandinsyandinmfn. causing defluxions or serious effusions View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
abhisyandiramaṇan. a smaller city appended to a larger one, suburb View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
abhivādinmfn. telling, enunciating, describing View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
abhivādinm. an explainer, interpreter View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
abhivāditamfn. saluted respectfully. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
abhyādiś(Intensive p. -d/ediśāna-) to aim at (in hostile manner) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
abhyarditamfn. (fr. Causal) distressed, oppressed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
abhyuddiśto point at anything above with reference to View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
abhyudi(2. sg. -eṣi-;Imper. 2. sg. -/ud-ihi-; Potential -iyāt-[ ], -īyāt-[ ]; future -ud-ayiṣyati- ), (said of the sun) to rise over (accusative), rise etc. ; to engage in combat with (accusative) (Potential -īyāt-See before) ; to finish off at (accusative) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
abhyuditamfn. risen (as the sun or luminaries) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
abhyuditamfn. one over whom (while sleeping) the sun has risen commentator or commentary on View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
abhyuditamfn. engaged in combat View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
abhyuditamfn. arisen, happened View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
abhyuditamfn. elevated, prosperous View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
abhyuditan. (said of the sun or the moon) rising (during some other occurrence) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
abhyudif. Name of the ceremony (to be performed at the abhy/udita-), View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
abhyuditamfn. ( vad-), expressed (in words), (an-- negative) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
abhyuditamfn. See abhi-vad-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
abhyuditaśāyitāf. the state of lying asleep while the sun has risen View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
abhyuditeṣṭif. equals abhyudayeṣṭi-, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
abhyūṣakhādif. "eating of abhyūṣa--grains", Name of a play View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ācchādinmfn. in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' covering, concealing
ācchāditamfn. covered etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ācchāditamfn. clothed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
acchedikamfn. not fit or needing to be cut View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ācitādia gaRa of View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādadiSee View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādadimfn. procuring , obtaining, recovering View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
adādimfn. belonging to the second class of roots called ad-, etc. see View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādādikamfn. belonging to the gaRa ad-ādi- of the dhātupāṭha-, or to the second class of roots of which the first is ad-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādardiraSee ā-dṝ-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādardiramfn. crushing, splitting View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
adhastāddiśf. the lower region, the nadir. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
adhidinan. an intercalated day. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
adhidiś(Aorist subjunctive A1.3 sg. -didiṣṭa-) to bestow View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
adhikadinan. a redundant id est an intercalated day (see adhi-dina-.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
adhodiśf. the lower region, the nadir. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āḍhyapadiind., (gaRa dvidaṇḍy-ādi- q.v) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
adhyāpakoditam. styled a teacher. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādim. beginning, commencement View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādim. a firstling, first-fruits View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādim. in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' beginning with, et caetera, and so on (exempli gratia, 'for example' indrādayaḥ surāḥ-,the gods beginning with indra- id est indra- etc.; gṛhādiyukta-,possessed of houses etc.; evamādīni vastūni-,such things and others of the same kind: śayyā khaṭvādih-[Comm. on ], śayyā- means a bed etc.;often with -ka-at the end exempli gratia, 'for example' dānadharmādikam-[ ],liberality, justice, etc.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādithe third part in the 7-partite sāman-, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādimfn. beginning with ā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādibalan. "the primal vigour", generative power View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādibharataprastāram. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādibhavamfn. "being at first" View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādibhavānīf. the śakti- of parama-puruṣa-, W. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādibhūtamfn. being the first of (genitive case) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādibuddhamfn. "perceived in the beginning" View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādibuddham. Name of the chief deity of the northern Buddhists. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādidaityam. Name of hiraṇyakaśipu- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādidevam. "the first god" View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādidevam. Name of brahman-, viṣṇu-, śiva-, gaṇeśa-, the sun. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādīdiSee ā-- 2. -. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādidīpam. Name (also title or epithet) of a rudra-, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādidīpakan. Name of a figure in rhetoric (the verb standing at the beginning of the sentence) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādigadādharam. "the first club-bearer", Name of an image of viṣṇu- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādigdhaSee under ā-dih-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādigdhamfn. in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' besmeared, anointed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādigrantham. Name (also title or epithet) of the first division or principal section of the sacred book of the Sikhs, IW, 325, note 1 View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādigurum. `first father', Name (also title or epithet) of brahmā-, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādihonly past participle View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādijinam. Name of ṛṣabha- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādikālam. primitive time View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādikālīnamfn. belonging to primitive time. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādikāṇḍan. "first part", Name of the first book of the rāmāyaṇa-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādikaram. the first maker, the creator View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādikaram. Name of brahman- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādikāraṇan. a primary cause View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādikāraṇan. analysis, algebra. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādikarmann. the beginning of an action (in grammar)
ādikarṇīf. a species of plant View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādikartṛm. (see -kara-) the creator View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādikavim. "the first poet" View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādikavim. Name of brahman- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādikavim. of vālmīki- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādikāvyan. "the first poem", Name of the rāmāyaṇa-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādikeśavam. "the first long-haired one", Name of viṣṇu- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādikeśavāṣṭakan. Name (also title or epithet) of a stotra- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
adikkamfn. having no share in the horizon, banished from beneath the sky View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādikṛt(equals -kartṛ- q.v) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādiluptamfn. (a word) having the first letter cut off View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādimamf(ā-)n. first, prior, primitive, original View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādimatmfn. having a beginning etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādimattvan. the state of having a beginning View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādimatvan. the state of being first, etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādimūlan. primitive cause. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādin( ad-) mfn. in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' eating, devouring View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādināntamind. till the close of day, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādinātham. Name of ādibuddha- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādinātham. of a jina- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādinātham. of an author. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādinavan. (probably) misfortune, want of luck in dice (see ādīnava-.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādinavadarśamfn. having in view (another's) misfortune View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āḍindif. clean shaving of the whole body, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādiparvann. "the first book", Name of the first book of the mahābhārata-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādiparvatam. a principal mountain View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādipitāmaham. Name (also title or epithet) of brahmā-, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādiplutamfn. (a word) whose first vowel is prolated, grammar View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
adiprabhṛti equals ad-ādi- See ad-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
adipsatmfn. not wishing to injure, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādipurāṇan. "the primitive purāṇa-", Name of the brahma-purāṇa- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādipurānan. of a jaina- religious, book. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādipuruṣa m. "first man", Name of hiraṇyakaśipu- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādipuruṣam. of viṣṇu- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādipuruṣam. of brahman- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādipūruṣam. "first man", Name of hiraṇyakaśipu- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādipūruṣam. of viṣṇu- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādipūruṣam. of brahman- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādirājam. ([ ])"first king" , Name of manu- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādirājam. of pṛthu- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādirasaślokam. plural "stanzas illustrating the chief sentiment", Name of a poem supposed to be written by kālidāsa-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādirūpan. "first appearance", symptom (of disease). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādiśP. -did/eṣṭi- ([ subjunctive 3. sg. -dideśati- ]), -diś/ati- ([3. plural -diśanti- imperative 2. sg. -diśa- imperfect tense 1. sg. ādiśam-,etc.]) , rarely -diśate- ([ ]) infinitive mood -d/iśe- ([ ]) and -deṣṭum- (Aorist 3. sg. ādikṣat-[ See ] future 1. plural -dekṣyāmaḥ-, perf. -dideśa-) to aim at, have in view ; to threaten ; to hit ; to assign etc. ; to point out, indicate ; to report, announce, teach etc. ; to determine, specify, denominate etc. ; to declare, foretell, etc. ; to order, direct, command etc. ; to refer any one to (locative case) ; to banish etc. ; to undertake, try ; to profess as one's aim or duty : Causal -deśayati-, to show, indicate, announce, : Intensive (parasmE-pada -d/ediśāna-) to have in view, aim at (accusative)
ādiśf. aiming at, design, intention View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādiśf. Name of a particular direction or point of the compass (enumerated with diś-, pra-, vi-,and ud-) (see infinitive mood ā-d/iśe-= dative case) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādiśābdika([ ]) m. an old grammarian. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādiśaktif. the primeval power, Name of māyā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādisargam. primitive creation View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādisargam. see View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādiśarīran. the primitive body View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādiśarīran. (in philosophy equals sūkṣma- ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādisiṃham. Name (also title or epithet) of a king, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādiṣṭamfn. directed, assigned View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādiṣṭamfn. announced View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādiṣṭamfn. mentioned View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādiṣṭamfn. enjoined, ordered, advised View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādiṣṭan. command, order, instruction commentator or commentary on View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādiṣṭan. Name of a particular kind of treaty (in making peace) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādiṣṭan. fragments or leavings of a meal View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādisthāyikasee sthāyika- (parasmE-pada 1264) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādiṣṭinm. one who receives (religious) instruction, a student, Brahman in the first order of his life View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādiṣṭinm. one who gives instruction View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādiśūram. Name (also title or epithet) of a king of Bengal (also called A1di7s3vara), n. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādisūram. Name of a prince. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādisvaritamfn. having the Svarita accent on the first syllable, VPra1t., Scholiast or Commentator View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādiśya ind.p. aiming at View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādiśyaannouncing, teaching View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādiśyahaving said View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādif. the being the beginning of anything, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āditālam. a kind of measure (in music). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āditasind. from the beginning, from the first, at first, at the head of (with1. kṛ-,to put at the beginning on ; in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' beginning with). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āditeyam. "son of aditi-", the sun View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āditeyam. a god, deity View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aditif. having nothing to give, destitution View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aditif. for 2. aditi-, 3. /a-diti- See below. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aditim. ( ad-), devourer id est death View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aditimfn. (4. -or do-, dyati-;for 1. /a-diti-See above) , not tied, free , boundless, unbroken, entire, unimpaired, happy View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aditif. freedom, security, safety View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aditif. boundlessness, immensity, inexhaustible abundance, unimpaired condition, perfection, creative power, Name of one of the most ancient of the Indian goddesses ("Infinity"or the"Eternal and Infinite Expanse" , often mentioned in ,daughter of dakṣa- and wife of kaśyapa-, mother of the āditya-s and of the gods) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aditif. a cow, milk View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aditif. the earth View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aditif. speech (see ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aditif. dual number heaven and earth View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aditijam. a son of aditi-, an āditya-, a divine being. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aditikuṇḍalāharaṇan. Name (also title or epithet) of a nāṭaka- by kādamba-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aditinandanam. equals -ja- q.v View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
adititvan. the condition of aditi-, or of freedom, unbrokenness View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
adititvan. the state of the goddess aditi- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āditsāf. (fr. Desiderative) the wish to take. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āditsā ā-ditsu- See under ā-- 1. -, . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aditsat([ ]) or a-ditsu- mfn. (Desiderative fr.1. -), not inclined to give. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āditsumfn. (fr. idem or 'f. (fr. Desiderative) the wish to take.') wishing to take or obtain View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āditsumfn. greedy of gain View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āditvan. priority, precedence. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādityamfn. () belonging to or coming from aditi- etc.
ādityam. "son of aditi-" View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādityam. plural Name of seven deities of the heavenly sphere (the chief is varuṇa-,to whom the N. āditya- is especially applicable;the succeeding five are mitra-, aryaman-, bhaga-, dakṣa-, aṃśa-;that of the seventh is probably sūrya- or savitṛ-;as a class of deities they are distinct from the viśve devāḥ- ;sometimes their number is supposed to be eight ;and in the period of the brāhmaṇa-s twelve, as representing the sun in the twelve months of the year ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādityam. Name of a god in general, especially of sūrya- (the sun) etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādityam. Name of viṣṇu- in his vāmana- or dwarf avatāra- (as son of kaśyapa- and aditi-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādityam. the plant Calotropis Gigantea View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādityam. dual number (au-) Name of a constellation, the seventh lunar mansion View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādityāf. (?) the sun View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādityan. equals au- (see punar-vasu-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādityan. Name of a sāman- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādityamfn. () relating or belonging to or coming from the āditya-s View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādityamfn. relating to the god of the sun. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādityabandhum. "the sun's friend", Name of śākyamuni-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādityabhaktāf. equals -parṇikā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādityacandraum. dual number sun and moon. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādityācāryam. Name of an author. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādityadarśanan. "showing the sun"(to a child of four months), one of the rites called saṃskāra- q.v View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādityadāsam. Name of a man. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādityadevam. idem or 'm. Name of a man.' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādityadevata(ādity/a--) mfn. one whose (special) deity is the sun View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādityadhāman(ty/a-), mfn. having a place among the āditya-s, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādityagarbham. Name of a bodhisattva- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādityagatamfn. being in the sun, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādityagatif. course of the sun View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādityagraham. a particular ladle-full of soma- in the evening-oblation View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādityahṛdayan. Name of a stotra-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādityajūta(ādity/a--), (fr. -) mfn. urged by the āditya-s View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādityajyotis(ādity/a--) mfn. having the light of the sun View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādityakāntāf. Polanisia Icosandra (a creeping plant with gold-coloured flowers, growing near the water) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādityakeśavam. Name of an image of viṣṇu-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādityaketum. Name of a son of dhṛta-rāṣṭra- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādityakīlakam. a particular phenomenon in the sky, , Scholiast or Commentator View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādityalokam. plural the sun's worlds View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādityamaṇḍalan. the disc or orb of the sun View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādityanāmann. Name of the sun View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādityānuvartinmfn. following the sun View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādityapākamfn. boiled in the sun. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādityaparṇikāf. ([ ]) Polanisia Icosandra. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādityaparṇinm. ([ ]) Polanisia Icosandra. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādityaparṇinīf. ([ ]) Polanisia Icosandra. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādityapātran. a vessel for drawing off the āditya-grah/a- (q.v) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādityapattram. Calotropis Gigantea View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādityaprabham. "having the splendour of the sun", Name of a king View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādityapurāṇan. Name of an upapurāṇa-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādityapuṣpikāf. equals -pattra- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādityarāmam. Name (also title or epithet) of a king, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādityaśaktim. Name (also title or epithet) of a chief, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādityasaṃvatsaram. a solar year. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādityaśayanan. the sun's sleep View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādityaśayanavratan. a particular vow or religious observance. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādityasenam. Name of a prince View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādityasthālīf. a receptacle from which the āditya-grah/a- is drawn View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādityastotran. Name of a stotra-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādityasūktan. a particular hymn. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādityasūnum. "the sun's son", Name of sugrīva- (the monkey king), of yama-, of manu-, etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādityasvāminm. Name of a man. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādityatejasm. or f. Polanisia Icosandra View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādityatīrthan. Name of a tīrtha-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādityatvan. the state of being the sun View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādityavallabhāf. equals -parṇikā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādityavanimfn. winning (the favour of) the āditya-s View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādityavāram. Sunday, n. 1 View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādityavardhanam. Name (also title or epithet) of a Kanouj king, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādityavarmanm. "having the sun (the āditya-s?) as protector", Name of a king View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādityavarṇamfn. having the sun's colour View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādityavarṇam. Name of a man. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādityavatind. like the sun View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādityavat(ādity/a--) mfn. surrounded by the āditya-s View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādityavidhim. Name (also title or epithet) of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādityavratan. "a vow or rite relating to the sun" View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādityavratan. Name of a sāman-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādityavratikamfn. performing the above rite on View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādityayaśasm. Name of a man. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
adi(in compound) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādivaktṛm. the first propounder of a doctrine, , Introduction View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādivaṃśam. primeval race, primitive family View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādivarāham. "the first boar", Name of viṣṇu- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādivarāham. Name of a poetry or poetic View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādivārāhamfn. relating to the first boar View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādivarāham. Name (also title or epithet) of bhoja- (Kanouj king), View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādivārāhatīrthan. Name of a tīrtha-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
adivāśinnot eating by day, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
adivāsvāpinnot sleeping by day, ibidem or 'in the same place or book or text' as the preceding View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādivipulāf. Name of an āryā- metre. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādiyāmalan. Name (also title or epithet) of a tantra- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādiyogācāryam. "first teacher of yoga-", Name of śiva-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
adrinandif. Name of pārvatī-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
advaitavadinm. (also) Name (also title or epithet) of śaṃkara-, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
advaitavadinof buddha-, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
advaitavādinm. one who asserts the doctrine of non-duality. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
advayavādinm. one who teaches advaya-, or identity, a buddha-, a jaina-, (see advaita-vadin-.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ādyādim. Name of a gaṇa- on View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
adyadina m. n. the present day. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
adyadivasam. n. the present day. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
agaditamfn. untold View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
agaditamfn. untold, unasked, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āgatanandin([or -gata-nardin- ]) mfn. (gaRa yuktārohy-ādi- q.v) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
agnidiśf. agni-'s quarter, the south-east View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
agnivādinm. "fire-asserter", worshipper of fire. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
agnyutsādinmfn. one who lets the sacred fire go out. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
agradidhiṣum. equals agre-didhiṣu- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
agredidhiṣu([ ]) m. a man who at his first marriage takes a wife that was married before, (agre-didhiṣu-or -didhiṣu-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
agredidhiṣuf. a married woman whose elder sister is still unmarried. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
agṛhītadiśmfn. missing, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aguṇavādinmfn. fault-finding, censorious, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ahaṃvādinmfn. "speaking of one's self, presumptuous", See an-ahaṃv-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aharādia gaṇa- commentator or commentary on View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aharādim. daybreak, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ahardivamfn. (/ahar--) () daily View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ahardivamind. day by day View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ahardivi(/ahar--) ind. day by day View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ahetuvādinm. an adherent of it, ibidem or 'in the same place or book or text' as the preceding View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ahīnavādinmfn. a witness capable of giving evidence View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āhitāgnyādim. a gaRa () . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āhlādinmfn. causing joy or delight, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āhlāditamfn. delighted, rejoiced. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ahutābhyuditeind. when the sun has risen before the sacrifice, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aikapadikamfn. (fr. eka-pada-), belonging to a simple word View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aikapadikamfn. consisting of single words
aiṣukāryādim. Name of a gaṇa- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ajādia gaRa of View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ājakrandim. a descendant of an ājakrandaka- man or prince View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ajamodif. "goat's delight", Name of various plants, common Carroway, the species called Ajwaen (Ligusticum Ajwaen), a species of Parsley, Apium Involucratum. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ajirādia gaRa of View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ājñāsampādinmfn. executing orders, submissive View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ākarṣādia gaRa of View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
akhedinmfn. not wearisome, unwearied. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
akheditvan. continuous flow (of speech), one of the vāg-guṇas- of mahāvīra- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ākrandikamf(ī-)n. running to where cries for help are heard View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ākrandinmfn. in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' invoking in a weeping tone View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ākranditamfn. invoked View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ākranditan. a cry, roar View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ākranditan. lamentation View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
akranditamfn. not pressed (as tila-), View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
akṣadyūtādia gaRa of View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
alpavādinmfn. speaking little, taciturn. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āmardinmfn. crushing, pressing, handling roughly View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
amarditamfn. ( mṛd-), unthreshed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
amarditamfn. unsubdued View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
amarditamfn. not trodden down. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āmodinmfn. fragrant View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āmodinmfn. in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' fragrant or perfumed with exempli gratia, 'for example' kadambāmodin-, perfumed with kadamba-s View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āmodinm. a perfume for the mouth made up in the form of a camphor pill etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āmoditamfn. perfumed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
amoghanandif. Name of a śikṣā--text. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aṃśvādia gaRa of View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anadhyāyadivasam. a vacation day, holiday. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anādimfn. having no beginning, existing from eternity. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anādiind. perpetually, incessantly, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anādimadhyāntamfn. having no beginning, middle or end. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anādimatmfn. having no beginning. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anādinmfn. not sounding. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anādinidhanamfn. having neither beginning nor end, eternal. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anādiṣṭamfn. not indicated View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anādiṣṭamfn. not commanded or instructed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anādiṣṭamfn. not allowed. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anāditvan. state of having no beginning. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anahaṃvādinmfn. equals an-ahaṃkṛta-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anāhlāditamfn. not exhilarated. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ānandim. happiness, enjoyment, pleasure View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ānandinmfn. delightful, blissful, happy, cheerful View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ānandinmfn. gladdening, making happy View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ānandinmfn. Name of a man. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ānanditamf(ā-)n. rejoiced, delighted, happy View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ānanditamf(ā-)n. Name of a man. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anānudiṣṭamfn. ( diś-with ānu-or anu-), unsolicited View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ananyacoditamfn. self-impelled. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ananyavandinmfn. not praising anybody else, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ānarditan. roaring View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anāsāditamfn. not met with, not found or obtained, not encountered or attacked View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anāsāditamfn. not occurred View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anāsāditamfn. not having happened View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anāsāditamfn. non-existent. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anāsāditavigrahamfn. unused to war. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anāsvāditamfn. untasted. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anāveditamfn. not notified, not made known. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
andif. (for antikā- q.v), fireplace. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anekāntavādinm. a sceptic View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anekāntavādinm. a jaina-, an arhat- of the jaina-s. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anekātmavādinmfn. asserting a plurality of souls, Sa1m2khyas., Scholiast or Commentator View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aṅgadinmfn. wearing a bracelet, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aṅgamardinm. a servant who shampoos his master's body View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aṅgamardinm. aṅgamarda- also rheumatism View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aṅgārakadinam. n. a festival of Mars on the fourteenth of the latter half of caitra-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aṅgulyādi(aṅguli--) a gaRa of View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aninditamfn. irreproachable, virtuous. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anirdiṣṭamfn. ( diś-), unexplained, undefined. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anirdiśyamfn. undefinable, inexplicable. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anirveditamfn. not depressed, self-reliant, bold, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anīśvaravādinm. "one who denies a supreme ruler of the universe", an atheist.
aniveditamfn. untold, unmentioned. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aniveditavijñātamfn. known without being told. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
annādin([ ]) mfn. eating food. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anṛtavādinmfn. speaking untruth. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
antādi ī- dual number m. end and beginning, (gaRa rājadantādi- q.v) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
antarādiśf. equals antardiś/ā- q.v View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
antaradiśā([ ]) f. an intermediate region or quarter of the compass (see antarā-diś-and antar-deś/a-.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
antardiśf. equals -deś/a- below View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
antardivākīrtyam. concealing a caṇḍāla-, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
antarmandiran. inner apartments (reserved for women), View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
antarvediind. within the sacrificial ground etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
antarvedim. plural (ayas-) Name of the people living there View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āntarvedikamfn. (fr. antarvedika-), being within the place of sacrifice commentator or commentary on View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anudāttadin. (in grammar) a nominal base of which the first syllable is anudātta-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anūdito go up or out after (another) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anudigdhamfn. ( dih-), covered (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anudinamind. every day. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anudiśto point out for, assign. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anudiśamind. in every quarter. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anuditamfn. not risen, not appeared. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anuditamfn. unsaid, unuttered View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anuditamfn. unutterable, blamable (see a-vady/a-) (See 1. /an-udita- sub voce, i.e. the word in the Sanskrit order an-udaya-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anūditaSee sub voce, i.e. the word in the Sanskrit order View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anūditamfn. ( vad-), spoken after, spoken according to. See also anu-vad-. 1. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anudivasamind. idem or 'ind. every day.' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ānugādikamfn. (fr. anu-gādin-), belonging to one who repeats another's words, repeating another's words View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anugādinmfn. repeating another's words View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anumodinmfn. causing pleasure to (genitive case), View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anumoditamfn. pleased, delighted, applauded View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anumoditamfn. agreeable, acceptable. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anunadiind. along the river, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anunādinmfn. resounding, echoing, resonant. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anunāditamfn. made to resound. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anunāsikādim. a compound letter commencing with a nasal. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anunmaditamfn. idem or 'mfn. not mad, sane, sober, not wild.' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ānupadikamfn. (fr. anu-pada-), following, pursuing, tracking View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ānupadikamfn. knowing or studying the anupada- (q.v) song View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anupadinm. a searcher, an inquirer, one who follows or seeks for View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anupadiṣṭamfn. untaught, uninstructed. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anupravacanādia gaRa of View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anuśabditamfn. verbally communicated View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anuśabditamfn. spoken of. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anusaṃdiśto assign, to make over. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anuśatikādia gaRa of , containing the compounds the derivatives of which have vṛddhi- in both parts, as ānuśātika-, etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aṇuvādinmfn. one who believes in and teaches atomism. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anuvādinmfn. repeating with comment and explanation, corroborative, concurrent, conformable, in harmony with View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anuvādinmfn. (the masculine of the last is also the name of any one of the three notes of the gamut.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anuvādif. a lute, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anuvāditamfn. translated. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anuvediind. along the ground prepared for sacrifice View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anvādiśto name or mention afresh View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anvādiṣṭamfn. mentioned again, referring to a previous rule View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anyacoditamfn. moved by another. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anyathāvādinmfn. (or anya-vādin-) speaking differently View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anyathāvādinm. (ī-) speaking inconsistently View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anyathāvādinm. (in law) prevaricating or a prevaricator. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
anyūnārthavādinmfn. adequately expressive, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
apadādim. not the beginning of a pāda- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
apādadibhājmfn. not standing at the beginning of a pāda- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
apadibaddhamfn. not bound on the foot, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āpadikam. "a bolt"or"a sapphire"(indra-- kīla- or indra-- nīla-), View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āpādinmfn. falling into, incurring (compound), View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
apadiś(ind.p. -diśya-) to assign ; to point out, indicate, to betray, pretend, hold out as a pretext or disguise View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
apadiśamind. in an intermediate region (of the compass), half a point View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
apadiṣṭamfn. assigned as a reason or pretext. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āpaṇavedif. a shop-counter View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aparicchāditamfn. idem or 'mfn. uncovered, unclothed.' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
apaśabditamfn. spoken ungrammatically, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
apavādinmfn. blaming View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
apavāditamfn. blamed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
apavāditamfn. opposed, objected to. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
apodi( i-) to go away altogether, withdraw from (ablative) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
apodif. the pot-herb Basella Rubra or Lucida View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
apoditya(mfn.) n. impersonal or used impersonally to be completely gone away from (ablative) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
apracoditamfn. undesired, not bidden or commanded, unasked View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
apradadimfn. not, liberal View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āpradivamind. for ever View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
apramādinmfn. careful View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
apramudif. "joylessness", (in sāṃkhya- philosophy) Name of one of the eight asiddhi-s. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aprativādinmfn. not contradicting View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
apriyavādin([ ]) . mfn. speaking unkindly or harshly. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aproditamfn. not uttered View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
apūpādia gaRa of View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
araṇyaruditan. "weeping in a forest" id est weeping in vain, with no one to hear, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aravindif. (gaRa puṣkarādi- q.v) an assemblage of lotus flowers View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
arbudim. a serpent like demon (probably equals /arbuda-and arbud/a- m.above, but called /indramedhin- q.v) (in almost every verse) (see ny-/arbudi-.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ārbudim. (fr. arbuda-), Name of a Vedic ṛṣi-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
arbudinmfn. afflicted with a swelling or tumour View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ardhadivasam. "half a day", midday (see ardha-rātra-below.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ardhapādikamfn. having only half a foot View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ardharātrārdhadivasam. the time when day and night are half and half. id est equal, the equinox View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ardharcādimfn. a gaRa of View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ardhoditamfn. (fr. 1. ud-ita-) half risen View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ardhoditamfn. (fr. 2. udita-) half-uttered. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ardidhiṣumfn. ( ṛdh- Desiderative), desirous of increasing or making anything (accusative) prosperous View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
arditamfn. asked, requested, begged View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
arditamfn. injured, pained, afflicted, tormented, wounded etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
arditamfn. killed, destroyed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
arditan. Name of a disease (spasm of the jaw-bones, trismus, tetanus;or hemiplegia id est paralysis of the muscles on one side of the face and neck) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
arditinmfn. having spasms of the jaw-bones View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ārgvaidikamfn. belonging to the ṛg-- veda- commentator or commentary on View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
arīhaṇādia gaRa of View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
arkadinan. a solar day. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
arṇavamandiram. "whose abode is the sea", varuṇa- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
arśaādia gaRa of View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
arthavādinmfn. "relating facts" View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aruṇādityam. one of the twelve shapes of the sun View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āsāditamfn. put down View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āsāditamfn. reached etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āśāditya(aśāditya-) m. Name of a commentator. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
asaṃdigdhamfn. not indistinct View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
asaṃdigdhamfn. undoubted, unsuspected, certain (Prakrit diddha-); View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
asaṃdigdhamind. without any doubt, certainly View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
asaṃdinamfn. idem or 'mfn. unbound, unrestrained ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
asaṃditamfn. unbound, unrestrained View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āsandif. a little chair View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
asatkāryavādinm. one who (like a naiyāyika-) holds that an effect is nonexistent in its cause before production. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
asatpramuditan. (in sāṃkhya- philosophy) one of the eight asiddhi-s. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
asatyavādinmfn. speaking falsely, a liar. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
askandinmfn. not coagulating View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āskandinmfn. jumping upon View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āskandinmfn. assailing View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āskandinmfn. causing to jump away, giving away, granting View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āskandinmfn. a robber View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
askanditamfn. not neglected or forgotten (as time or a vow) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āskanditamfn. subject to or burdened with View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āskanditan. (am-) a horse's gallop View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āskanditakan. (akam-) a horse's gallop View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aśmādia gaRa of View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aśmadidyu(/aśma-.) mfn. whose missile weapons are stones or thunderbolts View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
asrakhadiram. a red Mimosa View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aṣṭācatvāriṃśadiṣṭakamfn. consisting of forty-eight iṣṭakā-s View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aṣṭadikpālam. plural the eight regents of the cardinal points, as indra- of the East, etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aṣṭadikpālam. (See dik-pati-and -pāla-.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aṣṭadiśf. plural śas- the eight cardinal points of the compass collectively View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aṣṭādiśf. plural equals aṣṭaḍiś- q.v View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
astamitodi, f. (scilicet paurṇa-- māsī-) the day on which the moon rises full after sunset, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aṣṭapadif. the plant Vallaris Dichotomus Wall. edition Bomb. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aṣṭapadif. varia lectio -pādikā- edition Calc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aṣṭapādiSee -padikā- above. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aśvāditwo gaṇa-s of View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
asvaditamfn. not made agreeable to the taste or sweet View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āsvāditamfn. tasted, enjoyed, eaten. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aśvakandif. equals -ganghā- , q.v View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āśvapadikamfn. come into contact with a horse's foot, , Scholiast or Commentator View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aśvapatyādim. a gaRa of View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
asvarādimfn. not beginning with a vowel. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aśvasādinm. idem or 'm. a horseman ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aśvavṛndinmfn. consisting of a large number of horses, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atidigdhaa poisoned arrow, . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atidiśto make over, transfer, assign: Passive voice -diśyate-, (in grammar) to be overruled or attracted or assimilated. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atidiṣṭamfn. overruled, attracted, influenced, inferred, substituted. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atidiv(ind.p. d/īvyā-[ equals vya-]), to play higher ; to risk (in playing) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atimadhyandinan. high noon. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ativādinmfn. very talkative. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ātmādiṣṭam. "self-dictated", a treaty dictated by the party wishing it himself View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ātmanepadinmfn. taking the terminations of the middle voice commentator or commentary View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ātodinmfn. striking View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ātodinand ā-todya- See ā-tud-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atṛdilamfn. "having no interstices", solid View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
atyādityamfn. surpassing the sun. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aupaniṣadikamfn. upaniṣad--like View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aupapādikamfn. idem or 'mfn. (fr. upa-pāduka-), self-produced ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aupoditeyam. a descendant of aupoditī- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aupoditimf(ī-). a descendant of upodita- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aupoditim. Name of tumiñja- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
auttānapādim. idem or 'm. a descendant of uttāna-pāda-, Name of dhruva- (or the polar star) ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
auttarapadikamfn. (fr. uttara-pada-), belonging to or occurring in the last member of a compound View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
auttaravedikamfn. (fr. uttara-vedi-), relating to or performed on the northern altar View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
avabhedinmfn. splitting, dividing View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
avadihcl.2 P. -degdhi-, to besmear View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
avādinmfn. (gaRa grāhy-ādi- q.v) not speaking, not disputing, peaceable View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
avadiś(Imper. 2. plural -didiṣṭana-) to show or practise (kindness etc.) : Causal (Aorist subjunctive 1. sg. -dediśam-) to inform View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
avagaditamfn. unsaid View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
avaidikamfn. non-Vedic. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
avamarditamfn. crushed, destroyed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
avāntaradikṣamfn. performing an intermediate consecration View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
avāntaradikṣāf. an intermediate consecration, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
avāntaradikṣāf. avāntaradiṣādi-, a gaṇa-, comm. on commentator or commentary View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
avāntaradiksraktimfn. (said of the vedi-) having its corners turned towards intermediate regions of the compass View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
avāntaradiśf. an intermediate region of the compass View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
avāntaradiśāf. equals -dis- q.v View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
avaruditamfn. ( rud-), that upon which tears have fallen View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
avasāditamfn. made to sink, exhausted, dispirited View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
avasāditamfn. frustrated View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
avaskandinmfn. "covering (a cow)" See gaurāv- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
avaskandinmfn. in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' attacking View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
avaskanditamfn. attacked View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
avaskanditamfn. gone down View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
avaskanditamfn. bathed, bathing , (in law) accused, refuted (?) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
avaskaramandiran. water closet View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
avasyanditan. (in rhetoric) attributing to one's own words a sense not originally meant View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
avavaditamfn. instructed, taught View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
avavaditṛm. one who speaks finally, who gives the definitive opinion View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
avedif. ignorance View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
avedimfn. without a vedi- or sacrificial altar View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
avedinmfn. having no knowledge View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āvedinmfn. in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' announcing, declaring. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āveditamfn. made known, communicated, represented commentator or commentary on View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aviditamfn. unknown View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aviditamfn. without the knowledge of (genitive case) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aviditam accusative ind. ([ kathās-.]) without the knowledge of (genitive case) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aviditamind. so that nobody knows View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
avidite locative case ind. ([ ]) without the knowledge of (genitive case) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
aviṣādinmfn. intrepid View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
avisaṃvādinmfn. not contradictory, coinciding, agreeing View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
avisaṃvāditamfn. undisputed, generally approved, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
avisaṃvādif. not violating (id est keeping) a promise View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
avispanditamfn. not quivering View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
avisyanditaSee a-vispand-.
avivādinmfn. not quarrelling with (abhi-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
avivadiṣṇumfn. not causing dispute View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āyurvedikam. acquainted or familiar with medical science, a physician View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
āyurvedinm. idem or 'm. acquainted or familiar with medical science, a physician ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
baddhagudinmfn. suffering from it View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bahirvedif. the space outside the vedi- or sacrificial altar View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bahirvediind. outside the sacrificial altar View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bahirvedikamfn. being or taking place outside the vedi- (See prec.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bāhirvedikamf(ī-)n. (fr. bahirvedi-). situated or taking place outside the vedi- (see bahir-vedika-).
bāhubhedinm. "arm-breaker", Name of viṣṇu- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bahūdita(hu-ud-) n. loquacity. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bahulauṣadikamfn. overgrown with herbs View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bahuvādinmfn. talking much, garrulous, babbling View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bahvādinmfn. eating much, a great eater View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bāhyārthavādavādinmfn. maintaining the reality of the external world,ib. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
baidim. idem or 'm. patronymic fr. bida- gaRa aśvādi-.' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bālādityam. the newly risen sun, morning sun View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bālādityam. Name of princes View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bālādityavratan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bālavinodif. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
balimandiran. " bali-'s abode", the infernal regions View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
balīvardinm. Name of a man gaRa śubhrādi-- ( baliv-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
balīvardineyam. metron. fr. balīvardī- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bālīvardineyam. patronymic fr. balīvardin- gaRa śubhrādi- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bālīvardineyam. metron. fr. balīvardī- gaRa kalyāṇy-ādi- (see balīvardineya-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bandi(?) m. a Buddhist pupil (see ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bandiin compound for din-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bandiin compound for din-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bandiārayuName of a place mentioned in the View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bandicaura() m. "plunder-seizer", a housebreaker (especially one breaking into a temple or place where sacred fire is preserved), burglar, robber. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bandigraham. taking prisoner, capture View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bandigrāha() m. "plunder-seizer", a housebreaker (especially one breaking into a temple or place where sacred fire is preserved), burglar, robber. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bandinm. (also written vandin- q.v,and metri causa di-) a praiser, bard, herald (who sings the praises of a prince in his presence or accompanies an army to chant martial songs;these bards are regarded as the descendants of a kṣatriya- by a śūdra- female) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bandinm. (also written vandin-) a prisoner, captive, slave View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bandinm. plunder, spoil (See -grāha-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bandipāṭham. the panegyric of a bard View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bandiputram. equals bandin- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bandiśālikāf. a prison View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bandisthitamfn. sitting in prison, imprisoned View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bandistrīf. a female bard on View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bandiśūlāf. a harlot, prostitute View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bandif. () the state or condition of a bard. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
banditvan. () the state or condition of a bard. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bāṣpadurdinamfn. clouded by tears View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bāṣpadurdinākṣamf(ā-,or ī-)n. having eyes clouded by tears View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bāṣpasaṃdigdhamfn. (a voice) indistinct by suppressed tears View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bebhiditavyamfn. ( bhid-, Intensive) to be repeatedly split View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhādigam. Name of a man View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhadravādinmfn. uttering auspicious cries (said of a bird) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhāgavatatattvadipaprakāśāvaraṇabhaṅgam. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhāgavatavāditoṣinīf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhagavatīkeśādipādastavam. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhagavattattvadipikāf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhaidikamfn. equals bhedaṃ nityam arhati- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhandadiṣṭimfn. (prob.) hastening along with shouts and yells (said of the marut-s) (see krand/ad-iṣṭi-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhandilan. fortune View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhandilan. tremulous motion View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhandilan. a messenger (?) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhandiṣṭhamfn. (superl.) shouting most loudly, praising most highly
bhānudinan. Sunday (see -vāra-), View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhāradvājāgnisaṃdhānādismārtaprayogam. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhāskaradinan. Sunday, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhāskaranandinm. the son of the god of the sun View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhasmādilakṣaṇan. Name of work 1. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhāṭṭadinakaram. Name of work (and bhāṭṭadinakarīya rīya- n.), View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhāṭṭadinakarīyan. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhāṭṭadinakarīyan. bhāṭṭadinakara
bhaṭṭadivākaram. Name of a man View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhauvādikamfn. (fr. bhū+ādi-) belonging to that class of roots which begins with bhū-, belonging to the first class
bhāvādiprābhṛtan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhavanandinm. Name of a man View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhaviṣyadvādinmfn. predicting future events, prophesying View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhedābhedavādinm. a maintainer of the doctrine both of the difference and the identity of God and the Universe View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhedavādinm. one who maintains the duality of God and the Universe View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhedavādinm. Name of commentator or commentary on View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhedavādividāriṇīf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhedif. the act of breaking down or asunder, destruction, annihilation View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhedinmfn. breaking, splitting, piercing, perforating etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhedinmfn. beating or knocking out (See dvi-netra-bh-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhedinmfn. shaking, penetrating View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhedinmfn. causing to flow (as juice) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhedinmfn. loosening (the bowels), cathartic, purgative View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhedinmfn. breaking, violating (an agreement etc.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhedinmfn. interrupting (devotion) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhedinmfn. disturbing (a country) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhedinmfn. dividing, separating from (ablative) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhedinmfn. (fr. bheda-) having a distinction or division View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhedinmfn. (in philosophy) one who separates spirit and matter or holds the doctrine of dualism View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhedinm. Rumex Vesicarius View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhedif. (with tāntrika-s) Name of a particular śakti- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhediran. equals bhidira-, a thunderbolt View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bheditamfn. (fr. Causal) broken, split, cleft etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bheditamfn. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') divided into View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bheditvan. separation, division, parting asunder View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhidim. a thunderbolt View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhidiran. idem or 'm. a thunderbolt ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhindipālam. a short javelin or arrow thrown from the hand or shot through a tube (others"a stone fastened to a string"or"a kind of sling for throwing stones") (varia lectio bhindapāla-, bhiṇḍimālā-, bhindomāla-, bhindimāla-or laka-, bhindumāla-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhindipālakam. a short javelin or arrow thrown from the hand or shot through a tube (others"a stone fastened to a string"or"a kind of sling for throwing stones") (varia lectio bhindapāla-, bhiṇḍimālā-, bhindomāla-, bhindimāla-or laka-, bhindumāla-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhinnamaryādin() mfn. whose course is broken, separated from the right way, uncontrolled, unrestrained, regardless, disrespectful. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhovādinmfn. saying bhoḥ- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhrādif. (in music) a particular śruti- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhrūbhedinmfn. frowning, attended with frowns View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhūdinan. () () a civil day. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhūdivasam. () a civil day. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhūmibhedinmfn. differing from (what exists on) earth View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhūpādiskandhalakṣaṇan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhūtādim. "original or originator of all beings", Name of mahā-puruṣa- or the Supreme Spirit View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhūtādimn. (in sāṃkhya-) Name of ahaṃ-kāra- (as the principle from which the elements are evolved) . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhūtādikamfn. beginning with the elements, the element etc.
bhūtādikamfn. (with ahaṃ-kāra-) equals bhūtādi- mn. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhūtavādinmfn. telling the real fact or truth View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhuvādivarṇanan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhuvanaviditamfn. known in the world View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bhūyaśchandikamfn. having a great desire for anything. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bisakhādif. "eating lotus-fibres", Name of a play or sport View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bodhisaṃcodiṇīf. Name of a particular ray of light View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bodhisaṃcodiṇīsamuccayāf. Name of a Buddhist deity View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
brahmādijātāf. the river go-dāvarī- (varia lectio dri-j-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
brahmadinan. a day of brahmā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
brahmādiśīrṣam. or n. (?) Name of a place View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
brahmādityam. Name of an author (also called brahmārka-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
brahmanandin m. Name of two authors View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
brahmānandinm. brahmānanda
brahmatattvasaṃhitoddipanīf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
brahmavādinmfn. discoursing on sacred texts, a defender or expounder of the veda- etc. (f inī-. ; brahmavāditva di-tva- n. )
brahmavādinmfn. one who asserts that all things are to be identified with brahma-, a vedāntin- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
brahmavāditvan. brahmavādin
brahmavedif. " brahmā-'s altar", Name of the country between the 5 lakes of rāma- in kuru-kṣetra- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
brahmavedinmfn. equals -vid-, acquainted with the veda- or spiritual knowledge View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
brahmayajñādividhim. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bṛhaddivamfn. "belonging to the lofty sky", heavenly, celestial (also -div/ā-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bṛhaddivam. (with atharvaṇa-) Name of the author of View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bṛhaddivam. Name of that hymn
bṛhaddif. Name of a goddess (associated with iḷā-, sarasvatī- and others) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bṛhaddiveṣuind. in heavenly heights View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bṛhadiṣum. Name of various men View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bṛhadiśvaradīkṣitīya n. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bṛhadiśvarapurāṇan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bṛhadvādinmfn. boasting, a boaster View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bubhukṣāpīditamfn. pained by hunger, hungry View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
buddhadiś(?) m. Name of a prince View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
buddhanandi(?) m. Name of the 8th Buddhist patriarch View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
budhadinan. bhaṭṭotpala-'s (or the planet Mercury's) day, Wednesday View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
bundiran. a house View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dia gaṇa- of (including the indeclinable particles) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
cadiram. (equals cand-) the moon View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
cadiram. camphor View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
cadiram. an elephant View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
cadiram. a snake View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
caidikamf(ā-, ī-). gaRa kāśy-ādi-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
cakrabhedif. "dividing the cakra-(-va1ka) couples (see -bāndhava-) ", night View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
cakramardif. Name of a wife of līlāditya- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
cakramedifor -bhedinī- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
caṇḍādityatīrthan. Name of a tīrtha- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
candilam. a barber View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
candiram. (fr. ndr/a-) the moon View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
candiram. an elephant View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
candiram. equals dra-ja- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
candrādilokam. equals dra-lok/a-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
candrādityam. Name of a prince View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
carmācchāditamfn. covered with skin View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
carmaprabhedif. a shoemaker's awl View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
cāruvādinmfn. sounding beautifully. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
cārvādia gaṇa- of View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
caṭaditiind. so as to make a crackling noise View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
caturdikkamind. towards the 4 quarters, on all sides, all around View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
caturdikṣu(locative case plural) ind. idem or 'ind. towards the 4 quarters, on all sides, all around ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
caturdiśamind. idem or '(locative case plural) ind. idem or 'ind. towards the 4 quarters, on all sides, all around ' ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
caturvarṇādimfn. a gaṇa- of ( Va1rtt. 1; equals anantādi-of ) . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
caturvedinmfn. equals -vidya- (in Prakrit). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
caturvyūhavādinm. "asserting the 4 forms (of puruṣottama-, viz. vāsudeva-, saṃkarṣaṇa-, pradyumna-, aniruddha-)", a vaiṣṇava- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
catuṣpadif. equals -. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
caurādikamfn. belonging to the cur-ādi- roots. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
cedim. pl. Name of a people (who lived in Bundelkhand; renowned for their attachment to ancient laws and institutions ; their capital was śuktimatī-; some of their kings were vasu- uparicara-, subāhu-, dhṛṣṭa-ketu-, dama-ghoṣa-, śiśu-pāla- etc.) etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
cedim. sg. Name of the supposed ancestor of the cedi-s (son of kaiśika- or uśika-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
cedibhūbhṛtm. "protector of the country of the cedi-s", śiśu-pāla- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
cedibhūbhujm. "earth-enjoyer of the cedi-s", equals -pati- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
cedihūṇam. plural the cedi-s and the hūṇa-s View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
cedikam. plural the cedi-s View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
cedinagarīf. equals tri-purī- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
cedipam. equals -pati- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
cedipam. Name of a son of vasu- uparicara- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
cedipatim. a prince of the cedi-s () , xiii. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
cedipurīf. the city of the cedi-s View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
cedirājm. "king of the cedi-s" idem or 'm. "protector of the country of the cedi-s", śiśu-pāla- ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
cedirājm. equals -pati- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
cedirājam. equals -pati- śiśu-pāla- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
cedisaṃvatsee kalacuri-- saṃvatsara-, parasmE-pada 1324. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
cediviṣayam. the country of the cedi-s View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
chadimfn. in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' covering View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
chadimfn. "a roof" See n/ava--. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
chadiḥsammitamfn. corresponding to a cover View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
chadinmfn. in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' covering, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
chadinmfn. "having leaves" See daśa-- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
chadinmfn. having wheels (pattra- equals dhārā- Scholiast or Commentator) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
chādinmfn. in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' hiding, obscuring View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
chādif. the skin View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
chadirdarśam. appearance of roofs View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
chadirdarśam. (a-cch- negative) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
chadirdarśam. see View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
chadisn. () a cover, roof of a carriage, roof (gṛha- ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
chadisn. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
chadisn. see chādiṣeya-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
chādiṣeyamfn. suitable for the roof of a carriage or house (chad/is-) Va1rtt. 2 View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
chadiṣmatmfn. having a cover or roof (a carriage) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
chadistṛṇan. straw for a roof, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
chāditamfn. covered, covered over View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
chāditamfn. obscured (the moon) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
chāditamfn. concealed, disguised View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
chaidikamfn. deserving mutilation (cheda-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
chaidikamfn. equals chidrāṃśa- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
chanditamfn. gratified View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
chardif. vomiting, sickness View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
chardif. expulsion (of the breath) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
chardighnam. "anti-emetic", Azadirachta indica View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
chardif. vomition View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
chardif. Clitoria ternatea View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
chardikāripum. "anti-emetic", cardamoms View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
chardisn. (equals chad/is-) a fence, secure place or residence (gṛha- ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
chardisn. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
chardisn. (f. ) vomition View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
chardiṣpāmfn. protecting a house View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
charditamfn. got rid of (demerit) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
chattrādia gaṇa- of View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
chāttryādia gaṇa- of View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
chedādia gaṇa- of ( ). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
chedimfn. one who cuts or breaks View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
chedim. a carpenter View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
chedinmfn. in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' cutting off, tearing asunder View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
chedinmfn. removing View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
cheditamfn. cut, divided View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
cheditavyamfn. to be cut, divisable View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
chidian axe View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
chidiram. idem or 'an axe ' , View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
chidiram. a sword View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
chidiram. fire View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
chidiram. a rope, cord View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
cikhādiṣumfn. ( khād- Desiderative) desiring to eat View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ciradivasamind. for a long time View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
codiṣṭhamfn. most animating, . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
coditamfn. caused to move quickly View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
coditamfn. driven, impelled, incited View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
coditamfn. carried on (a business), iv, 28, 21 (a-- negative) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
coditamfn. invited, directed, ordered View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
coditamfn. informed, apprised View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
coditamfn. inquired after, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
coditamfn. enjoined, fixed, appointed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
coditatvan. the being enjoined View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
coditatvan. (a-- negative) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
coditṛmfn. equals dayitṛ- (7 times) . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
cundif. cutaneous eruption (see saṃcāric-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
curādithe class of roots beginning with cur- on View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
cūrṇadia gaṇa- of View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dadimfn. giving, bestowing (with accusative) ( ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinmfn. giving, a giver View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
daditṛm. a giver (preserver?) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dadittha Name (also title or epithet) of a monkey, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dagdhamandirasāramfn. one who has burned the, best of mansions. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dainaṃdinamf(ī-)n. happening daily, quotidian View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dainaṃdinadānakāṇḍamn. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dainaṃdinasadācāradarpaṇam. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
daivādikamf(ī-)n. belonging to the div-ādi-s id est to the 4th class of roots View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dalāditvan. the state of a leaf. etc., . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dānadinakaram. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
daṇḍavādinmfn. pronouncing judicial reprimand View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
daṇḍavādinm. a door-keeper View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
daśacchadinmfn. ten-leaved, , View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
daśadigyavalokanam. Name of a samādhi- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
daśadiśf. sg. the 10 regions (including that overhead and underneath) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dāśanandif. the fisherman's daughter, Name of satyavatī- (mother of vyāsa-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dāsanandiSee dāśa--. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dauhadikam. (fr. dohada-) a landscape gardener View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dauhadikam. morbid or ardent desire
dauhṛdi() equals daurhṛ- (See daur-under dauḥ-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dauhṛdif. a woman with two hearts (id est a pregnant woman, = dvihṛdayā-; > confer, compare dohada-), View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
daurhṛdif. a pregnant women View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ddivasam. Sunday View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dehātmavādinm. materialist, cārvāka- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
devācāryadigvijayam. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
devadiṇṇam. corrupt form for -datta- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
devadinnam. idem or 'm. corrupt form for -datta- ' , Name of a son of devadatta- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
devālayotsavādikramam. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
devanandinm. "rejoicing the gods", Name of one of indra-'s doorkeepers View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
devanandinm. of a grammarian View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
devatāmandiran. equals -gṛha- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dhanurvedinmfn. versed in archery View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dhanurvedinm. Name of śiva- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dharmadinnāf. (pāli- equals dattā-) "given by religion", Name of a female View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dharmādityam. "sun of justice", Name of a king View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dharmamativinanditarāgam. Name (also title or epithet) of a tathāgata-, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dharmanandinm. Name of a Buddhist author. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dharmavādinmfn. discussing law or duty View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dhātuvādinm. assayer, metallurgist View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dhaurādityatīrthan. Name of a tīrtha- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dhṛṣṭavādinmfn. speaking boldly View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dhvanamodinm. "delighting by its sound", a bee View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dimfn. shining, bright View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dimfn. only in dīdyagni- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ditif. equals dīti- (See su-d/īditi-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divimfn. shining, bright View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divimfn. risen (as a star) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divim. a Name of bṛhas-pati-, the planet Jupiter View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divim. heaven, final emancipation (see didivi-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divimn. boiled rice, food (see didīvi-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divimn. equals artha- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dīkṣāmāsādivicāram. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dīrghakandif. Curculigo Orchioides (equals muṣalī-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dohadinmfn. eagerly longing for (locative case or compound), Vssav. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dohadinm. the aśoka- tree View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
draupadāditya varia lectio for drup- q.v View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
draupadijam. plural (for --) the sons of draupadī-, . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dravyavādinmfn. equals prec. (opp. to jāti--) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dṛṣadi locative case of dṛṣad- in compound View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dṛṣadimāṣakam. (with the eastern people) a tax raised from millstones View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
drupadādityam. a form of the Sun View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
duddādinmfn. giving pain, cruel, wicked View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dūraādiś(dūr/a--for r/e-ā-) mfn. announcing far and wide
durdinan. a rainy or cloudy day, bad weather View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
durdinamfn. cloudy, rainy, dark View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
durdinagrastabhāskaramfn. having the sun obscured by dark clouds View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
durdināyaNom. A1. yate-, to become covered with clouds Va1rtt. 1 View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
durdivasam. a bad or rainy day View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
durdyūtavedinm. (prob. wrong reading for devin-) Name of śakuni- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
durgāsaṃdehabhedif. Name of work
durmadinm. drinker, drunkard View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
durupadiṣṭamfn. badly instructed. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dūṣaṇatāvādinm. opponent, adversary (in a disputation) commentator or commentary View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
duṣkhadiram. a tree related to the Acacia Catechu
dvādaśāditya(in compound) the 12 āditya-s View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dvādaśādityastavam. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dvādaśādityastyāsramam. Name of a hermitage View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dvādaśādityatīrthan. Name of a tīrtha- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dvaipadikamf(ī-)n. familiar with the dvi-padā-, gaRa uktlsādi- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dvaitavādinm. "dualist", assertor of dualism (a philosopher who asserts the 2 principles or the existence of the human soul as separate from the Supreme Being) (see a-dv-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dvaṃdvādikośam. Name of a dictionary. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dvayavādinmfn. double-tongued, insincere View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dvidivamfn. lasting 2 days View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dvidivam. a ceremony of that length View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dvinetrabhedinmfn. knocking out a person's 2 eyes View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dvīpacchandiram. or n. Name of a place View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dvipadif. equals dvau pādau-, prob. double amount (see -pādya-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dvipadif. a kind of metre (equals -) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dvipadif. a particular manner of singing (?) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dvipādif. a kind of song (see -padikā-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dvitīyādivyutpattivādam. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dvitridivasanivāsam. abode for 2 or 3 days View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dvivedinmfn. equals -veda- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
edidhiṣuḥpatim. the husband of a younger sister whose elder sister has not yet been married (see agre-didhiṣu-and didhiṣu-.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ekādaśacchadimfn. having eleven roofs View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ekadiśmfn. being in the same quarter or direction View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ekānnanaktabhojinādinmfn. eating food given by only one person View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ekānudiṣṭan. N. (scilicet śrāddha-) a funeral ceremony having reference to only one ancestor recently dead View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ekapadiind. upon or with only one foot gaRa dvidaṇḍy-ādi- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ekapadikamfn. occupying only one panel View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ekapādif. a single foot View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ekapādif. Name of the second book of the śatapatha-brāhmaṇa-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ekaviṃśaticchadi(/eka--), mfn. having 21 roofs, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ekoddiṣṭan. (scilicet śrāddha-) a funeral ceremony having reference to one individual recently dead (not including ancestors generally) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ekoddiṣṭaśrāddhapaddhatif. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
etadādimfn. beginning with this, and so forth. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
evamādi mfn. beginning with such a one, of such qualities or kind, such View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gabdif. Name of a country gaRa sindhv-ādi- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gābdikamfn. fr. gabdikā- gaRa sindhvādi- () View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gadgadif. stammering View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gadgaditamfn. stammered () View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gadif. speaking, speech View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dim. patronymic fr. gada- gaRa bāhv-ādi-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gadinmfn. (fr. da-) sick View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gadinmfn. (fr. -) armed with a club (said of kṛṣṇa-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gadinm. Name of kṛṣṇa- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gadisiṃham. Name of a grammarian. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gaditamfn. spoken View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gaditamfn. said, related etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gaditamfn. spoken to View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gaditamfn. enumerated View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gaditamfn. named, called View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gaditan. speaking, speech (varia lectio) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dityafr. gadita- gaRa pragady-ādi-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gaḍvādia gaṇa- of Va1rtt. 3 () . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gahādia gaṇa- of (iv, 2, 138 ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gajādināmāf. "named by gaja- and other names of an elephant " equals ja-pippalī- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gambhīravedinmfn. "deeply sensitive", restive (an elephant) Introd. 9 View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gambhīravedinmfn. inscrutable View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gamyādia gaṇa- of View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gandhamādif. "strong-scented", lac View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gandhamādif. (equals danī-) a sort of perfume View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gandhamādif. equals dhottamā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gandi varia lectio for gabd- q.v View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gāndika varia lectio for gābd-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gāndif. Name of a princess of kāśi- (wife of śvaphalka- and mother of a-krūra-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gāndif. (gāndī-) 2115 View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gāndif. Name of gaṅgā- (varia lectio ndhinī-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gāndinīsutam. "son of gāndinī-", a-krūra- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gāndinīsutam. (equals gāṅgāyani-) bhīṣma- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gaṅgādityam. (d-) a form of the sun View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
garbhādimfn. beginning with conception View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
garbhadivasam. plural (equals -kāla-or -samaya-,the time or) the days on which the offspring of the sky (See g/arbha-) shows the first signs of life (195 days or 7 lunar months after its first conception) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
garbhavedif. equals dana- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gardabhanādinmfn. braying like an ass View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gargādia gaṇa- of (iv, 1, 105 ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
garhyavādinmfn. speaking ill or vilely or inaccurately View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
garuḍādityam. a form of the sun View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gatadinan. the past day, yesterday View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gatadinamind. yesterday View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gatadivasam. the past day, yesterday View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gatadivasamind. yesterday View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gaurādiName of two gaṇa-s of View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gavādia gaṇa- of View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gavadikam. plural See gabd-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gehenardinmfn. "shouting defiance at home", idem or 'mfn. "insolent at home" idem or 'mfn. "overbearing at home" idem or 'mfn. "scorching and burning at home", idem or 'mfn. "blustering at home", a house-hero, coward gaRa pātresamitādi- and yuktārohy-ādi-.' ' ' ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ghāsakundikamfn. fr. nda- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ghoṣādia gaṇa- of View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ghoṣavadādimfn. beginning with a sonant, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ghṛtādiName of a gaṇa- ( ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
girinadif. a small mountain-torrent View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
girinadyādim. a gaṇa- of ( vArttika) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
girinandif. "mountain-daughter", a mountain-torrent View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
girinandif. equals -duhitṛ- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gītamodinm. "gladdening with songs", a kiṃnara- or celestial chorister View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
godhāpadif. Cissus pedata View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gopādityam. Name of a king of Kashmir View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gopādityam. Name of a poetry or poetic View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gopavanādim. a gaṇa- of View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
goṣadādim. a gaṇa- of ( ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gosādi (see -ṣād/ī-.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gotrādim. a gaṇa- of View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
govatsādinm. "calf-eater", a wolf View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
govindif. Name of a fragrant plant View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
grahādia gaṇa- of ( ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
grahādianother gaṇa-, 445 View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
grāmyavādinm. a village bailiff View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gṛhabhedinmfn. prying into domestic affairs, causing family quarrels View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gṛhanadif. a ditch in a house View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gṛhītadikkamfn. equals -diś- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gṛhītadiśmfn. running away, flying, escaped View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gṛṣṭyādia gaṇa- of View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
guḍādia gaṇa- of View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
guṇādia gaṇa- of View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
guṇavādinmfn. pointing out any one's merits View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
guṇavedinmfn. knowing the properties or qualities View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
guṇavedinmfn. knowing the merits of (in compound) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gurudinan. Thursday, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
gurudivasam. " bṛhaspati-'s day", Thursday (?) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dim. or f. a spider (equals lūtā-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haledvipadif. (fr. locative case of hala-+ dv-) Name of a particular tax View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haṃsanādinmfn. making a noise like a goose or swan, cackling View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haṃsanādif. a graceful woman (one of the various classes into which women are divided) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haṃsapadif. Name of the first wife of duṣyanta- (varia lectio haṃsa-vatī-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haṃsapādif. a kind of plant (equals -padī-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hārdim. the heart View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hārdim. contentment, ease, comfort View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hārdin. the heart or interior of the body (also applied to the intestines) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hārdiSee yama-h-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hārdikyam. patronymic of kṛta-varman- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hārdikyam. friendship View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hārdinmfn. feeling affection for (locative case) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hārdivan() () mfn. hearty, cordial, having an affection for (locative case) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haribodhadinan. Name of a festival day View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haridinan. "day sacred to viṣṇu-", the 11th day in a fortnight View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haridinatilakam. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
haridiśf. " indra-'s quarter", the east View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
harimandiran. a temple of viṣṇu- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
harimandiran. the world of viṣṇu-, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
harinandinm. a proper N. gaRa kṣubhnādi-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
harītakyādiName of a medicine work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
harivāhanadiśf. indra-'s quarter id est the east View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hastapādādim. the hand and feet, the extremities, limbs of the body View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hastipādif. a kind of medicinal plant View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hāsyadidṛkṣumfn. curious to see something ridiculous View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hetuvādika m. a disputant, sceptic View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hetuvādinm. a disputant, sceptic View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
himadurdinan. a snowy day, cold and bad weather View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
himārditamfn. pinched or pained by cold View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hīnavādinmfn. defeated or worsted (in a lawsuit) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hīnavādinmfn. making a defective statement, insufficient or inadmissible (as a witness;See hīna-above ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hīnavādinmfn. contradictory, prevaricating View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hīnavādinmfn. destitute of speech, speechless, dumb View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hiraṇyakaśipucchedin() m. Name of viṣṇu-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hiraṇyakhādimfn. wearing golden brooches View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hitavādinmfn. speaking good counsel or friendly advice, a friendly counsellor or adviser, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hlādikāvatīf. rich in refreshments or enjoyments View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hlādinmfn. refreshing, comforting, gladdening, exhilarating ( hlāditva di-tva- n.) etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hlādinmfn. very noisy or loud (varia lectio hrādin-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hlādif. (see hrādi--) lightning View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hlādif. indra-'s thunderbolt View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hlādif. the incense-tree View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hlādif. a particular śakti- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hlādif. a mystical Name of the sound d- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hlādif. Name of a river View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hlāditamfn. refreshed, gladdened, delighted View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hlāditvan. hlādin
hradinmfn. abounding in pools or in water (as a river)
hrādinmfn. (for 2.See column 2) equals hradin- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hrādinmfn. (for 1.See column 1) sounding, noisy, very loud View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hradif. a river View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hrādif. a river View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hrādif. Name of a river (varia lectio hradinī-) (Scholiast or Commentator) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hrādif. lightning View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hrādif. indra-'s thunderbolt View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hṛdayonmādif. (in music) a particular śruti- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hṛdi(locative case of hṛd-), in compound View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hṛdikam. Name of the father of kṛta-varman- (see hārdikya-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hṛdiśayamfn. lying or remaining in the heart View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hṛdispṛśmfn. touching the heart, charming, lovely View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hṛdispṛśamfn. idem or 'mfn. touching the heart, charming, lovely ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hṛdisthamfn. being in the heart etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hṛdisthamfn. beloved, dear View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
hutabhugdiśf. hutabhuj
hyastanadinan. the day just past, yesterday View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
idādika(idādika-) mfn. beginning now or with this moment. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
indindif. a large bee View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
indif. Name of lakṣmī-, wife of viṣṇu- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
indif. beauty, splendour. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
indirādayitam. Name (also title or epithet) of viṣṇu-, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
indirālayan. "the abode of indirā- or lakṣmī-", the blue lotus, Nymphaea Stellata and Cyanea (the goddess indirā- issued at the creation from its petals) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
indirāmandiram. "the home of lakṣmī-" View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
indirāmandiram. Name of viṣṇu-
indrādityam. Name of a man. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
indramedin(/indra-) mfn. one whose friend or ally is indra- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
indudinan. a lunar day. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
īśānadiśf. "śiva-'s region", the north-east, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
iṣṭasaṃpādinmfn. effecting anything desired or wished for View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ityādimfn. having such (thing or things) at the beginning, thus beginning, and so forth, et caetera View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ityevamādiind. and so forth View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
jagadādijam. "first-born of the world", śiva-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
jaladhinandif. equals -- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
jaladimbam. a bivalve shell View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
jalamandiran. equals -yantra-m- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
jalavāditan. "water-music", a kind of music in which water is used View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
jalayantramandiran. idem or 'n. equals -gṛha- ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
jambhabhedinm. " jambha--destroyer", indra- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
janakanandinif. equals -tanayā-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
jānapadikamfn. relating to a country or to its subjects, . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
janapadinm. "country-ruler", a king View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
jānavādikamfn. knowing popular report (jana-vāda-), gaRa kathādi-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
janavādinm. a talker, newsmonger View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
jānevādika equals jānav- gaRa katkādi-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
janidivasam. birthday View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
janmadinan. equals -tithi- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
jānovādika equals jānav- gaRa katkādi-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
jauhotyādikamfn. belonging to juhoty-ādi- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
javādin. a kind of perfume View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
jayādityam. Name of a king (vāmana-'s fellow-author of ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
jinādivijayam. Name of the author of a gloss on the 3rd upāṅga- (of the jaina-s). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
jīvādityam. the living sun View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
jīvamandiran. equals -kośa- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
juhotyādithe (3rd) class of roots beginning with hu- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
jumaranandinm. idem or 'm. see jaum-.' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
jūmaranandinm. equals jum-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
jyotsnādi(d-), a gaṇa- of ( Va1rtt. 2) . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kācalindi varia lectio for kāka-ciñcika- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kacchādim. Name of a gaṇa- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kācilindiand kācilindika- vv.ll. for kāka-ciñcika- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kaḍandif. science (see kalandikā-, kalindikā-.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kaḍārādim. Name of a gaṇa- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dikramastutif. Name of work attributed to śaṃkarācārya-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dimatan. Name of a tantra- work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kadindriyan. plural bad organs of sense View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kadindriyamfn. having bad organs of sense View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kadindriyagaṇam. and mfn. idem or 'mfn. having bad organs of sense ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kākacchadim. varia lectio for -cchardi- a wagtail View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kākacchadim. a crow's vomit View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kākakūrmādim. plural the crow, the tortoise, and the rest View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kākandim. plural Name of a warrior-tribe gaRa dāmany-ādi-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kakubhādif. "tasting like kakubha-" ([ ]),a kind of perfume (see nalī-.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kakudinm. a bull, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kālacoditamfn. summoned by Death View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kālacoditakarmanmfn. acting under the influence of fate. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kālādikam. (scilicet māsa-) the month caitra- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kāladivākaram. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kalandif. equals kalindikā- q.v View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kalānunādinm. "giving out a low note", a sparrow View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kalānunādinm. the cātaka- bird View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kalānunādinm. a kind of bee View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kālānunādinfor kal- q.v View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kalaśadirmfn. one whose pitcher is broken View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kālātyayāpadiṣṭamfn. invalidated by lapse of time (term for a vain argument[ hetv-ābhāsa-],also called atīta-kāla-and bādhita-) commentator or commentary on (wrongly spelt tyayopad-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kalindanandif. idem or 'f. idem or 'f. Name (also title or epithet) of the river yamunā-, ' ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kalindif. science View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kalindif. (varia lectio kalandikā-.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kālindif. (equals kal-) science View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kālotpāditamfn. produced in due season. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kalpādim. the beginning of a kalpa- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kalyāṇamandiran. temple or abode of health or prosperity View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kalyāṇamandiran. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kalyāṇamandirastotran. Name of a jaina- work. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kalyāṇamandiraṭīkāf. the commentary on it View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kalyāṇyādim. a gaRa of View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kamalādim. Name of a gaṇa- commentator or commentary on View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kāmaśaronmādif. Name of a surāṅganā-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kāmavādinmfn. speaking according to pleasure, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kambojādim. Name of a gaṇa-, on View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kāṃdigbhūtamfn. run away View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kāṃdiśmfn. (fr. kāṃ diśam-,"to which region shall I fly?") , put to flight, running away, flying (see ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kāṃdiśīind. with bhū-, to take to flight View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kāṃdiśīkamfn. running away View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kāmonmādif. Name of a surāṅganā-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kāñcanāṅgadinmfn. wearing a golden bracelet (aṅgada-) on the upper arm View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kandilam. a kind of tuberous plant View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kandinm. Amorphophallus Campanulatus View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kandif. Mimosa Pudica View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kaṇḍvādim. Name of a gaṇa- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kaṇvādim. Name of a gaṇa- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kanyāvedinm. a son-in-law View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kapardibhāṣyan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kapardif. Cypraea Moneta commentator or commentary on View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kapardikārikāf. plural Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kapardinmfn. wearing braided and knotted hair (like the cowrie shell) (said of rudra-, pūṣan-, etc.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kapardinmfn. shaggy View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kapardinm. Name of śiva- etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kapardinm. of one of the eleven rudra-s
kapardinm. of a yakṣa- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kapardinm. of an author on View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kapardif. Name of a goddess View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kapardisvāminm. Name of an author. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kāpiñjalādim. a patronymic fr. kapiñjalāda- gaRa kurv-ādi-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kāraṇavādinm. "cause-declarer", a complainant, plaintiff View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kārīrādim. plural Name (also title or epithet) of a family, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
karkyādim. Name of a gaṇa- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
karmādityam. Name of a king. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
karmandinm. one who studies karmanda-'s work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
karmandinm. a beggar (equals bhikṣu-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
karṇādim. Name of a gaṇa- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
karuṇavedinmfn. compassionate, sympathizing View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
karuṇāvedif. charitableness, kindliness, sympathy View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
karuṇaveditṛmfn. (= - - din-), View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
karuṇaveditvan. compassion, sympathy View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kāruṇyavedinmfn. compassionate etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kāruṇyaveditvan. compassion View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kāśādia gaṇa- of (iv, 2, 80 ). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kaskādia gaRa () . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kāṣṭhādia gaṇa- of View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kāśyādia gaṇa- of View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kathādi(kathādi-) m. Name of a gaṇa- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kattryādim. Name of a gaṇa- (see kāttreyaka-.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kaukuvādim. patronymic (fr. kuku-vāda- equals -vāc-?) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kaumudikamfn. relating to water-lilies, abounding with them View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kaumudif. Name of a female friend of umā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kaumudif. of a female servant in kāli-dāsa-'s play View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kauśikādityan. Name of a tīrtha- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kausurubindim. patronymic fr. kusurubinda- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kavitāvedinmfn. "understanding poesy", wise, learned View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kavitāvedinmfn. a poet, genius View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kelimandiran. equals -gṛha-, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
keśavādityam. a form of the sun View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kevalādinmfn. eating by one's self alone View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
khādim. (f.?) a brooch, ring (worn on the hands or feet by the marut-s) (see v/ṛṣa--, hiraṇya--; su-khād/i-.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
khādihasta(kh/ādi--) mfn. having the hands ornamented with bracelets or rings (said of the marut-s), View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
khadif. plural fried or parched grain (see khājika-.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
khādif."eating" in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' exempli gratia, 'for example' abhyūṣa--, bisa--, qq. vv. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
khādiSee daka-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
khādinmfn. in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' eating (= ) . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
khādinmfn. decorated with bracelets or rings (as the marut-s) (perhaps equals khād/i-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
khadiram. Acacia Catechu (having very hard wood, the resin of which is used in medicine, called Catechu, Khayar, Terra japonica) etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
khadiram. Name of indra- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
khadiram. the moon View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
khadiram. Name of a man gaRa aśvādi- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
khadif. a sensitive plant (Mimosa pudica;"a kind of vegetable" ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
khādiramf(-)n. (gaRa palāśādi-) made of or coming from the khadira- tree (Acacia Catechu) etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
khādiram. equals -rasa- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
khadirabhūmfn. equals -ja-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
khadiracañcum. "having a beak hard like khadira- wood", Name of a bird (equals vañjulaka-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
khādiragṛhyan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
khadirajamfn. made from khadira- wood. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
khadirājira? View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
khadirakam. (gaRa ṛśyādi-) Name of a mountain View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
khadirakāf. lac (lākṣā-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
khādirakamfn. fr. khadir/a- gaRa arīhaṇādi- and varāhādi-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
khadirakuṇam. the fruit time of the khadira- tree, gaRa pīlv-ādi-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
khadiramayamfn. idem or 'mfn. equals -ja-.' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
khadirapattrīf. a sensitive plant (kind of Mimosa) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
khadirapattrikāf. a sensitive plant (kind of Mimosa) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
khadirarasam. the resin of the Acacia Catechu View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
khadirasāram. idem or 'n. equals -rasa- ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
khādirasāram. Catechu (resinous extract of the khadira- tree) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
khadirāṣṭakan. a decoction made of Catechu and seven other substances View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
khadirasvāminm. Name of a scholiast. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
khadiravaṇan. a khadira- forest View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
khadiravaṇikam. Name of a Buddhist bhikṣu- (vv.ll. vanika-, vanīka- ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
khadiravanikaetc. See khadir/avaṇika-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
khadiravārin. equals -rasa- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
khadiravarmanm. Name of a king View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
khadiravarṇapakṣam. "having wings or feathers of the colour of khadira- wood", Name of a bird View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
khadiravarṇaparṇam. "having wings or feathers of the colour of khadira- wood", Name of a bird View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
khadiravatīf. "overgrown with khadira-", Name of a locality gaRa ajirādi- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
khādirāyaṇam. patronymic fr. khadir/a- gaRa aśvādi-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
khādireyamfn. fr. - gaRa nady-ādi-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
khadif. idem or 'f. a sensitive plant (Mimosa pudica;"a kind of vegetable" ) ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
khādif. (perhaps) Name of a locality gaRa nady-ādi-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
khadirodakan. equals ra-rasa- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
khadiropaman. a kind of Mimosa (equals kadara-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
khāditamfn. eaten, devoured View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
khāditavatmfn. having eaten, . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
khāditavyamfn. to be eaten, iv, 5, 0/1. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
khāditṛm. an eater, devourer View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
khakholkādityam. a form of the sun View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
khanyavādinm. a mineralogist, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
khāranādim. plural (patronymic fr. khara-nādin- gaRa bāhv-ādi-) idem or 'm. plural (patronymic fr. kharagrīvan-) Name of a family ' (raṇādi- manuscripts) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kharanādinmfn. braying like an ass View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kharanādinm. Name of a man gaRa bāhv-ādi- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kharanādinm. of a ṛṣi- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kharanādif. a kind of perfume or drug View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
khedi ayas- plural rays View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
khedinmfn. tired (see a-kheditva-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
khedif. the creeper Marsilea quadrifolia View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
khedif. another plant (aśana-parṇī-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kheditamfn. disturbed, annoyed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kheditamfn. injured (as by arrows) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kheditamfn. afflicted, distressed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
khedita tavya-, etc. See khid-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kheditavyan. impersonal or used impersonally to be depressed or cast down or troubled View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
khidiram. an ascetic, penitent View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
khidiram. a pauper View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
khidiram. the moon View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
khidiram. Name of indra- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kikidivam. a blue jay View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kikīdivam. idem or 'f. idem or 'm. a blue jay ' ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kikidivim. a blue jay View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kikīdivim. idem or 'm. idem or 'f. idem or 'm. a blue jay ' ' ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kīlapādif. varia lectio for kīṭa-p- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kimīdinm. Name of a class of evil spirits View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kimīdif. idem or 'm. Name of a class of evil spirits ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kiṃśukādim. a gaṇa- of bhoja- () View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kiṃśulakādim. a gaṇa- of View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kiśarādia gaṇa- of (iv, 4, 53 ). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kiṣkindhagandikan. (varia lectio ndhika-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kledinmfn. moistening, wet View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kledif. Name of a plant (varia lectio ketakī-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kleditamfn. soiled View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kokanadif. the red water-lily View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
koṇadiśf. an intermediate point of the compass View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
koṇādityan. (perhaps) equals koṇārka-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
koṇavādinm. Name of śiva- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kosalānandif. Name (also title or epithet) of ayodhyā-, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kramādityam. Name of king skanda-gupta-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
krandadiṣṭimfn. moving with a great noise or roaring (said of vāyu-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kranditamfn. wept, called or cried out View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kranditan. weeping View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kranditan. calling View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kranditan. mutual daring View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kranditṛmfn. crier, roaring, crying View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kriyāvādinm. one who states the arguments in a law-suit commentator or commentary on View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kriyāvādinm. a plaintiff View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kṛṣṇanandinm. Name (also title or epithet) of a poet, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kṛtavedinmfn. (equals -jña-) one who acknowledges past benefits or services, grateful View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kṛtavedinmfn. observant of propriety View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kryādim. plural the roots beginning with krī- id est those of the ninth class. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kryādiSee krī-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kṣaṇabhaṅgavādinmfn. one who asserts that doctrine View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kṣāntivādin mfn. praising patience, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kṣāntivādinm. Name of a ṛṣi- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kṣāntivarṇavādinmfn. praising patience, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kṣayadivasam. the day of the destruction of the universe View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kṣemādityam. Name of a man. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kṣepadinan. equals kṣayāha- (q.v) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kṣīrābdhimandiramfn. dwelling in the ocean of milk, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kṣitidinan. a common or sāvana- day View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kṣititanayadinan. Tuesday View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kṣititanayadivasavāram. idem or 'n. Tuesday ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kṣityaditif. "the aditi- of the earth", Name of devakī- (mother of kṛṣṇa-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kṣodimanm. minuteness, excessive smallness or inferiority gaRa pṛthv-ādi-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kṣodiṣṭhamfn. (See kṣudr/a- ) smallest, thinnest View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kṣodiṣṭhamfn. very small or minute View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kṣoditamfn. pounded, ground View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kṣoditan. any substance pulverized or ground, powder, dust, flour, meal View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kṣoditaetc. See View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kṣudhārdita(dhār-) mfn. idem or '(dhār-) mfn. equals dhānvita- ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kṣuramardinm. a barber View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kudinan. an evil day View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kudinan. a rainy day. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kudinan. (equals kṣiti-d-) a civil day View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kudinaSee 2. ku-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kudiṣṭif. a measure of length (longer than a diṣṭi-, shorter than a vitasti-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kuḍyacchedinm. a housebreaker, thief View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kujadinan. "the day of Mars" id est Tuesday View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kukkuṭamardif. idem or 'm. Name of a plant (with fragrant leaves) ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kukkuṭyādiName of a gaṇa- ( ) . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kullādityam. Name (also title or epithet) of chief, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kumudadim. Name of a teacher View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kumudikamf(ī-)n. abounding with kumuda-s View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kumudif. Name of a woman View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kumudif. Name of the plat kaṭphala- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kumudif. of a small tree (the seeds of which are aromatic) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kumudif. (gaRa puṣkarādi-) an assemblage of kumuda-s or a place abounding in them etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kumudif. Name of the daughter of a daitya- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kumudif. of the mother of raghu-deva-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kumudinīnāyakam. (equals kumuda-bandhu-) the moon View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kumudinīpatim. idem or 'm. (equals kumuda-bandhu-) the moon ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kumudinīvadhūvaram. idem or 'm. idem or 'm. (equals kumuda-bandhu-) the moon ' ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kumudinīvanitāf. a loved woman fancifully represented as an assemblage of lotus flowers. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kunadif. a small river View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kuṇḍabhedinmfn. "breaking pots", clumsy View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kuṇḍabhedinm. Name of a son of dhṛtarāṣṭra- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kundif. an assemblage of jasmines View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kuñjādia gaṇa- of (iv, 1, 98 ). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kurunadif. equals ku-nad- commentator or commentary on View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kusīdikamf(ī-). a usurer View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kuṣīdinm. Name of a teacher (for kuśīti-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kusīdinm. idem or 'mf(ī-). a usurer ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kusīdinm. (See kuśīti-) Name of a descendant of kaṇva- (author of ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kusīdinm. of a teacher View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kuvādikam. "crying unpleasantly", a charlatan, quack View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
kuvalayādityam. Name of a prince (equals pīḍa-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
lagnadinan. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
lagnadivasam. an auspicious day (fixed upon as favourable for beginning any undertaking) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
lakṣaṇadipikāf. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
lakṣmaṇādityam. (with rājaputra-) Name of a poet and pupil of kṣemendra- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
lakṣmīmandiran. a fictitious Name of a town View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
lalitādikīrti(d-) m. Name of a man View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
lalitādipūjāvidhi(d-) m. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
lalitādityam. Name of a king of kaśmīra- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
lalitādityapuran. Name of a town founded by him View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
lapsudinmfn. having a beard, bearded (said of a goat) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
lāṭadiṇḍīram. Name of a poet View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
lattādinirṇayam. Name of work by govinda-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
līlāmandiran. a pleasure-house View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
liṅgādipratiṣṭhāvidhim. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
lokādim. the beginning. of the world id est the creator of the world View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
lokaninditamfn. blamed by the world, generally censured View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
lokottaravādinm. plural Name of a Buddhist school (prob. so called from their pretending to be superior to or above the rest of the world) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
loṣṭamardinmfn. crushing or breaking clods View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
madadin gaRa pragady-ādi-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
madadurdinan. large exudation of temple-juice View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
madanādityam. Name of a man View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
madhunandim. Name of 2 kings
madhusyandinm. a particular stringed instrument, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
madhyadinafor madhyaṃ-dina- q.v View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
madhyādityam. the midday sun (-gate' hani-,"when the day has reached the mid-sun" id est at noon) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
madhyamādim. (in music) a particular rāgiṇī- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
madhyamandiram. Name of the author of the mahābhārata-tātparya-nirṇaya- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
madhyamandiram. of madhvācārya- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
madhyamandiran. pudendum muliebre and anus View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
madhyaṃdinam. (madhy/a--) (n. ) midday, noon etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
madhyaṃdinam. the midday offering (savana- or pavamāna-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
madhyaṃdinam. Bassia Latifolia View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
madhyaṃdinam. Name of a disciple of yājñavalkya- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
madhyaṃdinan. Midday (personified as a son of puṣpārṇa- by prabhā-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
madhyaṃdinamfn. equals mādhyaṃdina- (q.v)
mādhyaṃdinamf(ī-)n. (m/ādh-) (fr. madhyaṃ-dina-) belonging to midday, meridional etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mādhyaṃdinam. equals mādhyaṃdinaḥ pavanaḥ- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mādhyaṃdinam. plural Name of a branch of she vājasaneyin-s etc. (see ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mādhyaṃdinam. of an astronomy school who fixed the starting-point of planetary movements at noon View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mādhyaṃdinam. of a family View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mādhyaṃdinan. equals mādhyaṃdinaṃ savanam- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mādhyaṃdinan. Name of a tīrtha- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
madhyaṃdinagatamfn. having reached the meridian (as the sun) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mādhyaṃdinagṛhyan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mādhyaṃdināraṇyakavyākhyāf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
madhyaṃdinārkasaṃtaptamfn. burnt by the midday-sun View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mādhyaṃdinaśākhāf. the school of the mādhyaṃdina-s ( mādhyaṃdinaśākhīya khīya-. mfn.belonging to it) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mādhyaṃdinaśākhīyamfn. mādhyaṃdinaśākhā
madhyaṃdinasamayam. midday-time, noon View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mādhyaṃdinasaṃdhiyāprayogam. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mādhyaṃdinasaṃhitāf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mādhyaṃdinavatind. as at the midday oblation View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mādhyaṃdināyanam. (prob. fr. madhyaṃ-dina-) Name of a teacher, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mādhyaṃdineyam. plural the school of the mādhyaṃdina-s View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mādhyaṃdif. (with śikṣā-), Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mādhyaṃdinim. (fr. idem or 'm. (prob. fr. madhyaṃ-dina-) Name of a teacher, ') Name of a grammarian, on View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
madhyaṃdinīyamfn. meridional, meridian, belonging to noon or midday View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mādhyaṃdinīyamf(ā-)n. (fr. mādhyaṃdina-) usual at the midday oblation (also yaka-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mādhyaṃdinīyamf(ā-)n. belonging to the school of the mādhyaṃdina-s View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
madhyenadiind. in or into the river View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
madior madikā- f. a kind of harrow or roller (see matya-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
madinmfn. intoxicating, exhilarating, delighting, lovely (Comparative degree din-tara-,superl. din-tama-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinmfn. intoxicating, stupefying (See gandha-mādinī-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dif. hemp View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
madiramfn. equals prec. etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
madiram. a species of red-flowering Khadiri View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
madif. See below. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
madif. spirituous liquor, any inebriating drink, wine, nectar etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
madif. a wagtail (especially in the pairing season equals matta-khañjana-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
madif. a kind of metre View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
madif. Name of durgā-, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
madif. of the wife of varuṇa- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
madif. of one of the wives of vasu-deva- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
madif. of the mother of kādambarī- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
madiradṛśmfn. "having intoxicating or fascinating eyes", lovely-eyed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
madiradṛśf. a fascinating woman View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
madirāgṛhan. a drinking-house, tavern
madirākṣamf(ī-)n. idem or 'mf(ā-)n. idem or 'f. a fascinating woman ' ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
madirākṣam. Name of a younger brother of śatānīka- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
madirāmadāndhamfn. blind through drunkenness, dead drunk View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
madirāmayamf(ī-)n. consisting of intoxicating liquor View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
madiranayanamf(ā-)n. idem or 'f. a fascinating woman ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
madirārṇava(rṇ-) m. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
madirāsakham. "friend of wine", the mango-tree View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
madirāsālāf. equals -gṛha- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
madirāsava(s-) m. any intoxicating liquor View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
madirāśvam. Name of a rājarṣi- and of a king (son of daśāśva- and grandson of ikṣvāku-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
madirāvaśagamfn. subdued by id est drunk with wine View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
madirāvatīf. Name of a girl (and of so called after her) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
madirāvatīf. of another girl View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
madirāyatanayanāf. a mistress with fascinating and lovely eyes View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
madirekṣaṇamf(ā-)n. equals ra-driś- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
madirekṣaṇavallabhāf. a mistress with fascinating eyes (varia lectio) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
madironmattamfn. drunk with wine or spirituous liquor View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
madirotkaṭamfn. excited or intoxicated with spirituous liquor View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
madiṣṇumfn. equals mandu- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
madiṣṭhamf(ā-)n. (superl. of mad/in-) very intoxicating or exhilarating etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
madiṣṭhāf. any intoxicating beverage View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
magadinmfn. gaRa pragady-ādi-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mahābhāratādiślokam. plural Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mahābhisyandinmfn. (bh-) generating hypertrophy (superl. di-tama-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mahābhisyanditamatvan. state of hypertrophy View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mahābhisyanditvan. state of hypertrophy View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mahādevabhaṭṭadinakaram. Name of learned men View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mahādevadvivedinm. Name of author. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mahādikaṭabhī(d-) f. a species of Achyranthes (varia lectio mahālik-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mahādiśf. a chief quarter of the world (east, south, west, north) commentator or commentary View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mahādivākīrtyan. Name of a sāman- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mahaikoddiṣṭan. a kind of funeral ceremony View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mahaikoddiṣṭa mahaitareya- etc. See . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mahākālarudroditastotran. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mahāmantrādisevāprakāram. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mahānandi m. Name of a king View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mahānandinm. Name of a king View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mahāpathikṛdiṣṭif. a particular sacrifice commentator or commentary View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mahāsahasrapramardif. equals prec. f. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mahāvādinm. a great controversialist View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mahāvedif. the great vedi- or altar id est the whole vedi- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mahenadiSee under 1. mahi-, . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mahendrādityam. Name of a king View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mahendramandiran. great Inscr's palace View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
maheśanandinm. Name of author. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mahiṣamardif. "crusher of mahiṣa-", Name of durgā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mahiṣamardif. a prayer addressed to durgā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mahiṣamardinītantran. Name of a tantra- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mahiṣāsuramardif. equals -ghātinī- ( mahiṣāsuramardinīstotra dinī-stotra- n.Name of a stotra-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mahiṣāsuramardinīstotran. mahiṣāsuramardinī
mahiṣāsurārdif. () equals -ghātinī-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
maitrīkaruṇāmuditam. a particular samādhi- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
makandif. Name of a woman View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mākandif. Name of a city (equals mākandī-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mākandikam. (metron. fr. makandikā- ) Name of a man View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
makārādisahasranāmann. Name of chapter of the rudra-yāmala- (containing 1000 names of rāma- beginning with m-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
makarandif. a kind of metre View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
makarandif. Name of the daughter of a vidyā-dhara- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
malabhedif. (prob.) Helleborus Niger View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
maladigdhāṅgamfn. having the limbs defiled with dirt, having the body soiled with dust View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mallādim. Name of kṛṣṇa- (varia lectio ri-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
māṃsacchedinm. idem or 'm. "flesh-cutter", Name of a mixed caste (f(ī-).) ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
māṃsādinmfn. idem or 'mfn. idem or 'mfn. flesh-eating, carnivorous ' ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mānamandiram. Name of rāvaṇa- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mananādinighaṇṭum. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mānasanayanaprasādif. Name of commentator or commentary on it. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mandārakadinan. Name of a particular day View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mandikukuram. a kind of fish (varia lectio mallikukuḍa-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mandimanm. slowness (gaRa pṛthv-ādi-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mandinmfn. delighting, exhilarating, inspiriting (said of soma-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mandinmfn. delighted, cheerful, inspirited View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mandin mandira- etc. See above. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mandiran. any waiting or abiding-place, habitation, dwelling, house, palace, temple, town, camp etc. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' dwelling in) etc.
mandiran. a stable for horses (see mandurā-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mandiran. the body View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mandiram. the sea View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mandiram. the hollow or back of the knee View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mandiram. Name of a gandharva- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mandiramaṇim. "temple-jewel", Name of śiva- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mandirapaśum. "domestic animal", a cat View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mandiṣṭhamfn. most exhilarating or delightful View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
maṅgalavādinmfn. pronouncing a benediction, expressing congratulations
maṇimañjarīchedif. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
māṇiyādityam. Name of a man View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mañjunandinm. Name (also title or epithet) of a poet, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mañjuvādinmfn. idem or '() mfn. equals -bhāṣin-.' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mañjuvādif. Name of a woman View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mañjuvādif. of a metre View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
manohlādinmfn. gladdening the heart View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
manoramākucamardif. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mantravādinm. a reciter of sacred text or spells, enchanter View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
manudivi(?) , Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
manukulādityam. Name of a king View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
manvādi Name (also title or epithet) of particular tithi-s (which are anniversaries of the 14 Manus), View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mardinmfn. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') crushing, grinding, pounding, destroying etc. (see ripu--and loṣṭa-m-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mardif. a kind of musical composition (see medinī-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
marditavyamfn. to be crushed or trodden down or laid waste View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mārgaśīrṣādipūjāf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mārgopadiśm. "road-shower", a guide, leader View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
marmabhedinmfn. equals -cchid- (literally and figuratively) etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
marmabhedinm. an arrow View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
marmacchedinmfn. equals -cchid- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
marmāvaraṇabhedinmfn. penetrating a coat of mail View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
marmavedif. (fr. -vedin- equals -vid-) knowing weak points or secrets View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
marmavibhedinmfn. equals -bhedin- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
marudiṣṭam. bdellium (see maru-deśya-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
maryādinmfn. having or keeping within bounds View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
maryādinmfn. a neighbour, borderer View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
māśabdikaSee under 3. -. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
māsādi(in the beginning of a compound) the beginning of a month View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
māsādibhāvaphalan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
māsādinirṇayam. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mātaṃgadivākaram. Name of a poet View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mātrādisrāddhanirṇaya(trād-), m. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mātṛnandinm. a species of karañja- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mayūkhādityam. a form of the sun View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mecurudi(?) , Name of a place View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
medhyamandiram. Name of a man View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
medinmfn. having medas-, possessing vigour or energy (= medasāyukta- equals bala-vat-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
medinm. "one who is unctuous or sticks close (?)", a friend, companion, partner, ally View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
medinf. See next. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
medif. "having fatness or fertility", the earth, land, soil, ground etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
medif. a place, spot View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
medif. a kind of musical composition View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
medif. Gmelina Arborea View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
medif. equals medā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
medif. Name of a lexicon (also -kośa-or medini-k-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
medinīdānan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
medinīdharam. "earth-supporter", a mountain View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
medidinan. a natural day View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
medinīdravam. dust View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
medinījam. "earth-born", the planet Mars View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
medinīkaram. Name of the author of the medinī-kośa- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
medinīkośam. See above. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
medinīnandanam. equals -ja- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
medinīpatim. "earth-lord", a king, prince View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
medinīśam. (śa-) idem or 'm. "earth-lord", a king, prince ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
medinīśatantran. Name of a tantra-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
meghācchādita() mfn. overspread or covered with clouds. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
meghanādinmfn. sounding like thunder View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
meghanādinmfn. crying (with joy) at the appearance of clouds View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
meghanādinm. a car which rumbles View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
meghanādinm. Name of a dānava- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
meghānandinm. "rejoicing in clouds", a peacock (see megha-suhṛd-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
meghaskandinm. the fabulous animal sarabha- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
merubalapramardinm. Name of a king of the yakṣa-s View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mīmāṃsāsūtradidhitif. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mimardiṣumfn. - (fr. Desiderative of mṛd-) wishing to crush or grind down View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
miśradinakaram. Name of a Scholiast or Commentator on śiśupāla-vadha-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mithyāpravādinmfn. speaking falsely, lying View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mitrapathādikuṇḍamāhātmyan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
modamodif. Eugenia Jambolana (prob. wrong reading for megha-m-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
modinmfn. rejoicing, glad, cheerful View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
modinmfn. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') gladdening, delighting View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
modif. Jasminum Zambac or Auriculatum View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
modif. equals aja-modā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
modif. musk (see modana-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
modif. an intoxicating drink View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
modinīśan. Name of a tantra-, (see medinīśa-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
moditamfn. (fr. Causal) pleased, delighted View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
moditan. pleasure, delight View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mradimanm. softness View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mradimanm. tenderness, mildness View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mradimānvitamfn. endowed with softness, mild, kind View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mradiṣṭhamfn. (superl. of mṛdu-) very soft or mild View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mṛdim. Name of a man (see mārdeya-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mṛdif. good earth or soil View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mṛdiṣṭha wrong reading for mradiṣṭha-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mṛditamfn. pressed, squeezed, crushed, broken, trampled down, laid waste etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mṛditamfn. rubbed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mṛditamfn. rubbed off, wiped away, removed, destroyed. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mṛditakukṣikamfn. (with dāva-) Name of a forest View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mṛgāreṣṭyādiprayogam. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mṛṣāvādinmfn. speaking falsely, a liar View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mṛṣāvādinm. a false accuser View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mṛtyuṃjayādihomavidhim. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mudiram. a cloud View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mudiram. a lover View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mudiram. a frog View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mudiraphalam. Asteracantha Longifolia View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
muditamfn. delighted, joyful, glad, rejoicing in (instrumental case or compound) etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
muditam. a particular sort of servant View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mudif. joy, gladness, complacency View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
muditam. sympathy in joy View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
muditan. a kind of sexual embrace View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
muditan. a particular siddhi-, sāṃkhya-s. Scholiast or Commentator View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
muditan. wrong reading for nudita- and sūdita-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
muditabhadram. Name of a man View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
muditamadālasam. or n. (?) Name of a drams. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
muditapuṣpāf. Name of a female gandharva- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mugdhabodhākhyājvarādirogacikitsāf. Name of a medical work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mukhāditvan. fr. mukhādi-,"the face etc.", View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
muktāvalivyāptivādadipikāf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
muktāvalīvyāptivādadipikāf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mukuritatārakādi View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mulādiśāntif. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mūlakādisutamn. and f(ā-). gruel made of the root of mūlaka- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
mūlasarvāstivādinm. plural Name of a Buddhist school View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
muñjādityam. Name of a poet View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nābhāgadiṣṭa wrong reading for n/ābhā-n/ediṣṭha- (above) . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nābhāganediṣṭha wrong reading for n/ābhā-n/ediṣṭha- (above) . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nābhānediṣṭham. (-) Name of a son of manu- vaivasvata- and author of View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nābhānediṣṭhamfn. (also ṣṭhīya-) relating to or composed by nābhā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nadim. a crier, caller (equals stuti- ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nadimfn. in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' See nadī-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dimfn. sounding, roaring
digam. Name of a man View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nadijam. (for --) Lablab Vulgaris View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nadiSee next. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dikam. Name of a country View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nadīkṣetrādimāhātmyan. Name of chapter of View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinmfn. sounding, resonant, howling, roaring etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinmfn. in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' equals prec. etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinmfn. pronounced with sound, sonant View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinm. Name of a dānava- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinm. of a Brahman changed into an antelope View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nāḍīparīkṣādicikitsākathanan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ditamfn. made to resound View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ditamfn. in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' sounding with, reverberant etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ditan. sound, noise View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
naganandif. "mountain-daughter", Name of durgā- (daughter of himālaya-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nāgānandiyan. "the serpents' joy", Name of a play ascribed to king harṣa-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nāgaramardim. patron. fr. nagara-mardin-, bāhv-ādi-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nagaramardinm. "town-crusher", Name of a man gaRa bāhv-ādi-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nagnanīlapaṭādikan. nick-name of kaṇāda-'s works. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
naiṣādim. a prince of niṣāda- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
naityaśabdikamfn. Va1rtt. 1 View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nakhakhādinmfn. biting (literally eating) the nail View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nakṣatrajātakādibhāvaphalan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nakṣatratārārājādityam. a particular samādhi- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
naktaṃdinan. sg. night and day View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
naktaṃdinamind. equals next View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
naktaṃdivamind. by night and day View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
naladikamf(ī-)n. dealing in Indian spikenard gaRa kiśorādi-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nānādigdeśam. sg. the regions or countries of the different quarters View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nānādigdeśātind. from everywhere View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nānārthasaṃdigdhārthavicāram. Name of a nyāya- work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nānātmavādinm. one who so asserts View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandim. "the happy one", Name of viṣṇu- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandim. of śiva- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandim. of an attendant of śiva- etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandim. of a gandharva- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandim. of a man View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandim. the speaker of a prologue (wrong reading for nāndin-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandif. joy, happiness, welfare etc. (also m. n. ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandif. Joy personified as daughter of Heaven or as wife of kāma- and mother of harṣa- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandin. equals dyūta- and dyūtāṅga- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandin. (with jaina-s) a class of sacred writings (m.or f.?) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nāndifor nodī- in compound View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandibharatam. or n. Name of work on music. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nāndidattam. Name of an author (see ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandidevam. Name of a man View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandidevīf. common Name of one of the loftiest Himalayan peaks View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandidharmam. nandi-'s or nandin-'s precepts View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandighoṣam. cry or music of joy, (especially) the proclamation of a panegyrist or herald View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandighoṣam. arjuna-'s chariot View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandighoṣavijayam. Name of a drama. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandigirim. Name of a mountain View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandigirimāhātmyan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandigrāmam. Name of a village near Daulatabad (where bharata- resided during rāma-'s banishment) etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandigrāmadarśanan. Name of chapter of View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandiguptam. Name of a prince of kaśmīra- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandijan. Lablab Vulgaris View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandif. Name of indra-'s pleasure-ground (see f. ā-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandikamfn. Cedrela Toona View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandikamfn. Name of one of śiva-'s attendants
nandikamfn. of a pupil of gautama- buddha- (chief of the village uru-vilvā-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nāndikan. equals ndī-śrāddha- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandikācāryatantran. Name of a medicine work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandikaramfn. causing joy or happiness (with genitive case) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandikaram. son of (compound) (see nandana-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandikaram. Name of śiva- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nāndikaram. equals -k- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandikāvartam. a kind of diagram (= nandy-āv-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandikāvartam. a species of plant View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandikeśam. Name of a holy place, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandikeśaliṅgan. Name of chapter of the View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandikeśvaram. Name of one of śiva-'s attendants (equals nandi-, ndin-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandikeśvaram. of an author View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandikeśvarābhiṣekam. Name of chapter of View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandikeśvarakārikāf. Name of a mystic. interpretation of the śiva-sūtra-s View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandikeśvarakāśikāf. Name of a mystic. interpretation of the śiva-sūtra-s View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandikeśvarapurāṇan. Name of an upapurāṇa- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandikeśvarasaṃhitāf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandikeśvaratārāvatīf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandikeśvaratīrthan. Name of a sacred bathing-place View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandikeśvarotpattif. Name of chapter of View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandikṣetran. a district frequented by gods View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandikuṇḍam. or n. Name of a sacred bathing-place View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandimukham. a species of rice View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandimukham. Name of a man View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandimukhasughoṣam. Name of a man ( nandimukhasughoṣāvadāna ṣāvadāna- n.Name of work ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandimukhasughoṣāvadānan. nandimukhasughoṣa
nandinmfn. (initial n-cannot be cerebralized gaRa kṣubhnādi-) rejoicing, gladdening (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandinmfn. delighting in, liking View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandinm. son (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound'; see bhāskara-n-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandinm. the speaker of a prologue (see nāndin- ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandinm. Name of several plants (the Indian fig-tree, Thespesia Opulneoides etc.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandinm. a particular form of temple (see ndi-vardhana-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandinm. Name of an attendant of śiva- etc. (see nandi-, ndīśa-, ndikeśvara-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandinm. of śiva-'s bull View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandinm. of several authors View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nāndinm. equals ndī-kara- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandināgarakamfn. Name of a particular written character View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandināgarīf. a particular kind of writing View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandif. a daughter etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandif. a husband's sister (equals nanāndṛ-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandif. Name of durgā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandif. of gaṅgā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandif. of the river bāṇa-nāśa- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandif. of one of the mātṛ-s attending on skanda- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandif. of a fabulous cow (mother of surabhi- and property of the sage vasiṣṭha-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandif. of the mother of vyāḍi- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandif. Name of several plants (equals tulasī-, jaṭāmāṃsī-etc.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandif. a kind of perfume (reṇukā-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandif. a kind of metre View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandif. (in music) a particular composition View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandif. Name of a locality View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandif. of commentator or commentary on View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandinīputram. metron. of kaṇāda- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandinīsutam. equals -tanaya- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandinītanayam. metron. of vyāḍi- (see above) . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandinītīrthan. Name of a sacred bathing-place View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandipadacchandasn. Name of work on Prakrit metres (in Prakrit.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandipuramāhātmyan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandipurāṇan. Name of a (see nandikeśvara-p-and nandīśvara-p-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandirudram. Name of śiva- in a joyful or serene form View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandiṣeṇam. equals -sena-, in nandiṣeṇeśvara ṇeśvara- n. Name of liṅga- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandisenam. Name of an attendant of skanda- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandiṣeṇeśvaran. nandiṣeṇa
nandiśikhāf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandisvāminm. Name of a grammarian View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nanditarum. Anogeissus Latifolia View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nanditūryan. a musical instrument played on joyful occasions View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandivāralakam. a species of fish View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandivardham. N. a prince (see next) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandivardhanamfn. increasing pleasure, promoting happiness (with genitive case) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandivardhanam. son View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandivardhanam. friend View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandivardhanam. the end of a half-month, the day of full moon or of new moon View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandivardhanam. a particular form of temple (see nandana-and din-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandivardhanam. (in music) a kind of measure View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandivardhanam. Name of śiva- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandivardhanam. of a prince (son of udāvasu-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandivardhanam. of a son of janaka- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandivardhanam. of a son of udayāśva- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandivardhanam. of a son of rājaka- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandivardhanam. of a son of a-jaya- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandivardhanam. of a brother of mahāvīra- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandivardhanam. Name of a town View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandivarmanm. Name of a man View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandivegam. plural Name of a people View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandivivardhanamfn. equals -vardhana- mfn. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandivṛkṣam. Cedrela Toona (see -vṛ-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandivṛkṣakam. Cedrela Toona (see -vṛ-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nandiyaśasm. Name of a prince View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nārācadurdinan. a shower (literally bad weather id est storm) of arrows View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
naradikamfn. dealing in the substance called narada- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nāradinm. Name of a son of viśvā-mitra- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nardinmfn. roaring, sounding (see gehe-n-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
narditamfn. roared, bellowed etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
narditan. bellowing, roaring, sounding View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
narditam. a kind of die or a throw at dice (equals nādī-or nāndī-. Scholiast or Commentator;prob. the chief die; see vṛṣa- ) . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
narendrādityam. Name of 2 kings of kaśmīra- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
naṣṭoddiṣṭaprabodhakadhrauvapadaṭīkāf. Name of work on music. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
navacchadi(n/a-) mfn. having 9 roofs View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
navaparṇādibhakṣaṇan. "eating of new leaves, etc.", Name of chapter of View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
navoditamfn. idem or 'mfn. newly risen (moon) ' (sun) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nayanaprasādif. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nayavedinmfn. equals -vid- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nediṣṭhamf(ā-)n. (superl. of neda-substituted for antika- ) the nearest, next, very near etc. ( nediṣṭham am- ind.next, in the first place ; nediṣṭhāt ṣṭhāt- ind.from the neighbourhood ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nediṣṭhamf(ā-)n. equals nipuṇa- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nediṣṭham. Alangium Hexapetalum View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nediṣṭham. Name of a son of manu- vaivasvata- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nediṣṭhamind. nediṣṭha
nediṣṭhātind. nediṣṭha
nediṣṭhatamamfn. (n/ed-) the nearest of all View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nediṣṭhatamāmind. (ām-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nediṣṭhinmfn. very near, very nearly related View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nemādityam. Name of trivikrama-bhaṭṭa-'s father View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nididhyāsanaSee ni-dhyai-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nididhyāsanan. profound and repeated meditation View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nidididhyāsitavyamfn. to be thought about or attended to View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nidididhyāsumfn. desirous of meditating on or attending to View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nididrāsuSee under ni-drā-, column 2. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nididrāsu(fr. Desiderative) wishing to sleep, sleepy (printed vinidr-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nidigdhamfn. ( dih-) smeared plastered View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nidigdhamfn. clinging to View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nidigdhamfn. heaped or piled up View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nidigdhāf. cardamoms. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nidigdigdhikāf. Solanum Jacquini (see nir-dagdhikā-and nir-digdh-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nidigdigdhikāf. cardamoms View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nidiśP. -diśati-, to direct, order, point out etc. (only in deriv.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nidiṣṭamfn. () wrong reading for nir-d-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
niditamfn. (n/i--) bound, fettered View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
niditamfn. hidden, concealed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nigādinmfn. reciting, telling, speaking View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nigaditamfn. recited, told, spoken etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nigaditan. speech View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nigaditavatmfn. having said or spoken View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nigaditinmfn. one who has spoken gaRa iṣṭādi-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nihnavavādinm. a defendant or witness who prevaricates or tries to hide the truth View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nihrādinmfn. sounding, pealing View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nihrāditan. roaring View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
niḥsaṃdigdhamfn. not doubtful, certain View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
niḥsaṃdigdhamind. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nikranditamfn. cried or roared (said of a faulty recitation), View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nimbādityam. Name of the founder of a vaiṣṇava- sect View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ninādinmfn. sounding, resounding, crying, resonant with (instrumental case or compound) etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ninādinmfn. in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' causing to sound, playing (a musical instrument) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nināditamfn. filled with noise, resonant with (instrumental case) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nināditan. equals prec. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nindinmfn. blaming, censuring, reproaching (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ninditamfn. blamed, censured, abused, defamed, low, despicable, prohibited, forbidden View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ninditāśvam. Name of a man View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ninditṛm. scorner, scoffer View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nīradinmfn. cloudy View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nirādiṣṭamfn. ( diś-) paid off (as a debt) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nirbhedinmfn. splitting, piercing View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nirdidhārayiṣāf. (fr. Desiderative of Causal of nir-dhṛ-) desire of investigating or ascertaining View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nirdigdhamfn. ( dih-) anointed, smeared View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nirdigdhamfn. well-fed, stout, lusty View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nirdigdhāf. Solanum Jacquini (also dhikā-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nirdiśP. -diśati- (Aorist -adikṣat- ind.p. -diśya- ; infinitive mood -deṣṭum- ), to point to (accusative), show etc. ; to assign anything to, destine for (dative case or genitive case) etc. ; to indicate, state, name, define, specify etc. ; to take for, regard as (with double accusative) ; to announce, proclaim, foretell, prophesy ; to recommend, advise, suggest (with double accusative) : Desiderative -didikṣati-, to wish to point out or define more closely View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nirdiṣṭamfn. pointed out, shown, indicated, declared, announced, foretold, enjoined etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nirdiṣṭamfn. ordered, meant or determined for, appointed to (dative case) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nirdiṣṭamfn. learned, wise (equals paṇḍita-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nirdurdinamfn. "free from bad weather", serene, bright View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nirhrādinmfn. sounding, humming, roaring View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nirīśvaravādinmfn. holding atheistic doctrine View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nirjaraprakaraṇādim. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
niśādi(śādi-) m. "beginning of night", twilight View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
niṣādinmfn. sitting down, sitting or lying or resting on or in View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
niṣādinm. an elephant-keeper or driver (see ṣādita-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
niṣādinm. Name of eka--lavya View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
niṣāditamfn. (fr. Causal) made to sit or kneel down View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
niṣāditinmfn. equals niṣāditam anena- gaRa iṣṭādi-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nisandim. Name of a daitya- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
niśāvedinm. "night-knower", a cock View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
niṣkādipramāṇan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
niṣpāditamfn. done, effected, prepared, achieved, pūr-.
niṣpāditavyamfn. equals pādanīya- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
niṣūditamfn. killed, slain, destroyed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
niṣūditamfn. (with śūlāyām-) impaled View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
niśumbhamardif. "destroyer of ni-śumbha-", Name of durgā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nisyandin(or ṣy-) mfn. flowing or dripping down or out, (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') flowing with View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nītivedinmfn. equals -jña- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nitodinmfn. piercing, penetrating View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nityadānādipaddhatif. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nityahomādiprakīrṇakan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nityahomādividhim. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nityapramuditamfn. always delighted or satisfied View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nityoditamfn. risen by itself (as knowledge) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nityoditam. a particular medicine preparation View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nityoditam. Name of a man View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nivedinmfn. knowing, aware of (compound) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nivedinmfn. communicating, reporting View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nivedinmfn. offering, presenting View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
niveditamfn. made known, announced, told, represented, entrusted, presented, given View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nodinmfn. driving away View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
noditamfn. (fr. Causal) incited, impelled View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
notpāditamfn. ungenerated View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
notpāditatvan. Vp. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nṛpamandiran. equals -gṛha- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nṛśaṃsavādinmfn. using low speech View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nṛsiṃhādisāmann. plural Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nuditamfn. equals nutta- or nunna- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nyarbudim. Name of a divine being of combative propensities View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nyāyalīlāvatīprakāśadidhitivivekam. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nyāyasaṃgrahadipikāf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nyāyasiddhāntamañjarīdipikāf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nyāyavādinmfn. speaking properly View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
nyāyavivekadipikāf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
padādim. the beginning of a verse or of a word View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pādādi(in the beginning of a compound), the beginning of a verse View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pādādimadhyayamakan. paronomasia at the beginning and in the middle of a verse (as ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pādādiyamakan. paronomasia at the beginning of a verse () View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pādaprasvedinmfn. suffering from it View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
padārthīyadivyacakṣusn. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
padavedinm. "acquainted with words", a linguist or philologist View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
padim. (prob.) a kind of animal ; equals gantu- ). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
padibaddhamf(ā-)n. (locative case of 3. pad-+ b-) tied or bound by the feet View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
padif. See tri-padikā- and dvi-p-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
padikamf(ī-)n. going on foot, pedestrian gaRa parpādi- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
padikamf(ī-)n. one pada- long View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
padikamf(ī-)n. comprising (only) one partition or division View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
padikan. the point of the foot View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dif. a sandal, shoe View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dikamf(ī-)n. lasting for a quarter of the time View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dikamf(ī-)n. amounting to + (n. with śata-,25 percent ;with or sc. ahar-,daily wages ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dikamf(ī-)n. versed in or studying the pada-patha- gaRa ukthādi- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinmfn. footed, having feet (See m) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinmfn. having pāda-s (as a, stanza) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinmfn. claiming or receiving a fourth part View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinm. a footed aquatic or amphibious animal View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinm. the heir to a fourth part of an estate View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
padiram. a road, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
padmādim. a lotus-flower etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
padmāditvan. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
padmanandi m. Name of an author View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
padmanandinm. Name of an author View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paippalādim. patronymic of a teacher View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paippalādim. (plural) Name of a school of the View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paiśunyavādinmfn. paiśunya
pākādisaṃgraham. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pakṣādim. the first day of a half month View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pallavāpīditamfn. bud-laden View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pallīśaraṭakākabhāsādiśakunan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pañcadaśacchadimfn. having 15 roofs View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pāñcajanyanādinm. Name of kṛṣṇa- (see above-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pañcāṅgādikamfn. (a pantomime) dealing with 5 members (see above) etc., View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pañcapādif. Name of a philos. work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pañcapādikādhyāsabhāṣyavyākhyāf. Name of Comm. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pañcapādikāśāstradarpaṇam. Name of Comm. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pañcapādikāṭīkāf. Name of Comm. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pañcapādikāṭikātattvadīpanan. Name of Comm. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pañcapādikāvivaraṇan. Name of Comm. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pañcapādikāvivaraṇaprakāśikāf. Name of Comm. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pañcapādikāvyākhyāf. Name of Comm. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pāñcaśabdikan. the fivefold music View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paṇḍitāhlādif. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paṇḍitavādinmfn. pretending to be wise View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pāṇigrahādikṛtyavivekam. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paṅkadigdhamfn. mud-smeared View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paṅkadigdhāṅgam. "having mud-smeared limbs", Name of a being attending on skanda- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paṅkadigdhaśarīram. "having a mud-smeared body", Name of a dānava- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parādadimfn. giving up, delivering over View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parādiś(only perfect tense -dideśa-), to order off, remove View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parameśvarāstitvavādinm. one who asserts the existence of God View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parapravādinm. a false teacher View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parārthavādinmfn. speaking for another, a mediator, a substitute View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parāskandinm. "assailing another", a thief, robber View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parasmaipadinmfn. taking those terminations View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parasparādinmfn. consuming one another or one's own kind View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parasparākrandinmfn. calling to one another View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paravādinm. an opponent, controversialist View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pardim. or f. Name of a person View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paricoditamfn. set in motion, brandished View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paricoditamfn. impelled, incited View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paridigdhan. meat covered with meal View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paridih(only subjunctive -dehat-), to cover or smear over View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paridiś(perfect tense -dideśa-), to announce, make known, point out View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paridiṣṭamfn. made known, pointed out View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paridivP. -devati-, vayati-, (rarely A1.; pr. p. f. -devatīm- ; Aorist paryadeviṣṭa- perfect tense pari-didevire- ; infinitive mood -devitum- ), to wail, lament, cry, bemoan, weep for (accusative) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parigaditinmfn. equals parigaditaṃ yena saḥ- gaRa iṣṭādi-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parihāsavedinm. a jester, a witty person View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parikheditamfn. (fr. Causal) afflicted, exhausted, ruined, destroyed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parikledinmfn. wetting or wet View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parimṛditamfn. trodden or trampled down, crushed, rubbed, ground, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pariṇatadikkarikamfn. containing mythical elephants (See dik-karin-) stooping to strike with their tusks View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parīnditamfn. gratified, presented View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pariniṣpāditamfn. (fr. Causal) developed, manifested View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paripadinm. an enemy (wrong reading for parin-?) .
pariśabditamfn. ( śabd-) mentioned, communicated View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parispanditan. throbbing, rising, appearing View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pariṣyandin mfn. flowing, streaming View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parisyandinmfn. flowing, streaming View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parivādinmfn. speaking ill of, abusing, blaming View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parivādinmfn. crying, screaming View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parivādinmfn. censured, abused View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parivādinm. an accuser, a plaintiff, complainant View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parivādinf. a lute with 7 strings View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parivādita gaRa iṣṭādi-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parivedinmfn. knowing, shrewd View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parivedif. the wife of a parivettṛ- (See above) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parivivadiṣumfn. (fr. Desiderative) wishing or trying to accuse others View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parivivadiṣuSee pari-vad-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parṇabhedif. the priyaṅgu- tree View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pārthivanandif. the daughter of a king View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paruṣavādinmfn. = speaking unkindly View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
parvadivasam. the day of a periodic change of the moon View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paryaṅkapādi() f. a species of Lupinus. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paryuditamfn. spoken, uttered View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paryuditaSee pari-vad-, p.600. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pāṣāṇabhedinm. idem or 'm. idem or 'm. equals bheda- ' or Lycopodium Imbricatum ' or Coleus Aniboinicus View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paścimadikpatim. "regent of the western region"Name of varuṇa- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paścimottaradikpatim. "regent of the north-west", Name of the god of wind View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pāśukādiprayogam. Name of chapter of sāyaṇa-'s yajña-tantra-sudhā-nidhi- . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paśuvedif. the vedi- at the animal sacrifice View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pathiṣadi() mfn. sitting in the way. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pauṇḍarīkadaśadivasapaddhatif. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pauruṣeyavedavādinm. one who asserts the human origin of the veda- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paurvapadikamfn. seizing by the fore-foot (?) on View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
paurvapadikamfn. relating to the first member of a compound (see auttarap-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pauṣadhadinan. pauṣadha
pauṣkarasādim. (fr. puṣkara-sad-) Name of a grammarian View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pīluvādinm. one who asserts the eternity of atoms View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pinākidiśf. " śiva-'s quarter", the north-east View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pippalādim. Name of a man (varia lectio papp-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pīṭhamardif. a lady who assists the heroine of a drama in securing her lover View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pitṛdinan. the day of new moon (see -tithi-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pitṛmandiran. equals gṛha- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pittagadinmfn. suffering from bilious complaints, bilious View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prabalaruditan. strong crying, excessive weeping View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pracchāditamfn. covered, wrapped up, clothed, hidden, concealed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pracchardi() f. vomiting, sickness. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pracchardi() f. vomiting, sickness. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pracodif. "inflamer", Name of the 4 daughters of niyojikā- (daughter of the demon duḥsaha-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pracodinmfn. driving forward, urging View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pracodif. Solanum Jacquini View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pracoditamfn. (fr. Causal) driven on, urged, impelled View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pracoditamfn. asked, requested, ordered, directed (see a-prac-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pracoditamfn. decreed, determined View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pracoditamfn. announced, proclaimed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pracoditamfn. sent, dispatched View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pracuditamfn. (mc. for codita-) hurled, shot off View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pradadiSee /a-pradadi-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pradhānavādinm. one who asserts the sāṃkhya- doctrine (of pradhāna-), View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pradim. a gift, present View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pradigdhaSee pra-- dih-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pradigdhamfn. smeared over, anointed, stained or covered with (instrumental case or compound) etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pradigdhan. (scilicet māṃsa-) a kind of dish prepared with meat View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pradigdham. a kind of sauce or gravy View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pradihP. -degdhi-, to smear over, besmear, anoint View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pradiśP. A1. -diśati-, te-, to point out, show, indicate, declare, appoint, fix, ordain etc. ; to direct, bid, urge ; to assign, apportion, grant (-diśyati-, ) etc.: Causal -deśayati-, to urge on, incite : Intensive (pr. p. -d/ediśat-), to animate View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pradiśf. pointing to or out, indication, direction, order, command, dominion View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pradiśf. a direction, quarter, region of the sky (accusative plural"in all directions, everywhere";with pitryā-,"the region of the pitṛ-s" id est the south ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pradiśf. an intermediate point or half-quarter (as northeast) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pradiṣṭa(pr/a--) mfn. pointed out, indicated, fixed, ordained
praditsāf. (fr. Desiderative) desire to give View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
praditsumfn. (fr. Desiderative) wishing to give (with accusative) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prāditya(pra-ād-) m. Name of two princes View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pradivf. (fr. 3. div-,"heaven"; Nominal verb -dy/aus-) the third or highest heaven (in which the pitṛ-s are said to dwell) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pradivf. the fifth of seven heavens View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pradivmfn. (fr. 3. div-,"day"[ confer, compare Latin diu]) existing from olden times, ancient View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pradivasind. from of old, long since, always, ever (/anuprad-,as of old, as formerly) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pradiviind. at all times, always, ever View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pragaditamfn. ( gad-) spoken, speaking, beginning to speak View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prāgdiśf. "the eastern quarter", the east View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prāgdiśmfn. one who has been pointed to or mentioned before View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prāgdiśīyamfn. fr. prāg diśaḥ- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pragrahādidarpaṇam. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prāguttaradigbhāgam. the north-eastern side of (genitive case) () View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prāguttaradigvibhāgam. the north-eastern side of (genitive case) () View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prahlādinmfn. delighting, refreshing View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prahlāditamfn. (fr. Causal) rejoiced, delighted View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prahrādim. plural varia lectio for pra-hlādīya-.
prāhrādi(pr/ā--) m. patronymic fr. pra-hrāda- (Name of virocana- and bali-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prahṛṣṭamuditamfn. exceedingly pleased and cheerful View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prajñāditya(jñād-) m. "sun of wisdom", N. applied to a very clever man View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prajñaptivādinm. plural Name of a Buddhist school View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prājñavādikamfn. thinking one's self wise. () View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prākāramardim. patronymic fr. next gaRa bābv-ādi-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prākāramardinm. "wall-crusher", Name of a man View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prakāśādityam. Name of author View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prakledinmfn. idem or 'mfn. moistening, wetting ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prakledinmfn. fusing, liquefying, resolving ( prakleditva ditva- n.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prakleditvan. prakledin
pramādif. a deflowered girl
pramādif. an imprudent or careless woman View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prāmādikamf(ī-)n. (fr. -māda-) arising from carelessness, erroneous, faulty, wrong (with pāṭha- m.a wrong reading) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prāmādikatvan. erroneousness, incorrectness View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pramādinmfn. negligent, careless, incautious, indifferent etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pramādinmfn. drunken, intoxicated View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pramādinmfn. insane View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pramādinmfn. ( pramāditā -- f. ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pramādinn. Name of the 47th (21st) year of a 60 years' cycle of Jupiter (see pra-nāthin-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pramāditamfn. (fr. Causal) trifled away, forfeited, lost View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pramādif. pramādin View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pramaditavyamfn. to be neglected or disregarded View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pramaditavyan. (impersonal or used impersonally) one should be negligent regarding (ablative) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pramāṇādinirūpaṇan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pramāṇādiprakāśikāf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prāmāṇyavādinmfn. one who affirms or believes in proof View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pramardinmfn. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') crushing, destroying View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pramarditamfn. (fr. Causal) crushed, bruised View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pramarditṛmfn. one who crushes, a destroyer View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prameditamfn. idem or 'mfn. one who has begun to become fat ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prameditamfn. one who has begun to show affection ( prameditavat -vat- mfn. idem or 'mfn. idem or 'mfn. one who has begun to become fat ' ' ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prameditamfn. being or made unctuous, unctuous, greasy View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prameditaSee pra-mid-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prameditavatmfn. pramedita
prāmodikamf(ī-)n. (fr. -mīta-) charming, enchanting View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pramodinmfn. causing excessive joy, delighting View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pramodinmfn. delighted, happy View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pramodinm. a kind of rice (equals modaka-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pramodif. Odina Wodier (equals jiṅginī-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pramoditamfn. delighted, rejoiced View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pramoditam. Name of kubera- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pramodif. Name of one of the 8 sāṃkhya- perfections View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pramuditamfn. delighted, pleased, glad etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pramuditamfn. gladsome (said of the autumn) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pramuditamfn. wrong reading for pracudita- (which mc. for pra-codita-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pramudif. (with Buddhists) Name of one of the 10 bhūmi-s View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pramuditan. gladness, gaiety View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pramuditan. Name of one of the 8 sāṃkhya- perfections View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pramuditahṛdayamfn. delighted in heart View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pramuditapralambasunayanam. Name of a gandharva- prince View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pramuditavadanāf. Name of a metre View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pramuditavatmfn. pleased View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prānādif. = (or wrong reading for) pra-ṇāḍī- equals pra-ṇālī- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
praṇaditamfn. sounding, buzzing, humming (as a bee) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
praṇoditamfn. (fr. Causal) set in motion, agitated,
praṇoditamfn. driven, guided View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
praṇoditamfn. directed, ordered View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
praṇuditamfn. beaten, struck () View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prapādika m. a peacock View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prapannadinacaryāf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
praruditamfn. one who has begun to weep, weeping View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prāsādikamf(ā-)n. (fr. pra-sāda-) kind, amiable View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prāsādikamf(ā-)n. given by way of blessing or as a favour View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prāsādikamf(ā-)n. (fr. prā-sāda-) pleasant, beautiful View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prāsādif. a chamber on the top of a palace View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prasādinmfn. clear, serene, bright (as nectar, the eyes, face etc.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prasādinmfn. clear, perspicuous (as a poem), View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prasādinmfn. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') calming, soothing, gladdening, pleasing View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prasādinmfn. showing favour, treating with kindness View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prasāditamfn. cleared, rendered clear (a-pr-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prasāditamfn. pleased, conciliated etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prasāditamfn. worshipped. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prasāditan. plural kind words View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prāsādivārikam. a kind of attendant in a monastery View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prasedi varia lectio for prasīdikā- q.v View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prasedivasmfn. one who has become pleased or propitiated, favourable View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prasedivasSee pra-- sad-, p.696. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prasīdif. a small garden (varia lectio prasedikā-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
praskandif. diarrhoea View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
praskandinmfn. leaping into (compound). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
praskandinmfn. attacking, daring, bold View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
praskandinm. Name of a man View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
praśnādikam. or n. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
praśnavādinm. a fortune-teller, astrologer View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prasvedinmfn. sweating, covered with perspiration View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prasveditamfn. sweated, perspired View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prasveditamfn. hot, causing perspiration View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prasveditavatmfn. suffering or producing perspiration (see ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prasyandinmfn. oozing forth View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prasyandinmfn. shedding (tears) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prasyandinm. a shower of rain View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratāpādityam. Name of several princes ( pratāpādityatā -- f.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratāpādityatāf. pratāpāditya
prātardinan. the early part of the day, forenoon View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prātarmādhyaṃdinasavanan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prātarṇādinm. "crowing in morning", a cock View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prathamacittotpādikamfn. one who first thinks (of doing anything) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prathamadarśanadinan. the first day of seeing any one (genitive case) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prathamadivasam. a first day, principal day View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prathamanirdiṣṭamfn. first mentioned, first named View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prathamanirdiṣṭatāf. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prathamoditamfn. first uttered, uttered previously View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prathitavidiśālakṣaṇamfn. renowned under the title of vidiśā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
praticoditamfn. impelled or excited against (accusative) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratidinam ind. day by day, daily, every day View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratidiśCaus. -deśayati-, to point towards, point out ; to confess View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratidiśamind. in every direction or quarter, all around View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratidiśam See . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratidivP. -dīvyati-, to throw or cast against ; to play at dice with (accusative), to stake anything (genitive case or accusative) at dice against View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratidivanm. the sun View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratidivanm. a day View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratidivasamind. day by day, daily, every day View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratijñālakṣaṇadidhitiṭīkāf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratikūlavādinmfn. equals -bhāṣin- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratimādravyādivacanan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratimandiramind. in every house View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratimārodanādiprāyaścittavidhim. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratinadiind. at every river View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratināditamfn. (fr. Causal) filled with sounds, resonant, echoing or echoed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratinanditamfn. saluted or accepted kindly or cheerfully View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratinirdiś(only Passive voice -diśyate-), to point or refer back on View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratinirdiṣṭamfn. referred to again View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prātipadikamf(ī-)n. (fr. -padam-) express, explicit ( prātipadikānurodhāt nurodhāt- ind.in conformity with express terms, expressly) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prātipadikan. the crude form or base of a noun, a noun in its uninflected state ( prātipadikatva -tva- n. ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prātipadikam. fire View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prātipadikānurodhātind. prātipadika
prātipadikasaṃjñāvādam. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prātipadikatvan. prātipadika
pratipāditamfn. caused to attain, given (also in marriage), delivered, presented View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratipāditamfn. stated, proved, set forth, explained, taught View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratipāditamfn. ( pratipāditatva -tva- n.), View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratipāditamfn. caused, effected, produced View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratipāditatvan. pratipādita View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisamādiśP. -diśati-, to answer, reply ; to order, command View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisamādiṣṭamfn. bidden, directed, ordered, commanded View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃdiśP. -diśati-, to give a person (accusative or haste with genitive case) a message or commission in return ; to send back a message to (genitive case) ; to order, command View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃvādin(?), m. an adversary (probably for prati-- vādin-), . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratisaṃvedinmfn. feeling, experiencing, being conscious of anything View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratiṣṭhākalpādim. plural Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prativādibhayaṃkaram. Name of an author View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prativādinmfn. contradicting, disobedient (See /a-prativ-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prativādinmfn. answering, rejoining. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prativādinm. an opponent, adversary View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prativādinm. a defendant, respondent ( prativāditā di-- f.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prativādif. prativādin
prativaditavyamfn. to be contested or disputed, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prativedinmfn. experiencing, knowing, (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prativedinSee prati-vid-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prativeditamfn. (fr. Causal) apprised or informed of (accusative) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratodinSee śroṇi-pratodin-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratyabhinandinmfn. receiving thankfully (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratyabhinanditamfn. saluted, welcomed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratyādiśP. -diśati-, to enjoin, direct, advise ; to report, relate (with 2 accusative) ; to summon ; to decline, reject, repel View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratyādiṣṭamfn. enjoined, directed, etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratyādiṣṭamfn. overcome, surpassed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratyādiṣṭamfn. informed, apprised View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratyādiṣṭamfn. warned, cautioned View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratyādiṣṭamfn. declared (as from heaven) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratyāditsumfn. (fr. Desiderative) desirous of recovering or obtaining View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratyādityam. a mock sun, parhelion View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratyāditya(in the beginning of a compound) towards the sun (exempli gratia, 'for example' p-guda-,one whose hinder parts are towards the sun ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratyagdiśf. the western quarter View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratyakṣavādinmfn. "asserting perception by the senses", one who admits of no other evidence than perception by the senses View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratyakṣavādinm. a Buddhist View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratyaṅgirāstotropāsanādimn. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratyudiP. -eti-, to ascend to (accusative) ; to rise and go towards (accusative) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratyuditamfn. rejected, repelled View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratyuditaSee prati-vad-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratyupadiśP. -diśati- to explain singly or severally ; to teach anything (accusative) in return to (dative case) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratyupadiṣṭamfn. advised or cautioned in return View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pratyupoditamfn. ( vad-) addressed with offensive words View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prauṣṭhapadikamf(ī-)n., fr. proṣṭha-padā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pravādinmfn. giving forth a sound, uttering a cry View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pravādinmfn. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') stating, declaring, reporting, speaking of View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pravādinmfn. (fr. vāda-), being in some grammatical form or case View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pravadiṣuSee vāk-pravadiṣu-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pravaditṛmfn. one who speaks out, uttering (genitive case or accusative) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pravedinmfn. knowing well or accurately View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
praviditsumfn. (fr. Desiderative of1. -) wishing to perform (wrong reading for -dhitsu-?). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prāyaścittādigodānan. Name of work
prāyaścittādisaṃgraham. Name of work
predim. Name of a man (varia lectio proti-,) . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pretakṛtyādinirṇayam. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
priyanivedif. a female messenger of good tidings View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
priyavādif. a kind of musical instrument View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
priyavādinmfn. speaking kindly or agreeably, flattering, a flatterer etc. ( priyavāditā di-- f. ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
priyavādinm. () or (inī-) f. () a kind of bird, Gracula Religiosa. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
priyavādif. priyavādin
priyoditamfn. kindly spoken View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
priyoditan. kind speech View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prodi(pra-ud--5, i-) P. -eti-, to go up, rise ; to come forth, appear View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
proditamfn. spoken out, uttered View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prodita prodyamāna- See pra-vad-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prohyapadi () ind. (prob.) by or in pushing away the foot gaRa dvidaṇḍy-ādi-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
prohyapadidi() ind. (prob.) by or in pushing away the foot gaRa dvidaṇḍy-ādi-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pṛthagvādinmfn. each saying something different View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pulindif. (in music) equals pulindī-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
puṃsavanādiprayogam. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
punarādimfn. beginning afresh, repeated View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
punaruktavādinmfn. repeating the same things, talking idly View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
purīṣabhedinmfn. "loosening the feces", relaxing the bowels View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pūrṇabhedif. a species of plant View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pūrṇimādinan. the day of full moon View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
purudinan. plural many days View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
puruṣāntaravedinmfn. puruṣāntara
pūrvacoditamfn. formerly stated or prescribed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pūrvacoditatvan. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pūrvādimfn. beginning with the word pūrva- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pūrvadigīśam. "regent of the eastern quarter"Name of indra- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pūrvadikpati m. "regent of the eastern quarter"Name of indra- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pūrvadinan. the earlier part of the day, forenoon View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pūrvadiśf. the eastern region, east quarter View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pūrvadiṣṭamfn. determined by former actions View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pūrvadiṣṭan. the award of destiny View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pūrvadiśyamfn. situated towards the east, hearing east View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pūrvadiśyamfn. eastern View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pūrvāditasind. beginning from the east View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pūrvakarmakṛtavādinm. one who asserts that only preceding actions determine the following View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pūrvapadikamfn. relating to the first member of a compound View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pūrvapadikamfn. equals pūrva-padam adhīte veda vā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pūrvāparadinan. forenoon and afternoon View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pūrvasārasārāsvādif. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pūrvavādinm. "speaking first","making the first statement of a case", a complainant, plaintiff View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
pūrvoditamfn. aforesaid, before mentioned View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
puṣkarācchādif. a species of bird View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
puṣkarasādim. Name of a teacher (prob. wrong reading for pauṣkarasādi-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
puṣkarasādinm. equals -sāda-, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
putrādif. equals putra-jagdhī- (when used literally spelt with two t-'s exempli gratia, 'for example' puttrādinīvyāghrī-,"a tigress eating her young") View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
putraputrādif. an unnatural mother (See putra-jagdhī-and Va1rtt. 2 ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
rabhasanandinm. Name of a Buddhist author View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
rādhābhedinm. Name of arjuna- (see -vedhin-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
radinm. "tusked", an elephant View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
rāgadhyānādikathanādhyāyam. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
rahasanandin m. Name of a grammarian View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
rahasānandinm. Name of a grammarian View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
rāhubhedinm. "severing (the body of) rāhu-", Name of viṣṇu- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
rājabandinm. Name of a man (printed -vandin-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
rājādityam. Name of an author View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
rājamandiran. a king's palace, royal mansion View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
rājamandiran. Name of the chief town of kaliṅga- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
rājavandinSee -bandin-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
rakārādirāmasahasranāmann. Name of a collection of the thousand names of rāma- (from the brahmayāmala-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
raktacchardif. vomiting or spitting blood, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
raktakhadiram. a red flowering khadira- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
rāmadarśanāditasind. after having seen rāma- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
rāmakṛṣṇadikṣitīyan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
rāmānujadivyacaritran. Name of work
rāmārcanadipikāf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
raṇādityam. Name of various men View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
raṅgopamardinm. "injuring the stage", an actor who dresses like rāvaṇa- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
rāsabhavandif. Arabian jasmine View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
rasabhedinmfn. of different taste or flavour View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
rasabhedinmfn. discharging juice (said of fruits which burst with ripeness) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
rasādiśuddhif. Name of medical work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
rasāsvādinm. "juice-sipper", a bee View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
rāṣṭrabhedinm. "subverter of a kingdom", a rebel View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
rāṣṭradipsumfn. intending to injure a kingdom, menacing a country View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ratimandiran. a pleasure-house View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ratimandiran. pudendum muliebre View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ratnādinandinm. Name of a muni- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ratnādiparīkṣāf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
rātridivam wrong reading for rātriṃ-d- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
rātriṃdivan. night and day View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
rātriṃdiind. by night and day View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
rātriṃdivamind. by night and day View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
rātriṃdivasan. night and day View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
rātrivedinm. "night-knower", a cock View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
raudhādikamf(ī-)n. (fr. rudh-ādi-) belonging to the class of roots beginning with rudh- (id est the 7th class) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ravidinan. day of the sun, Sunday View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ravijaputradinan. Saturday, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ṛgayanādim. Name of a gaṇa- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ṛgvedinmfn. conversant with the ṛg-- veda-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ṛgyajuḥsāmavedinmfn. conversant with the above three veda-s. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ripumardinmfn. harassing or destroying enemies View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
roditavyamfn. to be bewailed or lamented (n. impersonal or used impersonally it is to be wept or cried) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
rogārditamfn. idem or 'mfn. suffering from disease, sick ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
rogonmāditamfn. maddened by disease (said of a dog) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ṛśyādim. Name of a gaṇa- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ṛtavādinmfn. saying right, speaking the truth View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
rudhirapradigdhamfn. besmeared with blood View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ruditamfn. wept, lamented etc. weeping, crying, lamenting View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ruditamfn. wet with tears View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ruditan. weeping, crying, lamentation View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
rudranandinm. () Name of author. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
rudrayāmalādisaṃgraham. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
rūkṣavādinmfn. speaking roughly View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
rurudiṣāf. wish or inclination to weep View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
rurudiṣā ṣu- See . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
rurudiṣumfn. wishing to weep, inclined to cry View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śabdabhedinmfn. equals -vedhin- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śabdabhedinm. an arrow View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śabdabhedinm. Name of arjuna- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śabdabhedinm. the anus View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śabdādim. (scilicet viṣaya- q.v) the objects of sense beginning with sound View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śabdādidharminmfn. having the quality of sound etc. () View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śabdādimatmfn. having the quality of sound etc. () View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śābdikamfn. sonorous, uttering a sound View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śābdikamfn. relating to sounds or words, verbal View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śābdikam. "conversant with words", a grammarian, lexicographer, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śābdikābharaṇan. Name of a grammar by dharma-kīrti-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śābdikacintāmaṇim. Name of a gram. work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śābdikanarasiṃham. Name of a grammarian View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śābdikarakṣāf. Name of a gram. work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śābdikavidvaktavipramodakam. or n. a list of words formed by uṇādi- suffixes (by veṅkaṭeśvara- who lived at the end of the 17th century). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śabdinmfn. sounding, noisy View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śabdinmfn. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') resounding with (varia lectio -nādin-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śabditamfn. sounded, cried, uttered etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śabditamfn. invoked (as deity) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śabditamfn. communicated, imparted, taught View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śabditamfn. called, named etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śabditan. noise, cry, the braying (of an ass) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sabhāprapādinmfn. frequenting assemblies View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sacchadismfn. covered, hidden View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sadadiind. (see next) generally, usually View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sadaṃdimfn. (prob. fr. sadam-+ di-fr.4. -) binding or lasting for ever (applied to the disease called takman-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sadāmuditan. a particular siddhi- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sadāpramuditan. "perpetual gladness", Name of one of the 8 sāṃkhya- perfections View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ṣaḍbhāvavādinm. a maintainer of the theory of the six bhāva-s (viz. dravya-, guṇa-, karman-, sāmānya-, viśeṣa-, samavāya-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ṣāḍguṇyaguṇavedinmfn. acquainted with the virtues of the six measures View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sādhadiṣṭimfn. (fr. pr. p. of sādh-+ 3. iṣṭi-) having effective sacrifices or prayers View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sadhamādinmfn. equals -mad- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sādhuvādinmfn. speaking rightly or justly View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sādhuvādinmfn. applauding View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sādhuvādinmfn. wrong reading for -vāhin- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sādhvaninditamfn. unblamed by the good, of irreproachable character View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sadiSee pathi-ṣ/adi-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dim. (for 2.See sub voce, i.e. the word in the Sanskrit order) a horseman View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dim. a charioteer View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dim. a warrior View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dim. wind View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dim. a dispirited or melancholy person View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dimfn. having a beginning ( sāditva -tva- n.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
di sādita-, sādin- etc. See . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinmfn. any one sitting or riding on (compound) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinm. a horseman, charioteer etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinm. (fr. Causal) exhausting, wearying, destroying View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sadiśmfn. together with the quarters (of the sky) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ditamfn. (fr. Causal) made to sit down, set down View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ditamfn. depressed, broken, wasted, destroyed etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ditamfn. made to go, drawn, dragged View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ditvan. sādi
sadivasind. (equals sady/as-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sadivasind. (equals sa-dyas-) on the same day, at once, immediately View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sadurdinamfn. enveloped in clouds View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sadvādinmfn. true-speaking View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sadvāditamfn. well-spoken View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ṣaḍvidiksaṃdhānan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sāgaranandinm. Name of a poet View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sahasracaṇḍyādiprayogapaddhatif. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sahasracaṇḍyādividhim. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sahasrakalaśasnapanādim. Name of work
sahoditamfn. said together, declared comprehensively or collectively View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śailādim. (fr. idem or 'm. (fr. śilāda-) a patronymic ') patronymic of nandin- (one of śiva-'s attendants)
śairṣacchedikamfn. (fr. śīrṣaccheda-) one who deserves to have his head cut off View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śakādityam. "sun of the śaka-s", Name of king śāli-vāhana- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sakalavedinmfn. all-knowing View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śakradiśf. equals -kāṣṭhā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śakrādityam. Name of a king View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śākrīyadiśf. śākrīya
śaktivādinm. one who asserts the śakti--doctrine, an adherent of śiva--doctrine, a śākta- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śākulādikamf(ā-,or ī-)n. (fr. śakulāda-), gaRa kāśy-ādi-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sālokyādicatuṣṭayan. the four (stages of beatitude), viz. salokya- etc. (the others beings sāmīpya-, sārūpya-,and sāyujya-;See also rṣṭi-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samabhinanditamfn. rejoiced with, congratulated View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samabhiṣyandinmfn. causing hypertrophy View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samacoditamfn. equals saṃ-c-, driven or shot off View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samādhibhedinmfn. one who interrupts meditation View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samādiśP. -diśati-, to assign, allot ; to point out, indicate, announce, communicate, declare ; to appoint, name, designate etc. ; to foretell, foreshow ; to direct, advise, order, command to (dative case infinitive mood,or -artham-) etc.: Causal -deśayati-, to order, command View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samādiṣṭamfn. assigned, indicated, directed, commanded, enjoined View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samantaprasādikam. Name of a bodhi-sattva- (varia lectio -prās-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samantaprāsādikamfn. affording help or assistance on all sides (also varia lectio for prec.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samantaprāsādikatāf. complete readiness to offer help (one of the 8 minor marks of a buddha-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samanudiśP. -diśati-, to assign or apportion anything (accusative) to any one (dative case) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sāmānyalakṣaṇadidhitiṭīkāf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sāmānyalakṣaṇadidhitiṭippaṇīf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sāmānyaniruktididhitiṭīkāf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samāsāsāditamfn. approached, met with etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samāvadindriyamfn. = View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samavadiśP. -diśati-, to point or refer to, explain with reference to anything View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sāmavaidikamfn. relating or belonging to the sāma-- veda- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samāvartanādiprayogam. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samayabhedinmfn. breaking an agreement View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sāmbādityam. a particular form of the sun View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃcoditamfn. (fr. idem or 'mfn. (fr. Causal) to be urged on or impelled ') impelled, ordered, commanded View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃdadiSee saṃ--, column 2. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃdadimfn. grasping, comprehending View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃdhyādibrahmakarman(dhyād-), n. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃdidarśayiṣumfn. (fr. Desiderative of Causal) wishing to show View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃdidhakṣumfn. (fr. Desiderative) wishing to burn up or to consume by fire View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃdidṛkṣumfn. (fr. Desiderative) wishing to see View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃdigdhamfn. smeared over, besmeared or covered with (instrumental case or compound) etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃdigdhamfn. confused, confounded with, mistaken for (instrumental case or compound) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃdigdhamfn. questioned, questionable etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃdigdhamfn. precarious, doubtful, dubious, uncertain, unsettled, doubtful about, despairing of (compound) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃdigdhamfn. riskful, dangerous, unsafe (as a ship) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃdigdhan. an ambiguous suggestion or expression View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃdigdhabuddhi() mfn. having a doubtful mind, sceptical View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃdigdhākṣaramfn. having indistinct utterance View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃdigdhalekhyan. a writing or document of doubtful meaning or authority View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃdigdhamati() mfn. having a doubtful mind, sceptical View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃdigdhaniścayamfn. one who hesitates to hold a firm opinion View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃdigdhaphalamfn. having arrows with poisoned tips (according to to others "of uncertain result or efficacy") , View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃdigdhapunaruktatvan. uncertainty and tautology View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃdigdhārthamfn. having doubtful meaning, dubious in sense View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃdigdhārtham. a doubtful or disputed matter View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃdigdhatāf. () uncertainty, hesitation, indistinctness View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃdigdhatvan. () uncertainty, hesitation, indistinctness View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃdigdhīkṛtamfn. made to present a doubtful resemblance View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃdihP. -degdhi-, to smear, besmear, cover etc. ; to heap together ; A1. -digdhe- (pr. p. -dihāna-,or -dehamāna-), to be doubtful or uncertain (said of persons and things) : Passive voice -dihyate-, to be smeared over or covered, be confused, confounded with (instrumental case) ; be indistinct or doubtful or uncertain etc.: Causal -dehayati-, to make indistinct or uncertain, confuse, perplex ; (A1.) to be doubtful or uncertain (in saṃ-dehayāna- varia lectio -dehamāna-)
saṃdihf. a heap, mound, wall View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃdiśP. -diśati- (ind.p. -diśya- q.v), to point out, appoint, assign ; to state, tell, direct, command, give an order or message to (genitive case or dative case,sometimes two accusative;with abhi-dūti-,"to a female messenger") etc. ; to despatch any one (accusative) on a message to (dative case) : Causal -deśayati-, to cause to point out or declare, invite or ask to speak about View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃdiṣṭamfn. pointed out, assigned etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃdiṣṭamfn. stipulated, promised View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃdiṣṭan. news, tidings, information View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃdiṣṭārtham. one who communicates information or news, a messenger, herald, pursuivant View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃdiṣṭavatmfn. one who has given an order or message, to (genitive case;also = perfect tense saṃ-dideśa-,"he-has given etc.") View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃdiśyaind. bidding farewell View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃditamfn. cut off, cut View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃditamfn. bound or fastened together, detained, caught View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃgamādityam. Name of a man View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃhlādinmfn. refreshing, cheering View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃhrādim. "id.", Name of a rākṣasa- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃhrādikaṇṭhamn. a noisy voice View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃhrādinmfn. sounding together, tumultuous, noisy View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃhrādinm. Name of a rākṣasa- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samididhmavraścanan. splitting fire wood of various kinds View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śaṃkaradigvijayam. " śaṃkara-'s victory over every quarter (of the world)", Name of a fanciful account of the controversial exploits of śaṃkarācārya- (q.v) by mādhavācārya- (also called saṃkṣepa-saṃkarajaya-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śaṃkaradigvijayam. equals śaṃkara-vijaya- below View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śaṃkaradigvijayaḍiṇḍimam. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śaṃkaradigvijayasāram. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sāṃkhyayogavadinm. an adherent of the theistical sāṃkhya-yoga- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃkrāntivādinm. plural a particular Buddhist school View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sammadinmfn. gladdening, exhilarating View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sammardinmfn. pressing thoroughly, rubbing, crushing View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sammimardiṣuSee sammṛd-, . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sammimardiṣumfn. about to crush View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sammodikam. a kind or friendly person, comrade, companion View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃnāditamfn. (fr. idem or 'm. Name of a monkey ') caused to resound, filled with noise or cries View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃnisūditamfn. ( sūd-) altogether killed, destroyed (Bombay edition -ṣūdita-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sāmpādikamfn. efficacious View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sampadinm. Name of a grandson of aśoka- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sampādinmfn. coinciding with, fit or suitable for (instrumental case or compound)
sampādinmfn. effecting, accomplishing, procuring View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sampāditamfn. brought about, accomplished, fulfilled ( sampāditatva -tva- n.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sampāditatvan. sampādita
sampracoditamf(ā-)n. urged on, impelled, incited View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sampracoditamf(ā-)n. required View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sampradiśP. -diśati-, to point out or indicate fully, appoint, designate View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sampradiṣṭamfn. clearly pointed out, indicated, designated View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sampradiṣṭamfn. known as, called (Nominal verb) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sampraṇāditamfn. (fr. Causal) made to resound View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sampraṇarditamfn. ( nard-) roared out, bellowed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sampraṇuditamfn. driven or urged on
sampratinanditamfn. greeted joyfully, welcomed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sampratipāditamfn. (fr. idem or 'n. appointing to (locative case) ') delivered over, bestowed, given View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sampravāditan. causing to sound together View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃśayacchedinmfn. clearing all doubt, decisive View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃśayocchedinmfn. resolving doubts View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃskārādimatmfn. one who has received consecration etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃsvedinmfn. perspiring View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃtodinmfn. striking, stinging View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samuddidhīrṣuSee below. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samuddidhīrṣumfn. wishing to save View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samuddiśP. -diśati- (ind.p. diśya- q.v), to point out or indicate fully, mention at full, state, declare, communicate etc. ; to designate as, name (two accusative) ; to enter into discussion with (instrumental case) ; to refer or relate to (See next) . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samuddiṣṭamfn. fully pointed out or declared or indicated, shown, explained, enumerated, particularized etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samuddiṣṭamfn. designated as, named, called View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samuddiśyaind. having fully pointed out etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samuddiśyaind. (with accusative) with reference or regard to, on account or in behalf or in honour of. at, against, towards, to View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samudiP. -eti-, to go upwards or rise up together, come together or prepare (for battle etc.) ; to rise (as the sun) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samuditamfn. (for 2.See under sam-ud-- i-) spoken to or with, addressed, accosted View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samuditamfn. agreed upon (See yathā-samuditam-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samuditamfn. consented, settled, customary View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samuditamfn. (for 1.See saṃ-vad-,) gone up, risen, elevated, lofty View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samuditamfn. collected, gathered together, united, assembled View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samuditamfn. possessed of, furnished with (instrumental case or compound) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samuditamfn. furnished with everything, well supplied, wanting nothing View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samuditṛmfn. rising, surging (used to explain samudr/a-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samuditvaramfn. going up, rising View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samudrādithe 4th or other syllable in a stanza when a caesura follows View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samupadiśP. -diśati-, to point out or indicate fully, show ; to assign (with accusative of person and of thing) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
samupapāditamfn. (fr. Causal) made ready, prepared View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sāṃvādikamfn. (fr. saṃ-vāda-) colloquial, controversial, causing discussion View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sāṃvādikam. disputant, controversialist, logician View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃvādinmfn. conversing, talking, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃvādinmfn. agreeing or harmonizing with, corresponding to (genitive case or compound), View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃvaditamfn. (fr. idem or 'n. obtaining the victory in disputes, ') caused to speak with etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃvaditamfn. agreed upon View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃvādif. likeness, resemblance View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃvaditavyamfn. to be talked over or agreed upon View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃvaditavyamfn. to be spoken to or addressed. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃvāditṛmfn. holding a colloquy, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃvatsaradidhitif. See -kṛtya-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃvatsarādiphalan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃvatsarakṛtyadidhitif. saṃvatsarakṛtya
saṃvatsarasvadita(r/a--) mfn. well seasoned or prepared for a year View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sāṃvatsarikaikoddiṣṭaśrāddhaprayogam. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃveditamfn. (fr. Causal) made known, informed, instructed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃviditamfn. known, recognized, understood View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃviditamfn. searched, explored View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃviditamfn. assented to, agreed upon, approved ( saṃviditam am- ind."with the approval of") View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃviditamfn. admonished, advised View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saṃviditamind. saṃvidita
sāndilya wrong reading for śāṇḍilya-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sāñjhanandinm. Name of a poet View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śāntyagniparīkṣādigrantham. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sapadiind. (sa-+ pada-) at the same instant, on the spot, at once, immediately, quickly View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saptadaśacchadimfn. (t/a--) having 17 roofs View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saptadina (in the beginning of a compound) 7 days, a week View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saptadivasa(in the beginning of a compound) 7 days, a week View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saptavādinm. Name of the jaina-s (see -bhaṅgin-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śāradādikalpam. Name of work (d-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śaradijamfn. (locative case of śarad-+ ja-) produced in autumn, autumnal View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śāradif. Mimusops Elengi View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śāradif. Cucumis Utilissimus View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śāradikamfn. autumnal (only applied to certain substantives, as śrāddha-, ātapa-, roga-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śāradif. See śāradaka-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śāradinmfn. autumnal, belonging to autumn View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śaradurdinan. a shower of arrows View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sārakhadiram. "hard khadira-", a kind of Acacia Catechu View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sārāsvadif. Name of a vedānta- work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sardigṛdim. a facetious expression for the female organ View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śardisor ś/ardis- (of unknown meaning) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śārṅkhalatodim. patronymic fr. śṛṅkhala-todin- gaRa bāhv-ādi-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sarvadevatāpiṣpādipūjanan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sarvādim. the beginning or first of all things View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sarvādimfn. having any kind of commencement whatever View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sarvadigvijayam. conquest of all regions, universal conquest View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sarvadiṅmukhamind. towards all regions View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sarvāstitvavādinm. equals sti-vādin- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sarvāstivādinmfn. or m. an adherent of the above doctrine View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sarvasukhaduḥkhanirabhinandinm. a particular samādhi- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sarvaśūnyatvavādinm. sarvaśūnyatva
sarvatobhadrādicakrāvalif. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sarvatobhadramaṇḍalādikārikāf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sarvatodikkamfn. extending in every direction, Scholiast or Commentator View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sarvatodikkamind. = (or wrong reading for) next View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sarvatodiśamind. from all sides, in all directions View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sarvatodiśasind. (as-) idem or 'ind. from all sides, in all directions ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sarvatūryaninādinm. "playing all instruments", śiva- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sarvavādinm. Name of śiva- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sarvavādisammatamfn. approved by all disputants, universally admitted View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sārvavaidikamfn. (fr. idem or 'm. a Brahman conversant with all the veda-s ') versed in all the veda-s View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sarvavedinmfn. omniscient View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sarvavedinmfn. knowing all the veda-s View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sarvaveditṛmfn. equals -vettṛ- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sarvorutrivedinm. Name of an author View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sasādimfn. with charioteers View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śaśidivākaram. dual number moon and sun View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sāsnādimat(sāsnād-) mfn. having a dewlap etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ṣaṣṭhādimfn. (in Vedic gram.) beginning with the sixth letter id est with the vowel ī-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ṣaṣṭhyādikalpabodhanan. a festival in honour of durgā- on the 6th day of the month āśvina- (when she is supposed to be awakened) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ṣaṣṭidinamfn. relating to or lasting a period of 6o days, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śāstravādinm. a teacher of the śāstra- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śāśvatamandiramfn. having a fixed dwelling or abode View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śatacaṇḍīsahasracaṇḍyādividhānan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śatapādif. idem or 'm. a centipede ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śatapādif. a kind of medicinal plant View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ṣaṭcakradipikāf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ṣaṭcakrādisaṃgraham. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
satkāryavādinm. an adherent of the above doctrine View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ṣaṭpadif. a class of Prakrit metres View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
satpramudif. (in sāṃkhya- philosophy) Name of one of the 8 perfections (see sadā-pramudita-), View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ṣaṭtriṃśadābdikamfn. lasting 36 years View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ṣaṭtriṃśaddipikāf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ṣaṭtriṃśadiṣṭakamfn. (ṣ/aṭ--) consisting of 36 bricks View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
satyabhedinmfn. violating truth, promise-breaking View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
satyakāruṇyavedinmfn. possessing truth and tenderness and the veda- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
satyavādinmfn. equals -vācaka- etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
satyavādinm. Name of kauśika- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
satyavādinm. Name of a goddess of the bodhi--tree View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
satyavādif. a form of dākṣāyaṇī- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
satyavādif. () veracity, truthfulness. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
satyavāditvan. () veracity, truthfulness. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śaucādireyam. a patronymic View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
saunandinm. "having saunanda-", Name of balarāma- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sauradivasam. a solar day View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śauryādimatmfn. endowed with heroic and other virtues View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śauryonmādinmfn. "intoxicated by heroic", foolhardy View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sauvarṇabhedif. the plant priyaṅgu- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
savaidika wrong reading for -vedika-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śavamandiran. a place for cremating corpses View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
savedikamfn. along with a seat bench View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
savidiśmfn. with the intermediate quarters View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sāvitrādikāṭhakacayanan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sāvitrādiprayogavṛttif. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
savitṛsutadinan. Saturday View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sedif. (fr. sad-) weariness, exhaustion, decay View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sedivas perfect tense parasmE-pada of sad- q.v View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
setubhedinmfn. breaking down barriers, removing obstructions View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
setubhedinm. Croton Polyandrum or Tiglium View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
siddhanandinm. Name of a grammarian View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
siddhasenadivākaram. Name of a son of sarva-jña- and pupil of vṛddha-vāda-sūri- (said to have induced vikramāditya- to tolerate the jaina-s) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
siddhasenadivākṛtm. Name of a son of sarva-jña- and pupil of vṛddha-vāda-sūri- (said to have induced vikramāditya- to tolerate the jaina-s) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śikhidiśf. agni-'s quarter of the sky, south-east View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śilāditya(d-) m. Name of a king (see śīlāditya-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śīlādityam. "sun of virtue", Name of various kings (especially of a son of vikramāditya-, also called pratāpa-śīla-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
siṃhanādanādinm. Name of a bodhi-sattva-
siṃhanādif. Alhagi Maurorum View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
siṃhanādinm. Name of a māra-putra- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
siṃhanardinmfn. roaring like a lion View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
siṅgāpidim. Name of a poet View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śīrṣacchedika wrong reading for śairṣacch- (q.v) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śiṣṭādiṣṭamfn. prescribed or approved by the learned View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śiśunandim. Name of a king View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sitādi(di-) m. molasses View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sītādivyacaritran. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śivadiśf. " śiva-'s quarter", the north-east View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śivādityam. (with miśra-) Name of an author (also called nyāyācārya-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śivādityamaṇidīpikāf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śivādityamaṇidīpikākhaṇḍanan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śivādityaprakāśikāf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śivakeśādipādāntavarṇanastotran. Name of a stotra-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śivapādādikeśāntavarṇanastotran. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śivapāramparyapratipādikaśrutismṛtyudāharaṇan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śivārādhanadipikāf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
skandilācāryam. Name of a preceptor View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
skandinmfn. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') effusing, shedding View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
skandinmfn. coagulating (See a-sk-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
skandinmfn. leaping, jumping View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
skandinmfn. bursting out View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
skanditamfn. emitted, effused, shed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
skanditamfn. going View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ślakṣṇavādinmfn. speaking softly or gently View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ślīpadinmfn. having a swelled leg, suffering from elephantiasis
ślīpadinm. a club-footed man View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
smaddiṣṭi(sm/ad--) mfn. well trained or practised View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
smadibha(sm/ad--) n. "having followers (?)", Name of a man (the enemy of kutsa-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
smadiṣṭa(sm/ad--) mfn. having an errand View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
smaramandiran. equals -gṛha- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
smayādikamfn. beginning with (id est based chiefly on) arrogance View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
snānīyocchāditasnātamfn. one who has bathed and rubbed himself with unguents etc., View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
snehavimarditamfn. rubbed or anointed with oil View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ṣoḍaśabheditamf(ā-)n. divided into 26 kinds, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ṣoḍaśāditantran. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
somādityam. Name of a man, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
somādityam. of a king View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
somanandinm. Name of one of śiva-'s attendants View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
somanandinm. of a grammarian View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śoṇitādigdhamfn. blood-stained View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
spandinmfn. quivering, throbbing, pulsating, tremulous View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
spanditamfn. quivering, trembling View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
spanditamfn. (fr. Causal) set in motion, produced View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
spanditan. a pulsation, throb, trembling View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
spanditan. movement or activity (of the mind) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śrāddhadinan. the day of a śrāddha-, anniversary of the death of a near relative View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śrāddhādividhim. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śravaṇānandif. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śrīdharanandinm. Name of author View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śrīgaditan. a kind of uparūpaka- or minor drama (described as a composition in one act, founded upon a famous story, and dedicated chiefly to the goddess śrī-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śrīkaraṇādim. a chief secretary View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śriyāditya(śriyād-) m. Name of a man View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śṛṅgārādirasam. Name of a rhetoric work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śṛṅgotpādif. Name of a yakṣiṇī- (producing horns and changing men into animals) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śṛṅkhalatodinm. Name of a man gaRa bāhv-ādi- (see śārṅkhalatodi-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śroṇipratodinmfn. kicking the hinder parts or posteriors View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śrotrādin. "the ear and the other senses", the five senses (See indriya-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śrotravādinmfn. willing to hear, obedient View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śrutanigadinmfn. able to recite what has once been heard ( śrutanigaditva di-tva- n. Scholiast or Commentator) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śrutanigaditvan. śrutanigadin
śrutinigadinmfn. equals śruta-n- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śrutiprapādif. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śrutismṛtyuditamfn. declared or enjoined by the veda- and human law View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śrutyuditamfn. idem or 'mfn. said or enjoined in the veda- ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
stambhanādividhim. Name of a mantra-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sthāṇudiśf. " śiva-'s quarter", the north-east View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sthāvarādin. the poison called vatsa-nābha- (q.v) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
stotrādipāṭham. Name of work. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
strīśūdrādidinacaryākramam. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
stryādivyatyāsamind. alternating with the wife so that the wife begins
śubhadinan. an auspicious or lucky day View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śubhrakhādimfn. wearing glittering bracelets or rings (applied to the marut-s) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
succhardismfn. (superl. d/iṣ-ṭama-) affording good shelter View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sudarśanādiyantravidhim. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sudhāsyandinmfn. flowing with nectar View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śudiind. (contracted fr. śukla-,or śuddha-and dina-,also written sudi-as if for su-dina-) in the light fortnight or light half of a lunar month (see vadi-).
sudiind. (thought by some to be a contraction of su-dina-,but really wrong reading for śudi- q.v) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
di mfn. streaming, overflowing (see sūda-vat-), View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sudīditimfn. flaming brightly, shining beautifully View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sudihmfn. well polished, bright, sharp (as teeth) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinmfn. streaming, overflowing (see sūda-vat-), View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sudinamf(ā-)n. clear, bright (as a day or morning) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sudinan. a clear or fine or auspicious day etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sudinan. happy time, happiness (equals sukha-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sudinan. Name of a tīrtha- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sudināhan. a bright fine day on View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sudinatāf. clear weather View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sudinatvan. state of fine weather, an auspicious time View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sudināyaNom. A1. yate-, to become a fine day, clear up Va1rtt. 1. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ditamfn. wounded, destroyed, killed, slain View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
suditimfn. (in a formula as opp. to a-diti-) (su-dīt/i- ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ditṛmfn. one who kills or destroys View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sudivmfn. shining brightly View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sudivan. () a bright or fine day. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sudiind. idem or 'm. () a bright or fine day.' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sudivasam. () a bright or fine day. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sudivātaṇḍim. Name of a ṛṣi- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śūdrāvedinmfn. marrying a śūdra- woman View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sugandhādityam. Name of a man View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sujanmādivratan. sujanman
sukandinm. Amorphophallus Campanulatus View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sukandinm. Arum Campanulatum View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sūkarapādif. a plant resembling Carpopogan Pruriens View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sukavihṛdayānandif. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sukhādimfn. (for sukhādi-See) wearing beautiful bracelets or rings (said of the marut-s) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sukhādimfn. (for sukhādi-See) beginning with pleasure, pleasure etc. (See sukha-duḥkhādi-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sukhādita(s/u--) mfn. well masticated or eaten View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sukhaduḥkhādimfn. (plural) pleasure and pain and the other (opposites;See dvaṃdva-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śuklādiśrāvaṇakṛṣṇasaptamīf. Name of certain festivals or holy days View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śuklādiśrāvaṇakṛṣṇāṣṭamīf. Name of certain festivals or holy days View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śukradinan. Friday, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śūlinīdurgādigbandhanan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sumarditamfn. much harassed or afflicted View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śumbhamardif. " śumbha--destroying", Name of a durgā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sumuditamfn. delighted with (instrumental case), enjoying, possessing View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sunandif. a kind of plant with fragrant leaves View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sunandif. a species of the ati-jagatī-, metre (equals mañju-bhāṣiṇī-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sundarīmandiran. women's habitation or apartments View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śūnyavādinm. the affirmer of a void (id est of the non-existence of any Spirit, divine or human) , a Buddhist, atheist View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
supradadi(s/u--) mfn. very liberal View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
supravāditamfn. making good music View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
supraveditamfn. well made known View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śūrādityam. Name of a son of guṇāditya- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
suragurudivasam. Thursday View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
suramandiran. a god's house, temple View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
suratamṛditamfn. worn out by sexual intercourse View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sūryābhyuditamfn. one upon whom (while he is still sleeping) the sun has risen View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sūryādigrahaphalakuṇḍalīf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sūryadigrahaprītyarthadānan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sūryādigrahasādhanan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sūryādipañcāyatanapratiṣṭhāpaddhatif. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sūryādipratimāpratiṣṭhāvidhim. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sūryādivarṣaphaloktif. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sūryānuvādif. Name of commentator or commentary View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
suṣinandim. Name of a king, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śuṣkaruditan. weeping without tears View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sutapādi f. a species of Mimosa View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
suvāditran. beautiful music View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
suvarṇamedif. the earth represented in gold ( suvarṇamedinīdāna -dāna- n.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
suvarṇamedinīdānan. suvarṇamedinī
suvarṇavastrādin. money and clothes etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
suvidita(s/u--) mfn. well known or understood View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
svabdinmfn. (prob.) roaring, panting (equals svabhūta-śabda-, śabdaṃ kurvat- ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
svabhāvavādinm. one who maintains the above doctrine View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
svādimanm. (gaRa pṛthv-ādi-) savouriness, sweetness View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
svādinmfn. tasting, enjoying (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
svadiṅmukhamind. towards (its) own place or quarter View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
svādiṣṭhamf(ā-)n. sweetest, very sweet or pleasant etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
svādiṣṭhamf(ā-)n. sweeter than (ablative) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
svaditamfn. well seasoned or prepared, savoury View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
svaditan. "may it be well tasted or eaten!"(an exclamation used at a śrāddha- after presenting the oblation of food to the pitṛ-s; see su-śruta-, sva-dhā-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
svāditamfn. tasted, relished View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
svāditamfn. sweetened View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
svāditamfn. pleased View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
svādityamfn. any one befriended by the āditya-s View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
svādityan. the favour or protection of the āditya-s View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
svaravaidikan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
svargamārgadidṛkṣumfn. wishing to see the road to heaven View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
svastikādicakran. plural Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
svayamapoditan. that from which one is by one's self exempted View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
svayaṃdinamfn. (See 1. dina-) self-cut, self-torn View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
svayaṃnirdiṣṭamfn. self-marked or indicated View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
svayamuditamfn. risen spontaneously View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
svedinmfn. sweating, perspiring (in a-sv-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sveditamfn. (fr. Causal) caused to sweat etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sveditamfn. fomented, softened (said of a dog's tail) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
śvetakhadiram. a white variety of the khadira- tree View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sviditamfn. sweated, melted View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
sviditamfn. sweating, perspiring View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
syādvādavādinm. equals next View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
syādvādikam. an adherent of the jaina- doctrine View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
syādvādinm. idem or 'm. an adherent of the jaina- doctrine ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
syādvādinm. Name of a jaina- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
syandif. Name of a river View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
syandinmfn. flowing, running View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
syandinmfn. emitting liquid, oozing, trickling, dropping (compound) etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
syandinmfn. going, moving View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
syandif. saliva View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
syandif. a cow bearing two calves at once View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
syanditāśva on View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
syanditṛmfn. one who runs or rushes quickly View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tadādiind. from that time forward View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
taddinan. that, day View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
taddinamind. on a certain day View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
taddinamind. during the day View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
taddinamind. every day View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tadidarthamfn. intent on that particular object (see ) . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tadidāsīyan. the hymn View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tadiṣṭi(t/ad--) mfn. accompanied by such offerings View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tagarapādif. idem or 'f. idem or 'n. equals raka- ' ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tagarapādikan. equals raka- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tagarapādif. idem or 'n. equals raka- ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tālādia gaṇa- of (iv, 3, 152 rajakādi-, palāśādi-and bilvādi-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tanādimfn. beginning with tan- (the 8th cl. of roots) . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tārakādi(d-), a gaṇa- of ( ). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
taruṇādityam. the newly-risen sun, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tathāvādinmfn. telling the exact truth View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tathāvādinmfn. professing to be so View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tathyavādinmfn. speaking the truth View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
taudādikamfn. belonging to the tud-ādi- roots (cl. 6) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
taulvalyādim. Name of a gaṇa- of ( ). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tikādianother gaṇa- of (iv, 1, 154 ). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tikakitavādim. Name of a gaṇa- of ( ) . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tiktakandif. Curcuma Zedoaria View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tindif. equals du- q.v View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tindiśam. Name of a plant View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tirindiram. Name of a man View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tiryagdiśf. any horizontal region (opposed to nadir and zenith) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
toditamfn. goaded View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
traivedikamf(ī-)n. relating to the 3 veda-s View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tṛdilamfn. porous View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tṛdilamfn. see /a--. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tridinaspṛśm. conjunction of 3 lunations with one solar day View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tridivan. (m. ) the 3rd or most sacred heaven, heaven (in general) (with genitive case div/as-) etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tridif. cardamoms View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tridif. Name of a river in India View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tridif. of a river in the plakṣa-dvīpa- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tridif. (-) ([ ]) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tridivādhīśam. "lord of heaven", a god View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tridivagatamfn. "heaven-departed", dead View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tridivasamfn. tertian (fever) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tridivaukasm. "heaven-residing", a god View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tridiveśam. "lord of heaven", a god View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tridiveśānam. idem or 'm. "lord of heaven", a god ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tridiveśvaram. "lord of heaven", indra- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tridivinm. a god, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tridivodbhavāf. large cardamoms View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
trikapardinmfn. wearing 3 braids of hair View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tripadif. a tripod stand View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tripādif. Cissus pedata View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tripādif. equals - View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
trivedinmfn. familiar with the 3 veda-s View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
trivedinmfn. equals trayīmūrti-mat- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tṛṇacchedinmfn. one who plucks grass, ibidem or 'in the same place or book or text' as the preceding iv, 71 View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tṛtīyadivasam. "3rd day", the day after to-morrow View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tudādithe roots of cl.6. (beginning with tud-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tulyanaktaṃdinamfn. having equal days and nights View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tulyanaktaṃdinamfn. not distinguishing between day and night View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tundādia gaRa of View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tundim. () Name of a gandharva- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tundif. See tuṇḍi-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tundibhamfn. idem or 'mfn. idem or 'mfn. equals dika- ', 117.' , 139 View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tundibhamfn. varia lectio for tuṇḍ-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tundikamfn. equals da-vat-, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tundif. the navel View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tundikaram. the navel View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tundilamfn. (117) idem or 'mfn. varia lectio for tuṇḍ-.' (varia lectio tuṇḍ-) (also a-- negative) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tundilamfn. equals tuṇḍibha- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tundilam. gaṇeśa- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tundilaphalāf. Cucumis utilissimus View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tundilīkaraṇan. the act of causing to swell, increasing View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tundilitamfn. become corpulent View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tundinmfn. idem or 'mfn. equals dika- ' , 117. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tunditamfn. equals dika- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
turaṃgasādinm. a horseman View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
turīyādiṭyafor yam āditya- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tūrṇoditamfn. spoken quickly View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tvaksārabhedif. the plant kṣudra-cañcu- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tvaritoditamfn. equals tūrṇod- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
tvaritoditamfn. see tūrt/a-, rṇa-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ubhayapadinmfn. (fr. ubhaya-pada-), having both parasmai-pada- and ātmane-pada-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ucchedavādinm. an adherent of the above doctrine, ibidem or 'in the same place or book or text' as the preceding View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ucchedinmfn. destroying, resolving (doubts or difficulties) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
udayādityam. Name of several men. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
uddidhīrṣāSee . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
uddidhīrṣāf. desire to remove commentator or commentary on View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
uddidhīrṣumfn. wishing to draw or bring out View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
uddihP. -degdhi- (3. plural -dihanti-) to throw or heap up View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
uddinan. midday View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
uddiśP. A1. -diśati-, -te-, to show or direct towards ; to point out, signify, declare, determine etc. ; to speak of ; to say, enunciate, prophesy ; to mean, point at, take for ; to aim at, intend, destine etc. ; to explain, instruct, teach View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
uddiśf. a particular point or direction of the compass (see 2. ā-d/iś-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
uddiṣṭamfn. mentioned, particularized View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
uddiṣṭamfn. described View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
uddiṣṭamfn. promised View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
uddiṣṭan. a kind of time (in music). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
uddiśya ind.p. having shown or explained View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
uddiśyastipulating for, demanding View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
uddiśya(used as a preposition) aiming at, in the direction of View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
uddiśyawith reference to View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
uddiśyatowards View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
uddiśyawith regard to, for, for the sake of, in the name of etc. (with accusative) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
udditamfn. bound, tied View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
udgadgadif. sobbing View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
udgātrādi(tṛ-ā-) m. Name of a gaṇa- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
udiP. -/eti-, -etum- (and /ud-etos-, ) to go up to, proceed or move up, proceed ; to rise (as the sun or a star etc.) etc. ; to come up (as a cloud) ; to start up, rise up against, march off ; to rise, raise one's self ; to increase, be enhanced ; to be conceited or proud etc. ; to go out of ; to come out or arise from etc. ; to escape etc.: Passive voice (impersonal or used impersonally -īyate-) to be risen
udinakṣ (anomalous Desiderative of nakṣ-) P. (parasmE-pada -/inakṣat-) to wish or endeavour to obtain or reach ; to strive after, pretend to View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
udiṅgCaus. -iṅgayati-, to impart a tremulous motion, vibrate, swing ; to cause (a sound) to vibrate, pronounce View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
udiṅganan. swinging, oscillating, vibrating commentator or commentary on View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
uditaSee 2. udita-, p.186. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
uditamfn. (for 2.See sub voce, i.e. the word in the Sanskrit order) risen, ascended View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
uditamfn. being above, high, tall, lofty etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
uditamfn. conceited, proud, boasting View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
uditamfn. elevated risen View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
uditamfn. increased, grown, augmented etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
uditamfn. born, produced View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
uditamfn. apparent, visible View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
uditamfn. incurred, experienced. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
uditamfn. (past participle of vad- q.v;for 1.See column 1) said, spoken etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
uditamfn. spoken to, addressed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
uditamfn. communicated, proclaimed, declared etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
uditamfn. (especially) proclaimed by law, taught, handed down View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
uditamfn. authoritative, right View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
uditamfn. indicated, signified View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
uditamfn. ([a form udita-occurs, incorrectly spelt for ud-dita-,.]) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
uditādhānan. kindling fire after sunrise commentator or commentary on View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
uditahominmfn. sacrificing after sunrise View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
uditānuditamfn. "risen and not risen", not quite risen View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
uditānuvādinmfn. one who repeats what is said by others View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
uditif. ascending or rising (of the sun) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
uditif. going away or down, setting of the sun View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
uditif. conclusion, end (of a sacrifice, through the fire going out ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
uditoditamfn. (fr. 2. udita-with 1. ud-ita-), conversant with what has been handed down by tradition, learned View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
uditvaramfn. risen View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
uditvaramfn. surpassing, exceeding, extraordinary View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
udvedimfn. furnished with an elevated altar View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ukthādim. Name of a gaṇa-, () View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
uṇādi(according to some uṇṇ-ādi-;butSee mahābhāṣya-, vol. i, preface, p.9 f.'>), ayas- m. plural the class of kṛt--affixes which begin with uṇ-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
uṇādisūtran. plural the sūtra-s () treating of the uṇādi--affixes View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
uṇādisūtravṛttif. a commentary on the uṇādi-- sūtra-s. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
uñchādim. Name of a gaRa () . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
unmādinmfn. insane, mad, intoxicated View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
unmādinmfn. causing madness, bewitching View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
unmādinintoxicating, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
unmādinm. Name of a merchant View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
unmādif. Name of a princess View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
unmadiṣṇumfn. () insane crazed, intoxicated View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
unmadiṣṇumfn. causing madness, intoxicating View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
unmaditamfn. excited, wrought up into an ecstatic state View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
unmaditamfn. mad (see /an-unmadita-.)
unmādif. insanity, madness View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
unmarditamfn. rubbed, rubbed off View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
unmuditamfn. exulting, rejoicing View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upabdim. idem or 'm. noise, sound, rattling, clanking (= ) .' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upabdim. (vocative case /upabde-) a particular venomous animal ([ ]) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upabdimatmfn. noisy, loud View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upacchanditamfn. persuaded, coaxed, enticed (Prakrituba-cchandido.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upadidikṣāf. (fr. Desiderative), the wish or intention to teach or inform commentator or commentary on View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upadidikṣumfn. ( diś-) intending to teach, , Introduction View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upadigdhaSee upa-dih-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upadigdhamfn. smeared, covered View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upadigdhamfn. fat View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upadigdhatāf. the state of being smeared or covered View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upadih View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upādikam. a kind of insect View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upadiśP. A1. -diśati-, -te-, to point out to ; to indicate, specify, explain, inform, instruct, teach & etc. ; to advise, admonish ; to mention, exhibit, speak of etc. ; to settle, prescribe, command, dictate, govern etc. ; to name, call : Passive voice -diśyate-, to be taught, etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upadiśmfn. (for 3.See sub voce, i.e. the word in the Sanskrit order) (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') pointing out to, showing View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upadiśmfn. See māropadiś-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upadiśf. an intermediate region or point of the compass. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upādiśP. -diśati-, to advise, show, point out, prescribe, command ; to indicate, inform, declare View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upadiśam. Name of a son of vasu-deva- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upadiśāf. idem or 'ind. between two regions, in an intermediate region ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upadiśamind. between two regions, in an intermediate region
upadiṣṭamfn. specified, particularized View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upadiṣṭamfn. taught, instructed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upadiṣṭamfn. mentioned View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upadiṣṭamfn. prescribed, commanded etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upadiṣṭamfn. initiated View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upadiṣṭan. counsel, advice, (in dramatic language) a persuasive speech in conformity with the prescribed rules View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upadiśya ind.p. having indicated or taught etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upadiśyaindicating, teaching etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upāditsāf. (fr. Desiderative), wish or readiness to accept View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upakādim. a gaṇa- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upalabhedinm. Name of a plant View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upamardinmfn. in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' destroying, annulling View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upanadiind. idem or 'ind. (fr. nadi- ), near the river, on the river.' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upanadiind. on the river, ibidem or 'in the same place or book or text' as the preceding View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upanāditamfn. caused to resound View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upaniṣādinmf(inī-)n. staying or sitting near at hand View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upapādinmfn. = daka-, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upapāditamfn. effected, accomplished, performed, done View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upapāditamfn. given, delivered, presented View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upapāditamfn. proved, demonstrated View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upapāditamfn. treated medically, cured.
uparuditan. wail, lament, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upasāditamfn. caused to come near, led near, conveyed to View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upāsāditamfn. met with, approached gaRa iṣṭādi- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upāsāditinmfn. one who has met or approached View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upavādinmfn. censuring, blaming View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upavastrādim. Name of a gaRa (including besides upavastṛ-, prāśitṛ-)
upavediind. near the altar, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upodiP. -eti-, to go towards, advance to meet View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upoditam. Name of a man on View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
upoditim. Name of a ṛṣi- (son of gopāla-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ūrdhvadiśf. the point of the sky overhead, the region above, zenith View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
urdim. Name of a man View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ūryādim. Name of a gaṇa- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
uṣṭrapādif. Jasminum Sambac View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
uṣṭrasādin. (?) on View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
utkarādim. Name of a gaRa () . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
utkledinmfn. wet View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
utkledinmfn. wetting View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
utkrodinmfn. exulting View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
utpādif. (ikā-) a species of insect (perhaps the white ant?) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
utpādif. Enhydra Hingtsha View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
utpādif. Basilla Rubra View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
utpādinmfn. produced, born View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
utpādinmfn. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') bringing forth, producing View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
utpāditamfn. produced, effected View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
utpāditamfn. generated, begotten. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
utsādim. Name of a gaṇa- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
utsādinmfn. See agny-utsād/in-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
utsāditamfn. destroyed, overturned etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
utsāditamfn. rubbed, anointed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
utsāditamfn. raised, elevated View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
utsaṅgādim. Name of a gaṇa- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
uttaradigīśam. Name of kuvera-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
uttaradiksthamfn. situated in the north, northern. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
uttaradiśf. the north quarter. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
uttarapadika mfn. relating to or studying the last word or term commentator or commentary View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
uttaravādinm. a replicant View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
uttaravādinm. a defendant View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
uttaravādinm. one whose claims are of later date than another's View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
uttaravedif. the northern altar made for the sacred fire View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vadanamadif. the wine or nectar of the mouth View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vadāvadinmfn. idem or 'mfn. (prob. an old Intensive; see carācara-, calācala-etc.) speaking much or well, a speaker Va1rtt. 6 (see a-vadāvada-).' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vādavādinSee syād-vāda-vādin-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vaddivāsam. or n. (?) Name of a place View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vadhyadiṇḍimam. or n. (?) a drum beaten at the time of the execution of a criminal View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vadiind. (gaRa svar-ādi-; according to to some for badi-,contracted fr. bahula-dina-,but see vadya-) in the dark half of any month (affixed to the names of months in giving dates;See vaiśākha-v-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dimfn. speaking View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dimfn. learned, wise View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
di(not always separable from prec.) , in compound for vādin-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dibhīkarācāryam. Name of an author. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dibhūṣaṇan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dicandram. (with sūri-) Name of a jaina- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dighaṭamudgaram. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dikamfn. talking, speaking, asserting, maintaining, (a theory etc.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dikam. a conjurer, magician (varia lectio vātika-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dikaraṇakhaṇḍanan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dikhaṇḍanan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinmfn. saying, discoursing, speaking, talking, speaking or talking about (often in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound' or sometimes with accusative of object), declaring, proclaiming, denoting, designating (or sometimes = designated as, addressed by a title etc.) etc.
dinmfn. producing sounds View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinm. a speaker, asserter, (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') the teacher or propounder, or adherent of any doctrine or theory View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinm. a disputant etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinm. a plaintiff, accuser, prosecutor (dual number plaintiff and defendant) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinm. an alchemist View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinm. a player on any musical instrument, musician (See f.), the leading or key-note View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinm. Name of buddha- (as"the disputant") View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dinm. (prob.) Name of a commentator or commentary on the amara-koṣa-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dif. a female musician View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diram. Name of a particular tree (resembling the badarī-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dirājm. "king among disputants", an excellent disputant View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dirājm. a bauddha- sage (also Name of mañju-ghoṣa- or mañju-śrī-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
dirājam. Name of various authors (also -tīrtha-, -pati-, -śiṣya-, -śvāmin-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diśamfn. (prob. for vādīśa-) equals sādhu-vādin- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diśam. a learned and virtuous man, sage, seer View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
disiṃham. "lion of disputants", Name of buddha- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
diśrīvallabham. Name of an author View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vadiṣṭhamfn. speaking best or very well View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ditamfn. (fr. Causal of vad-) made to speak or to be uttered etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ditamfn. made to sound, sounded, played View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ditan. instrumental music : View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ditarjanan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vaditavyamfn. to be said or spoken (n. impersonal or used impersonally) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ditavyamfn. to be said or spoken etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ditavyan. instrumental music View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vaditosSee vad- above. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vaditṛmfn. speaking, saying, telling (with accusative) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vaditṛm. a speaker (with genitive case) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ditran. a musical instrument View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ditran. music, musical performance etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ditran. a musical choir View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ditragaṇam. a band of music View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ditralaguḍam. a drum-stick View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ditravatmfn. accompanied by music View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
ditvan. See satya-vāditva-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divāgīśvaram. Name of an author View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
divinodam. Name of work by śaṃkara-- miśra-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vāgādipitryan. (with ṛtūnām-) Name of a sāman- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vāgvādif. Name of a goddess View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vāgvādinīstotran. Name of a stotra-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vaibhājyavādin wrong reading for vibhajya-vādin- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vaidim. a patronymic See baidi-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vaidikamf(ī-)n. (fr. veda-) relating to the veda-, derived from or conformable to the veda-, prescribed in the veda-, Vedic, knowing the veda- etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vaidikam. a Brahman versed in the veda- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vaidikan. a Vedic passage View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vaidikan. a Vedic precept View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vaidikābharaṇan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vaidikācāranirṇayam. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vaidikacchandaḥprakāśam. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vaidikadharmanirūpaṇan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vaidikadurgādimantraprayogam. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vaidikakarmann. an action or rite enjoined by the veda- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vaidikapāśam. a bad veda--knower View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vaidikaprakriyāf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vaidikārcanamīmāṃsāf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vaidikasārvabhaumam. Name of various authors View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vaidikasarvasvan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vaidikasiddhāntam. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vaidikaśikṣāf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vaidikasubodhinīf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vaidikatvan. conformity to the veda-, the being founded on or derived from the veda- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vaidikavijayam. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vaidikavyayadhvajam. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vaidikeṣuind. equals vede-, in the veda- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vaidiśamf(ī-)n. of or belonging to the city of vidiśā-, near vidiśā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vaidiśam. a king of vidiśā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vaidiśam. plural the inhabitants of vidiśā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vaidiśan. (also vaidiśapura -pura- n.) Name of a town situated on the river vidiśā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vaidiśapuran. vaidiśa
vaidiśyan. Name of a city not far from vidiśā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vaipādikamfn. (fr. vi-pādikā-) afflicted with blisters or pustules etc. on the feet gaRa jyotsnādi- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vaipādikan. () or f(ā-). () a kind of leprosy (equals vipādikā-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vaiśākhavadiind. in the dark half of the month vaiśākha- (in giving dates) . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vaiśeṣikādiṣaḍdarśanaviśeṣavarṇanan. "description of the difference between the vaiśeṣika- and other systems", Name of a philosophy work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vaiśvadevādimantravyākhyāf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vājapeyādisaṃśayanirṇayam. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vajrādityam. Name of a king of kāśmīra- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vākpravadiṣumfn. coming forward as a speaker View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vakratodinmfn. stinging or pricking treacherously View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vakṣaḥsammardif. a wife (as"pressing or reclining on her husband's breast") View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vaktrabhedinmfn. "mouth-cutting", pungent, bitter View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vālukādi(di-) m. plural sand and other things View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vanahabandiName of a place View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vandiSee 1. 2. bandin-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vandinmfn. praising, honouring (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') (see 1. bandin-,"a praiser","bard") View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vandinīkā f. Name of dākṣāyaṇī- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vandinīyāf. Name of dākṣāyaṇī- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vanditamfn. praised, extolled, celebrated View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vanditavyamfn. to be praised View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vanditavyamfn. to be respectfully greeted View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vanditṛ mfn. one who praises or celebrates, a praiser View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vanditṛmfn. one who praises or celebrates, a praiser View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vāpīkūpataḍāgādipaddhatif. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vārāvaskandinmfn. (said of agni-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
varcobhedinmfn. suffering from it View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
varṇabhedif. millet View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
varṇavādinm. a speaker of praise, panegyrist View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vaśaṃvaditamfn. made compliant, fascinated View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vāsavadiśf. " indra-'s quarter", the east View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vastrabhedinm. a clothes-cutter, tailor View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vāstuśāntyādim. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vātacodita(v/āta--) mfn. driven by the wind View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vātaghnatvādinirṇayam. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vātardiSee vātarddhi- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vatsarādim. the first month of the Hindu year, mārgaśīrṣa- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vātulabhedādikatantran. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vāyudiśf. the north-west View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vedabhāgādim. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vedādim. the beginning of the veda- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vedādimn. the sacred syllable Om View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vedādibījan. idem or 'mn. the sacred syllable Om ' View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vedādirūpamfn. having the beginning of the veda- for its form or substance (as the syllable Om) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vedādivarṇan. equals -bīja- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vedāgnyutsādinmfn. one who neglects (recitation of) the veda- and (maintenance of) the sacred fire View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vedanindinm. equals -nindaka- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vedāntācāryadinacaryāf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vedāntadiṇḍimam. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vedāntavādinmfn. one who asserts the vedānta- doctrine View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vedāntavedinm. equals -vid- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vedavādinmfn. versed in Vedic discussion or in Vedic lore discussion View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vedim. a wise man, teacher, Pandit View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vedif. knowledge, science (See a-v-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vedif. a seal-ring (also dikā-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vediin compound for 1. vedin-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vedif. (later also vedī-;for 1. 2.See column 2) an elevated (or according to some excavated) piece of ground serving for a sacrificial altar (generally strewed with kuśa- grass, and having receptacles for the sacrificial fire;it is more or less raised and of various shapes, but usually narrow in the middle, on which account the female waist is often compared to it) etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vedif. the space between the supposed spokes of a wheel-shaped altar, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vedif. a kind of covered verandah or balcony in a court-yard (shaped like a vedi- and prepared for weddings etc. equals vitardi-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vedif. a stand, basis, pedestal, bench etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vedif. Name of a tīrtha- (only ī-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vedin. a species of plant (equals ambaṣṭha-), View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vedibhājanan. that which is substituted for the sacrificial ground View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vedif. "altar-born", epithet of draupadī-, wife of the pāṇḍu- princes (the fee which droṇa- required for instructing the pāṇḍu- princes was that they should conquer drupada-, king of pañcāla-, who had insulted him;they therefore took him prisoner, and he, burning with resentment, undertook a sacrifice to procure a son who might avenge his defeat;two children were then born to him from the midst of the altar, out of the sacrificial fire, viz. a son dhṛṣṭa-dyumna-, and a daughter draupadī- or kṛṣṇā-, afterwards wife of the pāṇḍava-s) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vedif. See sub voce, i.e. the word in the Sanskrit order View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vedikam. a seat, bench View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vedif. (see vedaka-and 1. vedi-) idem or 'm. a seat, bench ' etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vedif. a sacrificial ground, altar View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vedif. a balcony, pavilion (equals vitardi-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vedikākramam. Name of work on the construction of fire-altars. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vedikaraṇan. the preparation of the vedi- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vedikaraṇan. plural the implements used for it View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vedilakṣaṇan. Name of the 24th pariśiṣṭa- of the View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vediloṣṭam. a clod of earth taken from the sacrificial ground View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vedimadhyamf(ā-)n. (a woman) having a waist resembling a vedi- (q.v) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vedimānan. the measuring out of a (place for the) sacrificial ground View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vedimatīf. Name of a woman View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vedimekhalāf. the cord which forms the boundary of the uttara-vedi- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vedinmfn. (for 2. 3.See column 3) knowing, acquainted with or versed in (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') etc. (see sarva-v-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vedinmfn. feeling, perceiving View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vedinmfn. announcing, proclaiming View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vedinm. Name of brahmā- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vedinmfn. marrying (See śūdrā-v-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vedinn. a species of plant (equals ambaṣṭha-) (see 2. vedi-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vedif. Name of a river View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vediparam. plural Name of a country and people View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vedipratiṣṭhamfn. erected on sacrificial ground View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vedipurīṣam. the loose earth of the sacrificial ground View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vediṣadmfn. (for -sad-) sitting on or at the vedi- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vediṣadm. equals prācīna-barhis- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vedisādhanaprakāram. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vedisambhavāf. equals -- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vedisammānan. equals -māna- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vedispṛśmfn. touching the vedi-, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vediśroṇi f. (met.) the hip-like side of the vedi-, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vediśroṇīf. (met.) the hip-like side of the vedi-, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vediṣṭhamfn. getting or procuring most View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vedif. and 1. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
veditavyamfn. to be learnt or known or understood etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
veditavyamfn. to be known or recognized as, to be taken for, to be meant View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
veditṛ mf(trī-)n. knowing, a knower (with accusative or genitive case) (see sarva-v-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
veditṛmf(trī-)n. knowing, a knower (with accusative or genitive case) (see sarva-v-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
veditvan. acquaintance or familiarity with (See karuṇa--and kāruṇya-v-,and see under 3. vedi-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
veditvan. (for 1.See under 2. vedi-) the state or condition of being a vedi- or altar View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vedivatind. like a vedi- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vedivimānan. equals -māna- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vedoditamfn. mentioned or enjoined in the veda- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vibhajyavādinm. an adherent of the above doctrine View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vibhedikamfn. separating, dividing (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vibhedinmfn. piercing, rending (See marma-bh-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vibhedinmfn. dispelling, destroying (with genitive case) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vicchardif. (See vi-chṛd-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vicchardif. the act of vomiting View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
viccharditamfn. vomited, ejected View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
viccharditamfn. disregarded, neglected View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
viccharditamfn. diminished, impaired View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vicchedinmfn. breaking, destroying View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vicchedinmfn. having breaks or intervals View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
viḍbhedinmfn. laxative View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
viḍbhedinn. (prob.) equals -lavaṇa- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
videhamuktyādikathanan. videhamukti
vidhudinan. a lunar day View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vidhyādim. the commencement of an action View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vidikcaṅgam. a sort of yellow bird View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vidiśf. an intermediate point of the compass (as south east) etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vidiśmfn. going into different quarters or regions View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vidiśetc. See . View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vidiśāf. an intermediate quarter or region View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vidiśāf. Name of a river and the town situated on it (the capital of the district of Dasarna now called Bilsa) etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vidiśāf. of a town situated on the vetravatī- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
viditamfn. known, understood, learnt, perceived, known as (Nominal verb) etc. (viditam astu vaḥ-or astu vo viditam-,"let it be understood by you","know that") View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
viditamfn. promised, agreed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
viditamfn. represented View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
viditamfn. apprised, informed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
viditam. a learned man, sage View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vidif. Name of a jaina- goddess View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
viditan. information, representation View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vidivP. A1. -dīvyati-, te-, to lose at play ; to play View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vidvaccittaprasādif. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vidvanmodif. Name of a commentator or commentary on by rāmabhadra-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vidyāmandiran. a school-house, college View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vigaditamfn. talked or spoken about, spread abroad (as a report) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vihradinmfn. (perhaps) making pools View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vijayādityam. Name of various kings View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vijayanandinm. Name of authors View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vijñānāstitvamātravādinmfn. equals na-vādin- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vijñānavādinmfn. one who affirms that only intelligence has reality View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vijñānavādinm. a yogācāra- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vijñānavinodinīṭīkāf. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vikhāditakan. a dead body which has been devoured by animals View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vikramādityam. See below View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vikramādityam. "valour-sun", Name of a celebrated Hindu king (of ujjayinī- and supposed founder of the [ mālava--] vikrama- era[ see saṃvat-],which begins 58 B.C. [but subtract 57-56 from anexpiredyear of the vikrama- era to convert it into A.D.];he is said to have driven out the śaka-s and to have reigned over almost the whole of Northern India;he is represented as a great patron of literature;nine celebrated men are said to have flourished at his court [see nava-ratna-],and innumerable legends are related of him all teeming with exaggerations;according to some he fell in a battle with his rival śāli-vāhana-, king of the south country or Deccan, and the legendary date given for his death is kali-yuga- 3044 [which really is the epoch-year of the vikrama- era];there are, however, other kings called vikramāditya-, and the name has been applied to king bhoja- and even to śāli-vāhana-) etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vikramādityam. of a poet ( vikramādityakośa -kośa- m.Name of a dictionary; vikramādityacaritra -caritra- n.Name of a poem equals vikrama-c-; vikramādityarāja -rāja- m.Name of a king) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vikramādityacaritran. vikramāditya
vikramādityakośam. vikramāditya
vikramādityarājam. vikramāditya
vilāsamandiran. (equals -gṛha-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
viloditamfn. agitated, churned etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
viloditan. equals takra- or dadhi-
vimaditamfn. (fr. Causal) discomposed, bewildered, confused View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vimalādityam. a particular form of the sun View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vimardinmfn. crushing to pieces, destroying, removing View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vimarditamfn. (fr. Causal) crushed, bruised, etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vimarditamfn. rubbed, anointed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vimarśavādinmfn. uttering discussions, one who reasons, a reasoner View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vimṛditamfn. bruised, pounded, broken, rubbed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vimṛditadhvajamfn. having a crushed or broken banner View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vinadinmfn. roaring, thundering, grumbling View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vinādinmfn. sounding forth, crying out View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vināditamfn. (fr. Causal) made to resound, caused to sound aloud View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vinardinmfn. roaring (applied to a particular method of chanting the sāma-veda-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vinayādidharam.(id est vinaya-dh-) Name of a man View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vinayādityam. Name of jayāpīḍa-, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vinayādityam. Name of a king of the race of the cālukya-s View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vinayādityapuran.Name of a town built by jayāpīḍa- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vinayanandinm. Name of the leader of a jaina- sect View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vinirdiśP. -diśati-, to assign, destine for (locative case) ; to point out, indicate, state, declare, designate as (two accusative) ; to announce, proclaim ; to determine, resolve, fix upon View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vinirdiṣṭamfn. pointed out etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vinirdiṣṭamfn. charged or entrusted with (locative case) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
viniṣūditamfn. ( sūd-) destroyed utterly (Calcutta edition -sūdita-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
viniveditamfn. made known, announced View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vinodāpapādinmfn. causing pleasure or delight View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vinodinmfn. driving away, dispelling View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vinodinmfn. amusing, diverting View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vinoditamfn. (fr. Causal) driven away, dispelled View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vinoditamfn. diverted, amused, delighted View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vinoditamfn. allayed, soothed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vipādif. (fr. -pāda-) a disease of the foot, a sore tumour on the foot View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vipādif. a riddle, enigma View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vipāditamfn. destroyed, killed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vipāditavya mfn. to be killed, destructible View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
viparītādin. (with vakra-) a kind of metre
vipramādinmfn. ( mad-) heeding nothing, thoroughly heedless (varia lectio) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
viprānumaditamfn. rejoiced at by seer or poets View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vīraśaivadikṣāvidhānan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
viruditan. loud lamentation, wailing, grief. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
viśabditamfn. mentioned, indicated View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
viṣadigdhamfn. smeared with poison, empoisoned, poisoned View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
viṣādinmfn. (for 2.See under vi-ṣad-, column 3) swallowing poison View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
viṣādinmfn. (for 1.See column 1) dejected, dismayed, disconsolate, sad etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
viśaditamfn. purified View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
viṣāditamfn. (fr. Causal) caused to sink down, made sorrowful, dejected View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
viṣādif. ( ) dejection, despondency, grief, despair. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
viṣāditvan. () dejection, despondency, grief, despair. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
viṣamādityam. Name of a poet View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
viṣamardif. "destroying poison", a species of plant View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
visaṃvādinmfn. breaking one's word, disappointing, deceiving (See di--) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
visaṃvādinmfn. contradicting, disagreeing View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
visaṃvāditamfn. (fr. Causal) disappointed, dissatisfied View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
visaṃvāditamfn. not generally proved, objectionable View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
visaṃvādif. the breaking one's word, breach of promise (in a-vis-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
visaṃvādif. contradiction, disagreement with (instrumental case) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
viṣāpavādinmfn. curing poison by charms View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
viṣāpavādif. a magical formula curing poison View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
viṣapradigdhamfn. smeared with poison, empoisoned View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
viśāradimanm. skill, proficiency, conversancy View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
viśeṣavādinm. an adherent of that doctrine View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
viśiṣṭādvaitavādinm. one who asserts the doctrine of qualified non-duality View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
viṣṇudhyānastotrādiName of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
viṣṇumandiran. viṣṇu-'s temple View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
viṣṇumandiran. equals -griha- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
viṣṇumantravidhānādim. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
viṣṇupādādikeśāntastutif. Name of several works. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
viṣṇuśayanabodhadinan. (in fine compositi or 'at the end of a compound') the day of viṣṇu-'s lying down and of his awaking View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
viṣṇusvarūpadhyānādivarṇanan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
viṣṇuvarṇanadhyānādiName of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
viṣṇvādidevatāpūjāprakāram. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vispanditaSee a-vispandita-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
viṣuvaddinan. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
viṣuvaddivasam. the equinoctial day View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
viṣuvadinan. the day of the equinox View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
viśvamedif. Name of a lexicon. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
viṣyandin(or sy-) mfn. liquid View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vitardi f. (said to be fr. tṛd-) a raised and covered piece of ground in the centre of a house or temple or in the middle of a court-yard, verandah, balcony etc. ( also tardī-, tarddhī-and tarddhikā-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vitardif. (said to be fr. tṛd-) a raised and covered piece of ground in the centre of a house or temple or in the middle of a court-yard, verandah, balcony etc. ( also tardī-, tarddhī-and tarddhikā-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vitathavādinmfn. () speaking a falsehood, lying View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
viṭkhadiram. Vachellia Farnesiana View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vivādāspadibhūtamfn. vivādāspada
vivādinmfn. disputing, contending View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vivādinmfn. a litigant, party in a lawsuit View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vivadiṣṇuSee a-vivadiṣṇu-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vivaditamfn. disputing, quarrelling View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vivaditamfn. disputed, controverted, litigated View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vivaditavyan. (impersonal or used impersonally) it is to be disputed about (locative case), View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vivāhādikārmaṇāmprayogam. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vivandiṣāf. (fr. Desiderative of vand-) the wish to salute or worship View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vivandiṣumfn. wishing to salute, intending to praise View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vividiṣāf. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vividiṣumfn. equals vivitsā-, tsu- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vividivasSee under 3. vid-. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vrandinmfn. becoming soft View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vṛddhādityam. a particular form of the sun View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vṛddhavādinm. a jina- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vṛddhavādinm. Name of a man View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vṛkṣabhedinm. "tree-splitting", a carpenter's chisel, hatchet View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vṛkṣacikitsāropaṇādim. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vṛkṣādif. Vanda Roxburghii View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vṛkṣādirūḍha wrong reading for vṛkṣādhi-r- etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vṛkṣādirūḍhaka wrong reading for vṛkṣādhi-r- etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vṛkṣādiruhaka wrong reading for vṛkṣādhi-r- etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vṛkṣādividyāf. the science of trees etc., botany View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vṛndinmfn. containing a multitude of (in aśva-vṛ-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vṛndiṣṭha mfn. (superl. and Comparative degree of vṛndāraka-) most or more eminent or excellent, best, better View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vṛṣabhānunandif. patronymic of rādhā-, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vṛṣakhādi(v/ṛṣa--) mfn. having large bracelets or rings (as the marut-s;others "ornamented with ear-rings") View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vṛṣāmodif. enjoying the male View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vṛṣanādinmfn. roaring like a bull View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vṛṣṭitāditamfn. beaten by rain, View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vṛthāvādinmfn. speaking falsely or untruly View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vṛttasādinmfn. destroying established usage, worthless, mean, vile View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vyādiśf. (see vy-ā-diś-) a particular point of the compass (prob. the point between two vi-diś-See ) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vyādiśP. -diśati-, to point out separately, divide among, distribute etc. ; to point out, show, explain, teach ; to prescribe, enjoin etc. ; to appoint, assign, despatch to any place or duty, direct, order, command (with dative case locative case,or prati-) ; to declare, foretell (varia lectio ādiṣṭā-for vy-ād-). View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vyādiśam. Name of viṣṇu- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vyādiṣṭamfn. distributed, pointed out, explained, prescribed, ordered, declared, indicated, foretold View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vyāditamfn. opened (equals vy-ātta-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vyāditāsyamfn. open-mouthed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vyāghrādif. Ipomoea Turpethum View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vyaktoditamfn. spoken clearly or plainly
vyapadiśP. -diśati-, to point out, indicate, intend, mean, designate, name, mention etc. (often Passive voice -diśyate-,"so it is represented or intended or signified") ; to represent falsely, feign, pretend View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vyapadiṣṭamfn. pointed out etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vyapadiṣṭamfn. informed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vyapadiṣṭamfn. tricked View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vyapadiṣṭamfn. pleaded as an excuse View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vyāpāpāditamfn. destroyed, killed, slain ( vyāpāpāditavat -vat- mfn.one who has destroyed etc.) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vyāpāpāditavatmfn. vyāpāpādita
vyāsādipañcasiddhāntam. plural Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vyastarātriṃdivamfn. dividing or separating night and day View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
vyuditamfn. ( vad-) disputed, debated, discussed, contested View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yadiind. (in veda- also y/adī-,sometimes yadi cit-, yadi ha vai-, y/ad/īt-, y/ady u-, yady u vai-) if, in case that etc. etc. In the earlier language yadi- may be joined with Indic. subjunctive or leṭ- Potential , or future , the consequent clause of the conditional sentence being generally without any particle. In the later language yadi- may be joined with present tense (followed in consequent clause by another present tense exempli gratia, 'for example' yadi jīvati bhadrāṇi paśyati-,"if he lives he beholds prosperity", or by future or by imperative or by Potential or by no verb) ; or it may be joined with Potential (exempli gratia, 'for example' yadi rājā daṇḍaṃ na praṇayet-,"if the king were not to inflict punishment", followed by another Potential or by Conditional or by present tense or by imperative or by future or by no verb) ; or it may be joined with future (exempli gratia, 'for example' yadi na kariṣyanti tat-,"if they will not do that", followed by another future or by present tense or by imperative or by no verb) ; or it may be joined with Conditional (exempli gratia, 'for example' yady anujñām adāsyat-,"if he should give permission", followed by another Conditional or by Potential or by Aorist) ; or it may be joined with Aorist (exempli gratia, 'for example' yadi prajā-patir na vapur arsrākṣīt-,"if the Creator had not created the body", followed by Conditional or by Potential or by perfect tense) ; or it may be joined with imperative or even with perfect tense (exempli gratia, 'for example' yady āha-,"if he had said") . There may be other constructions, and in the consequent clauses some one of the following may be used: atha-, atra-, tad-, tena-, tatas-, tataḥ param-, tadā-, tarhi-, tadānīm-. Observe that yadi- may sometimes = "as sure as"(especially in asseverations, followed by imperative with or without tathā-or tena-or followed by Potential with tad-) etc.; or it may ="whether"(followed by present tense or Potential or no verb exempli gratia, 'for example' yadi-na vā-,"whether-or not", and sometimes kim-is added) ; or it may ="that"(after verbs of"not believing"or"doubting" , with present tense or Potential exempli gratia, 'for example' śaṃse yadi jīvanti-,"I do not expect that they are alive" see ) ; or if placed after duṣkaraṃ- or kathaṃ cid- it may ="hardly","scarcely" ; or it may = "if perchance","perhaps"(with Potential with or without iti-,or with future or present tense) etc. The following are other combinations: yadi tāvat-,"how would it be if"(with present tense or imperative)
yadiind. yadi nāma-,"if ever" View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yadiind. yadi cet- (cet-being added redundantly) ="if" (exempli gratia, 'for example' yadi cet syāt-,"if it should be") View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yadiind. purā yadi- ="before" (exempli gratia, 'for example' purā yadi paśyāmi-,"before that I see") View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yadiind. y/ady /api- (rarely api yadi-),"even if","although"(followed by tathāpi-or tad api-or sometimes by no particle in the correlative clause) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yadiind. yadi- - yadi ca-yady api-,"if - and if - if also" View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yadiind. y/adi- - y/adi--, or y/adi vā- - y/adi vā-, or y/adi vā- - y/adi-, or yadi vā- - -, or - - yadi vā-, or yad vā- - yadi vā-,"if - or if","whether - or" View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yadiind. y/adi vā- - n/a vā-,"whether - or not" View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yadiind. - - yadi vā- - yadi vā-tathāpi-,"whether - or - or - yet" View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yadiind. vā yadi- ="or if","or rather" View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yadiind. yadi vā- idem or 'ind. vā yadi- ="or if","or rather"' or ="yet","however." View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yajñavedi f. an altar for sacrifice View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yājurvaidikamfn. belonging or relating to the yajur-veda- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yājurvedika mfn. belonging or relating to the yajur-veda- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yajurvedinmfn. familiar with the yajur-veda- on View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yajurvediśrāddhatattvan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yajurvedivṛṣotsargatattvan. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yakārādipadan. a word beginning with ya- (euphemistically applied to any form of yabh-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yakṣadigvijayam. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yamadiśf. yama-'s quarter, the south View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yamādityam. a particular form of the sun View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yamahārdif. Name of one of devī-'s female attendants View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yamamandiran. yama-'s dwelling View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yāmanādinm. "proclaiming the watches", a cock (varia lectio) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yaśonandim. Name of a prince View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yathācoditamind. according to precept or injunction View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yathādikind. ( ) according to the quarters of the compass View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yathādikind. in all directions View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yathādiśamind. ( ) according to the quarters of the compass View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yathādiśamind. in all directions View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yathādiṣṭamfn. (thād-) corresponding to what has been enjoined or directed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yathādiṣṭamind. (/am-) according to a direction or injunction View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yathaikadivasamind. as if it were or had been only one day View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yathānirdiṣṭamfn. as mentioned or described or directed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yathāpradiṣṭamind. according to precept, as suitable or proper View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yathāsaṃdiṣṭamfn. as agreed or directed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yathāsaṃdiṣṭamind. according to direction or order View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yathāsamuditamind. as agreed or stipulated View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yathāvediind. according to the vedi- of each View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yathoddiṣṭamfn. as mentioned or described, as directed by (instrumental case) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yathoddiṣṭamind. in the manner stated View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yathoditamfn. as said or told previously stated, before mentioned, etc. View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yathoditamind. as mentioned before, according to a previous statement View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yathoktavādinmfn. speaking as told, reporting accurately what has been said View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yathopadiṣṭamfn. as indicated, as before stated View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yathopadiṣṭamind. in the manner before mentioned or prescribed View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yathopapādinmfn. the first that appears to be the best View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yāvadādiṣṭamfn. as much as related View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yāvadicchamind. according to desire View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yāvadiṣṭakamind. according to the number of bricks View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yāvadiṣṭamind. next View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yāvaditthamind. as much as necessary (varia lectio) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yavakhadikamfn. (fr. -khada-) View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yoginyādipūjanavidhim. Name of work View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yuddhamedif. equals -bhū- q.v View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yugādim. the commencement of a yuga-, the beginning of the world View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yugādidevam. Name of the jina- ṛṣabha- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yugādijinam. () Name of the jina- ṛṣabha- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yugādikṛtm. Name of śiva- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yugādipuruṣa m. () Name of the jina- ṛṣabha- View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yuktavādinmfn. speaking properly or suitably View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
yuvarājadivākaram. Name of a poet View this entry on the original dictionary page scan.
Apte Search
416 results
didhi दिधि (धी) षूः f. 1 A woman twice married. -2 An unmarried elder sister whose younger sister is married; ज्येष्ठायां यद्यनूढायां कन्यायामुह्यते$नुजा । सा चाग्रेदिधिषूर्ज्ञेया पूर्वा च दिधिषूः स्मृता ॥ -Comp. -पतिः a man who has a sexual intercourse with the widow of his brother (not as a sacred duty but for carnal gratification); भ्रातुर्मृतस्य भार्यायां यो$नुरज्येत कामतः । धर्मेणापि नियुक्तायां स ज्ञेयो दिधिषूपतिः Ms.3.173.
didhiḥ दिधिः Firmness, stability.
didhīrṣā दिधीर्षा Desire to sustain or support; दिक्कुञ्जराः कुरुत तत्त्रितये दिधीर्षाम् B. R.1.48.
didhiṣāyya दिधिषाय्य a. Supporting. -य्यम् 1 Spirituous liquor. -2 A false friend.
didhiṣuḥ दिधिषुः 1 The second husband of a woman married again or twice. -2 A suitor. -3 A husband; ब्राह्मणी वीक्ष्य दिधिषुं पुरुषादेन भक्षितम् Bhāg.9.9.35. -f. A virgin widow remarried.
didṛkṣā दिदृक्षा f. A desire to see; एकस्थसौन्दर्यदिदृक्षयेव Ku.1.49.
didṛkṣu दिदृक्षु a. Desirous to see; व्यवहारान् दिदृक्षस्तु ब्राह्मणैः सह पार्थिवः Ms.8.1.
didyuḥ दिद्युः Ved. 1 A bright weapon. -2 The sky, heaven.
digdha दिग्ध p. p. [दिह्-क्त] 1 Smeared, anointed, daubed; हस्तावसृग्दिग्धौ Ms.3.132; R.16.15. दिग्धो$मृतेन च विषेण च पक्ष्मलाक्ष्या गाढं निखात इव मे हृदये कटाक्षः Māl.1.29. -2 Soiled, defiled, polluted. -3 Poisoned, envenomed; अथ तैः परिदेविताक्षरैर्हृदये दिग्धशरैरिवाहतः Ku.4.25. -ग्धः 1 Oil, ointment. -2 Any oily substance or unguent. -3 Fire. -4 A poisoned arrow; 'दिग्धो विषाक्तबाणे स्यात्' Medinī. करेणुमिव दिग्धेन विद्धां मृगयुना वने Rām.2.1.26; Mb.12. 69.57. -5 A story (true or fictitious.)
digdha दिग्ध See under दिह्.
dih दिह् 2 U. (देग्धि, दिग्धे, दिग्ध; desid. दिधिक्षति) 1 To anoint, smear, plaster, spread over; स चन्दनोशीरमृणाल- दिग्धः BK.3.21, अदिहंश्चन्दनैः शुभैः 17.54. -2 To soil, defile, pollute; अस्रदिग्धं पदम् R.16.15. -3 To increase, augment.
dih दिह् f. 1 Anointing, smearing. -2 Pollution, soiling.
dikkaḥ दिक्कः A young elephant (करभ) twenty years old.
dilīpaḥ दिलीपः A king of the Solar race, son of अंशुमत् and father of भगीरथ, but according to Kālidāsa, of रघु. [He is described by Kālidāsa as a grand ideal of what a king should be. His wife was Sudakṣiṇā, a woman in every respect worthy of her husband; but they had no issue. For this he went to his family priest Vasiṣṭha who told him and his wife to serve the celestial cow Nandinī. They accordingly served her for 21 days and were on the 22nd day favoured by the cow. A glorious boy was then born who conquered the whole world and became the founder of the line of the Raghus.]
dilīram दिलीरम् A mushroom.
dimp दिम्प् 1 Ā (दिम्पयते) 1 To accumulate. -2 To order, direct. So दिम्भ्.
dinaḥ दिनः नम् [द्युति तमः, दो दी वा नक् ह्रस्व; Uṇ.2.49.] 1 Day (opp. रात्रि); दिनान्ते निहितं तेजः सवित्रेव हुताशनः R.4.1; यामिनयन्ति दिनानि च सुखदुःखवशीकृते मनसि K.P.1; दिनान्ते निलयाय गन्तुम् R.2.15. -2 A day (including the night), a period of 24 hours; दिने दिने सा परिवर्धमाना Ku.1.25; सप्त व्यतीयुस्त्रिगुणानि तस्य दिनानि R.2.25. -Comp. -अंशः any portion of a day, i. e. an hour, a watch, &c. -अण्डम् darkness. -अत्ययः, -अन्तः, -अवसानम् evening, sunset; R.2.15,45; दिनान्तरभ्यो$भ्युपशान्तमन्मथः Ṛs.1.1; Ki.9.8. -अधीशः the sun. -अर्धः mid-day, noon. -अन्तकः darkness. -आगमः, -आदिः, -आरम्भः daybreak, morning; Ki.11.52. -ईशः, ईश्वरः the sun. ˚आत्मजः 1 an epithet of Saturn. -2 of Karṇa. -3 of Sugrīva. -करः, -कर्तृ, -कृत् m. the sun; तुल्योद्योगस्तव दिनकृतश्चाधिकारो मतो नः V.2.1; दिनकरकुलचन्द्र चन्द्रकेतो U.6. 8; R.9.23. ˚तनयः N. of (1) Saturn; (2) Sugrīva; (3) Karṇa; (4) Yama. ˚तनया N. of (1) the river Yamunā, (2) the river Tāptī. -कर्तव्यम्, -कार्यम्, -कृत्यम् ceremonies to be performed daily; Ks. -केशरः, -केसरः, -केशवः darkness. -क्षयः, -पातः evening. -चर्या daily occupation, daily routine of business. -च्छिद्रम् 1 a constellation or lunar mansion. -2 a change of the moon at the beginning or end of a half-day; Hch. -ज्योतिस् n. sunshine. -दुःखितः the Chakravāka bird. -नक्तम् ind. by day and night. -नाथः, -पः, -पतिः, -बन्धः, -प्रणीः, -मणिः, -मयूखः, -रत्नम् the sun; दिनमणिमण्डलमण्डन Gīt.; पस्पृशुर्न पृथिवीं तुरङ्गमाः स्पर्धयेव दिननाथवाजिनाम् Vikr.14.64;11.1. -पाटिका a day's wages; Vet.4. -बलम् N. of the fifth, sixth, seventh, eighth, eleventh, and twelfth signs of the zodiac taken collectively. -मलम् a month. -मुख morning; तुल्यतां दिनमुखेन दिनान्तः Ki.9.8; दिनमुखानि रविर्हिमनिग्रहै- र्विमलयन् मलयं नगमत्यजत् R.9.25. -मूर्द्धन् m. the eastern mountain behind which the sun is supposed to rise. -यौवनम् mid-day, noon (the youth of day). -वारः a week-day. -व्यास-दलम् the radius of a circle made by an asterism in its daily revolution; Sūrya S.2.6. -स्पृश् n. a lunar day coinciding with 3 week-days; Hch.
diṇḍiḥ दिण्डिः दिण्डिरः A kind of musical instrument.
dinikā दिनिका A day's wages.
diṅkaḥ दिङ्कः A bug in embryo; L. D. B.
dinv दिन्व् 1 P. (दिन्वति) 1 To be glad, or to gladden. -2 To please, or to be pleased.
diripakaḥ दिरिपकः A ball for playing with.
diś दिश् 6 U. (दिशति-ते, दिष्ट; desid. दिदिक्षति-ते) 1 To point out, show, exhibit, produce (as a witness); साक्षिणः सन्ति मेत्युक्त्वा दिशेत्युक्तो दिशेन्न यः Ms.8.57,52,53. -2 To assign, allot; इष्टां गतिं तस्य सुरा दिशन्ति Mb. -3 To give, grant, bestow upon, deliver or make over to; बाणमत्रभवते निजं दिशन् Ki.13.68; R.5.3;11.2;16.72. -4 To pay (as tribute). -5 To consent to; भृत्यभावि दुहितुः परिग्रहाद्दिश्यतां कुलमिदं निमेरिति R.11.49. -6 To direct, order, command. -7 To allow, permit; स्मर्तुं दिशन्ति न दिवः सुरसुन्दरीभ्यः Ki.5.28. -Caus. (देशयति-ते) 1 To show, point out, allot, assign. -2 To teach, communicate, tell, inform. -3 To direct, order. -4 To confer, bestow.
diś दिश् f. [दिशति ददात्यवकाशं दिश्-क्विप्] (Nom. sing. दिक्- ग्) 1 A direction, cardinal point, point of the compass, quarter of the sky; दिशः प्रसेदुर्मरुतो वबुः सुखाः R.3.14; दिशि दिशि किरति सजलकणजालम् Gīt.4. -2 (a) The mere direction of a thing, hint, indication (of the general lines); इति दिक् (often used by commentators &c.); इत्थं लौकिक- शब्दानां दिङ्मात्रमिह दर्शितम् Sk. (b) (Hence) Mode, manner, method; मुनेः पाठोक्तदिशा S. D.; दिगियं सूत्रकृता प्रदर्शिता; दासीसभं नृपसभं रक्षःसभमिमा दिशः Ak. -3 Region, space, place in general. -4 A foreign or distant region. -5 A point of view, manner of considering a subject. -6 A precept, order. -7 The number 'ten'. -8 A side or party. -9 The mark of a bite. 'दिग्दष्टे वर्तुलाकारे करिका नखरेखिका' इति वैजयन्ती; परिणतदिक्करिकास्तटीर्बिभर्ति Śi.4.29. [N. B. In comp. दिश् becomes दिग् before words beginning with vowels and soft consonants, and दिक् before words beginning with hard consonants; e. g. दिगम्बर, दिग्गज, दिक्पथ, दिक्करिन्, &c.] -Comp. -अन्तः end of the direction or horizon, remote distance, remote place; दिगन्ते श्रूयन्ते मदमलिनगण्डाः करटिनः Bv.1.2; Māl.2.9; R.3.4;5.67; 16.87. नानादिगन्तागता राजानः &c. -अन्तरम् 1 another direction. -2 the intermediate space, atmosphere, space. -3 a distant quarter, another or foreign country; संचारपूतानि दिगन्तराणि कृत्वा दिनान्ते निलयाय गन्तुम् R.2.15. -अम्बर, -वासस् a. having only the directions for his clothing, stark naked, unclothed; दिगम्बरत्वेन निवेदितं वसु Ku.5.72; एकाकी गृहसंत्यक्तः पाणिपात्रो दिगम्बरः Pt.5.15; Ms.11.21. (-रः) 1 a naked mendicant (of the Jaina or Buddha sect.) -2 a mendicant, an ascetic. -3 an epithet of (1) Śiva; (2) Skanda. -4 darkness. (-री) an epithet of Durgā. -अम्बरकः a naked mendicant (of the Jaina sect). -अवस्थानम् the air -आगत a. Come from a distance; Y.2.254. -इभः See दिक्करिन् &c. दिगिभाः पूर्णकलशैः Bhāg.8.8.14;5.14.4. -ईशः -ईश्वरः regent of a quarter; चतुर्दिगीशानवमत्य मानिनी Ku.5.53; see अष्टदिक्पाल. -कन्या, -कान्ता, -कामिनी, -वधू a region of the sky (considered as a virgin). -करः 1 a youth, youthful man. -2 an epithet of Śiva. -करिका, -करी a young girl or woman. -करिन्, -गज, -दन्तिन्, -वारणः m. one of the eight elephants said to guard and preside over the eight cardinal points; (see अष्टदिग्गज); दिग्दन्तिशेषाः ककुभश्चकार Vikr.7.1. -ग्रहणम्, -बन्धः observation of the quarters of the compass; Bṛi. S.24.9. संपूज्य शारिकांदेवीं दिग्बन्धादिपुरःसरम् Ks.73.116. -चक्रम् 1 the horizon; Ratn.3.5. -2 the whole world. -जयः, -विजयः 'conquest of the directions, the conquest of various countries in all directions, conquest of the world; सुनिश्चितपुरं चक्रे दिग्जये कृतनिश्चयः Rāj. T. 4.183; स दिग्विजयमव्याजवीरः स्मरः इवाकरोत् Vikr.4.1. -तटम् the horizon. -दर्शनम् 1 showing merely the direction, pointing out only the general mode or manner. -2 a general outline or survey. -3 a compass. -दर्शिन् a. looking on all sides, having a general view. -दाहः preternatural redness of the horizon; दैग्दाहः 'a conflagration of the regions of the sky' (regarded as an evil omen) N.12.92; cf. Ms.4.115. -देशः 1 a distant region or country; दृश्यन्ते कुलनिम्नगा अपि परं दिग्देशकालाविमौ Rāj. T.4.38,417. -2 region, country; H.1. -नागः 1 an elephant of the quarter of the compass; see दिग्गज. -2 N. of a poet said to be a contemporary of Kālidāsa. (This interpretation is based on Mallinātha's gloss on दिङ्नागानां पथि परिहरन् स्थूल- हस्तावलेपान् Me.14; which is, however, very doubtful.) -पतिः, -पालः the regent or guardian of a quarter; Rāj. T.4.225 (for the names of the several regents, see अष्टदिक्पालः cf. Ms.5.96;7.33 also); सूर्यः शुक्रः क्षमापुत्रः सैंहिकेयः शनिः शशी । सौम्यस्त्रिदशमन्त्री च प्राच्यादिदिगधीश्वराः ॥ -Jyotistattvam. -पथः the surrounding region; सैन्यैर्नाना- पथायातैर्नदद्भिर्व्याप्तदिक्पथः Rāj. T.5.342. -भागः a point of the compass, direction. -भ्रमः perplexity about points of the compass, mistaking the way or direction; Vikr.5.66. -मण्डलम् = दिक्चक्रम् q.v. -मात्रम् the mere direction or indication. -मुखम् any quarter or part of the sky; हरति मे हरिवाहनदिङ्मुखम् V.3.6; Amaru.5. -मोहः mistaking the way or direction. -यात्रा a procession in different directions. -वसन, -वस्त्र a. stark naked, unclothed. (-स्त्रः) 1 a Jaina or Buddhist mendicant of the दिगम्बर class. -2 an epithet of Śiva. -विभा- वित a. renowned or celebrated in all quarters. -शूलम् a bad yoga in Astronomy; cf. शुक्रादित्यदिने न वारुणदिशं न ज्ञे कुजे चोत्तरां मन्देन्दोश्च दिने न शक्रककुभं याम्यां गुरौ न व्रजेत् । शूलानीति विलङ्घ्य यान्ति मनुजा ये वित्तलाभाशया भ्रष्टाशाः पुनरापतन्ति यदि ते शुक्रेण तुल्या अपि ॥ Jyotissārasaṅgraha. -साधनम् a means to make the journey in various quarters successful.
diśā दिशा Direction, quarter of the compass, region, &c. -Comp. -गजः, -पालः; see दिग्गज, दिक्पाल.
diśas दिशस् f. (= दिश्).
diṣṇuḥ दिष्णुः A giver, donor.
diśobhāj दिशोभाज् m. One who runs in all directions, a fugitive.
diṣṭa दिष्ट p. p. [दिश्-कर्मणि-क्त] 1 Shown, indicated, assigned, pointed out. -2 Described, referred to. -3 Fixed, settled. -4 Directed, ordered &c. -5 Destined (दैवविहित); न दिष्टमर्थमत्येतुमीशो मर्त्यः कथंचन Mb.3.135.55. -ष्टः Time. -ष्टम् 1 Assignment, allotment -2 Fate, destiny, good or ill-luck; भो दिष्टम् Ś.2. यश्च दिष्टपरो लोके यश्चापि हठवादिकः । उभावपि शठावेतौ कर्मबुद्धिः प्रशस्यते ॥ Mb.3.32.13. -3 Order, direction, command; सैनिका भयनाम्नो ये बर्हिष्मन् दिष्टकारिणः Bhāg.4.28.1. -4 Aim, object. -5 An appointed place; तं प्रेतं दिष्टमितो$ग्नय एव हरन्ति Ch. Up.5.9.2. -Comp. -अन्तः 'the end of one's appointed time', death; दिष्टान्तमाप्स्यति भवानपि पुत्रशोकात् R.9.79; Rām.2.65.28. -गतिः f. death; याजमानासम्भवादशक्यं हि दिष्टगतौ उत्तरं तन्त्रं कर्तुम् ŚB. on Ms.1.2.57. Hence दिष्टां गतिं गम् = To die. तस्मिंश्च दिष्टां गतिं गते फलं दर्शयति यो दीक्षितानां प्रमीयेत अपि तस्य फलमिति । ŚB. on MS.6.3.24. -दृश् m. the god; यस्य तुष्यति दिष्टदृक् Bhāg.4.21.23. -भाज् God. N.11.129. Chaṇḍū Paṇḍita com. -भावः death; दिष्टभावं गतस्यापि विषये मोदते प्रजा Mb.5.133.37. -भुक् a. reaping the fruit as destined or ordained by god; वसे$न्यदपि संप्राप्तं दिष्टभुक् तुष्टधीरहम् Bhāg.7.13.39.
diṣṭiḥ दिष्टिः f. [दिश भावे क्तिन् , संज्ञायां कर्तरि क्तिच् वा] 1 Assignment, allotment. -2 Direction, command, instruction, rule, precept. -3 Fate, fortune, destiny. -4 Good fortune, happiness, any auspicious event (such as the birth of a son); दिष्टिवृद्धिमिव शुश्राव K.55; दिष्टिवृद्धिसंभ्रमो महानभूत् K.7. -5 A sort of measure of length. -Comp. -वृद्धिः f. congratulation; see दृष्टिः (4).
diṣṭyā दिष्ट्या ind. (Strictly the instr. sing. of दिष्टि) Fortunately, luckily, thank God, how glad I am, how fortunate, bravo; (an exclamation of joy or gratulation); दिष्ट्या प्रतिहतं दुर्जातम् Māl.4; दिष्ट्या सोयं महाबाहुरञ्जनानन्दवर्धनः U.1.32; Ve 2.12. (दिष्ट्या वृध् means 'to be congratulated upon'; as in दिष्ट्या धर्मपत्नीसमागमेन पुत्रमुखदर्शनेन चायु- ष्मान् वर्धते Ś.7).
diśya दिश्य a. [दिशि भवः दिगा˚ यत्] 1 Belonging to or situated towards any quarter of the compass. -2 Foreign, outlandish; Śi.3.76.
dita दित a. [दो-क्त इत्वम्] Cut, torn, rent, divided; पुनः प्रसाद्य तं सोमः कला लेभे क्षये दिताः Bhāg.6.6.24.
ditiḥ दितिः f. 1 Cutting, splitting, dividing. -2 Liberality. -3 N. of a daughter of Dakṣa, wife of Kaśyapa and mother of the demons or daityas. -m. A king. -Comp. -जः, -तनयः a demon, a Rākṣasa.
ditsā दित्सा n. Desire of giving; दित्सां न सूचयसि Rāj. T.3. 252; मृतस्य लिप्सा कृपणस्य दित्सा (न हि दृष्टपूर्वा) Bv.1.125.
ditsu दित्सु a. Wishing to give &c., यत् ते दित्सु प्रराध्यम् Rv. 5.39.3.
dityaḥ दित्यः A demon.
div दिव् f. [दीव्यन्त्यत्र दिव्-बा˚ आधारे डिवि Tv.] (Nom. sing. द्यौः) 1 The heaven; दिवं मरुत्वानिव भोक्ष्यते भुवम् R.3. 4,12; Me.3. -2 The sky; दिव्यन्तरिक्षे भूमौ च घोरमुत्पात- जं भयम् Rām.2.1.43. -3 A day; अत्र भोक्तव्यमस्माभिर्दिवा- रूढं क्षुधार्दिताः Bhāg.1.13.6. -4 Light, brilliance. -5 Fire, glow of fire. N. B. The compounds with दिव् as first member are mostly irregular; e. g. दिवस्पतिः an epithet of Indra (of the 13th मन्वन्तर); Bhāg.8.13.32; अनतिक्रमणीया दिवस्पतेराज्ञा Ś.6; दिवस्पृथिव्यौ heaven and earth. दिविज्ञः, दिविष्ठः, दिविस्थः, दिविस (ष) द् m., दिवोकस् m., दिवौकस्, -सः 'inhabitant of the heaven', a god; Ś.7; R.3.19,47; दिविषद्वृन्दैः Gīt.7. दिवस्पृश m. the Supreme Being. दिविस्पृश् a. reaching or pervading the sky. दिवोद्भवा cardamoms. दिवोल्का a meteor. दिवौकस् m. 1 a god. -2 the Chātaka bird. -3 a deer. -4 a bee. -5 an elephant.
div दिव् I. 4 P. (दीव्यति, द्यूत or द्यून; desid. दुद्यूषति, दिदे- विषति) 1 To shine, be bright; दीव्यत्युच्चैर्लघुरघुपतिः किं नु वा स्यात् किमन्यत् Mv.6.53. -2 To throw, cast (as a missile); अदीव्यद्रौद्रमत्युग्रम् Bk.17.87;5.81. -2 To gamble, play with dice (with acc. or instr. of the 'dice'); अक्षैरक्षान् वा दीव्यति Sk.; Śi.8.32; Ve.1.13. -4 To play, sport. -5 To joke, trifle with, make sport of, rally (with acc.). -6 To stake, make a bet. -7 To sell, deal in (with gen.); अदेवीद्बन्धुभोगानाम् Bk.8.122; (but with acc. or gen. when the root is preceded by a preposition; शतं शतस्य वा परिदीव्यति Sk.) -8 To squander, make light of. -9 To praise. -1 To be glad, rejoice. -11 To be mad or drunk. -12 To be sleepy. -13 To wish for. -II. 1 P., 1 U. (देवति, देवयति-ते) 1 To cause to lament, pain, vex, torment. -2 To ask, beg. -III. 1 Ā. (देवयते) To suffer pain, lament, moan. -With परि to lament, moan, suffer pain; खरदूषणयोर्भ्रात्रोः पर्यदेविष्ट सा पुरः Bk.4.34.
di दिवा ind. By day, in the daytime; दिवाभू 'to become day'. -Comp. -अटनः a crow. -अन्ध a. blind by day. (-न्धः) an owl. -अन्धकी, -अन्धिका a muskrat. -अवसानम् 'close of day', evening. -करः 1 the sun; Ku.1.12;5.48. -2 a crow. -3 the sun-flower. -कीर्तिः 1 a Chāṇḍāla. -2 a man of low caste; Ms.5.85. -2 a barber. दिनमिव दिवाकीर्तिस्तीक्ष्णैः क्षुरैः सवितुः करैः N. 19.55. -3 an owl; तस्मिन् काले$पि च भवान् दिवाकीर्तिभयार्दितः Mb.12.138.12. -चरः 1 a Chāṇḍāla. -2 a kind of bird (श्यामा). -नक्तम् Day and night; Bhāg.5.22.5. ind. by day and night. -निशम् ind. day and night; चकोरव्रतमालम्ब्य तत्रैवासन् दिवानिशम् Ks.76.11. -पुष्टः, -मणिः the sun. -प्रदीपः 'a lamp by day', an obscure man. -भीतः, -भीतिः 1 an owl; दिवाकराद्रक्षति यो गुहासु लीनं दिवा- भीतमिवान्धकारम् Ku.1.12. -2 a white lotus (opening at night). -3 a thief, house-breaker. -मध्यम् midday. -रात्रम् ind. day and night; Ms.5.8. -वसुः the sun. -शय a. sleeping by day; आरुरोह कुमुदाकरोपमां रात्रिजागर- परो दिवाशयः R.19.34. -शयता sleep by day; रात्रौ दिवाशयतया यो$प्यनुत्थानदूषितः Rāj. T.5.253. -स्वप्नः, -स्वापः sleep during day-time. (-पः) an owl.
divam दिवम् [दीव्यत्यत्र घञर्थे आधारे क] 1 Heaven. -2 The sky; see दिव्; दिवं ते शिरसा व्याप्तम् Mb.12.47.88. -3 A day. -4 A forest, wood, thicket.
divan दिवन् n. The heaven. -m. A day.
divasaḥ दिवसः सम् [दीव्यते$त्र दिव् असच् किच्च cf. Uṇ.3.121.] See दिन. A day; दिवस इवाभ्रश्यामस्तपात्यये जीवलोकस्य Ś.3.11. -Comp. -अवसानम् evening. -ईश्वरः, -करः, -नाथः the sun; दिवसकरमयूखैर्बोध्यमानं प्रभाते Ṛs.3.22. -मुखम् morning, daybreak; R.5.76. -मुद्रा a day's wages. -विगमः evening, sunset; यामध्यास्ते दिवसविगमे नीलकण्ठः सुहृद्वः Me.81. -दिवसीकृ to convert the night into day; निशा दिवसीकृता Mk.4.3.
divātana दिवातन a. (-नी f.) [दिवा भवः टथु तुद् च] Of or belonging to the day; शशिन इव दिवातनस्य लेखा Ku.4.46; Bk.5.65.
diviḥ दिविः The Chāṣa bird (also दिवः).
divodāsaḥ दिवोदासः N. of a reputed Vedic king, father of सुदास; Rv.7.18.25.
divya दिव्य a. [दिवि भवः यत्] 1 Divine, heavenly, celestial; दिव्यस्त्वं हि न मानुषः Mb.3.252.8. -2 Supernatural, wonderful; परदोषेक्षणदिव्यचक्षुषः Śi.16.29; दिव्यं ददामि ते चक्षुः Bg.11.8. -3 Brilliant, splendid. -4 Charming, beautiful. -व्यः 1 A superhuman or celestial being; दिव्यानामपि कृतविस्मयां पुरस्तात् Śi.8.64. -2 Barley. -3 An epithet of Yama. -4 A fragrant resin, bdellium. -5 A philosopher. -व्यम् 1 Celestial nature, divinity. -2 The sky. -3 An ordeal (of which 1 kinds are enumerated); cf. Y.2.22,95. -4 An oath, a solemn declaration. -5 Cloves. -6 A kind of sandal. -7 A kind of water. -Comp. -अंशुः the sun. -अङ्गना, -नारी, -स्त्री a heavenly nymph, celestial damsel, an apsaras. -अदिव्य a. partly human and partly divine (as a hero, such as Arjuna). -अवदानम् N. of Buddhistic work from Nepal (written in Sanskrit). -उदकम् rainwater. -उपपादुकः a god. -ओषधिः f. a herb of great supernatural efficacy, i. e. curing snake-poison; हिमवति दिव्यौषधयः Mu.1.23. -कारिन् a. 1 taking an oath. -2 undergoing an ordeal. -क्रिया the application of an ordeal; निःसंभ्रमः स्तम्भयितुं देव दिव्यक्रियामयम् Rāj. T.4.94. -गन्धः sulphur. (-न्धा) large cardamoms. (-न्धम्) cloves. -गायनः a Gandharva. -चक्षुस् a. 1 having divine vision, heavenly-eyed; त्वया नियम्या ननु दिव्यचक्षुषा R.3.45. -2 blind. (-m.) 1 a monkey. -2 an Astrologer. -3 Arjuna. -4 one who has prophetic vision; दिव्यचक्षुर्ज्योतिषिके पार्थात्मज्ञानिनोरपि Nm. (-n.) a divine or prophetic eye, supernatural vision, the power of seeing what is invisible by the human eye. -ज्ञानम् supernatural knowledge. -दृश् m. an astrologer. -दोहदम् a present offered to a deity for the accomplishment of one's desired object. -धुनी N. of Bhāgīrathī; दिव्यधुनि मकरन्दे˚ Stotra. -पुष्पः the Karavīra tree. -प्रश्नः inquiry into celestial phenomena or future course of events, augury. -मन्त्रः Om (ओम्); Amṛit. Up.2 -मानम् measuring the time according to the days and years of the gods. -मानुषः a demi-god; दिव्यमानुषचेष्टा तु परभागे न हारिणी Ks.1.47. -रत्नम् a fabulous gem said to grant all desires of its possessor, the philosopher's stone; cf. चिन्तामणि. -रथः a celestial car moving through the air. -रसः 1 quicksilver. 2 heavenly water or love; V.2. -वस्त्र a. divinely dressed. (-स्त्रः) 1 sunshine. -2 a kind of sun-flower. -वाक्यम् a celestial word or voice. -श्रोत्रम् an ear which hears everything. -सरित् f. the celestial Ganges. -सानुः N. of one of the Viśvedevas. -सारः the Sāla tree. -स्त्री an Apsaras.
akhedin अखेदिन् a.. Not wearisome, not fatigued, ˚त्वम् continuous flow of speech regarded as one of the वाग्गुणs of the Jainas.
ajādi अजादिः a gaṇa of pāṇini (IV.1.4.).
atidiś अतिदिश् 6 P. 1 To assign, to make over, transfer. -2 To extend the application of, extend by analogy; प्रधानमल्लनिबर्हणन्यायेन अतिदिशति Ś.B.; जनपदतदवध्योश्चेति प्रकरणे ये प्रत्यया उक्तास्ते$त्रातिदिश्यन्ते P.IV.3.1 Sk.,IV.1. 151 Mbh.
ativādin अतिवादिन् a. Talkative, very eloquent; exclusively establishing one's own assertion; प्राणो ह्येष यः सर्वभूतैर्विभाति विजानन्विद्वान्भवते नातिवादी Muṇḍ.3.1.4.
atṛdila अतृदिल a. [न तृद्यते वध्यते, तृद्-किलच्] Ved. Not assailable, immovable, solid, firm (as a mountain); तृदिला अतृदिलासः Rv.1.94.11.
atyāditya अत्यादित्य a. Surpassing the (lustre of the) sun; अत्यादित्यं हुतवहमुखे संभृतं तद्धि तेजः Me.43.
adādi अदादि a. Having अद् at the head, a term used to mark roots of the second conjugation.
adikka अदिक्क a. Ved. Having no direction or region of the world for oneself; banished from beneath the sky. Śat. Br.
aditi अदिति a. [न दीयते खण्ड्यते बध्यते बृहत्त्वात्; दो-क्तिच्] Free, not tied. आदित्यासो अदितयः स्याम Rv.7.52.1. boundless, unlimited, inexhaustible; entire, unbroken; happy, pious (mostly Ved. in all these senses). -तिः [अत्ति प्राणिजातम्; अद्इतिच्] 1 Devourer i. e. death; यद्यदेवासृज तत्तदत्तुमध्रियत, सर्वं वा अत्तीति तददितेरदितित्वम् Bṛi. Ār. Up.1.2.5. -2 An epithet of God. -तिः f. [न दातुं शक्तिः] 1 Inability to give, poverty. -2 [दातुं छेत्तुम् अयोग्या] (a) The earth. (b) The goddess Aditi, mother of the Ādityas, in mythology represented as the mother of gods; see further on. (c) Freedom, security; boundlessness, immensity of space (opp. to the earth). (d) Inexhaustible abundance, perfection. (e) The lunar mansion called पुनर्वसु. (f) Speech; या प्राणेन संभवत्यदितिर्देवतामयी (शब्दादीनां अदनात् अदितिः Śaṅkara). (g) A cow. cf. ŚB. on MS. 1-3-49. (h) Milk; wife (?). -ती (dual) Heaven and earth. [अदिति literally means 'unbounded', 'the boundless Heaven', or according to others, 'the visible infinite, the endless expanse beyond the earth, beyond the clouds, beyond the sky'. According to Yāska अदिति- रदीना देवमाता, and the verse beginning with अदितिर्द्यौः &c. Rv.1.89.16. he interprets by taking अदिति to mean अदीन i. e. अनुपक्षीण, न ह्येषां क्षयो$स्ति इति. [In the Ṛigveda Aditi is frequently implored 'for blessing on children and cattle, for protection and for forgiveness'. She is called 'Devamātā' being strangely enough represented both as mother and daughter of Dakṣa. She had 8 sons; she approached the gods with 7 and cast away the 8th (Mārtaṇḍa, the sun.) In another place Aditi is addressed as 'supporter of the sky, sustainer of the earth, sovereign of this world, wife of Viṣṇu', but in the Mahābhārata, Rāmāyaṇa and Purāṇas, Viṣṇu is said to be the son of Aditi, one of the several daughters of Dakṣa and given in marriage of Kaśyapa by whom she was the mother of Viṣṇu in his dwarf incarnation, and also of Indra, and she is called mother of gods and the gods her sons, 'Aditinandanas'; See Dakṣa and Kaśyapa also]. -Comp. -जः, -नन्दनः a god, divine being.
anahaṃvādin अनहंवादिन् a. Prideless, modest; मुक्तसङ्गो$नहंवादी... (सात्त्विक उच्यते) Bg.18.26.
anādi अनादि a. [आदिः कारणं पूर्वकालो वा नास्ति यस्य सः] Having no beginning, eternal, existing from eternity, epithet of परमेश्वर; जगदादिरनादिस्त्वम् Ku.2.9; अनादिरादि- र्गोविन्दः सर्वकारणकारणम्; also of हिरण्यगर्भ. -Comp. -अनन्त, -अन्त a. without beginning and end; eternal. (-अन्तः) N. of Śiva. -निधन a. having neither beginning nor end, eternal. -मध्यान्त a. having no beginning, middle or end; eternal.
anādi अनादिता त्वम् State of having no beginning.
anādimat अनादिमत् a. Not produced or effected, having no beginning.
anāsādita अनासादित a. Not obtained, not found or met with; not encountered or attacked; not occurred or having happened, non-existent. -Comp. -विग्रह a. unused to war, having had no occasion to fight.
anāsvādita अनास्वादित a. Untasted; मधु नवमनास्वादितरसम्; Ś.2.1.
anirdiṣṭa अनिर्दिष्ट a. Undefined, not specified; क्व ˚कारणं गम्यते V.2 without a definite aim.
anugādin अनुगादिन् a. [गद्-णिनि] Repeating, following in speaking, echoing. (P.V.4.13).
anudita अनुदित a. 1 Unsaid, not uttered. -2 Not risen or appeared forth.
anudinam अनुदिनम् दिवसम् ind. Daily, day after day; पारावतः खलु शिलाकणमात्रभोजी कामी भवेदनुदिनं वद को$त्र हेतुः Udb.; अनुदिवसं पिरहीयसे$ङ्गैः Ś.3.
anudiś अनुदिश् 6 P. To point out, assign. -अनुदिशम् ind. In every quarter.
anunādin अनुनादिन् a. Echoing, sounding, resonant. तस्या- स्फोटितशब्देन महता चानुनादिना । पेतुर्विहङ्गा गगनादुच्चैश्चेदमघोषयन् ॥ Rām.5.42.32.
anupadika अनुपदिक a. [अनुपदमस्त्यस्य गन्तृत्वेन, ठन्] Following, gone after.
anupadin अनुपदिन् a. [अनुपद्-इनि P.V.2.9] Following, seeking after or for a searcher, inquirer; अनुपदमन्वेष्टा गवामनुपदी Sk.; क्षणदाकरे$नुपदिभिः प्रयये Śi.9.7; मृगस्यानुपदी रामो जगाम गजविक्रमः Bk.5.5.
andi अन्दिका 1 An oven, fire-place. -2 An elder sister (cf. -अन्तिका)
anvaṣṭamadiśam अन्वष्टमदिशम् ind. Towards the north-east direction.
anvādiś अन्वादिश् 6 P. To name or mention again; to mention or refer to in a subsequent place, employ again.
anvādiṣṭa अन्वादिष्ट p. p. 1 Mentioned after or according to; employed again; अन्वादिष्टः पुरुषः अनुपुरुषः P.VI.2.19 Sk. -2 (Hence) Inferior, of secondary importance.
apadiś अपदिश् 6 P. 1 To point out, indicate, show; तदा- गतित्वेनाहमपदेश्यः Dk.6; assign, allot. -2 To declare, put forward, adduce, communicate; announce, say, tell; inform against, accuse; अपदिश्यापदेश्यं च Ms.8.54. -3 To feign, pretend, hold out or plead as a pretext or excuse; मित्रकृत्यमपदिश्य R.19.31.32,54; शिरःशूलस्पर्शन- मपदिशन् Dk.56 pleading head-ache as an excuse. -4 To refer to, have reference to; रहसि भर्त्रा मद्गोत्रापदिष्टा Dk. 12 referred to, called by the name of.
apadiṣṭa अपदिष्ट a. Assigned as a reason or pretext.
apadiśam अपदिशम् ind. Half a point between two regions of the compass (दिशयोर्मध्ये), in an intermediate region.
apodi अपोदिका की f. A sort of pot-herb (अपनद्धमुदकं यस्याः, तत्फलेषूदकवत्त्यात्तथात्वम्). -की see उपोदकी. Bassella Lueida or Rubra (Mar. थोरमयाळ
apracodita अप्रचोदित a. unasked, undesired; (भिक्षां) पुरस्ताद- प्रचोदितां...ग्राह्याम् Ms.4.248.
abdi अब्दिः Ved. A cloud; ˚भृत् possessed of clouds; giving water, as a cloud.
abhinandin अभिनन्दिन् a. (At the end of comp.) Rejoicing at, approving, praising &c.
abhivādin अभिवादिन् a. 1 Saluting respectfully. -2 Describing, referring to; तदभिवादिनी एषा ऋग्भवति Nir. अभिवाद्य abhivādya वादनीय vādanīya अभिवाद्य वादनीय pot p. To be respectfully saluted. -द्यः N. of Śiva.
abhiśabdita अभिशब्दित a. Declared, announced, said, named; ध्यानिकं सर्वमेवैतद्यदेतदभिशब्दितम् Ms.6.82.
abhyudi अभ्युदि 2 P. [अभि + उद् -इ] 1 To rise (fig. also); go up (as the sun); एनास्त्वभ्युदितान्विद्याद् यदा प्रादुष्कृताग्निषु Ms. 4.14. -2 To rise over (one); तं चेदभ्युदियात्सूर्यः शयानं कामचारतः Ms.2.22,219. -3 To come into existence, happen, originate. -4 To engage in combat with (one), encounter, (लोकवीरान्) को जीवितार्थी समरे$भ्युदियात् Mb. -5 To prosper, thrive.
abhyudita अभ्युदित p. p. 1 Risen; occurred. -2 Elevated, risen to prosperity. -3 Asleep at sunrise, over whom the sun has risen; सूर्येण ह्यभिनिर्मुक्तः शयानो$भ्युदितश्च यः Ms.2.221. -4 Celebrated as a festival. -ता N. of a religious ceremony. -तम् Rising, sunrise.
amardita अमर्दित a. Unthreshed, untrodden, unsubdued.
aravindi अरविन्दिनी 1 A lotus plant; प्रपीतमधुका भृङ्गैः सुदिवेवार- विन्दिनी Bk.5.7. -2 An assemblage of lotus flowers. -3 A place abounding in lotus flowers.
ardita अर्दित p. p. [अर्द्-क्त] Tormented, afflicted; begged &c. -तम् A disease, spasm of the jaw-bones, tetanus or hemiflegia (paralysis of the muscles on one side of the face and neck).
arditin अर्दितिन् a. [अर्दितमस्त्यस्य-ईनि] Suffering from the spasms of jaw-bones.
arbudi अर्बुदिः 1 A serpent-like demon conquered by Indra; Av.11.9. and 1 (in almost every verse). -2 All-pervading lord.
arbudin अर्बुदिन् a. Afflicted with swelling or tumour.
ātodin आतोदिन् a. Ved. Striking, pushing, pricking; आतो- दिनौ नितोदिनावथो संतोदिनावुत (अपि नह्यामि) Av.7.95.3.
ādadi आददि a. Ved. Taking.
āditsu आदित्सु a. (fr. desid. of आदा) Wishing to take; आदित्सुभिर्नूपुरशिञ्जितानि Ku.1.34.
ādādika आदादिक a. Belonging to the class of roots of which the first is अद् i. e. to the second class.
ādi आदि a. 1 First, primary, primitive; निदानं त्वादिकारणम् Ak. -2 Chief, first, principal, pre-eminent; oft. at the end of comp. in this sense; see below. -3 First in time existing before. -दीः 1 Beginning, commencement (opp. अन्त); अप एव ससर्जादौ तासु बीजमवासृजत् Ms.1.8; Bg.3.41; अनादि &c.; जगदादिरनादिस्त्वम् Ku.2.9; oft. at the end of comp. and translated by 'beginning with', 'et cætera', 'and others', 'and so on' (of the same nature or kind), 'such like'; इन्द्रादयो देवाः the gods Indra and others (इन्द्रः आदिर्येषां ते); एवमादि this and the like; भ्वादयो धातवः भू and others, or words beginning with भू, are called roots; oft. used by Pāṇini to denote classes or groups of grammatical words; अदादि, दिवादि, स्वादि &c. -2 First part of portion. -3 A firstling, first-fruits. -4 Prime cause. -5 Nearness. -6 One of the seven parts of Sāma; अथ सप्तविधस्य वाचि सप्तविधं सामोपासीत यत्किंच वाचो हुमिति स हिंकारो यत्प्रेति स प्रस्तावो यदेति स आदिः Ch. Up.2.8.1. -Comp. -अन्त a. 1 having beginning and end. -2 first and last. (-तम्) beginning and end. -˚यमकम् N. of a figure in poetry. cf. Bk.1.21. ˚वत् having beginning and end, finite. ˚अन्तर्वर्तिन् a. having a beginning, end and middle; being all-in-all. -उदात्त a. having the acute accent on the first syllable. -उपान्तम् ind. from first to last. -करः, -कर्तृ, -कृत् m. the creator, an epithet of Brahmā or Viṣnu; गरीयसे ब्रह्मणो$प्यादिकर्त्रे Bg.11.37; विशेषणे द्वे य इहादिकर्तुर्वदेदधीती स हि कैयटीयः Śab. Kau. -कर्मन् n. the beginning of an action. -कविः 'the first poet', an epithet of Brahmā and of Vālmīki; the former is so called because he first produced and promulgated the Vedas; (तेने ब्रह्म हृदा य आदिकवये मुह्यन्ति यत्सूरयः Bhāg.1.1.1.) and the latter, because he was the first to show to others 'the path of poets'; when he beheld one of a pair of Krauñcha birds being killed by a fowler, he cursed the wretch, and his grief unconsciously took the form of a verse (श्लोकत्वमापद्यत यस्य शोकः); he was subsequently told by Brahmā to compose the life of Rāma, and he thus gave to the world the first poem in Sanskrit, the Rāmāyaṇa; cf. U.2. Viṣkambhaka. -काण्डम् the first book of the Rāmāyaṇa. -कारणम् the first or primary cause (of the universe), which, according to the Vedāntins, is Brahman; while, according to the Naiyāyikas and particalarly the Vaiśeṣikas, atoms are the first or material cause of the universe, and not God. -2 analysis. -3 algebra. -काव्यम् the first poem; i. e. the Rāmāyaṇa; see आदिकवि. -केशवः N. of Viṣṇu. -जिनः N. of Ṛiṣabha, the first तीर्थंकर. -तालः a sort of musical time or ताल; एक एव लघुर्यत्र आदितालः स कथ्यते. -दीपकम् N. of a figure in rhetoric (the verb standing at the beginning of the sentence). cf. Bk.1.23. -देवः 1 the first or Supreme God; पुरुषं शाश्वतं दिव्यं आदिदेव- मजं विभुम् Bg.1.12,11.38. -2 Nārāyaṇa or Viṣṇu. -3 Śiva. -4 Brahmā; Mb.12.188.2. -5 the sun. -दैत्यः an epithet of Hiraṇyakaśipu. -नाथः N. of Ādibuddha. -पर्वन् n. 'the first section or chapter', N. of the first book of the Mahābhārata. -पुराणम् the first Purāṇa, N. of the Brahma-Purāṇa. N. of a Jaina religious book. -पु (पू) रुषः 1 the first or primeval being, the lord of the creation. -2 Viṣṇu, Kṛiṣṇa, or Nārāyaṇa; ते च प्रापुरुदन्वन्तं बुबुधे चादिपूरुषः R.1.6; तमर्घ्यमर्घ्यादिकयादिपूरुषः Śi.1.14. -बलम् generative power; first vigour. -बुद्ध a. perceived in the beginning. (-द्धः) the primitive Buddha. -भव, -भूत a. produced at first. (-वः, -तः) 1 'the first-born', primeval being, an epithet of Brahmā; इत्युक्त्वादिभवो देवः Bhāg.7.3.22. -2 also N. of Viṣṇu; रसातलादादि. भवेन पुंसा R.13.8. -3 an elder brother. (-तम्) minute five elements (पञ्चमहाभूतानि); नष्टे लोके द्विपरार्धावसाने महा- भूतेष्वादिभूतं गतेषु Bhāg.1.3.25. -मूलम् first foundation, primeval cause. -योगाचार्यः 'the first teacher of devotion', an epithet of Śiva. -रसः the first of he 8 Rasas, i. e. शृङ्गार or love. -राजः the first king पृथु; an epithet of Manu. -रूपम् Symptom (of disease). -वंशः primeval race, primitive family. -वराहः 'the first boar', an epithet of Visṇu, alluding to his third or boar-incarnation. -विद्वस् m. the first learned man; कपिल. -विपुला f. N. of an Āryā metre. -वृक्षः N. of a plant (Mar. आपटा). -शक्तिः f. 1 the power of माया or illusion. -2 an epithet of Durgā. -शरीरम् 1. the primitive body. -2 ignorance. -3 the subtle body. -सर्गः the first creation.
ādika आदिक a. (At the end of comp.) Beginning with, and so on.
āditaḥ आदितः आदौ ind. From the first or beginning, at first; तद्दैवेनादितो हतम् U.5.2. पतीन् प्रजानामसृजन् महर्षी- नादितो दश Ms. आदौ रामतपोवनाधिगमनम्.
ādima आदिम a. [आदौ भवः आदि-डिमच्] First, primitive, original; आदिमः श्येनशैलादिसंयोगः परिकीर्तितः Bhāṣā. P.
ādi आदिता त्वम् Priority, precedence.
ādimat आदिमत् a. Having a beginning.
āditeya आदितेय [अदितेरपत्यं ढक्] 1 A son of Aditi. -2 A god, divinity in general. -3 The sun; दिवि देवाः सूर्यमादि- तेयम् Rv.1.88.11.
āditya आदित्य a. [अदितेरपत्यं ण्य P.IV.1.85.] 1 Solar, belonging to, or born in, the solar line; आदित्यैर्यदि विग्रहो नृपतिभिर्धन्यं ममैतत्ततो U.6.18. -2 Devoted to, or originating from, Aditi; आदित्यं चरुं निर्वपेत् Yaj. Ts.2.2.6.1. -3 Belonging to, or sprung from, the Ādityas. -त्यः 1 A son of Aditi; a god, divinity in general. (The number of Ādityas appears to have been originally seven, of whom Varuṇa is the head, and the name Āditya was restricted to them (देवा आदित्या ये सप्त Rv.9.114.3.). In the time of the Brāhmaṇas, however, the number of Ādityas rose to 12, representing the sun in the 12 months of the year; धाता मित्रो$र्यमा रुद्रो वरुणः सूर्य एव च । भगो विवस्वान् पूषा च सविता दशमः स्मृतः ॥ एकादशस्तथा त्वष्टा विष्णुर्द्वादश उच्यते ।); आदित्यानामहं विष्णुः Bg.1.21; Ku. 2.24. (These 12 suns are supposed to shine only at the destruction of the universe; cf. Ve.3.8; दग्धुं विश्वं दहनकिरणैर्नोदिता द्वादशार्काः). -2 The sun; Vāj.4.21. -3 A name of Viṣṇu in his fifth or dwarf-incarnation; स्वयंभूः शंभुरादित्यः V. Sah. -4 N. of the Arka plant (Mar. रुई). -त्यौ (dual) N. of a constellation, the seventh lunar mansion (पुनर्वसु). -Comp. -केतुः 1 N. of a son of Dhṛitarāṣtra. -2 The charioteer of the sun. -चन्द्रौ (dual) the sun and the moon. -दर्शनम् 'Showing the sun' (to a child of 4 months), one of the संस्काराs. -पत्र्यः N. of a plant. (-त्र्यम्) the leaf of the Arka tree. -पर्णिनी a creeping plant with gold-coloured flowers, growing near the bank of water. -पुराणम् N. of an Upapurāṇa. -पुष्पिका red swallow wort (Mar. शिरदोडी). -बन्धुः N. of Śākyamuni. -भक्ता [आदित्ये भक्ता] N. of a plant. see अर्कभक्ता. -मण्डलम् the disc or orb of the sun. -व्रतम् 1 worship of the sun; a व्रत or rite. -2 N. of a Sāman. -सूनुः 'the son of the sun', N. of Sugrīva, Yama, Saturn, Manu and Karṇa &c.
ādin आदिन् a. [अत्तीति अद् णिनि] Eating (in comp.); परस्परादिनः Ms.12.59.
ādi आदि (दी) नवः वम् 1 Misfortune, distress. -2 Hinderance; want of luck (in dice); आदिनवं प्रतिदीन्वे Av.7.19.4. -3 Fault, transgression; Śi.2.22. see अनादीनव. -4 An inflictor of distress; आदीनवः पुमान् दोषे परिक्लेशदुरन्तयोः Medinī. -Comp. -दर्श a. having evil designs towards a fellow-player at dice (Ved.); अक्षराजाय कितवं कृतायादिनवदर्शम् Vāj.3.18.
ādiś आदिश् 6 U. 1 To point out, indicate, show; मार्ग आदिश् (oft. in dramas) lead the way; Ś.5. -2 To order, direct, command; वेलोपलक्षणार्थमादिष्टो$स्मि Ś.4; पुनरप्यादिश तावदुत्थितः Ku.4.16; तेषामप्येतदादिशेत् Ms.11.192; आदिक्षदस्याभिगमं वनाय Bk.3.9,7.28; R.1.54,2.65; to appoint; वसुमित्रं गोप्तारमादिश्य M.5. -3 To aim at; assign; आदिक्षत्सिंहासनं तस्य Bk.3.3; हरिवीराणामादिशद्दक्षिणां दिशम् Rām. -4 To report, announce; teach, lay down, prescribe, instruct, advise; न चास्य व्रतमादिशेत् Ms.4.8; बुद्धिमादिश्य R.12.68. -5 To specify, determine; प्रतिषिद्धमनादिष्टम् Y.2.26. -6 To foretell, predict; सा सिद्धेनादिष्टा Ratn.4, Bṛi. S.5.96; आदिष्टः सुरासुरसंगरो भावी V.5. -7 To undertake, try; ब्रह्मास्त्रमादिश Mb. -8 To provoke, challenge. -9 To profess as one's own duty. -Caus. To indicate, show, point out, announce &c. (same as आदिश्).
ādiś आदिश् f. Ved. 1 Aim, design, intention; अस्या$- श्रीणीतादिशं गभस्तौ Rv.1.61.3. -2 A project, proposition. -3 A proposal, declaration. -4 A region, quarter. -5 A sacrifice offered to a particular deity.
ādiṣṭa आदिष्ट p. p. 1 Directed, commanded, advised, enjoined &c. इत्युभयमादिष्टं भवति Ch. Up.3.18.1. -2 Said, foretold. -3 Substituted. -ष्टम् 1 Command, order. -2 Advice. -3 Leavings of a meal (उच्छिष्ट).
ādiṣṭin आदिष्टिन् a. One who gives orders. m. (अस्त्यर्थे इनि). 1 A Brāhmaṇa in the first order of his life; pupil, student (ब्रह्मचारिन्); आदिष्टिनो ये राजेन्द्र ब्राह्मणा वेदपारगाः Mb.13.22.17. -2 A penitent, one engaged in any expiatory rite; आदिष्टी नोदकं कुर्यादावृतस्य समापनात् Ms.5.88.
ādardira आदर्दिर a. Ved. Crushing, splitting open; आदर्दिरासो अद्रयो न विश्वहा Rv.1.78.6.
ānandi आनन्दिः [आ-नन्द्-इन्] 1 Joy, happiness; कौसल्यानन्दि- वर्धनः Rām. -2 Curiosity.
ānandin आनन्दिन् a. [आ-नन्द्-णिनि] 1 Happy, joyful, delighted. -2 Pleasing, giving delight. रसह्येवायं लब्ध्वा$नन्दी भवति T. Up.2.7.
ānupadika आनुपदिक a. (-की f.) [अनुपदं धावति ठक् P.IV.4.37; IV.2.59. वेद अधीते वा] Following, pursuing, tracking, studying. आनुपूर्वम् ānupūrvam र्व्यम् rvyam र्वी rvī आनुपूर्वम् र्व्यम् र्वी [अनुपूर्वस्य भावः ष्यञ् ततो वा ङीषि यलोपः] 1 Order, succession, series; देव्या चाख्यातं सर्वमेवानु- पूर्व्याद्वाचा संपूर्णं वायुपुत्रः शशंस Rām.5.65.28 वसीरन्नानुपूर्व्येण शाणक्षौमाविकानि च Ms.2.41. -2 (In law) The regular order of the castes; षडानुपूर्व्या विप्रस्य क्षत्रस्य चतुरो$वरान् Ms.3.23. -3 (In logic) Conclusion regularly or syllogistically drawn. -वत् Having a (definite) order; आनुपूर्व्यवतामेकदेशग्रहणेषु आगमवदन्त्यलोपः स्यात् । Ms.1.5.1. आनुपूर्वे ānupūrvē र्व्ये rvyē ण ṇ अनुपूर्व्या anupūrvyā आनुपूर्वे र्व्ये ण अनुपूर्व्या ind. One after another, in due order; आनुपूर्व्येणोत्थितराजलोकः K.95.
āntarvedika आन्तर्वेदिक a. Being within the place of sacrifice.
āpradivam आप्रदिवम् ind. Forever.
ābdika आब्दिक a. (-की f.) [अब्द-ठक्] Annual, yearly; आब्दिकः करः Ms.7.129,3.1.
āmardin आमर्दिन् a. Crushing, pressing.
āmodita आमोदित p. p. 1 Pleased, delighted. -2 Made fragrant, scented.
āmodin आमोदिन् a. 1 Happy, delighted. -2 Fragrant; fragrant or perfumed with; oft. at the end of comp.; नवकुटजकदम्बामोदिनो गन्धवाहाः Bh.1.35. m. (-दी) A perfume for the mouth (made in the form of a pill of camphor &c.).
āvedita आवेदित p. p. Made known, communicated &c. -तः The person to whom something is made known. -तम् That which is communicated.
āvedin आवेदिन् a. 1 Declaring, announcing. -2 Giving orders.
āsādita आसादित p. p. 1 Obtained, got; क्वचिदासादितमीक्षितं श्रुतं वा Udb. -2 Reached, gone to. -3 Spread, extended. -4 Effected, completed. -5 Met with, attacked, overtaken.
āsandi आसन्दिका [स्वल्पार्थे कन्] A small chair; K.219.
āskandin आस्कन्दिन् a. 1 Jumping upon, assailing, attacking; न हि सिंहो गजास्कन्दी भयाद्गिरिगुहाशयः R.17.52. -2 Causing to flow. -3 Granting. -4 Spending.
āsvādita आस्वादित a. Tasted. आस्वादितद्विरदशोणितशोणजिह्वः.
ālhādin आल्हादिन् a. 1 Delighted, glad. -2 Giving delight, gladdening.
indindiraḥ इन्दिन्दिरः A large bee; लोभादिन्दिन्दिरेषु निपतत्सु Bv.2.183.
indi इन्दिरा [इन्द्-किरच्] N. of Lakṣmi, wife of Viṣṇu. -Comp. -आलयम् 'abode of Indirā', the blue lotus. -मन्दिरः an epithet of Viṣṇu. (-रम्) the blue lotus.
indi इन्दि (न्दी) वरम् [इन्दीर्लक्ष्मीस्तस्या वरं वरणीयम् Tv.] The blue lotus; बाले तव मुखाम्भोजे कथमिन्दीवरद्वयम् Ś. Til.17. इन्दीवरदलश्यामः. N. of Viṣṇu; इन्दीवरदलश्याममिन्दिरानन्दकन्दलम् ।
ucchedin उच्छेदिन् a. Destroying.
uṇādi उणादिः A class of terminations beginning with उण्. m. pl. The class of कृत् affixes which begin with उण्. -Comp. -सूत्राणि The सूत्रs (Pāṇini iii. 3,I.4.75) treating of the उणादि affixes. ˚वृत्ति f. a commentary on the उणादि Sūtras.
utkledin उत्क्लेदिन् a. 1 Wet. -2 Making wet or moist.
utpādin उत्पादिन् a. Produced, born; सर्वमुत्पादि भङ्गुरम् H.1.28. -2 Bringing forth, causing, producing (in comp.).
utpādi उत्पादिका 1 N. of a certain insect, the white ant. -2 A mother. -3 A vegetable हेलंची (Mar. चाकवत) -4 The herb पूतिका (Mar. थोर मयाळ).
utpādita उत्पादित a. Produced; अप्यनारभमाणस्य विभोरुत्पादिताः परैः Śi.2.91.
utsādita उत्सादित p. p. 1 Destroyed. -2 Cleansed, purified with oil or perfumes &c. उत्सादितः कषायेण बलवद्भिः सुशिक्षितैः । आप्लुतः साधिवासेन जलेन स सुगन्धिना ॥ Mb.7.82.1. -3 Risen, ascended. -4 Raised.
udi उदि 2 P. 1 To rise (as a star, cloud &c.) (fig. also); come up; उदेति पूर्वं कुसुमं ततः फलम् Ś.7.3; उदेति सविता ताम्रस्ताम्र एवास्तमेति च Subhāś; Māl.2.1; Ki.2.36; Bk.6.11,8.35,18.2; to be seen, appear. -2 To be produced, come out or arise from, spring or proceed from; उदितदयः Dk.13; पुण्यः कृशानोरुदियाय धूमः R.7.26; उदितश्रियम् 1.93 v. l.; Ś.1.25. -3 To go out, escape. -4 To start up; एवमुद्यन्प्रभावेण R.17.77. -5 To rise up against; संयुगे सांयुगीनं तमुद्यन्तं प्रसहेत कः Ku.2.57; य एनमुदीयाद्रथी Mb.
udita उदित p. p. 1 Risen, ascended; उदितभूयिष्टः Māl.1 mostly risen; Bv.2.85; नित्योदितः Bh.3.8; ever-existing. -2 High, tall, lofty. -3 Grown, augmented; संमानं मेनिरे सर्वाः प्रहर्षोदितचेतसः Rām.1.16.3. -4 Born, produced. -5 Spoken, uttered (fr. वद्). -6 Renowned, reputed; चित्रयोधी समाख्यातो बभूवातिरथोदितः Mb.1.139.19. -7 Begun, started; प्रभुभिरुदितक्षत्यै क्षित्यै बुधः स्पृहयेत कः Viś. Gunā.26. -8 Awaken, got up; तां रात्रिमुषितं रामं सुखोदितमरिन्दमम् Rām.6.121.1. -9 Ready; अयमनघ तवो- दितः प्रियार्थम् Rām.6.83.44. -तम् A kind of perfume. -2 A kind of accent. -Comp. -उदित a. Well grounded in the Śāstras, highly spoken of; पुरोहितमुदितोदितकुलशीलम् Kau. A.1.9. -होमिन् a. Sacrificing after sunrise.
uditiḥ उदितिः f. 1 Ascending, rising (of the sun); पश्येम तदुदितौ सूर्यस्य Av.7.5.3. -2 Setting, मध्यन्दिन उदिता सूर्यस्य Rv.5.69.3;76.3. -3 Speech.
uditvara उदित्वर a. 1 Going up, rising; अविहतगतिर्दैवोद्रेकादुदि- त्वरविक्रमः Śiva. B.14.16. -2 Exceeding, extra-ordinary; गोप्तुं शौरिरुदित्वरत्वर उदैद् ग्राहग्रहार्तं गजम् Viś. Guṇā.18.
udgadgadi उद्गद्गदिका f. Sobbing; K.
uddita उद्दित a. [उद्-दो-क्त] Tied, bound.
uddinam उद्दिनम् Midday.
uddiś उद्दिश् 6 U. 1 To point out, signify, declare, denote, mention, tell; प्रथमोद्दिष्टमास्पदम् Ku.6.35; Ms.8.52, 3.182; Me.3; यथोद्दिष्टव्यापारा Ś3; अनेडमूक उद्दिष्टः शठे Med. denotes or signifies. -2 To enunciate, prophesy; त्वं साधुभिरुद्दिष्टः Ś.5. -3 To refer or allude to, have reference to; स्मरमुद्दिश्य Ku.4.38; Ś.6, see उद्दिश्य below. -4 To mean, intend, aim at, direct towards, destine for, assign to, dedicate to; K.4; उद्दिष्टामुपनिहितां भजस्व पूजाम् Māl.5.25; फलमुद्दिश्य Bg.17.21. -5 To explain, teach, advise; सतां केनोद्दिष्टं विषममसिधाराव्रतमिदम् Bh.2.28.
uddiśya उद्दिश्य ind. 1 With reference to, aiming at, in the direction of, towards; वध्यशिलामुद्दिश्य प्रस्थितः Pt.1. -2 For, for the sake of, on account of, in the name of; त्वां˚ Ś.3 on thy account; किं for what purpose, on what account; निमित्तम्˚ Pt.1.283 for some cause; त्वामु- द्दिश्य सभाजनाक्षराणि M.5. in your name. -3 Demanding, stipulating for.
uddiṣṭa उद्दिष्ट p. p. 1 Mentioned, particularized, specially told. -2 Desired, wished for. -3 Explained, taught &c. -4 Renowned, famous; पलायनेन चोद्दिष्टाः प्राणान्रक्षामहे वयम् । एकेन बहवो भग्ना यशोनाशं गमिष्यति ॥ Rām.6.66.27.
udvedi उद्वेदि a. [उन्नता वेदिर्यत्र] Having a raised seat or throne in it; विमानं नवमुद्वेदि चतुःस्तम्भप्रतिष्ठितम् R.17.9.
unmadiṣṇu उन्मदिष्णु a. 1 Mad, insane. -2 Intoxicated, drunk. -3 In rut (as an elephant); व्यालद्विपा यन्तृभिरुन्मदिष्णवः कथंचिदारादपथेन निन्यिरे Śi.12.28.
unmādin उन्मादिन् a. Mad, intoxicated. उन्मादिनो मातुलपुत्रकस्य कथं सहामो वनकण्टकित्वम् Udb.
upadigdha उपदिग्ध a. 1 Smeared, covered, anointed. -2 Spotted over.
upadiś उपदिश् 6 U. 1 To instruct, teach, explain, advise; यद्यत्प्रयोगविषये भाविकमुपदिश्यते मया तस्य ... तत्तत्प्रत्युपदिशतीव मे बाला M.1.5; सुखमुपदिश्यते परस्य K.156 it is easy to advise others; ज्ञानमुपदिश् Bg.4.34; R.16.43. -2 To point, indicate, refer to; गुणशेषामुपदिश्य भामिनीम् R.8.73; सुवर्णपुरमार्गमुपदेक्ष्यति K.12,92 point out or tell. -3 To assign the right place to a thing, arrange. -4 (a) To mention, specify, tell; किं कुलेनोपदिष्टेन शीलमेवात्र कारणम् Mk.9.7; पृषोदरादीनि यथोपदिष्टम् P.VI.3.19. (b) To inform, announce. -5 To prescribe, settle, sanction, lay down; न द्वितीयश्च साध्वीनां क्वचिद् भर्तोपदिश्यते Ms.5.162,2. 19,3.14,43. -6 To rule over, govern, command. -7 To name, call; द्रुतविलम्बितमित्युपदिश्यते Śrut.28; Ms.12.89.
upadiś उपदिश् f., उपदिशा An intermediate quarter, such as ऐशानी, आग्नेयी, नैर्ऋती and वायवी. चतस्रो दिशश्चतस्र उपदिशः Maitrī Up.6.2.
upadiśya उपदिश्य a. Being in an intermediate quarter.
upadiṣṭa उपदिष्ट p. p. 1 Specified, pointed out, particularized; पृथूपदिष्टां दुदुहुर्धरित्रीम् Ku.1.2. पृषोदरादीनि यथोपदिष्टम् P. VI.3.19. -2 Taught, instructed, advised. -3 Put forward as a plea or reason. -4 Initiated. -ष्टम् Advice, counsel; (in drama) a persuasive speech; S. D.449.
upaniṣādin उपनिषादिन् a. 1 Sitting at the feet (of another, such as a preceptor). -2 Subjected.
upavādin उपवादिन् a. Censuring, blaming; अल्पाः कलहिनः पिशुना उपवादिनः Ch. Up.7.6.1.
upādikaḥ उपादिकः A sort of insect. -का N. of plant पूतिका (Mar. थोर मयाळ).
edidhiṣuḥ एदिधिषुः पतिः The husband of a younger sister whose elder sister has not been married; cf. अग्रेदिधिषुः Vāj.3.9.
aikapadika ऐकपदिक a. (-की f.) 1 Belonging to a simple word. -2 Consisting of single words. -कम् The name given to the Naigama section of Yāska's commentary on the Nighaṇṭavas.
aupapādikaḥ औपपादिकः An upstart (?) Kau. A.1.1.
kakudin ककुदिन् a. Chief, superior; आस्यं विवृत्य ककुदी पाणिना प्राक्षिपच्छनैः Mb.12.289.19.
kaḍandi कडन्दिका Science (कलण्डिका). कड (ल) म्बः (म्बी) 1 The stem or stalk (of a potherb). -2 The end or point, angle.
kandin कन्दिन् a. Having a bulbous root. m. An esculent root.
kandi कन्दिरी N. of a plant (Mar. लाजाळू).
kapardi कपर्दिका A small shell or cowrie (used as a coin); मित्राण्यमित्रतां यान्ति यस्य न स्युः कपर्दि (र्द) काः Pt.2.98.
kapardin कपर्दिन् a. [कपर्द-इनि] 1 Shaggy. -2 Wearing braided and matted hair. -m. N. of Śiva; पुष्पोपहारं शनकैः करिष्यामि कपर्दिनः Rām.7.31.34.
karmandin कर्मन्दिन् m. P.IV.4.111 An ascetic, a religious mendicant.
kalandi कलन्दिका Wisdom, intelligence (सर्वविद्या).
dikṣāntaḥ कादिक्षान्तः (क-आदि-क्ष-अन्त) A consonant.
kāndiś कान्दिश् a. [काम् दिशम्] Put to flight, running away, flying; Mb.12.
kāndigbhūta कान्दिग्भूत a. Runaway, frightened; कान्दिग्भूतं छिन्नगात्रं विसंज्ञं, दुर्योधनो द्रक्ष्यति सर्वसैन्यम् Mb.5.48.62.
kāndiśīka कान्दिशीक a. 1 Put to flight, running away, fugitive; मृगजनः कान्दिशीकः संवृत्तः Pt.1. -2 (Hence) Terrified, afraid; Bv.2.178; येदिलस्यापि पृतना कान्दिशीकतमा$भवत् Śiva. B.4.52.
kundi कुन्दिनी A multitude of lotuses.
kumudika कुमुदिक a. Abounding in Kumudas. -का N. of a plant (कट्फला). -2 A small tree (the seeds to which are aromatic).
kumudi कुमुदिनी 1 A water-lily with white lotus flowers; यथेन्दावानन्दं व्रजति समुपोढे कुमुदिनी U.5.26.; Śi.9.34. -2 A collection of lotuses. -3 A place abounding in lotuses. -Comp. -नायकः, -पतिः -m. The moon; दृष्ट्वा कुमुद्वन्तमखण्डमण्डलम् Bhāg.1.29.
krandita क्रन्दित a. [क्रन्द्-क्त] Wept, called or cried out; ततस्त- द्वासिभिर्देवः क्रन्दितः शरणार्थिभिः Ks.114.12. -तम् 1 Cry of distress or weeping, lamentation; हा तातेति क्रन्दितमाकर्ण्य विषण्णः R.9.75. -2 Mutual defiance, challenge.
kledita क्लेदित a. Soiled; Subh.
kṣodita क्षोदित a. [क्षुद्-णिच्-क्त] Pounded, ground. -तम् 1 Powder, dust. -2 Flour, any ground substance.
kṣodiman क्षोदिमन् m. Minutness, smallness.
khadiraḥ खदिरः [खद्-किरच्] 1 N. of a tree, Acacia Catechu; Y.1.32. -2 An epithet of Indra. -3 The moon. -Comp. -कुणः the fruit-time of the Khadira tree. -पत्रिका, -पत्री a sensitive plant. -सारः catechu.
khadikāḥ खदिकाः (pl.) Fried or parched grain (Mar. लाह्या).
khādi खादिः Ved. A brooch, bracelet, ring.
khādira खादिर a. (-री f.) [खदिरस्येदं, अण्] Made of or coming from, the Khadira tree; खादिरं यूपं कुर्वीत; Ms.2.45. -रः Catechu.
khedita खेदित a. 1 Pained, distressed, afflicted. -2 Annoyed, troubled.
khedin खेदिन् a. 1 Tiring, exhausting. -2 Disturbing, afflicting, troubling.
khidiraḥ खिदिरः 1 An ascetic. -2 A pauper. -3 The moon. -4 An epithet of Indra.
khedita खेदित a. Afflicted, troubled; श्रमखेदितो रसः ... स्त्रियः Ṛs.5.7.
gadi गदिः f. Speaking, speech; एवं गदिः कर्मगतिर्विसर्गः Bhāg.11.12.19.
gaditaḥ गदितः p. p. [गद्-क्त] Spoken, said, related; गदितस्तेन सिंहेन स ययौ यमुनातटम् Ks.6.63.
gadin गदिन् a. (नी f.) [गद-इनि] 1 Armed with a club; किरीटिनं गदिनं चक्रिणं च Bg.11.17. -2 Affected with sickness, diseased. -m. [गदा अस्त्यस्य इनि] An epithet of Viṣṇu. -Comp. गदिसिंहः N. of a grammarian.
gadgadita गद्गदित a. Stammered.
gāndi गान्दिनी 1 An epithet of the Ganges. -2 N. of a princess of Kāśi, wife of Śvaphalka and mother of Akrūra; Bhāg.9.24.15. -Comp. -सुतः an epithet (1) of Bhīṣma; (2) of Kārtikeya; (3) of Akṛūra.
cadiraḥ चदिरः [चद्-किरच्] 1 The moon. -2 Camphor. -3 An elephant. -4 A snake.
candiraḥ चन्दिरः [Uṇ.1.51] 1 An elephant. -2 The moon; अपि च मानसमम्बुनिधिर्यशो विमलशारदचन्दिरचन्द्रिका Bv.1.113; मुकुन्दमुखचन्दिरे चिरमिदं चकोरायताम् 4.1; स्मितामृतं स्यन्दय वक्त्र- चन्दिरात् Rām. Ch.2.69.
codita चोदित p. p. 1 Sent, directed. -2 Urged on, driven. -3 Incited, prompted, inspired. -4 Put forward as an argument. -5 Thrown, cast. -6 Appointed. -7 Ordered, directed.
cedi चेदिः m. (pl.) N. of a country; तदीशितारं चेदीनां भवां- स्तमवमंस्त मा Śi.2.95,63. -Comp. -पतिः, -भूभृत् m., -राज् m., -राजः N. of Śiśupāla, son of Damaghośa and king of the Chedis; Śi.2.96; see शिशुपाल.
cedika चेदिक m. (pl.) The Chedis; शौलिकविदर्भवत्सान्ध्रचेदिका- श्चौर्ध्वकण्ठाश्च Bṛi. S.14.8.
chadi छदिः f., -छदिस् n. [छद्-कि-इस् वा] 1 The roof of a carriage. -2 The roof or thatch of a house.
chandita छन्दित a. Gratified, pleased.
chardis छर्दिस् f. [छर्द्-भावे इति] 1 Vomiting. -2 A secure place or residence; प्र नो यच्छतादवृकं पृथु च्छर्दिः Rv.1.48.15. -3 A house; यातं छर्दिष्पा उत नः परस्पा Rv.8.9.11.
chādita छादित a. See छन्न.
chidi छिदिः f. 1 An axe. -2 Indra's thunderbolt. -3 Cutting off.
chidiraḥ छिदिरः [छिद्-किरच् Uṇ.1.51] 1 An axe. -2 A sword. -3 Fire. -4 A rope, cord.
chedi छेदि a. [छिद्-इन्] 1 Cutting. -2 Breaking. -दिः 1 A carpenter. -2 Indra's thunderbolt.
chedita छेदित a. Cut, divided, split &c.
chedin छेदिन् a. 1 Cutting or tearing off, dividing; लोष्ठमर्दी तृणच्छेदी Ms.4.71. -2 Destroying, removing.
chaidikaḥ छैदिकः A cane.
jānapadika जानपदिक a. Relating to a country.
tundi तुन्दि f., n. The belly. -f. The navel. तुन्दिक, तुन्दित, तुन्दिन्, तुन्दिभ, तुन्दिल a. 1 Having a protuberant belly. -2 Corpulent. -3 Filled or laden with; मकरन्दतुन्दिलानामरविन्दानामयं महामान्यः Bv.1.6. -4 Great, N.2.89. -तुन्दिलः The god Gaṇeśa. तुन्दिकरः, -d>तुन्दिका The navel.
tundilita तुन्दिलित a. Become corpulent; किमपि तुन्दिलितः स्थगय- त्यमुम् N.4.56.
tundilīkaraṇam तुन्दिलीकरणम् Increasing, swelling; नयनानन्दसंदोह- करणक्षमा Bv.4.9. तुप् tup तुम्प् tump तुम्फ् tumph तुप् तुम्प् तुम्फ् 1, 6. P. (तोपति, तुपति, तुम्प-फ-ति) To injure, hurt.
traivedika त्रैवेदिक a. Relaing to the three Vedas; षट्त्रिंशदा- ब्दिकं चर्यं गुरौ त्रैवेदिकं व्रतम् Ms.3.1.
divi दीदिवि a. 1 shining; राजन्तमध्वराणां गोपाभृतस्य दीदिविम् Rv.1.1.8. -2 Risen (as a star). -विः 1 Boiled rice. -2 Heaven. -3 An epithet of (1) Agni; (2) Bṛihaspati. -4 Final emancipation.
dohadin दोहदिन् a. Eagerly longing for, ardently desirous of.
dauhadikaḥ दौहदिकः A landscape gardener; N.6.61; वृक्षादि- दोहदे नियुक्तः ['तत्र नियुक्तः' इति ठक् P.IV.4.69.] -2 Ardent or morbid desire.
dauhṛdi दौहृदिनी A pregnant woman.
nadi नदिः Ved. Praise.
nadi नदिका A small river, rivulet, rill, brook.
nandi नन्दिः m., f. [नन्द्-इन्] Joy, pleasure, delight; प्रातिष्ठन्नन्दिमापन्नाः स्वं स्वमाश्रममण्डलम् Bhāg.3.24.25. कौसल्या- नन्दिवर्धनः. -दिः m. 1 An epithet of Viṣṇu. -2 Of Śiva. -3 N. of an attendant of Śiva. -4 Gambling, gaming; (n. also in this sense). -5 The speaker of a prelude or benediction (in a drama.) -6 Prosperity; मानहा भव शत्रूणां सुहृदां नन्दिवर्धनः Mb.3.162.29. -Comp. -आवर्तः 1 a sort of building in the form of a quadrangle without a western gate; (n. also). -2 Anything so formed (as dish, vessel संपुटिताद्यर्घपात्राणि); Mb.7.82.2. -ईशः, -ईश्वरः 1 an epithet of Śiva; चतुर्थं शिवधर्माख्यं साक्षान्नन्दीशभाषितम् Kūrma P. -ग्रामः N. of a village near Daulatabad where Bharata lived during Rāma's banishment; नन्दिग्रामगतस्तस्य राज्यं न्यासमिवाभुनक् R.12.18. -घोषः 1 N. of the chariot of Arjuna. -2 a sound of joy; सनन्दिघोषां कल्याणीं गुहो नावमुपाहरत् । Rām.2.89.12. -3 the proclamation of a herald. -तूर्यम् a musical instrument played on festive occasions. -देवी also नन्दादेवी N. of one of the loftiest Himalayan peaks. -नागरी N. of a written character, script. -पटहः (see तूर्यम् above); छत्रं सव्यजनं सनन्दिपटहं भद्रासनं कल्पितम् Pratimā 1.3 -पुराणम् N. of an उपपुराण of देवीपुराण. -वर्धनः 1 an epithet of Śiva. -2 a friend. -3 the end of a lunar fortnight, i. e. the day of new or full moon. -4 a son. -5 a friend. -6 a particular form of temple.
nandikaḥ नन्दिकः 1 Joy, pleasure. -2 A small water-jar. -3 An attendant of Śiva. -का 1 A small water-jar. -2 = नन्दा (5) above. -3 N. of Indra's pleasure-ground -Comp. -ईशः, -ईश्वरः 1 N. of one of Śiva's chief attendants. -2 N. of Śiva.
nandin नन्दिन् a. [नन्द्-णिनि] 1 Happy, pleased, glad, delighted. -2 Making happy, gladdening, giving delight; अद्याप्यानन्दयति मां त्वं पुनः क्वासि नन्दिनी U.3.14. -3 Delighting in, liking. -m 1 A son. -2 The speaker of a prelude or benediction in a drama. -3 N. of the door-keeper of Śiva, his chief attendant, or of the bull which he rides; लतागृहद्वारगतो$थ नन्दी Ku.3.41; Māl.1.1. -4 An epithet of Viṣṇu. -5 The Indian fig-tree. -नी 1 A daughter; तेषां कुले त्वमसि नन्दिनि पार्थिवानाम्; U.1.9. -2 A husband's sister. -3 A fabulous cow, daughter of Surabhi, yielding all desires (कामधेनु) and in the possession of the sage Vasisṭha; अनिन्द्या नन्दिनी नाम धेनुराववृते वनात् R.1.82;2.69. -4 An epithet of the Ganges; नन्दिनी नलिनी सीता मालती च मलापहा । विष्णुपादाब्जसंभूता गङ्गा त्रिपथगमिनी ॥ -5 The holy basil. -Comp. -तनयः, -सुतः the sage Vyāḍi.
nardita नर्दित a. 1 Sounded, bellowed. -2 Celebrated. -तः A kind of die or a throw at dice; नर्दितदर्शितमार्गः कटेन विनिपातितो यामि Mk.2.8. -तम् Sound, roar, bellowing.
nardin नर्दिन् a. Sounding, roaring, bellowing.
di नादि a. Sounding, roaring.
din नादिन् a. 1 Sounding, resonant; अम्बुदवृन्दनादी रथः Mb.; R.3.59;19.5. -2 Bellowing, roaring; खर˚, सिंह˚ &c.
nikrandita निक्रन्दित a. Cried, roared (said of a faulty recitation).
nigadita निगदित a. 1 Told, said, spoken. -2 Incited, urged, directed; धर्मे निगदितश्चैव पितुर्निर्देशकारकः Rām.4.5.3. -तम् A discourse, speech.
nidigdha निदिग्ध p. p. [नि-दिह्-क्त] 1 Smeared, annointed. -2 Increased, accumulated. -ग्धा Small cardamoms. निदिग्धिकादिक्वाथः nidigdhikādikvāthḥ निदिग्धिकादिक्वाथः A kind of Āyurvedic decoction; निदिग्धिकानागरकामृतानां क्वाथं पिबेन्मिश्रितपिपप्लीकम् । जीर्णज्वरा- रोचककासशूलश्वासाग्निमान्द्यार्दितपीनसेषु ॥ Com. of Chakradatta on Charaka. निदिध्यासः nididhyāsḥ निदिध्यासनम् nididhyāsanam निदिध्यासः निदिध्यासनम् See under निध्यै; निरन्तरं विचारो यः श्रुतार्थस्य गुरोर्मुखात् । तन्निदिध्यासनं प्रोक्तं तच्चैकाग्ऱ्येण लभ्यते ॥
nidiś निदिश् 6 P. To order, point out &c.; see निर्दिश्.
nidiṣṭa निदिष्ट p. p. 1 Pointed out. -2 Ordered, directed. -3 Advised, enjoined.
ninādita निनादित a. Filled with noise, resounding, made to sound. -तम् A sound.
ninādin निनादिन् a. 1 Sounding, ringing. -2 Causing to sound, playing (as a musical instrument).
nindita निन्दित p. p. [निन्द्-क्त] Blamed, censured, abused, defamed &c. -2 Low, despicable. -3 Prohibited, forbidden.
nirādiṣṭa निरादिष्ट a. Paid off as a debt; निरादिष्टधनश्चेत्तु प्रतिभूः स्यादलङ्घनः । स्वधनादेव तद्दद्यान्निरादिष्ट इति स्थितिः ॥ Ms.8.162.
nirdigdha निर्दिग्ध p. p. 1 Anointed, smeared. -2 Well-fed, corpulent, stout. -ग्धा Solanum Jacquini (Mar. कांटे रिंगणी).
nirdiś निर्दिश् 6. P. 1 To point out, indicate, show; एकैकं निर्दिशन् Ś.7; अङ्गुल्या निर्दिशति &c. -2 To assign, give; निर्दिष्टां कुलपतिना स पर्णशालामध्यास्य R.1.95. -3 To allude to, mention, make a reference to. -4 To foretell, predict. -5 To advise, recommend. -6 To tell, communicate. -7 To enjoin, direct. -8 To enumerate, specify, name. -9 To define, determine. -1 To describe. -11 To denounce, accuse.
nirdiṣṭa निर्दिष्ट p. p. 1 Pointed out, shown, indicated. -2 Specified, particularized. -3 Described. -4 Assigned, allotted. -5 Asserted, declared. -6 Ascertained, determined. -7 Ordered. -8 Learned, wise.
nivedita निवेदित p. p. 1 Made known, announced, told, communicated. -2 Delivered, given, entrusted, &c.
niṣādita निषादित p. p. 1 Made to sit down. -2 Afflicted, distressed.
niṣādin निषादिन् a. (-नी f.) Sitting or lying down, resting, reclining; आतपात्ययसंक्षिप्तनीवारासु निषादिभिः R.1.52;4.2. -m. An elephant-driver; Śi.5.41. निषादिनुन्नाः करिणः Śiva B.
nisyandin निस्यन्दिन् a. 1 Trickling or flowing down, oozing. -2 Dropping or pouring down; कनकरसनिस्यन्दी सानुमाना- लोक्यते Ś.7.
nediṣṭha नेदिष्ठ a. Nearest, next, very near (superl. of अन्तिक q. v.); नमो नेदिष्ठाय Mahimna.29.
nedivas नेदिवस् a. Sounding, making noise; ततो$न्तरिक्षे निनदो महानभूद्दिवौकसामप्सरसां च नेदुषाम् Mb.9.57.68. (com. नेदुषां नादं कृतवतीनाम्).
padi पदिः Ved. 1 An animal moving with its feet. -2 A bird.
padika पदिक a. 1 Going on foot, pedestrian. -2 One Pada long. -3 Containing only one division. -कः A footman. -कम् The point of the foot.
parāskandin परास्कन्दिन् m. A thief.
paridiv परिदिव् देव् I. 1, 1 P. To lament, moan, suffer pain; खरदूषणयोर्भ्रात्रोः पर्यदेविष्ट सा पुरः Bk.4.34. -II. 4 P. To sell, deal in (with acc. or gen.); शतं शतस्य वा परिदीव्यति Sk.
paridiṣṭa परिदिष्ट a. Made known, pointed out.
parimṛdita परिमृदित p. p. 1 Trodden or trampled down, crushed, roughly handled; squeezed; परिमृदितमृणालीम्लानमङ्गम् Māl.1.22; U.1.24. -2 Embraced, clasped. -3 Rubbed, ground.
parivādin परिवादिन् a. 1 Reviling, censuring, abusing, slandering. -2 Accusing. -3 Screaming, crying aloud. -4 Censured, slandered. -m. An accuser, a plaintiff, complainant. -नी A lute (वीणा) of seven strings; Śi.6. 9; R.8.35; N.15.44; महतीं परिवादिनीं च कांचिद् भुजपाशै- स्तपनीयपारिहार्यैः Bu. Ch.5.54.
pariśabdita परिशब्दित a. Mentioned, communicated; Mb.
pāñcaśabdikam पाञ्चशब्दिकम् 1 Music of five kinds; अङ्गजं कर्मजं चैव तन्त्रजं कांस्यजं तथा । फूत्कृतं चेति मुनिभिः कथितं पाञ्चशब्दिकम् ॥ Skanda P. -2 Musical instruments in general.
dika पादिक a. (-की f.) 1 Amounting to a quarter or fourth; पादिकं शतम्, 25 per cent. -2 Lasting for a quarter of the time; Ms 3.1.
din पादिन् a. 1 Footed, having feet. -2 Having four parts, as a stanza. -3 Receiving or entitled to a fourth part; चतुर्थांशाश्च पादिनः Ms.8.21. -m. 1 An amphibious animal. -2 A heir to a fourth part of an estate; ŚB. on MS.6.7.2.
dinaḥ पादिनः A fourth part.
paurvapadika पौर्वपदिक a. (-की f.) Relating to the first member of a compound.
pracodita प्रचोदित p. p. 1 Urged, incited. -2 Instigated. -3 Directed, ordered, prescribed; चोदितो गुरुणा नित्यमप्रचोदित एव वा । कुर्यादध्ययने यत्नमाचार्यस्य हितेषु च॥ Ms.2.191. -4 Sent, despatched. -5 Decreed, determined. -6 Announced.
pracodin प्रचोदिन् a. Driving on, urging &c. -नी 1 A prickly nightshade. -2 N. of a plant; Solanum Indicum or Solanum Jacquini (Mar. रिंगणी).
pracchādita प्रच्छादित p. p. 1 Covered, enveloped, clothed &c. -2 Hidden, concealed.
pracchardi प्रच्छर्दिका Vomiting.
praṇadita प्रणदित a. 1 Sounding. -2 Humming, buzzing (as a bee).
praṇodita प्रणोदित a. 1 Set in motion. -2 Directed, ordered. -3 Driven.
pratidivan प्रतिदिवन् m. 1 1 A day. -2 The sun.
pratinādita प्रतिनादित a. Resounding, echoing.
pradipādanam प्रदिपादनम् 1 Giving, granting bestowing. -2 Demonstrating, proving, establishing. -3 Treating of, explaining, expounding, illustrating. -4 Effecting, accomplishing, fulfilment. -5 Causing, producing. -6 Repeated action, practice. -7 Commencement; त्रेताविमोक्ष- समये द्वापरप्रतिपादने Mb.12.141.14. -8 Giving back, restoring. -9 Entrusting, appointing. -1 Action, worldly conduct.
pratipādita प्रतिपादित p. p. 1 Given, bestowed, granted, presented; यस्याः पितेव प्रतिपादितायाः Śi.3.36. -2 Established, proved, demonstrated. -3 Explained, expounded. -4 Declared, asserted. -5 Caused, produced. -6 Suddenly appeared, manifested; स वै तदैव प्रतिपादितां गिरं दैवीं परिज्ञात- परात्मनिर्णयः Bhāg.4.9.5.
prativādin प्रतिवादिन् a. 1 Answering, replying. -2 Contradicting. -m. 1 A defendant, respondent (in law); कारणे प्रतिवादिनि Y. -2 An opponent in general.
pratyādiś प्रत्यादिश् 6 P. 1 (a) To reject, discard, shun; प्रत्या- दिष्टविशेषमण्डनविधिः Ś.6.6. (b) To repulse; प्रत्यादिदेशैनम- भाषमाणा R.6.25. -2 To cast off, repudiate (as a person); कामं प्रत्यादिष्टां स्मरामि न परिग्रहं मुनेस्तनयाम् Ś.5.31. -3 To obscure, eclipse, defeat, throw into the shade or background; प्रत्यादिश्यन्त इव मे दृष्टलक्षभिदः शराः R.1.61; रक्षागृहगता दीपाः प्रत्यादिष्टा इव 1.68. -4 To order back, countermand. -5 To direct, prescribe, enjoin. -6 To warn, caution. -7 To report to. -8 To summon. -9 To conquer, overcome. -1 To remove, set aside.
pratyādiṣṭa प्रत्यादिष्ट p. p. 1 Prescribed. -2 Informed. -3 Rejected, repulsed. -4 Removed, set aside. -5 Obscured, thrown into the shade. -6 Warned, cautioned. -7 Declared. -8 Overcome, conquered.
pradi प्रदिः प्रदेयः A present, gift; प्रदेयांश्च ददौ राजा सूत- मागधबन्दिनाम् Rām.1.18.2.
pradiv प्रदिव् a. Ancient, old.
pradiś प्रदिश् 6 P. 1 To point out, indicate, show, assign; तस्याधिकारपुरुषैः प्रणतैः प्रदिष्टाम् R.5.63;2.39. -2 To tell, mention, communicate; दानेषु यत् पुण्यफलं प्रदिष्टम् Bg.8.28; Bk.4.5. -3 To give, grant, offer, bestow or confer upon; विद्ययोः पथि मुनिप्रदिष्टयोः R.11.9;7.35; निःशब्दो$पि प्रदिशसि जलं याचितश्चातकेभ्यः Me.116; Ms.8.265; प्रदिशन् सर्व- सत्त्वेष्वभीतिम् Nāg.5.24. -4 To direct, prescribe, ordain. -5 To signify, declare, make known. -6 To urge on, incite. -7 To advise; सायंप्रातश्च विप्राणां प्रदिष्टमभिवादनम् Mb.12.193.19.
pradiś प्रदिश् f. 1 Pointing out. -2 An order, direction, command. -3 A direction, quarter. -4 An intermediate point of the compass; such as नैर्ऋती, आग्नेयी, ऐशानी and वायवी.
pradiṣṭa प्रदिष्ट p. p. 1 Shown, pointed out. -2 Directed, ordered. -3 Fixed upon, ordained, appointed.
pradih प्रदिह् 2 U. To besmear, daub, anoint.
pradigdha प्रदिग्ध p. p. Besmeared, bedaubed, anointed. -ग्धम् Meat fried in a particular way; (मांस)...... तदेव घृत- तक्राढ्यं प्रदिग्धं सत्रिजातकम् Śabdachandrikā.
prapādikaḥ प्रपादिकः A peacock.
pramādi प्रमादिका 1 A careless woman. -2 A deflowered girl.
pramādita प्रमादित a. Ridiculed, mocked, scoffed at.
pramādin प्रमादिन् a. 1 Careless, inattentive, negligent; सर्वत्र प्रमादी वैधेयः V.2; एकः प्रमादी स कथं न हन्यते Udb. -2 Insane, mad. -3 Intoxicated, drunk. -m. N. of a year.
pramedita प्रमेदित a. 1 Unctuous, greasy. -2 Having begun to show affection.
pramudita प्रमुदित p. p. Delighted, glad, pleased, happy; प्रमुदितकटपूतनोत्तालवेताल ...... Māl.5.23. -तम् 1 Gladness, gaiety. -2 One of the 8 Sāṅkhya perfections. -Comp. -वदना f. N. of a metre with each line consisting of 12 syllables. -हृदय a. delighted at heart.
pramodita प्रमोदित p. p. Pleased, delighted, joyful, happy. -तः An epithet of Kubera.
pramodin प्रमोदिन् a. 1 Delighting, making happy. -2 Delighted, happy.
prarudita प्ररुदित p. p. Crying bitterly, weeping.
pravādin प्रवादिन् a. 1 Uttering a sound; speaking, reporting. -2 Being in some grammatical form or case.
pravedita प्रवेदित p. p. made known; चारैः प्रवेदिते तत्र Mb.7.74.1.
prasādita प्रसादित p. p. 1 Purified, cleared. -2 Appeased, propitiated. -3 Worshipped. -4 Calmed, soothed.
prasedivas प्रसेदिवस् a. One who has become pleased, favourable.
prasīdi प्रसीदिका A small garden.
prasedi प्रसेदिका A small garden. प्रसेवः prasēvḥ प्रसेवकः prasēvakḥ प्रसेवः प्रसेवकः 1 A sack, bag for grain. -2 A leathern bottle. -3 A small instrument of wood placed under the neck of the lute to make the sound deeper.
praskandi प्रस्कन्दिका Dysentery; प्रस्कन्दिकामिव प्राप्तो ध्यात्वा ब्रूते स्म जाम्बवान्Bk.7.74.
prasyandin प्रस्यन्दिन् a. Shedding tears. -m. A shower of rain.
prasvedita प्रस्वेदित p. p. 1 Covered with sweat, perspired, sweating. -2 Causing perspiration, hot.
prātipadika प्रातिपदिक a. Express, explicit. -कः Fire. -कम् The crude form of a substantive, a noun in its uninflected state (before receiving the case-terminations); अर्थवद- धातुरप्रत्ययः प्रातिपदिकम् P.I.2.45.
prāmādika प्रामादिक a. (-की f.) Due to carelessness or error, wrong, faulty, incorrect; इति प्रामादिकः प्रयोगः or पाठः &c.
prāsādika प्रासादिक a. (-की f.) 1 Given as a favour. -2 Kind, friendly, amiable; अहो प्रासादिकं रूपम् U.6.2. -3 Beautiful, lovely. -का A chamber on the top of a palace.
prāsādivārikaḥ प्रासादिवारिकः A kind of attendant in a monastery; Buddh.
bandin बन्दिन् See बन्धिन्. A bard, herald; धर्मच्छेदात् पटुतरगिरो बन्दिनो नीलकण्ठाः V.4.13.
bandi बन्दिः न्दी f. 1 Bondage, confinement. -2 A prisoner, captive; मोक्ष्यते सुरबन्दीनां वेणीर्वीर्यविभूतिभिः Ku.2.61. -Comp. -ग्रहः taking prisoner, capture. -ग्राहः a house breaker, robber. -पालः a jailor. -शूला a harlot, prostitute. -स्थित a. imprisoned.
bhandilam भन्दिलम् 1 Prosperity, good fortune. -2 Tremulous motion. -3 A messenger (m. ?).
bhedi भेदिका Destruction, annihilation.
bhedita भेदित a. Split, broken, divided.
bhedin भेदिन् a. [भिद्-णिनि] 1 Breaking, dividing, distinguishing &c. -2 One who holds the doctrine of dualism. भेदिरम् bhēdiram भेदुरम् bhēduram भेदिरम् भेदुरम् A thunderbolt.
bhauvādika भौवादिक a. (-की f.) Belonging to the class of roots which begin with भू, i. e. to the first conjugation.
bhrādi भ्रादिनी A particular Śruti (in music).
makarandi मकरन्दिका A kind of metre.
madi मदिः f. A kind of roller or harrow.
madira मदिर a. [माद्यति अनेन, मद् करणे किरच्] 1 Intoxicating, maddening. -2 Delighting, fascinating, gladdening (eyes &c.); as in सद्यः षाण्मासिकानां मम मदिरदृशा दत्तचन्द्रो- दयश्रीः Vb.1.17; see comps. below. -रः A kind of Khadira tree (red-flowered). -Comp. -अक्षी, -ईक्षणा, -दृश्, -नयना, -लोचना a woman with fascinating or bewitching eyes; मधुकर मदिराक्ष्याः शंस तस्याः प्रवृत्तिम् V.4. 22; R.8.68; Ś.3.19; अन्तरा दुस्तरा न स्युर्यदि रे मदिरेक्षणाः Bh.; Vb.1.17. -आयतनयन a. having long and fascinating eyes; यदि मदिरायतनयनां तामधिकृत्य प्रहरतीति Ś.3.4. -आसवः an intoxicating drink.
madi मदिरा 1 Spirituous liquor; काङ्क्षत्यन्यो वदनमदिरां दोहद- च्छद्मनास्याः Me.8 (v. l.); Śi.11.49. -2 A kind of wagtail. -3 N. of Durgā. -4 N of a metre; सप्तभकारकृताबसितौ च गुरुः कविभिः कथिता मदिरा V. Ratna. (com.). -Comp. -उत्कट, -उन्मत्त a. intoxicated with spirituous liquor. -गृहम्, -शाला an ale-house, dram-house, a tavern. -मदान्ध a. dead drunk. -सखः the mango tree.
madiṣṭhā मदिष्ठा Spirituous liquor.
madhyaṃdina मध्यंदिन a. 1 Middle, central. -2 Meridional, belonging to noon (also मध्यंदिनीय). -नम् 1 The midday (the third division of the day out of five); अथ यत् संप्रति मध्यंदिने Ch. Up.2.9.5. -2 The time of the day between 16 to 2 Ghaṭakās; मध्यंदिने विष्णुररीन्द्रपाणिः Bhāg.6.8.2.
mandikukuraḥ मन्दिकुकुरः A kind of fish (also read as मल्लिकुकुडः).
mandiman मन्दिमन् m. [मन्द-इमनिच्] 1 Slowness, tardiness. -2 Dulness, stupidity, folly.
mandiram मन्दिरम् [मन्द्यते$त्र मन्द् किरच्] A dwelling house, habitation, place, mansion; प्रावेशयन्मन्दिरमृद्धमेनम् Ku.7. 55; Bk.8.96; R.12.83; मणिमयमन्दिरमध्ये पश्यति पिपीलिका छिद्रम् Subhāṣ. -2 An abode, a dwelling in general; as in क्षीराब्धिमन्दिरः. -3 A town; विनिक्षिप्य बलं सर्वं बहिरन्तश्च मन्दिरे Rām.6.12.3. -4 A camp. -5 A temple. -6 The body. -रः 1 The sea. -2 The hollow of the knee, ham. -Comp. -पशुः a cat. -मणिः an epithet of Śiva.
mandi मन्दिरा A stable.
mardita मर्दित a. 1 Crushed, pounded. -2 Rubbed. -3 Strung or tied together.
mardi मर्दिनी A kind of musical composition.
maryādin मर्यादिन् a. Keeping within bounds. -m. A neighbour, borderer; Nir.4.2.
mādhyaṃdina माध्यंदिन a. (-नी f.) 1 Midday, meridional. -2 Middle, central. -नः 1 N. of a branch of Vājasaneyins. -2 N. of an astronomical school which fixed the starting point of planetary movements at noon. -नम् A branch of the शुक्ल or white Yajurveda (followed by the Mādhyandinas).
mudita मुदित p. p. [मुद्-क्त] Pleased, rejoiced; delighted, glad, joyous. -ता, -तम् 1 Pleasure, delight, joy, happiness; दीने तथा न करुणा मुदिता च पुण्ये Bhagawat S.13. -2 A kind of sexual embrace. -ता Joy, delight.
mudiraḥ मुदिरः [मुद्-किरच् Uṇ.1.5] 1 A cloud; प्रचुरपुरन्दरधनु- रनुरञ्जितमेदुरमुदिरसुवेशम् Gīt.2; or मुञ्चसि नाद्यापि रुषं भामिनि मुदिरालिरुदियाय Bv.2.88; मुदिरजालमुदीक्ष्य शिखण्डिनः Rām. Ch.4.35. -2 A lover, libertine. -3 A frog.
mṛdita मृदित p. p. 1 Pressed, squeezed; सुरतमृदिता बालवनिता Bh.2.44. -2 Crushed, pounded, ground down, trampled upon, killed. -3 Rubbed off, removed. (See मृद्).
mṛdi मृदिनी Good or soft earth.
medi मेदिनी 1 The earth; न मामवति सद्वीपा रत्नसूरपि मेदिनी R.1.65; चञ्चलं वसु नितान्तमुन्नता मेदिनीमपि हरन्त्यरातयः Ki.13. 52; (मधुकैटभयोरासीन्मेदसैव परिप्लुता । तेनेयं मेदिनीनाम्ना सर्वतः परिकीर्तिता ॥). -2 Ground, land, soil. -3 Spot, place. -4 N. of a lexicon (मेदिनीकोश). -Comp. -ईशः, -पतिः a king. -जः the planet Mars. -दिनम् a natural day. -द्रवः dust. -धरः a mountain.
modita मोदित a. Glad, pleased, delighted. -तम् Pleasure, delight.
modin मोदिन् a. [मुद्-णिनि] 1 Glad, pleased, cheerful. -2 Gladdening, delighting. -नी 1 N. of various plants (अजमोदा, मल्लिका, यूथिका). -2 Musk. -3 An intoxicating or spirituous liquor.
mradiman म्रदिमन् m. [मृदोर्भावः इमनिच्] 1 Tenderness, softness; लसत्फुल्लाम्भोजम्रदिमहरणः को$पि चरणः Lakṣmīlaharī S. 6. -2 Mildness, weakness; (स्वर्भानुः) हिमांशुमाशु ग्रसते तन्म्रदिम्नः स्फुटं फलम् Śi.2.49.
mradimānvita म्रदिमान्वित a. Mild, kind.
yadi यदि ind. 1 If, in case (showing condition, and in this sense generally used with the potential mood, but sometimes also with the future or present tense; it is usually followed by तर्हि and sometimes by ततः, तदा, तद् or अत्र); प्राणैस्तपोभिरथवाभिमतं मदीयैः कृत्यं घटेत सुहृदो यदि तत् कृतं स्यात् ॥ Māl.1.9; वदसि यदि किंचिदपि दन्तरुचिकौमुदी हरति दरतिमिरमतिघोरम् Gīt.1; यत्ने कृते यदि न सिद्ध्यति कोत्र (= कस्तर्हि) दोषः H. Pr.31. -2 Whether, if; वद प्रदोषे स्फुटचन्द्रतारका विभावरी यद्यरुणाय कल्पते Ku.5.44. -3 Provided that, when. -4 If perchance, perhaps; यदि तावदेवं क्रियताम् 'perhaps you might do so'; पूर्वं स्पृष्टं यदि किल भवेदङ्गमेभिस्तवेति Me.17; Y.3.14 (यद्यपि means 'though', 'although'; Śi.16.82; यद्यप्येते न पश्यन्ति लोभोपहतचेतसः Bg.1.38; Ś.1.3. यदि वा or; यद्वा जयेम यदि वा नो जयेयुः Bg.2.6; Bh.2.83; or perhaps, or rather, and if necessary; oft. expressed by the reflexive pronoun; स्नेहं दयां च सौख्यं च यदि वा जानकीमपि । आराधनाय लोकानां मुञ्चतो नास्ति मे व्यथा ॥ U.1.12;4.5.).
vadi वदि ind. In the dark half (of a lunar month); as in ज्येष्ठवदि (opp. सुदि).
vandin वन्दिन् m. A panegyrist, bard, an encomiast, a herald; धर्मच्छेदात् पटुतरगिरो वन्दिनो नीलकण्ठाः V.4.13; (the bards form a distinct caste sprung from a Kṣatriya father and a Śūdra mother). -2 A captive, prisoner.
vandi वन्दिः वन्दी f. [वन्द्-इन् Uṇ.4.128] See बन्दी. 1 A female prisoner. -2 Prey, booty, spoil. -Comp. -पालः a keeper of prisoners, jailer.
di वादि a. 1 Wise, learned, skilful. -2 Speaking.
dika वादिक a. Talking, asserting. -कः 1 A magician. -2 A bard; प्रहीयमानः प्रवरैश्च वादिकैरभिष्टुतो वैश्रवणो यथा ययौ Rām.2.16.46.
dita वादित p. p. 1 Caused to be uttered, made to speak. -2 Played, sounded. -तम् An instrumental music.
ditram वादित्रम् [वद् णित्रन् Uṇ.4.179] 1 A musical instrument; वादित्रशक्तिर्घटते भटस्य N.22.22. -2 Instrumental music; काण्डवीणादिभिर्वादित्रमुपगानं भवति, भवति च तन्त्रीगाने गानशब्दः । तस्माद् वादित्रमुपगानम् Ś. on MS.1.4.9. -Comp. -गणः a band of music. -लगुडः a drum stick.
din वादिन् a. [वद्-णिनि] 1 Speaking, talking, discoursing. -2 Asserting. -3 Disputing. -4 Designating, designated as; यत्र यत्र वनोद्देशे सत्त्वाः पुरुषवादिनः । वृक्षाः पुरुष- नामानस्ते सर्वे स्त्रीजनाभवन् ॥ Rām.7.87.13. -5 Talking pleasantly; Rām.2.36.3 (com. वादिन्यः परचित्ता- कर्षकवचनचतुराः). -m. 1 A speaker. -2 A disputant, an antagonist; तस्याङ्गीकरणेन वादिन इव स्यात् स्वामिनो निग्रहः Mu.5.1; R.12.92. -3 An accuser, a plaintiff. -4 An expounder, a teacher. -5 (In music) The leading or key-note. -6 An alchemist.
diśaḥ वादिशः A learned man, sage, scholar.
vicchardita विच्छर्दित p. p. 1 Vomited, ejected. -2 Neglected, disregarded. -3 Given up, abandoned, left; Māl.7; U.1. -4 Marred, impaired, lessened; Māl.7.
vidita विदित p. p. 1 Known, understood, learnt; अविदित- गतयामा रात्रिरेव व्यरंसीत् U.1.27. -2 Informed. -3 Renowned, celebrated, well-known; भुवनविदिते वंशे Me.6. -4 Promised, agreed to. -तः A learned man, scholar. -तम् 1 Knowledge, information. -2 Celebrity, fame. -3 Acquisition, gaining. -Comp. -आत्मन् 1 Celebrated; तस्य चिन्तयतो नित्यं धर्मेण विदितात्मनः Rām.1.42.7. -2 One who knows oneself; ततो नित्यानुगस्तेषां विदितात्मा महामतिः Rām.2.13.22. -m. the almighty (परमेश्वर); सर्वमार्षं हि मन्यन्ते व्याहृतं विदितात्मनः Mb.12.268.1.
vidikcaṅgaḥ विदिक्चङ्गः A kind of yellow bird.
vidithaḥ विदिथः ( = विदथः q. v.)
vidiś विदिश् f. An intermediate point of the compass.
vidiśā विदिशा 1 N. of the capital of the district called दशार्ण; तेषां (दशार्णानां) दिक्षु प्रथितविदिशालक्षणां राजधानीम् Me. 24. -2 N. of a river in Mālvā. -3 = विदिश् q. v.
vinardin विनर्दिन् a. Roaring (applied to a kind of mode of chanting Sāman); विनर्दि साम्नो वृणे पशव्यम् Ch. Up.2.22.1.
vinodita विनोदित p. p. 1 Diverted, delighted. -2 Dispelled.
vipādi विपादिका 1 A sore or tumour on the foot. -2 An enigma, a riddle.
viruditam विरुदितम् Loud cry or lamentation; पदद्याप्युच्छ्वासो भवति ननु लाभो विरुदितम् U.3.3 v. l.
vivādin विवादिन् a. 1 Disputing, contending, disputatious, quarrelling. -2 Litigating. -m. A litigant, party in a law suit.
viṣādin विषादिन् a. Dejected, dismayed, sad, disconsolate.
visaṃvādin विसंवादिन् a. 1 Disappointing, deceiving. -2 Inconsistent, contradictory. -3 Differing, disagreeing; वयोवेष- विसंवादि रामस्य च तयोस्तदा R.15.67. -4 Disputing, contesting. -5 False, untrue. -6 Fraudulent, crafty. विसंष्ठु visaṃṣṭhu (स्थु sthu) ल l विसंष्ठु (स्थु) ल a. 1 Unsteady, agitated; Māl.7. -2 Uneven; ततो$भवज्जरासन्धः किंचित्क्रमविसंस्थुलः Bm.2.11.
vṛndiṣṭha वृन्दिष्ठ a. 1 Very great or large. -2 Very handsome (superl. of वृन्दारक q. v.); वृन्दिष्ठमार्चीद्वसुधाधिपानाम् Bk.2.45.
vedita वेदित p. p. Made known, informed, communicated.
veditṛ वेदितृ a. 1 Knowing. -2 Wise, learned.
vedin वेदिन् a. [विद्-णिनि] 1 Knowing; as in कृतवेदिन्. -2 Marrying. -m. 1 A knower. -2 A teacher. -3 A learned Brāhmaṇa. -4 An epithet of Brahman.
vedi वेदिः [विद्-इन्] A learned man, sage; Paṇḍita. -दिः, -दी f. 1 An altar, especially one prepared for a sacrifice; उर एव वेदिः Ch. Up.5.18.2; अमी वेदिं परितः क्लृप्त- धिष्ण्याः (वह्वयः) Ś.4.8. -2 An altar of a particular shape, the middle points of which come very close to each other; मध्येन सा वेदिविलग्नमध्या Ku.1.39; (some propose to take वेदि in this passage as meaning 'a sealring'). -3 A quadrangular spot in the court-yard of a temple or palace; विमानं नवमुद्वेदि चतुःस्तम्भप्रतिष्ठितम् (कल्पयामासुः) R.17.9. -4 A seal-ring. -5 N. of Sarasvatī. -6 A tract or region. -Comp. -ईशः 1 N. of Agni. -2 of Brahman. -जा an epithet of Draupadī who was born from the midst of the sacrificial altar of king Drupada. -मेखला the cord which forms the boundary of the उत्तरवेदि.
vedi वेदिका 1 A sacrificial altar or ground; इति प्रिये वादिनि वेदिकोदरी Rām. ch.2.57. -2 A raised seat; an elevated spot of ground (usually for sacred purposes); सप्तपर्णवेदिका Ś.1; सदेवदारुद्रुमवदिकायाम् Ku.3.44. -3 A seat in genearal. -4 An altar, a heap, mound; मन्दाकिनी- सैकतवेदिकाभिः Ku.1.29 'by making altars or heaps of sand &c'. -5 A quadrangular open shed in the middle of a court-yard; a pavilion, balcony; तप्तकाञ्चन- वेदिकम् (जग्राह); Rām.7.15.37; सुरवेश्मवेदिका Ki.7.12. -6 An arbour, a bower.
vaidika वैदिक a. (-की f.) [वेदं-वेत्त्यधीते वा ठञ् वेदेषु विहितः ठक् वा] 1 Derived from or conformable to the Vedas, Vedic. -2 Sacred, scriptural, holy; अपेक्ष्यते साधुजनेन वैदिकी श्मशान- शूलस्य न यूपसत्क्रिया Ku.5.73. -कः A Brāhmaṇa wellversed in the Vedas. -कम् A Vedic passage; अमेध्ये वा पतेन्मत्तो वैदिकं वाप्युदाहरेत् Ms.11.96. -2 A Vedic precept; Mb. -Comp. -पाशः a smatterer in Veda, one possessing an imperfect knowledge of the Vedas; P.V.3.47.
vaipādikam वैपादिकम् A kind of leprosy.
vyapadiś व्यपदिश् 6 P. 1 To name, call; व्यपदिश्यसे जगति विक्रमी- त्यतः Śi.15.28. -2 To name or call falsely; मित्रं च मां व्यपदिशस्यपरं च यासि Mk.4.9. -3 To speak of, profess; जन्मेन्दोर्विमले कुले व्यपदिशसि Ve.6.7. -4 To pretend, feign; व्यपदिशति नः शैवप्रीत्या कथंचिदनास्थया Mv.2.11. -5 To indicate, show. -6 To signify, mean, denote.
vyapadiṣṭa व्यपदिष्ट p. p. 1 Named. -2 Shown, represented, signified. -3 Pleaded as a pretext or excuse.
vyādiś व्यादिश् 6 P. 1 To order, command; समीरणो नोदयिता भवेति व्यादिश्यते केन हुताशनस्य Ku.3.21,13. -2 To assign or appoint to (a duty). -3 To divide, distribute. -4 To point, indicate, show. -5 To teach, instruct. -6 To foretell, declare beforehand.
vyādiśaḥ व्यादिशः An epithet of Viṣṇu.
vyāpādita व्यापादित p. p. 1 Killed, slain, destroyed. -2 Ruined, injured, hurt.
vyudita व्युदित a. Disputed, discussed, debated.
śabdita शब्दित p. p. 1 Sounded, made to give out a sound, played upon (as a musical intrument). -2 Uttered, articulated. -3 Called, called out to. -4 Named, designated. -5 Taught, explained; ज्ञानेन वैयासकिशब्दितेन भेजे खगेन्द्रध्वजपादमूलम् Bhāg.1.18.16. -6 Made public, manifested. -तम् Noise, cry.
śaradija शरदिज a. Autumnal.
śābdika शाब्दिक a. (-की f.) [शब्द-ठक्] 1 Verbal, oral. -2 Relating to sounds or words. -3 Sounding. -कः 1 A grammarian; अधःकरोत्यादिमशाब्दिकोरगम् Viś. Guṇa.282. -2 A lexicographer.
śāradikaḥ शारदिकः 1 Autumnal sickness. -2 Autumnal sunshine or heat. -कम् An autumnal or annual Śrāddha.
śudi शुदि ind. In the light fortnight; Inscr.
śailādi शैलादिः N. of Nandin, Śiva's attendant.
ślīpadin श्लीपदिन् m. A club-footed man.
saṃvādin संवादिन् a. 1 Speaking, conversing. -2 Like, similar, resembling, corresponding to; षड्जसंवादिनीः केकाः R.1.39; अस्मदङ्गसंवादिन्याकृतिः U.6.
saṃvidita संविदित p. p. 1 Known, understood. -2 Recognised. -3 Well-known, renowned. -4 Explored. -5 Agreed upon. -6 Advised, admonished; see विद् with सम्. -तम् An agreement.
sadurdina सदुर्दिन a. Enveloped in clouds.
sadvāditvam सद्वादित्वम् The state of making a positive statement, being a सद्वादिन्; सद्वादित्वाच्च पाणिनेर्वचनं प्रमाणम् । असद्वादित्वान्न कात्यायनस्य ŚB. on MS.1.8.4.
saṃdita संदित a. Bound chained, fettered; असंदितानां संदाता संदितानां च मोक्षकः Ms.8.342.
saṃdiś संदिश् 6 P. -1 To give, grant, assign, make over; राज्यं संदिश्य भोगांश्च ममार व्रणपीडिः Bk.6.141; Y.2.232. -2 To order, direct, instruct, advise send as a message; किं नु खलु दुष्यन्तस्य युक्तरूपमस्माभिः संदेष्टव्यम् Ś.4; Śi.9.56,61. -3 To send as a messenger, entrust with a message; अथ विश्वात्मने गौरी संदिदेश मिथः सखीम् Ku.6.1. -4 To appoint. -5 To commission or depute in general.
saṃdiṣṭa संदिष्ट p. p. 1 Pointed out, indicated. -2 Assigned. -3 Told, narrated, communicated. -4 Agreed to, promised. -ष्टः One entrusted with a message, a messenger, herald, courier (संदिष्टार्थ also). -ष्टम् Information, news, tidings.
saṃdigdha संदिग्ध p. p. 1 Besmeared, covered. -2 Dubious, doubtful, uncertain; as in संदिग्धमति-बुद्धि &c. -3 Mistaken for or confounded with. -4 Doubted, questioned. -5 Confused, obscure, unintelligible (as a sentence). -6 Dangerous, risky, unsafe. -7 Envenomed. -ग्धम् 1 A doubt, uncertainty. -2 Besmearing. -Comp. -अर्थ a. ambiguous, dubious in sense. (-र्थः) 1 an ambiguous or doubtful meaning. -2 a disputed matter. -पुनरुक्तत्वम् (Rhet.) uncertainty and tautology. -फल a. having arrows with poisoned tips; Dk. -मति, -बुद्धि a. sceptical, doubtful.
saṃdigdhīkṛta संदिग्धीकृत p. p. Made to present a doubtful resemblance; संदिग्धीकृतबाष्पबिन्दुरुदितं पौराङ्गनाभिस्तथा B. R.6.31.
sapadi सपदि ind. 1 Instantly, in a moment, immediately; सपदि मदनानलो दहति मम मानसम् Gīt.1; Ku.3.76;6.2. -4 Quickly, swiftly.
samādiś समादिश् 6 P. 1 To point out, indicate. -2 To inform, tell, communicate. -3 To proclaim, announce. -4 To foretell. -5 To order, command, direct. -6 To appoint, depute, entrust with. -7 To assign, allot. -8 To determine.
samādiṣṭa समादिष्ट p. p. Assigned, enjoined.
samudi समुदि 2 P. 1 To go up, ascend, rise. -2 To prepare for battle. -3 To collect together, assemble.
samudita समुदित p. p. 1 Gone up, risen, ascended. -2 Lofty, elevated; prospered; कच्चित् समुदितां स्फीतामयोध्यां परिरक्षसे Rām.2.1.42. -3 Produced, arisen, occasioned. -4 Assembled, collected, united; मद्भाग्योपचयादयं समुदितः सर्वो गुणानां गणः Ratn.1.6. -5 Possessed of, furnished with; सर्वैः समुदितो गुणैः Rām.1.18.13. -6 Conversed. -7 Spoken to, addressed. -8 Agreed upon. -9 Customary, usual.
saṃmodikaḥ संमोदिकः Comrade, companion.
sāṃvādika सांवादिक a. (-की f.) 1 Colloquial. -2 Controversial. -कः 1 A disputant. -2 A logician.
di सादिः [सद्-इण् Uṇ.4.136] 1 A charioteer. -2 A warrior. -3 A dispirited person. -4 Air, wind.
dita सादित p. p. 1 Made to sit down. -2 Depressed, dispirited. -3 Wearied, exhausted; प्रसेहिरे सादयितुं न सादिताः Ki.14.57. -4 Destroyed, exterminated; समासदत् सादितदैत्यसंपदः Śi.1.11. -5 Wasted, decayed.
din सादिन् a. [सद्-णिनि] 1 Sitting down. -2 Exhausting, destroying &c. -3 Any one sitting or riding on; प्रतिप्रहाराक्षममश्वसादी R.7.47. -m. 1 A horseman; ततो रथद्विपभटसादिनायकैः करालया परिवृत आत्मसेनया Bhāg.1.71. 14. -2 One riding on an elephant or seated in a car. -3 A charioteer; ततो वररथारूढाः कुमाराः सादिभिः सह Mb. 1.138.8.
sudi सुदि ind. In the bright fortnight of a lunar month; cf. वदि.
sedivas सेदिवस् a. (-सेदुषी f.) Sitting.
saunandin सौनन्दिन् m. An epithet of Balarāma.
skandita स्कन्दित p. p. Emitted, effused, shed; मोघं स्कन्दित- मार्षभम् Ms.9.5.
sthāvarādi स्थावरादि n. A kind of poison; L. D. B.
spandita स्पन्दित p. p. [स्पन्द्-क्त] 1 Throbbed,quivered. -2 Gone. -तम् A pulsation, throb, palpitation. -2 Activity (of the mind).
syandin स्यन्दिन् a. (-नी f.) 1 Oozing, flowing, trickling; बाहुरैन्दवमयूखचुम्बितस्यन्दिचन्द्रमणिहारविभ्रमः Māl.8.3; U.1. 35. -2 Rushing. -3 Going.
syandi स्यन्दिनी 1 Saliva. -2 A cow bearing two calves at the same time.
svadita स्वदित p. p. Tasted, eaten. -तम् An exclamation meaning 'may it be well tasted or relished;, uttered at a Śhraddha ceremony after the presentation of riceballs or oblations of food to the Manes; पृष्ट्वा स्वदितमित्येवं तृप्तानाचामयेत्ततः Ms.3.251,254.
svādita स्वादित p. p. 1 Tasted, relished. -2 Sweetened. -3 Pleased.
svādiman स्वादिमन् m. Savouriness, sweetness; स्वादिमा हि ओदनस्य परिक्रये उपकरोति ŚB. on MS.1.3.38.
svādiṣṭha स्वादिष्ठ a. Very sweet, sweetest (superl. of स्वादु q. v.); किं स्वादिष्ठं जगत्यस्मिन् सदा सद्भिः समागमः.
svidita स्विदित p. p. 1 Sweated, perspired. -2 Melted.
svedita स्वेदित a. Fomented, softened.
hārdikyaḥ हार्दिक्यः 1 N. of Kṛita-varman; Mb.1.2.32; मुञ्च हार्दिक्य शङ्काम् । Ve.3.7. -2 Friendship.
hārdin हार्दिन् n. Anything greatly liked or desired.
hṛdi हृदि (दी) कः N. of a Yādava prince.
hṛdispṛś हृदिस्पृश् a. 1 Touching the heart. -2 Dear, beloved. -3 Agreeable, charming, beautiful.
hradi ह्रदिनी 1 A river; सुशीततोयां विस्तीर्णां ह्रदिनीं वेतसैर्वृताम् Mb.3.64.12; Bhāg.2.7.28;1.21.9. -2 A lightning.
hrādin ह्रादिन् a. Sounding, roaring.
hrādi ह्रादिनी 1 The thunderbolt of Indra. -2 Lightning. -3 A river. -4 The tree called शल्लकी.
hlādita ह्लादित p. p. Delighted, refreshed.
hlādin ह्लादिन् a. 1 Delighting, pleasing &c. -2 Very noisy or loud.
hlādi ह्लादिनी See ह्रादिनी.
Macdonell Vedic Search
18 results
didrkṣu didṛ́k-ṣu, adv. with a desire to see = find out, vii. 86, 3 [from ds. of drś see].
diś díś, f. quarter (of the sky), i. 85, 11; x. 90, 14 [diś point].
div div, m. sky, A. dívam, iii. 59, 7; G. divás, iv. 51, 1. 10. 11; v. 83, 6; vii. 61, 3; 63, 4; x. 15, 14; 127, 8; L. diví, i. 85, 2; v. 11, 3; viii. 29, 9; x. 90, 3 [Gk. Δίϝα, Διϝός, Διϝί].
div div play, IV. dí̄vya, x. 34, 13.
diva dív-à, adv. by day, vii. 71, 1. 2 [w. shift of accent for div-á̄].
divedive divé-dive, lc. itv. cd. every day, i. 1, 3. 7 [L. of divá day].
divisprś divi-spṛ́ś, a. touching the sky, v. 11, 1; x. 168, 1 [diví L. of div + spṛś touch].
divya div-yá, a. coming from heaven, divine, vii. 49, 1; 103, 2; x. 34, 9 [dív heaven].
aditi Á-diti, f. name of a goddess, viii. 48, 2 [unbinding, freedom, from 3. dā bind].
āditya Ādityá, m. son of Aditi, iii. 59, 2. 3. 5.
udita úd-ita, pp. risen, vii. 63, 5 [i go].
coditr cod-i-tṛ́, m. furtherer, ii. 12, 6 [cud impel].
divāṃs dīdi-vá̄ṃs, pf. pt. shining, ii. 35, 3. 14 [dī shine].
divi dí̄divi, a. shining, i. 1, 8 [dī shine].
nitodin ni-todín, a. piercing, x. 34, 7.
pradiś pra-díś, f. control, ii. 12, 7 [diś point].
yadi yád-i vā, cj. whether, x. 129, 7; or, or else, ibid. [yá-d-i if, rel. adv. + vā or].
rad dig rad dig, I. ráda: pf. rará̄da, vii. 49, 1.
Macdonell Search
219 results
diddā f. N. of a princess of Cash- mere: -kshema, m. ep. of Kshema-gupta; -pâla, m. N.; -pura, n. N. of a city; -svâ min, m. N. of a temple.
didhakṣā f. desire to burn; -shu, des. a. wishing to burn or destroy.
didhiṣu a. wishing to obtain; courting; m. suitor, husband; ûbrev;, f. woman re married; unmarried woman having a younger married sister: (û)-pati, m. husband of a (brother's) widow; husband of a woman mar ried after her younger sister.
di v. √ 2. dî.
didṛkṣā f. desire to see.
didṛkṣu des. a. desirous to see, examine, or inspect (ac.).
didyut a. flashing; f. missile; In dra's thunderbolt.
digadhipa m. regent of a quarter; -anta, m. end of the horizon, end of the world, extreme distance; -antara, n. another region; foreign parts; a particular quarter (w. paski metara, the east): pl. all the quarters; -am bara, a. clad with the quarters only, stark naked; m. naked mendicant monk, esp. among the Jains: î, f. ep. of Durgâ.
digambaratva n. nakedness.
digbhāga m. point of the compass; -vadhû, f.=dik-kanyâ; -vasana, n. naked ness; -vârana, m. elephant of the quarters; -vâsas, a. clad in the quarters, stark naked; -vigaya, m. conquest in all directions, world conquest; -vibhâga, m. point of the compass, quarter of the sky; -vilokana, n. looking about in all directions (in fear); -vyâghâr ana, n. sprinkling of the quarters; -vyâpin, a. pervading the quarters, extending in all directions.
digdha pp. of √ dih; m. poisoned arrow.
diggaja m. elephant of the quarters; -gaya, m. conquest of the world; -dâha, m. preternatural redness of the horizon; -deva tâ, f. deity of a quarter; -desa, m. remote region.
dikkanyā f. quarter of the sky as a maiden; -karin, m. elephant of the quarters (supporting the earth at one of the four or eight points of the compass); -kântâ, -kâminî, f. quarter of the sky as amaiden; -kakra, n. horizon: -vâla, n. surrounding horizon; -khabda, m. word expressive of direction; -ta- ta, m. brink of the compass, horizon, extreme distance; -pati, m. regent of a quarter; -pa tha, m. horizon, extreme distance; -pâla, m. guardian of a quarter; -prekshana, n. looking about in all directions (in fear); -sundarî, f.=dik-kanyâ.
dina n. day: -kara, m. (day-making), sun; N.; -kartavya, n. daily observance; -kartri, m. (day-maker), sun; -kârya, n. daily observance; -krit, m. sun; -kritya, n. =-kârya; -kshaya, m. decline of day, even ing; -naktam, ad. day and night; -nâtha, m. (lord of day), sun; -pati, m. id.; -bhartri, m. id.; -mani, m. id. (gem of day); -mukha, n. day-break.
dina pp. of √ 2. dâ.
dināgama m. day-break; -½âdi, m. id.; -½adhinâtha, m. sun; -½adhîsa, m. sun; -½anta, m. evening; -½ardha, midday; -½avasâna, n. close of day, evening.
dineśa m. sun; -½îsvara, m. id.
diṅnāga m. elephant of the quar ters; -nâtha, m. regent of a quarter; -mand ala, n. circle of the quarters, horizon; -mâ ta&ndot;ga, m. elephant of the quarters; -mâtra, n. mere indication, mere example; -mukha, n. point of the compass; place, location; -moha, m. bewilderment as to the cardinal points.
dinnāgrāma m. N. of a village.
dinodaya m. day-break.
dipsu des. a. wishing to harm (√ dabh).
diṣṭa pp. √ dis; n. direction, order; destiny, fate; place designated: -para, a. trusting to fate; m. fatalist; -bhâva, m. des tined state, death; -½anta, m. destined end, death.
diṣṭi f. direction, order; luck: only in. dishtyâ, by good luck=ij. thank heaven!
diṣṭivṛddhi f. congratulation.
diśya a. belonging or referring to the quarters or horizon; foreign (ware).
dita pp. of √ 2. dâ and √ 3. dâ.
diti f. distribution; liberality.
ditsā f. desire to give; -sú, des. a. willing to give, grant, or perform.
dityavah m. (nm. -vât) two-year-old bull; dityauh&isharp;, f. two-year-old cow.
div m. f. (nm. dyaús; middle base dyú) heaven; m. radiance, brilliance; day; -am gam or yâ, go to heaven; die; dyúbhih, for days, for a long time.
di ad. by day: sts. subject of a sentence or °ree;--,=day.
diva n. heaven; day, only in dive dive, day by day.
divābhīta m. owl; thief.
didi m. morning.
divākara m. (day-maker), sun; -kîrti, m. Kandâla (so called because allowed to appear in public only during the day-time); -kîrtyã, a. to be recited by day; n. certain chants; m. Kandâla; -kara, a.going about by day; -kârin, a. id.
divaṃgama a. going or leading to heaven.
divānaktam ad. by day and night; -nidrâ, f. sleeping by day; -nisam, ad. day and night.
divāndha a. blind by day; m. owl.
divārātram ad. by day and night; -saya, a. sleeping by day: -tâ, f. abst. n.; -svapna, m. n. sleeping by day.
divasa m. heaven, day.
divasakara m. (day-maker), sun; -kshaya, m. decline of day, evening; -kara, a. moving by day (animal); -nâtha, m. (lord of day), sun; -bhartri, m. id.; -mukha, n. day-break; -vâra, m. week-day; -vigama, m. decline of day; -vyâpâra, m. daily func tions (such as ablutions etc.).
divaseśvara m. (lord of day), sun.
divaspati m. ep. of Indra or Vishnu.
divātana a. (î) diurnal.
divātithi m. guest arriving by day.
divaukas m. heaven-dweller, god.
divigata pp. celestial; -kara, a. moving in heaven; -kârin, a. id.; m. celestial.
divira m. scribe.
diviṣad a. dwelling in heaven; m. god: -adhvan, m. path of the gods, sky.
divya a. celestial; divine; magical; heavenly; magnificent; n. the divine (pl. the heavens); ordeal, oath.
divyakriyā f. employment of an ordeal; -kakshus, n. divine eye transcend ing time and space; a. having a divine eye, for (--°ree;); -gñâna, a. possessed of divine knowledge; -tâ, f. divine nature; -darsin, -dris, a. having a divine eye transcending time and space; -nadî, f. celestial river; -nârî, f. celestial woman, Apsaras; -purusha, m. demi-god, spirit; -pragñâna-sâlin, a. possessed of divine knowledge; -mânusha,m. demi-god; -rûpa, a. having a divine form; -vi gñâna-vat, a. possessed of divine knowledge; -samkâsa, a. resembling or reminding of heaven; -strî, f. divine woman, Apsaras.
divyākṛti a. of divine form, divinely beautiful; -½a&ndot;ganâ, f. divine woman, Apsaras; -½aushadha, n. magical spell or potion.
agadita pp. unasked.
agredidhiṣu m. man united in first marriage with a widow; f. (ûbrev;) younger sister married before her elder sister.
atyāditya a. surpassing the sun; -½ânanda, m. excessive joy; -½âpanna, pp. very unfortunate; -½âyata, pp. very long, very tall; -½âyus, a. very old; -½ârûdha, pp. hvg. reached a great height;-½ârûdhi, f. ascending too high; -½âroha, m. mounting too high, arrogance; -½ârti, f. violent pain; -½ârya, a. too honourable.
adiprabhṛti pl. Ad-class of verbs.
aditsat des. pr. pt. not inclined to give.
aditi a. infinite; f. infinity; N. of the mother of the gods.
aditi f. want, penury.
adāditva n. appertaining to the verbs beginning with &open;ad&close; (=Ad-class).
adyadina m. the present day.
adhirukmamandiragavākṣam ad. at the window of the golden palace.
anādiṣṭa pp. not prescribed; unordered.
anādi a. having no beginning; -tâ, f. abst. n.
anāvādi a. not belonging to the Gana nau.
anāsvādita pp. not tasted; -pûrva, a. not tasted before.
anidit a. having no &ibreve; as an it.
anirhrādin a. not resonant, low.
anirvedita pp. not displayed.
anirdiṣṭa pp. unindicated; un specified; unauthorised; -kâranam, ad. with out indicating the reason.
anindita pp. blameless; -ya, fp. id.
anudita pp. undiscussed; not to be uttered.
anudita pp. not risen (sun).
anupadin a. pursuing, search ing.
anunmadita cs. pp. unfrenzied, restored to one's senses.
antarāvedi f. partition.
ayadi lc. when there is no &open;yad&close; (gr.).
avidita pp. unknown: -m, ad. unawares.
asvadita pp. unpalatable.
ahaṃvādin a. talking egotistic ally.
ātmādiṣṭa pp. self-dictated; -adhika, a. dearer than oneself; -½adhîna, a. dependent on oneself; -½anapeksha, a. disinterested; -½anugamana, n. personal attendance; -½aparâdha, m.one's own transgression; -½âpahâra, m. dissimulation; -½apahâraka, -hârin, a. making away with oneself, denying oneself, dissimulating; -½abhim&asharp;ni-tâ, f. high opinion of oneself; -½amisha, m. alliance (peace) bought by sacrifice of one's army; -½artha: -m or lc. for oneself: lc. pl. in one's own interest.
ādi m. [taking in hand: â+√ dâ] beginning: lc. in the --, at first; --°ree;, beg. with= and the rest, etc. (often -ka); -kartri, m. original creator; -kesava, m. ep. of Vishnu; -tas, ad. from or in the beg., at first; --°ree;, from onwards: -tâ, f. being the beginning, origin.
ādādika a. belonging to the Ad class (gr.).
ādiṣṭa (pp.) m. kind of peace or alliance; n. injunction, rule of conduct; -t-in, m. student who has received rules from his teacher, novice.
ādima a. first; -mat, a. having a beginning; -mûla, n. original cause; -va râha, m. original boar, ep. of Vishnu.
ādiparvata m. chief mountain; -purusha, m. original ancestor; primeval spirit; -pûrusha, m. primeval spirit, ep. of Vishnu; -bhava, a. produced in the beginning; -bhûta, pp. being the first among (g.).
ādināntam ad. up to the end of the day.
ādin a. eating.
ādideva m. primeval god: ep. of Brahman, Vishnu, Siva.
āditsu des. a. desirous to obtain (ac.); avaricious.
āditya a. belonging to the Âdi tyas; divine; relating to the sun; -kandra, m. du. sun and moon; -prabha, m. N. of a king; -mandalá, n. sun's orb; -vat, ad. like the sun; -varna, a. sun-coloured; -varman, -sena, m. Ns. of kings.
āditya a. belonging to or descended from Aditi; m. son of Aditi; sun: pl. a class of gods; n. N. of a lunar mansion.
āditeya m. son of Aditi.
ānandin a. joyful; delighting.
ābdika a. annual; --°ree;, lasting years.
āśuvimardita pp. quickly crushed.
āsandi f. small chair.
ālhādin a. refreshing, delighting.
indi f. epithet of Lakshmî.
idamādi a. beginning with this.
ityādi a. beginning thus=and so on; n. this and the like, and so on, &c.
indiyārtha m. object or stimu lant of the senses; -½asa&ndot;ga, m. pl. non-in dulgence of the senses.
uṇādi m. pl. Unâdi suffixes, class of primary suffixes beginning with u (gr.).
uditodita a. (in whom what has been said has risen=) learned.
uditi f. sunrise; sunset.
udita pp. √ vad and ud+√ i.
udgadgadi f. sobbing.
uddiśya gd. (pointing to=) to wards, to, with regard to, about.
udvedi a. on which an altar rises.
upadigdhatā f. being covered with (--°ree;).
uparudita (pp.) n. lamentation.
ekānudiṣṭa (pp.) n. funeral rite in honour of a single ancestor.
ekānnādin a. eating the food of one only.
evaṃvādin a. speaking thus; -víd, a., -vidvás, pt. knowing thus, having such knowledge; well instructed, knowing what is right; -vidha, a. of such sort, such-like; -vishaya, a. directed to orrelating to this; -vritta, pp. behaving thus; of such a kind; in this condition; -vritti, a. id.
auṇādika a. belonging to the Unâdi-sûtras.
kāṃdiśīka n. fleeing in all directions, fugitive.
kumudi f. night lotus; group of night lotuses: -nâyaka, -vadhûvara, m. lover of lotuses, ep. of the moon.
kuvalayāditya m. N. of a king; -½ânanda, m. T. of a rhetorical work; -½âpîda, m. N. of a Daitya changed into an elephant; N. of a king; -½avalî, f. N. of a queen.
kusīdin m. usurer.
kṣayadivasa m. day of the world's destruction; -paksha, m. fortnight of the moon's wane; -yukta, pp. ruined, fallen; -yukti, f. destruction, ruin; -rog-in, a. con sumptive: -i-tva, n. consumption.
kṣodiṣṭha spv.; -îyas, cpv. of kshudrá.
khadira m. a tree (a kind of acacia): -maya, a. made of Khadira wood.
khādira a. (&isharp;) made of Khadira wood.
gadgadi f. stammer.
gadin a. bearing a club.
curādi m. pl. list of verbs of the tenth class beginning with kur.
cedi m. pl. N. of a people in Bundel- kund; -pati, m. king of Kedi; -râga, m. id.
ghaṭādi pl. the gana beginning with ghat (gr.).
ḍilli dilli, ḍillī f. Delhi, N. of a city.
tadādi ad. thenceforward; then first.
tuhyādiparibhāṣā f. key-rule as to tu, hi, etc. (i. e. ha, vai, tad), meaning that these particles express occur rence in 2, 3, 4, 5, or 6 hymns.
tṛtīyadivasa m. third day: lc. the day after to-morrow; -½amsa, m. third; a. receiving a third as a share; â-samâsa, m. com pound dependent in the instrumental sense.
tridiva n. third (=highest) heaven, always with g. divah (V.); heaven (C.): -gata, pp. gone to heaven, dead; -½îsvara, m. ep. of Indra; -½okas, m. inhabitant of heaven, god.
dalāditva n. state of a leaf, etc.
divi a. shining.
daivādika a. belonging to the div or fourth class of verbs.
dohadin a. having a violent longing for (lc., --°ree;).
dvinetrabhedin a. knocking out both eyes.
nandimukha m. N.; -rudra, m. a form of Siva; -vardhana, a. increasing the joy of (g.); m. son.
nandi f. daughter; ep. of Durgâ; N. of a fabulous cow.
nandin a. (--°ree;) rejoicing in; glad dening; m. son (--°ree;); ep. of Siva; N. of an attendant of Siva; N. of Siva's bull.
nandi m. Gladsome, euphemistic ep. of Vishnu or Siva; f. joy: -kara, a. causing joy to (g.); m. son (--°ree;); -kshetra, n. N. of a sacred region; -gupta, m. N. of a king; -grâma, m. N. of a village; -deva,m. N.
nardita pp. n. roar, bellow; a cer tain throw at dice.
nitodin a. goading, piercing.
niṣādin a. sitting, lying, on or in (lc., --°ree;); m. elephant driver.
nīradin a. covered with clouds.
nediṣṭha spv. nearest, next; quite near: -m, ad. next; quite close; first; ab. from the nearest place; -îyas, cpv. nearer; quite near: ac. ad.; (-îyo)-marana, a. having death close at hand, moribund.
dika a. amounting to or lasting a quarter (of a time); -in, a. having feet; entitled to a fourth.
dauhadika n. longing, desire.
praditsu des. a. intending to give (ac.); -div, 1. f. (nm. -dyaús) third and uppermost heaven (in which the fathers dwell); also the fifth of seven heavens; -dív, 2. a. of former days, long existing, ancient: ab. from of old, ever; -dís, f. indication, guidance, order, dominion (V.); direction, point of the compass; intermediate point, half-quarter (e.g. north-east): ac. pl. in all directions.
prāsādi f. room on the roof of a house.
prāsādika a. gracious; lovely.
prāmādika a. due to careless ness, erroneous, faulty, wrong (reading etc.).
bandiputra m. son of a bard, panegyrist; -strî, f. female panegyrist; -sthita, pp. imprisoned.
bandin m. 1. prisoner, slave; 2. bard of a prince; panegyrist (-i-tâ, f. abst. n.).
bandigraha m. taking prisoner, capture; -grâha, m. burglar.
bhandadiṣṭi a. (V.) speeding with shouts (the Maruts); -ána, a. shouting: â, f. shouting, praise (sts. pl.).
bhandiṣṭha spv. shouting loudest, praising best.
bhūdina n. civil day; -divasa, m. id.; -deva, m. god on earth, Brâhman; N.; -dhara, a. supporting the earth; m. moun tain: -ga, m. (mountain-born), tree, -tâ, f. habit of sustaining the earth, -½îsvara,m. lord of mountains, ep. of the Himavat.
nodin a. dispelling (--°ree;).
bhedin a. breaking, cleaving, pierc ing; putting out (eyes); violating (an agreement etc.); dividing, separating from (ab.); creating discord in or among; interrupting (medita tion); -ya, fp. to be split; capable of being pierced; refutable; to be betrayed; corrupti ble, to be drawn off from his allies; that is differentiated or determined; n. substantive.
bhedavādin m. maintainer of the doctrine of dualism (the difference be tween God and the world); -saha, a. capable of seduction, corruptible; -½abheda-vâdin, m. maintainer of the doctrine both of the differ ence and the identity of God and the world.
bhauvādika a. belonging to the class of roots beginning with bhû (bhû½âdi), i. e. to the first conjugational class (gr.).
mañjuvādin a. speaking sweet ly: -î, f. N.; -srî, f. N. of a celebrated Bodhi sattva of the Northern Buddhists.
madira a. id.: â, f. spirituous li quor; ep. of Durgâ; N. of the mother of Kâdambarî; (a)-dris, a. having ravishing eyes; (a)-nayana, a. id.; -½aksha, a. (î) id.; â-vat-î, f. N. of a girl and title of the 13th Lambaka of the Kathâsaritsâgara.
madin a. (V.) gladdening, intoxi cating; lovely.
madanāditya m. N.; -½anta- ka, m. destroyer of Kâma, ep. of Siva; -½ari, m. foe of Kâma, ep. of Siva; -½avastha, a. enamoured, in love: â, f. being in love; -½âsaya, m. sexual desire.
madiṣṭha spv. of madín (V.).
madhyamandira n. female or gan; anus.
madhyaṃdina m. midday, noon; midday offering (savana).
madhyāditya m. noontide sun: -gate&zip;hani, at midday; â-varsha, n. middle of the rainy season; -½ahna, m. midday: -kâ la, m., -velâ, f., -samaya, m. noontide.
mandira n. [gladdening, pleasant], dwelling, abode, house; mansion, palace; temple.
mandiman m. slowness; dul ness, stupidity.
mandin a. (RV.) gladdening; joyful.
mardita cs. pp. (√ mrid) rubbed, etc.; -i-tavya, fp. to be destroyed or devas tated; -in, a. crushing, breaking in pieces, destroying (--°ree;).
maryādin m. frontier neighbour; a. keeping within bounds.
mādhyaṃdina a. (î) belonging to midday; m. pl. N. of a school, a branch of the White Yagur-veda: -sâkhâ, f. the school of the Mâdhyamdinas.
medi f. [having fatness or fer tility: meda, √ mid], earth; ground, soil; land, country, realm; spot, place: -ga, m. son of earth, planet Mars; -dhara, m. supporter of earth, mountain; -nandana,m. son of earth, planet Mars; -pati, m. lord of earth, king; -½îsa, m. id.
medin m. companion, associate, ally (V.).
yājurvedika a. relating to the Yagur-veda; -vaidika, a. id.
yugādi m. beginning of (an age=) the world; -½adhyaksha, m. surveyor of a cosmic age, ep. of Pragâpati; -½anta, m. end of the yoke; end of a generation; end of an age or of the world; meridian: -m adhirû- dhah savitâ, the sun has reached the meri dian, it is noon; -½antara, n. another or later generation; second half of the sun's arc divided by the meridian: -m ârûdhah savitâ, the sun has entered the second part of his course, it is past midday.
ravidina n. Sunday; -nandana, m. son of the sun, planet Saturn; -bimba, n. disc of the sun; -mani, m. sun-stone; -manda la, n. disc of the sun; -ratna, n. sun-stone; -vamsa, m. solar race; -vâra, m., -vâsara, m. n. Sunday; -samkrânti, f. entrance of the sun into a sign of the zodiac; -suta, m. son of the sun=planet Saturn or the monkey Sugrîva; -soma-sama-prabha, a. having lustre resembling that of the sun and moon.
rudita pp.; n. weeping, wailing, howling.
rurudiṣā f. desire to weep.
roditavya fp. n. one should weep.
raudhādika a. belonging to the class of roots beginning with rudh (i.e. to the seventh class).
lagudin a. provided with a staff.
lapsudin a. bearded (goat; V.).
vaditavya fp. to be spoken or said; -i-tri, m. speaker of (g.); a. speaking about (ac.).
dika a. (--°ree;) talking, speaking; asserting, maintaining (a theory); m. magician (v. r.); -ita, pp. cs. of √ vad; n. instru mental music; -i-tavya, fp. n. id.; -i-tra, n. musical instrument; music, musical performance; musical choir.
din a. saying, speaking, talking (often --°ree;); speaking or talking about (--°ree;); declaring, proclaiming, announcing (--°ree;); expressing, indicating, designated as, addressed by (a title, --°ree;); m. speaker; teacher of (--°ree;); propounder or adherent of a theory; disputant; prosecutor.
vidi the root 1. vid; -itá, pp. of √ 1. vid: -pûrva, a. previously known.
prāmodika a. charming.
viṣādin a. swallowing poi son; -½anna, n. poisoned food; -½apaha, a. destroying poison; -½amrita-maya, a. (î) hav ing the nature of poison and nectar (girl).
viṣādin a. id.: (-i)-tâ, f., -tva, n. dejection, despondency, dismay, despair.
vṛndin a. containing a multitude of (--°ree;).
vṛṣanādin a. roaring like a bull.
vedipurīṣa m. loose earth of the Vedi; -matî, f. N.; -madhya, a. having a Vedi-shaped waist; -shád, a. sitting on or at the altar (V.); -sambhavâ, f. ep. of Draupadî.
vedi f. shallow bed dug out (in the sacrificial court) covered with straw, con taining the sacred fire-places and serving as an altar; being narrow in the middle, the female waist is often compared with it;Vedi-shaped open pavilion in a court-yard prepared for weddings; stand, pedestal, bench: (i)-kâ, f. Vedi-shaped pavilion (=ve di); stand, bench.
vaidiśa m. king of Vidisâ: pl. in habitants of Vidisâ; n. N. of a town situated on the Vidisâ.
vaidika a. (î) relating to, derived from, conformable to, or prescribed in the Veda, Vedic; n. Vedic passage or precept.
vrandin a. growing slack (RV.2).
śabdita pp. of sabdaya; n. cry.
śaradija a. produced in autumn, autumnal.
ślīpadin a. suffering from ele phantiasis.
sadaṃdi ad. lasting for ever, en during (AV., rare).
sadadi ad. (V.) generally.
sadivas ad. (on the same day:= sadyas) at once (RV.1); -dînam, ad. piteously; -duhkha, a. sad; -dûrva, a. covered with Dûrvâ grass.
sapadi ad. on the spot, instantly, in a moment; -padma, a. provided with lotuses: -ka, a. provided with a lotus and splendid (padmâ = srî); -parâkrama, a. mighty; -parikrama, a. accompanied byone's retinue; -parikkhada, a. together with one's belongings, -goods and chattels; -pa ritosham, ad. with satisfaction; -parivâra, a. together with one's retinue; -parihâsa, a. jocose.
samididhmavraścana a. cleaving firewood of various kinds.
din a. riding, m. rider, on (--°ree;).
sāṃpādika a. [sampad] effica cious.
sudina a. (RV.) clear, bright (day, morning); n. (V., C.) bright sky, fine day, clear weather; good day, happy time: -tâ, f. clear weather, -tva, n. brightness (of days), fig. happy time (RV.); -dív, a.shining brightly (Agni; RV.); -divá, n. beautiful day (AV.); -divasa, n. id. (C.); -dîtí, f. bright flame (RV.); a. brilliant, flaming (RV.); -dîrgha, a. very long (of time and space); -duhkha, a. very laborious or diffi cult, to (inf.): -m, ad. very sorrowfully; -duhkhita, pp. greatly afflicted, very unhappy; -dukûla, a. made of very fine ma terial; -dúgha, a. (V.) milking well (cow); nourishing, bountiful: â, f. good milch-cow (V.); -durgaya, a.very hard to overcome or conquer; m. kind of military array; -dur bala, a. extremely weak; -durbuddhi, a. very foolish; -durmanas, a. very despon dent; -durlabha, a. very hard to obtain; very difficult to (inf.); -duskara, a. very inaccessible; very hard to perform (penance); -duhsrava, a. very unpleasant to hear; -dushprasâdhya, fp. very hard to over come; -dustara, a. very difficult to cross; very hard to perform; -duhsaha, a.very difficult to bear; invincible; -duha, a. willingly milked (cow); -dûra, a. very distant: -m or °ree;--, ad. very far; greatly, altogether, very; ab. from afar; (sú)-dridha, pp. very firm or strong; -retentive (memory); vehe ment, intense; -dris, a. (f. C. id.; V. -î) keen-sighted (V., C.); fair, considerable (RV.); fair-eyed, gnly. f. (fair-eyed) woman (C.); -drishta, a. keen-sighted; -devá, m. good or true god (V.); a. (V.) favoured by the gods; meant for the right gods; m. N.; -devyã, n. host of the good gods (RV.); -dyút, a. shin ing brightly (RV.); -dyumná, a. id. (RV.1); m. (C.) N.; -dviga, a. having beautiful teeth; -dhánvan, a. having an excellent bow; m. a mixed caste (offspring of outcast Vaisya); N.; assembly hall of the gods; -dharman, a. practising justice; m. assembly hall of the gods; -dharmâ, f. id.
sedi f. [√ sad] weariness, decay (V.).
skandin a. shedding (--°ree;).
smadiṣṭa a. provided with an er rand (watchers; RV.1).
svādin a. [√ svad] tasting, en joying (--°ree;); -i-man, m. savouriness, sweet ness; -ishtha, spv. sweetest, pleasantest (V., C.); sweeter than (ab., C.); -îyas, cpv. (V., C.) sweeter, more savoury, than (ab.).
hārdi m. [hrid] heart (AV.); content ment (C.); n. (V.) heart; interior (of the body).
hṛdiśaya a. sticking in the heart; -stha, a. being in the heart; dear; -sprís, a. touching or charming the heart.
Vedic Index of
Names and Subjects
219 results48 results
didhiṣu In the Rigveda denotes a ‘wooer.’ It is applied to the relative, probably brother-in-law, who takes the place of the husband at the funeral rite, and who, as in the Hebraic levirate, is to beget a child by the brother’s wife if there is no son. Hillebrandt and Lanman consider that the word originally meant only ‘wooer,’ and applied to the king who, after the chief queen had lain beside the dead victim in the Purusamedha or ‘ human sacrifice,’ claimed her again; but this view is hardly plausible. The term is also applied to the god Pūsan as the wooer of his mother, apparently Sūryā
didhiṣūpati Occurs in the Kāthaka and Kapisthala Sam­hitās, as well as in the Apastamba, Gautama, and Vasistha
didyu both denote in the Rigveda ‘ missile,’ ‘ arrow,’ whether divine or human.
dirgharaṇya ‘Wide tract of forest,’ in the Aitareya and śatapatha Brāhmanas refers to the extensive jungles which must clearly then have covered Northern India. In one of the Aitareya passages it is said that in the east the villages are close together and frequent, while in the west there are forests.
diś Direction,’ is a word very frequently used in the Rigveda and later to denote a quarter of the sky. As a general rule, four quarters are mentioned—east, south, west, north. But the number of the ‘ directions ’ is sometimes increased up to ten by the addition to these four of various others. The five points include the zenith (ārdhvā) ; the six, the zenith and the nadir (ūrdhvā and avācī) ; the seven, the zenith, the ground on which one stands (dhruva), and the air (aηtariksa) between these two (vyadhvā) ; the eight include the inter­mediate quarters (S.E., S.W., N.E., N.W.) ; the nine add to these the zenith ; the ten, zenith and nadir. The number five is sometimes made up by the ground beneath the observer’s feet (ιdhruvā), and the number six by that point (dhruvā) and the zenith (ūrdhvā) ; the ‘ lofty ’ (brhatl) sometimes taking the place of the ‘ vertical ’ (ūrdhvā).
dityavāh A two-year-old bull or cow,’ is mentioned in the later Samhitās and the Brāhmanas. dityavāh (masculine) dityauhī (feminine)
div ‘Sky.’ The world as a whole is regarded as divided into the three domains of ‘earth/ ‘air’ or ‘atmosphere,’ and ‘heaven’ or ‘sky’ (div) or alternatively into ‘heaven and earth’ (dyāvā-prthivī), which two are then considered as com­prising the universe, the atmosphere being included in the sky. Lightning, wind, and rain belong to the atmosphere, solar and The shape of the earth is compared with a wheel in the Rigveda, and is expressly called * circular ’ (pari-mandala) in the Satapatha Brāhmana. When earth is conjoined with heaven, the two are conceived as great bowls (camvā) turned towards each other. In the Aitareya Aranyaka the two are regarded as halves of an egg. The distance of heaven from the earth is given by the Atharvaveda as a thousand days’ journey for the sun-bird, by the Aitareya Brāhmana as a thousand days’ journey for a horse, while the Pañcavimśa Brāhmana whimsically estimates the distance as equivalent to a thousand cows standing one on the top of the other.According to Zimmer, the Vedic poets conceived the atmosphere to be above the earth in its upper division only, but below it in its lower stratum. The evidence, however, for the latter assumption is quite insufficient. The theory of the Aitareya Brāhmana is that the sun merely reverses its bright side at night, turning its light on the stars and the moon while it retraverses its course to the east; and it has been shown that this is probably the doctrine of the Rigveda also. See also Sūrya and Candramās. For the Vedic knowledge of the planets, see Graha. There is no geographical division of the earth in Vedic literature. The Jaiminīya Upanisad Brāhmana states that the centre of the earth is a span north of the Plaksa Prāsravanā, and that the centre of the sky is the constellation of the seven Esis, the Great Bear. For the quarters, see Diś.
divodāsa atithigva Is one of the leading princes of the early Vedic age. He was a son of Vadhryaśva, and father, or more probably grandfather, of Sudās, the famous king of the Trtsu family, among the Bharatas. Probably Pijavana was the son and Sudās the grandson. Divodāsa was naturally a Bharata, and, like Sudās, was an opponent of the Turvaśas and Yadus. His great enemy was śambara, the Dāsa, who was apparently chief of a mountain people, and whom he repeatedly defeated. He was also, it seems, like his father Vadhryaśva, an energetic supporter of the fire ritual, for Agni is once called by his name in the Rigveda. On the other hand, he was defeated, with Ayu and Kutsa, by Indra’s aid. In several passages he seems closely connected with the singer family, the Bharadvājas. From one passage, where Divodāsa is said to have fought against the Panis, the Pārāvatas, and Brsaya, Hillebrandt has inferred that he was engaged in conflicts with the tribes of Arachosia, and interpreting the name as the ‘heavenly Dāsa’ conjectures that he was himself a Dāsa. This conclusion is not probable, for the Sarasvatī on which the battle in question took place, and which can hardly be the Haraqaiti of Arachosia, would naturally designate the later Sarasvatī, while the Pārāvatas are mentioned in the Pañcavimśa Brāhmana, as in the east, about the Yamunā. Bergaigne’s opinion that Divodāsa and Atithigva were different people cannot be supported in view of the complete parallelism in the acts of the two persons. See also Pratardana. The people of Divodāsa are referred to in a hymn of the Rigveda.
divodāsa bhaimaseni (‘Descendant of Bhīmasena ’) is mentioned in the Kāthaka Samhitā as a contemporary of Aruni.
divya ‘Ordeal,’ is a term not found until the later literature, but several references to the practice of ordeals have been seen in Vedic literature. The fire ordeal seen in the Atharvaveda1 by Schlagintweit, Weber, Ludwig, Zimmer, and others, has been disproved by Grill, Bloomfield, and Whitney. But such an ordeal appears in the Pañcavimśa Brāhmana, and an ordeal with a glowing axe occurs in the Chāndogya Upanisad as applied in an accusation of theft. Geldner suggests that this usage is referred to even in the Rigveda, but this is most improbable. Ludwig and Griffith discover in another passage of the Rigveda references to Dīrghatamas’ having been subjected to the fire and water ordeals, but this view cannot be supported. According to Weber the 'balance’ ordeal is referred to in the śatapatha Brāhmana, but see Tulā.
divya śvan The ‘ divine dog,’ in one passage of the Athar­vaveda appears to denote Canis major or Sirius. But Bloom­field thinks that the two divine dogs referred to in the Maitrāyanī Samhitā and the Taittirīya Brāhmana are the sun and moon, and that the sun is meant in the Atharvaveda.
amāvāsya sāṇdilyayana is mentioned in the Vamśa Brāhmana as the teacher of Amśu Dhānamjayya
upoditi gaupāleya Is mentioned in the Pañcavimśa Brāh­mana as a seer of Sāmans.
edidhiṣuḥpati Is a term occurring only in the Vājasaneyi Samhitā, where the commentator Mahīdhara interprets it as meaning the * husband of a younger sister married before the elder sister.’ Though this sense is probably correct, the form is doubtless, as Delbruck points out, corrupt. See Didhisūpati.
aupoditi ‘Descendant of Upodita,’ is the patronymic applied in the Taittirīya Samhitā to Tumiñja, and in the Baudhāyana śrauta Sūtra to Gaupālāyana, son of Vyāghrapad, Sthapati (‘ general ’) of the Kurus. In the form of Aupoditeya, a metro­nymic from Upoditā, the name is found in the śatapatha Brāhmana, where the Kānva text calls him Tumiñja Aupo­diteya Vaiyāghrapadya.
kārīradi Kārīradi is the name of persons mentioned in the Jaiminīya Upanisad Brāhmana as holding a special view of the Udgītha (Sāmaveda Chant).
kusīdin Is a designation of the ‘ usurer ’ iound in the śata­patha Brāhmana and the Nirukta, and often in the Sūtras. Jolly, referring doubtless to the expression kusīda apratītta,* a loan not yet repaid,’ occurring in connexion with an-rna, ‘ free from debt,’ appears to be right in taking Kusīda to have the sense of loan * in the Taittirīya Samhitā. The rate of interest on loans is not specified before the Sūtra period. Cf. Rna.
kausurubindi ‘descendant of Kusurubinda,’ is the patro­nymic of Proti Kauśāmbeya in the śatapatha Brāhmana. In the Gopatha Brāhmana the form is Kausuravindu.
khadira Is mentioned frequently from the Rigveda onwards as a tree with hard wood—the Acacia catechu. The Aśvattha is referred to as engrafting itself upon it in the Atharvaveda, and from it the climbing plant Arundhatī is said to have sprung. The sruva or sacrificial ladle is spoken of as having been made from it, no doubt because of its hardness. It is in the same passage also said to have sprung from the sap (rasa) of the Gāyatrī. There is no clear reference to Catechu having been prepared from its core, as it was later. The core (sāra) was used for making amulets.
khādi Occurs frequently in the Rigveda denoting either anklets or armlets, or sometimes rings on the hands. Max Muller considers that the word means quoits, the later Cakra. The rings were sometimes of gold.
grāmyavādin apparently means a ‘village judge’ in the Yajurveda. His Sabhā, ‘ court, is mentioned in the Maitrāyanī Samhitā.
cedi Is the name of a people who, with their king Kaśu, the Caidya, are mentioned only in a Dānastuti (‘Praise of Gifts’), occurring at the end of one hymn of the Rigveda, where their generosity is celebrated as unsurpassed. They occur later in the Epic with the Matsyas, and lived in Bandela Khanda (Bundelkhand). In Vedic times they were probably situated in much the same locality.
chadis Is used once in the Rigveda, and not rarely later, to denote the covering of a wagon or the thatch of a house, or something analogous to these. Weber thinks that in one passage of the Atharvaveda the word designates a constella¬tion, and Whitney, who does not decide whether that interpre¬tation is necessary, suggests that the constellation 7, ξ, η, 7r Aquarii may be meant, since the next verse mentions Vicrtau, which is the constellation λ and v Scorpionis, and is not far from Aquarius. See also Chardis.
chardis occurs often in the Rigveda,1 and occasionally later,2 denoting a secure dwelling-place. The word appears to be incorrectly written, because the metre shows that the first syllable is always short. Roth3 accordingly suggested that Chadis should be read instead. But Chadis means ‘ roof,’ while Chardis never has that sense. Bartholomae4 is therefore prob­ably right in suggesting some other form, such as Chadis.
tirindira Is mentioned in a Dānastuti, or ‘ Praise of Gifts,’ in the Rigveda as having, along with Parśu, bestowed gifts on the singer. In the śāñkhāyana śrauta Sūtra this state­ment is represented by a tale that the Kanva Vatsa obtained a gift from Tirindira Pāraśavya, Tirindira and Parśu being in this version thus treated as one and the same man. Ludwig sees in the Rigvedic passage a proof that the Yadus had gained a victory over Tirindira, and gave a part of the booty to the singers; but there is no proof whatever of the correctness of this interpretation, which Zimmer shows to be most unlikely. Yadu princes must be meant by Tirindira and Parśu, though Weber thinks that the singers were Yadus, not the princes. The latter he holds to have been Iranian (cf. TLpiβaζos, and see Parśu), and he thinks that in this there is evidence of continual close relations between India and Iran. This is perfectly possible, but the evidence for it is rather slight.
tumiñja aupoditi Is mentioned in the Taittirīya Samhitā as a Hotr priest at a Sattra, or ‘ sacrificial session,’ and as having been engaged in a discussion with Suśravas.
nadi ‘Stream,’ is mentioned in the Rigveda and later. Reference is made to shallows (gādha) in the river’s bed, to the opposite bank (pāra), and to the bathing of horses in streams. Rivers are also mentioned in close connexion with mountains. The title Nadī-pati, ‘lord of rivers,’is once used to express ‘ ocean ’ or ‘ sea-water.’
nābhānediṣṭha (‘Nearest in descent ’) Mānava (‘ descendant of Manu ’) is famous in the later Samhitās and the Brāhmanas for the way in which he was treated when his father Manu divided his property among his sons, or they divided it: Nābhānedistha was left out, but was solaced by obtaining, through his father’s advice, cows from the Añgirases, a feat which is regarded in the Sāñkhāyana Srauta Sūtra as on a level with the exploits of other seers who celebrated their patrons in hymns, and as giving rise to the hymn, Rigveda Nābhānedistha’s hymn is repeatedly mentioned in the Brāh­manas, but beyond its authorship nothing is recorded of him. In the Samhitā itself he seems to be spoken of as a poet in one passage, which is, however, of quite uncertain meaning. Nābhānedistha is etymologically connected in all probability with Nabānazdista in the Avesta, which refers to the Fravasi of the paoiryδ-tkaesha and the Fravasi of the Nabānazdista. Lassen saw in the legend a reminiscence of an Indo-Iranian split; but Roth showed conclusively that this was impossible, and that Nābhānedistha meant simply ‘nearest in birth,’and Weber admits that the connexion of the words is not one of borrowing on either side, but that in the Avesta it has kept its original sense of ‘ nearest relation,’ while in the Rigveda it has become a proper name.
ninditāśva (‘Possessing contemptible steeds’) is the name of a patron in the Rigveda. The name may suggest connexion with Iran, but such a reference is not at all necessary. Sāyana ingeniously turns the name—probably a nickname— into a compliment by rendering it ‘ one who puts to shame the horses of his rivals.’
pauṣkarasādi (‘Descendant of Puṣkarasādi ’) is the name of a teacher mentioned in the śāñkhāyana Aranyaka, as well as the Taittirlya Prātiśākhya. A Puṣkarasādi is mentioned in the Dharma Sūtra of Apastamba and elsewhere.
pradiv In the Atharvaveda is the third and highest heaven, in which the Fathers dwell. In the Kauṣītaki Brāhmaria it is the fifth of a series of seven heavens.
pradiś Like Diś, normally designates only a quarter’ of the sky, or ‘point’ of the compass. Four, five, six, and seven such points are enumerated, or more generally all ’ are mentioned. In some passages, on the other hand, the word has the definite sense of an ‘intermediate quarter,’ which is more precisely denoted by
predi See Proti.
proti kauśāmbeya kausurubindi (‘Descendant of Kusuru- binda’) is mentioned in the śatapatha Brāhmaṇa as a pupil and contemporary of Uddālaka. In the Taittirīya Sarphitā, on the other hand, Kusurubinda is called Auddālaki, ‘descendant of Uddālaka,’ a fact which seems to indicate that little value is to be attached to these patronymics and allegations of contemporaneousness.
bṛhaddiva Appears in a hymn of the Rigveda as its author, calling himself an Atharvan. He is mentioned in the Aitareya Brāhmaṇa, and is named in the Vamśa (list of teachers) of the śāñkhāyana Araṇyaka as a pupil of Sumnayu.
brahmavādin (‘Expounder of the Veda’) in the later Samhitās and the Brāhmaṇas denotes a ‘ theologian.’ Brahma-vid (‘knowing what is sacred ’) has the same sense.
madhyaṃdina ‘Mid-day,’ is a frequent designation of time in the Rigveda, the later Samhitās, and the Brāhmanas. Cf, Ahan.
mādhyaṃdināyana ‘Descendant of Madhyamdina,’ is the patronymic of a teacher mentioned in the Kāṇva recension of the Brhadāranyaka Upaniṣad.
dita Is found denoting ‘music' in the compound gīta· vādita, ‘song and music,’ in the Chāndogya Upaniṣad, and uncompounded in the Kauṣītaki Brāhmaṇa along with Nftya, dance/ and Gīta, song/ See śilpa.
vidiś Denotes an ‘intermediate quarter.’ See Diś.
vṛṣakhādi Is used as an epithet of the Maruts in the Rigveda. The sense is doubtful: Bollensen thought the expression referred to the wearing of rings in the ears; Max Mūller renders it * strong rings,’ comparing the later Cakra or discus.
śaṇdika Is found in one passage of the Rigveda in the plural. According to Ludwig, the hymn is a prayer for victory over the śaṇdikas and their king.
śaṇdila Masc. plur.. is the term applied to the ‘ descendants of śāṇdilya ’ in the Taittirīya Araṇyaka.
śāṇdilīputra ‘Pupil of a female descendant of śaṇdila,’ is the name of a teacher, a pupil of Rāthītarīputra, in the last Vamśa (list of teachers) of the Brhadāraṇyaka Upaniṣad.
śāṇdilyāyana ‘Descendant of śāṇdilya,’ is the patronymic of a teacher in the śatapatha Brāhmaṇa. Apparently he is identical with Celaka, also mentioned in that text; it is thus reasonable to suppose that Cailaki Jīvala was his son. It is much more doubtful whether he was the grandfather of Pravāhaṇa Jaivala, who was a prince rather than a Brahmin.
sadaipdi See Takman
din In the Atharvaveda denotes the ‘rider’ of a horse as opposed to a-sāda, ‘pedestrian.’ An aśva-sādin, ‘horse-rider,’ is known to the Vājasaneyi Samhitā. The Taittirīya Brāh­maṇa and the Rigveda itself contain clear references to horse-riding, while the Aitareya Araṇyaka refers to mounting a horse sideways. Aśvalāyana knows sādya as a ‘riding horse’ opposed to vahya, a ‘draught animal.’
smadibha Is found once in the Rigveda, where Roth takes the word as perhaps the name of an enemy of Kutsa. Cf. Ibha.
Bloomfield Vedic
Concordance
219 results48 results1243 results
dideṣṭu devy aditī rekṇaḥ RV.7.40.2c.
didhiṣavo no rathyaḥ sudānavaḥ RV.10.78.5b.
didhiṣūpatyā yat sahāśima AVP.9.23.7c.
didhṛtā yac ca duṣṭaram RV.1.139.8g; AVś.20.67.2g.
didīhi deva devayuḥ (SV. -yum) RV.9.108.9b; SV.1.579b; 2.361b.
didivaḥ pāhi MS.2.6.10: 70.6; 4.4.4: 54.11. See didyon, and vidyot.
didṛkṣanta uṣaso yāmann aktoḥ RV.3.30.13a.
didṛkṣeṇyaḥ pari kāṣṭhāsu jenyaḥ RV.1.146.5a.
didṛkṣeṇyaṃ sūryasyeva cakṣaṇam RV.5.55.4b.
didṛkṣeyaḥ sūnave bhāṛjīkaḥ RV.3.1.12b.
didyavas tigmamūrdhānaḥ RV.6.46.11d.
didyon mā pāhi (KS. didyot pāhi) TS.1.8.14.1; KS.15.7; TB.1.7.8.2; Apś.18.15.5. See under didivaḥ.
didyuṃ yad asya samitheṣu maṃhayam RV.10.48.9c.
digbhya enaṃ pāta MS.2.6.9: 69.10; 4.4.3: 53.14. See next, and digbhyo mā.
digbhyaḥ pāta VS.10.8; śB.5.3.5.30. See under prec.
digbhyaḥ śrotram TB.3.4.18.1. Cf. diśaḥ śrotram.
digbhyaḥ svargaṃ lokam anusaṃtanu MS.2.13.3: 153.11. Cf. divaḥ svaḥ.
digbhyaḥ svāhā VS.6.19; 22.27; 39.2; TS.7.1.15.1; MS.3.12.7: 162.13; KSA.1.6; śB.2.4.4.24; 3.8.3.35; 14.3.2.10; 9.3.6; BṛhU.6.3.6; Aś.2.4.13. See svāhā digbhyaḥ.
digbhyaś cakravākaḥ (KSA. cakṛvākaḥ) TS.5.5.13.1; KSA.7.3.
digbhyaś candramase PG.2.10.7.
digbhyas taṃ nir bhajāmo yo 'smān dveṣṭi yaṃ vayaṃ dviṣmaḥ AVś.10.5.28.
digbhyas te śrotraṃ spṛṇomi svāhā śB.11.8.4.6; Kś.25.6.11.
digbhyo nakulān VS.24.26; MS.3.14.7: 173.11.
digbhyo mā pāta TS.1.8.12.3; TB.1.7.6.8. See under digbhya.
digbhyo vaḍabe (KSA. vaḍave) TS.5.6.21.1; KSA.10.1.
digdhaviddhām iva mādaya śB.14.9.4.8d; BṛhU.6.4.8d.
digdhena ca viddhasya AVP.15.16.4a.
digdheveṣuḥ pra padyatām AVP.9.28.5b.
dikṣu candrāya samanaman sa ārdhnot AVś.4.39.7. See under candramase sam.
dikṣu viṣṇur vyakraṃstānuṣṭubhena chandasā śś.4.12.5. See under ānuṣṭubhena chandasā diśo.
dikṣu śritāḥ sahasraśaḥ AVP.14.3.9d; VS.16.6d; TS.4.5.1.3d; MS.2.9.2d: 121.9; KS.17.11d; NīlarU.9d.
dikto-diktaḥ pañcālānām śB.13.5.4.8c.
dinasya vā maghavan saṃbhṛtasya vā RV.8.78.10c.
dine tekṣṇiṣṭham ātapat Apś.21.12.3b.
dipsanta id ripavo nāha debhuḥ RV.1.147.3d; 4.4.13d; TS.1.2.14.5d; MS.4.11.5d: 174.4; KS.6.11d.
dipsantaṃ parirāpiṇi AVP.7.9.3d.
dipsato yaś ca dipsati AVś.4.36.2b. Cf. yaś ca dipsati dipsa.
dipsauṣadhe tvaṃ dipsantam AVś.5.14.1c; AVP.7.1.1c.
diśa āpnoti cakṣuṣā AVP.8.19.3c.
diśa āśābhiḥ pṛthivī payobhiḥ AVP.2.72.1c.
diśaḥ pādāḥ KSA.5.5.
diśaḥ pūtā uta yena pradeśāḥ AVP.9.25.4b.
diśaḥ pūrṇā amaṃhata śB.13.5.4.4b; śś.16.9.13d.
diśaḥ pradiśa ādiśo vidiśa uddiśaḥ (MS.KS.JB. uddiśo diśaḥ) VS.6.19; TS.1.3.10.2; MS.1.2.17: 27.5; KS.3.7; JB.1.89; śB.2.4.4.24; 3.8.3.35. P: diśaḥ Kś.4.4.16.
diśaḥ pradiśaḥ karad ic chivās te AVś.19.45.3d; AVP.15.4.3d.
diśaḥ śāntiḥ TA.4.42.5; KA.1.218C.
diśaḥ śrotram AB.2.6.13; TB.3.6.6.2; Aś.3.3.1; śś.5.17.3. Cf. digbhyaḥ śrotram.
diśaḥ samit MS.4.9.23: 137.5; 4.9.25: 138.2.
diśaḥ sūryo na mināti pradiṣṭāḥ RV.3.30.12a.
diśaḥ stha śrotraṃ me mā hiṃsiṣṭa JUB.1.22.6.
diśaḥ svar uṣasa indra citrāḥ RV.6.60.2c; KS.4.15c.
diśaḥ svāhā Mś.1.7.2.16.
diśaṃ na diṣṭam ṛjūyeva yantā RV.1.183.5c.
diśāṃ kaṅkaḥ VS.24.31; MS.3.14.12: 174.11.
diśāṃ kḷptir asi TB.3.7.5.7; śś.4.9.2; Apś.4.10.9. See kḷptir asi diśām.
diśāṃ gopā asya caranti jantavaḥ AVP.13.5.6a. See viśāṃ gopā.
diśāṃ ca pataye namaḥ VS.16.17; TS.4.5.2.1; MS.2.9.3: 122.9; KS.17.12; śB.9.1.1.18.
diśāṃ jatravaḥ VS.25.8; TS.5.7.16.1; MS.3.15.7: 179.11; KSA.13.6.
diśāṃ tevy avatu etc. see diśāṃ devy.
diśāṃ tvā cakṣuṣā paśyāmi AVP.9.21.4.
diśāṃ tvā jaṭhare sādayāmīti AVP.9.21.4.
diśāṃ tvā dātrā prāśnāmi Mś.1.3.3.16.
diśāṃ tvā draviṇe sādayāmi TS.4.4.7.1; MS.2.13.18: 165.3; KS.39.9.
diśāṃ tvāsyena prāśnāmi AVP.9.21.4.
diśāṃ tvā hastābhyām ā rabhe AVP.9.21.4.
diśāṃ devy avatu (MS. diśāṃ tevy avatu) no ghṛtācī AVP.15.1.10b; TS.4.4.12.4b; MS.3.16.4d: 189.1; Aś.4.12.2b.
diśām udīcī kṛṇavan no agram AVś.12.3.10b.
diśām ekapuṇḍarīkam asi śB.14.9.3.14; BṛhU.6.3.14.
diśāṃ patir abhavad vājinīvān TB.2.8.4.2b. See viśāṃ etc.
diśāṃ prajñānāṃ svarayantam arciṣā AVś.13.2.2a.
diśāṃ priyo bhūyāsam AVP.2.86.1--6.
diśaś catasro 'śvataryaḥ AVś.8.8.22. P: diśaś catasraḥ Kauś.15.11.
diśaś ca ma (MS. mā) indraś ca me (VS. me yajñena kalpantām) VS.18.18; TS.4.7.6.2; MS.2.11.5: 143.1; KS.18.10.
diśaś caiva lokaṃ cāva rundhe AVP.9.21.4.
diśas tvā dīkṣamāṇam anudīkṣantām TB.3.7.7.8; Apś.10.11.1.
diśi dhruvāyāṃ dhehi pājasyam AVś.4.14.8d.
diśo abhy abhūd ayam KS.15.8; MS.2.6.12: 72.3; 4.4.6: 57.14; Mś.9.1.4.24. See diśo 'bhy, and vijitya diśo.
diśo gacha TA.6.9.2 (bis).
diśo jinva Apś.3.20.4.
diśo jyotiṣmatīr abhy āvarte AVś.10.5.38a.
diśo dīkṣā tayā candramā dīkṣayā dīkṣitaḥ TB.3.7.7.6; Apś.10.11.1.
diśo dṛṃha TS.1.1.7.2; KS.1.7; 31.6; TB.3.2.7.3.
diśo 'dṛṃhad dṛṃhitā dṛṃhaṇena MS.4.14.13d: 236.9; TB.2.8.3.8d.
diśo dhenavas tāsāṃ candro vatsaḥ AVś.4.39.8.
diśo 'nu pavamāno vā (ApMB. 'nu pavamānaḥ) PG.1.4.15b; ApMB.1.3.6b.
diśo 'nuvikramasva VS.12.5; TS.4.2.1.2; KS.16.8; MS.2.7.8: 85.7; śB.6.7.2.16; Kś.16.5.13.
diśo 'nu vi krame 'ham AVś.10.5.28.
diśo 'nu sarvā abhayaṃ no astu TB.3.1.1.5d.
diśo bhūtāni yad akalpayanta AVś.18.4.7d.
diśo 'bhy ayaṃ rājābhūt TS.1.8.16.2; TB.1.7.10.5. See under diśo abhy.
diśo me kalpantām TB.3.7.5.7; śś.4.9.2; Apś.4.10.9. See under kalpantāṃ me diśaḥ.
diśo me śrotre śritāḥ, śrotraṃ hṛdaye, hṛdayaṃ mayi, aham amṛte, amṛtaṃ brahmaṇi TB.3.10.8.6.
diśo yajñasya dakṣiṇāḥ Aś.5.13.14. See yaśo yajñasya.
diśo yaś cakre prajñānīḥ AVś.10.7.34c.
diśo yasya pradiśaḥ pañca devīḥ AVP.4.1.6c; MS.2.13.23c: 168.12; KS.40.1c. See under imāś ca pradiśo.
diśo yoniḥ MS.2.13.2: 153.8.
diśo rudrā vitasthire VS.16.63b; TS.4.5.11.2b; MS.2.9.9b: 129.7; KS.17.16b.
diśo viśvā anu prabhuḥ SV.2.517b. See viśo etc.
diśo viṣṇur vyakraṃstānuṣṭubhena chandasā KS.5.5. See under ānuṣṭubhena chandasā diśo.
diśo vṛtās tāś candramasā vṛtās tābhir vṛtābhir vartrībhir yasmād bhayād bibhemi tad vāraye svāhā AG.3.11.1.
diśo vo mithunam TA.1.18.1.
diśo 'si VS.11.58; TS.4.1.5.4; MS.2.7.6: 81.2; KS.16.5; śB.6.5.2.6.
diśo hotrāśaṃsinyas tā me hotrāśaṃsinyaḥ Mś.2.1.1.4.
diśo hy asya sraktayaḥ ChU.3.15.1c.
diśo-diśaḥ śālāyā namo mahimne svāhā devebhyaḥ svāhyebhyaḥ AVś.9.3.31.
diśo-diśo agne pari pāhi ghorāt AVś.18.4.9e.
diśo-diśo jaṅgiḍaḥ pātv asmān AVś.19.35.4d; AVP.11.4.4d.
diśo-diśo rabhamāṇāḥ sam eta AVP.10.4.6b.
diṣṭaḥ puruṣa jajñiṣe (AVP. puruṣa mṛtyave) AVś.5.30.17d; AVP.9.14.7d.
diṣṭaṃ no atra jarase ni neṣat AVś.12.3.55a--60a.
diṣṭāya rajjusarjam (TB. -sargam) VS.30.7; TB.3.4.1.3.
diteḥ putrāṇām aditer akārṣam (MS. -riṣam) AVś.7.7.1a; MS.1.3.9a: 33.7. P: diteḥ putrāṇām Mś.2.3.8.22; Kauś.59.18.
ditiṃ ca rāsvāditim uruṣya RV.4.2.11d; TS.5.5.4.4d; KS.40.5d.
ditiś ca dāti vāryam RV.7.15.12c; MS.4.10.1c: 143.2.
ditiś ca dyauś ca MS.2.11.6: 143.12. See next.
ditiś ca me dyauś ca me VS.18.22; TS.4.7.9.1; KS.18.11. See prec.
ditsantaṃ bhūyo yajataś ciketa RV.2.14.10d.
dityavāḍ gaur vayo dadhuḥ VS.21.13d; MS.3.11.11b: 158.1; KS.38.10d; TB.2.6.18.1d. Cf. dityavāhaṃ.
dityavāḍ vayaḥ VS.14.10; TS.4.3.3.1; 5.1; MS.2.7.20: 105.5; 2.8.2: 107.19; KS.17.2; 39.7; śB.8.2.4.12.
dityavāhaṃ gāṃ vayo dadhat VS.28.25e; TB.2.6.17.2f. Cf. dityavāḍ gaur.
dityavāho jagatyai VS.24.12; MS.3.13.17: 172.1; Mś.9.2.3.18.
dityavāṭ ca dityauhī ca MS.2.11.6: 143.15. See next.
dityavāṭ ca me dityauhī ca me VS.18.26; TS.4.7.10.1; KS.18.12. See prec.
diva (KS. divas; TB. divaḥ) skambhanir (VS.śB. skambhanīr; KS.1.6, skambhadhānyam; VSK.KS.31.5, skambhany) asi VS.1.19; VSK.1.7.2; KS.1.6; 31.5; TS.1.1.6.1; śB.1.2.1.16; TB.3.2.6.2; Apś.1.21.3. Cf. adityāḥ skambho.
diva skambhaḥ samṛtaḥ pāti nākam RV.4.13.5d.
diva stave duhitā gotamebhiḥ RV.1.92.7b.
diva spaśaḥ pra carantīdam asya AVś.4.16.4c. See iha spaśaḥ.
diva spṛṣṭo yajataḥ sūryatvak AVP.1.7.2a. See under divi spṛṣṭo etc.
di kīrtyam adivā kīrtayantaḥ AB.5.31.6c.
di cit tamaḥ kṛṇvanti RV.1.38.9a; TS.2.4.8.1a; MS.2.4.7a: 44.16; KS.11.9a; Apś.19.26.17. P: divā cit tamaḥ Mś.5.2.6.17.
di tvā naktaṃ yatamo dadambha AVP.12.18.10a. See divā mā naktaṃ.
di digbhir anantābhir ūtibhiḥ HG.2.10.7c. See next, and ābhir digbhir.
di digbhiś ca sarvābhiḥ śG.3.13.5c. See under prec.
di naktaṃ śarum asmad yuyotam RV.7.71.1d.
di naktaṃ śnathitā vaitasena RV.10.95.4d.
di naktaṃ sudānavaḥ RV.8.25.11b.
di naktaṃ ca kalpatām AVś.5.7.3b. Cf. divā naktaṃ ca sidhyatu.
di naktaṃ ca jāgṛtām (AVP. jāgratu) AVś.5.30.10d; AVP.9.13.10d.
di naktaṃ ca yoṣitaḥ AVP.9.11.5b.
di naktaṃ ca rakṣiṣaḥ RV.8.61.17d; SV.2.808d.
di naktaṃ ca viśvataḥ AVś.8.5.22g.
di naktaṃ ca sasruṣīḥ (Apś. sasruṣīr apasvarīḥ) RVKh.10.9.1b; AVś.6.23.1b; Apś.4.5.5c.
di naktaṃ ca sidhyatu AVP.7.9.4b. Cf. divā naktaṃ ca kalpatām.
di naktaṃ daśasyatam RV.1.139.5b; SV.1.287b.
di naktaṃ na bheṣajaiḥ VS.21.36c; MS.3.11.2c: 142.6; TB.2.6.11.6c.
di naktam adābhya RV.7.15.15c.
di naktam avasā śaṃtamena RV.5.76.3c; SV.2.1104c.
di naktam upācarān AVP.12.20.10b.
di naktaṃ mādhvī trāsīthāṃ naḥ RV.7.71.2d.
di na naktaṃ palito yuvājani RV.1.144.4c.
di patayate svāhā VS.22.30. See divāṃ pataye.
di pṛthivyādribhiḥ sacābhuvā RV.8.35.2b.
di pṛthivyā mithunā sabandhū RV.10.10.9c; AVś.18.1.10c.
di pṛthivyā śṛṇutaṃ havaṃ me RV.3.62.2d.
di mā naktaṃ yatamo dadambha AVś.5.29.9a. See divā tvā naktaṃ.
di mā svāpsīḥ AG.1.22.2. See under ūrdhvas tiṣṭhan.
di yānti maruto bhūmyāgniḥ RV.1.161.14a.
di vastos svāhā KS.6.8. See prātar vastor.
di vā yadi vā rātrau RVKh.1.191.8c.
di harir dadṛśe naktam ṛjraḥ RV.9.97.9d; SV.2.468d; JB.3.174.
diva ājātā divyā suparṇā RV.4.43.3c.
diva ātmānaṃ savitāraṃ bṛhaspatim TA.3.11.2b.
diva ā pṛthivyā ṛjīṣin RV.8.79.4b.
diva ā vakṣaṇābhyaḥ RV.1.134.4h.
diva āhuḥ pare ardhe purīṣiṇam RV.1.164.12b; AVś.9.9.12b; PraśU.1.11b.
diva itthā jījanat sapta kārūn RV.4.16.3c; AVś.20.77.3c.
diva iva sānv ārabham RV.10.62.9b.
diva ived aratir mānuṣā yugā RV.2.2.2c.
diva ugro avārukṣat (AVP. -kṣaḥ) AVP.14.3.2a; NīlarU.2a.
diva eti pratihvare RV.7.66.14b.
diva oṣadhayas (TS. -yaḥ) pari RV.10.97.17b; AVP.11.7.4b; VS.12.91b; TS.4.2.6.5b; MS.2.7.13b: 94.13.
divābhipitve 'vasāgamiṣṭhā RV.5.76.2c; SV.2.1103c.
divācarebhyo (MG. -cāribhyo) bhūtebhyaḥ (sc. namaḥ) MG.2.12.18; ViDh.67.21. See ahaścarebhyaḥ.
divaḥ śardhāya śucayo manīṣāḥ RV.6.66.11c.
divaḥ śardhena mārutena sukratuḥ RV.2.31.3b.
divaḥ śaśāsur vidathā kavīnām RV.3.1.2c. P: divaḥ śaśāsuḥ KB.26.14.
divaḥ (Mś. divi) śilpam avatatam TB.3.3.2.1a; Apś.2.5.1a; Mś.1.2.5.8a; 1.3.5.25.
divaḥ śiśuṃ sahasaḥ sūnum agnim RV.6.49.2c.
divaḥ śukrebhir aśmibhiḥ (read aśmabhiḥ ?) AVP.15.23.4b.
divaḥ śyenāya jījanam RV.7.15.4b; KS.40.14b; TB.2.4.8.1b.
divaḥ śyenāso asurasya nīḍayaḥ RV.10.92.6b.
divaḥ saṃspṛśas (MS. saṃpṛcas) pāhi VS.37.13; MS.4.9.4: 124.9; śB.14.1.3.29; KA.2.91. P: divaḥ saṃspṛśaḥ Kś.26.3.11.
divaḥ sadāṃsi bṛhatī vi tiṣṭhase RVKh.10.127.1c; AVś.19.47.1c; AVP.6.20.1c; VS.34.32c; N.9.29c.
divaḥ sadobhyas pari SV.1.312b. See divo antebhyas.
divaḥ saṃpṛcas etc. see divaḥ saṃspṛśas.
divaḥ samrājā payasā na ukṣatam RV.5.63.5d; TB.2.4.5.4d.
divaḥ sānūpeṣa MS.1.2.14: 24.6; Mś.1.8.2.28. See antarikṣasya tvā sānāv.
divaḥ siṣakti svayaśā nikāmabhiḥ RV.10.92.9d.
divaḥ subandhur januṣā pṛthivyāḥ RV.3.1.3b.
divaḥ suvaḥ etc. see divaḥ svaḥ.
divaḥ sūnur asi VS.6.6; śB.3.7.1.22; Kś.6.3.17; Apś.7.11.19.
divaḥ skambhaetc. see diva etc.
divaḥ svaḥ (TB.Apś. suvaḥ) saṃtanu KS.39.8; TB.1.5.7.1; Apś.16.32.3. Cf. digbhyaḥ svargaṃ.
divaḥ kośam acucyavuḥ RV.5.53.6b; TS.2.4.8.1b; MS.2.4.7b: 44.18; KS.11.9b.
divaḥ kṣudrebhir aśmibhiḥ (read aśmabhiḥ ?) AVP.15.23.3b.
divaḥ khīlo 'vatataḥ TB.3.7.6.19a; Apś.4.12.8a.
divaḥ parjanyād antarikṣāt pṛthivyāḥ TS.2.4.8.1; 4.7.13.2; MS.2.4.7 (ter): 44.11,13,15; 2.12.3: 146.19; KS.11.9 (ter); 18.15. See divas etc., and cf. divas pṛthivyā uror.
divaḥ pīyūṣaṃ duhate nṛcakṣasaḥ RV.9.85.9d.
divaḥ pīyūṣam uttamam RV.9.51.2a; SV.2.577a; JB.3.209.
divaḥ pīyūṣaṃ pūrvyaṃ yad ukthyam RV.9.110.8a. See pratnaṃ pīyūṣaṃ.
divaḥ pṛthivyāḥ pary antarikṣāt TS.2.4.14.2b; 3.1.10.2c; KS.8.17b; TB.1.2.1.22a; Apś.5.13.4a. See divas etc.
divaḥ pṛthivyāḥ pary oja udbhṛtam VS.29.53a; TS.4.6.6.5a; KSA.6.1a. See divas etc.
divaḥ pṛṣṭhaṃ svar (TS. suvar) gatvā TS.4.6.5.1c; MS.2.10.6c: 138.2; 3.3.9: 41.18; KS.18.4c. See divas etc.
divaḥ pṛṣṭham adhi etc. see divas etc.
divaḥ pṛṣṭhaṃ bhandamānaḥ etc. see divas etc.
divaḥ pṛṣṭhāny etc. see divas etc.
divaḥ pṛṣṭhe mandamānaḥ etc. see divas pṛṣṭhaṃ bhandamānaḥ.
divainān raśmibhir jahi AVP.10.10.2c. Cf. next.
divainān vidyutā jahi TB.3.7.6.21c; Apś.4.15.1c. Cf. prec.
divaivānyaj juhuyān naktam anyat AB.5.30.3d.
divākarāya dhīmahi MahānU.3.8b. Cf. mahādyutikarāya.
divākarāya vidmahe MahānU.3.9a.
divākaro 'ti dyumnais tamāṃsi AVś.13.2.34c; 20.107.13c.
divakṣā asi vṛṣabha satyaśuṣmaḥ RV.3.30.21c; VSK.28.14c.
divakṣaso agnijihvā ṛtāvṛdhaḥ RV.10.65.7a.
divakṣaso dhenavo vṛṣṇo aśvāḥ RV.3.7.2a.
divāṃ pataye svāhā KS.35.10; TB.3.10.7.1; Apś.14.25.11. See divā patayate.
divaṃ yacha VS.15.64; TS.4.4.3.3; 5.7.6.2; MS.2.7.15: 98.9; 2.8.14: 118.5; KS.40.5; śB.8.7.3.18; TA.4.8.4; 5.7.9. Cf. divaṃ me.
divaṃ yaya divāvaso RV.8.34.1d--15d; SV.1.348d; 2.1157d--1159d.
divaṃ yaś cakre mūrdhānam AVś.10.7.32c.
divaṃ yaś cātisarpati AVś.4.20.9b. See bhūmiṃ yaś copasarpati.
divaṃ yo manyate nātham AVP.8.6.10c. See bhūmiṃ yo etc.
divaṃ rudrā upaśritāḥ VS.16.56b; TS.4.5.11.1b; MS.2.9.9b: 128.11; KS.17.16b.
divaṃ rudrāḥ pṛthivīṃ ca sacante TS.1.4.11.1b.
divaṃ ruroha katamaḥ sa devaḥ AVś.10.2.8d.
divaṃ rūḍhvā mahatā mahimnā AVś.13.1.8c. See divaṃ gatvāya.
divaṃ rūpeṇa TS.5.7.20.1; KSA.13.10.
divaṃ varma pṛthivīṃ ca kṛṇve AVP.13.1.3b.
divaṃ vaste 'yam antarikṣam AVś.13.1.16b.
divaṃ viṣṇur vyakraṃsta jāgatena chandasā KS.5.5. See under jāgatena chandasā divam.
divaṃ vṛkkābhyām VS.25.8; MS.3.15.7: 179.13.
divaṃ veda sāmago yo vipaścit GB.1.5.25c.
divaṃ samudram ād bhūmim AVś.13.2.41c. See under divam antarikṣam.
divaṃ suparṇo gatvāya RV.8.100.8c; Suparṇ.31.9c.
divaṃ skabhāna KS.2.9. See divaṃ dṛṃha, and dyāṃ stabhāna.
divaṃ stabdhvāntarikṣaṃ ca pṛthivyāṃ ca dṛḍhā bhava Apś.14.33.2.
divaṃ harāmi śB.1.2.4.14.
divaṃ kṛtvā dakṣiṇām AVś.13.1.52b.
divaṃ gacha VS.12.4; TS.1.1.13.1; 4.43.1; 4.1.10.5; 5.1.10.5; 6.6.1.1; MS.2.7.8: 85.2; 2.9.10: 130.9 (bis); 3.2.1: 15.6; KS.16.8; 19.11; śB.6.7.2.6; TB.3.3.9.4; TA.4.9.3; 5.8.3; 6.9.2 (bis); KA.2.131; Apś.13.5.8; Mś.6.1.4.10. See dyāṃ gacha.
divaṃ gachantu divyāḥ AVP.15.18.6a.
divaṃ gacha prati tiṣṭhā śarīraiḥ AVś.2.34.5c. See under oṣadhīṣu prati.
divaṃ gacha svar vinda yajamānāya mahyam Mś.1.2.6.25d. See devān etc.
divaṃ gatvāya mahatā mahimnā TB.2.5.2.2c. See divaṃ rūḍhvā.
divaṃ ca gacha pṛthivīṃ ca dharmabhiḥ AVś.18.2.7b. See dyāṃ etc.
divaṃ ca pṛthivīṃ ca RV.10.190.3c; TA.10.1.14c; MahānU.5.7c.
divaṃ ca pṛśni pṛthivīṃ ca sākam TB.2.8.8.2b.
divaṃ ca yanti pṛthivīṃ ca lokān AVś.12.3.25b.
divaṃ ca roha pṛthivīṃ ca roha AVś.13.1.34a. P: divaṃ ca roha Vait.13.5.
divaṃ ca sūrya pṛthivīṃ ca devīm AVś.13.2.5c.
divaṃ jinva TS.3.5.2.2; 4.4.1.1; KS.17.7; 37.17; PB.1.9.3; Vait.20.13.
divaṃ jinvanty agnayaḥ RV.1.164.51d; TA.1.9.6d; N.6.22; 7.23d.
divaṃ tapasas trāyasva TA.4.5.6; 5.4.10; Apś.15.8.5.
divaṃ tṛtīyaṃ devān yajño 'gāt tato mā draviṇam āṣṭa AB.7.5.3. See divaṃ devāṃs, devān divaṃ yajño, and devān divam agan.
divaṃ te dhūmo gachatu VS.6.21; MS.1.2.14: 24.6; 3.9.4: 120.2; śB.3.7.1.32; Mś.1.8.6.10. P: divaṃ te dhūmaḥ Kś.6.9.12. See dyāṃ te.
divaṃ dādhāra pṛthivīṃ sadevām TA.4.42.5c.
divaṃ dṛṃha VS.1.18; 5.13; 15.64; TS.1.1.7.1; 2.12.3; 4.4.3.3; MS.1.1.8: 4.10; 1.2.8: 18.8; 2.7.15: 98.9; 2.8.14: 118.6; 3.8.5: 101.10; 4.1.8: 10.2; KS.1.6,7; 31.5,6; 40.5 (bis); JB.1.39; śB.1.2.1.11; 3.5.2.14; 8.7.3.18; TB.3.2.7.2; Mś.1.2.3.4. See under divaṃ skabhāna.
divaṃ devaḥ pṛṣatīm ā viveśa AVś.13.1.24d.
divaṃ devāṃs tṛtīyaṃ yajño 'gāt tato mā draviṇam aṣṭu śś.3.20.4. See under divaṃ tṛtīyaṃ.
divam agreṇa mā lekhīḥ (MSṃś. hiṃsīḥ) TS.1.3.5.1; 6.3.3.3; MS.1.2.14: 23.8; 3.9.3: 116.3; Apś.7.2.7; Mś.1.8.1.11. See dyāṃ mā lekhīḥ.
divam agreṇāprāt (VS. agreṇāspṛkṣat) VS.28.20d; TB.2.6.10.6d. See dyām etc., and next.
divam agreṇāspṛkṣaḥ VSK.6.1.2. See under prec.
divam agreṇottabhāna MS.1.2.14: 23.14; 3.9.3: 117.15; Mś.1.8.2.17. See ud divaṃ stabhāna.
divam anuvikramasva VS.12.5; TS.4.2.1.1; MS.2.7.8: 85.6; KS.16.8; śB.6.7.2.15.
divam anu vi krame 'ham AVś.10.5.27.
divam antarikṣam ād bhūmim AVś.4.20.1c. See divaṃ samudram, and dyām antarikṣam.
divam ayaṃ yajamāno rohati śś.16.17.10.
divam ākramiṣam TS.5.6.8.1; Mś.6.2.3.16.
divam ā tanvanti raśmibhiḥ VS.13.22b; 18.46b; MS.2.7.16b: 98.17; KS.16.16b. See udyato divam.
divam ā roha sūrya AVś.19.65.1e.
divam eṣāṃ (JUB. eko) dadate yo vidhartā AVś.10.8.36c; JUB.1.34.7c,10.
divaṃ pitaram upaśraye JB.1.129.
divaṃ pṛthivīm anv antarikṣam AVś.3.21.7a; AVP.3.12.7a. P: divaṃ pṛthivīm Vait.9.17.
divaṃ pṛthivyā adhy āruhāma VS.8.52c; śB.4.6.9.12.
divaṃ pṛṣṭhena TS.5.7.17.1; KSA.13.7.
divaṃ prehi śataudane AVś.10.9.3d,11d; AVP.14.6.1a.
divaṃ proṣṭhinīm (Mś. proṣṭhanīm [?]) āroha tām āruhya prapaśyaikarāṇ manuṣyāṇām Apś.18.6.4; Mś.7.1.3.18.
divaṃ brūmo nakṣatrāṇi AVś.11.6.10a; AVP.15.14.3a; MS.2.7.13a: 94.15.
divaṃ martya iva pakṣābhyām śB.13.5.4.23c.
divaṃ martya iva bāhubhyām śB.13.5.4.14c. See next.
divaṃ martya iva hastābhyām AB.8.23.7c. See prec.
divaṃ mā prāpad urv antarikṣam AVś.14.2.69d.
divaṃ mā hiṃsīḥ VS.15.64; TS.4.4.3.3; MS.2.7.15: 98.9; 2.8.14: 118.6; KS.40.5; śB.8.7.3.18.
divaṃ me yacha TB.3.10.4.3 (bis). Cf. divaṃ yacha.
divaś cid yeṣāṃ bṛhat RV.5.10.4d.
divaś cid rocanād adhi RV.1.49.1b; 5.56.1d; 8.8.7a.
divaś cin me bṛhata uttarā dhūḥ RV.10.28.6b.
divaś chadmāsi AG.3.8.19. Cf. divyaṃ chadmāsi.
divas kaṇvāsa indavaḥ RV.1.46.9a.
divas kavandham ava darṣad udriṇam RV.9.74.7d.
divas tad arṇavāṃ anv īyase AVP.6.11.5c. Cf. dviṣas tad adhy.
divas taṃ nirbhajāmo yo 'smān dveṣṭi yaṃ vayaṃ dviṣmaḥ AVś.10.5.27.
divas tārā avāpadran AVP.9.7.9a.
divas tvā jyotiṣe TS.4.4.6.2. See dive tvā etc.
divas tvā dātrā prāśnāmi Mś.1.3.3.16. Cf. Vait.3.16.
divas tvā draviṇe sādayāmi TS.4.4.7.1; MS.2.13.18: 165.3; KS.39.9. Cf. TA.6.7.3.
divas tvā paraspāyāḥ (MS. paraspāya; KA. paraspām), antarikṣasya tanvas (TA. tanuvas; KA. tanvaṃ) pāhi MS.4.9.10: 131.4; TA.4.11.2; KA.3.178. Ps: divas tvā paraspāyāḥ TA.5.9.1; Apś.15.14.1; divas tvā Mś.4.4.13.
divas tvā pātu haritam AVś.5.28.9a; AVP.2.59.7a.
divas tvā vīryeṇa pṛthivyai mahimnāntarikṣasya poṣeṇa paśūnāṃ tejasā sarvapaśum ādadhe TB.1.2.1.18; Apś.5.12.2; 13.8; 15.6.
divas pathā vadhvo yanty acha RV.5.47.6d.
divas payo didhiṣāṇā aveṣan RV.10.114.1c.
divas pari prathamaṃ jajñe agniḥ RV.10.45.1a; VS.12.18a; TS.1.3.14.5a; 4.2.2.1a; MS.2.7.9a: 86.5; KS.16.9a; śB.6.7.4.3; ApMB.2.11.21a (ApG.6.15.1). P: divas pari Aś.4.13.7; Kś.16.5.21 (22); Apś.6.19.8 (comm.); 16.11.6; Mś.6.1.4.18; PG.1.16.9; Rvidh.3.11.1. Cf. BṛhD.7.41. Designated as vātsapra, and vātsaprīya TS.5.2.1.6; MS.3.2.2: 16.9; Apś.16.11.6; PG.1.16.8; ApG.6.15.1; MG.1.23.11; see also the lexicons under these words.
divas pari sugrathitaṃ tad ādaḥ RV.1.121.10d.
divas parjanyād antarikṣāt pṛthivyāḥ VS.18.55. See divaḥ etc., and cf. divas pṛthivyā uror.
divas pāyur duroṇayuḥ RV.8.60.19d; SV.1.39d.
divas putrā aṅgiraso bhavema RV.4.2.15c.
divas putrāya mīḍhuṣe RV.7.102.1b; MS.4.12.5b: 192.15; KS.20.15b; TB.2.4.4.5b; TA.1.29.1b; Apś.8.1.4b.
divas putrāya sūryāya śaṃsata RV.10.37.1d; VS.4.35d; TS.1.2.9.1d; MS.1.2.6d: 15.19; KS.2.7d; śB.3.3.4.24d.
divas putrāv amartyau AVś.8.7.20d.
divas putrāsa etā na yetire RV.10.77.2c.
divas putrāso asurasya vīrāḥ RV.3.53.7b; 10.67.2b; AVś.20.91.2b.
divas pṛthivīm abhi ye (AVP.14.1.8b, yāḥ) sṛjanti AVś.4.27.4b; AVP.4.35.4b; 14.1.8b.
divas pṛthivyā adhi bhava RV.9.31.2a.
divas pṛthivyā antarikṣāt samudrāt AVś.9.1.1a. P: divas pṛthivyāḥ Kauś.12.15; 13.6. Designated as madhusūkta VHDh.5.533.
divas pṛthivyā aham AVP.10.6.8c.
divas pṛthivyā uta carkirāma RV.4.39.1b.
divas pṛthivyā uror antarikṣāt AVP.3.31.1c--5c,6b--8b Cf. divaḥ parjanyād, and divas parjanyād.
divas pṛthivyāḥ pary antarikṣāt RV.1.61.9b; AVś.19.3.1a; 20.35.9b; AVP.1.73.1a; MS.3.16.3a: 186.9; 4.12.2b: 181.11. See divaḥ etc.
divas pṛthivyāḥ pary oja udbhṛtam (AVP. ābhṛtam) RV.6.47.27a; AVś.6.125.2a; AVP.15.11.6a. P: divas pṛthivyāḥ Kauś.10.24; Vait.16.12. See divaḥ etc.
divas pṛthivyāḥ śriyam ā vahantu Kauś.3.3d.
divas pṛthivyāḥ saṃbhūtā AVś.6.100.3c; AVP.3.22.1c.
divas pṛṣṭhaṃ svar gatvā AVś.4.14.2c; AVP.3.38.2c; VS.17.65c; śB.9.2.3.24. See divaḥ etc.
divas (SV.JB. divaḥ) pṛṣṭham adhi tiṣṭhanti cetasā (JB. tejasā; SV. rohanti tejasā) RV.9.83.2d; SV.2.226d; JB.3.54d.
divas pṛṣṭham asi śś.6.12.12.
divas pṛṣṭhaṃ barhaṇā nirṇije kṛta RV.9.69.5c.
divas (PBṭA.Apś. divaḥ) pṛṣṭhaṃ (PB. pṛṣṭhe) bhandamānaḥ (PB. manda-) sumanmabhiḥ RV.3.2.12b; PB.1.7.6b; TA.3.10.4b; Apś.14.11.4b.
divas (SV. divaḥ) pṛṣṭhāny āruhan (AVś.12.2.12b, āruhat) SV.1.92b; AVś.12.2.12b; 18.1.61b.
divas pṛṣṭhe dhavamānaṃ suparṇam AVś.13.2.37a. P: divas pṛṣṭhe Vait.18.7.
divas pṛṣṭhe madhupṛcaḥ suparṇāḥ AVP.4.27.1a.
divas pṛṣṭhe 'vacākaśat AVś.13.4.1b.
divas pṛṣṭhe vi tanvate RV.9.66.5b.
divaś ca gmaś ca dhūtayaḥ RV.1.37.6b.
divaś ca gmaś ca martyam RV.10.22.6d.
divaś ca gmaś ca rājathaḥ (RV.1.25.20b, rājasi) RV.1.25.20b; 5.38.3d.
divaś ca gmaś cāpāṃ ca jantavaḥ RV.10.49.2b.
divaś ca pṛthivyāś ca AVP.3.15.6c.
divaś caranti pari sadyo antān RV.5.47.4d.
divaś caranti bheṣajā RV.10.59.9b.
divaś cit te bṛhato jātavedaḥ RV.1.59.5a.
divaś cit pūrvo ny asādi hotā RV.1.60.2c.
divaś citraṃ na tanyatum RV.9.61.16b; SV.1.484b; 2.239b; JB.3.60.
divaś cit sānu rejata svane vaḥ RV.5.60.3b; TS.3.1.11.5b; MS.4.12.5b: 193.13.
divaś cid agne mahinā pṛthivyāḥ RV.3.6.2c.
divaś cid antād upamām (TA. upa mām; RV. antāṃ upamāṃ) ud ānaṭ RV.10.8.1c; AVś.18.3.65c; SV.1.71c; TA.6.3.1c.
divaś cid asya varimā vi paprathe RV.1.55.1a; AB.5.19.3. P: divaś cid asya Aś.6.4.10; 8.6.13; 7.23.
divaś cid ā te rucayanta rokāḥ RV.3.6.7a.
divaś cid ā pūrvyā jāyamānā RV.3.39.2a.
divaś cid ā vo 'mavattarebhyaḥ RV.10.76.5a.
divaś cid ghā duhitaram RV.4.30.9a; śś.18.13.3. Cf. BṛhD.4.137.
divaspṛg ety aruṇāni kṛṇvan AVP.1.107.1c. See divispṛg yāty.
divaspṛthivyor aratiṃ ny erire RV.2.2.3b.
divaspṛthivyor aratir yuvatyoḥ RV.10.3.7b.
divaspṛthivyor ava ā vṛṇīmahe RV.10.35.2a.
divaspṛthivyor avasā madema RV.5.49.5d.
dive kaśān VS.24.26; MS.3.14.7: 173.11.
dive khalatim VS.30.21; TB.3.4.1.17.
dive cakṣuṣe nakṣatrebhyaḥ sūryāyādhipataye svāhā AVś.6.10.3.
dive ca viśvakarmaṇe (AVś.AVP. viśvavedase) AVś.1.32.4c; AVP.1.23.4c; TB.3.7.10.3c; Apś.9.14.2c.
dive janāya tanve gṛṇānaḥ RV.6.18.14d; MS.4.12.3d: 183.5; KS.8.16d.
dive jyotir uttamam ārabhethām KS.5.4d. See divi jyotir.
dive tvā VS.5.26; 6.1,25; 37.19; TS.1.1.11.1; 3.1.1; 6.1; 13.1; 2.6.5.1; 3.5.2.2; 8.1; 4.4.1.1; 6.2.10.2; 3.4.1; 4.3.1; 7.1.11.1; MS.1.2.11: 20.14; 1.2.14: 23.10; 1.3.1: 29.4; 1.3.35: 42.2; 3.8.9: 107.9; 3.9.3: 117.1; 4.5.3: 66.7; 4.9.6: 126.7; KS.1.12; 2.12; 3.3,9; 17.7; 22.5; 26.5; 29.5; 31.11; 37.17; KSA.1.2; PB.1.9.3; śB.3.6.1.12; 7.1.5; 9.3.5; 14.1.4.14; TB.3.3.6.3; 8.7.3; TA.4.7.2; KA.2.109; Aś.2.3.8; Vait.20.13; Kś.6.2.15; Apś.2.8.1; 3.6.4; 7.9.9; 11.9.12; 17.9.7; 20.5.8; Mś.1.8.2.6; Kauś.6.5.
dive tvā jyotiṣe MS.2.8.13: 117.5. See divas tvā etc.
dive namaḥ KSA.11.6.
dive pṛthivyai śaṃ ca prajāyai (SV. prajābhyaḥ) RV.9.109.5b; SV.2.592b.
dive sam anamat TS.7.5.23.1; KSA.5.20. Cf. under ādityaś ca dyauś.
dive sūryāya PG.2.10.6.
dive svāhā AVś.5.9.1,5; AVP.6.13.10,15; VS.22.27,29; 39.1; TS.1.8.13.3; 7.1.15.1; 17.1; 5.11.1; MS.3.12.7: 162.13; 3.12.10: 163.10; KS.15.3; 37.15,16; KSA.1.6,8; 5.2; śB.14.3.2.8; 9.3.6; Tā.10.67.2; BṛhU.6.3.6; MahānU.19.2; śś.17.12.2; Kauś.28.17.
dive-diva ā suva trir no ahnaḥ RV.3.56.6b.
dive-diva ā suvā bhūri paśvaḥ KS.37.9d; TB.2.7.15.1d; Aś.4.10.1d; śś.5.14.8d. See divo-diva etc.
dive-diva īḍyo jāgṛvadbhiḥ RV.3.29.2c; SV.1.79c; KU.2.4.8c.
dive-dive adhi nāmā dadhānā RV.1.123.4b.
dive-dive cid aśvinā sakhīyan RV.5.49.1d.
dive-dive jāyamānasya dasma RV.2.9.5b.
dive-dive dhunayo yanty artham RV.2.30.2d.
dive-dive pītim id asya vakṣi RV.7.98.2b; AVś.20.87.2b.
dive-dive varuṇo mitro agniḥ RV.3.4.2b.
dive-dive vāmam asmabhyaṃ sāvīḥ RV.6.71.6b; VS.8.6b; TS.1.4.23.1b; 2.2.12.2b; MS.4.12.2b: 180.13; śB.4.4.1.6b; Apś.6.23.1b.
dive-dive viviśur apramṛṣyam RV.6.32.5d.
dive-dive sadṛśīr addhi dhānāḥ RV.3.35.3d.
dive-dive sadṛśīr anyam ardham RV.6.47.21a.
dive-dive sadṛśīr indra tubhyam RV.3.52.8c.
dive-dive sahuri stann abādhitaḥ RV.10.92.8d.
dive-dive sūryo darśato bhūt RV.6.30.2c.
dive-dive saubhagam āsunvanti RV.4.54.6b.
dive-dive haryaśvaprasūtāḥ RV.3.30.12b.
divendraṃ sāyam indriyaiḥ VS.20.61b; MS.3.11.3b: 144.3; KS.38.8b; TB.2.6.12.3b.
divi kṣamā ca manmahe RV.5.52.3d.
divi kṣayantā rajasaḥ pṛthivyām RV.7.64.1a; AB.5.20.8; KB.26.15; Aś.8.11.1. P: divi kṣayantā śś.10.11.5.
divi kṣitibhyo apsv ā RV.3.13.4d.
divi kṣipadbhyo apsu yā AVP.15.21.8d.
divi candramasi śritam SMB.1.5.11b; PG.1.11.9b; 16.17b; ApMB.2.13.3b; HG.2.3.8b (bis); VārG.2.6b; KBU.2.8b.
divi ca smaidhi pārye na indra RV.6.17.14d.
divi jātaḥ samudrajaḥ (AVP. samudrataḥ) AVś.4.10.4a; AVP.4.25.6a.
divi jātā apsu jātāḥ TB.3.7.12.6a. P: divi jātāḥ TA.2.3.1.
divi jyotir ajaram (MS. uttamam) ārabhetām (MS. -thām) MS.1.4.3d: 51.5; TB.3.7.5.11d; Apś.3.9.10d. See dive jyotir.
divi tāro na rocante RV.8.55 (Vāl.7).2b.
divi te janma paramam VS.11.12c; TS.4.1.2.1c; MS.2.7.2c: 75.1; 3.1.3: 3.12; KS.16.1c; śB.6.3.2.2.
divi te tūlam oṣadhe AVP.11.12.3a. See divi te mūlam.
divi te nābhā paramo ya ādade RV.9.79.4a.
divi te badbadhe śavaḥ RV.1.80.13d.
divi te bṛhad bhāḥ (KS. bhās svāhā) TS.3.4.2.2; 3.6; KS.13.11d,12.
divi te mūlam oṣadhe AVś.19.32.3a. See divi te tūlam.
divi tvātrir adhārayat AVś.13.2.12a; GB.1.2.17.
divi divyāni santv antarikṣe vayāṃsi pṛthivyāṃ pārthivāni KS.28.1.
divi divyān dṛṃhāntarikṣe antarikṣyān (KS. adds dṛṃha) pṛthivyāṃ pārthivān (KS. adds dṛṃha) MS.1.3.15: 36.8; 4.6.6: 88.3; KS.35.7. See divi devān dṛṃhā-.
divi devā atharvāṇaḥ AVś.11.6.13b. Cf. devā daivā.
divi devā iva śritāḥ AVś.6.80.2b. Cf. divi vātā.
divi devā diviśritāḥ AVś.11.7.23d--27d.
divi devā nāsatyā RV.5.74.2b.
divi devān dṛṃha mayi prajām Lś.1.7.10.
divi devān dṛṃhāntarikṣe vayāṃsi pṛthivyāṃ pārthivān TS.3.2.8.6. See divi divyān dṛṃhā-.
divi devāsa āsate RV.1.19.6b; AVP.6.17.6b.
divi devāḥ sūryam āditeyam RV.10.88.11b; MS.4.14.14b: 239.17; N.7.29b.
divi deveṣu yajñam erayemam MS.4.10.3: 151.9; TB.3.5.9.1; 6.13.1; 14.3; Aś.1.8.7. Metrical.
divi deveṣu hotrā yacha TS.1.3.13.1; MS.4.5.3: 66.10; TA.5.6.7; KA.2.111.
divi dyām iva dṛṃhatu AVś.6.69.3d; ArS.3.1d.
divi dhā imaṃ yajñam VS.38.11; MS.4.9.9: 129.1; śB.14.2.2.17; TA.4.9.3; 5.8.3; KA.2.130. P: divi dhāḥ Kś.26.6.5; Mś.4.3.22. See under imaṃ yajñaṃ divi dhāḥ.
divi dhāḥ KA.2.131.
divi na ketur adhi dhāyi haryataḥ RV.10.96.4a; AVś.20.30.4a.
divi panthāś carācaraḥ RV.10.85.11d; AVś.14.1.11d.
divi paśyasi sūryam AVś.18.2.50b.
divi pṛṣṭo arocata VS.33.92a; KB.26.17; Aś.8.10.3a; śś.10.11.9a; N.7.23.
divi pṛṣṭo yajatas sūryatvak KA.1.100a; 2.100. See under divi spṛṣṭo yajataḥ.
divi pravācyaṃ kṛtaḥ RV.1.105.16b.
divi pravācyaṃ kṛtam RV.2.22.4c; SV.1.466c.
divi preṅkhaṃ hiraṇyayaṃ śubhe kam RV.7.87.5d.
divi baddho hiraṇyayaḥ AVP.12.7.5b.
divi bṛhatā tvopastabhnomi TB.3.7.10.1; Apś.14.31.7.
divi mūrdhānaṃ dadhiṣe svarṣām (TSṭB. suvarṣām) RV.10.8.6c; VS.13.15c; 15.23c; TS.4.4.4.1c; MS.2.7.15c: 98.3; KS.16.15c; TB.3.5.7.1c.
divi me anyaḥ pakṣaḥ RV.10.119.11a.
divi yad u draviṇaṃ yat pṛthivyām RV.4.5.11d.
divi rukma ivopari RV.5.61.12c.
divi rudrāso adhi cakrire sadaḥ RV.1.85.2b.
divi vātā iva śritāḥ RV.1.187.4c; AVP.6.16.4c; KS.40.8c. Cf. divi devā iva.
divi viṣṇur vyakraṃsta jāgatena chandasā VS.2.25; śB.1.9.3.10,12; śś.4.12.2. P: divi viṣṇuḥ Kś.3.8.11. See under jāgatena chandasā divam.
divi śilpam etc. see divaḥ etc.
divi śukraṃ yajataṃ sūryasya RV.10.7.3d; KB.25.10.
divi śukro vi rājati SV.2.1175b. Cf. divi ṣañ.
divi śrayasva TS.5.6.1.4; MS.2.13.1: 153.4; KS.39.1; Apś.16.33.3; Mś.6.1.6.20 (21).
divi śravāṃsy uttamāni dhiṣva RV.1.91.18d; ArS.3.2d; VS.12.113d; TS.4.2.7.4d; MS.2.7.14d: 96.10; KS.16.14d; 37.5d; śB.7.3.1.46; Kauś.68.10d.
divi śravo 'jaram ā tatāna RV.1.126.2d.
divi śravo dadhire yajñiyāsaḥ RV.1.73.7b; TB.2.7.12.6b.
divi śravo dadhiṣe nāma vīraḥ RV.10.28.12d.
divi śravo dadhīmahi RV.5.35.8d.
divi ṣañ (AVś. ṣaṃ; SV. saṃ) chukra ātataḥ RV.6.2.6b; AVś.18.4.59b; SV.1.83b. Cf. divi śukro.
divi ṣad etc. see divi sad.
divi ṣyāma pārye goṣatamāḥ RV.6.33.5d.
divi saṃ etc. see divi ṣañ.
divi sad (RV. ṣad) bhūmy ā dade RV.9.61.10b; SV.1.467b; 2.22b; VS.26.16b; JB.1.81,116; 3.40.
divi sīda KS.39.5; Apś.16.30.1.
divi sīda pṛthivyām antarikṣe TB.3.7.6.10c; Apś.4.7.2c.
divi sūryaṃ vipaścitam AVś.13.1.39d.
divi sūryam adadhāt somam adrau RV.5.85.2d; VS.4.31d; TS.1.2.8.2d; MS.1.2.6d: 15.10; KS.2.6d; 4.9d; śB.3.3.4.7. Fragments: divi sūryam ... somam adrau TS.6.1.11.3,4.
divi sūryam ivājaram RV.5.27.6d.
divi sūryo arocata RV.8.56 (Vāl.8).5e.
divi somo adhi śritaḥ RV.10.85.1d; AVś.14.1.1d; ApMB.1.6.1d.
divi stomaṃ manāmahe RV.5.35.8e.
divi spṛśanti bhānavaḥ RV.1.36.3d.
divi spṛṣṭo yajataḥ sūryatvak AVś.2.2.2a. See diva spṛṣṭo etc., and divi pṛṣṭo yajatas etc.
divi svano yatate bhūmyopari RV.10.75.3a.
divikṣayaṃ yajataṃ barhir āsade RV.5.46.5b.
divikṣayo nabhasā ya eti TA.3.11.8b.
divispṛg yāty aruṇāni kṛṇvan RV.10.168.1c. See divaspṛg ety.
divispṛṅ mā hiṃsīḥ MS.4.9.7: 128.3; TA.4.8.4; 5.7.8. P: divispṛk Mś.4.3.20.
divispṛśaṃ yajñam asmākam aśvinā RV.10.36.6a.
divispṛśy āhutaṃ juṣṭam agnau RV.10.88.1b; N.7.25b.
diviṣṭambhena (AVP. divi ṣṭambhena, so also mss. of AVś.) śaśvad it AVś.19.32.7b; AVP.11.12.7b.
divitaḥ pṛthivīm avaḥ (AVP. ava) AVP.14.3.1b; NīlarU.1b.
divīva cakṣur ātatam RV.1.22.20c; AVś.7.26.7c; SV.2.1022c; VS.6.5c; TS.1.3.6.2c; 4.2.9.4c; MS.1.2.14c: 24.4; KS.3.3c; śB.3.7.1.18c; NṛpU.5.10c; GopālU.1c; Vāsū.4.1c; SkandaU.15c; āruṇU.5c; MuktiU.2.77c.
divīva jyotiḥ svam ā mimīyāḥ (AVś. -yāt) RV.10.56.2d; AVś.6.92.3d.
divīva dyām adhi naḥ śromataṃ dhāḥ RV.7.24.5d; ā.1.5.2.16.
divīva pañca kṛṣṭayaḥ RV.10.60.4c.
divīva rukmam uruvyañcam aśret RV.5.1.12d; VS.15.25d; TS.4.4.4.2d; MS.2.13.7d: 155.17.
divīva sūryaṃ dṛśe RV.10.60.5c.
divo diśaḥ saṃtanu MS.2.13.3: 153.11.
divo duhitā bhuvanasya patnī RV.7.75.4d.
divo duhitroṣasā sacethe RV.1.183.2d.
divo devā avāsṛjan AVP.1.107.6d.
divo drapso madhumāṃ ā viveśa RV.10.98.3d.
divo dhartā bhuvanasya prajāpatiḥ RV.4.53.2a; KB.21.4.
divo dhartāra urviyā pari khyan RV.10.10.2d; AVś.18.1.2d.
divo dhartā sindhur āpaḥ samudriyaḥ RV.10.65.13b; N.12.30b.
divo dhartāsi śukraḥ pīyūṣaḥ RV.9.109.6a; SV.2.593a.
divo dharman dharuṇe seduṣo nṝn RV.5.15.2c.
divo dhāmabhir varuṇa RV.7.66.18a.
divo dhārā (KS. -rām) asaścata TS.3.3.3.2b; MS.1.3.36b: 42.17; KS.30.6b.
divo dhārāṃ bhindhi KS.11.9. See bhindhīdaṃ.
divo 'dhi pṛṣṭham asthāt KS.39.2d; Apś.16.29.1d.
divo na tubhyam anv indra satrā RV.6.20.2a.
divo na te tanyatur eti śuṣmaḥ RV.7.3.6c.
divo na tveṣo ravathaḥ śimīvān RV.1.100.13b.
divo napātā vanathaḥ śacībhiḥ RV.4.44.2b; AVś.20.143.2b.
divo napātā vidathasya dhībhiḥ RV.3.38.5c.
divo napātā vṛṣaṇā śayutrā RV.1.117.12b.
divo napātāśvinā huve vām RV.10.61.4b.
divo napātā sukṛte śucivratā RV.1.182.1d.
divo napātā sudāstarāya RV.1.184.1d.
divo na prītāḥ śaśayaṃ duduhre RV.3.57.2b.
divo nabhaḥ śukraṃ payaḥ Kauś.82.21c.
divo na yanti vṛṣṭayaḥ RV.9.57.1b; SV.2.1111b.
divo na yasya retasā RV.5.17.3c.
divo na yasya retaso dughānāḥ RV.1.100.3a.
divo na yasya vidhato navīnot RV.6.3.7a.
divo na raśmīṃs tanuto vy arṇave TB.2.8.9.1b.
divo na vāraṃ savitā vyūrṇute SV.2.845c. See vāraṃ na devaḥ.
divo na vidyut stanayanty abhraiḥ RV.9.87.8c.
divo na vṛṣṭiḥ pavamāno akṣāḥ RV.9.89.1b.
divo na vṛṣṭiṃ prathayan vavakṣitha RV.8.12.6c.
divo na sadmamakhasam RV.1.18.9c.
divo na sargā asasṛgram ahnām RV.9.97.30a.
divo na sānu pipyuṣī RV.9.16.7a.
divo na sānu stanayann acikradat RV.1.58.2d; 9.86.9a.
divo nākasya pṛṣṭhāt AVś.4.14.3c; AVP.3.38.8c; VS.17.67c; TS.4.6.5.1c; MS.2.10.6c: 138.7; KS.18.4c; śB.9.2.3.26.
divo nāke madhujihvā asaścataḥ (AVP. asaśvataḥ) RV.9.73.4b; 85.10a; AVś.5.6.3b; AVP.6.11.4b; KS.38.14b; Apś.16.18.7b.
divo nābhā vicakṣaṇaḥ RV.9.12.4a; SV.2.549a.
divo nu māṃ (HG.ApMB. mā) bṛhato antarikṣāt AVś.6.124.1a; HG.1.16.6a; ApMB.2.22.13a (ApG.8.23.8). P: divo nu mām GB.1.2.7; Vait.12.7; Kauś.46.41.
divo no vṛṣṭim iṣito rirīhi RV.10.98.10d.
divo no vṛṣṭiṃ maruto rarīdhvam RV.5.83.6a; TS.3.1.11.7a; KS.11.13a.
divo 'ntebhyas etc. see divo antebhyas.
divo bhāgo 'si Apś.3.3.11.
divo maryā ā no achā jigātana RV.5.59.6d.
divo maryā ṛtajātā ayāsaḥ RV.3.54.13b.
divo mātrayā variṇā (VS.śB. varimṇā) prathasva VS.11.29d; 13.2d; TS.4.1.3.1d; 2.8.2d; MS.2.7.3d: 76.17; 3.1.5: 6.3; KS.16.3d,15d; 20.5; śB.6.4.1.8; 7.4.1.9. P: divaḥ Kś.16.2.24. Cf. under antarikṣāyarṣayas.
divo mādityā rakṣantu AVś.19.16.2a; 27.15a; AVP.10.8.5a; 12.6.6a.
divo mānaṃ not sadan RV.8.63.2a.
divo mā pāhi TS.5.7.6.2; MS.2.7.15: 98.10; KS.40.5; TA.4.8.4; 5.7.9.
divo mā pāhi viśvasmai prāṇāyāpānāya vyānāyopānāya pratiṣṭhāyai caritrāya MS.2.8.14: 118.6.
divo mūrdhānaḥ prasthitā vayaskṛtaḥ RV.9.69.8d.
divo mūrdhā vṛṣā sutaḥ RV.9.27.3b; SV.2.638b.
divo mūrdhāsi pṛthivyā nābhiḥ (MS. -si nābhiḥ pṛthivyāḥ) VS.18.54a; TS.4.3.4.2a; 7.13.2a; MS.2.12.3a: 146.15; KS.18.15a; 39.1a; śB.9.4.4.13. Ps: divo mūrdhāsi Mś.6.2.6.17; divo mūrdhā Kś.18.6.17.
divo mūlam avatatam AVś.2.7.3a; AVP.7.7.7a.
divo yad akṣī amṛtā akṛṇvan RV.1.72.10b.
divo ya skambho dharuṇaḥ svātataḥ RV.9.74.2a.
divo yahvībhir na guhā babhūva RV.3.1.9d.
divo yahvīr avasānā anagnāḥ RV.3.1.6b.
divo yahvīṣv oṣadhīṣu vikṣu RV.7.70.3b.
divo raja uparam astabhāyaḥ RV.1.62.5d.
divo rarapśe mahimā pṛthivyāḥ RV.6.18.12b.
divo rukma urucakṣā ud eti RV.7.63.4a; KS.10.13a; TB.2.8.7.3a; Apś.16.12.1a. P: divo rukmaḥ śś.3.18.6.
divo retasā sacate payovṛdhā RV.9.74.1c.
divo rohāṃsy aruhat pṛthivyāḥ RV.6.71.5c.
divo varāham aruṣaṃ kapardinam RV.1.114.5a.
divo varṣanti vṛṣṭayaḥ RV.5.84.3d; KS.10.12d.
divo varṣman samidhyate VS.28.1c; TB.2.6.7.1c.
divo varṣmāṇaṃ vasate svastaye RV.10.63.4d.
divo vaśanty asurasya vedhasaḥ RV.8.20.17b.
divo vasubhir aratir vi bhāti RV.10.3.2d; SV.2.897d.
divo vahadhva uttarād adhi ṣṇubhiḥ RV.5.60.7b.
divo vā dhṛṣṇava ojasā RV.5.52.14c.
divo vā nābhā ny asādi hotā RV.3.4.4c.
divo vā pārthivād adhi RV.1.6.10b; AVś.20.70.6b.
divo vā pṛṣṭhaṃ naryā acucyavuḥ RV.1.166.5b.
divo vābhiṣṭhām anu yo vicaṣṭe Mś.1.2.6.25b. See devānāṃ viṣṭhām.
divo vā mahaḥ pārthivasya vā de RV.5.41.1b; MS.4.14.10b: 231.9.
divo vā ye rocane santi devāḥ RV.3.6.8b.
divo vā rocanād adhi RV.1.6.9b; AVś.20.70.5b.
divo vā viṣṇa (TS. viṣṇav) uta vā pṛthivyāḥ VS.5.19a; TS.1.2.13.2a; 6.2.9.3; KS.2.10a; 25.8; śB.3.5.3.22a. Ps: divo vā viṣṇo Apś.11.7.3; 16.26.5; 20.4.5; divo vā Kś.8.4.11. See divo viṣṇa.
divo vā vṛṣṭim eraya MS.2.8.2: 107.17; KS.17.1. See divo vṛṣṭim etc.
divo vā sānu spṛśatā varīyaḥ RV.10.70.5a.
divo viśvasmāt sīm aghāyata uruṣyaḥ TA.6.2.1c: divo is metrically superfluous. See viśvasmāt sīm aghā-.
divo viśvāni rocanā RV.8.5.8b.
divo viṣṭambha uttamaḥ RV.9.108.16d.
divo viṣṭambha upamo vicakṣaṇaḥ RV.9.86.35d.
divo viṣṇa uta vā pṛthivyāḥ AVś.7.26.8a; MS.1.2.9a: 19.6; 3.8.7: 104.19. P: divo viṣṇo Mś.2.2.2.24; 9.2.1.28. See divo vā viṣṇa.
divo vṛkṣam ivāśaniḥ AVś.6.37.2d.
divo vṛṣṭiḥ VS.14.24; TS.4.3.9.1; 5.3.4.2; MS.2.8.5: 109.12; KS.17.4; śB.8.4.2.6.
divo vṛṣṭiṃ varṣayatā purīṣiṇaḥ MS.2.4.7b: 45.1. See yūyaṃ vṛṣṭiṃ.
divo vṛṣṭiṃ subhago nāma puṣyan RV.2.27.15b.
divo vṛṣṭim eraya VS.14.8; TS.4.3.4.3; śB.8.2.3.6; TB.3.7.5.9; Apś.4.11.1. See divo vā vṛṣṭim.
divo vṛṣṭir īḍyo rītir apām RV.6.13.1d; Apś.5.23.9d.
divo vo maruto huve RV.8.94.10b.
divo agne bṛhatā rocanena RV.6.1.7d; MS.4.13.6d: 207.3; KS.18.20d; TB.3.6.10.3d.
divo adarśi duhitā RV.4.52.1c; SV.2.1075c.
divo antebhyas (KS. 'nte-) pari RV.1.49.3d; 8.88.5b; SV.1.367d; KS.16.13b. See divaḥ sadobhyas.
divo anyaḥ subhagaḥ putra ūhe RV.1.181.4d; N.12.3d.
divo abhrasya vidyutaḥ RVKh.5.84.1b.
divo amuṣmād uttarād ādāya RV.4.26.6d.
divo amuṣya śāsataḥ RV.8.34.1c--15c; SV.1.348c; 2.1157c--1159c.
divo arkā amṛtaṃ nāma bhejire RV.5.57.5d.
divo arcā marudbhyaḥ RV.5.52.5d.
divo aśmānam asyatām AVP.10.12.1d.
divo aśmānam upanītam ṛbhvā RV.1.121.9b.
divo astoṣy asurasya vīraiḥ RV.1.122.1c.
divo jajñire apāṃ sadhasthe RV.6.52.15b; KS.13.15b.
divo jāto divas putraḥ AVP.2.55.1a.
divo jyote (KS.9.3, jyotir) vivasva āditya te no devā deveṣu satyāṃ devahūtim āsuvadhvam KS.8.14; 9.3. See under devajūte vivasvann.
divo-diva ā suvā bhūri paśvaḥ AVś.7.14.3d. See dive-diva etc.
divodāsād atithigvasya rādhaḥ RV.6.47.22c.
divodāsād asāniṣam RV.6.47.23d.
divodāsam atithigvaṃ yad āvam RV.4.26.3d.
divodāsaṃ vadhryaśvāya dāśuṣe RV.6.61.1b; MS.4.14.7b: 226.4; KS.4.16b.
divodāsaṃ śambarahatya āvatam RV.1.112.14b.
divodāsaṃ na pitaraṃ sudāsaḥ RV.7.18.25c.
divodāsasya satpatiḥ RV.6.16.19c; KS.20.14c.
divodāsāya dāśuṣe RV.4.30.20c.
divodāsāya navatiṃ ca nava RV.2.19.6c.
divodāsāya mahi ceti vām avaḥ RV.1.119.4d.
divodāsāya mahi dāśuṣe nṛto RV.1.130.7b.
divodāsāya randhayaḥ (SV. -yan) RV.6.43.1b; SV.1.392b.
divodāsāya śambaram RV.9.61.2b; SV.2.561b.
divodāsāya sunvate RV.6.16.5b.
divodāsāya sunvate sutakre RV.6.31.4d.
divodāsebhir indra stavānaḥ RV.1.130.10c.
divorucaḥ suruco rocamānāḥ RV.3.7.5c.
divy aṅkṣva Apś.3.6.2; JG.1.4.
divy adhy āsate TS.3.5.4.2b; MS.1.4.3b (bis): 50.10,12; KS.5.6b; 32.6; Mś.1.4.3.16b.
divy anyaḥ sadanaṃ cakra uccā RV.2.40.4a; MS.4.14.1a: 215.3; TB.2.8.1.5a.
divy ādityāya samanaman sa ārdhnot AVś.4.39.5. Cf. under ādityaś ca dyauś.
divyā aṅgārā iriṇe nyuptāḥ RV.10.34.9c.
divyā asṛgran payasā dharīmaṇi RV.9.86.4b; SV.2.236b; JB.3.58.
divyā āpa oṣadhayaḥ TA.1.1.3b; 21.3b; 31.6b.
divyā āpo abhi yad enam āyan RV.7.103.2a.
divyā apo nannamyadhvam etc. see devya etc.
divyā āpo vaḥ śakvarīḥ AVP.8.18.3a.
divyā ca soma dharmabhiḥ RV.9.107.24b.
divyā ca soma puṣyasi RV.9.100.3d.
divyā na kośāso abhravarṣāḥ RV.9.88.6b.
divyā yā raghaṭo viduḥ AVś.8.7.24b.
divyād dhāmno mā chitsi mā mānuṣāt MS.1.4.2: 49.3; 1.4.7: 55.13; Apś.4.16.4.
divyaḥ karmaṇyo hito bṛhan nāma TB.2.4.7.1c. Cf. divyo naryo.
divyaḥ kośaḥ samukṣitaḥ MS.1.11.4b: 165.15. See devakośaḥ, and daivyaḥ kośaḥ.
divyaḥ suparṇaḥ pratikhyātaḥ KS.34.14. See nṛcakṣāḥ prati-.
divyaḥ suparṇaḥ sa vīro vy akhyat AVś.13.2.9c.
divyaḥ suparṇo 'va cakṣata kṣām RV.9.71.9c.
divyaḥ suparṇo 'va cakṣi soma RV.9.97.33a.
divyāḥ pārthivīr iṣaḥ RV.8.25.6b.
divyāḥ sarpā ava nenijatām śG.4.15.6; ... sarpā ā chādayantām 4.15.10; ... sarpā āñjatām 4.15.11; ... sarpā ā badhnatām 4.15.9; ... sarpā īkṣantām 4.15.12; ... sarpā eṣa vo baliḥ 4.15.13; ... sarpāḥ pra likhantām 4.15.7; ... sarpāḥ pra limpantām 4.15.8.
divyāḥ suparṇā madhumanta indavaḥ RV.9.86.1c.
divyaliṅgāya namaḥ Tā.10.16.
divyaṃ śardhaḥ pṛtanāsu jiṣṇu TS.4.7.15.4b; MS.3.16.5b: 191.12; KS.22.15b. See mārutaṃ śardhaḥ.
divyaṃ suparṇaṃ (AVP. samudraṃ) vāyasaṃ (AVś.AVP. payasaṃ; KS.VS.śBṭS.4.7.13.1b, vayasā; MSṭS.3.1.11.3a, vayasaṃ) bṛhantam RV.1.164.52a; AVś.4.14.6b; 7.39.1a; AVP.3.38.5b; VS.18.51b; TS.3.1.11.3a; 4.7.13.1b; MS.2.12.3b: 146.5; KS.18.15b; 19.14a; śB.9.4.4.3; Aś.2.8.3; 3.8.1; Suparṇ.17.4. P: divyaṃ suparṇam śś.6.11.8; Kauś.24.9.
divyaṃ citram ṛtuyā kalpayantam Kauś.99.2a.
divyaṃ chadmāsi saṃtatināma viśvajanasya chāyā Lś.1.7.15. Cf. divaś chadmāsi.
divyaṃ dhāmāśāste (also, with ūha, āśāse) śB.1.9.1.16; TB.3.5.10.5; Aś.1.9.5; śś.1.14.17; Apś.8.3.4,5; 7.8; 12.5; 21.1.
divyaṃ nabho gachatu yat svāhā VS.2.22d; śB.1.9.2.31d; TB.3.7.5.10d; Apś.4.12.3d.
divyaṃ nabho gacha svāhā VS.6.21; MS.1.2.18: 28.3; 3.10.7: 139.1; śB.3.8.5.3. See nabho gacha, and nabho divyaṃ.
divyam artham asādhayann iva HG.1.15.8d.
divyaṃ pavasva dhārayā RV.9.29.6b.
divyaṃ pārthivaṃ vasu RV.9.19.1b; SV.2.349b.
divyaṃ bhayaṃ rakṣata dharmam udyatam GB.1.5.24c.
divyānāṃ sarpāṇām adhipata eṣa te baliḥ śG.4.15.13.
divyānāṃ sarpāṇām adhipataye svāhā śG.4.15.4.
divyānāṃ sarpāṇām adhipatiḥ pra likhatām śG.4.15.7; ... adhipatiḥ pra limpatām 4.15.8; ... adhipatir ava neniktām 4.15.6; ... adhipatir āṅktām 4.15.11; ... adhipatir ā chādayatām 4.15.10; ... adhipatir ā badhnītām 4.15.9; ... adhipatir īkṣatām 4.15.12.
divyāni dīpayo 'ntarikṣā RV.6.22.8b; AVś.20.36.8b; KB.25.5.
divyas tvā mā dhāg vidyutā saha AVś.8.1.11d.
divyāsaḥ pārthivā uta N.7.2b (Durga in Roth's edition, Erl"auterungen, p. 100).
divyasya suparṇasya AVś.4.20.3a. See divyasya suparṇasya.
divyasyaikā dhanurārtniḥ TA.1.5.1a.
divyasyeśāthe uta pārthivasya RV.7.97.10b; AVś.20.17.12b; 87.7b; TB.2.5.6.3b; Apś.22.7.11b.
divyayā saraghayā kṛtam AVP.9.8.3b.
divyāya namaḥ Tā.10.16.
divye dhāmann (TB.3.5.8.3, dhāmany) upahūtaḥ (TB.3.5.13.3, -hūtā) TS.2.6.7.5; MS.4.13.5: 206.3; TB.3.5.8.3; 13.3.
divye yoṣaṇe bṛhatī surukme RV.10.110.6c; AVś.5.12.6c; VS.29.31c; MS.4.13.3c: 202.6; KS.16.20c; TB.3.6.3.3c; N.8.11c.
divyebhyaḥ sarpebhyaḥ svāhā śG.4.15.4.
divyena payasā saha AVP.4.2.7b; 8.10.10b; TB.2.7.15.4b. See āpo divyāḥ payasvatīḥ.
divyeṣu devi dhāmasu AVś.7.68.1b.
divyevāśanir jahi RV.1.176.3d.
divyo aśmeva vīḍubhit AVP.1.76.4b. Cf. sraktyo asmeva.
divyo gandharvaḥ ketapūḥ (VSK. -pāḥ) ketaṃ naḥ (MS.KS. omit naḥ) punātu VS.9.1; 11.7; 30.1; VSK.10.1.1; TS.1.7.7.1; 4.1.1.2; MS.1.11.1: 161.7; KS.13.14; 15.11; śB.5.1.1.16; 6.3.1.19; SMB.1.1.1; JG.1.3.
divyo gandharvo bhuvanasya yas patiḥ AVś.2.2.1a; AVP.1.7.1a; KA.1.98ā; 2.98A. P: divyo gandharvaḥ Vait.36.28; Kauś.8.24; 94.15; 95.4; 96.4; 101.3; 114.3.
divyo gandharvo rajaso vimānaḥ RV.10.139.5b; TA.4.11.7b.
divyo naryo 'cikradat AVP.6.9.1c. Cf. divyaḥ karmaṇyo.
atrādediṣṭa pauṃsyam # RV.8.45.26c. See tatrādadiṣṭa.
athāditya vrate vayaṃ tava # ArS.1.4c; SMB.1.7.10c. See athā (and adhā) vayam āditya.
athānandinaḥ sumanasaḥ sam eta # AVP.10.4.5d.
adita (MS. aditā) ehi # VS.3.27; 38.2; TS.1.6.3.1; MS.4.2.5: 27.1; 4.9.7: 127.5; śB.2.3.4.34; 14.2.1.7; TA.4.8.1; 5.7.1; śś.2.12.3; Lś.3.6.3; Apś.6.3.8; 15.9.3.
aditaye svāhā # śG.2.14.4. See adityai svāhā.
adi ehi # see adita ehi.
aditiḥ kāmadughā paprathānā # AVś.12.1.61b.
aditiḥ keśān vapatu # AG.1.17.7a; MG.1.21.3a; ApMB.2.1.1b; JG.1.11b; VārG.4.8a. Cf. aditiḥ śmaśru, and adite keśān.
aditiḥ pātv aṃhasaḥ # TS.1.5.11.5c.
aditiḥ pātv aṃhasaḥ sadāvṛdhā # RV.8.18.6c.
aditiḥ pāntu marutaḥ # AVś.6.3.1b; 4.2b.
aditiḥ pāśaṃ (MS.KSṃś. pāśān) pra mumoktv etam (MS.KS. etān) # TS.3.1.4.4a; MS.1.2.15a: 26.2; KS.30.8a; Apś.7.17.5. P: aditiḥ pāśān MS.4.14.4: 220.13; Mś.1.8.3.36.
aditiḥ putrakāmyā # AVś.6.81.3b.
aditiḥ prāyaṇīyo 'paśusthā nyuptaḥ # KS.34.14. Cf. aditir āsāditaḥ.
aditiṃ śīrṣṇā # VS.25.2; TS.5.7.13.1; MS.3.15.2: 178.6; KSA.13.3.
aditiṃ sa diśāṃ devīṃ devatānām ṛchatu (KS.Apś. sa ṛchatu) yo maitasyai diśo 'bhidāsati # KS.7.2; TB.3.11.5.3; Apś.6.18.3.
aditiṃ nāma vacasā karāmahe # AVś.7.6.4b; VS.9.5b; 18.30b; TS.1.7.7.1b; MS.1.11.1b: 161.8; KS.13.14b; śB.5.1.4.4.
aditim aham iha huve # AVP.3.9.4a.
aditiṃ mitraṃ varuṇaṃ sujātān # RV.6.51.3b.
aditir achinnapatrā priyā (also achinnapatraḥ priyo) devānāṃ priyeṇa dhāmnā priye sadasi sīda # KS.1.11 (quater). Cf. aditiraśanāchinnapatrā, aditir asi nāchinnapatrā, and aditir asy achidrapattrā.
aditir adhipatir (VSṭS.KS.śB. adhipatny) āsīt # VS.14.29; TS.4.3.10.1; MS.2.8.6: 110.9; KS.17.5; śB.8.4.3.7.
aditir apaś ca barhiś ca # MS.1.9.2: 132.1. Cf. aditir vedyā, and maruto 'paś.
aditiraśanāchinnapatrā # Mś.1.2.3.24. Cf. under aditir achinnapatrā priyā.
aditir asi # VS.4.21; TS.1.2.5.1; MS.1.2.4: 13.8; 3.2.6: 24.17; KS.2.5; 16.16; śB.3.3.1.2.
aditir asi nāchinnapatrā # VārG.1.12. Cf. under aditir achinnapatrā priyā.
aditir asi viśvadhāyā viśvasya bhuvanasya dhartrī # VS.13.18; TS.4.2.9.1; MS.2.8.14: 117.16; KS.39.3; śB.7.4.2.7.
aditir asy achidrapattrā # Apś.2.6.1. Cf. under aditir achinnapatrā priyā.
aditir asy ubhayataḥśīrṣṇī # VS.4.19; TS.1.2.4.2; 6.1.7.5; MS.1.2.4: 13.4; 3.7.5: 81.19; KS.2.5; 24.3; śB.3.2.4.16.
aditir āsāditaḥ # TS.4.4.9.1. Cf. aditiḥ prāyaṇīyo.
aditir iva tvā suputropaniṣadeyam (Mś. saputropaniṣade yeyam) indrāṇīvāvidhavā # KS.1.10; Mś.1.2.5.11. See next.
aditir iva suputrā # TB.3.5.13.3; 7.5.10b; Apś.2.5.9b. See prec.
aditir ūtyā gamat # RV.8.18.7b; SV.1.102b; TB.3.7.10.5b; Apś.14.29.1b.
aditir jātam aditir janitvam # RV.1.89.10d; AVś.7.6.1d; VS.25.23d; MS.4.14.4d: 221.2; AB.3.31.12; TA.1.13.2d; JUB.1.41.4d; N.4.23d.
aditir devatā # MS.2.13.20: 165.16; TS.4.4.10.1; KS.7.2; 39.13; TB.3.11.5.3; Apś.6.18.3.
aditir devā gandharvā manuṣyāḥ pitaro 'surās teṣāṃ sarvabhūtānāṃ mātā medinī (MahānU. medinī pṛthivī) mahatī mahī sāvitrī gāyatrī jagaty urvī pṛthvī bahulā viśvā bhūtā katamā kāyā sā satyety amṛteti vasiṣṭhaḥ # TA.10.21.1; MahānU.13.7.
aditir dyāvāpṛthivī ṛtaṃ mahat # RV.10.66.4a.
aditir dyaur aditir antarikṣam # RV.1.89.10a; AVś.7.6.1a; VS.25.23a; MS.4.14.4a: 221.1; AB.3.31.9; TA.1.13.2a; Aś.3.8.1; 5.18.12; JUB.1.41.4a; N.1.15; 4.23a. P: aditir dyauḥ Vait.6.11; Kauś.59.18. Cf. BṛhD.3.123.
aditir na uruṣyatu # RV.8.47.9a; TS.1.5.11.5a; TB.3.1.3.3.
aditir naktam advayāḥ # RV.8.18.6b.
aditir no divā paśum # RV.8.18.6a.
aditir madhyaṃ dadatām # TS.3.5.6.2. See vāyuṣ ṭe madhyaṃ.
aditir mātā sa pitā sa putraḥ # RV.1.89.10b; AVś.7.6.1b; VS.25.23b; MS.4.14.4b: 221.1; AB.3.31.10; ā.3.1.6.22; TA.1.13.2b; JUB.1.41.4b; N.4.23b.
aditir mātāsy āntarikṣān mā chetsīḥ # Aś.1.3.22.
aditir mādityaiḥ pratīcyā diśaḥ pātu # AVś.18.3.27a.
aditir vedyā # TA.3.8.1. Cf. under aditir apaś.
aditir hy ajaniṣṭa # RV.10.72.5a; Aś.3.8.1.
aditiś ca pṛthivī ca # MS.2.11.6: 143.11. See pṛthivī ca me 'ditiś.
aditiś ca mā indraś ca me # MS.2.11.5: 142.13.
aditiḥ śarma yachatu # RV.6.75.12d,17d; 8.47.9b; SV.2.1216d; VS.17.48d; 29.49d; TS.1.5.11.5b; 4.6.6.4d; MS.3.16.3d: 187.1; KSA.6.1d. Cf. viśvāhā śarma yachatu.
aditiḥ śmaśru vapatu # AVś.6.68.2a; MG.1.21.14. P: aditiḥ śmaśru Kauś.53.18. Cf. aditiḥ keśān, and adite keśān. See also the ūha AG.1.18.3.
aditiḥ śrapayān iti # VS.11.59d; TS.4.1.5.4d; MS.2.7.6d: 81.6; 3.1.7: 9.1; KS.16.5d; śB.6.5.2.21.
aditiṣ ṭe (TS.KSṭA.Apś. aditis te) bilaṃ gṛbhṇātu (KS.Apś. gṛhṇātu; TA. gṛhṇātu pāṅktena chandasā; TS. gṛhṇātu pāṅktena chandasāṅgirasvat) # VS.11.59; TS.4.1.5.4; MS.2.7.6: 81.4; 3.1.7: 8.20; KS.16.5; 19.6; śB.6.5.2.20; TA.4.2.6; Apś.15.3.4; 16.5.3. Ps: aditiṣ ṭe bilam Mś.6.1.2.10; aditiṣ ṭe Kś.16.4.3.
aditiṣ ṭvā (TS.KS. aditis tvā) devī viśvadevyāvatī (MS. -devyavatī) pṛthivyāḥ sadhasthe aṅgirasvat (TS. 'ṅgirasvat) khanatv avaṭa # VS.11.61; TS.4.1.6.1; MS.2.7.6: 81.9; 3.1.8: 9.18; 4.9.1: 121.11; KS.16.6; śB.6.5.4.3. Ps: aditis tvā devī viśvadevyāvatī KS.19.7; aditis tvā devī (Mś. aditiṣ ṭvā devī) Apś.16.5.8; Mś.6.1.2.15; aditiṣ ṭvā (TS. aditis tvā) TS.5.1.7.1; Kś.16.4.9.
aditiṣ ṣoḍaśam # KS.14.4 (ter).
aditiḥ ṣoḍaśākṣarayā ṣoḍaśaṃ māsam udajayat # MS.1.11.10 (bis): 172.8; 173.1. Cf. adityai ṣoḍaśākṣarāya etc., and next two.
aditiḥ ṣoḍaśākṣarām # MS.1.11.10: 171.18. Cf. under prec.
aditiḥ ṣoḍaśākṣareṇa (VSK. ṣol-) ṣoḍaśaṃ (VSK. ṣol-) stomam udajayat # VS.9.34; VSK.10.6.4; TS.1.7.11.2.
aditis te kakṣāṃ badhnātu vedasyānuvaktavai medhāyai śraddhāyā anūktasyānirākaraṇāya brahmaṇe brahmavarcasāya # HG.1.4.6.
aditis te bilaṃ etc. # see aditiṣ ṭe bilaṃ.
aditis tvā etc. # see aditiṣ ṭvā.
aditis sadohavirdhānābhyām # KS.9.10. See marutaḥ sado-.
aditiḥ sarvam # N.1.15. Perhaps no quotation at all.
aditiḥ sindhuḥ pṛthivī uta dyauḥ # RV.1.94.16d; 95.11d; 96.9d; 98.3d; 100.19d; 101.11d; 102.11d; 103.8d; 105.19d; 106.7d; 107.3d; 108.13d; 109.8d; 110.9d; 111.5d; 112.25d; 113.20d; 114.11d; 115.6d; 9.97.58d; AVP.4.28.7d; 8.14.11d; 13.6.6d; ArS.1.5d; VS.33.42d; 34.30d; MS.4.12.4d (bis): 187.6,8; 4.14.4d: 220.12; KS.12.14d (bis); AB.1.21.19; TB.2.8.7.2d; TA.4.42.3d; KA.1.218Bd.
aditeḥ putro bhuvanāni viśvā # AVś.13.2.9d.
adite keśān (keśaśmaśru) vapa # PG.2.1.6,7. Cf. aditiḥ keśān, and aditiḥ śmaśru.
adite 'nu manyasva (ApG.JG. also with ūha, -nv amāṃsthāḥ, -nv amaṃsthāḥ) # TS.2.3.1.2; MS.2.2.1: 15.6; Apś.19.20.6; Mś.5.1.8.11; GG.1.3.1 (cf. 11); KhG.1.2.17; HG.1.2.8; JG.1.3 (with ūha, anv amaṃsthāḥ, 1.4); ApG.1.2.3 (with ūha, anv amāṃsthāḥ, 1.2.8). P: adite 'nu Karmap.1.9.6.
adite mitra varuṇota mṛḍa # RV.2.27.14a.
aditer garbhaṃ bhuvanasya gopām # MS.4.13.2b: 200.3; KS.15.13b; TB.3.6.2.1b.
aditer dakṣo ajāyata # RV.10.72.4c.
aditer bhāgo 'si # see adityā etc.
aditer hastāṃ srucam etāṃ dvitīyām # AVś.11.1.24a. P: aditer hastām Kauś.62.1.
adityā ahaṃ devayajyayā pratiṣṭhāṃ gameyam # KS.5.1; 32.1.
adityā ahaṃ devayajyayā pra prajayā ca paśubhiś ca janiṣīya # Apś.4.10.1. Cf. devānāṃ patnīnām.
adityā uṣṇīṣam asi # MS.4.9.7: 127.8; TA.4.8.2; 5.7.2; KA.2.119; Apś.15.9.5; Mś.4.3.5. Cf. adityai (adityā) rāsnāsi and indrāṇyā uṣṇī-.
adityāḥ (VS. adityai) pañcamī # VS.25.4; MS.3.15.4: 178.12.
adityāḥ (VSṭS.KSA. adityai) pājasyam # VS.25.8; TS.5.7.16.1; MS.3.15.7: 179.11; KSA.13.6.
adityāḥ putraṃ nāthakāma upa yāmi bhītaḥ # AVś.13.2.37b.
adityāḥ putrā ādityāḥ # AVP.11.2.3c.
adityā dvādaśī # KSA.13.12. See adityai etc.
adityā (VS. adityai) bhasat # VS.25.8; MS.3.15.7: 179.11.
adityā (VSṭS.śB. adityai; VSK. aditer) bhāgo 'si # VS.14.25; VSK.15.8.4; TS.4.3.9.1; 5.3.4.3; MS.2.8.5: 109.13; KS.17.4; 21.1; śB.8.4.2.9; Mś.6.2.1.24.
adityā yat tanvaḥ saṃbabhūva # AVś.3.22.1b; AVP.3.18.1b.
adityā rāsnāsi # see adityai etc.
adityā va upasthe sādayāmi # MS.1.1.5: 3.7; 4.1.5: 7.13; Mś.1.2.1.42. See under adityās tvopasthe etc.
adityās tvag asi # VS.1.14,19; 4.30; TS.1.1.5.1; 6.1; MS.1.1.6: 3.11 (bis); 1.1.7 (bis): 4.2,3; 4.1.6: 8.1; 4.1.7: 9.4; KS.1.5,6; 2.6,7; 3.1; 24.6; 26.2; 31.4,5; śB.1.1.4.5; 2.1.14; 3.3.4.1; TB.3.2.5.5; 6.1; Apś.1.19.4; Mś.1.2.2.5,7; 2.1.4.20; 2.4.34. P: adityās tvak Kś.2.4.3; 7.9.6.
adityās tvā pṛṣṭhe sādayāmi # VS.14.5; MS.1.1.2: 2.4; 2.8.1: 107.5; 4.1.2: 4.3; KS.17.1; 20.10; śB.8.2.1.10; Mś.1.1.1.50; VārG.11.16.
adityās tvā mūrdhann ājigharmi devayajane pṛthivyāḥ # VS.4.22; śB.3.3.1.4. P: adityās tvā Kś.7.6.18. See pṛthivyās tvā etc.
adityās tvopasthe sādayāmi # TS.1.1.4.2; MS.4.1.13: 18.5; TB.3.2.4.7; Apś.1.5.2; 18.5. See adityā va, and pṛthivyās tvā nābhau sādayāmy.
adityāḥ (VS.śB.Kś. adityai) sada (MS. sadā) āsīda # VS.4.30; TS.1.2.8.1; 10.1; 3.4.2; 6.1.11.2; 3.2.4; MS.1.2.6: 15.6; 1.2.13: 22.12; 3.7.8: 86.5; 3.9.1: 113.11. śB.3.3.4.1; Apś.10.27.10; Mś.2.1.4.21; 2.2.4.35. P: adityai sadaḥ Kś.7.9.7. See next.
adityāḥ sadane sīda # KS.2.6,7; 3.1; 24.6; 26.2. See prec.
adityāḥ sado 'si # TS.1.2.8.1; 10.1; 3.4.2; 6.1.11.2; 3.2.4; Apś.10.27.10.
adityāḥ skambho 'si # MS.1.1.7: 4.4; 4.1.7: 9.7; Mś.1.2.2.27. Cf. diva skambhanir.
adityai trayo rohitaitāḥ # TS.5.6.18.1; KSA.9.8.
adityai tvā # KS.30.5 (bis).
adityai tvā caturūdhnyai # KS.30.4 (quater); Mś.7.2.6.7 (bis). The reading of Mś. is corrupt.
adityai dvādaśī # TS.5.7.22.1. See adityā etc.
adityai pañcamī # see adityāḥ etc.
adityai pājasyam # see adityāḥ etc.
adityai bhasat # see adityā etc.
adityai bhāgo 'si # see adityā etc.
adityai mahyai svāhā # VS.22.20; TS.7.3.15.1; MS.3.12.5: 162.1; KSA.3.5; śB.13.1.8.4; TB.3.8.11.2.
adityai (MS.KSṃś. adityā) rāsnāsi # VS.1.30; 11.59; 38.1,3; TS.1.1.2.2; 4.1.5.4; MS.1.1.2: 2.2; 1.1.3: 2.7; 2.7.6: 81.3; 3.1.7: 8.19; 4.1.2: 3.14; 4.9.7: 127.5; KS.1.2; 16.5; 19.6; 31.1; śB.1.3.1.15; 6.5.2.13; 14.2.1.6,8; TB.3.2.2.7; TA.4.8.1; 5.7.1; Apś.1.4.10,12; 12.7; 15.9.3; 16.5.1; Mś.1.1.1.41; 1.1.3.17; --4.3.9; 6.1.2.9. P: adityai rāsnā Kś.2.7.1; 16.3.30; 26.5.3. Cf. adityā uṣṇīṣam.
adityai viṣṇupatnyai carum (KS. caruḥ) # VS.29.60; TS.7.5.14.1; MS.3.15.10: 180.14; KSA.5.10.
adityai vyundanam asi # VS.2.2; śB.1.3.3.4. P: adityai vyundanam Kś.2.7.20.
adityai ṣoḍaśākṣarāya chandase svāhā # MS.1.11.10: 173.10. Cf. under aditiḥ ṣoḍaśākṣarayā etc.
adityai sada etc. # see adityāḥ etc.
adityai sumṛḍīkāyai (VSK. sumṛlīkāyai) svāhā # VS.22.20; VSK.24.26--28; TS.7.3.15.1; MS.3.12.5: 162.2; KSA.3.5; śB.13.1.8.4; TB.3.8.11.2.
adityai svāhā # VS.22.20; TS.7.3.15.1; MS.3.12.5: 162.1; KSA.3.5; śB.13.1.8.4; TB.3.1.4.5; 6.6; 8.11.2. See aditaye svāhā.
adityai haṃsasāciḥ # TS.5.5.20.1; KSA.7.10.
aditsantaṃ cid āghṛṇe # RV.6.53.3a.
aditsantaṃ dāpayati (TSṃS. dāpayatu) prajānan # VS.9.24c; TS.1.7.10.1c; MS.1.11.4c: 165.6; KS.14.2c; śB.5.2.2.6c. See utāditsantaṃ.
aditsan vā saṃjagara janebhyaḥ # TA.2.4.1b. See under adāsyann.
adidyutat sv apāko vibhāvā # RV.6.11.4a; MS.4.14.15a: 241.4. See acikradat svapā etc.
adediṣṭa vṛtrahā gopatir gāḥ # RV.3.31.21a.
adhodigadhipataye 'nantāya namaḥ # Mś.11.7.1.7.
anādinidhanāya ca # MU.5.1d.
anādiṣṭam anyakṛtaṃ yad enaḥ # AVP.2.30.5c. See under anājñātaṃ devakṛtaṃ.
anunmadito agado yathāsat # AVP.5.17.6d. Cf. yadānunmadito.
antarāditye manasā carantam # TA.3.11.6b.
abhibhūḥsauryadivyānāṃ sarpāṇām adhipataye svāhā (also adhipate 'vanenikṣva, adhipata eṣa te baliḥ, and adhipate pralikhasva) # PG.2.14.9,12,14,16.
arbudir nāma yo devaḥ # AVś.11.9.4a.
arbudiś ca triṣandhiś ca # AVś.11.9.23a.
avāntaradiśāḥ paśavaḥ # KSA.5.5.
avāntaradiśābhyaḥ svāhā # TS.7.1.15.1; KSA.1.6.
avāntaradiśāḥ śāntiḥ # TA.4.42.5.
aśrīṇītādiśaṃ gabhastau # RV.10.61.3d; VS.7.17d; śB.4.2.1.12d; Apś.12.14.15d.
asaṃdito vi sṛja viṣvag ulkāḥ # RV.4.4.2d; VS.13.10d; TS.1.2.14.1d; MS.2.7.15d: 97.10; KS.16.15d.
asādi vṛto vahnir ājaganvān # RV.7.7.5a.
āgneyadigadhipataye 'gnaye namaḥ # Mś.11.7.1.7.
āchadi tvā chando dadhe # MS.1.6.1a: 86.9; 1.6.2a: 87.5. P: āchadi tvā Mś.1.5.3.14.
ātodinau nitodanau # AVś.7.95.3a.
ādardirāso adrayo na viśvahā # RV.10.78.6b.
ādardiro bhuvanā dardarīmi # RV.8.100.4d.
āditya ūrdhva uccaran # AVP.8.20.1c.
āditya eṣām astraṃ vi nāśayatu # AVś.11.10.16e.
ādityaḥ parvatebhyaḥ # RV.1.191.9c; AVś.6.52.1c.
ādityaḥ paśur āsīt tenāyajanta (KSA. -yajata) sa etaṃ lokam ajayad yasminn ādityaḥ sa te lokas taṃ jeṣyasi yady avajighrasi (KSA. jeṣyasy athāvajighra) # TS.5.7.26.1; KSA.5.4. See sūryaḥ paśur etc.
ādityaḥ pratipaśyati # Mś.11.1.5d.
ādityaṃ viṣṇuṃ sūryam # AVś.3.20.4c; AVP.3.34.6c; SV.1.91c; VSK.10.5.5c; KS.14.2c. See ādityān etc.
ādityaṃ śarma marutām aśīmahi # RV.10.36.4c.
āditya kuṇapaṃ bahu # AVś.11.10.4b.
ādityagrahasāvitrau # Aś.5.5.21c; Vait.20.4c.
ādityaṃ garbhaṃ payasā sam aṅgdhi (VS. aṅdhi; TS.KS. -añjan) # VS.13.41a; TS.4.2.10.1a; MS.2.7.17a: 101.17; KS.16.17a; śB.7.5.2.17. P: ādityaṃ garbham Kś.17.5.17; Mś.6.1.7.27; Apś.16.27.7; BṛhPDh.9.5.8; PG.1.13 (crit. notes; see Speijer, Jātakarma, p. 18).
āditya cakṣur ā datsva # AVś.5.21.10a.
ādityajūta edhate # RV.8.46.5b.
ādityaṃ jyotiṣāṃ jyotir uttamam # TB.3.7.4.3c; Apś.4.1.8c.
ādityadevato 'śvatthaḥ # GG.4.7.24a.
āditya nāvam ārukṣaḥ (SMB. ārokṣam) # AVś.17.1.25a; SMB.2.5.14a. P: āditya nāvam GG.4.6.12; KhG.4.1.25. See imāṃ su nāvam, imāṃ nāvam, sunāvam ā ruheyam, and sūrya nāvam.
ādityaṃ tarpayāmi # BDh.2.5.9.9.
āditya prāyaścitte tvaṃ devānāṃ prāyaścittir asi # ApMB.1.10.5 (ApG.3.8.10); HG.1.24.1. P: āditya prāyaścitte HG.1.24.1 (bis). See sūrya prāyaścitte.
ādityam eva te parivadanti sarve # AVś.10.8.17c; TA.2.15.1c.
ādityarathavegena # RVKh.1.191.2a.
ādityavadgaṇasya soma deva te matividas tṛtīyasya savanasya jagatīchandasa indrapītasya narāśaṃsapītasya pitṛpītasya madhumata upahūtasyopahūto bhakṣayāmi (Mś. savanasya jagacchandaso 'gnihuta indrapītasya) # TS.3.2.5.3; Mś.2.5.1.33. P: ādityavadgaṇasya (followed by fragments ... narāśaṃsapītasya ... indrapītasya ...) Apś.12.24.7,9. Cf. under tasya ta.
ādityavarṇaṃ tamasaḥ parastāt (TA.3.12.7b, tamasas tu pāre) # VS.31.18b; TA.3.12.7b; 13.1b; śvetU.3.8b; Bhagavadgītā 8.9.
ādityavarṇe tapaso 'dhi jātaḥ # RVKh.5.87.6a. P: ādityavarṇe Rvidh.2.19.3.
āditya vratapate vrataṃ cariṣyāmi (vrataṃ cariṣyāmi is implied in all texts but JG.) # TB.3.7.4.7; TA.4.41.4; Apś.4.3.2; HG.1.7.8; JG.1.12. See sūrya vratapate vrataṃ cariṣyāmi.
āditya vratapate vratam acāriṣam # TA.4.41.6. See āditya vratapate vratam acāriṣam.
ādityaś cakṣuṣe # Svidh.3.8.2.
ādityaś caturthe # VS.39.6.
ādityaś ca divā prājapatiś ca # Kauś.73.2b.
ādityaś ca dyauś ca saṃnate te me saṃnamatām adaḥ # VS.26.1. Cf. dive sam, divy ādityāya, sūryāya sam anamat, and sūryāya sam anaman.
ādityaś ca me sāvitraś ca me # TS.4.7.7.2. Cf. ādityāś ca mā, and sāvitraś ca me.
ādityaḥ śāntiḥ # TA.4.42.5.
ādityaḥ śukra udagāt purastāt # MS.4.14.14a: 239.15; MG.1.19.3. Cf. under ādityo deva.
ādityas te vasubhir ādadhātu # HG.1.7.11d. See ādityais te.
ādityas te vājin yuṅ # TS.7.5.19.2; KSA.5.15.
ādityasya nṛcakṣasaḥ # AVś.13.2.1c.
ādityasya mā saṃkāśaḥ (sc. avatām) # Vait.11.16. ūha of nakṣatrāṇāṃ mā etc.
ādityasya vratam upakṣiyantaḥ (TB. upakṣyantaḥ) # RV.3.59.3c; MS.4.10.2c: 146.16; TB.2.8.7.5c.
ādityasyāvṛtam anvāvarte # śś.1.6.5; 4.12.10; śG.2.3.2; KBU.2.9.
ādityaḥ satyam om (TB. om iti) # TB.2.4.6.7d; Aś.5.13.14d.
ādityaḥ sarvāgniḥ pṛthivyāṃ vāyur antarikṣe sūryo divi candramā dikṣu nakṣatrāṇi svaloke # TA.1.20.1.
ādityaḥ sāmavedasya # GB.1.5.25c.
ādityaḥ supathā karat # RV.1.25.12b.
ādityā aṅgirasaḥ svargam # AVP.5.14.8c.
ādityā adbhutainasaḥ # RV.8.67.7c.
ādityā apa durmatiḥ # RV.8.67.15b.
ādityā ava hi khyata # RV.8.47.11a; śG.1.4.2.
ādityā asti mṛḍata # RV.8.18.19b.
ādityā ājyaiḥ # MS.1.9.2: 132.2; KS.9.10. Cf. ādityā dakṣiṇābhiḥ.
ādityā iṣavaḥ # AVś.3.27.1; AVP.3.24.1.
ādityā ūtibhir vayam # RV.8.67.16b.
ādityā ṛjunā pathā # RV.1.41.5b.
ādityā ekaṃ vasavo dvitīyam # AVP.1.101.2c.
ādityā (sc. etad vaḥ tṛtīyaṃ savanam etc.) # Kś.25.13.27. Cf. Kś.25.13.26.
ādityā enam aṅgirasaḥ sacantām # AVś.12.3.43d.
ādityā enām anv āyan # AVP.12.10.10c.
ādityāḥ # see ādityā (etad vaḥ etc.).
ādityāḥ kāma prayatāṃ vaṣaṭkṛtim # TB.2.8.2.2c.
ādityāḥ kāmaṃ pitumantam asme # TB.2.8.2.1d.
ādityāḥ kāma haviṣo juṣāṇāḥ # TB.2.8.2.3d.
ādityāḥ kṛtrimā śaruḥ # RV.8.67.20b.
ādityāḥ pañcadaśam # KS.14.4 (ter).
ādityāḥ pañcadaśākṣarayā pañcadaśaṃ māsam udajayan # MS.1.11.10 (bis): 172.7,21. Cf. ādityebhyaḥ pa-.
ādityāḥ pañcadaśākṣarām # MS.1.11.10: 171.18.
ādityāḥ pañcadaśākṣareṇa pañcadaśaṃ stomam udajayan (VS. udajayaṃs tam uj jeṣam) # VS.9.34; TS.1.7.11.2.
ādityāḥ paścād gopsyanti # AVś.10.9.8c.
ādityāṃś ca tarpayāmi # BDh.2.5.9.3.
ādityāṅgiraso yajuḥ # AVP.12.11.1b.
ādityā ca yaśasvinī # MG.2.13.6b.
ādityāñ chmaśrubhiḥ (VS. ādityāṃ śma-; MS. ādityāñ śma-) # VS.25.1; TS.5.7.12.1; MS.3.15.1: 177.9; KSA.13.2.
ādityāñ jinva # TS.4.4.1.2; KS.17.7; 37.17; PB.1.9.11; Vait.22.17.
ādityā dakṣiṇābhiḥ # TA.3.8.2. Cf. ādityā ājyaiḥ.
ādityā dānunas patī # RV.1.136.3e; 2.41.6b; SV.2.262b; N.2.13.
ādityā devatā # VS.14.20; TS.4.3.7.2; MS.2.8.3: 108.17; KS.17.3; Apś.13.11.1.
ādityān aditiṃ devīm # TA.1.1.3c; 21.2c.
ādityānāṃ vasūnāṃ rudriyāṇām # RV.10.48.11a.
ādityānāṃ vo devānāṃ devatābhir gṛhṇāmi # KS.39.1; Apś.16.33.1.
ādityānāṃ śarmaṇi sthā bhuraṇyasi # RV.10.35.9c.
ādityānāṃ svasāraṃ rudramātaram # VārG.11.21b.
ādityānāṃ jagatī # TA.3.9.1. See jagaty ādityānam.
ādityānāṃ tṛtīyā # VS.25.6; TS.5.7.17.1; MS.3.15.6: 179.7; KSA.13.7.
ādityānāṃ tvā devānāṃ vratapate (omitted in KS.) vratenādadhāmi (KS. -dadhe) # KS.7.13 (ter); TB.1.1.4.8; Apś.5.11.7. Cf. under aṅgirasāṃ tvā.
ādityānāṃ nibodhata # TA.1.3.4b.
ādityānām aneha it # RV.8.31.12c.
ādityānām apūrvyaṃ savīmani # RV.8.18.1c.
ādityānām ayanaṃ gārhapatyaḥ # AVś.18.4.8b.
ādityānām araṃkṛte # RV.8.67.3c.
ādityānām avasā nūtanena # RV.7.51.1a; TS.2.1.11.6a; MS.4.14.14a: 238.12; Aś.3.8.1; 5.7.13; Mś.11.7.3.2. Ps: ādityānām avasā TB.2.8.1.6; śś.8.1.4; ādityānām Lś.2.8.1. Designated as ādityadaivatam (sc. sūktam) Rvidh.2.26.3.
ādityānām ahve cāru nāma # RV.3.56.4b.
ādityānām ādityānāṃ sthāne svatejasā bhāni # TA.1.15.1.
ādityānām utāvasi # RV.8.47.5d.
ādityānāṃ patvānv (PB. patmānv) ihi (KSA. ehi) # VS.22.19; TS.7.1.12.1; MS.3.12.4: 161.11; KSA.1.3; PB.1.7.2; śB.13.1.6.2; TB.3.8.9.3; Mś.9.2.1.30; ApMB.2.21.30 (ApG.8.22.16).
ādityānāṃ prasitir (MS.KA. prasṛtir) hetir ugrā # MS.4.9.12c: 133.9; TB.3.7.13.4c; TA.4.20.3c; KA.1.198.13c.
ādityānāṃ bhāgo 'si # VS.14.25; TS.4.3.9.2; 5.3.4.3; MS.2.8.5: 109.15; KS.17.4; 21.1; śB.8.4.2.8.
ādityānāṃ marutāṃ śardha ugram # RV.10.103.9b; AVś.19.13.10b; AVP.7.4.10b; SV.2.1207b; VS.17.41b; TS.4.6.4.3b; MS.2.10.4b: 136.8; KS.18.5b.
ādityān kāmam avase huvema # TB.2.8.2.2a.
ādityān devān yajñenāpiprem # Apś.4.12.3.
ādityān dyāvāpṛthivī apaḥ svaḥ # RV.7.44.1d; 10.36.1d.
ādityān maruto diśaḥ # AVś.10.9.10b.
ādityān mārutaṃ gaṇam # RV.1.14.3c; 6.16.24b; VS.33.45c.
ādityān yāciṣāmahe # RV.8.67.1b; TS.2.1.11.5b; MS.4.12.1b: 177.5.
ādityān yāmy aditiṃ duvoyu # RV.6.51.4d.
ādityān viṣṇuṃ sūryam # RV.10.141.3c; VS.9.26; TS.1.7.10.3c; MS.1.11.4c: 164.13; śB.5.2.2.8c. See ādityaṃ viṣṇuṃ.
ādityān sarvān brūmaḥ # AVP.15.13.6c. See viśvān ādityān.
ādityā bhāgaṃ vaḥ kariṣyāmy amum āmuṣyāyaṇam avagamayata # MS.2.2.1: 14.8; Mś.5.1.8.4. Cf. TS.2.3.1.1.
ādityā manavaḥ smasi # RV.8.18.22b.
ādityā mā viśve avantu devāḥ # ā.5.1.1.12a.
ādityā mā svaravo vardhayantu # AVś.18.3.12b.
ādityā yajataṃ bṛhat # RV.5.67.1b.
ādityāya namaḥ # GopālU.2. Cf. ādityāya svāhā.
ādityā yan mumocati # RV.8.18.12b; 67.18b.
ādityāya vidmahe # MahānU.3.10a. See bhāskarāya, and tad bhāskarāya.
ādityāya svāhā # Kauś.99.2; 135.9. Cf. ādityāya namaḥ.
ādityāyāgniṃ gṛhṇāmi rātryā ahaḥ # Apś.6.5.6.
ādityā ye yudho viduḥ # AVP.2.25.1b.
ādityā rakṣitāraḥ # see ādityās te goptāraḥ.
ādityā rāya īśate # RV.8.47.4d.
ādityā rudrā aśvinobhā # AVś.5.3.9c. See under imaṃ yajñam aśvinobhā.
ādityā rudrā uparispṛśo naḥ (AVP. mām; KS. -spṛśaṃ mā) # AVś.5.3.10c; AVP.5.4.14c; KS.40.14c. See vasavo rudrā ādityā uparispṛśaṃ mā.
ādityā rudrā vasava undantu sacetasaḥ # AVś.6.68.1c. Cf. āpa undantu jīvase.
ādityā rudrā vasavaḥ # AVś.11.6.13a; AVP.10.3.6a; 15.14.6a; ViDh.73.12. The quotation in ViDh. represents probably the pratīka of one of the following mantras.
ādityā rudrā vasavas tvelate (AB. tveḍate; GB. tenute) # AVś.20.135.9a; AB.6.35.15a; GB.2.6.14a; JB.2.117a; śś.12.19.2a.
ādityā rudrā vasavaḥ sudānavaḥ # RV.10.66.12c.
ādityā rudrā vasavaḥ sunīthāḥ # RV.3.8.8a.
ādityā rudrā vasavo juṣanta (AVś.AVP. juṣantām) # RV.7.35.14a; AVś.19.11.4a; AVP.12.17.4a.
ādityā rudrā vasavo me sadasyāḥ # TS.7.3.13.1c; KSA.3.3c.
ādityā rudrās tan mayi # Kauś.42.17c. Cf. next.
ādityā viśve tad devāḥ # TS.1.5.3.2c; MS.1.7.1c: 108.6; KS.8.14c. Cf. prec.
ādityā viśve marutaś ca viśve # RV.7.51.3a.
ādityā viṣṇur marutaḥ svar bṛhat # RV.10.65.1c.
ādityāś ca mā indraś ca me # MS.2.11.5: 142.16. Cf. under ādityaś ca me.
ādityāś ca yemire # AVP.9.12.7b.
ādityāḥ śarma yachata # AVP.2.70.5b.
ādityāsa utāmatim # RV.8.18.11b.
ādityāsa ṛtaṃ yate # RV.1.41.4b.
ādityāsaḥ kavayaḥ paprathānāḥ # RV.3.54.10d.
ādityāsaḥ pathibhir devayānaiḥ # TB.2.8.2.1b.
ādityāsaḥ purā hathāt # RV.8.67.5b; N.6.27b.
ādityāsaḥ śucayo dhārapūtāḥ # RV.2.27.2c.
ādityāsas te akrā na vāvṛdhuḥ # RV.10.77.2d.
ādityāsaḥ sajoṣasaḥ # AVP.9.12.9b.
ādityāsaḥ sadantu naḥ # RV.8.27.6d.
ādityāsaḥ saparyata # Kauś.73.15d.
ādityāsaḥ sumahasaḥ (SV. samahasaḥ) kṛṇotana # RV.8.18.18c; SV.1.395c.
ādityāsi # VS.4.21; TS.1.2.5.1; MS.1.2.4: 13.8; KS.2.5; śB.3.3.1.2.
ādityāso atiṣkade # RV.8.67.19b.
ādityāso ati sridhaḥ # RV.10.126.5a; AVP.5.39.5a.
ādityāso aditayaḥ syāma # RV.7.52.1a; KS.11.12a. Designated as ādityadaivatam (sc. sūktam) Rvidh.2.26.3.
ādityāso aditir mādayantām # RV.7.51.2a; AB.3.29.2; Aś.5.17.3. P: ādityāso aditiḥ śś.8.1.6.
ādityāso apākṛtim # RV.8.47.2b.
ādityāso arādhvam # RV.8.47.7d.
ādityāso bhavatā mṛḍayantaḥ (VSK. mṛlayantaḥ) # RV.1.107.1b; VS.8.4b; 33.68b; VSK.8.1.3b; 32.68b; TS.1.4.22.1b; 2.1.11.4b; MS.1.3.26b: 39.7; KS.4.10b; śB.4.3.5.15b.
ādityāso mumocata # RV.8.67.14b.
ādityāso yathā viduḥ # RV.8.67.2c.
ādityāso yad īmahe ati dviṣaḥ # AVP.5.39.4d. See yad īmahe etc.
ādityāso yuyotanā no aṃhasaḥ # RV.8.18.10c; SV.1.397c.
ādityāso varuṇenānuśiṣṭāḥ # AVś.19.56.4d; AVP.3.8.4d.
ādityāso vi saṃhitam # RV.8.67.21b.
ādityāso sadantu naḥ # RV.8.27.6d. Error for ādityāsaḥ etc. (Aufrecht's edition).
ādityās tad aṅgirasaś cinvantu # TB.3.11.6.1c. See viśve devā aṅgirasaś.
ādityās tasmān no (TB. mā) yūyam # AVś.6.114.1c; TB.2.4.4.8c. See next.
ādityās tasmān (TBṭA. tasmān mā) muñcata # MS.4.14.17c: 244.5; TB.3.7.12.1c; TA.2.3.1c. See prec.
ādityās te goptāraḥ (KS. ādityā rakṣitāraḥ) # TS.4.4.5.2; KS.40.5. Cf. viśve te devā goptāraḥ.
ādityās te citim āpūrayantu # KS.40.5d; Apś.16.34.4d. See viśve te devāś citim.
ādityās te devā adhipatayaḥ # VS.15.12; TS.4.4.2.2; MS.2.8.9: 113.15; KS.17.8; śB.8.6.1.7.
ādityās tvā kṛṇvantu (KS. kurvantu) jāgatena chandasāṅgirasvat (MS. -vad ukhe) # VS.11.58; TS.4.1.5.4; MS.2.7.6: 80.17; KS.16.5; śB.6.5.2.5. P: ādityās tvā Kś.16.3.28; Mś.6.1.2.8.
ādityās tvāchṛndantu jāgatena chandasāṅgirasvat (MS. -vad ukhe) # VS.11.65; TS.4.1.6.3; MS.2.7.6: 82.4; KS.16.6; śB.6.5.4.17.
ādityās tvā jāgatena chandasā (sc. nirvapantu) # Kauś.68.2.
ādityās tvā jāgatena chandasā punantu (JB. tvā punantu jāgatena chandasā suprajāvaniṃ rāyas poṣavanim) # PB.6.6.7; JB.1.73. P: ādityās tvā Lś.1.10.17.
ādityās tvā jāgatena chandasā bhakṣayantu # AG.1.24.17. Cf. ādityās tvā varuṇa-.
ādityās tvā jāgatena chandasārohantu # ā.5.1.4.14; śś.17.16.3; Lś.3.12.8. See next.
ādityās tvā jāgatena chandasā saptadaśena stomena vairūpeṇa sāmnārohantu # AB.8.12.4. See prec.
ādityās tvā jāgatena chandasā saṃmṛjantu # PB.1.2.7. See ādityās tvā saṃmṛjantu.
ādityās tvāñjantu jāgatena chandasā # VS.23.8; TS.7.4.20.1; MS.3.12.19: 165.14; KSA.4.9; śB.13.2.6.6; TB.3.9.4.7. Ps: ādityās tvāñjantu Mś.9.2.3.23; ādityāḥ Apś.20.15.12.
ādityās tvā dhūpayantu jāgatena chandasāṅgirasvat (MS. dhūpayantv aṅgirasvat) # VS.11.60; TS.4.1.6.1; MS.2.7.6: 81.7; KS.16.5; śB.6.5.3.10.
ādityās tvā parigṛhṇantu jāgatena chandasā (KS. chandasāṅgirasvat) # TS.1.1.9.3; MS.1.1.10: 6.6; KS.1.9. Ps: ādityās tvā parigṛhṇantu jāgatena chandasā KS.25.5; ādityās tvā Mś.1.2.4.15; ādityāḥ Apś.2.2.3.
ādityās tvā paścād abhiṣiñcantu jāgatena chandasā # TB.2.7.15.5.
ādityās tvā punantu # see ādityās tvā jāgatena chandasā pu-.
ādityās tvā prabṛhantu jāgatena chandasā # TS.3.3.3.1. Cf. ādityebhyas tvā pra-.
ādityās tvā prohantu jāgatena chandasā # JB.1.78.
ādityās tvā varuṇarājāno bhakṣayantu # śś.4.21.10. Cf. ādityās tvā jāgatena chandasā bha-.
ādityās tvā viśvair devaiḥ paścāt (Mś. purastāt) pāntu # TS.5.5.9.4; Mś.6.2.4.1.
ādityās tvā (sc. saṃmṛjantu) # Mś.2.3.4.20.
ādityās tvā saṃmṛjantu jāgatena chandasā # JB.1.81. See ādityās tvā jāgatena chandasā saṃmṛjantu.
ādityās tvāstṛṇan # MS.1.4.3: 51.1.
ādityās tvā harantu jāgatena chandasā # MS.1.2.8: 17.14.
ādityās tvocchrayantu # KS.35.7.
ādityāḥ sarve tvā neṣan # AVP.1.50.2c.
ādityā ha jaritar aṅgirobhyo dakṣiṇām (JB.śś. 'śvaṃ dakṣiṇām) anayan # AVś.20.135.6; AB.6.35.5; GB.2.6.14 (bis); JB.2.116ab; Aś.8.3.25; śś.12.19.1. P: ādityā ha jaritaḥ Vait.32.28. Seems to be pādas a, b, of a stanza. AVś.20.135.6--10 are designated as devanītham AB.6.34.1 ff.; as ādityāṅgirasyaḥ (sc. ṛcaḥ) KB.30.6; śś.12.19.5.
āditye ca nṛcakṣasi # AVś.10.3.18b.
āditye candravarṇānām # TA.1.12.1c.
ādityena nāmnā śaṃbhaviṣṭhāḥ # RV.10.77.8b.
ādityena sahīyasā # RVKh.1.50.1b.
ādityebhir aditiṃ viśvajanyām # RV.7.10.4c.
ādityebhir devebhir devatayā jāgatena tvā chandasā yunajmi # TS.7.1.18.1; KSA.1.9.
ādityebhir vasubhir aṅgirobhiḥ # RV.7.44.4d; AVś.2.12.4b; AVP.2.5.4b.
ādityebhir vasubhiḥ saṃvidānaḥ # AVP.5.37.6b.
ādityebhiś ca rājabhiḥ # RV.1.20.5c; KB.26.13.
ādityebhyaḥ # śś.8.1.3. Cf. next but one.
ādityebhyaḥ pañcadaśākṣarāya chandase svāhā # MS.1.11.10: 173.9. Cf. ādityāḥ pa-.
ādityebhyaḥ preṣya (Mś. omits preṣya) priyebhyaḥ priyadhāmabhyaḥ priyavratebhyo mahasvasarasya (Mś. mahaḥ sva-) patibhya uror antarikṣasyādhyakṣebhyaḥ (Mś. adds preṣya) # śB.4.3.5.20; Mś.2.5.1.9; Apś.13.10.1. Short form: ādityebhyaḥ preṣya Kś.10.4.13 (comm.); Apś.13.10.1. Cf. prec. but one.
ādityebhyas tvā # VS.2.16; 8.1--4; TS.1.1.13.1; 4.22.1; 4.4.1.2; 6.2; MS.1.3.26 (bis): 39.3,6; 2.8.13: 117.6; KS.4.10 (ter); 17.7; 22.5; 37.17; PB.1.9.11; śB.1.8.3.8; 4.3.5.6,10,12,15; TB.3.3.9.2; Vait.22.17; Kś.9.9.20; Apś.3.5.7.
ādityebhyas tvā pravṛhāmi jāgatena chandasā # MS.1.3.36: 42.11. Cf. ādityās tvā pra-.
ādityebhyaḥ svāhā # VS.22.28; MS.1.7.1: 110.6; 1.7.5: 114.9; 3.12.7: 162.17; KS.8.14; 9.3.
ādityebhyo aṅgirobhyo madhv idam # AVś.12.3.44a. P: ādityebhyo aṅgirobhyaḥ Kauś.62.18.
ādityebhyo namaḥ # KSA.11.3.
ādityebhyo 'nubrūhi (Mś. ādityebhyaḥ) priyebhyaḥ priyadhāmabhyaḥ priyavratebhyo mahasvasarasya (Mś. mahaḥ sva-) patibhya uror antarikṣasyādhyakṣebhyaḥ (Mś. -bhyo 'nubrūhi) # Kś.10.4.12,13; Apś.13.10.1; Mś.2.5.1.8. Short form: ādityebhyo 'nubrūhi śB.4.3.5.20; Apś.13.10.1.
ādityebhyo nyaṅkūn # VS.24.27; MS.3.14.9: 174.3.
ādityeṣu pra varuṇe dhṛtavrate # RV.8.27.3c.
ādityeṣu marutsu yā # AVP.2.18.5b.
ādityaitaṃ te brahmacāriṇaṃ pari dadāmi # śG.2.3.1. Cf. sūryaiṣa.
ādityair aktaṃ vasubhiḥ sajoṣāḥ # VS.20.39d; MS.3.11.1d: 140.3; KS.38.6d; TB.2.6.8.2d.
ādityair indraḥ sagaṇo marudbhiḥ # RV.10.157.3a; AVś.20.63.2a; 124.5a; SV.2.462a; VS.25.46a; JB.3.171; TA.1.27.1a; Apś.21.22.1a.
ādityair indraḥ saha cīkḷpāti (SV.JBṭA.Apśṃś. sīṣadhātu; VS. sīṣadhāti) # RV.10.157.2b; AVś.20.63.1d; 124.4d; SV.2.461b; VS.25.46b; JB.3.171; TA.1.27.1b; Mś.7.2.6.6d; Apś.21.22.1d.
ādityai rudrair vasubhir na ā gahi # RV.10.150.1c.
ādityai rudrair vasubhiḥ sacābhuvā # RV.2.31.1b; 8.35.1b. Fragment: vasubhiḥ sacābhuvā N.5.5.
ādityair eka udyataḥ # AVś.8.8.12d.
ādityair no aditiḥ śarma yaṃsat # RV.1.107.2d; 4.54.6d.
ādityair no aditiḥ śarma yachatu # RV.10.66.3b. See ādityais te etc.
ādityair no aditiḥ śṛṇotu # RV.3.54.20c.
ādityair no bṛhaspatiḥ # Kauś.128.4a.
ādityair no bhāratī vaṣṭu yajñam # VS.29.8a; TS.5.1.11.3a; MS.3.16.2a: 184.12; KSA.6.2a.
ādityair no varuṇaḥ śarma yaṃsat (TS. varuṇaḥ saṃśiśātu) # TS.2.1.11.2d; MS.4.12.2d: 180.2; KS.10.12d; Aś.2.11.12d; śś.3.6.2d.
ādityair yātam aśvinā # RV.8.35.13d--15d.
ādityair vā yad vasubhir marutvān # RV.10.98.1c.
ādityais te aditiḥ śarma yachatu # AVP.15.5.4d. See ādityair no etc.
ādityais te vasubhir ā dadhātu # ApMB.2.4.4d. See ādityas te etc.
ādityo jāyatām # AB.8.28.13.
ādityo dīkṣito dyaur dīkṣā sā mā dīkṣā dīkṣayatu (JB. dīkṣeta) tayā dīkṣayā dīkṣe # JB.2.65; Apś.10.10.6. See yayādityo dīkṣayā dīkṣitas, and yayā dīkṣayādityo.
ādityo deva udagāt purastāt # MS.4.14.14a: 239.7. See aja ekapād udagāt, and cf. ādityaḥ śukra.
ādityo dyām adhyarukṣad vipaścit # Vait.14.1d.
ādityo 'dhvaryuḥ sa me 'dhvaryuḥ # Apś.10.3.1; Mś.2.1.1.4. See ādityo me 'dhvaryuḥ, and cf. ādityo me daiva.
ādityo navahotā sa tejasvī # TA.3.7.4.
ādityo 'nukhyātā # TS.3.3.8.5; TB.3.7.5.4; Apś.4.9.6; ApDh.2.3.6.2. See under asāv ādityo 'nukhyātā.
ādityo me daiva udgātā tvaṃ mānuṣaḥ # śś.5.1.5. Cf. under ādityo 'dhvaryuḥ.
ādityo me 'dhvaryuḥ sa me devayajanaṃ dadātu # ṣB.2.10. Short form: ādityo me 'dhvaryuḥ ṣB.2.10; Apś.10.1.14; AG.1.23.10. See under ādityo 'dhvaryuḥ.
ādityo me 'dhvaryuḥ sa mopahvayatām # ṣB.2.5. See under ādityo 'dhvaryuḥ.
ādityo viśvā bhuvanāni sarvā # MS.4.14.14b: 239.11.
ādityo viṣṇur ākrame # AVP.9.12.7d.
ādityo 'si divi śritaḥ, candramasaḥ pratiṣṭhā, tvayīdam antaḥ, viśvaṃ yakṣaṃ viśvaṃ bhūtaṃ viśvaṃ subhūtam, viśvasya bhartā viśvasya janayitā # TB.3.11.1.11.
ādityo 'si vṛṣṇo aśvasya retaḥ # KS.37.13,14.
ādinavaṃ pratidīvne # AVś.7.109.4a; AVP.1.72.4a; 4.9.7a.
ādiśo no 'horātre kṛṇutam # PG.3.3.6d.
ādediśānaḥ śaryaheva śurudhaḥ # RV.9.70.5d.
ānandinīṃ pramodinīm # AVś.4.38.4c. Cf. ānandāya pra-.
ānandinīr oṣadhayo bhavantu # AVś.4.15.16d; AVP.5.7.14d.
ānandino modamānāḥ suvīrāḥ # Kauś.40.13c; 70.1c.
āvittāditir uruśarmā # VS.10.9; śB.5.3.5.37. See next, and āvinnā devy.
āskandike viskandike # AVP.15.18.7a.
īśānadigadhipataya īśānāya namaḥ # Mś.11.7.1.7. Cf. īśānāya namaḥ.
utādityā jāgṛta yūyam asmin # AVś.1.30.1b; AVP.1.14.1b.
utādityā divyā pārthivasya # RV.5.69.4b.
utāditsantaṃ dāpayatu (AVP. -yati) prajānan # AVś.3.20.8c; AVP.3.34.9c. See aditsantaṃ dāpayati.
utodi (AVP. utodite; AVś. utoditau) maghavan sūryasya (AVP. sūrye) # RV.7.41.4c; AVś.3.16.4c; AVP.4.31.4c; VS.34.37c; TB.2.8.9.8c; ApMB.1.14.4c.
udagdigadhipataye kuberāya namaḥ # Mś.11.7.1.7. Cf. kuberāya.
uditaṃ saṃgate jane # AVP.9.4.8d.
uditaṃ māmakaṃ vacaḥ # AVP.1.11.4b. See under ud ayaṃ māmako.
uditaḥ śatayojanam # AVP.13.3.1a.
uditāya namaḥ # AVś.17.1.22.
uditāya svāhā # TS.7.2.20.1; KSA.2.10; TB.3.1.6.4; 8.16.4; Apś.20.12.10.
udi yo niditā veditā vasu # RV.8.103.11a.
udi sūra ā dade # RV.8.72.17b.
uditir asi # KS.39.6; Apś.16.30.1.
unmadi mauneyena # RV.10.136.3a; AVP.5.38.3a.
ūrdhvādigadhipataye brahmaṇe namaḥ # Mś.11.7.1.7.
ṛṇarogādi dāridryam # RVKh.5.87.29a.
ṛtasyartenādityāḥ # AVś.6.114.2a; TB.2.4.4.8a.
ṛtenādityā mahi vo mahitvam # RV.2.27.8c; TS.2.1.11.5c; MS.4.14.14c: 239.3; KS.11.12c.
ṛtenādityās tiṣṭhanti # RV.10.85.1c; AVś.14.1.1c; ApMB.1.6.1c.
kṛtāyādinavadarśam # VS.30.18. See prec. but one.
khādireṇa śalalena # AVP.5.9.1a.
gaurāvaskandin # JB.2.79; śB.3.3.4.18; ṣB.1.1.17; TA.1.12.3; Lś.1.3.1.
codiṣṭhena yaviṣṭhya # RV.8.102.3b.
chadir asi # Mś.7.1.3.22.
chadiś chandaḥ # VS.14.9; 15.5; TS.4.3.5.1; 12.3; MS.2.8.2: 108.5; 2.8.7: 112.3; KS.17.2,6; śB.8.2.4.5; 5.2.6.
chardir asmabhyaṃ nāsatyā # RV.7.74.5d.
chardir ādityāḥ subharaṃ nṛpāyyam # RV.10.35.12b.
chardir yachanty ajasram # MS.1.5.4b: 70.11; Apś.6.17.10b. See jyotir etc.
chardir yacha maghavadbhyaś ca mahyaṃ ca # RV.6.46.9c; AVś.20.83.1c; SV.1.266c; KS.9.19c.
chardir yacha vītahavyāya saprathaḥ # RV.6.15.3d.
chardir yad vāṃ varūthyaṃ sudānū # RV.6.67.2d.
chardir yantam adābhyam # RV.8.5.12c; 85.5a.
chardir yena dāśuṣe yachati tmanā # RV.4.53.1c.
chardir yema vi dāśuṣe # RV.8.27.20b.
chardir vatsāya yachatam # RV.8.9.15d; AVś.20.141.5d.
chardis tokāya tanayāya yacha # TB.1.1.7.1; 8.4; Apś.5.12.1. Cf. yachā tokāya and śarma tokāya.
tatrādadiṣṭa pauṃsyam # SV.1.131c. See atrādediṣṭa.
tasyādityasya prasavaṃ manāmahe # MS.4.14.14c (bis): 239.10,14.
turīyāditya (VSK. turyā-) savanaṃ (RV. havanaṃ) ta indriyam # RV.8.52 (Vāl.4).7c; VS.8.3c; VSK.8.1.2c; TS.1.4.22.1c; MS.1.3.26c: 39.5; KS.4.10c; śB.4.3.5.12.
turyāditya etc. # see turīyāditya.
tṛdi atṛdilāso adrayaḥ # RV.10.94.11a.
tenādityā adhi vocatā naḥ # RV.2.27.6c.
dakṣiṇādigadhipataye yamāya namaḥ # Mś.11.7.1.7.
dadir vājeṣu puruhūta vājinam # RV.8.46.15b.
dadir hi mahyaṃ varuṇo divaḥ kaviḥ # AVś.5.13.1a. P: dadir hi Kauś.29.1; 48.9.
dadir hi vīro gṛṇate vasūni # RV.4.24.1c.
dadi ṭvam indrāpāṃsi vājān # RV.2.17.8b.
didāya # Aś.2.4.19. See next.
didāsi # Apś.6.13.10,11. See prec.
diyuṣo vy ajaram # RV.8.23.4b.
divāṃsaṃ tvā vayam anvāgamemahi # Mś.2.5.5.28c.
divāṃsam apūrvyam # RV.3.13.5a; AB.2.40.2; 41.4.
divāṃsam upa dyavi # RV.3.27.12b.
diviś ca mā jāgṛviś ca paścād gopāyetām # PG.3.4.16. Cf. under gopāyaṃś ca.
dihi # Aś.2.4.19; Apś.6.13.10,11.
dihy asmabhyaṃ draviṇeha bhadram # AVś.7.78.2c.
dediśatīr haviṣkṛtaḥ # RV.8.102.13b; SV.1.13b; 2.920b; KS.40.14b.
dediṣṭa indra indriyāṇi viśvā # RV.5.31.3b.
nandikeśvarāya dhīmahi # MahānU.3.3b.
nandini subhage sumaṅgali bhadraṃkari # ViDh.67.8.
nābhānediṣṭho rapati pra venan # RV.10.61.18b.
ninditāro nindyāso bhavantu # RV.5.2.6d.
ninditāśvaḥ prapathī paramajyāḥ # RV.8.1.30c.
nediṣṭhaṃ yāmy āpyam # RV.8.73.6b.
nediṣṭhe asminn ahani # RV.1.132.1d.
nediṣṭho asyā uṣaso vyuṣṭau # RV.4.1.5b; VS.21.4b; TS.2.5.12.3b; MS.4.10.4b: 153.14; 4.14.17b: 246.11; KS.34.19b; KA.1.198.30b; ApMB.1.4.15b.
nairṛtyadigadhipataye nirṛtaye namaḥ # Mś.11.7.1.7.
nodiyāya kadā cana # ChU.3.11.2b.
padi ṣitām amuñcatā yajatrāḥ # RV.4.12.6b; 10.126.8b; AVP.5.39.8b; TS.4.7.15.7b; MS.3.16.5b: 192.9; KS.2.15b; Apś.6.22.1b.
paścimadigadhipataye varuṇāya namaḥ # Mś.11.7.1.7.
praketenādityebhya ādityān jinva # VS.15.6. See prec. and next.
pradiśas tam abadhnata # AVś.10.6.19b.
pradiśo yāni vasate diśaś ca # AVś.19.20.2c; AVP.1.108.2c.
pramṛśyādinam abhyamam # AVP.6.14.3a.
prasyandi tvaca utpaṭaḥ # śB.14.6.9.31b; BṛhU.3.9.31b.
prācīdigadhipataya indrāya namaḥ # Mś.11.7.1.7.
prādityaṃ divyaṃ rukmam amukthāḥ # AVP.14.8.8d. See prati tvaṃ divyās.
priyavādiny anuvratā # AVś.3.25.4d.
bṛhaddi adhvarāṇām abhiśriyaḥ # RV.10.66.8b.
brahmāvādiṣam # VārG.8.7.
maditamo etc. # see madintamo matsara indriyo.
madintamasya dhārayā # RV.9.62.22c; SV.2.411c.
madintamānāṃ tvā patmann ādhūnomi # VS.8.48; śB.11.5.9.8.
madintamāsaḥ pari kośam āsate # RV.9.86.1d.
madintamo matsara indrapānaḥ # RV.9.96.13d; SV.1.532d.
madintamo (Mś. maditamo) matsara indriyo rasaḥ # RV.9.86.10d; SV.2.381d; JB.3.135; PB.13.7.4; Apś.20.13.4d; Mś.9.2.3.7d.
madhyaṃdina uditā sūryasya # RV.5.69.3b; 76.3b; SV.2.1104b.
madhyaṃdinasya tejasā madhyam annasya prāśiṣam # Kauś.22.3.
mandim indrāya mandine # RV.1.9.2b; AVś.20.71.8b.
mandiṣṭa yad uśane kāvye sacā # RV.1.51.11a.
mātādityānāṃ duhitā vasūnām # AVś.9.1.4a; Kauś.92.14a. See mātā rudrāṇāṃ.
mādhyaṃdinaṃ savanaṃ kevalaṃ te # RV.4.35.7b.
mādhyaṃdinaṃ savanaṃ cāru yat te # RV.3.32.1b.
mādhyaṃdinasya savanasya dadhnaḥ # RV.10.179.3c; AVś.7.72.3c.
mādhyaṃdinasya savanasya dhānāḥ # RV.3.52.5a; Aś.5.4.3. P: mādhyaṃdinasya savanasya śś.7.17.1.
mādhyaṃdinasya savanasya niṣkevalyasya bhāgasya śukravato madhuścuta (Kś.10.2.3, manthīvata) indrāya somān prasthitān preṣya (Apś. śukravato manthivato madhuścuta indrāya somān; Mś. savanasya śukravato manthivato niṣkevalyasya bhāgasyendrāya somān prasthitān preṣya) # Kś.10.2.2,3; Apś.13.4.14; Mś.2.4.4.26.
mādhyaṃdinasya savanasya vṛtrahann anedya # RV.8.37.1d,2c,3c,4c,5c,6c.
mādhyaṃdinasya savanasyendrāya puroḍāśānām # Apś.13.4.8; Mś.2.4.4.22.
mādhyaṃdinaḥ saptadaśena kḷptaḥ # GB.1.5.23c.
mādhyaṃdine savana ā vṛṣasva # RV.6.47.6c; AVś.7.76.6c.
mādhyaṃdine savane jātavedaḥ # RV.3.28.4a; Aś.5.4.6. P: mādhyaṃdine savane śś.7.17.2.
mādhyaṃdine savane matsad indraḥ # RV.5.40.4d; AVś.20.12.7d.
mādhyaṃdine savane vajrahasta # RV.3.32.3c; KB.22.2.
medinas te vaibhīdakāḥ # AVP.1.72.2a.
medinīr vacaso mama # AVś.8.7.7b.
yatrādityā madhu bhakṣayanti # AVś.18.4.3d.
yatrādityā virājatha # RV.1.188.4c.
yatrādityāś ca rudrāś ca # AVś.10.7.22a.
yathādityā aṃśum (KS. yathādityam ādityā) āpyāyayanti # AVP.1.102.4a; MS.4.9.27a: 140.3; 4.12.2a: 181.7; KS.10.12a. P: yathādityāḥ Mś.5.1.10.18. See yathā devā aṃśum, yaṃ devā aṃśum, and yam ādityā aṃśum.
yathādityā vasubhiḥ saṃbabhūvuḥ # AVś.6.74.3a; TS.2.1.11.3a.
yathādityo 'kṣito 'nupadasta evaṃ mahyaṃ prapitāmahāyākṣito 'nupadasta (HG. -taḥ) svadhā bhava (HG. bhavatām) # ApMB.2.19.16; HG.2.13.1. Cf. dyaur darvir.
yathānunmadito 'sasi (AVP. -madito bhuvaḥ) # AVś.6.111.2d,4d; AVP.5.17.7d.
yadānunmadito 'sati # AVś.6.111.1d,3d. Cf. anunmadito.
yadi kartaṃ patitvā saṃśaśre # AVś.4.12.7a.
yadi karmasu kāmyeṣu # ChU.5.2.9a.
yadi kāḥ kālikād bhayam # RVKh.7.55.5b.
yadi kāmād apakāmāt # AVś.9.8.8a.
yadi kālikadūtasya # RVKh.7.55.5a.
yadi klośam anu ṣvaṇi # RV.6.46.14b.
yadi kṣitāyur yadi vā paretaḥ # RV.10.161.2a; AVś.3.11.2a; 20.96.7a; AVP.1.62.2a.
yadi gāṃ yadi pūruṣam # AVP.1.10.4b. See yady aśvaṃ etc.
yadi gādhānāṃ yadi nāvyānām # AVP.2.19.1a.
yadi ghnanty apsarasaḥ # AVP.7.11.3a.
yadi caturvṛṣo 'si sṛjāraso 'si # AVś.5.16.4. See yaś caturvṛṣo 'si.
yadi cin nu tvā dhanā jayantam # AVś.5.2.4a. P: yadi cin nu tvā Kauś.15.6. See iti cid dhi.
yadi jāgrad yadi svapan (VS.KS.śBṭB. svapne) # AVś.6.115.2a; VS.20.16a; KS.38.5a; śB.12.9.2.2; TB.2.6.6.1a. See yadi svapan.
yadi te mana udyutam # AVś.6.111.2b. Cf. yat ta etan mana.
yadi trivṛṣo 'si sṛjāraso 'si # AVś.5.16.3. See yas trivṛṣo 'si.
yadi tvam atra (Vait. tvaṃ tatra) manasā jagantha # VS.23.49b; Aś.10.9.2b; śś.16.6.1b; Vait.37.1b. See yad-yat tvam.
yadi dakṣiṇato vadāt # TA.4.32.1c.
yadi daśavṛṣo 'si sṛjāraso 'si # AVś.5.16.10. See yo daśavṛṣo 'si.
yadi divaṃ devatā vā jagantha # AVP.6.22.12b.
yadi divā yadi naktam # VS.20.15a; MS.3.11.10a: 157.5; KS.38.5a; śB.12.9.2.2; TB.2.4.4.9a; 6.6.1a.
yadi devapariṣṭhitā # AVP.11.1.1c.
yadi devā daivyenedṛg āra # AVś.4.27.6b; AVP.4.35.6b.
yadi dvivṛṣo 'si sṛjāraso 'si # AVś.5.16.2. See yo dvivṛṣo 'si.
yadi dhanvani nṛpatiḥ sakhā naḥ # AVP.2.19.2b.
yadi navavṛṣo 'si sṛjāraso 'si # AVś.5.16.9. See yadi navavṛṣo 'si.
yadi no gāṃ haṃsi # AVś.1.16.4a. Cf. yadi haṃsy.
yadi pañcavṛṣo 'si sṛjāraso 'si # AVś.5.16.5. See yaḥ pañcavṛṣo 'si.
yadi pavitre adhi mṛjyate hariḥ # see yadī etc.
yadi pṛthivīṃ yady antarikṣam # AVP.6.22.12a.
yadi pravṛddha satpate # RV.8.12.8a.
yadi preyur devapurāḥ # AVś.5.8.6a; 11.10.17a; AVP.7.18.8a.
yadi mām atimanyādhvai # ApMB.2.22.10a (ApG.8.23.7). See yad iti.
yadi mṛtyor antikaṃ nīta eva # RV.10.161.2b; AVś.3.11.2b; 20.96.7b; AVP.1.62.2b.
yadi me rāraṇaḥ sute # RV.8.32.6a.
yadi me śṛṇavad dhavam # RV.8.61.10b.
yadi me sakhyam āvaraḥ # RV.8.13.21a.
yadi yajño yajñapateḥ svargaḥ # AVP.2.57.1c.
yadi yatsu yadi dhṛtyām # AVP.2.19.3a.
yadi yāmunam ucyase # AVś.4.9.10b; AVP.8.3.10b.
yadi yuddhaṃ yady ṛtitaṃ vo asti # AVP.10.4.4a.
yadi vajro visṛṣṭas tvāra kāṭāt # AVP.4.15.6a.
yadi varuṇasyāsi rājño varuṇāt tvā rājño 'dhikrīṇāmi # Kauś.33.7. See yadi vāruṇy, and yady asi vāruṇī.
yadi vā idam ājahruḥ # AVP.2.64.5a.
yadi vā gha kṣetriyāt # AVP.2.4.2a. See yadi stha kṣetriyāṇām.
yadi vā dadhe yadi vā na # RV.10.129.7b; MS.4.12.1b: 179.1; TB.2.8.9.6b.
yadi vā nadyas tiraḥ # AVś.7.38.5b; AVP.2.79.5b; 3.29.6b.
yadi vā puruṣeṣitāḥ (AVP.9.3.8a, -tāt) # AVś.2.14.5b; AVP.2.4.2b; 9.3.8a.
yadi vā puruṣaiḥ kṛtā # AVś.5.14.7b. Cf. yā vā manuṣyajā.
yadi vāyus tatapa pūruṣasya # RV.7.104.15b; AVś.8.4.15b.
yadi vā rājño varuṇasyāsi putraḥ # AVś.1.25.3b. Cf. rudrasya prāṇo yadi.
yadi vāruṇy asi varuṇāt tvā niṣkrīṇāmi # ApG.3.9.5. See next, and under yadi varuṇasyāsi.
yadi vāruṇy asi varuṇāya tvā parikrīṇāmy ahaṃ tataḥ, vasubhyo 'thavā rudrebhya ādityebhyo 'thavā punaḥ # Rvidh.4.11.4. Metrical. See under prec.
yadi vāśmā prahṛto jaghāna # AVś.4.12.7b.
yadi vāsi tirojanam (AVP.2.79.5a, tiro janam) # AVś.7.38.5a; AVP.2.79.5a; 3.29.6a.
yadi vāsi traikakudam # AVś.4.9.10a; AVP.8.3.10a.
yadi vāsi devakṛtā # AVś.5.14.7a. Cf. yā kṛtye devakṛtā.
yadi vāsi nyarbudam # AVś.13.4.45b.
yadi vāsi rataḥ puruṣantikāme # AVP.4.14.2b.
yadi vāsi saktaḥ puruṣasya māṃse # AVP.4.14.6b.
yadi vāham anṛtadeva āsa (AVś. -devo asmi) # RV.7.104.14a; AVś.8.4.14a. Cf. BṛhD.6.30.
yadi vīro anu ṣyāt # SV.1.82a.
yadi vṛkṣād abhyapaptat (HG. vṛkṣāgrād abhyapatat) phalam (AVś. phalaṃ tat) # AVś.6.124.2a; HG.1.16.7c. See next.
yadi vṛkṣād yady antarikṣāt # ApMB.2.22.11a (ApG.8.23.8). See prec.
yadi vṛkṣeṣu yadi volapeṣu # AVś.7.66.1b.
yadi vetthāsato gṛhān # TA.1.8.5d.
yadi śīrṇaṃ yadi dyuttam # AVP.4.15.5a. See yat te riṣṭaṃ.
yadi śoko yadi vābhiśokaḥ (AVP. yady abhīśokaḥ) # AVś.1.25.3a; AVP.1.32.2a.
yadi śrāto (AVś. śrātaṃ) juhotana # RV.10.179.1c; AVś.7.72.1c; Apś.13.3.4; Mś.4.5.4.
yadi ṣaḍvṛṣo 'si sṛjāraso 'si # AVś.5.16.6. See yaḥ ṣaḍvṛṣo 'si.
yadi saptavṛṣo 'si sṛjāraso 'si # AVś.5.16.7. See yaḥ saptavṛṣo 'si.
yadi samityāṃ nṛpatiḥ sakhā naḥ # AVP.2.19.3b.
yadi sūrya udite yadi vā manuṣyavat # AVP.2.23.2c.
yadi somasyāsi rājñaḥ somāt tvā rājño 'dhikrīṇāmi # Kauś.33.7. See next, and yady asi saumī.
yadi saumy asi somāt tvā niṣkrīṇāmi (Rvidh. somāya tvā parikrīṇāmy oṣadhim) # ApG.3.9.5; Rvidh.4.11.4. See under prec.
yadi stutaṃ yadi vādya suṣṭutam # Lś.2.1.6a.
yadi stutasya maruto adhītha # RV.7.56.15a.
yadi stotāraḥ śataṃ yat sahasram # RV.6.34.3c.
yadi stotur maghavā śṛṇavad dhavam # RV.8.33.9c; AVś.20.53.3c; 57.13c; SV.2.1048c.
yadi stomaṃ mama śravat # RV.8.1.15a.
yadi strī yadi vā pumān # AVś.5.14.6a; AVP.7.1.12a.
yadi stha kṣetriyāṇām # AVś.2.14.5a. See yadi vā gha kṣetriyāt.
yadi stha tamasāvṛtāḥ # AVś.10.1.30a.
yadi stha dasyubhyo jātāḥ # AVś.2.14.5c; AVP.2.4.2c.
yadi svapan yadi jāgrat # MS.3.11.10a: 157.3. See yadi jāgrad.
yadi haṃsy aśvam # AVP.1.10.4a. Cf. yadi no gāṃ.
yadi hanat kathaṃ hanat # AVś.20.132.10. See yad īṃ hanat, and leliṃ.
yadi hutāṃ yady ahutām # AVś.12.4.53a.
yayādityo dīkṣayā dīkṣitas tayā tvā dīkṣayā dīkṣayāmi # TB.3.7.7.5; Apś.10.11.1. See under ādityo dīkṣito.
Dictionary of Sanskrit Search
"di" has 1834 results
dia technical term in the Jainendra Vyakarana for the term प्रगृह्य used by Panini.
akṣadyūtādigaṇaa class of words headed by अक्षद्यूत which take the taddhita affix. affix hak ( इक) in the sense of 'resulting from' e. g. अाक्षद्यूतिकं वैरम्, जानुप्रहृतिक्रम्, गातागार्तकम् et cetera, and others confer, compare P IV.4.19.
agnipadādigaṇaa class of words headed by the word अग्निपद to which the taddhita affix. affix अण् is added in the senses of 'given there' or 'done there' e. g. अग्निपदम्. confer, compare अण्प्रकरणे अग्निपदादिभ्य उपसंख्यानम् P. V.1.97 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 1.
aṅgulyādigaṇaclass of words headed by अङ्गुलि to which the taddhita affix. afix ठक् ( इक् ) is added in the sense of comparison ( इवार्थे ); e. g. अङ्गुलीव अाड्गुलिक: confer, compare Kāś. on P. V.3.108.
ajādigaṇaclass of words headed by अज to which the feminine.affix अा is added, sometimes inspite of the affix ई being applicable by other rules such as जातेरस्त्रीविषयात्o P. IV. 1.63 and other rules in the section. e. अजा, एडका, त्रिफला, उष्णिहा, जेष्ठा, दंष्ट्रा. cf P. IV.1.4.
ājirādigaṇaclass of words headed by the word अजिर which do not allow lengthening of the final vowel by P. VI.3.119. although they form technical terms e. g. अजिरवती, पुलिनवती et cetera, and others confer, compare Kāś on P. VI.3.119.
aṇādia term applied to all taddhita suffixes collectively as they begin with अण् confer, compare P.IV.1.83.
aṇudicchāstrathe rule prescribing cognateness (सावर्ण्य) of letters. The term refers to Pāṇini's sūtra अणुदित्सवर्णस्य चाप्रत्ययः P.I.1.69. The terms ग्रहणकशास्त्र and सवर्णशास्त्र are used in the same sense.
atyādigaṇathe group of prepositions headed by अति which are compounded with a noun in the acc. case ; confer, compare अत्यादयः क्रान्ताद्यर्थे द्वितीयया Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). om P. II. 2.18.
adādiname given to the class of roots belonging to the second conjugation, as the roots therein begin with the root अद्. The word अदिप्रभृति is also used in the same sense; confer, compare अदिप्रभृतिभ्यः शपः p.II. 4.72: confer, comparealso अदाद्यनदाद्योरनदादेरेव given by Hemacandra as a Paribhāṣā corresponding to the maxim लुग्विकरणालुग्विकरणयोरलुग्विकरणस्य Hemacandra's Śabdānuśāsana. Pari.61.
adiUṇādi affix अदि e. g, शरद्, दरद्; confer, compare शॄदॄभसोsदि; Uṇ. 127;
adiprabhṛtiSee अदादि a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page..
adhyātmādiname of a class of words headed by the word अध्यात्मन् to which the taddhita affix. affix ठञ् is added in the sense of 'तत्र भवः' id est, that is found therein, or existing therein. e. g. आध्यात्मिकम्, आधिदैविकम्, et cetera, and otherscf M.Bh. on IV.3.60.
anatidiṣṭanot resulting from any extended application or अतिदेश, confer, compare प्रकृत्याश्रयं अनतिदिष्टं भवति M.Bh. on IV. 1.151.
anādinon-initial. exempli gratia, for example अनादेश्च मुङ्वचनम् P. III.4.102, Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 4; also Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on VII.1.3.
anādiṣṭanot replaced as a substitute; e. g. यः अनादिष्टादचः पूर्यस्तस्य निधिं प्रति स्थानिवद्भावः M.Bh. on I.1.57 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 1, III.2.3 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini).2, and VI.1.12 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini).10.
anirdiṣṭārthawhose sense has not been specifically stated ; the word is used with reference to such affixes as are not prescribed in any specific sense or senses and hence as are looked upon as possessing the sense which the base after which they are prescribed has got: confer, compare अनिर्दिष्टार्थाः प्रत्ययाः स्वार्थे भवन्ति -affixes, to which no meaning has been assigned, convey the meaning of the bases to which they are added; confer, compare Paribhāṣenduśekhara of Nāgeśa. Pari. 113; confer, compare also Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on III.2.4, III, 2.67, III.3.19, III. 4.9, VI.1.162.
antādivadbhāvacondition, attributed to a single substitute for the final of the preceding and initial of the succeeding word, of being looked upon either as the final of the preceding word or as the initial of the succeeding word but never as both (the final as well as the initial) at one and the same time; confer, compare उभयत आश्रये नान्तादिवत् Sīr. Pari 39 also Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.2.48.
abhayanandina reputed jain Grammarian of the eighth century who wrote an extensive gloss on the जैनेन्द्रव्याकरण. The gloss is known as जैनेन्द्रव्याकरणमहावृत्ति of which वृहज्जैनेन्द्रव्याकरण appears to be another name.
arīhaṇādia group of words given in P. IV.2.80 which get the taddhita affix घुञ् ( अक ) added to them as a cāturarthika affix e. g. अारीहणकम्, द्रौघणकम् et cetera, and otherssee Kāśikā on P.IV.2.80.
ardharcādia group of words given in P.II.4.31 which are declined in both the masculine and the neuter genders; c.g. अर्धर्चः,अर्धर्चमू, यूथः, यूथम्; गृहः गृहम्, et cetera, and others; cf अर्धर्चाः पुंसिं च P.II.4.31.
arśaādia class of words which take the taddhita affix अच्(अ) in the sense of the affix मतुप् i. e.in the sense of possession; cf अर्शति अस्य विद्यन्ते अर्शसः । उरस:। आकृतिगणश्चायम् यत्राभिन्नरूपेण शब्देन तद्वतोभिधानं तत् सर्वमिह द्रष्टव्यम् Kāś. on P. V.2.127.
aśmādia class of words headed by the word अश्मन् to which the taddhita affix र is applied in the four senses specified in P.IV.2.67 to 70; exempli gratia, for example अश्मरः, ऊषरम् , नगरम् , पामरः गह्वरम् et cetera, and others confer, compare P.IV.2.80.
aśvaghāsādicompounds like अश्वघास which cannot be strictly correct as चतुथींसमास, but can be षष्ठीसमास if the word तदर्थ in the rule चतुर्थी तदर्थार्थबलिहितसुखरक्षितैः be understood in the sense of 'meant for' a particular thing which is to be formed out of it: confer, compare विकृतिः प्रकृत्येति चेदश्वघासादीनामुपसंख्यानम् M.Bh. on II.1.36.
aśvapatyādia class of words headed by अश्वपति to which the taddhita affix अण् (अ) is added in the senses mentioned in rules before the rule तेन दीव्यति० P.IV.4.2, which are technically called the Prāgdīvyatiya senses. e g. अश्वपतम्, गाणपतम्. गार्हपतम् et cetera, and others
aśvādi(1)a class of words headed by the word अश्व to which the affix फञ्(अायन) is added in the sense of गोत्र (grandchildren et cetera, and others); exempli gratia, for exampleआश्वायनः जातायनः, औत्सायनः et cetera, and others; confer, compare P.IV.1. 110; (2) a class of words headed by the word अश्व to which the taddhita affix यत् is added in the sense of a cause of the type of a meeting or an accidental circumstance; exempli gratia, for example आश्विकम् अाश्मिकम् confer, compare P. V.1.39.
ākarṣādia class of words headed by the word आकर्ष to which the taddhita affix कन् (क) is applied in the sense of clever or expert; e. g. आकर्षकः, त्सरुकः, शकुनिकः et cetera, and others; confer, compare P. अाकर्षादिभ्यः कन् P.V.2.64.
ācitādia class of words headed by the word अाचित which do not have their final vowel accented acute by P. VI.2.146 when they are preceded by the prepositions प्र, परा et cetera, and others although they are used as proper nouns. exempli gratia, for example आचितम्,निरुक्तम्, प्रश्लिष्टम्; confer, compare Kāśikā on P. VI.2.146.
aātmanepadina root which always takes the Ātmanepada affixes. (See a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.).
ādādikabelonging to the second conjugation or class of roots which begins with the root अद्; confer, compare दैवादिकस्यैव ग्रहणं भविष्यति नादादिकस्य Pur.Pari. 67.
di(1)commencement, initial: confer, compare अपूर्वलक्षण आदिः M.Bh. on I.1.21, (2) of the kind of, similar; एवंप्रक्रारः.
ādikarmancommencement of an action; confer, compare आदिभूतः क्रियाक्षणः अदिकर्म Kāś. on आदिकर्मणि क्तः कर्तरि च । P.III.4.71.
āditpossessed of the mute indicatory letter अा signifying the nonapplication of the augment इ (इट् ) to the past-passive voice. participle. term क्त. e. g. क्ष्विण्ण from the root ञिक्ष्विदाः similarly खिन्न, भिन्न et cetera, and others confer, compare आदितश्र P.VII. 2.16.
ādivṛddhithe Vṛddhi substitute prescribed for the first vowel of a word to which a tad-affix, marked with the mute letter ञ्,ण्, or क् is added; exempli gratia, for example औपगव, दाक्षि et cetera, and others; confer, compare तद्धितेष्वचामादेः P.VII.2.117, 118.
ādiṣṭa(1)prescribed for substitution; specified for an operation : confer, compare सिद्धे तु आदिष्टस्य युड्वचनात् M.Bh. on VI.1. 155; confer, compare also Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on VI. 1.I58 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 3; Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on IV.3.28 Vār. 5; confer, compare also आदिष्टाच्चैवाचः पूर्वः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.1.57; (2) indicated or stated; अादिष्टा इमे वर्णाः.
āhitāgnyādia class of compound words headed by the word आहिताग्नि in which the past passive voice. participle. is optionally placed first. exempli gratia, for exampleआहिताग्निः अग्नयाहितः; जातपुत्रः पुत्रजातः The class आहिताम्न्यादि is stated to be आकृतिगण, confer, compare Kāś.on P.II.2.37.
iditpossessed of the mute indicatory letter इ; e. g the roots नदि, विदि and the like, in whose case the augment नुम् ( न् ) is affixed to the last vowel; cf इदितो नुम् धातोः P. VII.1.58.
indirāpatiauthor of 'परीक्षा' a commentary on the ParibhāṣenduŚekhara of Nāgeśabhaṭṭa.
iṣṭādia class of words headed by the word इष्ट to which the taddhita affix इन् ( इनि ) is added in the sense of अनेन i. e. 'by him' i. e. by the agent of the activity denoted by the past passive voice. participles इष्ट and others; confer, compare इष्टी, यज्ञे, पूर्ती श्राद्धे et cetera, and others Kāś, on P.V.2.88.
īdit(a root)possessed of long ई as a mute indicatory ending meant for prohibiting the addition of the augment इ to the past participle. terminations त and तवत् ; exempli gratia, for example लग्नः, दीप्तः et cetera, and others; confer, compare P VII.2.14.
ukthādia class of words headed by the word उक्थ to which the taddhita affix इक (ठक् ) is applied in the sense of 'one who studies and understands'; confer, compare उक्थमधीते वेद वा औक्थिकः, similarly लौकायतिकः Kāś. on P.IV.2.60.
uñchādia class of words headed by the word उञ्छ which have their final vowel accented acute (उदात्त) ; confer, compare उञ्छः म्लेच्छा, जल्पः । एते घञन्ता इति ञित्स्वरः प्राप्तः । Kāś. on P. VI.1.160.
uṇādiaffixes headed by the affix उण्, which are similar to kṛt affixes of Pāṇini, giving derivation mostly of such words as are not derived by rules of Pāṇini. No particular sense such as agent, object et cetera, and others is mentioned in connection with these affixes, but, as Pāṇini has stated in 'ताभ्यामन्यत्रोणादयः P.III. 4.75, the various Uṇādi affixes are applied to the various roots as prescribed in any Kāraka sense, except the संप्रदान and the अपादान; in other words, any one of the senses, agent, object, instrument and abode, is assigned to the Uṇādi affix as suits the meaning of the word. Although some scholars believe that the Uṇādi affixes are given by a grammarian later than Pāṇini as there are words like ताम्बूल, दीनार and others included in the list of Uṇādi words and that there are many interpolated Sūtras, still the Uṇādi collection must be looked upon as an old one which is definitely mentioned by Pāṇini in two different rules; confer, compare Pāṇini उणादयो बहुलम् P. III.3.1 and ताभ्यामन्यत्रोणादयः III.4.76. Patañjali has given a very interesting discussion about these Uṇādi affixes and stated on the strength of the Vārttika, तत्रोणादिप्रतिषेधः, that these affixes and the words given in the Uṇādi collection should not be considered as genuinely deriveditionThe derivation is not a very systematic and logically correct one and therefore for practical purposes, the words derived by the application of the affixes उण् and others should be looked upon as underived; confer, compare उणादयोSव्युत्पन्नानि प्रातिपदिकानि. Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on. P.I.1.16, III.4.77, IV.1.1, VI.1.62, VII.1.2, VII.2.8 et cetera, and others There is a counterstatement also seen in the Mahābhāṣya उणादयो व्युत्पन्नानि, representing the other view prevailing at the time; confer, compare Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on III.I.133; but not much importance seems to be attached to it. The different systems of grammar have different collections of such words which are also known by the term Uṇādi. Out of the collections belonging to Pāṇini's system, three collections are available at present, the collection into five pādas given in the printed edition of the Siddhānta Kaumudi, the collection into ten Pādas given in the printed edition of the Prakriya-Kaumudi and the collection in the Sarasvatīkaṇthābharaṇa of Bhoja forming Pādas 1, 2 and 3 of the second Adhyāya of the work.
uṇādiprātipadikaword form or crude base, ending with an affix of the uṇ class, which is looked upon as practically underived, the affixes un and others not being looked upon as standard affixes applied with regular meanings attached to them and capable of causing operations to the preceding base as prescribed by rules of grammar; confer, compare उणादयोS व्युत्पन्नानि प्रातिपदिकानि । व्युत्पन्नानीति शाकटायनरीत्या । पाणिनेस्त्वव्युत्पत्तिपक्ष एवेति शब्देन्दुशेखरे निरूपितम्. Pari. Śek. on Paribhāṣa 22.
uṇādisūtra,uṇādisūtrapāṭhathe text of the Sūtras which begins with the Sūtras prescribing the affix उण् after the roots कृ, वा, पा, जि, स्वद्, साध् and अश्; cf Uṅādi Sūtras 1.1. for the different versions of the text See उणादि. Similar Sūtras in Kātantra, Āpiśali, Sakaṭāyana and other systems of grammar are also called Uṇādi Sūtras.
uṇādisūtradaśapādīthe text of the Uṇādi Sūtras divided into ten chapters believed to have been written by शाकटायन. It is printed at the end of the Prakriyā Kaumud and separately also, and is also available in manuscripts with a few differences. Patañjali in his Bhāṣya on P.III.3.1, seems to have mentioned Sakaṭāyana as the author of the Uṇādi Sūtras although it cannot be stated definitely whether there was at that time, a version of the Sūtras in five chapters or in ten chapters or one, completely different from these, as scholars believe that there are many interpolations and changes in the versions of Uṇādi Sūtras available at present. A critical study of the various versions is extremely desirable.
uṇādisūtrapañcapādīthe text of the Uṇādi Sūtras divided into five chapters which is possessed of a scholarly commentary written by Ujjvaladatta. There is a commentary on it by Bhaṭṭoji Dīkṣita also.
uṇādisūtravṛttia gloss on the Uṇādi Sūtras in the different versions. Out of the several glosses on the Uṇādi Sūtras, the important ones are those written by Ujjvaladatta, Govardhana, Puruṣottamadeva's Paribhāṣāvṛtti.adeva, Rāmacandra Dīkṣita and Haridatta. There is also a gloss called Uṇādisūtrodghātana by Miśra. There is a gloss by Durgasiṁha's Kātantra-Sūtravṛtti. on the Kātantra version of the Uṇādi Sūtras.
utkarādia class of words headed by the word उत्कर, to which the taddhita affix छ is added in the four senses, the affix being popularly known as चातुरर्थिक; confer, compare उत्करीयम्, शफरीयम् et cetera, and others; Kāś. on P.V.2.90.
utsaṅgādia class of words headed by the word उत्सङ्ग, to which the taddhita affix इक् ( ठ ) is added in the sense of तेन हरति (takes away by means of): confer, compare हरतिर्देशान्तरप्रापणे वर्तते । उत्सङ्गेन हरति औत्सङ्गिकः । अौडुपिकः । Kāś. on P IV.4.15.
utsādia class of words headed by the word उत्स to which the taddhita affix अञ्, instead of the usual affixes अण् and others, is added in the sense of an offspring: confer, compare औत्स:, औदपानः et cetera, and others Kāś, on P.IV.1.86.
uditcharacterized by short उ as a mute indicatory vowel, by virtue of which the word कु, for instance, signifies along with क् its cognate consonants ख्, ग्, घ् and ङ् also; confer, compare अणुदित्सवर्णस्य चाप्रत्ययः P.I.I.69. Roots marked with उ as mute get the augment इ optionally added before the kṛt affix क्त्वा; e gशमित्वा and शान्त्वा from the root शम् ( शमु ) by virtue of the rule उदितो वा P.VII.2.56.
udgātrādia class of words headed by the word उद्गातृ to which the taddhita affix अञ् is added in the sense of 'nature' or 'profession'; confer, compare उद्गातुर्भावः कर्म वा औद्गात्रम् । Similarly औन्नेत्रम् Kāś. on P. V. 1.129.
upakādia class of words headed by the word उपक after which the taddhita affix, added in the sense of गोत्र ( grand-children et cetera, and others ) is optionally elided, provided the word is to be used in the plural number; confer, compare उपकलमकाः भ्रष्टककपिष्ठलाः also उपकाः, औपकायनाः; लमकाः, लामकायना ; भ्रष्टकाः भ्राष्टकयः । Kāś. on P. II.4.69.
upabdimatthe fourth out of the seven stages or places in the production of articulate speech, upāṁśu being the first stage; confer, compare सशब्दमुपद्भिमत् Tait. Pr. 23.9 explained by the commentator as: सशब्दं परश्राव्यशब्दसहितम् । यत्र प्रयुज्यमानः शब्दः परैरक्षरव्यञ्जनववेकवर्जे श्रूयते तदुपद्विमत्संज्ञं भवति ।
ubhayapadina root conjugated in both the Padas; a root to which both, the Parasmaipada and the Ātmanepada terminations are affixed; exempli gratia, for example roots वृ, भी, मुच् et cetera, and others
ūditmarked with the mute indicatory letter ऊ; confer, compare स्वरतिसूतिसूयतिधूञूदितो वा । prescribing the addition of the augment इ optionally in the case of ऊदित् roots P. VII.2.44.
ūryādia class of words headed by the words ऊरी उररी et cetera, and others ending in the taddhita affix च्वि, which are given the designation गति provided they are related to a verbal activity, and as a result, which can be compounded with kṛdanta words ending in त्वा, तुम्, et cetera, and others cf ऊरीकृत्य, ऊरीकृतम् et cetera, and others: Kāś on P, I.4.61.
ṛgayanādia class of words headed by ऋगयन to which the taddhita affix अण् (अ) is affixed in the sense of 'produced therein' ( तत्र भवः), or 'explanatory of' ( तस्य व्याख्यानः); confer, compare ऋगयने भव:, ऋगयनस्य व्याख्यानो वा अार्गयनः पादव्याख्यानः, औपनिषदः, शैक्ष: et cetera, and others Kāś. on P.IV. 3.73.
ditpossessed of the mute indicatory letter ऋ, signifying in the Grammar of Pāṇini the prevention of the shortening of the long vowel in the reduplicated syllable of the Causal Aorist form of roots which are marked with it; e. g. अशशासत् अबबाधत्, अययाचत् et cetera, and others confer, compare नाग्लोपिशास्वृदिताम् P.VII.4.2.
ṛśyādia class of words headed by the word ऋश्य to which the taddhita affix क is added in the four senses prescribed in the rules IV. 2.67-70; e. g. ऋश्यकः, न्यग्रोधकः et cetera, and others confer, compare P.IV.2.80.
lṛdit(roots)marked with the mute indicatory letter लृ, which take the substitute अ (अङ्) for च्लि, the Vikaraṇa of the aorist; e. g. अपतत्, अशकत् confer, compare पुषादिद्ताद्य्-लृदितः परस्मैपदेषु P.III.1.55.
ekadikin the same direction, given as the sense of the taddhita affix. affix तस् by Pāṇini; confer, compare तेनैकदिक् | तसिश्च । P.IV. .3. 112, 113.
ekahalādihaving a single consonant at the beginning; cf एकहलादौ पूरयितव्येSन्यतरस्याम् P.VI.3.59.
editmarked by the mute indicatory letter ए. Roots marked with indicatory ए do not allow वृद्धि for their vowel in the aorist: exempli gratia, for example अरगीत्, अलगीत्; confer, compare P.VII.2.5.
aikapadikagiven in the group of ekapadas or solitarily stated words as contrasted with anekapadas or synonymanuscript. See एकपद a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page..
aiṣukāryādia class of words headed by the word एषुकारि to which the taddhita affix भक्त is added in the sense of 'place of residence'; exempli gratia, for example एषुकारिभक्तम्, चान्द्रायणभक्तम्; confer, compare Kāś. on P.IV.2.54.
oditmarked with the indicatory letter ओ; roots marked with the mute letter ओ have the Niṣṭhā affix त or तवत् changed to न or नवत्; exempli gratia, for example लग्नः, लग्नवान् दीनः, दीनवान् et cetera, and others confer, compare ओदितश्र P VIII.2.45; confer, compare also स्वादय ओदितः इत्युक्तम् । सूनः सूनवान्; दूनः दूनवान् Si. Kau. on P. VIII.2.45.
aauṇādikaan afix mentioned in the class of affixes called उणादि in treatises of Pāṇini and other grammarians; confer, compare नमुचि । मुचेरौणादिकः केिप्रत्ययः Kāś.on P.VI.3.75; फिडफिड्डौ अौणादिकौ प्रत्ययौ M.Bh. on Māheśvarasūtras. 2. See the word उणादि a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page..
auṇādikapadārṇavaa collection of words called औणादिक; a name given to his work by पेदुभदृ of the 18th century.
auttarapadikapertaining to the ulterior member of a compound confer, compare औत्तरपदिके ह्रस्वत्व (P.VI.3.61) कृते तुक् प्राप्नोति M.Bh. on I.1.62.
karkyādia class of words headed by the word कर्की, the word प्रस्थ after which in a compound, does not have the acute accent on its first vowel. e. g. कर्कीप्रस्थः; confer, compare P.VI.2.87.
kacchādia class of words headed by कच्छ to which the taddhita affix अण् is added in the miscellaneous (शैषिक) senses, provided the word, to which the affix अण् is to be added, is the name of a country; exempli gratia, for example ऋषिकेषु जातः आर्षिकः similarly माहिषिकः, ऐक्ष्वाकः; confer, compare Kāś. on P.IV.2.133.
kaḍārādia class of words headed by the word कडार which, although adjectival,are optionally placed first in the Karmadhāraya compound, exempli gratia, for example कडारजैमिनिः जैमिनिकडारः; confer, compare Kāś. on II.2.38.
karṇādi(1)a class of words headed by कर्ण to which the taddhita affix अायन ( फिञ् ) is applied in the four senses given in P.IV.2.67-70; exempli gratia, for example कार्णायनिः वासिष्ठायनिः et cetera, and others; cf Kāś. on P.IV.2.80; (2) a class of words headed by कर्ण to which the taddhita affix जाह (जाहच्) is added in the sense of a 'root' exempli gratia, for example कर्णजाहम् ; confer, compare Kāś. on P.V.2.24.
kaṇḍvādia group of words which are headed by the word कण्डू and which are either nouns or roots or both to which the affix यक् is added to arrive at the secondary roots exempli gratia, for example कण्डूयति, कण्डूयते; हृणीयति, हृणीयते, महीयते confer, compare धातुप्रक्ररणाद्धातुः कस्य चासञ्जनादपि । आह चायमिमं दीर्घं मन्ये धातुर्विभाषितः ॥ Kāś. on P.III.1.27.
kaṇvādia class of words forming a portion of the class of words called गर्गादि, and headed by the word कण्व, to the derivatives of which, formed by the afix यञ् by the rule गर्गादिभ्यो यञ् (P.IV.1.105) the affix अण् is added in the miscellaneous senses; exempli gratia, for example काण्वाः छात्राः; similarly गौकक्षाः, शाकलाः , अगस्तयः, कुण्डिनाः etc: confer, compare P.IV.2.111 and II. 4.70.
katryādia class of words headed by the word कत्रि to which the taddhita affix. affix एयक (ढकञ्) is applied in the miscellaneous senses; exempli gratia, for example कात्रेयकः, ग्रामेयकः, कौलेयकः (from कुल्या); confer, compare P. IV.2.75.
kathādia class of words headed by कथा the word कथा to which the affix इक (ठक्) is added in the sense of 'good therein' (तत्र साधुः); exempli gratia, for example काथिकः, वैतण्डिकः, गाणिकः, अायुर्वेदिकः confer, compare P.IV.4.102.
kambojādia class of words headed by the word कम्बोज, the affix अञ् placed after which is elided, provided the words कम्बोज and others are names of countries; exempli gratia, for example कम्बोजः चोलः, केरलः, शकः, यवनः et cetera, and others confer, compare P. IV.1.175.
karmādiliterally karman and others; a term often used in the Mahābhāṣya for kārakas or words connected with a verbal activity which have the object or karmakāraka mentioned first; सुपां कर्मादयोप्यर्थाः संख्या चैव तथा तिङाम् M.Bh, on I.4.21.
karmāpadiṣṭaoperations prescribed specifically for objects i. e. prescribed in the case of objects which are described to be functioning as the subject to show facility of the verbal action: e. g. the vikaraṇa यक् or the affix च्णि; confer, compare कर्मापदिष्टाविधय: कर्मस्थभावकानां कर्मस्थक्रियाणां वा भवन्ति । कर्तृस्थभावकाश्च दीपादयः M.Bh.on I.1.44.
kalyāṇyādia class of words headed by the word कल्याणी to which the taddhita affix एय (ढक्) is added, in the sense of 'offspring' and, side by side, the ending इन् (इनड्) is substituted for the last letter of those words; e. g. काल्याणिनेयः, सौभागिनेयः confer, compare Kāś. on P.IV. 1.126.
kaskādia class of compound-words headed by कस्क in which the visarga occurring at the end of the first member is noticed as changed into स् against the usual rules e. g. कस्क:, कौतस्कुतः भ्रातुष्पुत्रः, सद्यस्कालः, धनुष्कपालम् and others; confer, compare P. VIII.3.48. As this कस्कादिगण is said to be अाकृतिगण, similar words can be said to be in the कस्कादिगण although they are not actually mentioned in the गणपाठ.
kārtakaujapādia class of words headed by the word कार्तकौजप, which are all dvandva compounds, and which have their first member retaining its own accent; e. g. कार्तकौजपौ, आवन्त्यश्मकाः et cetera, and others confer, compare Kāś. on P.VI.2.37.
kāśādia class of words headed by the word काश to which the taddhita affix इल is affixed in the four senses stated in P.IV.2.67-70 exempli gratia, for example काशिलम्, कर्दमिलम् et cetera, and others; confer, compare Kāś. on P.IV.2.80.
kāśyādia class of words headed by the words काशि, चेदि and others to which the taddhita affixes ठञ् and ञिठ are added in the miscellaneous senses; exempli gratia, for example काशिकी, काशिका; वैदिकी, वैदिका et cetera, and others; confer, compare Kāś. on P. IV. 2.116. The feminine. afix ई is applied when the affix ठञ् is added to the word काशि; confer, compare P. IV. 1.15.
kāṣṭhādia class of words headed by the word काष्ठ after which a word standing as a second member in a compound gets the grave accent for it,e. g. काष्ठाध्यापकः, परमाध्यापक et cetera, and others confer, compare P. VIII.1.67.
kiṃśulakādia class of words headed by the word किंशुलक, which get their final vowel lengthened when the word गिरि is placed after them as a second member of a compound, provided the word so formed is used as a proper noun; e. g. किंशुलकागिरिः, अञ्जनागिरिः; confer, compare Kāś. on P. VI.3.117.
kirādia class of roots headed by the root कॄ, viz. the five roots कॄ, गॄ, दृ, धृ and प्रच्छ् after which the desiderative sign, id est, that is the affix सन्, gets the augment इ (इट्); exempli gratia, for example चिकरिषति, पिप्रच्छिषति: confer, compare Kāś. on P.VII.2.75.
kiśarādi,kisarādia class of words headed by किसर meaning some kind of scent, which get the taddhita affix इक (ष्टन्) applied to them when the word so formed means 'a dealer of that thing;' exempli gratia, for example किशारिकः, किशारिकी cf; Kāś. on P. IV.4.53.
kuñjādia class of words headed by कुञ्ज to which the taddhita affix अायन (च्फञ्) is applied in the sense of गोत्र i. e. grandchildren etc e. g. कौञ्जायनाः confer, compare Kāś, on P.IV.1.9.
kuṭādia group of roots headed by the root कुट् of the VIth conjugation after which an affix which is neither ञित् nor णित् becomes ङित्,and as a result prevents the substitution of गुण or वृद्धि for the preceding vowel e. g. कुटिता, कुटितुम् । confer, compare गाङ्कुटादिभ्योञ्णिन्डित् I.2.1.
kuṭādipādaname given by Sīradeva's Paribhāṣāvṛttiand later grammarians to the second pāda of the first adhyāya of Pāṇini's Pāṇini's Aṣṭādhyāyī., as the pāda begins with the Sūtra गाङ्कुटादिभ्यो ञ्णिन्डित् P.I.2.1.
kumudādiclass of words (१) consisting of कुमुद, शर्करा, न्यग्रोध et cetera, and others to which the taddhita affix ठक् is applied in the four senses given in P.IV.2.67-70; exempli gratia, for example कुमुदिकम्,शर्करिकम् etc(2) consisting of कुमुद गोमय, रथकार etc to which the taddhita affix इक ( ठक् ) is applied in the senses referred to in (I): exempli gratia, for example कौमुदिकम् , राथकारिकम् et cetera, and others; confer, compare Kāś, on P.IV.2.80.
kumbhapadyādia class of words headed by कुम्भपदी in which the word पाद at the end of the compound is changed into पाद् and further changed into पद् before the feminine affix ई; exempli gratia, for example कुम्भपदी, शतपदी, द्रुपदी, पञ्चपदी et cetera, and others; cf Kāś. on P. V.4.138, 139.
kurvādia class of words headed by the word कुरु to which the taddhita affix य ( ण्य ) is added in the sense of अपत्य or descendant; exempli gratia, for example कौरव्यः गार्ग्यः et cetera, and others; confer, compare Kāś, on P.IV.1.51.
kulālādia class of words headed by the word कुलाल to which the taddhita affix अक ( वुञ्) is applied in the sense of 'made by', provided the word so formed is used as a proper noun; e g.कौलालकम् , वारुडकम्; confer, compare Kāś. on P.IV.3.118.
kṛśāśvādia class of words headed by the word कृशाश्वं to which the taddhita affix ईय (छण् ) is applied in the four senses given in P.IV.2. 67-70, exempli gratia, for example कार्शीश्वीयः, आरिष्टीयः confer, compare Kāś, on P.IV.2.80.
koṭarādia class of words headed by the word कोटर which get their final vowel lengthened when the word वन is placed after them as a seconditional member of a compound, provided the word so formed is used as a proper noun; exempli gratia, for example कोटरावणम्, मिश्रकावणम्. confer, compare Kāś. on P.VI.3.117.
kratvādia class of words headed by the word क्रतु, which have their first vowel accented acute in a Bahuvrīhi dompound, provided the first member of the compound is the word सु; exempli gratia, for example सुक्रतुः, सुप्रपूर्तिः et cetera, and others; confer, compare confer, compare Kāś. on P. VI.2.118.
kramādia class of words headed by the word क्रम to which the taddhita affix अक (वुञ् ) is added in the sense of 'one who studies and understands'; e. g. क्रमकः, पदकः, मीमांसकः, शिक्षकः et cetera, and others confer, compare Kāś. on IV. 2.61.
kraiyādikaa root belonging to the class of roots which are headed by क्री and which are popularly known as roots of the ninth conjugation; confer, compare यथा तु वार्तिकं तथा कैयादिकस्याप्यत्र ग्रहणमिष्यते Padamañjarī, a commentary on the Kāśikāvṛtti by Haradatta. on VII.2.48.
kroḍādia class of words headed by the word क्रोड to which the taddhita affix य ( ष्यङ् ) is added in the sense of a female descendant; exempli gratia, for example क्रौड्या, आपिशल्या, गौकक्ष्या et cetera, and others ; confer, compare Kāś. on P.IV.1.80.
krauḍyādia class of words headed by the word क्रौडि which do not take the feminine affix ई when they stand at the end of a compound; exempli gratia, for example कल्याणक्रौडा, सुभगा, पृथुजघना et cetera, and others; confer, compare Kāś. on P.IV.1.56.
krayādigaṇaa class of roots headed by the root क्री ( डुक्रीञ् ) to which the conjugational sign ना ( श्ना ) is added; roots of the ninth conjugation.
kṣubhnādia class of wordings such as क्षुभ्ना, तृप्नु and the like in which the consonant न् is not changed into ण् although the consonant न् is preceded by ऋ, ॠ, र् or ष् and intervened by letters which are admissible; e. g. क्षुभ्नाति, तृप्नोति, नृनमनः et cetera, and others cf Kāś. on P. VIII. 4.39. This class ( क्षुभ्नादिगण ) is styled as आकृतिगण.
khaṇḍikādia class of words headed by the word खण्डिका to which the affix अञ् is added in the sense of collection; e. g. खाण्डिकम्, वाडवम्, भैक्षुकम्; confer, compare Kāś. on P. IV.2.45.
gamyādia class of words headed by the word गमी which are formed by the application of unādi affixes in the sense of future time; e. g. गमी ग्रामम्, अागामी, प्रस्थायी et cetera, and others confer, compare Kāś. on P. III. 3. 3.
gargādigaṇaa class of words headed by गर्ग to which the affix यञ्, ( य ) causing Vṛddhi to the first vowel of the word, is added in the sense of a descendant barring the son or daughter; confer, compare गर्गादिभ्यो यञ् P. IV. 1.105 and the instances गार्ग्यः, वात्स्यः, वैयाघ्रपद्यः, पौलस्यः confer, compare Kāś. on P. IV. 1. 105.
gavādia class of words headed by the word गो to which the affix यत् is affixed in the senses mentioned in rules from P. V. 1, 5. to V. 1. 36; e. g. गव्यम् , हविष्यम् युग्यम् , मेध्यम् et cetera, and others; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. V.1,2.
gahādia class of words headed by the word गह to which the taddhita affix ईय (छ) is added in the Saisika or miscellaneous senses; e. g. गहीयम् , अन्तस्थीयम्; this class called 'gahiya' is looked upon as अाकृतिगण, and hence the words वैणुकीयम् वैत्रकीयम् and the like could be explained as correct; cf Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. IV. 2.138.
guḍādia class of words headed by the word गुड to which the taddhita affix इक ( ठञ् ) is added in the sense of 'good therein'; exempli gratia, for example गौडिकः इक्षुः, कौल्माषिको मुद्गः; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on p. IV. 4.103.
guṇādia class of words headed by the word गुण, which, when preceded by the word बहु in a Bahuvrihi compound, do not have their last vowel acute; e. g. बहुगुणा रज्जुः; बह्वक्षरं पदम् , et cetera, and others This class of गुणादि words is considered as आकृतिगण; confer, compare Kas, on P. VI. 2.176.
gṛṣṭyādia class of words headed by the word गृष्टि to which the taddhita affix एय (ढञ्) is affixed in the sense off 'an offspring' ( अपत्य): e g. गार्ष्टेयः, हालेयः et cetera, and others; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. IV.1.136.
gopavanādia class of eight words headed by the word गोपवन, the taddhita affix in the sense of गोत्र ( i. e. a descendant excepting a son or a daughter) such as the affix यञ् or अञू after which, is not elided in the plural number; c. g. गौपवना:, शौग्रवा: et cetera, and others; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. II. 4.67.
goṣadādia class of words to which the taddhita affix अक ( वुन् ) is added in the sense of possession provided the word so formed refers to a chapter ( अध्याय ) or a section ( अनुवाक ) c. दैवासुरः, वैमुक्तः et cetera, and others; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. V. 2.62.
gaurādia class of words to which the affix ई ( ङीष्) is added to form the feminine base; exempli gratia, for example गौरी, मत्सी, हयी, हरिणी; the class contains a large number of words exceeding 150; for details see Kasika on P.IV.1. 41; (2) a small class of eleven words, headed by the word गौर which do not have the acute accent on the last syllable in a tatpurusa compound when they are placed after the preposition उप; confer, compare P. VI.2.194.
grahādia class of roots headed by the root ग्रह् to which the affix इन् (णिनि), causing vrddhi to the preceding vowel of the root, is added in the sense of an agent: exempli gratia, for example ग्राही, उत्साही, स्थायी, मन्त्री et cetera, and others; cf Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.III. 1.134.
cāturvarṇyādiwords mentioned in the class headed by चातुर्वर्ण्य where the taddhita affix. affix ष्यञ् is applied although the words चतुर्वर्ण, चतुर्वेद and others are not गुणवचन words to which ष्यञ् is regularly applied by P. V-1-124. confer, compare ब्राह्मणादिषु चातुर्वर्ण्यादीनामुपसंख्यानम् P. V. I. 124 Vart. 1.
dia class of words headed by च which are termed निपात by Panini e gच,वा,ह, एवम् नूनम्, चेत्, माङ् et cetera, and others; confer, compare चादयोSसत्वे. P. I.4.57. For the meaning of the word असत्त्व see p.370 Vyakaranamahabhasya. Vol. VII. published by the D. E. Society, Poona.
curādia class or group of roots headed by the root चुर्, familiarly known as the tenth conjugation.
caurādikaa root belonging to the tenth conjugation of roots ( चुरादिगण ) ; confer, compare अामः इति चौरादिकस्य णिचि वृद्धौ सत्यां भवति । Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. VII. 3. 34.
jayādityaone of the famous joint authors ( जयादित्य and वामन ) of the well-known gloss ( वृत्ति ) on the Sutras of Panini, popularly called काशिकावृत्ति. As the काशिकावृत्ति is mentioned by It-sing, who has also mentioned Bhartrhari's Vakyapadiya, as a grammer treatise Written some 40 years before his visit, the time of काशिकावृत्ति is fixed as the middle of the 7th century A.D. Some scholars believe that जयादित्य was the same as जयापीड a king of Kasmira and बामन was his minister. For details, see pp. 386388 of the Vyakarana Mahabhasya Vol. VII published by the D.E. Society, Poona. See काशिका.
jumaranandina grammarian of the fourteenth century A. D. who ' revised and rewrote the.grammar संक्षिप्तसार and the commentary named रसवती on it, which were composed by क्रमदीश्वर in the thirteenth century. The work of जुमरनन्दिन् is known as जौमारव्याकरण.
juhotyādigaṇathe class of roots headed by हु after which the vikarana Sap is elided and the root is reduplicated in the four conjugational tenses; third conjugation of roots.
jauhotyādikaa root belonging to the जुहोत्यादिगण or the third conjugation. ज्ञानदीपिका name of a commentary on Amarasimha’s Amarakosa written by Sripati (Chakravartin) in the 14th century.
ḍatarāṃdia class of words headed by the word डतर which stands for डतरान्त id est, that is words ending with the affix डतर; similarly the word डतम which follows डतर stands for डतमान्त. This class डतरादि is a subdivision of the bigger class called सर्वादि. and it consists of only five words viz. डतरान्त, डतमान्त, अन्य, अन्यतर and इतरः cf P. VII.1.25 and I.1.27.
takṣaśilādia class of words headed by तक्षशिला to which the taddhita affix अ ( अञ् ) is added in the sense of 'a native place or a domicile'. The word so formed has the acute accent on its first vowel; e. g. ताक्षशिलः वात्सोद्वरणः; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. IV. 3.93.
tacchīlādithe triad of senses तच्छील्, तद्धर्म and तत्साधुकारिन् possessed by the agent of an action, in connection with which the affixes तृन् , इष्णुच् et cetera, and others are prescribed (cf P.III. 2.184 et cetera, and others) which (affixes) hence are called ताच्छीलिक; confer, compare अयं तच्छीलादिष्वर्थेषु तृन् विधीयते, Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. III. 2.146, e. g. कर्ता कटान्.
tadādividhia convention similar to the तदन्तविधि of Panini,laid down by the Varttikakara laying down that in case an operation is prescribed for something followed by a single letter, that single letter should be taken to mean a word beginning with that single letter: confer, compare यस्मिन्विधिस्तदादावल्ग्रहणे P.I.1.72 Vart. 29: Par. Sek. Pari. 33.
tanādia class of roots headed by the root तन्, which is popularly caIIed as the eighth conjugation to which the conjugational sign उ is added: exempli gratia, for example तनोतेि, करोति, कुरुते confer, compare P. II. 4.79: III. 1.79.
tanotyādia class of words which is the same as तनादि: confer, compare P. VI. 4.37. See तनादेि.
tasilādia class of taddhita affixes headed by the affix तस् ( तसिल् ) as given by Panini in his sutras from पञ्चम्यास्तसिल् P. V. 3. 7. upto संख्यायाः क्रियाभ्यावृत्तिगणने कृत्वसुच् V.3.17; confer, compare P. VI.3.35. The words ending with the affixes from तसिल् in P.V.3.7 upto पाशप् in P.V.3.47 (excluding पाशप्) become indeclinables; confer, compare Kas on P.I.1.38.
tānādikaa root of the tanadi class of roots (8th conjugation).
tārakādia class of words headed by the word तारका and containing prominently the words पुष्प, कण्टक, मुकुल, कुसुम, पल्लव, बुभुक्षा, ज्वर and many others numbering more than ninety, to which the taddhita affix इत (इतच्) is added in the sense of 'containing'. As this class, called तारकादि, is looked upon as आकृतिगण, nouns with इत added at their end, are supposed to be included in it; confer, compare P. V. 2.36.
tālādia small class of eight words to which the affix अ ( अण् ) is added in the sense of 'a product' or 'a part' exempli gratia, for example तालं धनुः, बार्हिणम्, et cetera, and others; confer, compare Kas, on P.IV.3.152.
tikakitavādia class of compound words headed by the dvandva compound तिककितव in which the taddhita affixes added to the constituent members of the compound are dropped when the dvandva compound is to be used in the plural number; तैकायनयश्च कैतवायनयश्च तिककितवाः; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. II. 4.68.
tikādia class of words headed by the words तिक, केितव, संज्ञा and others to which the taddhita affix अायनि (फिञ्) causing the substitution of vrddhi is added in the sense of 'a descendant'; exempli gratia, for example तैकायनि:, कैतवायनि:; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. IV.1.154.
tujādiroots such as the root तुज् and the like, which have their vowel of the reduplicative syllable lengthened as seen mostly in Vedic Literature: e. g. तूतुजानः, मामहानः, दाधार et cetera, and others: confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. VI.1.7.
tudādia class of roots headed by the root तुद् which take the conjugational sign अ ( श ) and which are popularly called roots of the sixth conjugation, confer, compare P. III.1.77.
tundādia very small class of words headed by the word तुन्द to which the taddhita affix इल ( इलच् ) is added in the sense of possession ( मत्वर्थ ). The affix इल is optional and the other affixes इन् , इक and मत् are also added; exempli gratia, for example तुन्दिल, तुन्दी, तुन्दिकः, तुन्दवान् ; similarly उदरिलः et cetera, and others; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.V.2.117.
tṛṇādia class of words to which the taddhita affix श is added in the four senses given in P. IV. 2.67 to 70; e. g. तृणशः, नडशः, पर्णशः et cetera, and others; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. IV. 3.80.
taudādikaa root belonging to the तुदादि class of roots ( sixth conjugation ) which take the vikarana अ ( श ) causing no guna or vrddhi substitute for the vowel of the root.
taulvalyādia class of words headed by the word तौल्वलि, the taddhita affix in the sense of युवन् ( grandchild ) placed after which is not elided by P. II. 4. 60; exempli gratia, for example तौल्वलिः पिता, तौल्वलायनः पुत्रः; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.II. 4.61.
tyadādia term used for the class of pronouns headed by त्यद् which are eight viz. त्यद्,तद्, यद्, एतद्, अदस्, इदम्, एक and द्वि; confer, compare P.I.1.74, I.2.72, III. 2. 60, VII. 2. 102.
tyadādividhia specific operation prescribed for the pronouns headed by त्यद् e. g. the substitution of अ for the final letter; confer, compare त्यदादिविधौ च प्रयोजनम्, Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I. 1. 27 Vart. 6.
traipādikaa rule or an operation prescribed by Panini in the last three quarters of his Astadhyayi. See त्रिपादी a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page..
daṇḍādia class of words headed by the word दण्ड to which the taddhita affix य, is added in the sense of 'deserving', confer, compare दण्डमर्हति दण्ड्यः Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. V. 1.66
dadhipayaādia class of compound words headed by the word दधिपयस् which are not compounded as समाहारद्वन्द्व which ends in the neuter gender and singular number; exempli gratia, for example दधिपयसी, शिववैश्रवणौ, श्रद्धातपसी et cetera, and others; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.II. 4.14.
dāmanyādia class of words headed by the word दामनि to which the taddhita affix छ is added without any change of sense: exempli gratia, for exampleदामनीयः, औलपीयः confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. V, 3.116.
dāsībhārādia class of words headed by the word दासीभार which,although they are tatpurusa compounds, retain the accents of the first member of the compound: confer, compare P. VI.2.42.
dikśabdaa word denoting a direction such as पूर्व, उत्तर and the like, used as a substantive, e. g. पूर्वो ग्रामात् , or showing the direction of another thing being its adjective, e. g. इयमस्याः पूर्वा; cf Kas, on P. II.3.29.
diksamāsathe bahuvrihi compound prescribed by the rule दिङ्नामान्यन्तराले, exempli gratia, for example पूर्वोत्तरा (north-east) or उत्तरपश्चिमा (north-west): confer, compare दिक्समासः दिगुपदिष्टः समासः, Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.I. 1.28.
didia class of words headed by the word दिक् to which the taddhita affix.affix य ( यत् ) is added in the sense of 'produced therein' ( तत्र भवः ), exempli gratia, for example दिशि भवं दिश्यम्, similarly वर्ग्यम्, गण्यः et cetera, and others; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.IV.3.54.
didia class of roots of the fourth conjugation, headed by the root दिव् ( दीव्यति ), called also दीव्यत्यादि confer, compare P. I. 2.27.
dṛḍhādia class of words headed by दृढ to which the taddhita affix. affix य ( ष्यञ् ) or इमन् ( इमनिच् ) is added in the sense of nature ( भाव ); त्व and तल् ( ता ) can, of course, be added optionally exempli gratia, for example दार्ढ्यम्, द्रढिमा दृढत्वम्, दृढता.See also लावण्य शैत्य, औष्ण्य, जाड्य, पाण्डित्य, मौर्ख्य et cetera, and others; cf Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. V. 1. 123.
devanandincalled also पूज्यपाद or पूज्यपाददेवनन्दिन् believed to have lived in the fifth century A. D. and written the treatise on grammar, of course based om Panini Sutras, which is known as जैनेन्द्र-व्याकरण or जैनेन्द्रशब्दानुशासन. The writer of this grammar is possibly mentioned as जैनेन्द्र in the usually guoted verse of Bopadeva :इन्द्रश्चन्द्रः काशकृत्स्नापिशली शाकटायनः पाणिन्यमरजैनेन्द्र जयन्त्यष्टादेिशाब्दिकाः. देवनन्दिन् was a great Jain saint and scholar who wrote many works on Jain Agamas of which सर्वार्थसिद्धि, the commentary on the तत्त्वार्थाधिगमसूत्र, is well-known.
devapathādia class of words headed by the word देवपथ, the affix कन् applied to which in the sense of a statue, or applied for the formation of a proper noun, is dropped देवपथः, हंसपथ:, शिवः, विष्णुः et cetera, and others; confer, compareKāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. V. 3.100.
devanandina Jain grammarian of the eighth century who is believed to have written a grammar work, called सिद्धान्तसारस्वत-शब्दानुशासन. It is likely that देवनन्दिन् is the same as देवानन्दि-पूज्यपाद and the grammar work is the same as जैनेन्द्रशब्दानुशासन for which see देवनन्दिन् .
daivādikaa root belonging to the fourth conjugation of roots.( दिवादिगण ); confer, compareजसु ताडेन इति चुरादौ पठ्यते तस्येदं ग्रहणं, न देवादिकस्य, Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. II 3.56.
dyutādia class of roots headed by the root द्युत् , the aorist sign च्लि after which gets ( अ ) अङ् substituted for it: exempli gratia, for example अद्युतत् , अश्वितत्; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. III.1.55. and I.3.91. द्युस् taddhita affix. affix द्युस् applied to the word उभय in the sense of a day; exempli gratia, for example उभयद्युः confer, compare P. V. 3.22 Vart. 7.
dvārādia class of words headed by the word द्वार् which get the augment ऐच् (id est, that is ऐ or औ ) placed before the letter य or व in them, instead of the substitution of vrddhi, when a taddhita affix marked with the mute letter ञ्,ण्, or क् is added to them; e. g. दौवारिकः सौवस्तिकः, शौवम्, शौवनम् et cetera, and others; cf Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P, VII .3,4.
dvidaṇḍyādia class of words, which are headed by the word द्विदण्डि and which are all bahuvrihi compounds, to which the affix इ is found added as a Samasanta affix e. gद्विदण्डिः, सपदि et cetera, and others; cf Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.1. varia lectio, another reading, 4.128.
dvyādia class of pronouns headed by the pronoun द्वि to which the taddhita affixes called विभक्ति, as prescribed by the rules of Panini in the rule पञ्चम्यास्तसिल् and the following ones, are not addedition confer, compare P. V. 3. 2.
dhūmādia class of words headed by the word धूम to which the taddhita affix.affix अक ( वुञ् ) is added in the miscellaneous(शैषिक ) senses; e. g. धौमकः खाण्डकः et cetera, and others; cf Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.IV.2.127.
naḍādi(1)a class of words headed by the word नड to which the taddhita affix.affix आयन ( फक् ) is added in the sense of गोत्र ( grandchild and further descendants); e. g, नाडायनः, चारायणः; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. IV.1. 99; (2) a class of words headed by नड to which the affix ईय (छ) is added, together with the augment क placed after the word and before the affix, in the four senses prescribed in P. IV.2. 67-70; exempli gratia, for example नडकीयम् , प्लक्षकीयम् ; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. IV. 2. 91.
nadyādia class of words headed by नदी, मही and other feminine. nouns to which the taddhita affix एय (ढक्) is added in the miscellaneous (शैषिक ) senses; exempli gratia, for example नादेयम्, माहेयम्, वाराणसेयम्, श्रावस्तेयम् et cetera, and others; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.IV.2.97.
nandikeśvaraan ancient grammarian who has written a short work in verses on grammar in general, which is named नन्दकेश्वरकारिकासूत्र. There is a scholarly commentary upon it written by उपमन्यु.
nandikeśvarakārikāa short treatise of 28 stanzas, attributed to an ancient grammarian नन्दिकेश्वर, which gives a philosophical interpretation of the fourteen sutras attributed to God Siva. The authorship of the treatise is assigned traditionally to the Divine Bull of God Siva. See नन्दिकेश्वर. The treatise is also named नन्दिकेश्वरकारिकासूत्र.
nandikeśvarakārikāvivaraṇacalled also नन्दिकेश्वरकारिकाटीका a gloss written by Nandikeśvarakārikā.kārikābhāṣya by Upamanyu.on नन्दिकेश्वरकारिका.See नान्द्वेश्वरकारिका.
nandyādiname giver to the class of roots beginning with the root नन्द्, which includes the roots वाश्, मद् , दूष्, वृध् , शुभ् and others as given in the Ganapatha.These roots have the affix ल्यु id est, that is अन added to them in the sense of agent. exempli gratia, for example नन्दनः, वाशनः, मदनः, वर्धनः, शोभनः, रमणः, दर्पणः, जनार्दनः, यवनः et cetera, and others; confer, compare P.III.1.134.
di(a root)beginning with न् in the Dhatupatha as contrasted with one beginning with ण् ( णादि ) whose ण् is, of course, changed into न् when conjugational and other forms are arrived at; confer, compare सर्वे नादयो णोपदेशा नृतिनन्दिनदिनक्किनाटिनाथृनाधृनॄवर्जम् M.Bh. on VI. 1.65.
dinpossessed of नाद; sonorous, resonant, See नाद.
nirudakādia class of compound words headed by the word निरुदक which have their last vowel accented acute; e. g निरुदकम्, निरुपलम्, निर्मक्षिकम् et cetera, and others; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. VI. 2. 184.
nirdiśyamānaparibhāṣāa short form for the maxim निर्दिश्यमानस्यादेशा भवन्ति which means 'substitutes take the place of that or its part which has been actually stated or enunciated in the rule (of grammar)' Par. Sek. Pari. 12. For details see Par. Sek. Pari. 12.
nirdiṣṭaexhibited, enunciated; confer, compare तस्मिन्निति निर्दिष्टे पूर्वस्य P.I.1.66; V.Pr.I. 134.
nirdiṣṭaparibhāṣāa popular name of the Paribhasa तस्मिन्निति निर्दिष्टे पूर्वस्य । confer, compare किं चेह निर्दिष्टपरिभाषाप्रवृत्तिर्दुर्वचा । Pari. Bhaskara Pari. 97.
niṣkādia class of words headed by the word निष्क to which the affix इक ( ठक् ) is added, provided these words are not members of a compound; e. g. नैष्किकम् , पादिकम् , माषिकम् et cetera, and others; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. V.1.20.
nyaṅkvādia class of words headed by the word न्यङ्कु, which are formed by means of the substitution of a guttural consonant in the place of a consonant of any other class belonging to the root from which these words are formed; exempli gratia, for example न्यङ्कुः मद्गुः, भृगुः et cetera, and others; confer, compare Kās, on P.VII.3. 53.
pakṣādia class of words headed by the word पक्ष to which the taddhita affix अायन ( फक् ) causing vŗddhi is added in the four senses given in P. IV. 2.67-70; e. g. पाक्षायण:, अाश्मायनः et cetera, and others; confer, compare Kāś. on P. IV. 2.80.
pacādia class of roots headed by the root पच् to which the kŗt. affix अ ( अच् ) is added in the sense of 'an agent'; e. g. श्वपचः, चोरः, देवः et cetera, and others The class पचादि is described as अाकृतिगण and it is usual with commentators to make a remark पचाद्यच् when a kŗt affix अ is seen after a root without causing the vŗddhi substitute to the preceding vowel or to the penultimate vowel अ. confer, compare अज्विधिः सर्वधातुभ्यः पठ्यन्ते च पचादय: । अण्बाधनार्थमेव स्यात् सिध्यन्ति श्वपचादघ: Kāś. on P. III. 1.134.
padavāda or padavādipakṣaview that words are real and have an existence and individuality of their own. The view is advocated by the followers of both the Mīmāmsā schools and the logicians who believe that words have a real existence. Grammarians admit the view for practical purposes, while they advocate that the अखण्डवाक्यस्फोट alone is the real sense. confer, compare Vākyapadīya II.90 and the foll.
padādi(1)beginning of a word, the first letter of a word; confer, compare सात्पदाद्योः P. VIII.3.111; confer, compare also स्वरितो वानुदात्ते पदादौ P. VIII.2.6. Patañjali, for the sake of argument has only once explained पदादि as पदादादिः confer, compare M.Bh.on I. 1. 63 Vāŗt. 6; (2) a class of words headed by the word पद् which is substituted for पद in all cases except the nominative case. and the acc. singular and dual; this class, called पदादि, contains the substitutes पद् , दत्, नस् et cetera, and others respectively for पाद दन्त, नासिका et cetera, and others confer, compare Kās on P. VI. 1.63; (3) the words in the class, called पदादि, constiting of the words पद्, दत्, नस्, मस् हृत् and निश् only, which have the case affix after them accented acute; confer, compare P. VI. 1.171.
padādividhia grammatical operation specifically prescribed for the initial letter of a word.
parādiinitial or first of the next or succeeding word; confer, compare किं पुनरयं पूर्वान्त आहोस्वित्परादि: आहोस्त्रिदभक्त: M.Bh on P. I. 1.47 Vart. 3; confer, compare also Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on IV.1.87, IV.2. 91.
parādisasvaraa consonant belonging to the succeeding vowel in sylllabication; confer, compare R.Pr.I.15.
parpādia class of words headed by the word पर्प to which the taddhita affix. affix इक (ष्ठन्) is added in the sense of ’moving by' or eating along with' ( तेन चरति ); exempli gratia, for example पर्पिकः, पर्पिकी; अश्विकः, अश्विकी et cetera, and others; confer, compare Kaas. on P. IV.4.10.
parśvādia class of words headed by the word पर्शु to which the taddhita affix. affix अ ( अण् ) is added without any change of sense provided the words पर्शु and others, to which the affix अ is to be added mean fighting clans; e. g. पार्शव , आसुरः, राक्षसः, दाशार्हः et cetera, and others confer, compare Kaas. on V. 3.117.
paladyādia class of words headed by the word पलदी to which the taddhita affix. affix अण् is applied in the miscellaneous ( शैषिक) senses; e gपालदः, पारिषदः, रौमकः; पाटच्चरः et cetera, and others confer, compare Kaas, on P. IV. 2.110.
palāśādia class of words headed by the word पलाश to which the affix अ (अञ् ) is added in the sense of 'a product of' or 'a part of;' e. g. पालाशः, खादिरः, वैकङ्कतः et cetera, and others cf Kaas. on P. IV. 3.141.
pātresamitādia class of irregular compound words headed by the compound word पात्रेसमित, which are taken correct as they are. This class of words consists mostly of words forming a tatpurușa compound which cannot be explained by regular rules. The class is called आकृतिगण and hence similar irregular words are included in it: e. g. पात्रेसमिताः, गेहेशूरः कूपमण्डूकः etc confer, compare KS. on P. II.1.48.
pāmādia class of words headed by the word पामन् to which the taddhita affix. affix न is added optionally with मतुप् in the sense of ’possession', exempli gratia, for example पामनः, पामवान् ; वामनः, वामवान् et cetera, and others, confer, compare Kāś. on V.2.100.
pāraskarādigaṇaor पारस्करप्रभृति, words headed by the word पारस्कर which have got some irregularity, especially the insertion of स् between the constituent words. For details see पारस्करप्रभृतीनि च संज्ञायाम् P. VI. 1.153 and the commentary thereon.
pārṣada parṣadi bhavaṃ pārṣadamliterally the interpretation or theory discussed and settled at the assembly of the learnedition The word is used in the sense of works on Nirukti or derivation of words as also works of the type of the Prātiśākhyās; confer, compare पदप्रकृतीनि सर्वचरणानां पार्षदानि Nirukta of Yāska.I. 17 and the commentary of, दुर्गाचार्यः confer, compare also पार्षदकृतिरेषा तत्रभवतां नैव लोके नान्यस्मिन्वेदे अर्ध एकारः अर्ध ओकारो वास्ति Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I. 1. 48: see also pp. 104, 105 Vol. VII Mahābhāsya D. E. Society's edition. See पारिषद.
pāśādia class of words headed by the word पाश to which the taddhita affix य is added in the sense of collection; exempli gratia, for example पाश्या, तृण्या, वात्या etc, confer, compare Kāś. on P. IV. 2.49.
picchādia class of words headed by the word पिच्छ to which the taddhita affix इल ( इलच् ) is added optionally with मत् ( मतुप् ), in the sense of 'possessed of'; exempli gratia, for exampleपिच्छिलः पिच्छवान्, उरसिलः उरस्वान् et cetera, and others: cf Kāś. om V. 2. 100.
pīlvādia class of words headed by the word पीलु to which the taddhita affix कुण ( कुणप्) is added in the sense of 'decoction' ( पाक ). e. g. पीलुकुण:; confer, compare Kāś. on P. V.2.24.
purohitādia class of words headed by the word पुरोहित to which the taddhita affix यक् is added in the sense of 'duly' or 'nature': e.g . पौरोहित्यम् , राज्यम् , बाल्यम् , मान्द्यम् et cetera, and others; confer, compare KaS. on P. V. !. 128.
puṣādia class of roots headed by the root पुष् of the fourth conjugation whose peculiarity is the substitution of the aorist sign अ ( अङ्) for च्लि ; exempli gratia, for example अपुषत्, अशुषत्, अनुषत् et cetera, and others ofeminine. पुषादिद्युताद्यलृदितः परस्मैपदेषु P. III. 1.55.
puṣkarādia class of words headed by the word पुष्कर, to which the taddhita affix इन् ( इनि ) is added provided the word ending with the affix forms the name of a district. e. g. पुष्करिणी, पद्मिनी et cetera, and others confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. V. 2.135.
pṛthvādia class of words headed by the word पृथु to which the taddhita affix इमन् ( इमनिच् ) is added optionally with the other usual affixes अण्, त्व and तल् in the sense of 'nature'; e. g. प्रथिमा, पार्थवम् , पृथुत्वम् , पृथुता; similarly म्रदिमा, मार्दवम् मृदुत्वम्, मृदुता पटिमा पाटवम् , पटुता पटुत्वम् ; confer, compare KS. om P.V.1.122.
pṛṣodarādia group of words, with irregularity in the coalescence of the two constituent members, collected together by Panini and mentioned together with the word पृषोदर at the head; confer, compare पृषोदरादीनि यथोपदिष्टम् P.VI. 3. 109; confer, compare also येषु लोपागमवर्णविकारः शास्त्रेण न विहिताः, दृश्यन्ते च तानि, यथोपदिष्टानि साधूनि भवन्ति । पृषोदरम् , बलाहकः, जीमूतः, पिशाचः, वृसी, मयूरः,पयोपवसनानाम्, दूढ्यः et cetera, and others Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.VI. 3.109.
pailādia class of words headed by the word पैल, the taddhita affix. affix in the sense of युवन् applied to which (words) is elided; exempli gratia, for example पैलः पिता, पैलः पुत्रः ; for details see Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.II.4. 59.
pauṣkarasādian ancient grammarian who belonged to the dynasty of पुष्करसद्, whose views are quoted by the Varttikakara and the writers of the Pratisakhya works: cf चयो द्वितीयाः शारि पौष्करसादेः P. VIII. 4.48 Vart. 3; confer, compare also व्यञ्जनपरः पौष्करसादेर्न पूर्वश्च ञकारम् Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.V: confer, compare also Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.XIII. 16; XIV. 2, XVII. 6.
pragadyādia class of words headed by the word प्रगदिन् to which the taddhita affix. affix य ( ञ्य ) is added in the four senses prescribed in P. IV.2.67-70; exempli gratia, for example प्रागद्यम् , शारद्यम् कौविदार्यम् et cetera, and others; confer, compare KaS. on P.IV.2.80
prajñādia class of words headed by the word प्रज्ञ to which the taddhita affix. affix अ (अण् ) is added without any change of sense: exempli gratia, for example प्राज्ञः, वाणिजः etc:; confer, compare प्रज्ञ एय प्राज्ञः । प्राज्ञी स्त्री । यस्यास्तु प्रज्ञा विद्यते सा प्राज्ञा भवति | Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.V. 4. 38.
pratijanādia class of words headed by the word प्रतिजन to which the taddhita affix. affix ईन ( खञ् ) is added in the sense of 'good at’ ( तत्र साधुः ); confer, compare प्रतिजने साधुः प्रातिजनीनः, जने जने साधुरित्यर्थः Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. IV.4.99.
pratinirdiśyamānapredicate, as opposed to the subject; confer, compare उद्देश्यप्रतिनिर्दिश्यमानघौरेक्यमापादयत्सर्वनाम पर्यायेण तत्तैल्लिङ्गभाक् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ).Pradipa.
pratyākhyānavādinone who advocates the rejection of something, an opponent, an objector; cf प्रत्याख्यानवादी अाह-नास्त्यत्र विशेष इति Kaiy. on Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. VI.4.22 Vart. 15.
pravādinaḥscholars who explain the changes ( प्रवाद ) mentioned a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.; possibly the Padakaras or writers of the पदपाठ;cf प्रवादिनो दूणाशदूढ्यदूलभान् ... महाप्रदेशं स्वधितीव चानयेन्नुदच्च R Pr. XI. 20. Apparently प्रवादिनः ( nominative case. singular.) seems to be the word in the explanation of Uvvata.
pravṛddhādia class of compound words headed by the word प्रवृद्ध in which the second word, which is a past passive voice. part, has its last vowel accented acute; confer, compare प्रवृद्धं यानम्, प्रयुक्ताः सक्तवः, खट्वारूढः । आकृतिगणश्च प्रवृद्धादिर्द्रष्टव्यः । तेन पुनरुत्स्यूतं वासो देयमित्यादि सिद्धं भवति Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on. on P.VI.2. 147.
prāgdiśīyaname given to taddhita affix. affixes prescribed in rules from P. V, 3.1 to 25.
prātipadikaliterallyavailable in every word. The term प्रातिपादिक can be explained as प्रतिपदं गृह्णाति तत् प्रातिपदिकम् cf P.IV. 4. 39. The term प्रातिपदिक, although mentioned in the Brahmana works, is not found in the Pratisakhya works probably because those works were concerned with formed words which had been actually in use. The regular division of a word into the base ( प्रकृति ) and the affix ( प्रत्यय ) is available, first in the grammar of Panini, who has given two kinds of bases, the noun-base and the verb-base. The noun-base is named Pratipadika by him while the verb-base is named Dhatu. The definition of Pratipadika is given by him as a word which is possessed of sense, but which is neither a root nor a suffix; confer, compare अर्थवदधातुरप्रत्ययः प्रातिपदिकम् . P.I. 2.45. Although his definition includes, the krdanta words,the taddhitanta words and the compound words, still, Panini has mentioned them separately in the rule कृत्तद्धितसमासाश्च P. I. 2.45 to distinguish them as secondary noun-bases as compared with the primary noun-bases which are mentioned in the rule अर्थवदधातुरप्रत्ययः प्रातिपदिकम्, Thus,Panini implies four kinds of Pratipadikas मूलभूत, कृदन्त, तद्धितान्त and समास, The Varttikakara appears to have given nine kinds-गुणवचन, सर्वनाम, अव्यय, तद्धितान्त, कृदन्त, समास, जाति, संख्या and संज्ञा. See Varttikas 39 to 44 on P. I. 4. 1. Later on, Bhojaraja in his SringaraPrakasa has quoted the definition अर्थवदधातु given by Panini, and has given six subdivisions.: confer, compare नामाव्ययानुकरणकृत्तद्धितसमासाः प्रातिपदिकानि Sr. Prak. I. page 6. For the sense conveyed by a Pratipadika or nounbase, see प्रातिपदिकार्थ.
prātipadikakāryacorresponding to अङ्गकार्य in the case of the declinables, which the Sutrakara mentions specifically with respect to the noun-base.
prātipadikagrahaṇaexpress mention by wording of a noun-base as in दित्यदित्यादित्य , सुधातुरकङ् च et cetera, and others, and not by description as अदन्त in अत इञ् (P.IV.1.95) or in a group of words ( गण ) ; confer, compare प्रातिपदिकग्रहणे लिङ्गविशिष्टस्यापि ग्रहणम् Par. Sek. Pari. 71, which recommends the feminine form of the base for an operation, provided the base is specifically expressed and not merely describedition e. g युवतिः खलतिः युवखलतिः, चटकस्यापत्यं चाटकैरः, वह्नीनां पूरणी बहुतिथी et cetera, and others
prātipadikasvarathe general accent of the Pratipadika viz. the acute ( उदात्त ) for the last vowel as given by the Phit sutra फिषः ( प्रातिपदिकस्य ) अन्त उदात्तः; confer, compare also प्रातिपदिकस्वरस्यावकाशः । अाम्रः । Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. VI. 1.91 Vart. 7.
prātipadikārthadenoted sense of a Pratipadika or a noun-base. Standard grammarians state that the denotation of a pratipadika is five-fold viz. स्वार्थ, द्रव्य, लिङ्ग, संख्या and कारक. The word स्वार्थ refers to the causal factor of denotation or प्रवृत्तिनिमित्त which is of four kinds जाति, गुण, क्रिया and संज्ञा as noticed respectively in the words गौः, शुक्लः, चलः and डित्ः. The word द्रव्य refers to the individual object which sometimes is directly denoted as in अश्वमानय, while on some occasions it is indirectly denoted through the genus or the general notion as in ब्राह्मणः पूज्य:, लिङ्ग the gender, संख्या the number and कारक the case-relation are the denotations of the case-terminations, but sometimes as they are conveyed in the absence of a case-affix as in the words पञ्च, दश, and others, they are stated as the denoted senses of the Pratipadika, while the case-affixes are said to indicate them; confer, compare वाचिका द्योतिका वा स्युः शब्दादीनां विभक्तयः Vakyapadiya.
prādia group of words beginning with प्र, which are all prefixes or upasargas e. g, प्र, परा, अप et cetera, and others cf कुगतिप्रादयः P. II. 2. 18.
prādisamāsaa compound with प्र and others prescribed by the rule कुगतिप्रादयः P. II.2.18 and explained in detail by the Varttikas headed by the Varttika प्रादयो गताद्यर्थे प्रथमया P. II. 2. 18 Vart. 4, which comes under the general head तत्पुरुष ; the compound is also called प्रादितत्पुरुष; confer, compare कथं प्रभावो राज्ञः । प्रकृष्टो भाव इति प्रादिसमासो भविष्यति । Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. III. 3.24 cf also प्रान्तः पर्यन्तः । बहुव्रीहिरयं प्रादिसमासो वा Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. VI. 2. 180.
prāmādikafaulty, uttered or expressed with a fault; inaccurate.
priyādia class of words headed by the word प्रिया which do not allow their previous word in a bahuvrihi compound to take the masculine base by the rule स्त्रियाः पुंवत्.. P. VI. 3.84: e. g. कल्याणीप्रियः For details, see Kas, on P. VI. 3.34.
prekṣādia class of words to which the taddhita affix. affix इन् is added in the four senses given in P. IV. 2.67-70; e. g. प्रेक्षी, घ्रुवकी; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. IV . 2.80.
praiṣādithe senses प्रैष 'order to do', अतिसर्ग 'permission to do' and प्राप्तकालता 'fitness of time', as possessed by the potential passive participles; cf विधीयन्ते प्रैषादिषु लोडादयः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. III. 1.26.
plakṣādia class of words headed by the word प्लक्ष to which the taddhita affix. affix अण् is added in the sense of 'a fruit' exempli gratia, for example प्लाक्षम्,ऐङ्गुदम् confer, compareKāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.IV.3.164
pvādia class of roots headed by the root पू which get their vowel shortened in the four conjugational tenses as also before the present tense.participle. affix; exempli gratia, for example पुनाति पुनानः, लुनाति, लुनन् et cetera, and others; cf Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.VII.3.80.
phaṇādia class of seven roots headed by the root फण्, which belong to the first conjugation and which have optionally their vowel अ changed into ए and the reduplicative syllable ( अभ्यास) dropped, in the forms of the perfect tense before the affix इथ and weak affixes; e. g. फेणतु:, फेणु:, फेणिथ फफणतुः, पफणुः, पफणिथ et cetera, and others confer, compare P.VI.4.:125.
balādi(1)a class of words headed by the word बल, to which the taddhita affix. affix य is added in the four senses given by Panini in IV.2.67-70. e. g. बल्यः कुल्यम्, तुल्यम् , वन्यम् et cetera, and others cf Kas, on P.IV.2.80; (2) a class of words headed by बल which take the possessive taddhita affix. affix मत् optionally with the regular affix इन् ; e. g. बलवान् , बली; cf Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. V. 2.136.
bahvādia class of words headed by बहु to which the feminine. affix ई ( ङीप् ) is added to form the feminine base; the words ending in अ in this class take the feminine. affix अा ( टाप् ) in case ई which is optional, is not added; other words remain as they are, if ई, is not added; e. g. बह्वी, बहुः; पद्धतिः, पद्धती; गतिः, _ गती; चण्डी, चण्डा; et cetera, and others confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. IV. 1.45.
bāhvādia class of words headed by the word बाहु to which the taddhita affix. affix इ ( इञ् ) is added in the sense of a descendant; e. g. बाहविः, पौष्करसादि:, पाञ्चिः et cetera, and others The class called बाह्वादि is looked upon as अाकृतिगण on the strength of the word च in the rule, so that similar words, not included in the class, could be explained; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.IV.1.96.
bidādia class of words headed by the word बिद to which the affix अ (अञ्) is added in the sense of a grandchild and further descendants; exempli gratia, for example बैदः, और्वः, काश्यप:, कौशिकः et cetera, and others The words in this class are mostly names of sages. In the case of such words as are not names of sages, the affix अ is added in the sense of the offspring and not any descendant. exempli gratia, for example पौत्रः, दौहित्रः et cetera, and others; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.IV.1.104.
bilvakādia class of words headed by the word बिल्वक the affix ईय ( छ ) placed after which is elided when another taddhita affix. affix such as अण् or the like is placed after them; confer, compare बिल्वा यस्यां सन्ति बिल्वकी तस्यां भवा: बैल्वकाः Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.VI.4.153.
bilvādia class of words headed by the word बिल्व, to which the taddhita affix. affix अ (अण् ) is added sense of 'a product' or 'a part'; exempli gratia, for example बैल्व: मौद्गः, वैणव: et cetera, and others; cf Kas on P. IV. 3.136.
brāhmaṇādia class of words headed by the word ब्राह्मण to which the taddhita affix. affix य ( ष्यञ् ) is added in the sense of 'nature' or 'duty'; e. g. ब्राह्मण्यं ( ब्राह्मणस्य भावः कर्म बां ); cf ब्राह्मणादिराकृतिगणः अादिशव्दः प्रकारवचन: Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. V.1.24.
bhargādia class of words headed by भर्ग which are generally names of countries, the taddhita affixes अण् and others added to which are not elided; e. g. भार्गीं, कैकेयी, काश्मीरी; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on IV. 1.178.
bhastrādia class of words headed by the word भस्त्रा to which the taddhita affix. affix इक ( ष्ठन् ) is added in the sense of 'carrying by' ; e. g. भस्त्रिक, भस्त्रिकी confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.IV.4.16.
bhikṣādia class of words headed by the word भिक्षा to which the tad, affix अ ( अण् ) is added in the sense of collection;exempli gratia, for example भैक्षम्,यौवतम्, पादातम्: confer, compare Kāś. on P. IV.2.38.
bhidādia class of roots headed by the root भिद् to which the kṛt affix अ (always in the feminine. gender as अा ) is added in the sense of verbal activity: exempli gratia, for example भिदा, गुह्या, श्रद्धा, मेघा et cetera, and others cf Kāś. on P. III. 3.104.
bhīmādia class of words headed by the word भीम in which the Uṇādi affixes म and others, as prescribed by specific Uṇādi sūtras, are found added in the sense of the 'apādāna' case-relation; exempli gratia, for example भीमः in the sense 'बिभेति अस्मात्'. Similarly भीष्मः, भूमि:, रज: et cetera, and others confer, compare Kāś. on P.III.4.74.
bhūmādithe limited senses भूमन् (plurality) and others in which भतुप् and other possessive taddhita affixes should take place, and not in the general sense of the 'presence at one place' as also 'the possession by some one individual;' confer, compare भूमनिन्दाप्रशंसासु नित्ययोगेतिशायने । संसर्गेस्तिविवक्षायां भवन्ति मतुबादय: Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on V. 2.94.
bhūvādilit headed by भू , or headed by भू and वा as some scholars like to explain; the term means roots; in general, which have भू as the first root in Pāṇini's list of roots; confer, compare भूवादयो धातव: P. I. 3.1; The word भूवादि denoting roots stands in contrast with the word भ्वादि which stands for the roots of the first conjugation. भूवादीनां वकारोयं मङ्गलार्थः प्रयुज्यते | भुवो वार्थं वदन्तीति भ्वर्था वा वादयः स्मृता: Kāś. on P. I. 3.1.
bhṛśādia class of nouns headed by भृश to which the denominative affix य is added in the sense of 'being or becoming what they were not before;' exempli gratia, for example अभृशो भृशो भवति भृशायते; similarly ,शीघ्रायते, मन्दायते, उन्मनायते, दुर्मनायते et cetera, and othersconfer, compareKāś.III.1.I3.
bhauvādikabelonging to the class of roots headed by भू; a root of the first conjugation; confer, compare अक्षू व्याप्तौ भौवादिक: Kāś. on P. III. 1.75.
bhvādigaṇathe class of roots headed by भू ; the first conjugation of roots.
madhvādia class of words headed by the word मधु to which the taddhita affix मत् (मतुप्) is added as a Cāturarthika affix; exempli gratia, for example मधुमान् , विसमान् et cetera, and others; confer, compare Kāś. on P.IV. 2.86.
manojñādia class of words headed by the word मनोज्ञ, to which the taddhita affix अक (वुञ्) is added in the sense of 'nature' or 'duty'; exempli gratia, for example मनोज्ञकम्, काल्याणकम्, अाढयकम् et cetera, and others confer, compare Kāś. on P. V. 1.133.
mayūravyaṃsakādia class of compounds of the type of मयूरव्यंसक which are somewhat irregular formations and hence mentioned as they are found in use. The compounds are called simple tatpuruṣa compounds; exempli gratia, for example मयूरव्यंसक: हस्तेगृह्य, एहिपचम्, उच्चावचम्, खादतमोदता et cetera, and others; confer, compare मयूरव्यंसकादयश्च P.II.1.72.
maheśanandina Jain Grammarian who has written a work on the karaka topic of grammar, named षट्कारक.
yajādiroots headed by the root यज् which take the samhprasaarana substitute for their semivowel before terminations marked with the mute letter क्: c.g. इज्यते, इष्टिः confer, compare वचिस्वपियज्ञादीनां क्रिति P.VI.1.15. These roots are nine in number, यज् , वप् , वंद् , वस् and others which are of the first conjugation given by Paaini in his Dhaatupatha at the end of the roots of the first conjugation.
yavādia class of words headed by the word यव, the taddhita affix मत् after which does not get the consonant मृ changed into व् although the affix मत् be added to a word ending in म् or अ, or having म् or अ as the penultimate letter; e. g. यवमान् , ऊर्मिमान् , भूमिमान् et cetera, and others: confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.VIII.2.9. This यवादिगण is looked upon as आकृतिगण
yaskādiwords headed by the word यस्क, the affixes in the sense of ’a descendant' placed after which are elided and the words are to be used in the plural number in the masculine gender; e. g. यस्का:; cf Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. II.4.63.
yāvādia class of words headed by the word याव to which the taddhita affix क ( कन् ) is added without any specific sense assigned to it; exempli gratia, for example यावकः: मणिक: et cetera, and others; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. V.4.29.
yuktārohyādia class of compound words headed by the word युक्तारोही which have their initial vowel accented acute in spite of the general dictum that a compound word except a Bahuvrihi compound word, has its last vowel accented acute: confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. V I. 2.81.
yuvādia class of words headed by the word युवन् which have the taddhita affix अ ( अण् ) added to them in the sense of 'duty' or 'nature': exempli gratia, for example यौवनम् स्थाविरम्, हौत्रम् et cetera, and others; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.V.1.130.
yaudheyādia class of nine words headed by the word यौधेय, a taddhita affix applied to which is not to be elided even though the word be used in the plural number
rajatādia class of words headed by the word रजत to which the taddhita affix अ ( अञ् ) is added in the sense of ' a product ' or 'a part '; exempli gratia, for example राजतम् , लौहम् , औदुम्बरम् et cetera, and others ; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. IV.3.154.
radhādia class of eight roots headed by the root रध् which allow the addition of the augment इ ( इट् ) optionally to the ardhadhatuka affix beginning with any consonant except य्, placed , after them; exempli gratia, for example रघिता रद्धा, त्रता , तर्त्पा तर्पिता et cetera, and others confer, compare P.VII.2.35 and VII.2.45.
rasādia class of words headed by the word रस which have the taddhita affix.affix मतुप् added to them in the sense of possession in preference to other affixes like इन्: exempli gratia, for example. रसवान् , रूपवान् et cetera, and others; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.V. 2.95.
rājadantādia class of compound words headed by राजदन्त in which the order of words or the constituent members is fixedition There are about 50 words in the class; some of them are tatpurusa compounds such as राजदन्त or अग्रेवण in which the subordinate word which ought to have been placed first is placed second There are some karmadharaya.compounds in which one particular word is always placed first and not any one of the two: exempli gratia, for example लिप्तवासितम्, सिक्तसंमृष्टम् et cetera, and others There are some dvandva compounds such as उलुखलमुसलम् , चित्रास्वाती, भार्यापती et cetera, and others in which a definite order of words is laid down. For details see Kasika on राजदन्तादिषु परम् P. II. 2.31.
rājanyādiaclass of words headed by the word राजन्य to which the taddhita affix अक ( वुच् ) is added in the sense of ' the place of residence '; e. g. राजन्यकः, औदुम्वरक: ! et cetera, and others This class named राजन्यादि is ] called अाकृतिगण and similar words ! can be included in this class such as मालव,विराट् , त्रिगर्त and others from which the words मालवक: वैराटक: त्रैगर्तक: et cetera, and others can be arrived at confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. IV. 2.53.
rudādia term used for the five roots headed by the root रुद्,which have the augment इ added to a Sārvadhātuka affix in certain cases; exempli gratia, for example रोदिति, श्वसिति, अरोदीत्, अस्वपीत् et cetera, and others; confer, compare P.VII. 2. 76, VII.3.98.
rughādia class of roots headed by the root रुध् which take श्नम् ( न् ) as the conjugational sign inserted after the final vowel, e. g. रुणद्धि ( where रुध् becomes रुणध् ). These roots are popularly called roots of the 8th conjugation.
revatyādia class of words headed by the word रेवती to which the affix ठक् is added in the sense of 'an offspring ': e. g. रैवतिकः, आश्वपालिक:, द्वारपालिक: et cetera, and othersconfer, compareKāś. on P. IV.1.146.
raivatikādia class of words headed by रैवतिक to which the taddhita affix ईय ( छ ) is added in the sense of 'belonging to'; e. g. रैवतिकीय:, औदवाहीयः, बैजवापीय: et cetera, and others confer, compare Kaś. on P. IV. 3.131.
rauḍhyādianother name given to the क्रौड्यादि class of words which are headed by क्रौडि and which take the affix ष्यङ् to form their base in the feminine; e. g. क्रौड्या लाड्या; confer, compare सिद्धं तु रौड्यादिषूपसंख्यानात् । के पुना रौढ्यादयः | ये क्रौड्यादय; Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. IV. 1.79.
raudhādikaa root belonging to the class of roots headed by रुध् which take the conjugational sign न् (श्नम्). See रुधादि a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page..
luptanirdiṣṭasupposed to be mentioned although not seen or heard in a particular rule, for the sake of bringing about some grammatical operation with a view to arriving at some desired forms; confer, compare ल्रान्तस्येत्यत्र वकारोऽपि निर्दिश्यते | किं वकारो न श्रूयते | लुप्तनिर्दिष्टो वकारः । Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I.1.3. Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 10; confer, compare also Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.3.7, III. 1.44 et cetera, and others; also confer, compare क्ङिति च P. I. 1.5 where the consonant ग् is supposed to be present in the word क्ङिति .
lomādiclass of words headed by the word लोमन् to which the taddhita affix. affix, श, in the sense 'possessed of' is added optionally along with the usual affix मत् ( मतुप् ); exempli gratia, for example लोमश:, लोमवान्, रोमश: रोमवान् बभ्रुशः, हरिश:, कपिश: et cetera, and others confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. V.2.100.
lohitādi(1)a class of words headed by लोहित to which the affix क्यव् ( य ) is added in the sense of 'becoming', to form a denominative root-base which gets the verb-endings of both the padas; e. g. लोहितायति, लोहितायते; निद्रायति, निद्रायते; the class लोहितादि is considered as अाकृतिगण so that similar denominative verb-bases could be explained; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.III.1. 13; (2) a class of words headed by लेहित, to which the feminine. affix ष्फ ( अायनी ) is added after they have got the taddhita affix यञ् added to them in the sense of 'a grandchild'; e. g. लौहित्यायनी, कात्यायनी et cetera, and others; cf Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. IV. 1.18.
lvādia class of roots, headed by the root लू, the past. passive voice.participle. affix त placed after which becomes changed into न; exempli gratia, for example लून:, लूनवान्; जीन:, जीनवान्; et cetera, and others confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.VII. 2.44.
vaṃśādia class of words headed by the word वंश, the word भार placed after which gets the taddhita affixes added to it, as prescribed in the senses 'takes it', 'carries it' or 'produces it'; exempli gratia, for example वांशभारिकः; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.V. 1.50. The taddhita affix. affixes as prescribed in the senses mentioned a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page. are added to the words वंश et cetera, and others and not to भार according to some commentators; exempli gratia, for exampleवांशिकः, कौटजिकः et cetera, and others; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. V. 1.50.
vanaspatyādia class of compound words headed by वनस्पति which retain the original accent of the members of the compound, as for example, in the compound word वनस्पति both the words वन and पति have got their initial vowel अ accented acute; cf Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana.on P.VI.2.140.
varaṇādia class of words headed by वरण which have the taddhita affix elided, if it is added to them in the four senses mentioned in P.IV.2.67-70 confer, compare वरणानामदूरभवं नगरं वरणाः | कटुकबदर्या अदूरभवो ग्रामः कटुकबदरी ! confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.IV.2.82.
varāhādia class of words headed by वराह which have the taddhita affix क ( कक् ) added to them in the four senses mentioned in P. IV. 2.67-70 exempli gratia, for example वाराहकम्, पालाशकम् et cetera, and others; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. IV. 2.80.
vargyādia class of words headed by the word वर्ग्य which have their initial vowel accented acute when they stand as second members of a tatpurusa compound other than the karmadharaya type of it; e. g. वासुदेववर्ग्य:, अर्जुनपक्ष्यः; cf Kas: on P, VI. 2,131. '
vasantādia class of words headed by the word वसन्त, which are mostly names of seasons, to which the affix इक (ठक्) is added in the sense of 'that which one studies or knows'; confer, compareवसन्तसहचरितोयं ग्रन्थो वसन्तस्तमधीते वासन्तिकः 1 वार्षिक: Kas on P. IV. 2.63.
vākinādia class of words headed by the word वाकिन to which the taddhita affix आयनि( फिञ् ) is added in the sense of an 'offspring' when along with the taddhita affix. affix अायनि,the augment क् ( कुक् ) is added to the base ( वाकिन or the like ); e. g. वाकिनकायनिः ; confer, compareKāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.IV.1.158.
diroots headed by वा and similar to वा. Really there is no class of roots headed by वा given anywhere but in the interpretation of the rule भूवादयो धातव: it is suggested that ' the roots which are similar to वा are termed roots (धातु)' could also be the interpretation of the rule: confer, compare भ्वादय इति च वादय इति M.Bh. on P. I. 3. l . Vart. ll .
dighaṭamudgaraname of a commentary on the Sarasvata Vykarana by a grammarian Jayanta.
vidhyādithe senses headed by विधि as given in the rule विधिनिमन्त्रणामन्त्रणाधीष्टसंप्रश्नप्रार्थनेषु लिङ् P. III. 3.16I ; confer, compare विध्यादिषु सप्तमी च Kat. III.1.20; confer, compare also विध्यादिषु क्रियार्थाल्लिङ् भवति Candra Vyak. I.3. l2l.
vinayādia class of words headed by विनय to which the taddhita affix इक ( ठक् ) is applied without any change of sense:confer, compareविनय एव वैनयिक: शमयिकः । औपयिकः Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.V.4.34.
vimuktādia class of words headed by the word विमुक्त to which the taddhita affix अ ( अण् ) is added in the sense of 'possessed of', provided the word so formed, denotes a chapter or a lesson of a sacred work; confer, compareविमुक्तशब्दोस्मिन्नस्ति वैमुक्तकोध्यायः अनुवाको वा | दैवासुरः । Kāś. on P. V. 2.61.
vispaṣṭādia class of words headed by the word विस्पष्ट which retain their own accents in a compound when they are the first members of a compound, provided that any word of quality is the second member e. g. विस्पष्टकटुकम् | व्यक्तलवणम् where the words विस्पष्ट and व्यक्त are used in the sense of clear, referring to the different tastes; confer, compare Kāś. On P. VI. 2.24.
vṛtādia class of roots headed by the root वृत् which take optionally the Parasmaipada affixes when the vikaraṇa स्य of the future tense and the conditional mood, or the desiderative vikaraṇa सन् is added to them; exempli gratia, for example वर्त्स्यति,वर्तिष्यते; अवर्त्स्यत्, अवर्तिष्यत्,; विवृत्सति, विवर्तिषते confer, compare Kāś. on P.I.3.92; confer, comparealso P.VII.2.59.
vṛṣādia class of words headed by the word वृष which have their initial vowel accented acute; confer, compare Kas, on P. VI.1.203.
vetanādia class of words headed by वेतन which have the taddhita affix इक (ठक्) added to them in the sense of "earning a livelihood' exempli gratia, for example वेतनिक: | धानुष्क:; दाण्डिक:; confer, compare वेतनेन जीवति वैतनिकः कर्मकर: Kas on P. IV. 4.12.
vaidikafound in Vedic Literature; the term is used in contrast with लौकिक which means ’found , in commmon use' : confer, compare यथा लोकिकवैदिकेषुMahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). Ahnika 1. kaiyata explains वैदिक as श्रुत्युपनिबद्ध.
vaidikīprakriyāname of that section of Bhattoji's Siddhantakaumudi which deals with Vedic peculiarities noticed by Panini in his sutras. There is a well-known commentary upon this section named सुबोधिनी written by Jayakrisna a famous grammar scholar of the Maunin family.
vaidikaprakriyāṭīkā(1)a commentary on the sutras of Panini dealing with the Vedic words and their peculiarities written by a grammarian named Murari; (2) a commentary on the section of Bhattoji's Siddhantakaumudi named वैदिकीप्रक्रिया written by Jayakrsna Maunin and named Subodhini.
vyāghrādia class of words headed by व्याघ्र which, as standards of comparison, are compounded with words showing objects of comparison provided the common property is not mentioned: exempli gratia, for example पुरुषव्याघ्र:, नृसिंहः et cetera, and others, confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. onP.II. 1.56.
vyuṣṭādia class of words headed by the word व्युष्ट to which the taddhita affix अ (अण् ) is added in the sense of the place where something is given or prepared ; confer, compare व्युष्टे दीयते कार्ये वा वैयुष्टम् । नैत्यम्: Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.V.1.97.
vrīhyādia class of words headed by व्रीहि to which the taddhita affixes इन् and ठन् are applied in the sense of possession along with the usual affix मत् ( मतुप् ) ; e. g. व्रीही, व्रीह्रिक व्रीहिमान् । मायी, मायिकः मायावान् : confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.V. 2. 116.
śakandhvādiname of a class of words in which an irregular coalescence of the vowels of the kind of the latter vowel in the place of the former and latter both is observed; exempli gratia, for example शकन्धु:, कुलटा, सीमन्त:,मनीषा et cetera, and othersconfer, compare कन्ध्वादिषु च (पररूपं वाच्यम् ) P.VI.1. 94 Vart. 4.
śīṇḍakādia class of words headeditionby the word शण्डिक which have the taddhita affix य ( त्र्य ) added to them in the sense of "domicile' or 'native place': exempli gratia, for example शाण्डिक्य:, सार्वसेन्यः, confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. IV. 3. 92.
śarādia class of words headed by the word शर which have the taddhita affix. affix मय (मयट्) added to them in the sense of 'product' or 'portion': exempli gratia, for example शरमयम् , दर्भमयम् , मृण्मयम्; cf Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. IV.3.144;(2) a class of words headed by शर which get their final vowel lengthened before the taddhita affix.affix मत् when the whole word forms a proper noun: exempli gratia, for example शरावती, वंशावती, हनूमान् ; confer, compare P.VI.3.119.
śarkarādia class of words headed by शर्करा to which the taddhita affix. affix अ (अण्) is added in the sense of इव viz. similarity:cf शर्करेव शार्करम् ,कापालिकम् पौण्डरीकम् Kas on P. V. 3.107.
śākapārthivādia class of irregular samanadhikarana , Samasas, or Karmadharaya compound formations, where according to the sense conveyed by the compound word, a word after the first word or so, has to be taken as omitted; confer, compare समानाधिकरणाधिकारे शाकपार्थिवादीनामुपसंख्यानमुत्तरपदलेपश्च वक्तव्यः । शाकभेाजी पार्थिवः शाकपार्थिवः । कुतपवासाः सौश्रुतः कुतपसौश्रुतः । यष्टिप्रधानो मौद्गल्य; यष्टिमौद्गल्यः। M.Bh. on P.II.1.69 Vart. 8.
śākhādia class of words headed by the word शाखा which have the taddhita affix य added to them in the sense of इव id est, that is similarity; exempli gratia, for example शाख्य:, मुख्यः, जघन्यः et cetera, and others; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. V.3.103.
śārṅgaravādia class of words headed by the word शार्ङ्गरव which take the feminine affix ई ( ङीन् ) making the initial vowel of the word (to which ई of the feminine is added) an acute-accented one: e.g: शार्ङ्गरवी;confer, compare शार्ङ्गरवाद्यञो ङीन् P. IV. 1.73.
śivādia big class of about ninety words headed by the word शिव which have the taddhita affix. affix अ ( अण् ) added to them in the sense of a descendant ( अपत्य ) in spite of other affixes such as इञ् , ण्यत् and others prescribed by other rules, which sometimes do not take place, or do so optionally; exempli gratia, for example शैवः: ताक्ष्ण:, ताक्षण्यः; गाङ्ग: गाङ्गेय:, गङ्गायनि:; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.IV.1.112. This class is looked upon as आकृतिगण and a word is supposed to be . included in this class, when the ; affix अ is noticed in spite of some other affix being applicable by some other rule.
śuṇḍikādia class of words headed by शुण्डिका to which the taddhita affix अ ( अण् ) is added in the sense of 'who has come from'; exempli gratia, for example शौण्डिक:, कार्कणः: confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. IV. 3.76.
śubhrādia class of words headed by the word शुभ्र to which the taddhita affix एय ( ढक् ) is added in the sense of a descendant in spite of other affixes being prescribed by some other rules which sometimes are added optionally with this एय; exempli gratia, for example शौभ्रेय:, वैधवेय: रौहिणेयः. This class is looked upon as अाकृतिगण and hence if this affix एय is seen applied although not prescribed actually as in the word गाङ्गेय, the word is supposed to have been included in this class; confer, compare P. IV. I.123.
śauṇḍādia class of words headed by the word शौण्ड which are compounded with a noun in the locative case to form a locative tatpurusa compound; e. g. अक्षशौण्डः, अक्षधूर्तः et cetera, and others; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.II.1.40.
śaunakādia class of words headed by the word शौनक to which the taddhita affix इन् ( णिनि ) is added in the sense of 'instructed by', provided the word so formed is a portion of what is looked upon as a part of the sacred Vedic Literature; confer, compare शौनकेन प्रोक्तमधीयते शौनकिनः, वाजसनेयिन: cf Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.IV. 3.106.
śramaṇādia class of words headed by the word श्रमणा with which words in the masculine or the feminine gender are compounded when they stand in apposition; confer, compare कुमारी श्रमणा कुमारश्रमणा, युवा अध्यापकः युवाध्यापक: Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.II.1.70.
śreṇyādia class of words headed by the word श्रेणि, which are compounded with words like कृत if they stand in apposition, provided the word so compounded has got the sense of the affix च्वि i. e. having become what was not before: confer, compare अश्रेणयः श्रेणय: कृताः श्रेणिकृता:, एककृता: Kas, on P. II. 1. 59.
ṣaṣṭhīnirdiṣṭaa word put in the genitive case; a substitute given as connected with a genitive case which replaces the whole word which is put in the genitive case unless the substitute consists of a single letter or is characterized by the mute letter ङ्, confer, compare षष्ठी स्थानेयोगा । अलोन्त्यस्य | अनेकाल्शित्सर्वेस्य et cetera, and others confer, compare P. I. 1.49 to 55.
saṃyogādilopathe elision of the first of the conjunct consonants if it is स् or क्, provided the conjunct consonants are at the end of a word or followed by a consonant which is not a semi-vowel nor a nasal; e. g. तक्, तष्टवान् from the root तक्ष्; confer, compare स्कोः संयोगाद्योरन्ते च P. VIII. 2.99.
saṃsṛṣṭavādipakṣathe theory, that the meaning of a sentence is a novel thing ( अपूर्व ), held by some Mimamsakas who believe that words connected with activity display their phenomenal capacity ( अनुभाविकाशक्ति ) after the recalling of the senses of words by the recalling capacity (स्मारिकाशाक्ति ).
sarvaprātipadikaany noun-base irrespective of any discrimination; confer, compare अपर अाह सर्वप्रातिपादेकेभ्य आचारे किब्वक्तव्योश्वति गर्दभतीत्येवमर्थम् M.Bh. on P. III. 1.11 Vart, 3.
sarvādiliterally a group or a class of words beginning with the word सर्व as the first word in the list; the term is used in general as a synonymous term with Sarvanaman; confer, compare संज्ञोपसर्जनीभूतास्तु न सर्वादयः Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.I.1.27. सर्वादेश a substitute for the entire wording instead of the final letter as prescribed by the rule अलेान्त्यस्य P.I.1.52; confer, compare अनेकाल्शीत्सर्वस्य P.I.1.55.
sauvādikaa root of the स्वादिगण or the Fifth Conjugation.
syādithe Vikaranas headed by the Vikarana स्य mentioned in P.III.1. 33 upto III.1.90.
svādithe affixes headed by सु: a general term for case-affixes; confer, compare स्वौजसमौट्शस्टभ्यां ... ङ्योस्सुप् P. IV.1.2.
haritādia class of words headed by the word इरित to which the taddhita affix फक् ( अायन ) is added in the sense of a descendant after the affix अ ( अञ् ) has already been added to them by P. IV. 1. 104, the word so formed possessing the sense of the great grandchild (युवापत्य) of the individuals denoted by इरित and others; e. g. हारितायनः; confer, compare इह् तु गोत्राधिकारेपि सामर्थ्याद् यूनि प्रत्ययोभिघीयते Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P, IV.1.100
halādibeginning with a consonant; confer, compare हलादयो विभक्तय:, M.Bh. on P. II. 4.32 Vart. 2; धातुर्य एकाज् हलादि: Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. III. l . 22. Vart. 2. et cetera, and others हलादिशेष a term frequently used by commentators for the omission of all consonants except the initial one in the reduplicative syllable as prescribed by the rule of Panini इलादिः शेष: VII. 4. 60. The word 'इलादिःशेषः' as one word, is also found used in the same sense
a(1)the first letter of the alphabet in Sanskrit and its derived languages, representing the sound a (अ): (2) the vowel a (अ) representing in grammatical treatises, except when Prescribed as an affix or an augment or a substitute,all its eighteen varieties caused by accentuation or nasalisation or lengthening: (3) personal ending a (अ) of the perfeminine. second.pluraland first and third person.singular.; (4) kṛt affix c (अ) prescribed especially after the denominative and secondary roots in the sense of the verbal activity e. g. बुभुक्षा, चिन्ता, ईक्षा, चर्चा et cetera, and othersconfer, compare अ प्रत्ययात् et cetera, and others (P.III 3.102-106); (5) sign of the aorist mentioned as añ (अङ्) or cañ (चङ्) by Pāṇini in P. III i.48 to 59 exempli gratia, for example अगमत्, अचीकरत्; (6) conjugational sign mentioned as śap (शप्) or śa (श) by Pāṇini in P. III.1.68, 77. exempli gratia, for example भवति, तुदति et cetera, and others; (7) augment am (अम्) as prescribed by P. VI.1.58; exempli gratia, for example द्रष्टा, द्रक्ष्यति; (8) augment aṭ (अट्) prefixed to a root in the imperfeminine. and aorist tenses and in the conditional mood e. g. अभवत्, अभूत्, अभविष्यत् confer, compare P. VI.4.71; (8) kṛt affix a (अ) prescribed as अङ्, अच्, अञ्, अण्, अन्, अप्, क, ख, घ, ञ, ड् , ण, et cetera, and others in the third Adhyāya of Pāṇini's Pāṇini's Aṣṭādhyāyī.; (9) taddhita affix. affix a (अ) mentioned by Pāṇini as अच्, अञ् अण्, अ et cetera, and others in the fourth and the fifth chapters of the Pāṇini's Aṣṭādhyāyī. of Pāṇini; (10) the samāsānta affix a (अ), as also stated in the form of the samāsānta affixes (डच् , अच्, टच्, ष्, अष् and अञ्) by Pāṇini in V.4.73 to 121;(11) substitute a (अश्) accented grave for इदम before case-affixes beginning with the inst. instrumental case. case: (12) remnant (अ) of the negative particle नञ् after the elision of the consonant n (न्) by नलोपो नञः P. vi.3.73.
aṃ(ं)nasal utterance called अनुस्वार and written as a dot a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page. the vowel preceding it. confer, compare स्वरमनु संलीनं शब्द्यते इति; it is pronounced after a vowel as immersed in it. The anusvāra is considered (l) as only a nasalization of the preceding vowel being in a way completely amalgamated with it. confer, compare Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.V. 11,31; XV. 1; XXII. 14 ; (2) as a nasal addition to the preceding vowel, many times prescribed in grammar as nuṭ (नुट् ) or num (नुम् ) which is changed into anusvāra in which case it is looked upon as a sort of a vowel, while, it is looked upon as a consonant when it is changed into a cognate of the following consonant (परसवर्ण) or retained as n (न्). confer, compare P. VIII.4.58; (3) as a kind cf consonant of the type of nasalized half g(ग्) as described in some treatises of the Yajurveda Prātiśākhya: cf also Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.)1.22 V.Pr.14.148-9. The vowel element of the anusvāra became more prevalent later on in Pali, Prkrit, Apabhraṁśa and in the spoken modern languages while the consonantal element became more predominant in classical Sanskrit.
aḥ( : )visarga called visarjanīya in ancient works and shown in writing by two dots, one below the other, exactly of the same size, like the pair of breasts of a maiden as jocularly larly expressed by Durgasiṁha's Kātantra-Sūtravṛtti.. confer, compare अः ( : ) इति विसर्जनीयः । अकार इह उच्चारणार्थः । कुमारीस्तनयुगाकृतिर्वर्णो विसजर्नीयसंज्ञो भवति ( दुर्गसिंह on कातन्त्र I.1.16). विसर्ग is always a dependent letter included among the Ayogavāha letters and it is looked upon as a vowel when it forms a part of the preceding vowel; while it is looked upon as a consonant when it is changed into the Jihvāmūlīya or the Upadhmānīya letter.
a,k(ೱ),(ೱ)जिह्वामूलीय, represented by a sign like the वज्र in writing, as stated by Durgasiṁha's Kātantra-Sūtravṛtti. who remarks वज्राकृतिर्वर्णो जिह्वामूलीयसंज्ञो भवति. the Jihvāmūlīya is only a voiceless breath following the utterance of a vowel and preceding the utterance of the guttural letter क् or ख् . It is looked upon as a letter (वर्ण), but dependent upon the following consonant and hence looked upon as a consonant. e. g. विष्णु ೱ करोति.
a,pೱ,(ೱ)Upadhmānīya represented by a sign like the temple of an elephants stated by Durgasiṁha's Kātantra-Sūtravṛtti. who remarks "गजकुम्भाकृतिर्वर्ण उपध्मानीयसंज्ञो भवति." Kāt.I. It is a voiceless breath following the utterance of a vowel and preceding the utterance of the labial letter p ( प् ) or ph ( फ ). It is looked upon as a letter ( वर्ण ), but dependent upon the following consonant and hence looked upon as a consonant. अ:कार name given to the nominative case. case in the Taittiriya Prātiśākhya. cf अ:कार इति प्रथमाविभक्तेरुपलक्षणम् Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.I. 23.
ak(1)condensed expression (प्रत्याहार ) representing the letters अ, इ, उ, ऋ and लृ in Pāṇini's Grammar confer, compare P. VI.1.12, 101; VII.4.2. (2) sign (विकरण) of the benedictive in Vedic Literature in the case of the root दृश् c. g. पितरं च दृशेयं P.III.l.86 V 2; ( 3 ) remnant of the termnination अकच् P. V. 3. 71 ; ( 4 ) substitute (अादेश) अकङ् for the last vowel of the word मुधातृ ( P.IV.1.97 ) e. g. सोघातकिः.
akathitanot mentioned by any other case-relation such as अपादान, संप्रदान and अधिकरण; stated with respect to the indirect object, governed by roots possessing two objects such as दुह्, याच् and others, which in the passive woice is put in the nominative case. The in-direct object is called akathita because in some cases there exists no other case-relation as, for example, in पौरवं गां याचते or भिक्षते, or माणवकं पन्थानं पृच्छति; while, in the other cases, the other case-relations (with the activity expressed by the verb) are wilfully suppressed or ignored although they exist, as for instance in गां दोग्धि पयः, अन्ववरुणद्धि गां व्रजम्; see अकथितं च P.1.4.51 and the Mahābhāṣya thereon.
akampitanot shaken; tremulous: said with respect to vowels in Vedic utterance, kampa being looked upon as a fault of utterance., cf अकम्पितान् । कम्पनं नाम स्वराश्रितपाठदोषः प्रायेण दाक्षिणात्यानां भवति । तमुपलक्ष्य स वर्ज्य:। R.Pr.III.31
akarmakaintransitive, without any object, (said with regard to roots which cannot possess an object or whose object is suppressed or ignored). The reasons for suppression are briefly given in the well-known stanza ; धातोरर्थान्तरे वृत्तेर्धात्वर्थेनोपसंग्रहात् । प्रसिद्धेरविवक्षातः कर्मणोऽकर्मिकाक्रिया ॥ In the case of intransitive roots, the verbal activity and its fruit are centred in one and the same individual viz. the agent or कर्ता confer, compare फलव्यापारयोरेकनिष्ठतायामकर्मकः Vāk. Pad.
akārakanot causing any verbal activity; different from the kārakas or instruments of action such as the agent, the object, the instrument, the recipient (संप्रदान), the separated (अपादान) and the location, (अधिकरण) confer, compare Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.4.23, 29 and 5l and on II.3.1.
akālāpakadifferent from the Kālāpa-vyākaraṇasūtra. or the revised Kātantra Grammar confer, compare पाणिन्युपज्ञमकालापकं व्याकरणम् kāś. On P.II.4.21.
akitnot marked by the mute letter k ( क् ) and hence not disallowing guṇa or vṛddhi substitutes for the preceding vowel, confer, compare सृजिदृशोर्झल्यमकिति P.VI.1.58; दीर्घोऽकित: P. VII. 4.83.
akṛtliterally non-krt: an affix applied to a root, but different from the conjugational affixes. confer, compare अकृत्सार्वधातुक्रयोर्दीर्ध: P. VII. 4.25.
akṛtavyūhashort expression for the grammatical maxim अकृतव्यूहाः पाणिनीयाः which means "the followers of Pāṇini do not insist on the taking effect of a rule when its cause or causes disappear." See Par. śek. Par. 56.
akṛtasaṃhitawords ending with a breathing or visarga which are not looked upon as placed immediately before the next word and hence which have no combination with the following vowel e. g. एष देवो अमर्त्यः R. V. 1X.8.1.
akṛtrimanon-technical: not formed or not arrived at by grammatical operations such as the application of affixes to crude bases and so on; natural; assigned only by accident. cf the gram. maxim कृत्रिमाकृतिमयोः कृत्रिमे कार्यसंप्रत्ययः which means "in cases of doubt whether an operation refers to that expressed by the technical sense or to that which is expressed by the ordinary sense of a term, the operation refers to what is expressed by the technical sense." Par. śek. Par.9 also Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.1.28.
aṅkitanot possessing the mute letter k (क्) or g (ग्) orṅ ( ङ् ) and hence not preventing the guṇa and vṛddhi substitutes for the preceding vowel, if they occur. e. g. मृजेर ङ्कित्सु प्रत्ययेषु मृजिप्रसङगे मार्जिः साधुर्भुवति M.Bh. on P. I.I.I Vart.10.
akṣaraa letter of the alphabet, such as a (अ) or i (इ) or h (ह) or y (य्) or the like. The word was originally applied in the Prātiśākhya works to vowels (long, short as also protracted), to consonants and the ayogavāha letters which were tied down to them as their appendages. Hence अक्षर came later on to mean a syllable i. e. a vowel with a consonant or consonants preceding or following it, or without any consonant at all. confer, compare ओजा ह्रस्वाः सप्तमान्ताः स्वराणामन्ये दीर्घा उभये अक्षराणि R Pr. I 17-19 confer, compareएकाक्षरा, द्व्यक्षरा et cetera, and others The term akṣara was also applied to any letter (वर्ण), be it a vowel or a consonant, cf, the terms एकाक्षर, सन्ध्यक्षर, समानाक्षर used by Patañjali as also by the earlier writers. For the etymology of the term see Mahābhāṣya अक्षरं न क्षरं विद्यात्, अश्नोतेर्वा सरोक्षरम् । वर्णे वाहुः पूर्वसूत्रे । Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). Āhnika 2 end.
akṣarapaṅktiname given to the dvipada virāj verses divided into padās of five syllables. cf विराजो द्विपदाः केचित् सर्वा आहुश्चतुष्पदाः । कृत्वा पञ्चाक्षरान्पादांस्तास्तथाSक्षरपङ्क्तयः Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XVII. 50.
akṣarasamāmnāyaalphabet: traditional enumeration of phonetically independent letters generally beginning with the vowel a (अ). Although the number of letters and the order in which they are stated differ in different treatises, still, qualitatively they are much the same. The Śivasūtras, on which Pāṇini's grammar is based, enumerate 9 vowels, 4 semi-vowels, twenty five class-consonants and 4 | sibilants. The nine vowels are five simple vowels or monothongs (समानाक्षर) as they are called in ancient treatises, and the four diphthongs, (सन्ध्यक्षर ). The four semi-vowels y, v, r, l, ( य् व् र् ल् ) or antasthāvarṇa, the twenty five class-consonants or mutes called sparśa, and the four ūṣman letters ś, ṣ, s and h ( श् ष् स् ह् ) are the same in all the Prātiśākhya and grammar works although in the Prātiśākhya works the semi-vowels are mentioned after the class consonants.The difference in numbers, as noticed, for example in the maximum number which reaches 65 in the VājasaneyiPrātiśākhya, is due to the separate mention of the long and protracted vowels as also to the inclusion of the Ayogavāha letters, and their number. The Ayogavāha letters are anusvāra, visarjanīya,jihvāmulīya, upadhmānīya, nāsikya, four yamas and svarabhaktī. The Ṛk Prātiśākhya does not mention l (लृ), but adding long ā (अा) i (ई) ,ū (ऊ) and ṛ (ऋ) to the short vowels, mentions 12 vowels, and mentioning 3 Ayogavāhas (< क्, = प् and अं) lays down 48 letters. The Ṛk Tantra Prātiśākhya adds the vowel l (लृ) (short as also long) and mentions 14 vowels, 4 semivowels, 25 mutes, 4 sibilants and by adding 10 ayogavāhas viz. 4 yamas, nāsikya, visarjanīya, jihvāmulīya, upadhmānīya and two kinds of anusvāra, and thus brings the total number to 57. The Ṛk Tantra makes a separate enumeration by putting diphthongs first, long vowles afterwards and short vowels still afterwards, and puts semi-vowels first before mutes, for purposes of framing brief terms or pratyāhāras. This enumeration is called varṇopadeśa in contrast with the other one which is called varṇoddeśa. The Taittirīya prātiśākhya adds protracted vowels and lays down 60 letters : The Ṣikṣā of Pāṇini lays down 63 or 64 letters, while the Vājasaneyi-prātiśākhya gives 65 letters. confer, compare Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.VIII. 1-25. The alphabet of the modern Indian Languages is based on the Varṇasamāmnāya given in the Vājasaneyi-prātiśākhya. The Prātiśākhyas call this enumeration by the name Varṇa-samāmnāya. The Ṛk tantra uses the terms Akṣara samāmnāya and Brahmarāśi which are picked up later on by Patañjali.confer, compare सोयमक्षरसमाम्नायो वाक्समाम्नायः पुष्पितः फलितश्चन्द्रतारकवत् प्रतिमण्डितो वेदितव्यो ब्रह्मराशिः । सर्ववेदपुण्यफलावाप्तिश्चास्य ज्ञाने भवति । मातापितरौ चास्य स्वर्गे लोके महीयेते । Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). Ahnika.2-end.
akṣarāṅgaforming a part of a syllable just as the anusvāra ( nasal utterance ) or svarabhakti (vowelpart) which forms a part of the preceding syllable. confer, compare अनुस्वारो व्यञ्जनं चाक्षराङ्गम् Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) I.22, also स्वरभक्तिः पूर्वभागक्षराङ्गम् Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) I.32.
agnia term in the Kātantra grammar for a word ending in i ( इ ) or u ( उ ) confer, compare इदुदग्निः Kātantra vyākaraṇa Sūtra.II.1.8, अग्नेरमोs कारः Kātantra vyākaraṇa Sūtra.II.1.50.
agniveśyaan ancient writer of Vedic grammar mentioned in the Taittirīya prātiśākhya. confer, compare कपवर्गपरश्च (विसर्ग:) अग्निवेश्यवाल्मीक्योः ( मतेन ऊष्माणं न आपद्यते ) T.Pr. IX. 4.
agniveśyāyanawriter of Vedic grammar, mentioned in the Taittirīya prātiśākhya. confer, compare नाग्निवेश्यायनस्य ( मते उदात्तपरः स्वरितपरो वा अनुदात्तः स्वरितं नापद्यते इति न) Tait. Pr. XIV.32.
agravāla(Vasudeva-Śarana Agravāla), a modern scholar of Sanskrit grammar, the author of "India as known to Pāṇini".
aṅThe vikaraṇa before luṅ affixes, substituted for the affix cvi ( च्वि ) in the case of the roots mentioned by Pāṇini in sūtras III.1.52-59:(2) the Vikaraṇapratyaya in Vedic Literature before the benedictive affixes prescribed by Pāṇini in Sūtra III.1.86; (3) kṛt affix in the feminine gender showing verbal activity applied to roots marked with the mute letter ष् and the roots भिद्, छिद् and others. P.III.3 104-106.exempli gratia, for example जरा, त्रपा, भिदा, छिदा et cetera, and others
aṅga(1)the crude base of a noun or a verb to which affixes are added; a technical term in Pāṇini's grammar for the crude base after which an affix is prescribed e. g. उपगु in औपगव,or कृ in करिष्यति et cetera, and others confer, compare यस्मात् प्रत्ययविधिस्तदादि प्रत्ययेSङ्गम् P.I.4.13; (2) subordinate participle. constituent part confer, compare पराङ्गवद् in सुबामन्त्रिते पराङ्गवत्स्वरे P. II.1.2, also विध्यङ्गभूतानां परिभाषाणां Paribhāṣenduśekhara of Nāgeśa. Par. 93.10: (3) auxiliary for an operation, e. g. अन्तरङ्ग, बहिरङ्ग et cetera, and others confer, compare अत्राङगशब्देन शब्दरूपं निमित्तमेव गृह्यते Paribhāṣenduśekhara of Nāgeśa. Par.50; (4) element of a word or of an expression confer, compare अङ्गव्यवाये चाङ्गपरः Ṛktantra Prātiśākhya. 190, अङ्गे च क्म्ब्यादौ R.T. 127. व्यञ्जनं स्वराङ्गम् Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.21.1.
acthe short term or pratyāhāra in Pāṇini's Grammar representing a vowel, exempli gratia, for example अजन्त (ending with a vowel), अच्संधि (vowel coalescence or combination).
acikitsyaimpossible to amend, not to be discussedition confer, compare एवं च 'पूजितो य: सुरैरपि' इति अचिकित्स्यः अपशब्दः;Padamañjari on P.II.2.12.
(1)taddhita affix. affix a ( अ ) with the mute letter ñ ( ञ्), prescribed (i) after the words उत्स and others in various senses like progeny, dyed in, produced in, come from et cetera, and othersP. IV.1.86, (ii) after the words विद and others in the sense of grandson and other descendents.P. IV.1.104. For other cases see P. IV. I. 141, 161; IV.2.12,14 et cetera, and others IV.3.7 et cetera, and others IV.4.49. The feminine is formed by adding i ( ई ) to words ending with this affix अञ्, which have the vṛddhi vowel substituted for their initial vowel which gets the acute accent also exempli gratia, for example औत्सः, औत्सी,औदपानः, बैदः, बैदी.
aṭ(1)token term standing for vowels and semi-vowels excepting l ( ल्) specially mentioned as not interfering with the substitution of ṇ ( ण् ) for n ( न् ) exempli gratia, for example गिरिणा, आर्येण, खर्वेण et cetera, and others Sec P.VIII.4.2; (2) augment a (अट्) with an acute accent, which is prefixed to verbal forms in the imperfect and the aorist tenses and the conditional mood. exempli gratia, for example अभवत्, अभूत्, अभविष्यत् Sec P.IV.4.71; (3) augment a ( अट् ) prescribed in the case of the roots रुद्, स्वप् et cetera, and others before a Sārvadhātuka affix beginning with any consonant except y ( य्), exempli gratia, for example अरोदत्, अस्वपत्, अजक्षत्, आदत् et cetera, and others; see P.VII.3, 99, 100;(4) augment a ( अट् ) prefixed sometimes in Vedic Literature to affixes of the Vedic subjunctive (लेट्) exempli gratia, for example तारिवत्, मन्दिवत् et cetera, and others see P.III.4.94.
aṇ(1)token term ( प्रत्याहार ) for all vowels and semivowels which, when prescribed for an operation, include all such of their sub-divisions as are caused by length, protraction accent or nasalization. cf अणुदित्सवर्णस्य चाप्रत्ययः P. I.1.60;(2) token term for the vowels अ, इ and उ in all Pānini's rules except in the rule I.1.69 given a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page. e.g see ढ्रलोपे पूर्वस्य दीर्घोणः P.VI.3. 111, केऽणः P.VII.4.13. and अणोऽ प्रगृह्यस्य. P.VIII.4.57: (3) tad, affix. a ( अ ) prescribed generally in the various senses such as 'the offspring', 'dyed in,' 'belonging to' et cetera, and others except in cases where other specific affixes are prescribed cf प्राग्दीव्यतोऽण् P. IV.1.83; (4) kṛ. affix a ( अ ), applied, in the sense of an agent, to a root with an antecedent word (उपपद) standing as its object. e. g. कुम्भकारः, see P.III.2.1: काण्डलावः, see P.III.3.12.
at(1)tech. term in Pāṇini's grammar for short अ, cf तपरस्तत्कालस्य P. I. 1. 70; अदेङ् गुणः P.I.1.2; (2) personal ending अ for इ ( इट् ) of the Ist person. singular. or Ātmanep. Ātmanepada in the Potential, P III. 4. 106; (3) caseaffix in the case of युष्मद् and अस्मद् for ablative case. singular. and plural P.VII. 1.31,32: (4) tad-affix अत् (अ) prescribed after किम् in the sense of the locative case case before which किम् is changed to कु, क्व being the taddhita affix. formation; confer, compare P. V.3.12 and VII.2.105:(5) substitute अत्(शतृ) for लट् forming the present and future participles in the Parasmaipada. active voice confer, compare लटः शतृशानचौ. P.III. 2.124 and लृटः सद्वा P. III.3.14.
ataṅnon-Ātmanepadin verbal affixes ति, तः...मस्, P. III.4.78, Cān. I.4.11, Śāk. 1.4.101.
atadanubandhakanot having the same mute significatory letter, but having one or two additional ones, confer, compare तदनुबन्धकग्रहणे नातदनुबन्धकस्य ग्रहणम् (Paribhāṣenduśekhara of Nāgeśa. Pari. 84.)
atantraimplying no specific purpose: not intended to teach anything, अविवक्षित; exempli gratia, for example ह्रस्वग्रहणमतन्त्रम् Kāś and Si. Kau. on तस्यादित उदात्तमर्धह्रस्वम् P.1.2.32: confer, compare also अतन्त्रं तरनिर्देशः ( the use of तरप् does not necessarily convey the sense of the comparative degree in Pāṇini's rules) Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I.2.33. This statement has been given as a distinct Paribhāṣa by Vyāḍiparibhāṣāsūcana.and Sākaṭāyana. The author of the Mahābhāṣya appears to have quoted it from the writings of Vyāḍiparibhāṣāsūcana.and the earlier grammarians See also Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on अल्पाच्तरम् P. II.2.34.
atādrūpyātideśaconveyance of only the properties of one to another without conveying the actual form, described as the significance of antādivadbhāva. confer, compare न वा अताद्रूप्यातिदेशात् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. VI.1.85 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 26. See ताद्रूप्यातिदेश below.
atideśaextended application; transfer or conveyance or application of the character or qualities or attributes of one thing to another. Atideśa in Sanskrit grammar is a very common feature prescribed by Pāṇini generally by affixing the taddhita affix. affix मत् or वत् to the word whose attributes are conveyed to another. e. g. लोटो लङ्वत् P. III. 4.85. In some cases the atideśa is noticed even without the affix मत् or वत्; exempli gratia, for exampleगाङ्कुटादिभ्योऽञ्णिन् ङित् P. 1.2.1 . Atideśa is generally seen in all grammatical terms which end with 'vadbhāva' e. g. स्थानिवद्भाव (P.I.1.56-59), सन्वद्भाव (P.VII.4.93), अन्तादिवद्भाव (P. VI.1.85), अभूततद्भाव (P.IV.60) and others. Out of these atideśas, the स्थानिवद्भाव is the most important one, by virtue of which sometimes there is a full representation id est, that is substitution of the original form called sthānin in the place of the secondary form called ādeśa. This full representation is called रूपातिदेश as different from the usual one which is called कार्यातिदेश, confer, compare Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). VIII.1.90 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 1 and VIII.1.95. Vart.3. Regarding the use of अतिदेश there is laid down a general dictum सामान्यातिदेशे विशेषानतिदेशः when an operation depending on the general properties of a thing could be taken by extended application, an operation depending on special properties should not be taken by virtue of the same : e. g. भूतवत् in P. III.3.132 means as in the case of the general past tense and not in the case of any special past tense like the imperfect ( अनद्यतन ) , or the perfect ( परोक्ष ). See Paribhāṣenduśekhara of Nāgeśa. Pari. 101, Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. III. 3. 132. There is also a general dictum अतिदेशिकमनित्यम्whatever is transferred by an extended application, need not, be necessarily taken. See Paribhāṣenduśekhara of Nāgeśa. 93.6 as also Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P.I.1.123 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini).4, I.2.1 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 3, II.3.69 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini).2 et cetera, and others, Kaiyaṭa on II. 1.2 and VI.4.22 and Kāśikāvivaraṇapañjikā, a commentary on the Kāśikāvṛtti by Jinendrabuddhi, called Nyāsa. on P. I.1.56 and P. I.2.58 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 8. The dictum अातिदेशिकमनित्यम् is given as a Paribhāṣā by Nāgeśa confer, compare Pari. Śek. 93. 6.
ativyaktaquite distinct; used with respect to pronunciation नातिव्यक्तं न चाव्यक्तमेवं वर्णानुदीरयेत् confer, compare Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.XVII.8.
atuspersonal ending of perfeminine. 1st person. dual number confer, compare परस्मैपदानां णलतुसुस्थलथुसणल्वमाः P. III.4.82.
atepersonal ending of present tense. 3rd per. plural substituted for झ ( अन्त ), the अ of झ ( अन्त ) being changed into ए and न being omitted: see झोन्त: (P.VII.1.3) अदभ्यस्तात् (P. VII. 1.4) and टित आत्मनेपदानां टेरे (P. III. 4.79).
atyalparather too little, an expression used by Patanjali idiometically confer, compare अत्यल्पमिदमुच्यते Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.1.69 et cetera, and others
athaUṇādi affix अथ prescribed in Uṇādi Sūtras 393-396 exempli gratia, for example see शपथ, अवभृथ, आवसथ ctc.
athusconjugational affix of perfeminine. 2nd person. dual Parasmaipada. substituted for the personal ending थस्, confer, compare P. III. 4.82.
adantaending with the short vowel अ; confer, compare P. VIII.4.7: a term applied to nouns of that kind, and roots of the tenth conjugation which are given with the letter अ at their end which is not looked upon as mute (इत्) c.g. कथ,गण. et cetera, and others Mark also the root पिच described by पतञ्जलि as अदन्त confer, compare पिबिरदन्तः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.1.56., Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on II. 4.43.
adṛṣṭanot seen properly; doubtful; indistinct;said with respect to a letter which is not distinctly deciphered in the Saṁhitāpātha: exempli gratia, for example तन्नः ( R. Saṁh. I. 107. 3 ): the last letter त् of तत् is deciphered in the Pada-pātha which is given as तत्न: confer, compare अदृष्टवर्णे प्रथमे चोदकः स्यात् प्रदर्शकः Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) X. 15.
adṅsubstitute for case affixes सु and अम् added to words ending with the affixes डतर and डतम and to the words अन्य, अन्यतर and इतर. confer, compare P,VII.1.25.
adyatanītech. term of ancient grammarians signifying in general the present time of the day in question, the occurrence of the immediate past or future events in which is generally expressed by the aorist (लुड्) or the simple future ( लृट् ); the other two corresponding tenses imperfect and first future (viz. लड् and लुट्) being used in connection with past and future events respectively, provided the events do not pertain to that day which is in question; confer, compare 'वा चाद्यतन्याम्' M.Bh. P.III.2.102 Vār.6, वादृतन्याम् P, VI.4.114. Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 3; (2) term for the tense showing immediate past time called लुङ् in Pāṇini's grammar e. g. मायोगे अद्यतनी । मा कार्षीत् Kātantra vyākaraṇa Sūtra.III. 1.22, Hemacandra's Śabdānuśāsana. III. 3.11.
adviyoniliterally not made up of two elements, and hence, produced with a single effort, an expression used for simple vowels ( समानाक्षर ) such as अ, इ, उ, ऋ, लृ and simple consonants क्, ख्, ग् et cetera, and others as distinguished from diphthongs ( सन्ध्यक्षर ) such as ए, ऐ, ओ, औ and conjunct consonants क्व, ध्र , et cetera, and others which appear to have been termed द्वियोनि confer, compare अपृक्तमेकाक्षरमद्वियोनि यत् R.Pr.XI.3.
adhika(1)additional or surplus activity which a rule in grammar sometimes shows; अधिकः कारः or अधिकं कार्यम्; confer, compare Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.3.11, Kāś. on III.2.124, Bh. Vṛ. on III.4.72; ( 2 ) surplus subject matter e. g. अथाख्याः समाम्नायाधिकाः प्राग्रिफितात् (V.Pr. I.33.)
adhikāragoverning rule consisting of a word (exempli gratia, for example प्रत्ययः, धातोः, समासान्ताः et cetera, and others) or words (exempli gratia, for example ङ्याप्प्रातिपदिकात्, सर्वस्य द्वे et cetera, and others) which follows or is taken as understood in every following rule upto a particular limit. The meaning of the word अधिकार is discussed at length by Patañjali in his Mahābhāṣya on II.1.1, where he has given the difference between अधिकार and परिभाषा; confer, compare अधिकार: प्रतियोगं तस्यानिर्देशार्थ इति योगे योगे उपतिष्ठते। परिभाषा पुनरेकदेशस्था सती सर्वं शास्त्रमभिज्वलयति प्रदीपवत् । See also Mahābhāṣya on I.3.11, I. 4.49 and IV. I.83. The word or wording which is to repeat in.the subsequent rules is believed to be shown by Pāṇini by characterizing it with a peculiarity of utterance known as स्वरितोच्चार or स्वरितत्वेन उच्चारणम्. The word which is repeated in the following Sūtras is stated to be अधिकृत. The Śabda Kaustubha defines adhikāra as एकंत्रोपात्तस्यान्यत्र व्यापार: अधिकारः Śab. Kaus. on P.1.2.65. Sometimes the whole rule is repeated e. g. प्रत्यय: P.III.1.1, अङ्गस्य P.VI.4.1 समासान्ताः P.V.4.68 while on some occasions a part only of it is seen repeatedition The repetition goes on upto a particular limit which is stated as in असिद्धवदत्राभात् P.VI.4.22, प्राग्रीश्वरान्निपाताः P.I.4.56. Many times the limit is not stated by the author of the Sūtras but it is understood by virtue of a counteracting word occurring later on. On still other occasions, the limit is defined by the ancient traditional interpreters by means of a sort of convention which is called स्वरितत्वप्रतिज्ञा. This अधिकार or governance has its influence of three kinds: ( 1 ) by being valid or present in all the rules which come under its sphere of influence, e. g. स्त्रियाम् or अङ्गस्य; (2) by showing additional properties e. g. the word अपादान being applied to cases where there is no actual separation as in सांकाश्यकेभ्यः पाटलिपुत्रका अभिरूपतराः: (3) by showing additional force such as setting aside even subsequent rules if opposingular. These three types of the influence which a word marked with स्वरित and hence termed अधिकार possesses are called respectively अधिकारगति, अधिक क्रार्य and अधिक कार. For details see M.Bh. on I.3.11. This अधिकार or governing rule exerts its influence in three ways: (1) generally by proceeding ahead in subsequent rules like the stream of a river, (2)sometimes by jumps like a frog omitting a rule or more, and (3)rarely by proceeding backward with a lion's glance; confer, compare सिंहावलोकितं चैव मण्डूकप्लुतमेव च ।; गड्गाप्रवाहवच्चापि अधिकारास्त्रिधा मताः ॥
aghikārasūtraa superintending aphorism, which gives no meaning of itself where it is mentioned, but gives its meaning in the number of aphorisms that follow: e. gthe rules प्रत्यय:, परश्च and अाद्युदात्तश्च P. III.1.1, 2, 3 or सह सुपा. P.II.1.4.
adhyāsasuperimposition : a relation between a word and its sense according to the grammarians; confer, compare Vāk. Pad. II.240. (2) appendage; confer, compare आहुस्त्वेकपदा अन्ये अध्यासानेकपातिनः Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.)XVII.43.
adhyai,adhyainkṛt affixes substituted in the place of तुम् of the infinitive in Vedic Literature (P. III.4.9.), e. g. पिबध्यैः when अध्यैन् is substituted, the initial vowel of the word becomes उदात्त. e. g. कर्मण्युपाचारध्यै ।
anaḍ(1)substitute अन् as Samāsānta at the end of a Bahuvrīhi compound in the feminine for the last letter of the word ऊधस् and for that of धनुस् in all genders exempli gratia, for example कुण्डोघ्नी (by applying ई to कुण्डोधन्), शार्ङ्गधन्वा, अधिज्यधन्वा; confer, compare P V.4.131, 132; (2) substitute अन् for the last letter of the words अस्थि, दधि et cetera, and others before the affixes of the instrumental and the following cases beginning with a vowel e. g. अस्थ्ना, दध्ना, अक्ष्णा et cetera, and others confer, compare P. VII. 1.75; (3) substitute अन् for the last letter of the word सखि, of words ending in ऋ,as also of उशनस् and others before the nominative singular. affix सु. e. g. सखा, कर्ता, उशना confer, compare P. VII.1.93, 94.
ananubanghakawithout any mute significatory letter attached; अननुबन्धकपरिभाषा is the short name given to the maxim-'अननुबन्धकग्रहणे न सानुबन्धकस्य ग्रह णम्' See M.Bh. on I.3.1: V.2.9. There is a reading in the Paribhāṣenduśekhara of Nāgeśa. निरनुबन्धकग्रहणे for अननुबन्धकग्रहणे, in which case the परिभाषा is called निरनुबन्धकपरिभाषा. See Paribhāṣenduśekhara of Nāgeśa. Pari. 81.
anantara(1)immediate, contiguous अव्यवहित. confer, compare हलोनन्तराः संयोगः P.1. 1.7, also गतिरनन्तरः P. VI.2.49: confer, compare अनन्तरं संयोगः V. Pr.I.48. ; (2) nearest, as compared with others of the same type; confer, compare अथवा अनन्तरा या प्राप्तिः सा प्रतिषिध्यते M.Bh. on I.1.43; confer, compare Pari. Śek. अनन्तरस्य विधिर्वा भवति प्रतिषेधो वा, which means that a prescriptive or prohibitive rule applies to the nearest and not to the distant one.Par.Śek. 61,Cān. Par.30.
anantyanon-final confer, compare अनन्त्यविकारे अन्त्यसदेशस्य when a change does not concern a final letter then it concerns that which immediately precedes the final, Paribhāṣenduśekhara of Nāgeśa. Pari 95. confer, compare also Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). VI.1.13 Vārt 5.
ananyanot different, the same: confer, compare एकदेशविकृतमनन्यवत् that which has got a change regarding one of its parts is by no means something else; Paribhāṣenduśekhara of Nāgeśa. Pari. 37.
ananyavadbhāvabeing the same, being looked upon as not different. See अनन्य a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page..
anabhidhānainability to express the meaning desiredition The expression न वा अनभिधानात् frequently occurs in the Mahābhāṣya referring to such words or phrases as could be formed by rules of grammar or could be used according to rules but,are not found in current use recognized by learned persons or scholars; confer, compare तच्चानभिधानं यत्राप्तैरुक्तं तत्रैव, अन्यत्र तु यथालक्षणं भवत्येव Padamañj. on III. 2.1;also confer, compare अनभिधानाद् व्यधिकरणानां बहुव्रीहिर्न भविष्यति । यत्र त्वभिधानमस्ति तत्र वैयधिकरण्येपि भवत्येव समासः, कण्ठेकाल इति; Kāśikāvivaraṇapañjikā, a commentary on the Kāśikāvṛtti by Jinendrabuddhi, called Nyāsa. on II. 2.24: for examples of अनभिधान, sec also M.Bh.अभिधानलक्षणाः कृत्तद्धितसमासाः अनभिधानान्न भविष्यन्ति Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on III.3.19. also on III. 2.1. V.5, IV.2.1. See Kāś. on III,1.22, III.3.158.
anabhihitanot conveyed or expressed by another id est, that is by any one of the four factors viz.verbal affix, kṛt affix,taddhita affix and compound. The rule अनभिहिते (P. II.3.I) and the following rules lay down the different case affixes in the sense of the different Kārakas or auxiliaries of the verbal activity, provided they are not shown or indicated in any one of the a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.mentioned four ways; e. g. see the acc. case in कटं करोति, the inst, case in दात्रेण लुनाति, the dative case case in देवदत्ताय गां ददाति, the ablative case. case in ग्रामादा गच्छति, or the locative casecase in स्थाल्यां पचति.
anabhyāsaa wording which does not contain any reduplicative syllable; an epithet applied to such roots as are not to be reduplicated a second time before affixes of the perfect, as they are already reduplicated; confer, compare लिटि धातोरनभ्यासस्य P. VI.1.8.
anarthāntaramsynonym, synonymous, conveying no different sense, exempli gratia, for example सङ्घः समूहः समुदाय इत्यनर्थान्तरम् । M.Bh. on P. V.1.59; अपि च बुद्धिः संप्रत्यय इत्यनर्थान्तरम् M.Bh. on P.I.1.56.
anarthāntaravācinaḥnot conveying any different sense, अनर्थान्तरवाचिनौ अनर्थकौ M.Bh. on I.4.93.
anavakāśatvaabsence of any opportunity of taking effect, scopelessness considered in the case of a particular rule, as a criterion for setting aside that general rule which deprives it of that opportunity confer, compare अनवकाशत्वं निरवकाशत्वं वा बाधकत्वे बीजम्. This अनवकाशत्व is slightly different from अपवादत्व or particular mention which is defined usually by the words सामान्यविधिरुत्सर्गः । विशेषविधिरपवादः ।
anavayavaliterally having no parts; impartite; without any concern with the individual component parts; application in totality; confer, compare सिद्धं तु धर्मोपदेशने अनवयवविज्ञानाद्यथा लौकिकवैदिकेषु P. VI. 1.84 Vārt 5 and the Bhāṣya thereon; अस्मिञ् शास्त्रे अनवयवेन शास्त्रार्थसंप्रत्ययः स्यात् । a rule in grammar applies to all cases where its application is possible; it cannot be said to have its purpose served by applying to a few cases only.
anākāṅkṣanot depending on another for the completion of its sense: confer, compare न यद्यनाकाङ्क्षे P. III.4.23, and Kāśikāvivaraṇapañjikā, a commentary on the Kāśikāvṛtti by Jinendrabuddhi, called Nyāsa. thereon which explains अनाकाङक्षे as न विद्यते आकाङ्क्षा अपेक्षा यस्य तस्मिन्.
anādaraabsence of consideration; disregard: confer, compare षष्ठी चानादरे P.II.3.38.
anānantaryanot a close relation; distance: confer, compare क्वचिच्च संनिपातकृतमानन्तर्य शास्त्रकृतमनान्तर्ये क्वचिच्च नैव संनिपातकृतं नापि शास्त्रकृतम् । Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on VIII.3.13.
anānupūrvyasaṃhitāthat saṁhitā text which has an order of words in it, which is different from what obtains in the Pada-pāṭha, and which appears appropriate according to the sense intended in the passage. There are three places of such combinations of words which are not according to the succcession of words in the Pada-pāṭha, quoted in the R.Pr. शुनश्चिच्छेपं निदितं सहस्रात् Rk. Saṁ. V.2.7, नरा वा शंसं पूषणमगोह्यम् Rk. Saṁ. X. 64.3; नरा च शंसं दैव्यम् Rk. Saṁh. IX. 86. 42. confer, compare एता अनानुपूर्व्यसंहिताः । न ह्येतेषां त्रयाणां पदानुपूर्व्येण संहितास्ति Uvvaṭa's Bhāṣya on the Prātiśākhya works.on Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) II.78.
anāpyahaving or possessing no āpya or object; intransitive (root): confer, compare चालशब्दार्थाद् अनाप्याद् युच् Cāndra I.2 97 standing for चलनशब्दार्थाद् अकर्मकाद् युच् P. III.2.148.
anārṣa(1)non-vedic: not proceeding from any Ṛṣi, or Vedic Seer, confer, compare संबुद्धौ शाकल्यस्येतौ अनार्षे P. I.1.16, also Kāś. on the same: confer, compare किमिदमुपस्थितं नाम । अनार्ष इतिकरणः M.Bh.on VI.1.129: (2) pertaining to the Padapāṭha which is looked upon as अनार्ष i, e. not proceeding from any Vedic Seer; confer, compare अनार्षे इतिकरणः । स च द्व्यक्षर आद्युदात्तश्च, Uvvaṭa's Bhāṣya on the Prātiśākhya works.on Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) III.23; confer, compare also Atharvaveda Prātiśākhya. III. 1.3.
anikṛt affix in the sense of curse, exempli gratia, for example अजीवनिस्ते शठ भूयात्; confer, compareआक्रोशे नञि अनिः P.III.3.112. This affix अनि gets its न् changed into ण् after ऋ or रेफ of the preceding preposition as in अप्रयाणिः;confer, compare Kāś, on VIII.4.29.
anitya(1)not nitya or obligatory optional; said of a rule or paribhāṣā whose application is voluntary). Regarding the case and con= jugational affixes it can be said that those affixes can, in a way: be looked upon as nitya or obligatory, as they have to be affixed to a crude nominal base or a root; there being a dictum that no crude base without an affix can be used as also, no affix alone without a base can be usedition On the other hand, the taddhita and kṛt affixes as also compounds are voluntary as, instead of them an independent word or a phrase can be used to convey the sense. For a list of such nitya affixes see Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on V. 4.7; (2) the word अनित्य is also used in the sense of not-nitya, the word नित्य being taken to mean कृताकृतप्रसङ्गि occurring before as well as after another rule has been applied, the latter being looked upon as अनित्य which does not do so. This 'nityatva' has got a number of exceptions and limitations which are mentioned in Paribhāṣās 43-49 in the Paribhāṣenduśekhara.
anukarṣaṇadragging (from the preceding rule) to the following rule taking the previous rule or a part of it as understood in the following rule or rules in order; the same as अनुवृत्ति; confer, compare अनुकर्षणार्थश्चकारः Kāś. on II. 4.18, III.2.26, VII. 1.48: cf also the Paribhāṣā; चानुकृष्टं नोत्तरत्र -that which is attracted from a preceding rule by the particle च is not valid in the rule that follows; Paribhāṣenduśekhara of Nāgeśa. Pari. 78.
anukramaright or regular order in a Vedic recital, called क्रम. e. g. वायव: स्थ.
anudāttanon-udatta, absence of the acute accent;one of the Bāhyaprayatnas or external efforts to produce sound. This sense possibly refers to a stage or a time when only one accent, the acute or उदात्त was recognized just as in English and other languages at present, This udatta was given to only one vowel in a single word (simple or compound) and all the other vowels were uttered accentless.id est, that is अनुदात्त. Possibly with this idea.in view, the standard rule 'अनुदात्तं पदमेकवर्जम्'* was laid down by Panini. P.VI.1.158. As, however, the syllable, just preceding the accented ( उदात्त ) syllable, was uttered with a very low tone, it was called अनुदात्ततर, while if the syllables succeeding the accented syllable showed a gradual fall in case they happened to be consecutive and more than two, the syllable succeeding the उदात्त was given a mid-way tone, called स्वरितः confer, compare उदात्तादनुदात्तस्य स्वरितः. Thus, in the utterance of Vedic hymns the practice of three tones उदात्त, अनुदात्त and स्वरित came in vogue and accordingly they are found defined in all the Prātiśākhya and grammar works;confer, compare उच्चैरुदात्तः,नीचैरनुदात्तः समाहारः स्वरितः P.I.2.29-31, T.Pr.I.38-40, V.Pr.I.108-110, Anudātta is defined by the author of the Kāśikāvṛtti as यस्मिन्नुच्चार्यमाणे गात्राणामन्ववसर्गो नाम शिथिलीभवनं भवति, स्वरस्य मृदुता, कण्ठविवरस्य उरुता च स: अनुदात्तः confer, compare अन्ववसर्गो मार्दवमुरुता स्वस्येति नीचैःकराणि शब्दस्य Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.2.29,30. Cfeminine. also उदात्तश्चानुदात्तश्च स्वरितश्च त्रयः स्वराः । अायामविश्रम्भोक्षपैस्त उच्यन्तेSक्षराश्रयाः ॥ Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) III.1. The term anudātta is translated by the word 'grave' as opposed to acute' (udātta,) and 'circumflex' (svarita); (2) a term applied to such roots as have their vowel अनुदात्त or grave, the chief characteristic of such roots being the non-admission of the augment इ before an ārdhadhātuka affix placed after them. ( See अनिट्, ).
anudāttataraquite a low tone, completely grave; generally applied to the tone of that grave or anudātta vowel which is immediately followed by an acute ( उदात्त ) vowel. When the three Vedic accents were sub-divided into seven tones viz. उदात्त, उदात्ततर्, अनुदात्त, अनुदात्ततर, स्वरित, स्वरितस्थोदात्त and एकश्रुति corresponding to the seven musical notes, the अनुदात्ततर was the name given to the lowest of them all. अनुदात्ततर was termed सन्नतर also; confer, compare उदात्तस्वरितपरस्य सन्नतरः P.I.2.40; confer, compare also M, Bh. on I.2.33.
anudāttetliterally one whose mute significatory letter is uttered with a grave accent: a term applied to a root characterized by an indicatory mute vowel accented grave, the chief feature of such a root being that it takes only the Ātmanepada affixes c. g. आस्ते, वस्ते, et cetera, and others; confer, compare अनुदात्तङित आत्मनेपदम् P. I.3.12; such a root, in forming a derivative word in the sense of habit, takes the affix युच् e. g. वर्त्तनः, वर्धन: et cetera, and others provided the root begins with a consonant; confer, compare अनुदात्तेतश्र हलादेः P. III.2.149.
anudeśa(1)reference, mention, statement referring to a preceding element. confer, compare यथासंख्यमनुदेशः समानाम् P.I. 3.10; confer, compare आसिद्धवचनात् सिद्धमिति चेद् उत्सर्गलक्षणानामनुदेशः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). I.1.57, Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 3. (2) declaration, prescription : the same as अतिदेश. confer, compare स्थान्यादेशपृथक्त्वादेशे स्थानिवद् अनुदेशो गुरुवद् गुरुपुत्र इति यथा P. I.1.56 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 1; (3) a grammatical operation confer, compare यथासंख्यमनुदेशः समानाम् ! समसंबन्धी विधिर्यथासंख्यं स्यात् Sid. Kau. on P.I. 8.10. See the word अनुद्देश in this sense confer, compare संख्यातानामनूद्देशो यथासंख्यम् V, Pr.I.143.
anunādaa fore-sound : a preceding additional sound which is looked upon as a fault: e. g. ह्वयामि whom pronounced as अह्वयामि. This sound is uttered before an initial sonant consonant. It is also uttered before initial aspirates or visarga. confer, compare घोषवतामनुनादः पुरस्ताद् आदिस्थानां, क्रियते धारणं वा । सोष्मोष्माणामनुनादोप्यनादः Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XIV.18,19.
anunāsika(a letter)uttered through the nose and mouth both, as different from anusvāra which is uttered only through the nose. confer, compare मुखनासिकावचनोनुनासिकःP.I.1.8, and Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). thereon. The anunāsika or nasal letters are the fifth letters of the five classes ( id est, that is ङ्, ञ्, ण्, न्, म् ) as also vowels अ, इ, उ and semivowels when so pronounced, as ordinarily they are uttered through the mouth only; ( exempli gratia, for example अँ, आँ, et cetera, and others or य्यँ, व्वँ, ल्लँ et cetera, and others in सय्यँन्ता, सव्वँत्सरः, सँल्लीनः et cetera, and others) The अनुनासिक or nasalized vowels are named रङ्गवर्ण and they are said to be consisting of three mātras. confer, compare अष्टौ आद्यानवसानेsप्रगृह्यान् आचार्या आहुरनुनासिकान् स्वरान् । तात्रिमात्रे शाकला दर्शयन्ति Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) I.63.64; confer, compare also अप्रग्रहाः समानाक्षराणि अनुनासिकानि एकेषाम् T. Pr XV.6. Trivikrama, a commentator on the Kātantra vyākaraṇa Sūtra.Sūtras, explains अनुनासिक as अनु पश्चात् नासिकास्थानं उच्चारणं एषां इत्यनुनासिकाः । पूर्वं मुखस्थानमुच्चारणं पश्चान्नासिकास्थानमुच्चारणमित्यर्थः । अनुग्रहणात्केवलनासिकास्थानोच्चारणस्य अनुस्वारस्य नेयं संज्ञा । and remarks further पूर्वाचार्यप्रसिद्धसंज्ञेयमन्वर्था । Com. by Tr. on Kat. I 1.13. Vowels which are uttered nasalized by Pāṇini in his works viz. सूत्रपाठ, धातुपाठ, गणपाठ et cetera, and others are silent ones i. e. they are not actually found in use. They are put by him only for the sake of a complete utterance, their nasalized nature being made out only by means of traditional convention. e. g. एध, स्पर्ध et cetera, and others confer, compare उपदेशेSजनुनासिक इत् P.I.3.2; confer, compare also प्रतिज्ञानुनासिक्याः पाणिनीयाः Kāś on I.3.2.
anupapattidiscord, absence of validity, incorrect interpretation; confer, compareप्रथमानुपपत्तिस्तु M.Bh on I.4.9.
anuparipādya(संहिता)the Pada text of the Vedic Saṁhitā.
anupasarjananot subordinated in wordrelation, principal member; confer, compare अनुपसर्जनात् P. IV.I.14 and M.Bh. thereon; cf also Par. Śek Pari. 26.
anupradānaan effort outside the mouth in the production of sound at the different vocal organs such as कण्ठ, तालु et cetera, and others which is looked upon as an external effort or bāhyaprayatna. अनुप्रदान is one of the three main factors in the production of sound which are ( 1 ) स्थान, ( 2 ) करण or आभ्यन्तरप्रयत्न and ( 3 ) अनुप्रदान or बाह्यप्रयत्न; confer, compare स्थाकरणप्रयत्नेभ्यो वर्णा जायन्ते Cān. The commentator on Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.describes अनुप्रदान as the मूलकारण or उपादानकारण, the main cause in the production of articulate sound confer, compare अनुप्रदीयते अनेन वर्णः इति अनुप्रदानम्: cf also अनुप्रदीयते इत्यनुप्रदानं प्रयत्न इत्यर्थः; Uvvaṭa's Bhāṣya on the Prātiśākhya works.on Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XIII. I. Generally two main varieties of बाह्यप्रयत्न are termed अनुप्रदान which are mentioned as (i) श्वासानुप्रदान (emission of breath) and नादानुप्रदान (resonance), the other varieties of it such as विवार, संवार, घोष, अघोष, अल्पप्राण, मह्मप्राण, उदात्त, अनुदात्त and स्वरित being called merely as बाह्यप्रयत्न.
anubandhaa letter or letters added to a word before or after it, only to signify some specific purpose such as (a) the addition of an afix (e. g. क्त्रि, अथुच् अङ् et cetera, and others) or (b) the substitution of गुण, वृद्धि or संप्रसारण vowel or (c) sometimes their prevention. These anubandha letters are termed इत् (literally going or disappearing) by Pāṇini (confer, compare उपदेशेजनुनासिक इत् et cetera, and others I.3.2 to 9), and they do not form an essential part of the word to which they are attached, the word in usage being always found without the इत् letter. For technical purposes in grammar, however, such as आदित्व or अन्तत्व of affixes which are characterized by इत् letters, they are looked upon as essential factors, confer, compare अनेकान्ता अनुबन्धाः, एकान्ता:, etc, Paribhāṣenduśekhara of Nāgeśa. Pari. 4 to 8. Although पाणिनि has invariably used the term इत् for अनुबन्ध letters in his Sūtras, Patañjali and other reputed writers on Pāṇini's grammar right on upto Nāgeśa of the 18th century have used the term अनुबन्ध of ancient grammarians in their writings in the place of इत्. The term अनुबन्ध was chosen for mute significatory letters by ancient grammarians probably on account of the analogy of the अनुबन्ध्य पशु, tied down at sacrifices to the post and subsequently slaughteredition
anubhūtisvarūpācāryaa writer of the twelfth century who wrote a work on grammar called सरस्वती-प्रक्रिया or सारस्वतप्रक्रिया, He has also written धातुपाठ and आख्यातप्रक्रिया. The grammar is a short one and is studied in some parts of India.
anumnot allowing the addition of the augment नुम् (id est, that is letter न् ) after the last vowel; The term is used, in connection with the present participle. affix, by Pāṇini in his rule शतुरनुमो नद्यजादी VI.1.173.
anulomasaṃdhicombination according to the alphabetical order; a kind of euphonic alteration ( संधि ) where the vowel comes first. e.gहव्यवाट् + अग्निः where ट् is changed to द्; एषः देवः= एष देवः confer, compare Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) II. 8. (Sce अनुलोम ).
anuvartanacontinuation or recurrence of a word from the preceding to the succeeding rule; the same as anuvṛtti; confer, compare अनुवर्तन्ते नाम विधयः । न चानुवर्तनादेव भवन्ति। किं तर्हि । यत्नाद्भवन्तीति Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.1.3.
anuvṛttirepetition or recurrence of a word from the previous to the subsequent rule or rules, which is necessary for the sake of the intended interpretation. The word is of common use in books on Pāṇini's grammar. This recurrence is generally continuous like the stream of a river ( गङ्गास्रोतोवत् ); sometimes however, when it is not required in an intermediate rule, although it proceeds further, it is named मण्डूकप्लुत्यानुवृत्ति. In rare cases it is taken backwards in a sūtra work from a subsequent rule to a previous rule when it is called अपकर्ष.
anuśāsanatraditional instruction; treatment of a topic; exempli gratia, for example अथ शब्दानुशासनम् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). I. 1.1 where the word is explained as अनुशिष्यन्ते संस्क्रियन्ते व्युत्पाद्यन्ते अनेन इति अनुशासनम्.
anuṣaṅga(1)literally attaching, affixing: augment, अनुषज्यते असौ अनुषङ्गः; (2) a term for the nasal letter attached to the following consonant which is the last, used by ancient grammarians; confer, compare अव्यात्पूर्वे मस्जेरनुषङ्गसंयेगादिलोपार्थम् confer, compare P.I.1.47 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini).2 and M.Bh. thereon; confer, compare थफान्तानां चानुषङ्गिणाम् Kat. IV. 1.13. The term अनुषङ्ग is defined in the kātantra grammar as व्यञ्जनान्नः अनुषङ्ग. The term is applied to the nasal consonant न् preceding the last letter of a noun base or a root base; penultimate nasal of a root or noun base: Kātantra vyākaraṇa Sūtra.II.1.12.
anusaṃhitaṃaccording to the Saṁhitā text of the Vedas: confer, compareएतानि नोहं गच्छन्ति अध्रिगो अनुसंहितम् Bhartṛihari's Mahābhāṣyadīpikā p. 9; confer, compare also Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XI.31, also XV.33, where the word is explained as संहिताक्रमेण by Uvaṭa.
anūddeśastatement or mention immediately afterwards; the same as the word अनुदेश used by Pāṇini in I.3.10, confer, compare संख्यातानामनूद्देशो यथासंख्यम् । अनूद्देशः पश्चादुद्देशः Uvaṭa on Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.I. 143.
anekaśeṣahaving no ekaśeṣa topic in it; a term applied to the Daiva Grammar which does not discuss the ekaśeṣa topic to which Pāṇini has devoted ten rules from I. 2.64 to 73.
anejantanot ending in a diphthong: cf नानुबन्धकृतमनेजन्तत्व म् Paribhāṣenduśekhara of Nāgeśa. Par.7
antaḥkāryaliterally interior operation; an operation inside a word in its formation-stage which naturally becomes antaraṅga as contrasted with an operation depending on two complete words after their formation which is looked upon as bahiraṅga.
antaraṅgaa highly technical term in Pāṇini's grammar applied in a variety of ways to rules which thereby can supersede other rules. The term is not used by Pāṇini himselfeminine. The Vārtikakāra has used the term thrice ( Sec I. 4. 2 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 8, VI.1.106 Vart.10 and VIII.2.6 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). I) evidently in the sense of immediate', 'urgent', 'of earlier occurrence' or the like. The word is usually explained as a Bahuvrīhi compound meaning 'अन्त: अङ्गानि निमित्तानि यस्य' (a rule or operation which has got the causes of its application within those of another rule or operation which consequently is termed बहिरङ्ग). अन्तरङ्ग, in short, is a rule whose causes of operation occur earlier in the wording of the form, or in the process of formation. As an अन्तरङ्ग rule occurs to the mind earlier, as seen a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page., it is looked upon as stronger than any other rule, barring of course अपवाद rules or exceptions, if the other rule presents itself simultaneously. The Vārtikakāra, hence, in giving preference to अन्तरङ्ग rules, uses generally the wording अन्तरङ्गबलीयस्त्वात् which is paraphrased by अन्तरङ्गं बहिरङ्गाद् बलीयः which is looked upon as a paribhāṣā. Grammarians, succeeding the Vārtikakāra, not only looked upon the बहिरङ्ग operation as weaker than अन्तरङ्ग, but they looked upon it as invalid or invisible before the अन्तरङ्ग operation had taken placcusative case. They laid down the Paribhāṣā असिद्धं बहिरङ्गमन्तरङ्गे which has been thoroughly discussed by Nāgeśa in his Paribhāṣendusekhara. The अन्तरङ्गत्व is taken in a variety of ways by Grammarians : (l) having causes of application within or before those of another e. g. स्येनः from the root सिव् (सि + उ+ न) where the यण् substitute for इ is अन्तरङ्ग being caused by उ as compared to guṇa for उ which is caused by न, (2) having causes of application occurring before those of another in the wording of the form, (3) having a smaller number of causes, (4) occurring earlier in the order of several operations which take place in arriving at the complete form of a word, (5) not having संज्ञा (technical term) as a cause of its application, ( 6 ) not depending upon two words or padas, (7) depending upon a cause or causes of a general nature (सामान्यापेक्ष) as opposed to one which depends on causes of a specific nature ( विशेषापेक्ष).
antaraṅgaparibhāṣāthe phrase is used generally for the परिभाषा "असिद्धं बहिरङ्गमन्तरङ्गे' described a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.. See the word अन्तरङ्ग. The परिभाषा has got a very wide field of application and is used several times in setting aside difficulties which present themselves in the formation of a word. Like many other paribhāṣās this paribhāṣā is not a paribhāṣā of universal application.
antaratamavery close or very cognate being characterized (l) by the same place of utterance, or (2) by possessing the same sense, or (3) by possessing the same qualities, or (4) by possessing the same dimension ; cf स्थानेन्तरतमः P.I. I.50 and Kāś. thereon अान्तर्यं स्थानार्थगुणुप्रमाणतः स्थानतः दण्डाग्रम् , अर्थतः वतण्डी चासौ युवतिश्च वातण्ड्ययुवतिः । गुणतः पाकः, त्यागः, रागः । प्रमाणतः अमुष्मै अमूभ्याम् ॥
antarhitaseparated by a dissimilar element; confer, compare यूनि चान्तर्हित अप्राप्तिः P.IV. 1.93 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 5. व्यञ्जनान्तर्हितोपि उदात्तपरः अनुदात्तः स्वरितमापद्यते T. Pr.XIV.30; confer, compare also Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) III.9.
antavadbhāvasupposed condition of being at the end obtained by the single substitute(एकादेश) for the final of the preceding and the initial of the succeeding word. confer, compare अन्तादिवच्च । योयमेकादेशः स पूर्वस्यान्तवत् परस्थादिवत् स्यात् । Sid. Kau. on अन्तादिवच्च P.VI. 1.84.
anyapadārthaanother sense, sense different from what has been expressed by the wording given; confer, compare अनेकमन्यपदार्थे P.II.2.24; also अन्यपदार्थप्रधानो बहुव्रीहिः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on II.1.6.
anyasadṛśādhikaraṇaan object which is different from what is mentioned, yet similar to it confer, compare नञिवयुक्तमन्यसदृशा धिकरणे तथा ह्यर्थगति; । अब्राह्मणमानयेत्युक्ते ब्राह्मणसदृश आनीयते । नासौ लोष्टमानीय कृती भवति । Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. III.1.12
anyārtha(1)having another purpose or signification: confer, compare अन्यार्थं प्रकृतं अन्यार्थं भवति Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on l.1.23; (2) another sense which is different from what is expressed confer, compare अन्यार्थो बहुव्रीहिः Cān. II.2.46.
anvakṣarasaṃdhia combination of letters according to the order of the letters in the Alphabet; a samdhi or euphonic combination of a vowel and a consonant, called अन्वक्षर-अनुलोमसंधि where a vowel precedes a consonant; and अन्वक्षरप्रतिलोमसंधि where a consonant precedes a vowel, the consonant in that case being changed into the third of its class; एष स्य स च स्वराश्च पूर्वे भवति व्यञ्जनमुत्तरं यदेभ्यः। तेन्वक्षरसेधयेानुलोमाः प्रतिलोमाश्च विपर्यये त एव ।। R Pr. II.8.9 e. g. एष देवः, स देवः and others are instances of अन्वक्षरानुलोमसंधि where विसर्ग after the vowel is dropped; while हलव्यवाड् अग्निः is an instance of अन्वक्षरप्रतिलोमसंधि where the consonant ट् precedes the vowel अ.
anvaya(1)construing, construction: arrangement of words according to their mutual relationship based upon the sense conveyed by them, शब्दानां परस्परमर्थानुगमनम् । (2) continuance, continuation;confer, compare घृतघटतैलवट इति ; निषिक्ते घृते तैले वा अन्वयाद्विशेषणं भवति अयं घृतघटः, अयं तैलघट इति Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P.II. 1.1.
ap(1)kṛt affix अ, in the sense of verbal activity (भाव) or any verbal relation (कारक) excepting that of an agent, (कर्तृ) applied to roots ending in ऋ or उ and the roots ग्रह्,वृ,दृ et cetera, and others mentioned in P. III.3.58 and the following rules in preference to the usual affix घञ. exempli gratia, for example करः, गरः, शरः, यवः, लवः, पवः, ग्रहः, स्वनः etc, confer, compare P.III, 3.57-87 ; (2) compound-ending अप् applied to Bahuvrīhi compounds in the feminine gender ending with a Pūraṇa affix as also to Bahuvrīhi compounds ending with लोमन् preceded by अन्त् or वहिर् e. g. कल्याणीपञ्चमा रात्रयः, अन्तर्लोमः,बहिर्लोमः पटः confer, compare P. V. 4.116, 117.
apakarṣa(1)deterioration of the place or instrument of the production of sound resulting in the fault called निरस्त; confer, compare स्थानकरणयेारपकर्षेण निरस्तं नाम दोष उत्पद्यते, Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XIV.2; (2) drawing back a word or words from a succeeding rule of grammar to the preceding one; confer, compare "वक्ष्यति तस्यायं पुरस्तादपकर्षः, Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on II.2.8. (3) inferiority (in the case of qualities) न च द्रव्यस्य प्रकर्षापकर्षौ स्तः ।
apāya(1)point of departure, separation; confer, compare ध्रुवमपायेपादानम् P.I.4.24; (2) disappearance; confer, compare संनियेागशिष्टानामन्यतरापाये उभयोरप्यपायः । तद्यथा । देवदत्तयज्ञदत्ताभ्यामिदं कर्म कर्तव्यम् । देवदत्तापाये यज्ञदत्तेपि न करोति Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on IV.1.36.
apialso in addition to; अपि is used sometimes to mean absolute of or ungualified by any condition; confer, compare अन्येभ्येपि दृश्यते । अपिशब्दः सर्वोपाधिव्यभिचारार्थः । निरुपपदादपि भवति । धीवा पीवा । KS. on P. III. 2.75, III. 2.101, VII. 1.38; confer, compare अपिग्रहणे व्यभिचारार्थम् ) Durgasiṁha's Kātantra-Sūtravṛtti. on Kātantra vyākaraṇa Sūtra.II.3.64.
apitnot marked with the mute letter प्, A Sārvadhātuka affix not marked with mute प् is looked upon as marked with ड् and hence it prevents the guṇa or vṛddhi substitution for the preceding vowel or for the penultimate vowel if it be अ. e. g. कुरुतः तनुतः, कुर्वन्ति where no guṇa takes place for the vowel उ confer, compare सार्वधातुकमपित्. P.I.2.4.
apoddhāradisintegration of the constituent elements of a word; analysis; अपोद्धार पृथक्करणम् commentary on Vāk. Pad. II. 449: confer, compare अपोद्धारपदार्था ये ये चार्थाः स्थितलक्षणः Vāk. Pad.I.24.
appayadīkṣitaअप्पदीक्षित A famous versatile writer of the sixteenth century A. D. (1530-1600 ), son of रङ्गराजाध्वरीन्द्र a Dravid Brāhmaṇa. He wrote more than 60 smaller or greater treatises mainly on Vedānta, Mimāṁsā, Dharma and Alaṁkāra śāstras; many of his works are yet in manuscript form. The Kaumudi-prakāśa and Tiṅantaśeṣasaṁgraha are the two prominent grammatical works written by him. Paṇdit Jagannātha spoke very despisingly of him.
apradhāna(1)non-principal, subordinate, secondary, confer, compare अप्रधानमुपसर्जन-मिति, Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I. 2.43; (2) nonessential, non-predominent, confer, compare सहयुक्तेऽप्रधाने P. II. 2.19 and the instance पुत्रेण सहागतः पिता । Kāś. on II.2.19.
aprayeāga(1)non-employment of a word in spite of the meaning being available: confer, compare संभावनेलमिति चेत्सिद्धाप्रयोगे P.III.3.154; (2) non-employment confer, compare उक्तार्थानामप्रयोगः a standard dictum of grammar not allowing superfluous words which is given in M.Bh. on P.I.1.4 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 16 and stated in Cāndra and other grammars as a Paribhāṣā.
aprayoginnot-found in actual use among the people although mentioned in the śāstra-texts; a mute indicatory letter or letters. confer, compare अप्रयोगी इत् Sāk. I.1.5 Hem I.1.37 Jain.I.2.3 and M.Bh. Kaiyaṭa's Mahābhāṣyapradīpa.on III.8.31.
abāghakanot coming in the way of rules otherwise applicable; the word is used in connection with निपातन i. e. constituted or announced forms or specially formed words which are said to be अबाधक i. e. not coming in the way of forms which could be arrived at by application of the regular rules. Siradeva has laid down the Paribhāṣā अबाधकान्यपि निपातनानि भवन्ति defending the form पुरातन in spite of Pāṇini's specific mention of the word पुराण in the rule पुराणप्रोक्तेषुo IV. 3. 105.
abhinidhānaliterally that which is placed near or before; the first of the doubled class consonants; a mute or sparṣa consonant arising from doubling and inserted before a mute; confer, compare अघोषादूष्मणः परः प्रथमः अभिनिधानः स्पर्शपरात्तस्य सस्थानः ( Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.XIV. 9. ) explained by त्रिभाष्यरत्न as स्पर्शपरादघोषादूष्मणः परः प्रथम आगमस्तस्य स्पर्शस्य समानस्थानः अभिनिधानो भवति । अभिनिधीयते इत्यभिनिधानः आरोपणीयः इत्यर्थः । यथा यः क्कामयेत अश्मन्नूर्जम् । यः प्पाप्मना । The Ṛk. prātiśākhya explains the term अभिनिधान somewhat differently; confer, compare अभिनिधानं कृतसंहितानां स्पर्शन्ति:स्थानामपवाद्य रेफम् । संघारणं संवरणं श्रुतेश्च स्पर्शोदयानामपि चावसाने Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) VI. 5, explained by उव्वट as स्पर्शपराणां स्पर्शानां रेफं वर्जयित्वा अन्तःस्थानां च वर्णानां कृतसंहितानां च सतां संधारणं वर्णश्रुतेश्च संवरणं भवति । तदेतद् अभिनिधानं नाम । यथा उष मा षड् द्वा द्वा । ऋ. सं ८।६८।१४ इह षड् इत्यत्र अभिनिधानम् ॥ अभिनिघान possibly according to उव्वट here means the first of the doubled letter which, although the second letter is attached to it, is separately uttered with a slight pause after it. अभिनिधान means, in short, something like 'suppression.' The Ṛk. Tantra takes a still wider view and explains अभिनिधान as the first of a doubled consonant, cf ; अभिनिधानः । क्रमजं च पूर्वान्ततस्वरं भवति । Ṛktantra Prātiśākhya. 21.
abhiprāya(1)अभिप्रायसंधि a kind of euphonic combination where the nasal letter न् is dropped and the preceding vowel ( अ ) is nasalised e. g, दधन्याँ यः । स्ववाँ यातु : (2) view, purpose, intention; confer, compare तद् व्यक्तमाचार्यस्याभिप्रायो गम्येत, इदं न भवतीति; Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.1.27; confer, compare also स्वरितञितः कर्त्रभिप्राये क्रियाफले P.1.3.72.
abhedakanot bringing about a difference; not making different; nondiscriminant; confer, compare गुणाः अभेदकाः Paribhāṣenduśekhara of Nāgeśa. Pari. 109 confer, compare ननु च भो अभेदका अपि च गुणा दृश्यन्ते M. Bh on I.1.1.
abhedasaṃsargaa connection of unity, as noticed between the nominative case affix of the subject and the ending ति of a verb, which produces the sense.
abhedānvayarelation of non-difference as stated by the vaiyākaraṇas between an adjective and the substantive qualified by it. e, g. नीलमुत्पलम् is explained as नीलाभिन्नमुत्पलम्.
abhyaṃkara(BHASKARASHASTRI Abhyankar 1785-1870 A. D. )an eminent scholar of Sanskrit Grammar who prepared a number of Sanskrit scholars in Grammar at Sātārā. He has also written a gloss on the Paribhāṣenduśekhara and another one on the Laghu-Śabdenduśekhara. (VASUDEVA SHASTRI Abhyakar 863-1942 A. D.) a stalwart Sanskrit Pandit, who, besides writing several learned commentaries on books in several Sanskrit Shastras, has written a commentary named 'Tattvādarśa' on the Paribhāṣenduśekhara and another named 'Guḍhārthaprakāśa' on the Laghuśabdenduśekhara. (KASHINATH VASUDEVA Abhyankar, 1890-) a student of Sanskrit Grammar who has written महाभाष्यप्रस्तावना-खण्ड, and जैनेन्द्रपरिभाषावृत्ति and compiled the परिभाषासंग्रह and the present Dictionary of Sanskrit Grammar.
abhyastarepeated, redoubled word or wording or part of a word. The term अभ्यस्त is applied to the whole doubled expression in Pāṇini's grammar, confer, compare उभे अभ्यस्तम् P. VI.1.6; (2) the six roots with जक्ष् placed at the head viz. जक्ष् , जागृ, दरिद्रा , चकास्, शास्, दीधी and वेवी which in fact are reduplicated forms of घस् , गृ, द्रा, कास् , शस् , धी and वी.
abhyāhataomission of any sound; a fault of utterance. अम् (1)a technical brief term in Panini's grammar including vowels, semivowels, the letter ह् and nasals; (2) a significant term for the accusative case showing change or substitution or modification: confer, compare अं विकारस्य Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.I.28 explained as अमिति शब्दे विकारस्याख्या भवति । अमिति द्वितीय विभक्तेरुपलक्षणम् । (3) augment अ applied to the penultimate vowel of सृज् & दृश् (P. VI.1.58, 59 and VII.1.99) (4) substitute tor Ist person. singular. affix मिप्, by P.III.4.101 (5) Acc. singular. case affix अम् .
amutaddhita affix. affix अम् applied in Vedic Literature to किम्, words ending in ए, indeclinables and the affixes तर and तम: e. g. प्रतरं नयामः प्रतरं वस्यः confer, compare अमु च च्छन्दसि P. V. 4. 12.
ambūkṛtautterance (of words) accompanied by water drops coming out of the mouth; a fault of utterance or pronunciation; मुखात् विप्रुषो निर्गमनम् . It is explained differently in the Rk. Prātiśākhya; confer, compare ओष्ठाभ्यां नद्धं अम्बूकृतम्म्वृ (Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XIV.2.) held tight between the lips which of course, is a fault of pronunciation; confer, compareग्रस्तं निरस्तमविलम्बितं निर्हतं अम्बूकृतं ध्मात मथो विकम्पितम्. MBh. I. 1. पस्पशाह्निक.
ayāc,ayāṭsubstitutes for inst. sing affix टा in Vedic literature e. g. स्वप्नया, नावया.
artha(1)literally signification,conveyed sense or object. The sense is sometimes looked upon as a determinant of the foot of a verse: confer, compare प्रायोर्थो वृत्तमित्येते पादज्ञानस्य हेतवः Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XVII 16. It is generally looked upon as the determinant of a word (पद). A unit or element of a word which is possessed of an independent sense is looked upon as a Pada in the old Grammar treatises; confer, compare अर्थः पदमिति ऐन्द्रे; confer, compare also अर्थः पदम् Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.III.2, explained by उव्वट as अर्थाभिधायि पदम् । पद्यते गम्यते ज्ञायतेSर्थोनेनेति पदम् । There is no difference of opinion regarding the fact that, out of the four standard kinds of words नाम, आख्यात, उपसर्ग and निपात, the first two kinds नाम and अाख्यात do possess an independent sense of their own. Regarding possession of sense and the manner in which the sense is conveyed, by the other two viz. the Upasargas (prepositions) and Nipātas (particles) there is a striking difference of opinion among scholars of grammar. Although Pāṇini has given the actual designation पद to words ending with either the case or the conjugational affixes, he has looked upon the different units or elements of a Pada such as the base, the affix, the augment and the like as possessed of individually separate senses. There is practically nothing in Pāṇini's sūtras to prove that Nipātas and Upasargas do not possess an independent sense. Re: Nipātas, the rule चादयोऽसत्वे, which means that च and other indeclinables are called Nipātas when they do not mean सत्त्व, presents a riddle as to the meaning which च and the like should convey if they do not mean सत्त्व or द्रव्य id est, that is a substance. The Nipātas cannot mean भाव or verbal activity and if they do not mean सत्व or द्रव्य, too, they will have to be called अनर्थक (absolutely meaningless) and in that case they would not be termed Prātipadika, and no caseaffix would be applied to them. To avoid this difficulty, the Vārtikakāra had to make an effort and he wrote a Vārtika निपातस्य अनर्थकस्य प्रातिपदिकत्वम् । P. I.2.45 Vār. 12. As a matter of fact the Nipātas च, वा and others do possess a sense as shown by their presence and absence (अन्वय and व्यतिरेक). The sense, however, is conveyed rather in a different manner as the word समूह, or समुदाय, which is the meaning conveyed by च in रामः कृष्णश्च, cannot be substituted for च as its Synonym in the sentence राम: कुष्णश्च. Looking to the different ways in which their sense is conveyed by nouns and verbs on the one hand, and by affixes, prepositions and indeclinables on the other hand, Bhartṛhari, possibly following Yāska and Vyāḍi, has developed the theory of द्योतकत्व as contrasted with वाचकत्व and laid down the dictum that indeclinables, affixes and prepositions (उपसर्गs) do not directly convey any specific sense as their own, but they are mere signs to show some specific property or excellence of the sense conveyed by the word to which they are attached; confer, compare also the statement 'न निर्बद्धा उपसर्गा अर्थान्निराहुरिति शाकटायनः नामाख्यातयोस्तु कर्मोपसंयेगद्योतका भवन्ति । Nir 1.3. The Grammarians, just like the rhetoricians have stated hat the connection between words and their senses is a permanent one ( नित्य ), the only difference in their views being that the rhetoricians state that words are related; no doubt permanently, to their sense by means of संकेत or convention which solely depends on the will of God, while the Grammarians say that the expression of sense is only a natural function of words; confer, compare 'अभिधानं पुनः स्वाभाविकम्' Vārttika No.33. on P. I.2.64. For द्योतकत्व see Vākyapadīya of Bhartṛhari II. 165-206.
ardhamātrāhalf of a mātra or 'mora'., confer, compare अर्धमात्रालाघवेन पुत्रोत्सवं मन्यन्ते वैयाकरणाः Par. Śekh. Pari. 122, signifying that not a single element of utterance in Pāṇini's grammar is superfluous. In other words, the wording of the Sūtras of Pāṇini is the briefest possible, not being capable of reduction by even half a mora.
alontyavidhian operation, which, on the strength of its being enjoined by means of the genitive case, applies to the last letter of the wording put in the genitive; confer, compare नानर्थकेलोन्त्यविधिरनभ्यासविकारे Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.1.65, confer, compare अलोन्त्यस्य । षष्ठीनिर्दिष्टोन्त्यस्यादेशः स्यात् S.K. on P. I.1.52.
alaukikavigrahathe dissolution of a compound not in the usual popular manner. e. g. राजपुरुष: dissolved as राजन् ङस् पुरुष सु, as contrasted with the लौकिकविग्रह viz. राज्ञः पुरुष: । see also अधिहरि dissolved as हरि ङि in the अलौकिकविग्रह.
alpragrahaṇa(1)the word अल् actually used in Pāṇini's rule e. g. अपृक्त एकाल् प्रत्ययः P.I.2.41.(2) the wording as अल् or wording by mention of a single letter exempli gratia, for example अचि श्रुधातुभ्रुवांय्वो P, VI.4.77.
avagraha(1)separation of a compound word into its component elements as shown in the Pada-Pāṭha of the Vedic Saṁhitās. In the Padapāṭha, individual words are shown separately if they are combined by Saṁdhi rules or by the formation of a compound in the Saṁhitāpāṭha; exempli gratia, for example पुरोहितम् in the Saṁhitāpāṭha is read as पुरःsहितम्. In writing, there is observed the practice of placing the sign (ऽ) between the two parts, about which nothing can be said as to when and how it originatedition The AtharvaPrātiśākhya defines अवग्रह as the separation of two padas joined in Saṁhitā. (Atharvaveda Prātiśākhya. II.3.25; II.4.5). In the recital of the pada-pāṭha, when the word-elements are uttered separately, there is a momentary pause measuring one matra or the time required for the utterance of a short vowel. (See for details Vāj. Prāt. Adhāya 5). (2) The word अवग्रह is also used in the sense of the first out of the two words or members that are compounded together. See Kāśikā on P.VIII.4.26; confer, compare also तस्य ( इङ्ग्यस्य ) पूर्वपदमवग्रहः यथा देवायत इति देव-यत. Tai. Pr. I. 49. The term अवग्रह is explained in the Mahābhāṣya as 'separation, or splitting up of a compound word into its constitutent parts; confer, compare छन्दस्यानङोवग्रहो दृश्येत पितामह इति ।(Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on IV.2.36); also confer, compare यद्येवमवग्रहः प्राप्नोति । न लक्षणेन पदकारा अनुवर्त्याः। पदकारैर्नाम लक्षणमनुवर्त्यम् । यथालक्षणं पदं कर्तव्यम् (Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on III.1.109) where the Bhāṣyakāra has definitely stated that the writers of the Padapāṭha have to split up a word according to the rules of Grammar. (3) In recent times, however, the word अवग्रह is used in the sense of the sign (ऽ) showing the coalescence of अ (short or long) with the preceding अ (short or long ) or with the preceding ए or ओ exempli gratia, for example शिवोऽ र्च्यः, अत्राऽऽगच्छ. (4) The word is also used in the sense of a pause, or an interval of time when the constituent elements of a compound word are shown separately; confer, compare समासेवग्रहो ह्रस्वसमकालः (Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.V.1). (5) The word is also used in the sense of the absence of Sandhi when the Sandhi is admissible.
avagrahavirāmathe interval or pause after the utterance of the first member of a compound word when the members are uttered separately. This interval is equal to two moras according to Tait. Pr. while, it is equal to one mora according to the other Prātiśākhyas.
avaśiṣṭaliṅga(v.1. अविशिष्टलिङ्ग)a term occurring in the liṅgānuśāsana meaning 'possessed of such genders as have not been mentioned already either singly or by combination' id est, that is possessed of all genders.Under अवशिष्टलिङ्ग are mentioned indeclinables, numerals ending in ष् or न् , adjectives, words ending with kṛtya affixes id est, that is potential passive participles, pronouns, words ending with the affix अन in the sense of an instrument or a location and the words कति and युष्मद् (See पाणिनीय-लिङ्गानुशासन Sūtras 182-188).
avasthāstage, condition; stage in the formation of a word; e. g. उपदेशावस्था, लावस्था, et cetera, and others
avākṣaradeficient in one or more syllables. The word is mostly used in connection with a Vedic Mantra.
avibhāgapakṣaa view of grammarians according to which there are words which are looked upon as not susceptible to derivation. The terms अखण्डपक्ष and अव्युत्पन्नपक्ष are also used in the same sense.
avyakta(1)indistinct; inarticulate; confer, compare अव्यक्तानुकरणस्यात इतौ P. VI.1.98 also P.V.4.57; अव्यक्तं अपरिस्फुटवर्णम् Kāś. on P. VI.1.98; (2) a fault of pronunciation confer, compare नातिव्यक्तं न चाव्यक्तमेवं वर्णानुदीरयेत् ।
avyapavṛktaunseparated, undivided, inseparable, mixed; confer, compare नाव्यपवृक्तस्य अवयवे तद्विधिः यथा द्रव्येषु Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on Siva-sutra 4.V.9 whereon Kaiyaṭa remarks व्यपवृक्तं भेदः । अव्यपवृक्तं अभिन्नबुद्धिविषयमेकत्वालम्बनज्ञानग्राह्यं समुदायरूपम् ।
avyayaindeclinable, literally invariant, not undergoing a change. Pāṇini has used the word as a technical term and includes in it all such words as स्वर्, अन्तर् , प्रातर् etc, or composite expressions like अव्ययीभावसमास, or such taddhitānta words as do not take all case affixes as also kṛdanta words ending in म् or ए, ऐ, ओ, औ. He gives such words in a long list of Sutras P. I.1.37 to 41; confer, compare सदृशं त्रिषु लिङ्गेषु सर्वासु च विभक्तिषु । वचनेषु च सर्वेषु यन्न व्येति तदव्ययम् Kāś. on P.I.1.37.
avyayārthanirūpaṇaa work on the meanings of indeclinable words written in the sixteenth century A. D. by Viṭṭhala Śeṣa, grandson of Ramacandra Śeṣa the author of the Prakriyā Kaumudi.
avyavadhānaabsence of intervention between two things by something dissimilar; close sequence confer, compare अतज्जातीयकं हि लोके व्यवधायकं भवति Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.1.7. Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 8; cf also येन नाव्यवधानं तन ब्यवहितेपि वचनप्रामाण्यात् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on VII.3.44, VII.3.54, VII.4.l, VII.4.93. The term अव्यवाय is used in the same sense.
avyavasthāabsence of proper disposal; absence of a proper method regarding the application of a rule: confer, compare पुनर्ऋच्छिभावः पुनराडिति चक्रकमव्यवस्था प्राप्नोति Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.3.60 V. 5.
(1)Pratyāhāra or a brief term standing for all vowels, semivowels, and the fifth, fourth and third of the class-consonants; all letters excepting the surds and sibilants; (2) substitute अ for the word इदम् before affixes of cases beginning with the instrumental, and for एतद् before the taddhita affix. affixes त्र and तस्; see P.II.4.32 and 33; (3) substitute अ for the genitive case singular. case-affix ङस् after the words युष्मद् and अस्मद्; see P.VII.1.27.
aṣṭādhyāyīname popularly given to the Sūtrapāṭha of Pāṇini consisting of eight books (adhyāyas) containing in all 3981 Sūtras,as found in the traditional recital, current at the time of the authors of the Kāśika. Out of these 398l Sūtras, seven are found given as Vārtikas in the Mahābhāṣya and two are found in Gaṇapāṭha.The author of the Mahābhāṣya has commented upon only 1228 of these 3981 sūtras. Originally there were a very few differences of readings also, as observed by Patañjali ( see Mbh on I.4.1 ); but the text was fixed by Patañjali which, with a few additions made by the authors of the Kāśika,as observed a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page., has traditionally come down to the present day. The Pāṇini's Aṣṭādhyāyī. is believed to be one of the six Vedāṅga works which are committed to memory by the reciters of Ṛgveda. The text of the Pāṇini's Aṣṭādhyāyī. is recited without accents. The word अष्टाध्यायी was current in Patañjali's time; confer, compare शिष्टज्ञानार्था अष्टाध्यायी Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on VI. 3.109.
as(1)case affix of the nominative and accusative plural and the ablative and genitive singular (जस् , शस्, ङसि and ङस् ) (2) taddhita affix अस् ( असि ) added to पूर्व, अधर and अवर, by P.V.3.39: (3) compoundending अस् ( असिच् ) applied to the words प्रजा and मेधा standing at the end of a Bahuvrīhi compound (P.V.4.122): (4) Uṇādi affix अस् prescribed by the rule सर्वधातुभ्योऽसुन् and subsequent rules (628-678) to form words such as मनस्,सरस् et cetera, and others(5) ending syllable अस्, with or without sense, of words in connection with which special operations are given in grammar; confer, compare P.VI.4.14; confer, compare also अनिनस्मन्ग्रहणान्यर्थवता चानर्थकेन च तदन्तविधिं प्रयोजयन्ति Par.Śek. Pari. 16.
asaṃnikarṣa(1)separatedness as in the case of two distinct words;(2) absence of co-alescence preventing the sandhi; cf R.T. 68,70.
asamarthasamāsaa compound of two words, which ordinarily is inadmissible, one of the two words being more closely connected with a third word, but which takes place on the authority of usage, there being no obstacle in the way of understanding the sense to be conveyed; e. g. देवदत्तस्य गुरुकुलम् । देवदत्तस्य दासभार्या । असूर्यंपश्यानि मुखानि, अश्राद्धभोजी ब्राह्मणः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on II.1.1.
asamāsa(1)absence of a compound. उपसर्गादसमासेपि णोपदेशस्य P. VIII.4.14; (2) an expression conveying the sense of a compound word although standing in the form of separate words: चार्थे द्वन्द्ववचने असमासेपि वार्थसंप्रत्ययादनिष्टं प्राप्नोति । अहरहर्नयमानो गामश्वं पुरुषं पशुम् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on II.2.29.
asārūpyadissimilarity in apparent form (although the real wording in existence might be the same) e. g. टाप्, डाप् , चाप्; confer, compare नानुबन्धकृतमसारूप्यम् । Paribhāṣenduśekhara of Nāgeśa. Pari. 8.
asi(1)Uṇādi affix अस्; (2) taddhita affix. affix अस्. See a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page. the word अस्.
asicsamāsa-ending affix अस्. See a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page. the word अस्.
asiddhainvalid; of suspended validity for the time being: not functioning for the time being. The term is frequently used in Pāṇini's system of grammar in connection with rules or operations which are prevented, or held in suspense, in connection with their application in the process of the formation of a word. The term (असिद्ध) is also used in connection with rules that have applied or operations that have taken place, which are, in certain cases, made invalid or invisible as far as their effect is concerned and other rules are applied or other operations are allowed to take place, which ordinarily have been prevented by those rules which are made invalid had they not been invalidatedition Pāṇini has laid down this invalidity on three different occasions (1) invalidity by the rule पूर्वत्रासिद्धम् VIII.2.1. which makes a rule or operation in the second, third and fourth quarters of the eighth chapter of the Pāṇini's Aṣṭādhyāyī. invalid when any preceding rule is to be applied, (2) invalidity by the rule असिद्धवदत्राभात् which enjoins mutual invalidity in the case of operations prescribed in the Ābhīya section beginning with the rule असिद्धवत्राभात् (VI. 4.22.) and going on upto the end of the Pāda (VI.4.175), (3) invalidity of the single substitute for two letters, that has already taken place, when ष् is to be substituted for स्, or the letter त् is to be prefixed, confer, compare षत्वतुकोरसिद्धः (VI. 1.86). Although Pāṇini laid down the general rule that a subsequent rule or operation, in case of conflict, supersedes the preceding rule, in many cases it became necessary for him to set, that rule aside, which he did by means of the stratagem of invalidity given a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.. Subsequent grammarians found out a number of additional cases where it became necessary to supersede the subseguent rule which they did by laying down a dictum of invalidity similar to that of Pāṇini. The author of the Vārttikas, hence, laid down the doctrine that rules which are nitya or antaraṅga or apavāda, are stronger than, and hence supersede, the anitya, bahiraṅga and utsarga rules respectively. Later gram marians have laid down in general, the invalidity of the bahiraṅga rule when the antaraṅga rule occurs along with it or subsequent to it. For details see Vol. 7 of Vvyākaraṇa Mahābhāṣya(D. E. Society's edition) pages 217-220. See also Pari. Śek. Pari. 50.
asiddhatvainvalidity of a rule or operation on account of the various considerations sketched a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.. See असिद्ध.
asiddhaparibhāṣāthe same as Antaraṅga Paribhāṣā or the doctrine of the invalidity of the bahiraṅga operation. See the word असिद्ध a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.. For details see the Paribhāṣā 'asiddham , bahiraṅgam antaraṅge' Paribhāṣenduśekhara of Nāgeśa. Pari. 50 and the discussion thereon. Some grammarians have given the name असिद्धपरिभाषा to the Paribhāṣā असिद्धं बहिरङ्गमन्तरङ्गे as contrasted with अन्तरङ्गं बहुिरङ्कगाद् वलीयः which they have named as बहिरङ्गपरिभाषा.
asukthe augment अस् seen in Vedic Literature added to the nominative case. plural case-affix जस् following a nounbase ending in अ; e.g, जनासः, देवासः et cetera, and others cf आज्जसेरसुक् P. VII.1.50,51.
asunUṅādi affix अस् ( असुन् ) by सर्वधातुभ्योSसुन् वक्तव्यः Uṅ. Sū.628; confer, compare न वेत्तीति नवेदाः। वेतिरसुन्प्रत्ययान्तः Kāś. on P.VI.3.75.
asekṛt affix in the sense of the infinitive (तुमर्थे) in Vedic Literature,e.gजीवसे; confer, compare तुमर्थे सेसेनसेo P.III.4.9
astātitaddhita affix. affix अस्तात् in the sense of the base itself, but called विभक्ति, prescribed after words in the sense of 'direction', e. g. पुरस्तात्, अधस्तात् et cetera, and others confer, compare दिक्शब्देभ्यः सप्तमीपञ्चमीप्रथमाभ्येा दिग्देशकालेषु अस्तातिः P. V.3.27.
asvapadavigrahaa term used for those compounds, the dissolution of which cannot be shown by the members of the compound: e. g. सुमुखी; confer, compare भवति वै कश्चिदस्वपदविग्रहोपि बहुव्रीहिः । तद्यथा । शोभनं मुखमस्याः सुमुखीति । M.Bh. on V.4.5.
asvarakauntoned; a word without an accent, as different from a word which has an accent,but which is not uttered with that accent: cf अक्रियमाणे ह्युपदेशिवद्भावे...अान्तर्यत अांदेशा अस्वरकाणामस्वरकाः स्युः M.Bh. on VII. 1.2, VII. 1. 89.
ā(1)the long form of the vowel अ called दीर्घ,consisting of two mātrās, in contrast with (l) the short अ which consists of one mātrā and the protracted आ३ which consists of three mātrās; (2) substitute अा of two mātrās when prescribed by the word दीर्घ or वृद्धि for the short vowel अ; (3) upasarga अा (अाङ्) in the sense of limit exempli gratia, for example अा कडारादेका संज्ञा (P.I.4.1.) आकुमारं यशः पाणिनेः K. on II.1.13. आ उदकान्तात् (Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.1.14.) (4) indeclinable आ in the sense of remembrance e. g. आ एवं नु मन्यसे; confer, compare ईषदर्थे क्रियायोगे मर्यादाभिविधौ च यः । एतमातं ङितं विद्याद्वाक्यस्मरणयोरङित् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.1.14; (5) augment अा ( अाक् ) as seen in चराचर, वदावद et cetera, and others confer, compare Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). VI.1.12 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 6; (6) augment अा(आट्) prefixed to roots in the tenses लुङ्, लङ् and लृङ् (7) substitute अा prescribed for the last letter of pronouns before the taddhita affix. affixes दृक्,दृश, दृक्ष and वत्, as in तादृक्दृ, तादृश et cetera, and others; (8) feminine affix आ (टाप्, डाप् or चाप् ) added to nouns ending in अा; (9) substitute आ ( आ or अात्, or डा or आल् ) for case affixes in Vedic literature उभा यन्तारौ, नाभा पृथिव्याः et cetera, and others
ākusmīyaa group of 43 roots of the चुरादि class of roots beginning with the root चित् and ending with कुस्म् which are Ātmanepadin only.
ākṛtiliterally form; individual thing; confer, compare एकस्या अाकृतेश्चरितः प्रयोगो द्वितीयस्यास्तृतीयस्याश्च न भवति M.Bh on III.1.40 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini).6. The word is derived as आक्रियते सा आकृतिः and explained as संस्थानम्; confer, compare आक्रियते व्यज्यते अनया इति आकृतिः संस्थानमुच्यते Kāśikāvivaraṇapañjikā, a commentary on the Kāśikāvṛtti by Jinendrabuddhi, called Nyāsa. on IV.1.63; (2) general form which, in a way, is equivalent to the generic notion or genus; confer, compare आकृत्युपदेशात्सिद्धम् । अवर्णाकृतिरुपदिष्टा सर्वमवर्णकुलं ग्रहीष्यति Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ).I.1 Āhnika of the Pātañjala Mahābhāṣya. 1; (3) notion of genus; cf also यत्तर्हि तद् भिन्नेष्वभिन्नं छिनेष्वच्छिन्नं सामान्यभूतं स शब्दः । नेत्याह । अाकृतिर्नाम सा. Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). I.1.Āhnika of the Pātañjala Mahābhāṣya.1; (4) a metre consisting of 88 letters; confer, compare R. Prāt. XVI.56,57.
ākṣarasamāmnāyikadirectly or expressly mentioned in the fourteen Pratyāhāra Sūtras of Pāṇini; a letter actually mentioned by Pāṇini in his alphabet 'अइउण्', 'ऋलृक्' et cetera, and others
aākhyātaverbal form, verb; confer, compare भावप्रधानमाख्यातं सत्त्वप्रधानानि नामानि Nirukta of Yāska.I.1; चत्वारि पदजातानि नामाख्यातोपसर्गनिपाताश्च Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). I.1. Āhnika 1 ; also A.Prāt. XII. 5, अाकार अाख्याते पदादिश्च Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). I.2.37 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 2, आख्यातमाख्यातेन क्रियासातत्ये Sid. Kau. on II.1.72, क्रियावाचकमाख्यातं Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.V.1; confer, compare भारद्वाजकमाख्यातं भार्गवं नाम भाष्यते । भारद्वाजेन दृष्टत्वादाख्यातं भारद्वाजगोत्रम् V. Prāt. VIII. 52; confer, compare also Athar. Prāt.I.I.12, 18; 1.3.3,6; II.2.5 where ākhyāta means verbal form. The word also meant in ancient days the root also,as differentiated from a verb or a verbal form as is shown by the lines तन्नाम येनाभिदधाति सत्त्वं, तदाख्यातं येन भावं स धातुः R.Pr.XII.5 where 'आख्यात' and 'धातु' are used as synonyms As the root form such as कृ, भृ et cetera, and others as distinct from the verbal form, is never found in actual use, it is immaterial whether the word means root or verb.In the passages quoted a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page. from the Nirukta and the Mahābhāṣya referring to the four kinds of words, the word ākhyāta could be taken to mean root (धातु) or verb (क्रियापद). The ākhyāta or verb is chiefly concerned with the process of being and bccoming while nouns (नामानि) have sattva or essence, or static element as their meaning. Verbs and nouns are concerned not merely with the activities and things in this world but with every process and entity; confer, compare पूर्वापूरीभूतं भावमाख्यातेनाचष्टे Nir.I.;अस्तिभवतिविद्यतीनामर्थः सत्ता । अनेककालस्थायिनीति कालगतपौर्वापर्येण क्रमवतीति तस्याः क्रियात्वम् । Laghumañjūṣā. When a kṛt (affix). affix is added to a root, the static element predominates and hence a word ending with a kṛt (affix). affix in the sense of bhāva or verbal activity is treated as a noun and regularly declined;confer, compareकृदभिहितो भावे द्रव्यवद् भवति M.Bh. on II.2.19 and III. 1.67, where the words गति, व्रज्या, पाक and others are given as instances. Regarding indeclinable words ending with kṛt (affix). affixes such as कर्तुं, कृत्वा, and others, the modern grammarians hold that in their case the verbal activity is not shadowed by the static element and hence they can be,in a way, looked upon as ākhyātas; confer, compare अव्ययकृतो भावे Vaiyākaraṇabhūṣaṇa.
aākhyātavyākaraṇaa treatise on verbs discussing verbal forms by VaṅgaSena.
aāgantukaliterally adventitious, an additional wording generally at the end of roots to show distinctly their form exempli gratia, for example वदि, एधि, सर्ति et cetera, and others; confer, compare इन्धिभवतिभ्यां च P I.2.6: confer, compare also भावलक्षणे स्थेण्कृञ्वदिचरिहृतभिजनिभ्यस्तोमुन्, P.III.4.16, सृपिवृदो. कसुन् P. III.4.17 and a number of other sūtras where इ or तिं is added to the root confer, compare इक्श्तिपौ धातुनिर्देशे, वर्णात्कारः, रादिफः P.III.3.108 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 2.3. 4, where such appendages to be added to the roots or letters are given. The word अागन्तु is an old word used in the Nirukta, but the term आगन्तुक appears to be used for the first time for such forms by Haradatta; confer, compare ह्वरोरिति ह्वृ कौटिल्ये, आगन्तुकेकारे गुणेन निर्देशः Padamañjarī, a commentary on the Kāśikāvṛtti by Haradatta. on VII.2.31. In the traditional oral explanations the second part of a reduplicated word is termed अागन्तुक which is placed second i. e. after the original by virtue of the convention आगन्तूनामन्ते निवेशः, although in fact, it is said to possess the sense of the root in contrast with the first which is called abhyāsa.A nice distinction can, however be drawn between the four kinds of adventitious wordings found in grammar viz.आगन्तु, इत्, अभ्यास and आगम which can be briefly stated as follows; The former two do not form a regular part of the word and are not found in the actual use of the word; besides, they do not possess any sense, while the latter two are found in actual use and they are possessed of sense. Again the agantu word is simply used for facility of understanding exactly and correctly the previous word which is really wanted; the इत् wording, besides serving this purpose, is of use in causing some grammatical operations. अभ्यास, is the first part of the wording which is wholly repeated and it possesses no sense by itself, while, āgama which is added to the word either at the beginning or at the end or inserted in the middle, forms a part of the word and possesses the sense of the word.
āgamaaugment, accrement, a word element which is added to the primitive or basic word during the process of the formation of a complete word or pada. The āgama is an adventitious word element and hence differs from ādeśa, the substitute which wholly takes the place of the original or ( आदेशिन् ). Out of the several āgamas mentioned by Pāṇini, those that are marked with mute ट् are prefixed, those, marked with क्, are affixed, while those, marked with म्, are placed immediately after the last vowel of the word. The augments become a part and parcel of the word to which they are added, and the characteristics of which they possess;confer, compareयदागमास्तद्गुणीभूतास्तद्ग्रहणेन गृह्यन्ते, also आगमानां आगमिधर्मिवैशिष्ट्यम् Paribhāṣenduśekhara of Nāgeśa. Pari.11. Those grammarians, who hold the view that words are unproduced and eternal, explain the addition of an augment as only the substitution of a word with an augment in the place of a word without an augment; confer, compare आदेशास्तर्हिमे भविष्यन्ति अनागमकानां सागमकाः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.1.20; I.1.46. The term āgama is defined as अन्यत्र विद्यमानस्तु यो वर्णः श्रुयतेधिकः । आगम्यमानतुल्यत्वात्स आगम इति स्मृतः Com. on Tait. Prāt.I. 23.
āgarvīyaa class of roots forming a subdivision of the Curādigaṇa or the tenth conjugation beginning with पद् and ending with गर्व् which are only ātmanepadin; exempli gratia, for example पदयते, मृगयते, अर्थयते, गर्वयते.
āgastyaname of an ancient writer of Vedic grammar and Prātiśākhya works; confer, compare Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.)I.2.
ācārakvipdenominative case. affix क्विप् applied to any prātipadika or noun in the sense of behaviour: confer, compare सर्वप्रातिपदिकेभ्य आचारे क्विब् वक्तव्यः अश्वति गर्दभति इत्येवमर्थम् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on III.1.11; confer, compare हलन्तेभ्य आचाराक्विबभावाच्च Paribhāṣenduśekhara of Nāgeśa. on Pari.52.
aāṭ(1)augment अा prefixed to roots beginning with a vowel in the imperfect, aorist and conditional, which is always accented (उदात्त); confer, compare P.VI.4.72; (2) augment अा prefixed to the imperative first person terminations, exempli gratia, for example करवाणि, करवै et cetera, and others; confer, compare P.III.4.92: (3) augment अा to be prefixed to caseaffixes which are डित् after nouns called nadī: exempli gratia, for example कुमार्यं; cf P.VII. 3.112.
aāt(1)long अा as different from short or protracted अ prescribed by the wofd वृद्धि or दीर्घ in the case of अ, or by the word अात् when substituted for another vowel, as for example in the rule आदेच उपदेशेऽशिति and the following: confer, compare P.VI.1.45, 57; (2) substitute for the ablative affix ङस् after words ending in अ; confer, compare P. VII.1.12; (3) substitute अात् for a case affix in Vedic Literature, exempli gratia, for example न ताद् ब्राह्मणाद् निन्दामि Kāś. on VII. 1.39.
ātāmĀtmanepada third person dual ending, technically substituted for लकार by P.III.4.78
ātideśikaapplied by extension or transfer of epithet as opposed to औपदेशिक. See the word अतिदेश; the term is often used in connection with rules or operations which do not apply or occur by the direct expression of the grammarian; confer, compare यदि आतिदेशिकेन कित्वेन औपदेशिकं कित्वं बाध्येत. Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.2.1.; confer, compare also अातिदेशिकमनित्यम् Par.Śek. Pari. 93.6.
ātiśāyikaa tad-affix in the sense of excellence; a term applied to the affixes तम and इष्ठ as also तर and ईयस् prescribed by Pāṇini by the rules अतिशायने तमबिष्ठनौ and द्विवचनविभज्योपपदे तरबीयसुनौ confer, compare P.V.3.55, 57. This superlative affix is seen doubly applied sometimes in Vedic Lit. eg.श्रेष्ठतमाय कर्मणे Yaj. Saṁ. I.1; confer, compare also तदन्ताच्च स्वार्थे छन्दसि दर्शनं श्रेष्ठतमायेति P.V.3.55 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini).3.
ātiśāyikāntaa word ending with an atisāyika affix; confer, compare अातिदायिकान्तात्स्वार्थे छन्दसि आतिशायिको दृश्यते Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on V. 3.55.
ādeśa(1)substitute as opposed to sthānin, the original. In Pāṇini's grammar there is a very general maxim, possessed of a number of exceptions, no doubt, that 'the substitute behaves like the original' (स्थानिवदादेशः अनल्विधौ P.I.1.56.); the application of this maxim is called स्थानिवद्भाव; for purposes of this स्थानिवद्भाव the elision (लोप) of a phonetic element is looked upon as a sort of substitute;confer, compare उपधालेपस्य स्थानिवत्त्वात् Kāś. on P.I.1.58. Grammarians many times look upon a complete word or a word-base as a substitute for another one, although only a letter or a syllable in the word is changed into another, as also when a letter or syllable is added to or dropped in a word; confer, compare पचतु, पचन्तु ... इमेप्यादेशाः । कथम् । अादिश्यते यः स आदेशः । इमे चाप्यादिश्यन्ते । Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.1.56; cf also सर्वे सर्वपदादेशा दाक्षीपुत्रस्य पाणिनेः M.Bh. on P. I.1.20; confer, compare also अनागमकानां सागमका आदेशाः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.1.20: (2) indication, assignment; confer, compare योयं स्वरादेशः अन्तोदात्तं, वधेराद्युदात्तत्वं, स्वः स्वरितमिति अादेशः R.Pr.I.30-32; confer, compare also अादेशः उपदेशः commentary on Tai.-Prāt. II.20: confer, compare also अनादेशे अविकारः V.Pr.IV.131, where Uvvaṭa's Bhāṣya on the Prātiśākhya works.remarks यत्र उदात्तादीनां स्वराणां सन्धौ आदेशो न क्रियते तत्र अविकारः प्रत्येतव्यः । confer, compare also एकारो विभक्त्यादेशः छन्दसि A.Pr. II.1.2, where ए is prescribed as a substitute for a caseaffix and त्ये and अस्मे are cited as examples where the acute acent is also prescribed for the substitute ए.
ādya(1)premier; confer, compare इदमाद्यं पदस्थानं (व्याकरणनामकं ) सिद्धिसोपानपर्वणाम् Vāk. Pad. I.16; (2) preceding as opposed to succeeding (उत्तर); confer, compare सहाद्यैर्व्यञ्जनैः V.Pr.I.100 (3) original; confer, compare आद्यप्रकृतिः परमप्रकृतिः (original base) Bhāṣā Vṛtti. IV.1.93; (4) first, preceding, आद्ये योगे न व्यवाये तिङः स्यु; M.Bh. on III.1-91.
ādyantavattvaअाद्यन्तवद्भाव, consideration of a single or solitary letter as the initial or the final one according to requirements for opcrations prescribed for the initial or for the final. Both these notions --the initial and the final-are relative notions, and because they require the presence of an additional letter or letters for the sake of being called initial or final it becomes necessary to prescribe आद्यन्तवद्भाव in the case of a single letter; confer, compareअाद्यन्तवदेकस्मिन् । आदौ इव अन्त इव एकस्मिन्नपि कार्यं भवति । यथा कर्तव्यमित्यत्र प्रत्ययाद्युदात्तत्वं भवति एवमौपगवमित्यत्रापि यथा स्यात् । Kāś. on P.I.1.21 ; confer, compare also अाद्यन्तवच्च । अपृक्तस्य आदिवदन्तवच्च कार्यं भवति । Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.I.55. This अाद्यन्तवद्भाव of Pāṇini is, in fact, a specific application of the general maxim known as vyapadeśivadbhāva by virtue of which "an operation which affects something on account of some special designation, which for certain reasons attaches to the letter, affects likewise that which stands alone;" confer, compare Pari.Śek. Pari. 30.
aādhārādheyabhāvaa non-differential relation (अभेदसंसर्ग) between the personal endings तिप् , तस् et cetera, and others and the noun in the nominative case which is the subject of the verbal activity;relation of a thing and its substratum: confer, compare निपातातिरिक्तनामार्थधात्वर्थयोर्भेदान्वयस्य अव्युत्पन्नत्वात्.
ādhṛṣīyaa sub-division of roots belonging to the चुरादिगण or tenth conjugation beginning with युज् and ending with धृष् which take the Vikaraṇa णिच् optionally id est, that is which are also conjugated like roots of the first conjugation; exempli gratia, for example यीजयति,योजयते, योजति;साहयति-ते, सहति.
ādheyaa thing placed in another or depending upon another, as opposed to ādhāra or the container; confer, compare आधेयश्चाक्रियाजश्च सोसत्त्वप्रकृतिर्गुणः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P.IV.1.44.
āna(1)kṛt affix (शानच् or चानश्) substituted for the lakāra लट् and applied to ātmanepadi roots forming the present participle; (2) kṛt (affix). affix कानच् applied to ātmanepadi roots in the sense of past time forming the perfect participle confer, compare लिटः कानज्वा P.III.2.106.
ānantarya(1)close proximity; absence of any intermediary element generally of the same nature: अनन्तरस्य भावः आनन्तर्यम्; confer, compare नाजानन्तर्ये वहिष्ट्वप्रक्लृप्तिः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). I.4.2. Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 21: Paribhāṣenduśekhara of Nāgeśa. Pari. 51. This close proximity of one letter or syllable or so, with another, is actually id est, that isphonetically required and generally so found out also, but sometimes such proximity is theoretically not existing as the letter required for proximity is technically not present there by the rule पूर्वत्रासिद्धम्. In such cases, a technical absence is not looked upon as a fault. confer, compare कचिच्च संनिपातकृतमानन्तर्ये शास्त्रकृतमनानन्तर्ये यथा ष्टुत्वे, क्वचिच्च नैव संनिपातकृतं नापि शास्त्रकृतं यथा जश्त्वे । यत्र कुतश्चिदेवानन्तर्यं तदाश्रयिष्यामः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on VIII.3.13. (2) close connection by mention together at a common place et cetera, and others;confer, compare सर्वाद्यानन्तर्यं कार्यार्थम् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.1.27.
ānunāsikyanasalization; utterance through the nose, an additional property possessed by vowels and the fifth letters of the 5 classes (ङ्, ञ्, ण् ,न्, म्) confer, compare आनुनासिक्यं तेषामधिको गुणः M.Bh. on I.1.9.
ānupūrvyasuccessive order, as prescribed by tradition or by the writer; confer, compare ऋतुनक्षत्राणामानुपूर्व्येण समानाक्षराणां पूर्वनिपातः । शिशिरवसन्तौ उदगयनस्थौ । कृत्तिकारोहिण्यः । M.Bh. II.2.34 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini).3;also वर्णानामानुपूर्व्येण ब्राह्मणक्षत्रियविट्शूद्राः M.Bh. on II.2.34 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 6: confer, compare पदानुपूर्व्येण प्रश्लिष्टान् संधीन् कुर्यात् । इन्द्र अा इहि । आदौ इन्द्र आ इत्येतयोः; न तु अा इहि इत्येतयाः Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) II.2; confer, compare also आनुपूर्व्यात् सिद्धम् Sīra. Pari. 6.
ānupūrvyasaṃhitāthe saṁhitā-pāṭha or recital of the running Vedic text in accordance with the constituent words;exempli gratia, for example शुनः शेपं चित् निदितम् or नरा शंसं वा पूषणम्, as opposed to the अनानुपूर्व्यसंहिता which is actually found in the traditional recital exempli gratia, for example शुनश्चिच्छेपं निदितम् Ṛk saṁh. V 2.7 or नरा वा शंसं पूषणम् Ṛk saṁh. X.64.3. See R. Prāt. II 43.
aāntaryaproximity; close affinity ; close relationship. There are four kinds of such proximity as far as words in grammar are concerned; Re: the organs of speech (स्थानतः)as in दण्डाग्रम्, regarding the meaning(अर्थतः)as in वातण्ड्ययुवतिः, regarding the quality (गुण) as in पाकः रागः, and regarding the prosodial value (प्रमाण) as in अमुष्मै, अमूभ्याम्; confer, compare अनेकविधं अान्तर्यं स्थानार्थगुणप्रमाणकृतम् Paribhāṣenduśekhara of Nāgeśa. Pari.13. confer, compare also Kāś. on I.1.50.
aānpadword ending with अान् which has the consonant dropped and the preceding आ nasalized; e. g. सर्गा इव सृजतम् Ṛk.Saṁ. VIII. 35. 20, महा इन्द्रः Ṛk Saṁ VI.19.1; confer, compare दीर्घादटि समानपादे, अातोऽटि नित्यम् P. VIII.3.9, VIII.3.3; confer, compare also हन्त देवो इति चैता अान्-पदाः पदवृत्तयः R.Pr.IV.26,27.
āp(1)common term for the feminine. endings टाप्, डाप् and चाप् given by Pāṇini in Adhy. IV, Pāda 1; confer, compare अव्ययादाप्सुपः P. II.4.82. P.IV.1.1.; P.VI.1.68; confer, compare also P.VI.3.63. P.VII.3.44; P.VII.3.106, 116; P.VII.4.15. et cetera, and others; (2) a brief term for case-affixes beginning with the inst. sing and ending with the locative case plural confer, compare अनाप्यकः P. VII.2.112.
aāpatti(1)production; resulting of something into another; change; cf दन्त्यस्य मूर्धन्यापत्तिः नतिः मूर्धन्यापत्तिः मूर्धन्यभावः V. Prāt. I. 42 and Uvaṭa's commentary thereon; cf also यमापत्तिं explained as यमभावं Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) VI. 9. (2) modification; confer, compare अापद्यते श्वासतां नादतां वा R.Pr.XIII.1.; (3) contingency, undesired result.
ābantaending with the feminine. affix अा ( टाप्, डाप् or चाप् ); confer, compare वाबन्तः P. II.4.30 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 3.
abādha(1)similarity of one phonetic element, for instance, in the case of ऐ with आ resulting from Saṁdhi: e. g. प्रजाया अरातिं निर्ऋत्या अकः where प्रजाया and निर्ऋत्या stand for प्रजायै and निर्ऋत्यै confer, compare एकारान्तानि अाकारबाधे Āth. Pr. II.1.4; (2) Similarity of accent of words in the Saṁhitāpāṭha and Padapāṭha; (3) followed by confer, compare Atharvaveda Prātiśākhya. II.1.14; (4) distress; confer, compare आबाधे च, P. VIII.1.10.
ābhācchāstraa rule given in the section called आभीयप्रकरण extending from P.VI.4.22 to VI.4.175, wherein one rule or operation is looked upon as invalid to another ; confer, compare असिद्धवदत्राभात् P.VI.4.22 and Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). thereon; confer, compare also यावता अनिदितां हलः इत्यपि आभाच्छास्त्रम् Vyāḍiparibhāṣāsūcana.Pari. 38.
ābhīyaprakaraṇaa section of Pāṇini's grammar from VI.4.-2 to VI. 4.129, called अाभीय, as it extends to the rule भस्य VI.4.129, including it but as the governing rule भस्य is valid in every rule upto the end of the Pāda, the आभीयप्रकरण also extends upto the end of the Pāda.See अाभाच्छास्त्र a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page..
ābhīyāsiddhatvainvalidity or supposed invisibility of one rule with respect to another, in the section called अाभीयप्रकरण. See अाभाच्छास्त्र a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page..
āmantraṇa(1)calling out from a distance;(2) an invitation which may or may not be accepted; confer, compare विधिनिमन्त्रणामन्त्रणाधीष्टसंप्रश्नप्रार्थनेषु लिङ् P.III. 3.161 whereon Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). remarks अथ निमन्त्रणामन्त्रणयोः को विशेषः । अथ संनिहितेन निमन्त्रणं भवति असंनिहितेन अामन्त्रणम् । नैषोस्ति विशेषः । असंनिहितेनापि निमन्त्रणं भवति संनिहितेनापि चामन्त्रणम् । एवं तर्हि यन्नियोगतः कर्तव्यं तन्निमन्त्रणम् । अामन्त्रणे कामचारः । Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P.III.3.161.
āmreḍita(1)iterative: a repeated word, defined as द्विरुक्तं पदम् confer, compare द्विरुक्तमात्रेडितं पदम् exempli gratia, for example यज्ञायज्ञा वो अग्नये Vāj. Prāt. I. 146; (2). the second or latter portion, of a repeated word according to Pāṇini; c. तस्य (द्विरुक्तस्य) परमाम्रेडितम् P. VIII.1.2. The Āmreḍita word gets the grave accent and has its last vowel protracted when it implies censure; confer, compare P.VIII.1.3 and VIII. 2.95.Haradatta has tried to explain how the term आम्रेडित means the first member; confer, compare ननु अाम्रेडितशब्दे । निघण्टुषु प्रसिद्धः अाम्रेडितं द्विस्त्रिरुक्तमिति । सत्यमर्थे प्रसिद्धः इह तु शब्दे परिभाष्यते । महासंज्ञाकरणं पूर्वाचार्यानुरोधेन Padamañj. on VIII.1.2.
āy(1)the affix आय applied to the roots गुप्, धूप् and others ending with which they are looked upon as roots; confer, compare P. III.1.28: P.III.1. 32. The affix is applied optionally when an ārdhadhātuka affix is to follow, exempli gratia, for example गोपायिता, गोप्ता; confer, compare P.III. 1.31; (2) augment; confer, compare असतो वर्णस्य उपजनः R. Prāt. XIV. 1 Uvaṭa.
aāraktaddhita affix.affix (आर) applied to the word गोधा in the sense of off spring according to the Northern Grammarians;exempli gratia, for example गौधारः, (optional forms गौधेय and गौधेर acc. to others); confer, compare P.IV.1.129, 130.
ārdhadhātukaa term used in contrast to the term सार्वधातुक for such verbal and kṛt affixes, as are not personal endings of verbs nor marked with the mute letter श् confer, compare तिङ्शित् सार्वधातुकम् । आर्धधातुकं शेषः। P.III.4.113 and 114. The personal endings of verbs in the perfect tense and the benedictive mood are termed ārdhadhātuka, confer, compare P. III. 4.115, 116; while both the terms are promiscuously found utilised in the Vedic Literature; confer, compare P. III. 4. 117. The main utility of the ārdhadhātuka term is the augment इ ( इट् ) to be prefixed to the ārdhadhātuka affixes. The term आर्धधातुका was in use in works of the old Vaiyākaraṇas; confer, compare अथवा आर्धधातुकासु इति वक्ष्यामि कासु आर्धधातुकासु । उक्तिषु युक्तिषु रूढिषु प्रतीतिषु श्रुतिषु संज्ञासु M.Bh. on II. 4.35. It cannot be said how the term ārdhadhātuka originatedition Probably such affixes or pratyayas, like the kṛt affixes generally, as could be placed after certain roots only were called ārdhadhātuka, as contrasted with the verbal and the present participle affixes which were termed sārvadhātuka on account of their being found in use after every root.
ārdhadhātukādhikārathe topic or section in Pāṇini's grammar where operations, caused by the presence of an ārdhadhātuka affix ahead, are enumerated, beginning with the rule आर्धधातुके VI.4.46 and ending with न ल्यपि VI.4.69, Such operations are summed up in the stanza अतो लोपो चलोपश्च णिलोपश्च प्रयोजनम् । आल्लोप इत्वमेत्वं च चिण्वद्भावश्च सीयुटि; Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). as also Kāś, on VI.4.46.
ārṣaderived from the holy sages; founded on sacred tradition, such as the Vedāṅgas;confer, compare कृत्स्नं च वेदाड्गमनिन्द्यमार्षम् R. Prāt. XIV 30. The word is explained as स्वयंपाठ by the commentary on Vāj Prāt. IX.2I, and as Vaidika saṁdhi on X.l3. Patañjali has looked upon the pada-pāṭha or Pada-text of the Saṁhitās of the Vedas, as anārṣa, as contrasted with the Saṁhitā text which is ārṣa; confer, compare आर्ष्याम् in the sense संहितायाम् R. Prāt. II.27; confer, compare also पदकारैर्नाम लक्षणमनुवर्त्यम् M.Bh. on III.1.109.
ālcase affix in Vedic literature exempli gratia, for example वनन्ता यजेत Kāś. on VII.1.39.
āśisthe benedictive mood, confer, compare किदाशिषि P.III.4.104, called regularly as आशीर्लिङ्.
āśvalāyanaprātiśākhyaan authoritative Prātiśākhya work attributed to Śaunaka the teacher of Āśvalāyana, belonging prominently to the Sakala and the Bāṣkala Śakhās of the Ṛgveda. it is widely known by the name Ṛk-Prātiśākhya. It is a metrical composition divided into . 18 chapters called Paṭalas, giving special directions for the proper pronunciation, recitation and preservation of the Ṛksaṁhita by laying down general rules on accents and euphonic combinations and mentioning phonetic and metrical peculiarities. It has got a masterly commentary written by Uvvaṭa.
āsvadīyaa sub-division of the चुरादि (Xth conjugation) roots, beginning with the root ग्रस् and ending with the root स्वद्, which take the Vikaraṇa णिच् id est, that is which are conjugated like roots of the tenth conjugation, only if they are transitive in sense.
āhitad-affix added to the word दक्षिण in the general sense of direction but when distance is specially meant; exempli gratia, for example दक्षिणाहि वसति, दक्षिणाहि रमणीयम्. See Kāś. on आहि च दूरे P. V.3.37.
i(1)the vowel इ, representing all its eighteen forms viz. short, long protracted, acute, grave, circumflex, pure and nasalised; exempli gratia, for example इ in यस्येति च P.VI.4.128;(2) Uṅādi affix ई(3)tad-affix इच्(इ)applied to Bahuvrihi compounds in the sense of exchange of action or as seen in words like द्विदण्डि exempli gratia, for example केशाकेशि, दण्डादण्डि, द्विमुसलि et cetera, and others confer, compare इच् कर्मव्यतिहारे P.V.4. 127,also V.4.128; (4) kṛt (affix). affix कि (इ) confer, compare उपसर्गे घोः किः P.III.3.92; (5) augment इट् (इ); see इट् (6) conjugational affix इट् of the 1st person. singular. or Ātmanep. Ātmanepada
ik(1)short wording (प्रत्याहार) for the vowels इ, उ, ऋ and लृ; confer, compare इको यणचि P.VI.1.77; एच इग्घ्रस्वादेशे P.I.1.48; इको गुणवृद्धी P.I.1.3 इग्यणः संप्रसारणम् P. I.1.45, इकोऽसवर्णे शाकल्यस्य ह्रस्वश्च P.VI. 1.127, इको ह्रस्वोऽङ्यो गालवस्य P.VI.3. 61; (2) kṛt (affix). affix इक्(इ) applied to the root form to cite a root e. g. वदि, जनि et cetera, and others confer, compare इक्श्तिपौ धातुनिर्देशे P. III.3.108 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 2; (3) kṛt (affix). affix इक् applied to the roots कृञ् and others in the sense of verbal activity exempli gratia, for example कृषिः, किरिः, गिरिः confer, compare इक् कृष्यादिभ्यः P.III.3.108 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini).8.
ic(1)short wording or pratyāhāra for vowels except अ. confer, compare इजोदश्च गुरुमतोSनृच्छः P.III.1.36; cf also VI. I.104, VI.3.68. VIII.4.31,32; (2) Samāsānta affix इ after Bahuvrīhi compounds showing a mutual exchange of actions. exempli gratia, for example केशाकेशि, दण्डादण्डि confer, compare इच् कर्मव्यतिहारे P.V.4. 127 also 128.
(1)kṛt (affix). affix (इ), in the sense of verbal activity applied to any root, the word so formed being used in the feminine. gender and in connection with narration or in interrogation; exempli gratia, for example कां त्वं कारिमकार्षीः । सर्वौ कारिमकार्षम् । confer, compare Pāṇini III.3.110: (2) kṛt (affix). affix in the sense of verbal activity applied to the roots वप् and others exempli gratia, for example वापिः, वासि: et cetera, and others confer, compare P.III.3.108 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 7;(3) tad-affix इ in the sense of offspring applied to a noun ending in अ; e.g, दाक्षि: confer, compare P.IV.1. 95-7, 153.
id(1)augment इ prefixed,in general in the case of all roots barring a few roots ending in vowels except ऊ and ऋ and roots शक्, पच्, et cetera, and others, to such affixes of non-conjugational tenses and moods as begin with any consonant except ह् and य्; confer, compare आर्धधातुकस्येड् वलादेः P.VII.2.35 to 78 and its exceptions P.VII.2.8 to 34; (2) personal ending of the third person singular. or Ātmanep. Ātmanepada
(1)short wording or pratyāhāra for all vowels except अ and the consonants ह् ,य् ,व् , र्, ल् confer, compare इणः षः P.VIII.3.39,also P.VIII.3.57,78 (2) kṛt (affix). affix इ applied to roots such as अज् अत् et cetera, and others in the sense of verbal activity.e.g आजिः,अतिः, आदि; confer, compareइणजादिभ्यः P. III.3,108, Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini).6.
it(1)a letter or a group of letters attached to a word which is not seen in actual use in the spoken language: cf अप्रयोगी इत्, Śāk. I.1.5, Hemacandra's Śabdānuśāsana.1.1.37. The इत् letters are applied to a word before it, or after it, and they have got each of them a purpose in grammar viz. causing or preventing certain grammatical operations in the formation of the complete word. Pāṇini has not given any definition of the word इत् , but he has mentioned when and where the vowels and consonants attached to words are to be understood as इत्; (confer, compare उपदेशेजनुनासिक इत् , हलन्त्यम् । et cetera, and others P. I.3.2 to 8) and stated that these letters are to be dropped in actual use, confer, compareP.I.3.9. It appears that grammarians before Pāṇini had also employed such इत् letters, as is clear from some passages in the Mahābhāṣya as also from their use in other systems of grammar as also in the Uṇādi list of affixes, for purposes similar to those found served in Pāṇini 's grammar. Almost all vowels and consonants are used as इत् for different purposes and the इत् letters are applied to roots in the Dhātupāṭha, nouns in the Gaṇapāṭha, as also to affixes, augments and substitutes prescribed in grammar. Only at a few places they are attached to give facility of pronunciation. Sometimes the इत् letters, especially vowels, which are said to be इत्, when uttered as nasalized by Pāṇini, are recognised only by convention; confer, compare प्रतिज्ञानुनासिक्याः पाणिनीयाः(S.K.on P.I.3.2).The word इत्, which literally means going away or disappearing, can be explained as a mute indicatory letter. In Pāṇini's grammar, the mute vowel अ applied to roots indicates the placing of the Ātmanepada affixes after them, if it be uttered as anudātta and of affixes of both the padas if uttered svarita; confer, compare P.I.3. 12, 72. The mute vowel आ signifies the prevention of इडागम before the past part, affixes; confer, compare P. VII. 2. 16. Similarly, the mute vowel इ signfies the augment न् after the last vowel of the root; confer, compareP.VII.1.58; ई signifies the prevention of the augment इ before the past participle.affixes cfP.VII.2.14;उ signifies the inclusion of cognate letters; confer, compareP.I.1.69, and the optional addition of the augment इ before त्वा; confer, compare P.VII.2. 56; ऊ signifies the optional application of the augment इट्;confer, compareP.VII. 2.44; क signifies the prevention of ह्रस्व to the vowel of a root before the causal affix, confer, compareVII.4.2: लृ signifies the vikarana अङ् in the Aorist cf P.III.1.55; ए signifies the prevention of vrddhi in the Aorist,confer, compare P.VII.2.55; ओ signifies the substitution of न् for त् of the past participle. confer, compare P VIII.2.45; क् signifies the Prevention of गुण and वृद्धि, confer, compareP, I. 1.5; ख् signifies the addition of the augment मुम्(म्)and the shortening of the preceding vowel: confer, compareP.VI.3 65-66: ग् signifies the prevention of गुण and वृद्धि, confer, compare P.I.1.5 घ् signifies कुत्व, confer, compare P.VII.3.62; ङ्, applied to affixes, signifies the prevention of गुण and वृद्धि, confer, compare P.I.1.5; it causes संप्रसारणादेश in the case of certain roots, confer, compare P. VI.1.16 and signifies आत्मनेपद if applied to roots; confer, compare P.I. 3.12, and their substitution for the last letter if applied to substitutes. confer, compare P I.1.53. च् signifies the acute accent of the last vowel;confer, compareP.VI.1. 159; ञ् signifies उभयपद i.e the placing of the affixes of both the podas after the root to which it has been affixed;confer, compareP.I.3.72, ट् in the case of an augment signifies its application to the word at the beginning: confer, compareP I.1.64, while applied to a nominal base or an affix shows the addition of the feminine. affix ई (ङीप्) confer, compareP.IV.1. 15;ड् signifies the elision of the last syllable; confer, compare P.VI.4.142: ण् signifies वृद्धि, confer, compareP.VII.2.115;त् signifies स्वरित accent, confer, compare VI.1.181, as also that variety of the vowel ( ह्रस्व, दीर्ध or प्लुत) to which it has been applied confer, compare P.I.1.70; न् signifies आद्युदात्त, confer, compare P.VI.1.193:प् signifies अनुदात्त accent confer, compare अनुदात्तौ सुप्पितौ P. III.1.4. as also उदात्त for the vowel before the affix marked with प् confer, compare P.VI.1.192: म् signifies in the case of an augment its addition after the final vowel.confer, compareP.I.1.47,while in the case of a root, the shortening of its vowel before the causal affix णि,confer, compare P.VI.4.92: र् signifies the acute accent for the penultimate vowel confer, compare P.VI.1.217,ल् signifies the acute accent for the vowel preceding the affix marked with ल्; confer, compareP.VI. 193; श् implies in the case of an affix its सार्वधातुकत्व confer, compare P. II1.4.113, while in the case of substitutes, their substitution for the whole स्थानिन् cf P.I.1.55; प् signifies the addition of the feminine. affix ई ( ङीप् ) confer, compareP.IV-1.41 ;स् in the case of affixes signifies पदसंज्ञा to the base before them, cf P.I.4.16. Sometimes even without the actual addition of the mute letter, affixes are directed to be looked upon as possessed of that mute letter for the sake of a grammatical operation exempli gratia, for example सार्वधातुकमपित् P.I.2.4; असंयेागाल्लिट कित् P.I.2.5: गोतो णित् P.VII.1.90 et cetera, and others (2) thc short vowel इ as a substitute: confer, compare शास इदङ्हलोः P.VI.4.34.
itaretarapossessed of interdependence; depending upon each other; confer, compare इतरेतरं कार्यमसद्वत् Candra Pari. 5 }. Grammatical operations are of no avail if the rules stating them are mutually depending on each other. The word इतरेतर has the sense of इतरेतराश्रय here.
itaretarāśrayadepending upon each other; confer, compare इतरेतराश्रयाणि च कार्याणि न प्रकल्पन्ते । तद्यथा । नौर्नावि बद्धा नेतरेतरत्राणाय भवति । Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.1.1. See इतरेतर a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page..
itkāryaa grammatical operation caused by इत् i. e. by a mute letter which is purely indicatory; confer, compare एवं तर्हि इत्कार्याभावादत्र इत्संज्ञा न भविष्यति Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). I.3.2. See इत् a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page..
itthaṃbhūtalakṣaṇacharacterization; indication by a mark: e. g. जटाभिस्तापसः confer, compare इत्थंभूतलक्षणे च ( तृतीया ) P. II.3.21.
itrakṛt affix, added to the roots ऋ, लू, धू et cetera, and others in the sense of instrument confer, compare अर्तिलूधूसूखनसहचर इत्रः P.III. 2.184-6. e. g. अरित्रम् , लवित्रम् खनित्रम् et cetera, and others The words ending in इत्र have got the acute accent on the last syllable; confer, compare P.VI.2.144.
in(1)substitute for the inst. case ending in अा (टा) after bases ending in अ ; confer, compare टाङसिङसामिनात्स्याः P.VII.1. 12; (2) taddhita affix.aff इन affixed to पूर्व e. g. पथिभिः पूर्विणैः confer, compare P. IV. 4. 133.
ini(1)kṛt affix इन् applied to the roots क्री with धि, जु with प्र, and the roots जि, दृ, क्षि and others, e. g. सोमविक्रयी, प्रजवी, जयी et cetera, and others confer, compare P.III 2.93 and III.2.156-157: (2) taddhita affix. affix इन् affixed to the word पाण्डुकम्बल in the sense of 'covered with' ( confer, compare P, IV.2.11), in the sense of collection to the word खल exempli gratia, for example खलिनी confer, compare P.IV.2.51, to the word अनुब्राह्मण in sense 'student of' exempli gratia, for example अनुब्राह्मणी confer, compare P.IV.2.62, to the words कर्मन्द and कृशाश्च confer, compare P.IV.3.lll, to the word चूर्ण confer, compare P.IV.4.23 and to the word श्राद्ध confer, compare P.V.2.85 and साक्षात् confer, compare P. V. 2. 91 in specified senses and in the general sense of possession to words ending in अ, cf P. V.2.115-117 and to certain other words confer, compare P.V.2.128-37.
indraname of a great grammarian who is believed to have written an exhaustive treatise on grammar before Pāṇini; confer, compare the famous verse of Bopadeva at the commencement of his Dhātupāṭha इन्द्रश्चन्द्र: काशकृत्स्नापिशली शाकटायनः । पाणिन्यमरजैनेन्द्रा जयन्त्यष्टादिशाब्दिका: ॥ No work of Indra is available at present. He is nowhere quoted by Pāṇini. Many quotations believed to have been taken from his work are found scattered in grammar works, from which it appears that there was an ancient system prevalent in the eastern part of India at the time of Pāṇini which could be named ऐन्द्रव्याकरणपद्धति, to which Pāṇini possibly refers by the word प्राचाम्. From references,it appears that the grammar was of the type of प्रक्रिया, discussing various topics of grammar such as alphabet, coalescence, declension, context, compounds, derivatives from nouns and roots, conjugation, and changes in the base. The treatment was later on followed by Śākaṭāyana and writers of the Kātantra school.For details see Mahābhāṣya edition by D. E. Society, Poona, Vol. VII pages 124-127.
indradattaauthor of the ' Gūḍhaphakkikāprakāśa', a gloss on the difficult passages in the Mahābhāṣya.
iyaṅsubstitute for the last इ before a vowel generally in the case of monosyllabic roots ending in इ and the word स्त्री; exempli gratia, for example चिक्षियुः, नियौ नियः, स्त्रियौ स्त्रियः; confer, compare अचि क्षुधातुभ्रुवां य्वोरियङुवङौ P.VI. 4.77-80.
iyācase-ending for inst. singular. in Vedic Literature; e. g. उर्विया, दार्विया; confer, compare P.VII.1.39. and Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini).1 there on.
irmute indicatory ending of roots, signifying the application of the aorist sign अ(अङ्) optionally;e g. अभिदत् or अभैत्सीत् from the root भिद् (भिदिर् in Dhātupāṭha); confer, compare also अच्छिदत्,अच्छैत्सीत् from छिद्(छिदिर्); confer, compare P.III.1.57.
iractaddhita affix. affix ( इर ) in the sense of possession applied in Vedic Literature to रथ exempli gratia, for example रथिरः; confer, compare P.V. 2.109 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini).3.
iranataddhita affix. affix ( इर ) in the sense of possession applied in Vedic Literature; to मेघा exempli gratia, for example confer, compare P. मेधिरः V.2.109 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 3.
irita root ending with mute indicatary ending इर्. See इर्.
iṣṇukṛt affix इष्णुच् applied,in the sense of 'possessed of habitual behaviour action, or splendid accomplishment,' to the roots अलंकृ, निराकृ, प्रजन् , उत्पत् et cetera, and others e.g अलंकरिष्णुः,उत्पतिष्णुः, सहिष्णुः,चरिष्णुः et cetera, and others;confer, compareP.III.2.136-138.
iṣyaikṛt affix in Vedic Literature in the sense of the infinitive, e. g. रेहिष्यै, अव्यथिष्यै; cf P.III.4.10.
is(1)substitute इस् for the vowel of the roots, मी, मा, दा, धा, रभ्, पत् et cetera, and others before the desiderative affix सन्; exempli gratia, for example मित्सति, दित्सति, अारिप्सते et cetera, and others confer, compareP. VII.4.54; (2) uṅādi affix इस् exempli gratia, for example सर्पिस्.
īthe long vowel ई which is technically included in the vowel इ in Pāṇini's alphabet being the long tone of that vowel; (2) substitute ई for the vowel अा of the roots घ्रा and ध्मा before the frequentative sign यङ् as for example in जेघ्रीयते, देध्मीयते, confer, compare P.VII. 4.31; (3) substitute ई for the vowel अ before the affixes च्वि and क्यच् as, for instance, in शुक्लीभवति, पुत्रीयति et cetera, and others; confer, compareP.VII.4.32, 33; (4) substitute ई for the vowel अा at the end of reduplicated bases as also for the vowel आ of bases ending in the conjugational sign ना, exempli gratia, for example मिमीध्वे, लुनीतः et cetera, and others; cf P.VI. 4.113; (5) substitute ई for the locative case case affix इ ( ङि ) in Vedic Literature, exempli gratia, for example सरसी for सरसि in दृतिं न शुश्कं सरसी शयानम्,: confer, compare Kāś. on P. VII.1.39: (6) taddhita affix. affix ई in the sense of possession in Vedic Literature as for instance in रथीः,सुमङ्गलीः, confer, compare Kāś on. P.V.2.109: (7) the feminine. affix ई ( ङीप् , ङीञ् or ङीन् ); confer, compare P.IV.1.58, 15-39, IV.1.40-65, IV.1.13.
īkataddhita affix. affix ईकक added to शक्ति and यष्टि exempli gratia, for example शाक्तकिः feminine. शाक्तीकी; याष्टीकः; confer, compare P.IV.4.59; (2) taddhita affix. affix ईक added to कर्क and लोहित in the sense of comparison, e. g. कार्कीकः, लौहितीकः ( स्फटिकः ), confer, compare Kāś. on P.V. 3.110; (3) taddhita affix. affix ईकक् added to बहिस्, exempli gratia, for example बाहीकः confer, compare बहिषष्टिलोपो यश्च, ईकक्च P.IV.1.85. Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 4-5; (4) tad affix इकङ् in Vedic Literature added to बहिस् exempli gratia, for example बाहीकः confer, compare Kāś.on P. IV. 1.85,Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini).6; (5) taddhita affix. affix ईकन् added to खारी exempli gratia, for example द्विखारिकम्; confer, compare P. V. 1.33.
ītlong vowel ई as different from इ or ई३ prescribed as a substitute; confer, compare P.VI.3.27, VI.3.97.
īyastad-affix ईयसुन् , showing superiority or excellence of one individual over another in respect of a quality, added to a substantive expresive of quality; when the substantive ends in the affix तृ, that affix तृ is removed: exempli gratia, for example पटीयान्, लघीयान्, गरीयान्, दोहीयसी (धेनुः) confer, compareP.V.3.57-64.
īṣannādaan external effort characterized by slight resonance or sounding of throat cords when they slightly touch one another.
u(1)labial vowel standing for the long ऊ and protracted ऊ3 in Pāṇini's grammar unless the consonant त् is affixed to it, उत् standing for the short उ only: (2) Vikaraṇa affix उ of the 8th conjugation ( तनादिगण ) and the roots धिन्व् and कृण्व्;confer, compareP.III. 1.79-80; (3) substitute (उ) for the vowel अ of कृ,exempli gratia, for example कुरुतः, कृर्वन्ति before weak Sārvadhātuka affixes, confer, compareP.VI 4.110; (4) kṛt (affix). affix उ added to bases ending in सन् and the roots आशंस्, भिक्ष्, विद्, इष् as also to bases ending in क्यच् in the Vedic Literature,exempli gratia, for example चिकीर्षुः भिक्षुः, बिन्दुः,इच्छुः,सुम्नयु; confer, compare P. III. 2.168-170; (5) Uṅādi affix उ ( उण् ) e.g, कारुः, वायुः, साधुः, et cetera, and others; confer, compare Uṅādi I.1; (6) mute vowel उ added to the first letters of a class of consonants in Pāṇini's grammar to show the whole class of the five letters; exempli gratia, for example कु, चु, टु, तु, पु which stand for the Guttural, the palatal the lingual, the dental and the labial classes respectively; confer, compare also ष्टुना ष्टुः P.VIII.4.41(7) उ added to न् showing the consonant न् as nasalized n; cf, नुः V.Pr. III.133.
uktārthaa word or expression whose sense has been already expressedition The expression उक्तार्थानामप्रयोगः is frequently used in the Mahābhāṣya and the Vārttikas and cited as a Paribhāṣā or a salutary conventional maxim against repetition of words in the Paribhāṣāpāṭhas of Vyādi (Par. 51), Candragomin (Par 28) and Kātantra (Par. 46) and Kālāpa-vyākaraṇasūtra. (Par. 46) grammars.
ukhyaa writer on Vedic phonetics and euphony quoted in the Taittirīya Prātiśākhya; confer, compare उख्यस्य सपूर्वः Tai. Pra. VIII. 22.
ugitacharacterized by the mute indicatory letter उ, ऋ or लृ; see उक्.
uccaritapronounced or uttered; the phrase उच्चरितप्रध्वंसिनः is used in connection with the mute indicatory letters termed इत् in Pāṇini's grammar, as these letters are not actually found in use in the language and are therefore supposed to vanish immediately after their purpose has been servedition The phrase 'उच्चरितप्रध्वंसिनोSनुबन्धा:' has been given as a Paribhāṣā by Vyāḍiparibhāṣāsūcana.(Pari.11), in the Cāndra Vyākaraṇa ( Par. 14), in the Kātantra Vyākaraṇa (Pari.54) and also in the Kalāpa Vyākaraṇa ( Par. 71). Patañjali has used the expression उच्चरितप्रध्वंसिनः in connection with ordinary letters of a word, which have existence for a moment and which also vanish immediately after they have been uttered; confer, compare उच्चरितप्रध्वंसिनः खल्वपि वर्णा: ...न वर्णो वर्णस्य सहायः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.4. 109.
uccaritapradhvaṃsinvanishing immediately after utterance. See उच्चरित.
uccāvacadiverse; confer, compare उच्चावचेष्वर्थेषु भवन्ति निपाताः Nirukta of Yāska.I.3.4.
ujjvaladattathe famous commentator on the Uṅādi sūtras. His work .is called Uṅādisūtravṛtti, which is a scholarly commentary on the Uṅādisūtrapāṭha, consisting of five Pādas. Ujjvaldatta is belived to have lived in the l5th century A.D. He quotes Vṛttinyāsa, Anunyāsa, Bhāgavṛtti et cetera, and others He is also known by the name Jājali.
uṭaugment उ affixed to the roots वृ and तॄ before the kṛt affix तृ; confer, compare तृरुतृतरूतृवरुतृ वरूतृवस्त्रीरिति तरतेर्वृङ्वृञोश्च तृचि उट् ऊट् इत्येतावाग निपात्येते Kāś. on P. VII.2.34.उण् the affix उण्, causing वृद्धि on account of the mute letter ण , prescribed after the roots कृ, वा, पा, जि, मि, स्वद्, साध् and अशू by the rule कृवापाजिमित्वदिसाध्यशूभ्य उण् which is the first rule (or Sūtra) of a series of rules prescribing various affixes which are called Uṇādi affixes, the affix उण् being the first of them. exempli gratia, for example कारुः, वायु , स्वादु, साधु et cetera, and others; confer, compare Uṇādi I,1.
utpatti(1)production: confer, compare वर्णोत्पत्तिः production of a phonetic element Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.23.1 ; (2) production of a grammatical element such as the application of an affix or addition of an augment or substitution of a letter or letters during the process of word-formation: confer, compare गतिकारकोपपदानां कृद्भिः सह समासवचनं प्राक् सुबुत्पत्तेः Pari. Śek. Par. 75; Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). II.2.19. Vārt, 4.
udāttanirdeśaconventional understanding about a particular vowel in the wording of a sūtra being marked acute or Udātta, when ordinarily it should not have been so, to imply that a Paribhāṣā is to be applied for the interpretation of that Sūtra: confer, compare उदात्तनिर्देशात्सिद्धम् P.VI.1.13 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini).14, also Sīra. Pari. 112.
udāttamayaan accent made up of Udātta, i. e. an accent which is a reduced Udātta.It is called also प्रचय. It is mentioned in connection with an acute vowel following इति in the Padapāṭha, according to Kāṇva's view;confer, compare उदात्तमयोन्यत्र नीच एव अन्तोदान्तमध्योदात्तयोः पर्वणोरन्यत्र इति कारणात् परो नीच उदात्तमय एव भवति प्रचित एव भवतीत्यर्थः commentary on V.Pr. I.150
udgrāhaalleviation, ease, relief; name given to a Saṁdhi in the Prātiśākhya works when a visarga and a short vowel अ preceding it are changed into short अ, (e. g. यः + इन्द्र: = य इन्द्र:), as also when the vowel ए or ओ is changed into अ being followed by a dissimilar vowel; e. g. अग्ने + इन्द्रः = अग्न इन्द्रः; confer, compare R.Pr.II.10.
uddeśadescription; mention of qualities; confer, compare गुणैः प्रापणम् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ).on I. 3.2: the word is used in contrast with उपदेश or direct mention; confer, compare कः पुनुरुद्देशोपदेशयोर्विशेषः । प्रत्यक्षमाख्यानमुपदेशो गुणैः प्रापणमुद्देशः । प्रत्यक्षं तावदाख्यानमुपदेशः तद्यथा । अगोज्ञाय कश्चिद्गां सक्थनि कर्णे वा गृहीत्वोपदिशति । अयं गौरिति । स प्रत्यक्षमाख्यातमाह । उपदिष्टो मे गौरिति । गुणैः प्रापणमुद्देशः । तद्यथा । कश्चित्कंचिदाह । देवदत्तं मे भवानुद्दिशतु इति । स इहस्थः पाटलिपुत्रस्थं देवदत्तमुद्दिशति । अङ्गदी कुण्डली किरीटी...ईदृशो देवदत्त इति । स गुणैः प्राप्यमाणमाह । उद्दिष्टो मे दवदत्त इति । Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I. 3.2; (2) spot, place, passage of occurrence: उद्देश उपदेशदेशः; confer, compare यथोद्देशं संज्ञापरिभाषम् Pari.Śek. Pari. 2.
uddeśyareferred to; pointed out, subject, as contrasted with the predicate मानान्तरप्राप्तमुद्देश्यम् ; confer, compare उद्दश्यप्रतिनिर्दिश्यमानयोरैक्यमापद्यत् सर्वनाम पर्यायेण तत्तल्लिङभाक् । तद्यथा | शैत्यं हि यत्सा प्रकृतिर्जलस्य, शैत्यं हि य यत्तत्प्रकृतिर्जलस्य वा । उद्देश्य in grammar refers to the subjectpart of a sentence as opposed to the predicate-participle. In the sentence वृद्धिरादैच् the case is strikingly an opposite one and the explanation given by Patañjali is very interesting;confer, compare तदेतदेकं मङ्गलार्थं आचार्यस्य मृष्यताम् । माङ्गलिक अाचार्यः महतः शास्त्रौघस्य मङ्गलार्थं वृद्धिशब्दमादितः प्रयुङ्कते, Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I. 1.1.
uddeśyavidheyabhāvarelationship between the subject and the predicate where generally the subject is placed first in a sentence; confer, compare उद्देश्यवचनं पूर्वं विधेयत्वं ततः परम् । confer, compare also तादात्म्यसंसर्गकस्थले विशेष्यत्वमेव उद्देश्यं विशेषणत्वमेव विधेयम् Padavākyaratnākara.
uddyotathe word always refers in grammar to the famous commentary by Nāgeśabhaṭṭa written in the first decade of the 18th century A. D. om the Mahābhāṣyapradīpa of Kaiyaṭa. The Mahābhāṣya-Pradīpoddyota by Nāgeśa.appears to be one of the earlier works of Nāgeśa. It is also called Vivaraṇa. The commentary is a scholarly one and is looked upon as a final word re : the exposition of the Mahābhāṣya. It is believed that Nāgeśa wrote 12 Uddyotas and 12 Śekharas which form some authoritative commentaries on prominent works in the different Śāstras.
uddyotanaprabhāname of a commentary on the 'Tantrapradipa' of Maitreya Rakṣita,which latter is a commentary on Jinendrabuddhi's Kāśikāvivaraṇapañjikā, a commentary on the Kāśikāvṛtti by Jinendrabuddhi, called Nyāsa. which itself is a commentary on Jayāditya's Kāśikā.
upagrahaa term used by the ancient grammarians in the sense of the Parasmaipada and the Ātmanepada affixes. The word is not found in Pāṇini's Pāṇini's Aṣṭādhyāyī.. The Vārttikakāra has used the word in his Vārttika उपग्रहप्रतिषेधश्च on P. III.2.127 evidently in the sense of Pada affixes referring to the Ātmanepada as explained by Kaiyaṭa in the words उपग्रहस्य आत्मनेपदसंज्ञाया इत्यर्थ: । The word occurs in the Ślokavārttika सुप्तिङुपग्रहलिङ्गनराणां quoted by Patañjali in his Mahābhāṣya on व्यत्ययो बहुलम् P. III. 1.85, where Nāgeśa writes लादेशव्यङ्ग्यं स्वार्थत्वादि । इह तत्प्रतीतिनिमित्ते परस्मै-पदात्मनेपदे उपग्रहशब्देन लक्षणयोच्येते । The word is found in the sense of Pada in the Mahābhāṣya on P. III. 1.40. The commentator on Puṣpasūtra explains the word as उपगृह्यते समीपे पठ्यते इति उपग्रहः. The author of the Kāśikā on P. VI. 2.134 has cited the reading चूर्णादीन्यप्राण्युपग्रहात् instead of चूर्णादीन्यप्राणिषष्ठ्याः and made the remark तत्रेापग्रह इति षष्ठ्यन्तमेव पूर्वाचार्योपचारेण गृह्यते. This remark shows that in ancient times उपग्रह meant षष्ठ्यन्त i. e. a word in the genitive case. This sense gave rise to, or was based upon, an allied sense, viz. the meaning of 'षष्ठी' i. e. possession. Possibly the sense 'possession' further developed into the further sense 'possession of the fruit or result for self or others' referring to the तिङ् affixes which possessed that sense. The old sense 'षष्ठ्यन्त' of the word 'उपग्रह' having gone out of use, and the sense 'पद' having come in vogue, the word षष्ठी' must have been substituted for the word 'उपग्रह' by some grammarians before the time of the Kāśikākāras. As Patañjali has dropped the Sūtra (VI. 2.134), it cannot be said definitely whether the change of reading took place before Patañjali or after him.
upajanaliterallyorigin; one that originates, augment, उपजायते असौ उपजन: । The word is used in the sense of 'additional phonetic element'; confer, compare उपजन आगमः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on Śivasūtra 5; confer, compare also वर्णव्यत्ययापायोपजनविकारेष्वर्थदर्शनात् । Māheśvarasūtras. 5 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 15. The Ṛk Prātiśākhya gives स् in पुरुश्चन्द्र as an instance ofeminine. उपजन confer, compare Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) IV. 37. In the Nirukta उपजन is given as the sense of the prefix 'उप'; confer, compare उपेत्युपजनम्: The commentary on the Nirukta explains the word उपजन as अाधिक्य.
upadeśainstruction; original enunciation; first or original precepts or teaching; confer, compare उपदेश आद्योच्चारणम् S. K. on T the rule उपदेशेजनुनासिक इत् P.I.3.2. confer, compare वर्णानामुपदेशः कर्तव्यः; Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on Āhnika of the Pātañjala Mahābhāṣya. I. Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 15. For difference between उपदेश and उद्देश see उद्देश; confer, compare also उपदिश्यतेनेनेत्युपदेशः । शास्त्रवाक्यानि, सूत्रपाठः खिलपाठश्च Kāśikā on P. I.3.2; confer, compare also Vyāḍi. Pari. 5; (2) employment (of a word) for others confer, compare उपेदश: परार्थः प्रयोगः । स्वयमेव तु बुद्धया यदा प्ररमृशति तदा नास्त्युपदेशः Kāś. on अदोनुपदेशे P.I.4.70.
upapadaliterallya word placed near; an adjoining word. In Pāṇini's grammar, the term उपपद is applied to such words as are put in the locative case by Pāṇini in his rules prescribing kṛt affixes in rules from 1 II. 1, 90 to III. 4 end; confer, compare तत्रोपपदं सप्तमीस्थम् P.III.1.92; exempli gratia, for example कर्मणि in कर्मण्यण् P. III.2.1. The word is also used in the sense of an adjoining word connected in sense. e. g. युष्मद्युपपदे as also प्रहासे च मन्योपपदे P.I.4.105,106; confer, compare also क्रियार्थायां क्रियायामुपपदे धातोर्भविष्यति काले तुमुन्ण्वुलौ भवतः Kāś. on P.III.3.10; confer, compare also इतरेतरान्योन्योपपदाच्च P.I.3.10, मिथ्योपपदात् कृञोभ्यासे P.I.3.71, as also उपपदमतिङ् P.II.2.19; and गतिकारकोपपदात्कृत् P. VI.2.139. Kaiyaṭa on P.III.1. 92 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 2 explains the word उपपद as उपोच्चारि or उपोच्चारितं पदं उपपदम्. The word उपपद is found used in the Prātiśākhya literature where it means a word standing near and effecting some change: confer, compare च वा ह अह एव एतानि चप्रभृतीनि यान्युपपदानि उक्तानि आख्यातस्य विकारीणिo Uvaṭa on Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.VI. 23.
upapadavibhaktia case termination added to a word on account of the presence of another word requiring the addition;confer, compare the well-known Paribhāṣā,उपपदविभक्तेः कारकविभक्तिर्बलीयसी. Paribhāṣenduśekhara of Nāgeśa. Pari. 94; and M.Bh. on I.4. 96 stating the possession of greater force in the case of a kāra-kavibhakti than in the case of an upapadavibhakti.
upapadasamāsathe compound of a word, technically termed as उपपद by Pāṇini according to his definition of the word in III.1.92., with another word which is a verbal derivative; confer, compare कुम्भकारः, नगरकारः Here technically the compound of the words कुम्भ, नगर et cetera, and others which are upapadas is formed with कार,before a case-termination is added to the nominal base कार; confer, compare गतिकारकोपपदानां कृद्भिः सह समासवचनं प्राक् सुबुत्पत्तेः Paribhāṣenduśekhara of Nāgeśa. Pari. 75.
upamanyu(1)the famous commentator on the grammatical verses attributed to Nandikeśvarakārikā. which are known by the name नन्दिकेश्वरकारिका and which form a kind of a commentary on the sūtras of Maheśvara; (2) a comparatively modern grammarian possibly belonging to the nineteenth century who is also named Nandikeśvarakārikā.kārikābhāṣya by Upamanyu.and who has written a commentory on the famous Kāśikāvṛtti by Jayāditya and Vāmana. Some believe that Upa-manyu was an ancient sage who wrote a nirukta or etymological work and whose pupil came to be known as औपमन्यव.
upalakṣaṇaimplication, indication: a thing indicatory of another thing. The term is very frequently found in commentary works in connection with a word which signifies something beyond it which is similar to it; the indication is generally inclusive; confer, compare Kāśikā on भीस्म्योर्हेतुभये P.I.3.68 भयग्रहणमुपलक्षणार्थं विस्मयोपि तत एव । as also मन्त्रग्रहणं तु च्छन्दस उपलक्षणार्थम् Kāś. on II.4.80. The verbal forms of लक्ष् and उपलक्ष् as also the words लक्षयितुम्, लक्षणीय, लक्षित et cetera, and others possess the sense of 'expressing the meaning not primarily, but secondarily by indication or implication'.
upaśleṣaimmediate contact, as for instance, of one word with another: confer, compare शब्दस्य च शब्देन कोन्योभिसंबन्धो भवितुमर्हति अन्यदत उपश्लेषात् । M.Bh. on VI. 1.72. The word उपश्लिष्ट is also found in the Mahābhāṣya in the same context.
upasaṃkhyānamention, generally of the type of the annexation of some words to words already given, or of some limiting conditions or additions to what has been already statedition The word is often found at the end of the statements made by the Vārttikakāra on the sūtras of Pāṇini.: confer, compare P.I.1.29 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 1: I.1.36 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 3 et cetera, and others The words वाच्य and वक्तव्य are also similarly useditionThe word is found similarly used in the Mahābhāṣya also very frequently.
upasaṃgrahainclusion of something, which is not directly mentioned; confer, compare प्रसिद्ध्युपसंग्रहार्थमेतत् Kāś.on P.I.3.48,also इतिकरणं एवंविधानामेप्यन्येषामुपसंग्रहार्थम् Kāś. on P VII.4.65.
upasaṃyoga(1)union;confer, compare नामाख्यातयोस्तु कर्मोपसंयोगद्योतका भवन्ति prepositions are signs to show that such a union with another sense has occurred in the case of the noun or verb to which they are prefixed, Nirukta of Yāska.I.3.; (2) addition; confer, compare अक्रियमाणे हि संज्ञाग्रहणे गरीयानुपसंयोगः कर्तव्यः स्यात् M.Bh. on P. IV.2.21. Vārt, 2.
upasargapreposition, prefix. The word उसपर्ग originally meant only 'a prefixed word': confer, compare सोपसर्गेषु नामसु Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XVI. 38. The word became technically applied by ancient Sanskrit Gratmmarians to the words प्र, परा, अप, सम् et cetera, and others which are always used along with a verb or a verbal derivative or a noun showing a verbal activity; confer, compare उपसर्गाः क्रियायोगे P. I. 4.59. 'These prefixes are necessariiy compounded with the following word unless the latter is a verbal form; confer, compare कुगतिप्रादयः P.II. 2.18. Although they are not compounded with a verbal form, these prepositions are used in juxtaposition with it; sometimes they are found detached from the verbal form even with the intervention of one word or more. The prefixes are instrumental in changing the meaning of the root. Some scholars like Śākaṭāyana hold the view that separated from the roots, prefixes do not express any specific sense as ordinary words express, while scholars like Gārgya hold the view that prefixes do express a sense e. g. प्र means beginning or प्रारम्भ; confer, compare न निर्बद्धा उपसर्गा अर्थान्निराहुरिति शाकटायनः । नामाख्यातयोस्तु कर्मोपसंयोगद्योतका भवन्ति । उच्चावचाः पदार्था भवन्तीति गार्ग्यः । तद्य एषु पदार्थः प्राहुरिमं तं नामाख्यातयोरर्थविकरणम् Nirukta of Yāska.I. 8. It is doubtful, however, which view Pāṇini himself held. In his Ātmanepada topic, he has mentioned some specific roots as possessing some specific senses when preceded by some specific prefixes (see P. I. 3.20, 24, 25, 40, 4l, 46, 52, 56, et cetera, and others), which implies possibly that roots themselves possess various senses, while prefixes are simply instrumental in indicating or showing them. On the other hand, in the topic of the Karmapravacanīyas,the same words प्र, परा et cetera, and others which, however, are not termed Upasargas for the time being, although they are called Nipātas, are actually assigned some specific senses by Pāṇini. The Vārttikakāra has defined उपसर्ग as क्रियाविशेषक उपसर्गः P. I. 3.I. Vārt 7, leaving it doubtful whether the उपसर्ग or prefix possesses an independent sense which modifies the sense of the root, or without possessing any independent sense, it shows only the modified sense of the root which also is possessed by the root. Bhartṛhari, Kaiyaṭa and their followers including Nāgeśa have emphatically given the view that not only prefixes but Nipātas, which include प्र, परा and others as Upasargas as well as Karmapravacanīyas, do not denote any sense, but they indicate it; they are in fact द्योतक and not वाचक. For details see Nirukta of Yāska.I. 3, Vākyapadīya II. 190, Mahābhāṣya on I. 3.1. Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 7 and Kaiyaṭa's Mahābhāṣyapradīpa.and Mahābhāṣya-Pradīpoddyota by Nāgeśa.thereon. The Ṛk Prātiśākhya has discussed the question in XII. 6-9 where, as explained by the commentator, it is stated that prefixes express a sense along with roots or nouns to which they are attachedition It is not clear whether they convey the sense by denotation or indication, the words वाचक in stanza 6 and विशेषकृत् in stanza 8 being in favour of the former and the latter views respectively; cf उपसर्गा विंशतिरर्थवाचकाः सहेतराभ्यामितरे निपाताः; क्रियावाचकभाख्यातमुपसर्गो विशेषकृत्, सत्त्वाभिधायकं नाम निपातः पादपूरणः Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XII. st. 6 and 8. For the list of upasargas see Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XII. 6, Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.I. 15, Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.VI.24, and S. K. on P. I.4.60.
upasargadyotyatāthe view or doctrine that prefixes, by themselves, do not possess any sense, but they indicate the sense of the verb or noun with which they are connectedition For details See Vākyapadīya II.165-206; also vol. VII. pages 370-372 of Vyākaraṇa Mahābhāṣya edition by the D. E. Society, Poona.
upasargayogaconnection with a prefix; joining of the prefix. Some scholars of grammar hold the view that the Upasarga is prefixed to the root and then the verbal form is arrived at by placing the desired terminations after the root, while others hold the opposite view: confer, compare पूर्वं धातुः साधनेनोपयुज्यते पश्चादुपसर्गेण । अन्ये तु पूर्वं धातुरुपसर्गेण युज्यते पश्चात्साधनेनेत्याहुः Sīradeva's Paribhāṣāvṛtti Pari. 131, 132; cf also vol. VII. Mahābhāṣya edited by the D. E. Society, Poona, pages 371-372.
upasarjana(1)vanishing immediately after utterance. See उच्चरित.
upaskāraintroduction of the necessary changes in the wording of the base, such as elision, or addition or substitution of a letter or letters as caused by the addition of suffixes.
upasthitaa word used father technically in the sense of the word इति which is used in the Krama and other recitals when Vedic reciters show separately the two words compounded together by uttering the compound word first, then the word इति and then the two compound words, exempli gratia, for example सुश्लोक ३ इति सु-श्लोक। विभावसो इति विभा-वसो. The Kāśikā defines the word उपस्थित as समुदायादवच्छिद्य पदं येन स्वरूपे अवस्थाप्यते तद् उपस्थितम् । इतिशब्दः । Kāś.on VI.1.129. The Ṛk-Prātiśākhya explains the word rather differently, but in the same context.The word after which इति is placed is called upasthita exempli gratia, for example the word बाहू in बाहू इति or विभावसौ in विभावसो इति as contrasted with स्थित id est, that is the word without इति exempli gratia, for example बाहू or विभावसो, as also contrasted with स्थितोपस्थित id est, that is the whole word विभावसो इति विभाsवसो which is also called संहित or मिलित; (2) occurring, present; cf कार्यकालं संज्ञापरिभाषम् . यत्र कार्यं तत्रोपस्थितं द्रष्टव्यम् । Par.Śek. Pari.3.
upahita(1)with, preceded by; e g. दीर्घोपहित, ह्रस्वोपहित; (2) sticking to, connected with, 'उपश्लेषित': confer, compareDurga on Nir.V.12;(3) coming to be placed near or in juxtaposition with the preceding word: confer, compare आवोन्तोपहितात् सतः Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) II.15.
upāṃśuliterally inaudible. The word is explained in the technical sense as the first place or stage in the utterance of speech where it is perfectly inaudible although produced; confer, compare उपांशु इति प्रथमं वाचः स्थानम् Com. on Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.XXIII, 5.
upādhicondition, limitation, determinant, qualification: exempli gratia, for example न हि उपाधेरुपाधिर्भवति, विशेषणस्य वा विशेषणम् M.Bh. on I.3.2 as also on V.1.16; confer, compare also इह यो विशेष उपाधिर्वोपादीयते द्योत्ये तस्मिंस्तेन भवितव्यम् । M.Bh. on III.1.7.
ubhayagatiboth the alternatives; both the senses; double signification; confer, compare उभयगतिरिह भवति P.I.1.23,Vārt 4,Pari. Śek, Par. 9 where the word ubhaya refers to both the senses-the ordinary one ( अकृत्रिम } and the technical one ( कृत्रिम)--exempli gratia, for example the meanings ( i ) numeral, and ( ii ) words बहु, गण et cetera, and others of the word संख्या.
ubhayataspāśāpresenting a difficulty in both the ways; confer, compare सैषा उभयतस्पाशा रज्जुर्भवति M.Bh. on VI.1.68.
urobṛhatīa variety of the Vedic metre बृहती in which the first pada consists of twelve syllables and the rest of eight syllables; confer, compare Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XVI. 33.
uv(उवङ्)substitute for the vowel उ belonging to the Vikaraṇa श्रु, to roots and to the noun भ्रू under certain conditions: cf अचि श्नुधातुर्भ्रुवां य्वोरियङुवङौ P.VI.4.77.
uṣṇih(उष्णिक्)name of the second of the main seven Vedic metres which are known by the name प्रजापतिच्छन्दस्. The Uṣṇik metre consists of 28 syllables divided into three padas of 8, 8 and 12 sylla bles. It has got many varieties such as पुरउष्णिह्, ककुभ् and others; for details see Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XVI 20-26.
us(1)substitute for झि ending of the third person.plu., in the perfect tense and in the present tense in the case of the roots विद् and ब्रू, exempli gratia, for example विदुः and आहुः confer, compare P. III.4.82-84 ; (2) substitute जुस् (उस्) for झि in the potential and the benedictive moods, as also after the aorist sign स् and after roots of the third conjugation, roots ending in आ and the root विद्, e. g. पचेयुः भूयासुः अकार्षुः, अबिभयुः अदुः, अविदुः, et cetera, and others; confer, compare Kāś. on III.4.108-112.
usiUṇādi afix उस् applied to the root जन् to form जनुस् confer, compare जनेरुसिः Uṇsūtra. 272.
ūṅfeminine. affix ऊ prescribed after masculine nouns ending in the vowel ऊ and denoting a human being as also after some other specific masculine bases cf ऊङुतः P.IV. I.66 and the following sūtras. exempli gratia, for example कुरूः, पङ्गूः श्वश्रूः, करभोरूः, भद्रबाहूः et cetera, and others
ūṭh(1)saṁprasāraṇa vowel ऊ substituted for the व् of वाह् under certain conditions exempli gratia, for example, ऊढः, confer, compare वाह ऊठ् P.VI.4.132; (2) substitute ऊ for व् before certain affixes; e. g. द्यूतः, द्यूत्वा, जूर्तिः, तूर्तिः et cetera, and others confer, compare च्छ्वोः शूडनुनासिके च P.VI.4.19, 20.
ūhamodification of a word, in a Vedic Mantra, so as to suit the context in which the mantra is to be utilised, generally by change of case affixes; adaptation of a mantra: confer, compare ऊहः खल्वपि । न सर्वैर्लिङ्गैर्न च सर्वाभिर्विभक्तिभिर्वेदे मन्त्रा निगदिताः । ते च अवश्यं यज्ञगतेन यथायथं विपरिणमयितव्याः । Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P.1.1 Āhnika 1.
fourth vowel in Pāṇini's alphabet; possessed of long and protracted varieties and looked upon as cognate ( सवर्ण ) with लृ which has no long type in the grammar of Pāṇini; confer, compare R.Pr.I,9: V.Pr.VIII.3. (2) uṇādi suffix च् applied to the root स्था to form the word स्थृ; e. g. सव्येष्ठा सारथिः; confer, compare सव्ये स्थश्छन्दसि Uṇ Sū, II. 101.
ṛkārathe letter ऋ with its 18 varieties made up of the ह्रस्व, दीर्घ, प्लुत, and सानुनासिक varieties and characterized by the three accents. ऋ and लृ are looked upon as cognate in Pāṇini's grammar and hence, ऋ could be looked upon as possessed of 30 varieties including 12 varieties of लृ.
ṛktantraa work consisting of five chapters containing in all 287 sūtras. It covers the same topics as the Prātiśākhya works and is looked upon as one of the Prātiśākhya works of the Sāma Veda. Its authorship is attributed to Śākaṭāyana according to Nageśa, while औदिव्राज is held as its author by some, and कात्यायन by others. It bears a remarkable similarity to Pāṇini's Pāṇini's Aṣṭādhyāyī. especially in topics concerning coalescence and changes of स् and न् to ष् and ण् respectively. It cannot be definitely said whether it preceded or followed Pāṇini's work.
ṛkprātiśākhyaone of the Prātiśākhya works belonging to the Aśvalāyana Śākha of the Ṛg Veda. The work available at present, appears to be not a very old one,possibly written a century or so after Pāṇini's time. It is possible that the work, which is available, is based upon a few ancient Prātiśākhya works which are lost. Its authorship is attributed to Śaunaka.The work is a metrical one and consists of three books or Adhyāyas, each Adhyāya being made up of six Paṭalas or chapters. It is written, just as the other Prātiśākhya works, with a view to give directions for the proper recitation of the Veda. It has got a scholarly commentary written by Uvaṭa and another one by Kumāra who is also called Viṣṇumitra. See अाश्वलायनप्रातिशाख्य.
ṛgvirāmaverse-pause equal to 3 mātrākālas or three mātrā units. confer, compare ऋग्विरामः पदविरामो विवृत्तिविरामस्समानपदविवृत्तिविरामः त्रिमात्रो द्विमात्र एकमात्रोर्धमात्र आनुपूर्व्येण Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.XXII. 13. According to Ṛk. Tantra it consists of two mātrās.
ṛtshort vowel ऋ. before which the preceding vowel is optionally left as it is, i. e. without coalescence and shortened also if long; confer, compare ऋत्यकः P. VI.1.128.
ṛṣicchandsthe metre of the Vedic seers. The seven metres गायत्री, उष्णिक्, अनुष्टुप्, बृहती, पङ्क्ति, त्रिष्टुप् and जगती consisting respectively of 24, 28, 32, 36, 40, 44 and 48 syllables are named ऋषिच्छन्दस् as contrasted with the metres दैव, प्राजापत्य and आसुर, which, when combined together, make the metres of the Vedic seers, For details see Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XVI.1.5.
ṝdanta(roots)ending in ॠ which have the vowel ॠ changed into इर् by the rule ॠत इद्धातोः P.VII. 1.100; e. g. किरति, गिलति.
ediphthong vowel ए made up of अ and इ, and hence having कण्ठतालुस्थान as its place of origin. It has no short form according to Pāṇini. In cases where a short vowel as a substitute is prescribed for it in grammar, the vowel इ is looked upon as its short form. Patañjali in his Mahābhāṣya has observed that followers of the Sātyamugri and Rāṇāyanīya branches of the Sāmaveda have short ए ( ऍ ) in their Sāmaveda recital and has given सुजाते अश्वसूनृते, अध्वर्यो अद्रिभिः सुतम् as illustrations; confer, compare Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.1-48; as also the article on.
ekadeśavikṛtanyāyathe maxim that ' a thing is called or taken as that very thing although it is lacking in a part,'stated briefly as एकदेशविकृतमनन्यवत् Pari. Śek. Pari. 37. The maxim is given in all the different schools of grammar: confer, compare Śak Pari. 17: Cāndra Pari. 15, Kat. Par. Vr. l, Jain. Par.Vr.l l, Hemacandra's Śabdānuśāsana.Pari.7 et cetera, and others
ekadravyaone and the same individual substance: cf the words एकद्रव्यसम-वायित्व Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P.I.4.23, एकद्रव्याभिघान on P.VIII.1.51, एकद्रव्योपनिवेशिनी given as a definition of संज्ञा Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P.I.4.1.
ekapadamade up of one word; consisting of one word; confer, compare अथवा सन्त्येकपदान्यप्यवधारणानि । यथा अब्भक्षो वायुभक्षः । अप एव भक्षयति वायुमव भक्षयति । M.Bh. first Āhnika; (2) a continuous word paraphrased as अखण्डपद and समानपद by commentators; confer, compare तेनानन्तरा षष्ठयेकपदवत् V.Pr.II. 18: (3) every individual word: confer, compare बहुक्रमे क्रमेत तस्यैकपदानि नि:सृजन् R.Pr.XI.18.
ekavacanasingular number; affix of the singular numberin Pāṇini's grammar applied to noun-bases ( प्रातिपदिक) and roots when the sense of the singular number is to be conveyed; the singular sense can be of the form of an individual or collection or genus. The word एकवचन in the technical sense of singular number is found used in the Prātiśākhyas and Nirukta also.
ekavibhaktia pada having the same case in the various dissolutions of the compound word; e. g. the word कौशाम्बी in the compound word निष्कौशाम्बिः, which stands only in the ablative case कौशाम्ब्याः, although the word निष्क्रान्त, which stands for the word निस्, could be used in many cases. The word नियतविभक्तिक is also used in the same sense.
ekavṛttisingle vṛtti or gloss on the Vedic as well as classical portions of grammar. Puruṣottamadeva's Paribhāṣāvṛtti.adeva has used this term in his Bhāṣāvṛtti to contrast his Vṛtti (भाषावृत्ति) with the Kāśikāvṛtti and the Bhāgavṛtti which deal with both the portions; confer, compareअनार्ष इत्येकवृत्तावुपयुक्तम् Bhāṣāvṛtti on I.1.16, confer, comparealso Bhāṣāvṛtti on III. 4.99, IV.3.22 and VI.3.20.एकवृत्ति is possibly used by Puruṣottamadeva's Paribhāṣāvṛtti.adeva in the sense of मुख्यवृत्ति or साधारणवृत्ति i. e. the common chief gloss on both the portions.
ekaśeṣaa kind of composite formation in which only one of the two or more words compounded together subsists, the others being elided; confer, compare एकः शिष्यते इतरे निवर्तन्ते वृक्षश्च वृक्षश्च वृक्षौ । Kāśikā on सरूपाणामेकशेष एक-विभक्तौ P.I.2.64; confer, compare also सुरूपसमुदायाद्धि विभक्तिर्या विधीयते । एकस्तत्रार्थवान् सिद्धः समुदायस्य वाचकः ।। Bhāṣāvṛtti on P. I. 2.64. There is a dictum of grammarians that every individual object requires a separate expression to convey its presence. Hence, when there is a dual sense, the word has to be repeated, as also the word has to be multiplied when there is a plural sense. In current spoken language, however, in such cases the word is used only once. To justify this single utterance for conveying the sense of plurality, Pāṇini has laid down a general rule सरूपाणामेकशेष एकविभक्तौ and many other similar rules to cover cases of plurality not of one and the same object, but plurality cased by many objects, such as plurality caused by ideas going in pairs or relations such as parents, brothers and sisters, grand-father and grand-son, male and female. For example, see the words वृक्षश्च वृक्षश्च वृक्षौ; Similarly वृक्षाः for many trees, पितरौ for माता च पिता च; देवौ for देवी च देवश्च; confer, compare also the words श्वशुरौ, भ्रातरौ, गार्ग्यौ (for गार्ग्य and गार्ग्यायण),आवाम् (for त्वं च अहं च), यौ (for स च यश्च) and गावः feminine. अजा feminine. अश्वाः masculine gender. irrespective of the individuals being some males and some females. Pāṇini has devoted 10 Sūtras to this topic of Ekaśeṣa. The Daiva grammar has completely ignored this topic. Patanjali has very critically and exhaustively discussed this topic. Some critics hold that the topic of एकशेघ did not exist in the original Pāṇini's Aṣṭādhyāyī. of Pāṇini but it was interpolated later on, and adduce the long discussion in the Mahābhāṣya especially the Pūrvapakṣa therein, in support of their argument. Whatever the case be, the Vārttikakāra has commented upon it at length; hence, the addition must have been made immediately after Pāṇini, if at all there was any. For details see Mahābhāṣya on I.1.64 to 73 as also,Introduction p. 166-167, Vol.7 of the Mahābhāṣya published by the D. E. Society, Poona.
ekaśeṣanirdeśastatement by subsistence of one word out of many. The phrase is very often used in the Mahābhāṣya where the omission of an individual thing is explained by saying that the expression used is a composite one including the omitted thing along with the thing already expressed; confer, compare एकशेषनिर्देशोयम् । सर्वादीनि च सर्वादीनि च सर्वादीनि । Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.I.27, on I.1.59, I.2.39, as also on I.3.1 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 5,I.4. 101 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 3, II.1.1. Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 19 et cetera, and others
ekaśrutithat which has got the same accent or tone; utterance in the same tone; monotone. The word is applied to the utterance of the vocative noun or phrase calling a man from a distance, as also to that of the vowels or syllables following a Svarita vowel in the Saṁhitā id est, that is the continuous utterance of Vedic sentences; confer, compare एकश्रुति दूरात्संबुद्वौ and the foll. P.I.2.33-40 and the Mahābhāṣya thereon. In his discussion on I.2.33 Patañjali has given three alternative views about the accent of Ekaśruti syllables : (a) they possess an accent between the उदात्त (acute) and अनुदात्त (grave), (b) they are in the same accent as is possessed by the preceding vowel, (c) Ekaśruti is looked upon as the seventh of the seven accents; confer, compare सैषा ज्ञापकाभ्यामुदात्तानुदात्तयोर्मध्यमेकश्रुतिरन्तरालं ह्रियते। ... सप्त स्वरा भवन्ति | उदात्तः, उदात्ततर:, अनुदात्तः, अनुदात्ततर:, स्वरितः स्वरिते य उदात्तः सोन्येन विशिष्टः, एकश्रुतिः सप्तमः । M.Bh. on P.I.2.33.
ekārathe letter ए; looked upon as a diphthong ( संध्यक्षर ) made up of the letters अ and इ. The combination of the two constituent parts is so complete as cannot allow any of the two parts to be independently working for saṁdhi or any other operation with its adjoining letter; cf नाव्यपवृत्तस्य अवयवे तद्विधिर्यथा द्रव्येषु Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). Śivasūtra 3 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 9.
egeliṃg( Eggeling )a well-known German scholar of Sanskrit Grammar who flourished in the l9th century and who edited the Kātantra Vyākaraṇa with the commentary of Durgasiṁha's Kātantra-Sūtravṛtti. and many appendices in 1876.
eṅa brief term ( प्रत्याहार ) for the two diphthong letters ए and ओ; confer, compare एङ्ह्रस्वात्संबुद्धेः P.VI.1.69, एङः पदान्तादति VI.1.109. et cetera, and others
eca short term (प्रत्याहार) in Pāṇini's grammar standing for diphthongs or letters ए,ऐ,ओ, औ, exempli gratia, for example एचोयवायावः P.VI.1.78, एच इग् ह्रस्वादेशे P.I.1.48.
eṇīkṛtaA fault in pronunciation when the voice is indistinct, and the word pronounced is not distinctly heard; confer, compare एणीकृतः अविशिष्टः । किमयमोकारः अथौकार इति यत्र संदेहः Kaiyaṭa's Mahābhāṣyapradīpa.on M.Bh.I.1.1,explained as अवशिष्ट: संश्लिष्टः संदिग्ध इति यावत् by Nāgeśa in his Uddyota.
epa term used in the Jainendra Vyākaraṇa for the term गुण of Pāṇini standing for the vowels अ, ए and ओ; confer, compare ऋतः समादेरेप् Jain. Vy. V.2.122.
ephaending added to the consonant र when a mention of it is to be made; confer, compare T.Pr.I.19: exempli gratia, for example रेफ.
elima(1)kṛt (affix). afix केलिमर् exempli gratia, for example पचेलिमा माषाः confer, compare P. III.1.96 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 1: (2) Uṇādi affix एलिमच् applied to पच् confer, compare पच एलिमच् Uṇ. S.IV.37.
elutad-affix चेलु in the sense of unable to bear, found in Vedic Literature only; exempli gratia, for example हिमेलुः confer, compare हिमाक्चेलुर्वक्तव्यः । P.V.2.122 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 7.
(1)the substitute ए for the perfect affix त, substituted for the whole त by reason of the indicatory letter श् attached to ए; confer, compare लिटस्तझयोरेशिरेच् and अनेकाल्शित्सर्वस्य P. III.4.8l and I.1.55; (2) affix ए applied to the root चक्ष् in Vedic Literature; confer, compare नावचक्षे । नावख्यातव्यमित्यर्थः Kāś. on P.III.4.15.
aidiphthong vowel ऐ; composite form of आ and ए, also termed वृद्धि in Pāṇini's grammar.
aikasvaryahaving only one principal accent (Udātta or Svarita) for the whole compound word which is made up of two or more individual words confer, compare Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I.1.29.
aicshort term ( प्रत्याहार ) standing for 'the two diphthong vowels ऐ and औ; confer, compare न य्वाभ्यां पदान्ताभ्यां पूर्वौ तु ताभ्यामैच् P.VII.3.4; confer, compare ऐचोश्चोत्तरभूयस्त्वात् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P.I.1.48, The short substitutes of ऐ and औ are इ and उ when prescribed confer, compare P. I.1.48; so also the protracted forms of ऐ and औ are protracted इ and उ; confer, compare P. III.2.106. They are called द्विस्वर vowels in the Ṛk Prātiśākhya. Śākaṭāyana says they are द्विमात्र.
aindraname of an ancient school of grammar and of the treatise also, belonging to that school, believed to have been written under instructions of Indra. The work is not available. Patañjali mentions that Bṛhaspati instructed Indra for one thousand celestial years and still did not finish his instructions in words': (Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). I.1.1 ). The Taittirīya Saṁhitā mentions the same. Pāṇini has referred to some ancient grammarians of the East by the word प्राचाम् without mentioning their names, and scholars like Burnell think that the grammar assigned to Indra is to be referred to by the word प्राचाम्. The Bṛhatkathāmañjarī remarks that Pāṇini's grammar threw into the background the Aindra Grammar. Some scholars believe that Kalāpa grammar which is available today is based upon Aindra,just as Cāndra is based upon Pāṇini's grammar. References to Aindra Grammar are found in the commentary on the Sārasvata Vyākaraṇa, in the Kavikalpadruma of Bopadeva as also in the commentary upon the Mahābhārata by Devabodha.Quotations, although very few, are given by some writers from the work. All these facts prove that there was an ancient pre-Pāṇinian treatise on Grammar assigned to इन्द्र which was called Aindra-Vyākaraṇa.For details see Dr.Burnell's 'Aindra School of Sanskrit Grammarians' as also Vol. VII pages 124-126 of Vyākaraṇa Mahābhāṣya, edited by the D.E.Society, Poona.
aissubstitute for the case affix भिस् after words ending in अ; confer, compare अतो भिस एस्. P.VII.I.9 to 11.
o(1)diphthong vowel made up of the vowels अ and उ, termed as guṇa in Pāṇini's grammar and prescribed sometimes in the place of the vowel उ; ( 2 ) affix ओ applied to the root गम् or गा to form a noun; confer, compare ओकारो नामकरणः Nir.II.5.
oṃkārathe syllable ओं called by the term प्रणव and generally recited at the beginning of Vedic works. Patañjali has commented upon the word briefly as follows; पादस्य वा अर्धर्चस्य वा अन्त्यमक्षरमुपसंहृत्य तदाद्यक्षरशेषस्य स्थाने त्रिमात्रमोंकारं त्रिमात्रमोंकारं वा विदधति तं प्रणव इत्याचक्षते M.Bh. on VIII.2.89.
otthe vowel ओ; confer, compare ओत् PI.1.15,16 prescribingप्रगृह्यसंज्ञा for Nipātas like अहो, उताहो and others with a view that the wowel at their end should not coalesce with the following vowel. The Prātiśākhya works prohibit the coalescence of ओ in many cases with the succeeding vowel; confer, compare Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) I.70; Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.I.94.
opperṭ[Gustav Oppert 1836-1908 ]a German scholar of Sanskrit who edited the Śabdānuśāsana of Śākaṭāyana.
au(1)the vowel औ; diphthong vowel made up of आ and ओ; ( 2 ) the substitute औ for the final letter उ of the word मनु before the fem, affix ई; confer, compare मनोः स्त्री मनायी, मनावी,मनुः Kāś. on P. IV. 1. 38; ( 3 ) case ending of the nominative case. and acc. dual called औङ् also.
auṭthe case ending औ of the acc. dual; confer, compare P.IV.1.2.
aut(1)the letter औ included in the वृद्धि vowels अा, ऐ and औ, and hence called वृद्धि in Pāṇini's grammar, (2) substitute for the caseending इ ( ङि ) in Pāṇini's grammar; confer, compare P. VII.3.118, 119.
audavrajian ancient sage and scholar of Vedic Grammar who is believed to have revised the original text of the ऋक्तन्त्रप्रातिशाख्य of the Sāma-Veda. confer, compare Śab. Kaus. I.1.8.
aupamikafigurative metaphorical application or statement: confer, compare ( विराट् ) पिपीलिकमध्या इत्यौपमिकम् Nirukta of Yāska.VII. 13. औपश्लेषिक resulting from immediate contact immediately or closely connected; one of the three types of अधिकरण or location which is given as the sense of the locative case; confer, compare अधिकरणं नाम त्रिप्रकारं-व्यापकम् ओपश्लेषिकम्, वैषयिकमिति ... इको यणचि | अचि उपाश्लिष्टस्येति | Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). VI. 1.72.
aupasaṃkhyānikasubsequently stated by way of addition or modification as done by the Vārttikakāras; confer, compare औपसंख्यानिकस्य णस्यापवादंः । आरण्यको मनुष्यः Kāś on P.IV.2.129; confer, compare also Kāś. on V.1.29 and VI.3.41.
auśsubstitute औ for the nominative case. and acc. case endings applied to the numeral अष्टन्; confer, compare अष्टाभ्य औश् P.VII. 1.21.
{{c|-( anusvāra ) ṃanusvāraor nasal (l) looked upon as a phonetic element, independent, no doubt, but incapable of being pronounced without a vowel Preceding it. Hence, it is shown in writing with अ although its form in writing is only a dot a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page. the line cf अं इत्यनुस्वारः । अकार इह उच्चारणर्थ इति बिन्दुमात्रो वर्णोनुस्वारसंज्ञो भवति Kātantra vyākaraṇa Sūtra.Vyāk I.1.19; (2) anusvāra,showing or signifying Vikāra id est, that is अागम and used as a technical term for the second विभक्ति or the accusative case. See the word अं a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page. on page 1.
or विसर्गः literally letting out breath from the mouth; sound or utterance caused by breath escaping from the mouth; breathing. The Visarjanīya, just like the anusvāra, is incapable of being independently utteredition Hence, it is written for convenience as अः although its form for writing purposes is only two dots after the vowel preceding it; confer, compare अः इति विसर्जनीयः । अकार इह उच्चारणार्थः इति कुमारीस्तनयुगाकृतिर्वर्णो विसर्जनीयसंज्ञो भवति । Kātantra vyākaraṇa Sūtra.Vyāk. I.1.16. See अः a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page. on page 2.
ᳵjihvāmūlīyaa phonetical element or unit called Jihvāmūlīya, produced at the root of the tongue, which is optionally substituted in the place of the Visarga (left 0ut breath) directly preceding the utterance of the letter क् or ख् and hence shown as ᳵ क्. See अ ᳵ क् a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page. on page 2.
ᳶ upadhmānīyaliterally blowing; a term applied to the visarga when followed by the consonant प् or फ्. The upadhmānīya is looked upon as a letter or phonetic element, which is always connected with the preceding vowel. As the upadhmānīya is an optional substitute for the visarga before the letter प् or फ्, when, in writing, it is to be shown instead of the visarga, it is shown as ᳶ, or as w , or even as x just as the Jihvāmūlīya; confer, compare उपध्मायते शब्दायते इति, उप समीपे ध्मायते शब्द्यते इति वा commentary on Kātantra vyākaraṇa Sūtra.I:; : confer, compare also कपाभ्यां प्रागर्धविसर्गसदृशो जिह्वामूलीयोपध्मानीयौः:S.K.on P.VIII.2.1.
m̐ nāsikyaa nasal letter or utterance included among the अयोगवाह letters analogous to anusvāra and yama letters. It is mentioned in the Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya as हुँ इति नासिक्यः on which Uvvaṭa's Bhāṣya on the Prātiśākhya works.makes the remark अयमृक्शाखायां प्रसिद्धः. The Ṛk-Prātiśākhya mentions नासिक्य, यम and अनुस्वार as नासिक्य or nasal letters, while Uvvaṭa's Bhāṣya on the Prātiśākhya works.defines नासिक्य as a letter produced only by the nose; confer, compare केवलनासिकया उच्चार्यमाणे वर्णॊ नासिक्यः Uvvaṭa's Bhāṣya on the Prātiśākhya works.on Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) I. 20. The Taittirīya Prātiśākhya calls the letter ह् as nāsikya when it is followed by the consonant न् or ण् or म् and gives अह्नाम् , अपराह्णे and ब्रह्म as instances. The Pāṇinīya Śikṣā does not mention नासिक्य as a letter. The Mahābhāṣya mentions नासिक्य as one of the six ayogavāha letters; confer, compare के पुनरयोगवाहाः । विसर्जनीयजिह्वामूलीयोपध्मानीयानुस्वारानुनासिक्ययमाः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on Śivasūtra 5 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 5, where some manuscripts read नासिक्य for अानुनासिक्य while in some other manuscripts there is neither the word आनुनासिक्य nor नासिक्य. It is likely that the anunāsika-colouring given to the vowel preceding the consonant सू substituted for the consonants म, न् and others by P. VIII. 3.2. to 12, was looked upon as a separate phonetic unit and called नासिक्य as for instance in सँस्कर्ता, मा हिँसीः, सँशिशाधि et cetera, and others
yamaa letter called यम which is uttered partly through the nose. A class consonant excepting the fifth, when followed by the fifth viz. ङ्, ञ्, ण्, न or म् , gets doubled in the Vedic recital, when the second of the doubled consonant which is coloured by the following nasal consonant is called यम. This यम letter is not independent. It necessarily depends upon the following nasal consonant and hence it is called अयोगवाह. The nasalization is shown in script as xx followed by the consonant; e. g. पलिक्क्नी, अगूग्रे, et cetera, and others The pronunciation of this yama or twin letter is seen in the Vedic recital only; confer, compare पलिक्कनी ... कखगघेभ्य; परे तत्सदृशा एव यमाः S. K. on P. VIII. 2.1. confer, compare कु खु गु घु इति यमाः विंशतिसंख्याका भवन्ति Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.VIII.24.
k(1)taddhita affix.affix क applied to the words of the ऋश्य group in the four senses called चातुरर्थिक e. g. ऋश्यकः, अनडुत्कः, वेणुकः et cetera, and others, confer, compare P.IV.2.80; (2) taddhita affix. affix क applied to nouns in the sense of diminution, censure, pity et cetera, and others e. g. अश्वक्रः, उष्ट्रकः, पुत्रकः, confer, compare P.V. 3.70-87: (3) taddhita affix. affix क in the very sense of the word itself ( स्वार्थे ) exempli gratia, for example अविकः, यावकः, कालकः; confer, compare P.V.4.2833; (4) Uṇādi affix क exempli gratia, for example कर्क, वृक, राका, एक, भेक, काक, पाक, शल्क et cetera, and others by Uṇādi sūtras III. 40-48 before which the angment इट् is prohibited by P. VII.2.9; (5) kṛt affix क ( अ ) where क् is dropped by P. I. 3.8, applied, in the sense of agent, to certain roots mentioned in P.III.1.135, 136, 144, III. 2.3 to 7, III.2.77 and III.3.83 exempli gratia, for example बुध:, प्रस्थः, गृहम्, कम्बलदः, द्विपः, मूलविभुजः, सामगः, सुरापः et cetera, and others; (6) substitute क for the word किम् before a case affix, confer, compare P.VII.2.103; (7) the Samāsānta affix कप् (क) at the end of Bahuvrīhi compounds as prescribed by P.V.4.151-160.
kaṇṭhaglottis: cavity in the throat holding vocal cords; the place of the production of the sounds अ, अI and ह; confer, compare अहविसर्जनीयाः कण्ठे V, Pr.I. 71; cf, also कण्ठ्योsकारः प्रथमपञ्चमौ च R.Pr.I.18.
kaṇṭhatālavyagutturo-palatal. The diphthongs ए and ऐ are called Kaṇṭhatālavya, as they are produced in the Kaṇṭhatalu-sthāna.
kaṇṭhoktaformally mentioned; directly mentionedition
kaṇṭhoṣṭhya,kaṇṭhauṣṭhyagutturo-labial, the diphthongs ओ and औ are called Kaṇṭhoṣṭhya as they are produced at both the Kaṇṭha and the Oṣṭha Sthānas.
kadhyai kadhyainkṛt affix अध्यै of the infinitive in Vedic Literature: confer, compare तुमर्थे सेसे...कध्यैकध्यैन्..तवेनः P.III.4.9.
kan(1)Uṇādi affix as in the words एक, भेक, शल्क etc; (2) taddhita affix.affix क as given by Pāṇini sūtras IV.2.13l, IV.3.32, 65, 147, IV.4.21; V.1.22, 23, 51, 90, V.2.64, 65, 66, 68-75, 77-82, V.3.51, 52, 75,81,82,87, 95, 96, 97. V.4.3,4,6, 29-33.
kamulkṛt (affix). affix अम् in Vedic Literaore in the sense of the infinitive, e. g. विभाजं in अग्निं वै देवा विभाजं नाशक्नुवन्;confer, compare P.III.4.12.
karaṇa(1)lit instrument; the term signifies the most efficient means for accomplishing an act; confer, compare क्रियासिद्धी यत् प्रकृष्टोपकारकं विवक्षितं तत्साधकतमं कारकं करणसंज्ञं भवति, Kāś. on साधकतमं करणम् P.I.4.42, e. g. दात्रेण in दात्रेण लुनाति; (2) effort inside the mouth (अाभ्यन्तर-प्रयत्न ) to produce sound; e. g. touching of the particular place ( स्थान ) inside the mouth for uttering consonants; confer, compare स्पृष्टं स्पर्शानां करणम् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P, I.1.10 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 3; (3) disposition of the organ which produces the sound; confer, compare श्वासनादोभयानां विशेषः करणमित्युच्यते । एतच्च पाणिनिसंमताभ्यन्तरप्रयत्न इति भाति । Com. on Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XIII.3;confer, compare also स्थानकरणानुप्रदानानि Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.2.32: confer, compare also अनुप्रदानात्संसर्गात् स्थानात् करणविन्ययात् । जायते वर्णवैशेष्यं परीमाणाच्च पञ्चमात् Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.XXIII. 2. where karaṇa is described to be of five kinds अनुप्रदान (id est, that is नाद or resonance), संसर्ग (contact), स्थान, करणविन्यय and परिमाण; confer, compareअकारस्य तावत् अनुप्रदानं नादः, संसर्गः कण्ठे, स्थानं हनू, करणविन्ययः ओष्ठौ, परिमाणं मात्राकालः । अनुप्रदानादिभिः पञ्चभिः करणैर्वर्णानां वैशेष्यं जायते Com. on Tai. Pr. XXIII.2. The Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya mentions two karaṇas संवृत and विवृत; confer, compare द्वे करणे संवृतविवृताख्ये वायोर्भवतः Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.I. 11; (4) use of a word exempli gratia, for example इतिकरणं, वत्करणम्; confer, compare किमुपस्थितं नाम । अनार्षं इतिकरणः M.Bh.on. P.VI.1.129.
kartṛagent of an action, subject; name of a kāraka or instrument in general, of an action, which produces the fruit or result of an action without depending on any other instrument; confer, compare स्वतन्त्रः कर्ता P. I.4.54, explained as अगुणीभूतो यः क्रियाप्रसिद्धौ स्वातन्त्र्येण विवक्ष्यते तत्कारकं कर्तृसंज्ञं भवति in the Kāśikā on P.I. 4.54. This agent, or rather, the word standing for the agent, is put in the nominative case in the active voice (confer, compare P.I.4.54), in the instrumental case in the passive voice (cf P. II.3.18), and in the genitive case when it is connected with a noun of action or verbal derivative noun, (confer, compare P.II.3.65).
karmadhārayaname technically given to a compound-formation of two words in apposition i. e. used in the same case, technically called समानाधिकरण showing the same substratutm; confer, compare तत्पुरुषः समानाधिकरणः कर्मधारयः I 2.42. The karmadhāraya compound is looked upon as a variety of the tatpuruṣa compound. There is no satisfactory explanation of the reason why such a compound is termed कर्मधारय. Śākaṭāyana defines Karmadhāraya as विशेषणं व्यभिचारि एकार्थं कर्मधारयश्च where the word विशेषण is explained as व्यावर्तक or भेदक (distinguishing attribute) showing that the word कर्म may mean भेदकक्रिया. The word कर्मधारय in that case could mean 'कर्म भेदकक्रिया, तां धारयति असौ कर्मधारयः' a compound which gives a specification of the thing in hand.
karman(1)object of a transitive verb, defined as something which the agent or the doer of an action wants primarily to achieve. The main feature of कर्मन् is that it is put in the accusative case; confer, compare कर्तुरीप्सिततमं कर्म, कर्मणि द्वितीया; P. I.4.49; II.3.2. Pāṇini has made कर्म a technical term and called all such words 'karman' as are connected with a verbal activity and used in the accusative case; confer, compare कर्तुरीप्सिततमं कर्म; तथायुक्तं चानीप्सितम् ; अकथितं च and गतिबुद्धिप्रत्यवसानार्थशब्दकर्माकर्मकाणामणि कर्ता स णौ P.I.4.49-52;cf also यत् क्रियते तत् कर्म Kātantra vyākaraṇa Sūtra.II.4.13, कर्त्राप्यम् Jain I. 2. 120 and कर्तुर्व्याप्यं कर्म Hemacandra's Śabdānuśāsana. II. 2. 3. Sometimes a kāraka, related to the activity ( क्रिया) as saṁpradāna, apādāna or adhikaraṇa is also treated as karma, if it is not meant or desired as apādāna,saṁpradāna et cetera, and others It is termed अकथितकर्म in such cases; confer, compare अपादानादिविशेषकथाभिरविवक्षितमकथितम् Kāś. on I.4.51. See the word अकथित a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.. Karman or object is to be achieved by an activity or क्रिया; it is always syntactically connected with a verb or a verbal derivative.When connected with verbs or verbal derivatives indeclinables or words ending with the affixes उक, क्त, क्तवतु, तृन् , etc, it is put in the accusative case. It is put in the genitive case when it is connected with affixes other than those mentioned a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.; confer, compare P, II.3.65, 69. When, however, the karman is expressed ( अभिहित ) by a verbal termination ( तिङ् ), or a verbal noun termination (कृत्), or a nounaffix ( तद्धित ), or a compound, it is put in the nominative case. exempli gratia, for example कटः क्रियते, कटः कृतः, शत्यः, प्राप्तोदकः ग्रामः et cetera, and others It is called अभिहित in such cases;confer, compare P.II.3.1.Sec the word अनभिहित a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page..The object or Karman which is ईप्सिततम is described to be of three kinds with reference to the way in which it is obtained from the activity. It is called विकार्य when a transformation or a change is noticed in the object as a result of the verbal activity, e. g. काष्ठानि भस्मीकरोति, घटं भिनत्ति et cetera, and others It is called प्राप्य when no change is seen to result from the action, the object only coming into contact with the subject, e. g. ग्रामं गच्छति, आदित्यं पश्यति et cetera, and others It is called निर्वर्त्य when the object is brought into being under a specific name; exempli gratia, for example घटं करोति, ओदनं पचति; confer, compare निर्वर्त्ये च विकार्यं च प्राप्यं चेति त्रिधा मतम् । तत्रेप्सिततमम् Padamañjarī, a commentary on the Kāśikāvṛtti by Haradatta. on I.4.49: confer, compare also Vākyapadīya III.7.45 as also Kāśikāvivaraṇapañjikā, a commentary on the Kāśikāvṛtti by Jinendrabuddhi, called Nyāsa. on 1.4.49. The object which is not ईप्सिततम is also subdivided into four kinds e. g. (a) अनीप्सित (ग्रामं गच्छन् ) व्याघ्रं पश्यति, (b) औदासीन्येन प्राप्य or इतरत् or अनुभय exempli gratia, for example (ग्रामं गच्छन्) वृक्षमूलानि उपसर्पति, (c) अनाख्यात or अकथित exempli gratia, for example बलिं in बलिं याचते वसुधाम् (d) अन्यपूर्वक e.g अक्षान् दीव्यति, ग्राममभिनिविशते; confer, compare Padamañjarī, a commentary on the Kāśikāvṛtti by Haradatta. on I.4 49, The commentator Abhayanandin on Jainendra Vyākaraṇa mentions seven kinds प्राप्य, विषयभूत, निर्वर्त्य, विक्रियात्मक, ईप्सित, अनीप्सित and इतरत्, defining कर्म as कर्त्रा क्रियया यद् आप्यं तत् कारकं कर्म; confer, compare कर्त्राप्यम् Jain. Vy. I.2.120 and commentary thereon. जेनेन्द्रमधीते is given therein as an instance of विषयभूत. (2) The word कर्मन् is also used in the sense of क्रिया or verbal activity; confer, compare उदेनूर्ध्वकर्मणि P.I.3.24; आदिकर्मणि क्तः कर्तरि च P.III.4.71, कर्तरि कर्मव्यतिहारे P.I.3.14. (3) It is also used in the sense of activity in general, as for instance,the sense of a word; e. g. नामाख्यातयोस्तु कर्मोपसंयोगद्योतका भवन्ति Nirukta of Yāska.I. 3.4, where Durgācārya's commentary on the Nirukta.explains karman as 'sense' ( अर्थ ).
karmavadbhāvathe activity of the agent or kartā of an action represented as object or karman of that very action, for the sake of grammatical operations: e. g. भिद्यते काष्ठं स्वयमेव;. करिष्यते कटः स्वयमेव. To show facility of a verbal activity on the object, when the agent or kartā is dispensed with, and the object is looked upon as the agent, and used also as an agent, the verbal terminations ति, त; et cetera, and others are not applied in the sense of an agent, but they are applied in the sense of an object; consequently the sign of the voice is not अ (शप्), but य (यक्) and the verbal terminations are त, आताम् et cetera, and others (तङ्) instead of ति, तस् et cetera, and others In popular language the use of an expression of this type is called Karmakartari-Prayoga. For details see Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on कर्मवत्कर्मणा तुल्यक्रियः P.III.1.87. Only such roots as are कर्मस्थक्रियक or कर्मस्थभावक id est, that is roots whose verbal activity is noticed in the object and not in the subject can have this Karmakartari-Prayoga.
kalaa fault of pronunciation consequent upon directing the tongue to a place in the mouth which is not the proper one, for the utterance of a vowel; a vowel so pronounced; confer, compare संवृतः कलो ध्मात: ... रोमश इति confer, comparealso निवृत्तकलादिकामवर्णस्य प्रत्यापत्तिं वक्ष्यामि M.Bh. Āhnika 1.
kalāpa(कलाप-व्याकरण)alternative name given to the treatise on grammar written by Sarvavarman who is believed to have lived in the days of the Sātavāhana kings. The treatise is popularly known by the namc Kātantra Vyākaraṇa. The available treatise,viz. Kalpasūtras, is much similar to the Kātantra Sūtras having a few changes and additions only here and there.It is rather risky to say that Kalāpa was an ancient system of grammar which is referred to in the Pāṇini Sūtra कलापिनोण् P. IV.3.108. For details see कातन्त्र.
kalmanthe same as karman or object of an action especially when it is not fully entitled to be called karman, but looked upon as karman only for the sake of being used in the accusative case; subordinate karman, as for instance the cow in गां पयो दोग्धि. The term was used by ancient grammarians; confer, compare विपरीतं तु यत्कर्म तत् कल्म कवयो विदुः M.Bh. on P.I.4.51. See कर्मन्.
kavikalpadrumaa treatise on roots written by Bopadeva, the son of Keśava and the pupil of Dhaneśa who lived in the time of Hemādri, the Yādava King of Devagiri in the thirteenth century. He has written a short grammar work named Mugdhabodha which has been very popular in Bengal being studied in many Tols or Pāṭhaśālās.
kasunkṛt affix अस् found in Vedic Literature, in the sense of the infinitive: e. g. ईश्वरो विलिखः (विलि-खितुम्) confer, compare P. III.4.13, 17. The word ending in this कसुन् becomes an indeclinable: cf क्त्वातोसुन्कसुनः P.I.1.40.
kasenkṛt affix असे in the sense of the infinitive in Vedic Literature; e. g. प्रेषे, श्रियसे्; confer, compare Kāś. on P. III. 4. 9.
kātantraname of an important small treatise on grammar which appears like a systematic abridgment of the Pāṇini's Aṣṭādhyāyī. of Pāṇini. It ignores many unimportant rules of Pāṇini, adjusts many, and altogether omits the Vedic portion and the accent chapter of Pāṇini. It lays down the Sūtras in an order different from that of Pāṇini dividing the work into four adhyāyas dealing with technical terms, saṁdhi rules,declension, syntax compounds noun-affixes ( taddhita affixes ) conjugation, voice and verbal derivatives in an order. The total number of rules is 1412 supplemented by many subordinate rules or Vārttikas. The treatise is believed to have been written by Śarvavarman, called Sarvavarman or Śarva or Sarva, who is said to have lived in the reign of the Sātavāhana kings. The belief that Pāṇini refers to a work of Kalāpin in his rules IV. 3.108 and IV.3.48 and that Patañjali's words कालापम् and माहवार्तिकम् support it, has not much strength. The work was very popular especially among those who wanted to study spoken Sanskrit with ease and attained for several year a very prominent place among text-books on grammar especially in Bihar, Bengal and Gujarat. It has got a large number of glosses and commentary works, many of which are in a manuscript form at present. Its last chapter (Caturtha-Adhyāya) is ascribed to Vararuci. As the arrangement of topics is entirely different from Pāṇini's order, inspite of considerable resemblance of Sūtras and their wording, it is probable that the work was based on Pāṇini but composed on the models of ancient grammarians viz. Indra, Śākaṭāyana and others whose works,although not available now, were available to the author. The grammar Kātantra is also called Kālāpa-vyākaraṇasūtra.. A comparison of the Kātantra Sūtras and the Kālāpa-vyākaraṇasūtra. Sūtras shows that the one is a different version of the other. The Kātantra Grammar is also called Kaumāra as it is said that the original 1nstructions for the grammar were received by the author from Kumāra or Kārttikeya. For details see Vol. VII Patañjala Mahābhāṣya published by the D.E. Society, Poona, page 375.
kātantrapañjikāa name usually given to a compendium of the type of Vivaraṇa or gloss written on the Kātantra Sūtras. The gloss written by Durgasiṁha's Kātantra-Sūtravṛtti. on the famous commentary on the Kātantra Sūtras by Durgasiṁha's Kātantra-Sūtravṛtti. ( the same as the the famous Durgasiṁha's Kātantra-Sūtravṛtti. or another of the same name ) known as दौर्गसिंही वृत्ति is called Kātantra Pañjika or Kātantravivaraṇa. A scholar of Kātantra grammar by name Kuśala has written a Pañjika on दुर्गसिंहृ's वृत्ति which is named प्रदीप, Another scholar, Trivikrama has written a gloss named Uddyota.
kātantraparibhāṣāpāṭhaname given to a text consisting of Paribhāṣāsūtras, believed to have been written by the Sūtrakāra himself as a supplementary portion to the main grammar. Many such lists of Paribhāṣāsūtras are available, mostly in manuscript form, containing more than a hundred Sūtras divided into two main groups-the Paribhāṣā sūtras and the Balābalasūtras. See परिभाषासंग्रह edition by B. O. R. I. Poona.
kātantraparibhāṣāvṛtti(1)name of a gloss on the Paribhāṣāpaṭha written by Bhāvamiśra, probably a Maithila Pandit whose date is not known. He has explained 62 Paribhāṣās deriving many of them from the Kātantra Sūtras. The work seems to be based on the Paribhāṣā works by Vyāḍiparibhāṣāsūcana.and others on the system of Pāṇini, suitable changes having been made by the writer with a view to present the work as belonging to the Kātantra school; (2) name of a gloss on the Paribhāṣāpaṭha of the Kātantra school explaining 65 Paribhāṣās. No name of the author is found in the Poona manuscript. The India Office Library copy has given Durgasiṁha's Kātantra-Sūtravṛtti. as the author's name; but it is doubted whether Durgasiṁha's Kātantra-Sūtravṛtti. was the author of it. See परिभाषासंग्रह edition by B. O. R. I. Poona.
kātantraprakriyāa name given to the Kātantra Sūtras which were written in the original form as a Prakriyāgrantha or a work discussing the various topics such as alphabet, euphonic rules, declension, derivatives from nouns, syntax, conjugation derivatives from roots et cetera, and others et cetera, and others
kātantrarūpamālāa work, explaining the various forms of nouns and verbs according to the rules of the Kātantra grammar, ascribed to Bhāvasena of the fifteenth century.
kātantrasūtravṛttian old Vṛtti on the Kātantra Sūtras ascribed to Vararuci who is, of course, different from Vararuci Kātyāyana. The Vṛtti appears to have been occupying a position similar to that of Durgasiṁha's Kātantra-Sūtravṛtti..
kātyāyanathe well-known author of the Vārttikas on the sūtras of Pāṇini. He is also believed to be the author of the Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya and many sūtra works named after him. He is believed to be a resident of South India on the strength of the remark प्रियतद्धिता दाक्षिणात्याः made by Patañjali in connection with the statement 'यथा लौकिकवैदिकेषु' which is looked upon as Kātyāyana's Vārttika. Some scholars say that Vararuci was also another name given to him, in which case the Vārttikakāra Vararuci Kātyāyana has to be looked upon as different from the subsequent writer named Vararuci to whom some works on Prakrit and Kātantra grammar are ascribedition For details see The Volume of the introduction in Marathi to the Pātañjala Mahābhāṣya, written by K. V. Abhyankar and published by the O. E. Society, Poona.. pages I93-223 published by the D. E.Society, Poona.See also वार्तिकपाठ below.
kānacaffix अान forming perfect partciples which are mostly seen in Vedic Literature. The affix कानच् is technically a substitute for the लिट् affix. Nouns ending in कानच् govern the accusative case of the nouns connected with them: exempli gratia, for example सोमं सुषुवाणः; confer, compare P. III.3.106 and P.II.3.69.
kāraan affix, given in the Prātiśākhya works and,by Kātyāyana also in his Vārttika, which is added to a letter or a phonetic element for convenience of mention; exempli gratia, for example इकारः, उकारः ; confer, compare वर्णः कारोत्तरो वर्णाख्या; वर्णकारौ निर्देशकौ Tai. Pra.I. 16: XXII.4.;confer, compare also Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.1.37. It is also applied to syllables or words in a similar way to indicate the phonetic element of the word as apart from the sense of the word: e. g.' यत एवकारस्ततीन्यत्रावधारणम् Vyak. Paribhāṣā , confer, compare also the words वकार:, हिंकारः: (2) additional purpose served by a word such as an adhikāra word; confer, compare अधिकः कारः , पूर्वविप्रतिषेघा न पठितव्या भवन्ति Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P.I.3.11.
kārakaliterally doer of an action. The word is used in the technical sense ; 1 of ’instrument of action'; cf कारकशब्दश्च निमित्तपर्यायः । कारकं हेतुरिति नार्थान्तरम् । कस्य हेतुः । क्रियायाः Kāś. on P.I. 4.23: confer, compare also कारक इति संज्ञानिर्देशः । साधकं निर्वर्तकं कारकसंज्ञं भवति । M.Bh. on P. I. 4.28. The word 'kāraka' in short, means 'the capacity in which a thing becomes instrumental in bringing about an action'. This capacity is looked upon as the sense of the case-affixes which express it. There are six kārakas given in all grammar treatises अपादान, संप्रदान, अधिकरण, करण , कर्मन् and कर्तृ to express which the case affixes or Vibhaktis पञ्चमी, चतुर्थी, सप्तमी, तृतीया, द्वितीया and प्रथमा are respectively used which, hence, are called Kārakavibhaktis as contrasted with Upapadavibhaktis, which show a relation between two substantives and hence are looked upon as weaker than the Kārakavibhaktis; confer, compare उपपदविभक्तेः कारकविभक्तिर्बलीयसी Pari. Śek. Pari.94. The topic explaining Kārakavibhaktis is looked upon as a very important and difficult chapter in treatises of grammar and there are several small compendiums written by scholars dealing with kārakas only. For the topic of Kārakas see P. I. 4.23 to 55, Kat, II. 4.8-42, Vyākaraṇa The Volume of the introduction in Marathi to the Pātañjala Mahābhāṣya, written by K. V. Abhyankar and published by the O. E. Society, Poona.. pp.262-264 published by the D. E. Society, Poona.
kārakakaumudīa work on the Kātantra grammar discussing the Kāraka portion.
kārakakhaṇḍanamaṇḍanaalso called षट्कारक-खण्डनमण्डन which is a portion of theauthor's bigger work named त्रिलो-चनचन्द्रिका. The work is a discourse on the six kārakas written by Maṇikaṇṭha, a grammarian of the Kātantra school. He has also written another treatise named Kārakavicāra
kārakanirṇayaa work discussing the various Kārakas from the Naiyāyika view-point written by the well-known Naiyāyika, Gadādhara Chakravartin of Bengal, who was a pupil of Jagadīśa and who fourished in the 16th century A. D. He is looked upon as one of the greatest scholars of Nyāyaśāstra. His main literarywork was in the field of Nyāyaśāstra on which he has written several treatises.
kārakavāda(1)a treatise discussing the several Kārakas, written by Kṛṣṇaśāstri Ārade a famous Naiyāyika of Benares who lived in the eighteenth century A. D; (2) a treatise on syntax written by Jayarāmabhaṭṭācārya which is called कारकविवेक also, which see below. a treatise on syntax written by Jayarāmabhaṭṭācārya which is called कारकविवेक also, which see below.
kārakavibhaktibalīyastvathe dictum that a Kāraka case is stronger than an Upapada case,e. g. the accusative case as required by the word नमस्कृत्य,which is stronger than the dative case as required by the word नमः. Hence the word मुनित्रयं has to be used in the sentence : मुनित्रयं नमस्कृत्य and not the word मुनित्रयाय confer, compare उपपदविभक्तेः कारकविभक्तिर्बलीयसी Pari. Śek. Pari. 94.
kārakavivekaknown as कारकवाद also; a short work on the meaning and relation of words written by Jayarāmabhaṭṭācārya who lived in the beginning of the eighteenth century. The work forms the concluding portion of a larger work called कारकविवेक which was written by शिरोमणिभट्टाचार्य.. The work कारकवाद has a short commentary written by the author himselfeminine.
kārita(1)ancient term for the causal Vikaraṇa, (णिच् in Pāṇini's grammar and इन् in Kātantra); (2) causal or causative as applied to roots ending in णिच् or words derived from such roots called also 'ṇyanta' by the followers of Pāṇini's grammar; confer, compare इन् कारितं धात्वर्थे Kātantra vyākaraṇa Sūtra.III.2.9, explained as धात्वर्थक्रियानाम्न इन् परो भवति धात्वर्थे स च कारितसंज्ञक;।
kārtikeyathe original instructor of the Kātantra or Kālāpa-vyākaraṇasūtra. Grammar, to Śarvavarman who composed the Sūtras according to inspiration received by him. The Kātantra, hence, has also got the name Kaumara Vyākaraṇa.
kāryakālaparibhāṣāone of the important Paribhāṣā, regarding the application of the Paribhāṣā rules. See कायैकाल. For details see Paribhāṣenduśekhara of Nāgeśa. Pari. 3.
kāryātideśalooking upon the substitute as the very original for the sake of operations that are caused by the presence of the original;the word is used in contrast with रूपातिदेश where actually the original is restored in the place of the substitute on certain conditions. For details see Mahābhāṣya on द्विर्वचनेचि P. 1.1.59.
kāryinthe word or wording that undergoes the operation; confer, compare सतो हि कार्यिणः कार्येण भवितव्यम् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.1. 1. Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 7, also कार्यमनुभवन् हि कार्यो निमित्ततया नाश्रीयते Paribhāṣenduśekhara of Nāgeśa. Pari. 10.
kālanotion of time created by different contacts made by a thing with other things one after another. Time required for the utterance of a short vowel is taken as a unit of time which is called मात्रा or कालमात्रा, literally measurement of time; (2) degree of a vowel, the vowels being looked upon as possessed of three degrees ह्रस्व,दीर्घ,& प्लुत measured respectively by one, two and three mātrās; confer, compare ऊकालोSझ्रस्वदीर्घप्लुतः P.I.2.27; (3) time notion in general, expressed in connection with an activity in three ways past (भूत), present (वर्तमान), and future (भविष्यत्) to show which the terms भूता, वर्तमाना and भविष्यन्ती were used by ancient grammarians; cf the words पूर्वकाल, उत्तरकाल; also confer, compare पाणिन्युपज्ञमकालकं व्याकरणम् Kāś. on P. II. 4.21 ; (4) place of recital ( पाठदेश ) depending on the time of recital, confer, compare न परकालः पूर्वकाले पुनः (V.Pr.III. 3) a dictum similar to Pāṇini's पूर्वत्रासिद्धम् P. VIII.2.1.
kālabhedadifference in the time of utterance; confer, compare किमुच्यते विवारभेदादिति । न पुनः कालभेदादपि । Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on Siva Sutra 1.
kāśikā(1)name given to the reputed gloss (वृत्ति) on the Sūtras of Pāṇini written by the joint authors.Jayāditya and Vāmana in the 7th century A.D. Nothing definitely can be said as to which portion was written by Jayāditya and which by Vamana, or the whole work was jointly written. Some scholars believe that the work was called Kāśikā as it was written in the city of Kāśī and that the gloss on the first five Adhyāyas was written by Jayāditya and that on the last three by Vāmana. Although it is written in a scholarly way, the work forms an excellent help to beginners to understand the sense of the pithy Sūtra of Pāṇini. The work has not only deserved but obtained and maintained a very prominent position among students and scholars of Pāṇini's grammar in spite of other works like the Bhāṣāvṛtti, the Prakriyā Kaumudi, the Siddhānta Kaumudi and others written by equally learned scholars. Its wording is based almost on the Mahābhāṣya which it has followed, avoiding, of course, the scholarly disquisitions occurring here and there in the Mahābhāṣya. It appears that many commentary works were written on it, the wellknown among them being the Kāśikāvivaraṇapañjikā or Kāśikāvivaraṇapañjikā, a commentary on the Kāśikāvṛtti by Jinendrabuddhi, called Nyāsa. written by Jinendrabuddhi and the Padamañjari by Haradatta. For details see Vyākaraṇamahābhāṣya Vol.VII pp 286-87 published by the D. E. Society, Poona. ( 2 ) The name Kāśikā is sometimes found given to their commentaries on standard works of Sanskrit Grammar by scholars, as possibly they were written at Kāśī; as for instance, (a) Kāśikā on Vaiyākaraṇabhūṣaṇasāra by Hari Dīkṣita, and ( b ) Kāśikā on Paribhāṣenduśekhara by Vaidyanātha Pāyaguṇḍe.
kāśikāvivaraṇapañjikāalso called Kāśikāvivaraṇapañjikā, a commentary on the Kāśikāvṛtti by Jinendrabuddhi, called Nyāsa., the well-known commentary written by Jinendrabuddhi on the Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. See Kāśikā a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page..
ki(1)kṛt affix इ prescribed after धु roots with a prefix attached;exempli gratia, for exampleप्रदिः प्रधिः confer, compare P.III.3.92, 93; (2) kṛt affix इ looked upon as a perfect termination and, hence, causing reduplication and accusative case of the noun connected, found in Vedic Literature added to roots ending in अा, the root ऋ, and the roots गम्, हन् and जन्; exempli gratia, for example पपि; सोमं, जगुरिः, जग्मिः et cetera, and others, confer, compare P. III.2.171: (2) a term used in the Jainendra Vyākaraṇa for the term संबुद्वि.
kit(1)marked with the mute letter क् which is applied by Pāṇini to affixes, for preventing guṇa and vṛddhi substitutes to the preceding इक् vowel (इ, उ, ऋ or लृ); confer, compareक्ङिति च, Pāṇ. I.1.5; (2) considered or looked upon as marked with mute indicatory क् for preventing guna; confer, compare असंयोगाल्लिट् कित् and the following P.I.2.5 et cetera, and others The affixes of the first type are for instance क्त, क्त्वा, क्तिन् and others. The affixes of the second type are given mainly in the second pada of the first Adhyāya by Pāṇini. Besides the prevention of guṇa and wrddhi, affixes marked with कु or affixes called कित्, cause Saṁprasāraṇa (see P. VI.1.15,16), elision of the penultimate न् (P.VI.4.24), elision of the penultimate vowel (P. VI.4.98,100), lengthening of the vowel (VI.4.15), substitution of ऊ (VI.4.19,21), elision of the final nasal (VI. 4.37), substitution of अI (VI.4.42). The taddhita affixes which are marked with mute क् cause the Vṛddhi substitute for the first vowel in the word to which they are addedition
kinakṛt affix इ prescribed along with कि. See कि a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.. The affix किन् causes the acute accent on the first vowel of the word ending with it, while the affix ki ( इ ) has itself the acute accent on its vowel इ.
kīlhārnKielhorn F., a sound scholar of Sanskrit Grammar who brought out excellent editions of the Pātañjala Mahābhāṣya and the Paribhāṣenduśekhara and wrote an essay on the Vārttikas of Kātyāyana. For details see Pātañjala Mahābhāṣya Vol VII.p.40, D. E society edition, Poona.
kuṇaptaddhita affix. affix कुण added to words of पीलु group in the sense of 'ripened condition';exempli gratia, for exampleपीलुकुणः=पीलूनां पाकः; confer, compare P.V.2.24.
kṛtliterally activity; a term used in the grammars of Pāṇini and others for affixes applied to roots to form verbal derivatives; confer, compare कृदतिङ् । धातोः ( ३ ।१।९१ ) इत्यधिकारे तिङ्कवर्जितः प्रत्ययः कृत् स्यात् । Kāś. on III.1.93, The kṛt affixes are given exhaustively by Pāṇini in Sūtras III.1.91 to III.4. I17. कृत् and तद्धित appear to be the ancient Pre-Pāṇinian terms used in the Nirukta and the Prātiśākhya works in the respective senses of root-born and noun-born words ( कृदन्त and तद्धितान्त according to Pāṇini's terminology), and not in the sense of mere affixes; confer, compare सन्त्यल्पप्रयोगाः कृतोप्यैकपदिकाः Nirukta of Yāska.I.14: अथापि भाषिकेभ्यो धातुभ्यो नैगमाः कृतो भाष्यन्ते Nirukta of Yāska.II.2; तिङ्कृत्तद्धितसमासा: शब्दमयम् V.Pr. I.27; also confer, compare V.Pr. VI.4. Patañjali and later grammarians have used the word कृत् in the sense of कृदन्त; confer, compare गतिकारकोपपदानां कृद्भिः सह समासवचनं प्राक् सुबुत्पत्तेः Pari Śek.Pari.75. The kṛt affixes are given by Pāṇini in the senses of the different Kārakas अपादान, संप्रदान, करण, अाधकरण, कर्म and कर्तृ, stating in general terms that if no other sense is assigned to a kṛt affix it should be understood that कर्ता or the agent of the verbal activity is the sense; confer, compare कर्तरि कृत् । येष्वर्थनिर्देशो नास्ति तत्रेदमुपतिष्ठते Kāś. on III.4.67. The activity element possessed by the root lies generally dormant in the verbal derivative nouns; confer, compare कृदभिहितो भावो द्रव्यवद्भवति, क्रियावदपि । M.Bh.on V.4.19 and VI. 2.139
kṛtrimaartificial; technical, as opposed to derivative. In grammar, the term कृत्रिम means 'technical sense', as contrasted with अकृत्रिम 'ordinary sense'; confer, compare कृत्रिमाकृत्रिमयोः कृत्रिमे कार्यसंप्रत्यय: Paribhāṣenduśekhara of Nāgeśa. Pari. 9.
kṛtveform of the taddhita affix. affix कृत्वम् in Vedic Literature. See कृत्वसुच्,
kṛdantathe word ending with a kṛt affix; the term कृत् is found used in the sūtras of Pāṇini for कृदन्त; confer, compare कृत्तद्धितसमासाश्च P. I.2.46. The term कृदन्त for root-nouns, or nouns derived from roots, is found in the Atharvaprātiśākhya (I.1.10, II.3.8, II1.2.4), the Mahābhāṣya and all the later works on grammar. See the word कृत्.
kṛdgrahaṇamention of a kṛt id est, that is of a word ending with a kṛt affix. The word mainly occurs in the Paribhāṣā कृद्ग्रहणे गतिकारकपूर्वस्यापि ग्रहणम् which occurs first as an expression of the Vārttikakāra (P.I.4.13 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 9) and has been later on given as a Paribhāṣā by later grammarians (Pari. Śek. Pari.28).The Paribhāṣā is referred to as वृद्ब्रह्मणपरिभाषा in later grammar works especially commentary works.
kenkṛt (affix). affix ए in the sense of कृत्य (Pot.passive voice.participle.) found in Vedic Literature; exempli gratia, for example नावगाहे = नावगाहितव्यम् confer, compare Kāś. on P.III.4.14.
kenyakṛt (affix). affix एन्य in the sense of कृत्य in Vedic Literature: exempli gratia, for example दिदृक्षेण्यः शुश्रूषेण्यः confer, compare Kāś. on P.III.4.14.
kaikṛt affix ऐ used in Vedic Literature as noticed in the forms प्रयै रोहिष्यै and अव्यथिष्यै: confer, compare P.III.4.10.
kaiyaṭaname of the renowned commentator on the Mahābhāṣya, who lived in the 11th century. He was a resident of Kashmir and his father's name was Jaiyaṭa. The commentary on the Mahābhāṣya was named महाभाष्यप्रदीप by him, which is believed by later grammarians to have really acted as प्रदीप or light, as without it, the Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali would have remained unlit, that is unintelligible, at several places. Later grammarians attached to प्रदीप almost the same importance as they did to the Mahābhāṣya and the expression तदुक्तं भावकैयटयोः has been often used by commentators. Many commentary works were written on the Kaiyaṭa's Mahābhāṣyapradīpa.out of which Nageśa's Mahābhāṣya-Pradīpoddyota by Nāgeśa.is the most popular. The word कैयट came to be used for the word महाभाष्यप्रदीप which was the work of Kaiyaṭa. For details see Vyākaraṇa Mahābhāṣya published by the D. E. Society, Poona, Vol. VII. pp. 389-390.
kaumāra,komāravyākaraṇa(1)an alternative name of the Kātantra Vyākaraṇa given to it on the strength of the traditional belief that the original inspiration for writing it was received by Sarvavarman from Kumara or Kārtikeya; (2) small treatises bearing the name Kaumāravyākaraṇa written by Munipuṅgava and Bhāvasena. The latter has written Kātantrarūpamāla also.
ktakṛt affix त in various senses, called by the name निष्ठा in Pāṇini's grammar along with the affix क्तवतू confer, compare क्तक्तवतू निष्ठा P.I.1.26.The various senses in which क्त is prescribed can be noticed below : (1) the general sense of something done in the past time as past passive voice.participle e. g. कृत:, भुक्तम् et cetera, and others: cf P. III.2.102; (2) the sense of the beginning of an activity when it is used actively: e. g. प्रकृतः कटं देवदत्तः, confer, compare P.III.2.102 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 3; (3) the sense of activity of the present tense applied to roots marked with a mute ञ् as also to roots in the sense of desire, knowledge and worship; exempli gratia, for exampleमिन्नः, क्ष्विण्ण:, धृष्ट: as also राज्ञां मतः, राज्ञामिष्टः, राज्ञां बुद्धः; confer, compare P.III.2.187, 88; (4) the sense of mere verbal activity (भाव) e. g. हसितम् , सहितम् , जल्पितम् , (used always in the neuter gender); confer, compare P.III.3. 114: (5) the sense of benediction when the word ending in क्त is used as a technical term, exempli gratia, for example देवदत्तः in the sense of देवा एनं देयासुः. The kṛt affix क्तिन् is also used similarly exempli gratia, for example सातिः भूतिः मन्ति:; confer, compare Kāś. on P. III.3.174.
ktavatukṛt affix तवत् which also is called निष्ठा. It is prescribed in the active sense of somebody who has done a thing sometime in the past. A word ending in it is equivalent to the past active participle; exempli gratia, for example भुक्तवान् ब्राह्मणः cf P.I.1.26. The feminine. affix डीप् ( ई ) is added to nouns ending in क्तवतु to form feminine bases; confer, compare P.IV.1.6.
ktāntaa noun base ending in the kṛt affix क्त; past passive participle; confer, compare क्षेपे सप्तम्यन्तं क्तान्तेन सह समस्यते । अवतप्तेनकुलस्थितं त एतत् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ).on II.2. 47.
ktickṛt affix ति added to roots in the benedictive sense to form संज्ञाशब्द or nouns in a technical sense; e.gतन्तिः in the sense of तनुतात्: confer, compare Kāś. on III.3.174. क्त is also added in the same way. See क्त.
ktvākṛt (affix). affix त्वा added to roots (1) in the sense of prohibition conveyed by the word अलं or खलु preceding the root, exempli gratia, for example अलं कृत्वा, खलु कृत्वा; confer, compare P. III.4.18; (2) in the sense of exchange in the case of the root मा, e. g. अपमित्य याचते; confer, compare P. III.4.19; (3) to show an activity of the past time along with a verb or noun of action showing comparatively a later time, provided the agent of the former and the latter activities is the same; exempli gratia, for example भुक्त्वा व्रजति, स्नात्वा पीत्वा भुक्त्वा व्रजति; confer, compare P. III.4. 21. This kṛt affix is always added to roots when they are without any prefix; when there is a prefix the indeclinable, ending in त्वा, is always compounded with the prefix and त्वा is changed into य (ल्यप्), exempli gratia, for example प्रकृत्य, प्रहृत्य; confer, compare समासेऽनञ्पूर्वे क्त्वो ल्यप् P. VII. 1.37. The substitution of य is at will in Vedic Literature; exempli gratia, for example कृष्णं वासो यजमानं परिधापयित्वा ( instead of परिधाप्य ), confer, compare P. VII.1.38, while sometimes, य is added after त्वा as an augment e. g. दत्वाय सविता धियः confer, compare P. VII.l.47, as also sometimes त्वी or त्वीनम् is substituted for त्वा e. g. इष्ट्वीनं देवान्, स्नात्वी मलादिव, confer, compare P. VII.1.48, 49.
kyu,kyunUṇādi affixes अन.
krama(1)serial order or succession as contrasted with यौगपद्य or simultaneity. The difference between क्रम and यौगपद्य is given by भर्तृहरि in the line क्रमे विभिद्यते रूपं यौगपद्ये न भिद्यते Vāk. Pad. II. 470. In order to form a word by the application of several rules of grammar, a particular order is generally followed in accordance with the general principle laid down in the Paribhāṣā पूर्वपरनित्यान्तरङ्गापवादानामुत्तरोत्तरं बलीयः, as also according to what is stated in the sūtras असिद्धवदत्राभात्, पूर्वत्रासिद्धम् et cetera, and others (2) succession, or being placed after, specifically with reference to indeclinables like एव, च et cetera, and others which are placed after a noun with which they are connectedition When an indecinable is not so connected, it is called भिन्नक्रम; confer, compare परिपन्थं च तिष्ठति (P.IV. 4.36), चकारो भिन्नक्रमः प्रत्ययार्थं समुच्चिनोति, Kāś. on P. IV. 4.36; also ईडजनोर्ध्वे च । चशब्दो भिन्नक्रमः
īśeḥ(VII.2.77)अनुकर्षणार्थो विज्ञायते Kāś. on P.IV.2.78; (3) succession of the same consonant brought about; doubling; reduplication; क्रम is used in this way in the Ṛk Prātiśākhya as a synonym of dvitva prescribed by Pāṇini; e. g. अा त्वा रथं becomes अा त्त्वा रथम् ; सोमानं स्वरणम् becomes सोमानं स्स्वरणम् ; confer, compare स्वरानुस्वारोपहितो द्विरुच्यते संयोगादि: स क्रमोSविक्रमे सन् । etc, Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) VI. l to 4; confer, compare also स एष द्विर्भावरूपो विधिः क्रमसंज्ञो वेदितव्यः Uvvaṭa's Bhāṣya on the Prātiśākhya works.on Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) VI. 1. The root क्रम् IA. is several times used in the Prātiśākhya works for द्विर्भवन, confer, compare also T. Pr.XXI.5; XXIV.5; (4) repetition of a word in the recital of Vedic passages, the recital by such a repetition being called क्रमपाठ, which is learnt and taught with a view to understanding the original forms of words combined in the Saṁhitā by euphonic rules, substitution of letters such as that of ण् for न् , or of ष् for स् , as also the separate words of a compound word ( सामासिकशब्द ); e. g. पर्जन्याय प्र । प्र गायत । गायत दिवः । दिवस्पुत्राय । पुत्राय मीळ्हुषे । मीळ्हुषे इति मीळ्हुषे । confer, compare क्रमो द्वाभ्यामतिक्रम्य् प्रत्यादायोत्तरं तयोः उत्तेरेणोपसंदध्यात् तथार्द्धर्चं समापयेत् ॥ Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) X. 1. For details and special features, confer, compare Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) ch. X and XI: confer, compare also Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.IV. 182190: T. Pr, XXIII. 20, XXIV. 6.
kramapāṭharecital of the Vedic Saṁhitā by means of separate groups of two words, repeating each word except the first of the Vedic verseline; see क्रम a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.. The various rules and exceptions are given in detail in Paṭalas ten and eleven of the Ṛk Prātiśākhya. The Vedic Saṁhitā or Saṁhitāpāṭha is supposed to be the original one and the Padapāṭha prepared later on, with a view to preserving the Vedic text without any change or modification of a letter, or accent; confer, compare न लक्षणेन पदकारा अनुवर्त्याः । पदकारैर्नाम लक्षणमनुवर्त्यम् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on III. 1.109, VI. 1.207 and VIII. 2.16, where Patañjali clearly says that grammar-rules are not to follow the Padapāṭha, but, the writer of the Padapāṭha is to follow the rules already laid down. The Jaṭāpāṭha, the Ghanapāṭha and the other recitals are later developments of the Padapāṭha as they are not mentioned in the Prātiśākhya works.
kriyāaction, verbal activity; confer, compare क्रियावचनो धातु: Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I. 3.1 ; confer, compare also क्रियावाचकमाख्यातम् Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XII. 8. quoted by Uvvaṭa's Bhāṣya on the Prātiśākhya works.in his Bhāṣya on Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.VIII. 50; confer, compare also उपसर्गाः क्रियायोगे P. I.4.59, लक्षणहेत्वेाः क्रियायाः P.III. 2.126; confer, compare also यत्तर्हि तदिङ्गितं चेष्टितं निमिषितं स शब्दः । नेत्याह क्रिया नाम सा Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). Āhnika 1. The word भाव many times is used in the same sense as kriyā or verbal activity in the sūtras of Pāṇini. confer, compare P.I.2.21 ; I.3.13; III. 1. 66.etc; confer, compare also कृदभिहितो भावो द्रव्यवद्भवति a statement made frequently by the Mahābhāṣyakāra. Some scholars draw a nice distinction between क्रिया and भाव, क्रिया meaning dynamic activity and भाव meaning static activity: confer, compare अपरिस्पन्दनसाधनसाध्यो धात्वर्थो भावः । सपरिस्पन्दनसाधनसाध्यस्तु क्रिया Kaiyaṭa's Kaiyaṭa's Mahābhāṣyapradīpa.on Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). III. 1.87. Philosophically क्रिया is defined as सत्ता appearing in temporal sequence in various things. When सत्ता does not so appear it is called सत्त्व.
kriyātipattiliterally over-extension or excess of action; the word is, however, used in grammar in the sense of non-happening of an expected action especially when . it forms a condition of the conditional mood ( लृङ् ); confer, compare कुताश्चिद्वैगुण्यादनभिनिर्वृत्तिः क्रियायाः क्रियातिपत्तिः Kāś. on P. III. 3.139; confer, compare also नान्तरेण साधनं क्रियायाः प्रवृत्तिरस्तीति साधनातिपत्तिश्चेत्कियातिपत्तिरपि भवति Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on III.3.139.
kriyāviśeṣaṇadeterminant or modifier of a verbal activity; confer, compare क्रियाविशेषणं चेति वक्तव्यम् । सुष्टु पचति दुष्टु पचति M.Bh. on II.1.1; nouns used as Kriyāviśeṣaṇa are put in the neuter gender, and in the nominative case. or the acc. case in the singular. number; confer, compare क्रियाविशेषणानां कर्मत्वं नपुंसकलिङ्गता च Pari.Bhāśkara Pari.56.
kroṣṭrīyaan ancient school of grammarians who are believed to have written rules or Vārttikas on some rules of Pāṇini to modify them; the क्रोष्ट्रीय school is quoted in the Mahābhāṣya; confer, compare परिभाषान्तरमिति च मत्वा क्रोष्ट्रीयाः पठन्ति । Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I.1.3.
kanipkṛt affix वन् in the sense of agent added to (l) a root preceded by an Upasarga or a Subanta Upapada or sometimes even without any preceding word; exempli gratia, for exampleप्रतरित्वा, धीवा, पीवा; (2) to the root दृश्, preceded by an Upapada which is the object of the root दृश्, exempli gratia, for example पारदृश्वा; (3) to roots युध् and कृञ् having राजन् as their object, exempli gratia, for example राजयुध्वा, राजकृत्वा ; confer, compare Pāṇini III.2.94-96.
kvasukṛt affix वस्, taking the feminine. affix ई (ङीप्) in the feminine gender, prescribed in the sense of perfect tense, which is mostly found in Vedic Literature and added to some roots only such as सद्, वस्, श्रु et cetera, and others in the spoken language; e. g. जक्षिवान् पपिवान् उपसेदिवान् कौत्स; पाणिनिम्; confer, compare Kāś. on P.III.2.107-109.
kvinkṛt zero affix, id est, that is an affix of which every letter is dropped and nothing remains, added to the roots स्पृश्, यज्, सृज्, दृश्, et cetera, and others under certain conditions; exempli gratia, for example घृतस्पृक्, ऋत्विक्, यादृक्, तादृक्; confer, compare Kāś. on P.III.2.58-60.
kvip(1)kṛt affix zero, added to the roots सद्, सू, द्विष् and others with a preceding word as upapada or with a prefix or sometimes even without any word, as also to the root हन् preceded by the words ब्रह्मन्, भ्रूण and वृत्र, and to the root कृ preceded by सु, कर्मन् et cetera, and others, and to the roots सु, and चि under certain conditions exempli gratia, for example उपसत्, सूः, प्रसूः, पर्णध्वत्, ब्रह्महा, वृत्रहा, सोमसुत्, अग्निचित्; confer, compareP.III. 2.61, 76, 77, 87-92: 177-179; (2) the denominative affix zero applied to any substantive in the sense of behaviour अश्वति, गर्दभति et cetera, and others; confer, compare M.Bh. and Kāś, on P.III.1.11.
kvibantaa substantive ending with the kṛt affix क्विप् (zero affix) added to a root to form a noun in the sense of the verbal action (भाव). The words ending with this affix having got the sense of verbal activity in them quite suppressed, get the noun terminations सु, औ, जस् et cetera, and others and not ति, तः et cetera, and others placed after them; confer, compare कृदभिहितो भावो द्रव्यवद् भवति. However, at the same time, these words undergo certain operations peculiar to roots simply because the kṛt affix entirely disappears and the word formed, appears like a root; confer, compare क्विबन्ता धातुत्वं न जहति. Kaiyaṭa's Prad. on VII.1.70.
kṣapaṇakaa Jain grammarian quoted in the well-known stanza धन्वन्तरिः क्षपणकोमरसिंहशङ्कु which enumerates the seven gems of the court of Vikramāditya, on the strength of which some scholars believe that he was a famous grammarian of the first century B.C.
kṣitīśacandra(चक्रवर्तिन्)or K. C. CHATTERJI a scholar of Sanskrit grammar who has written a work on technical terms in Sanskrit, who has edited several grammar works and is at present editing the Cāndra Vyākaraṇa and conducting the Sanskrit journal named Mañjūṣa at Calcutta.
kṣipraliterally rapid, accelerated, a short name given in the a Prātiśākhya works to a Saṁdhi or euphonic combination of the vowels इ, उ, ऋ,; लृ with a following dissimilar vowel; confer, compare Uvvaṭa's Bhāṣya on the Prātiśākhya works.Bhāṣya on R.Pr. III.10; confer, compare also इको यणचि P.VI.1.77. The name Kṣipra is given to this Saṁdhi possibly because the vowel, short or long, which is turned into a consonant by this saṁdhi becomes very short (id est, that is shorter than a short vowel id est, that is a semi-vowel). The word क्षैप्र is also used in this sense referring to the Kṣiprasaṁdhi.
ksaranUṇādi affix सर; confer, compare तन्यृषिभ्यां क्सरन् Uṇādi III.75.
ksiUṇādi affix सि; confer, compare प्रुषिकुषिशुषिभ्यः क्सि: Uṇādi III.155.
ksekṛt affix से in the sense of तुमुन् in Vedic Literature; exempli gratia, for exampleप्रेषे (भगाय) Kāś. on III. 4. 9.
khataddhita affix. affix, always changed into ईन, (l) applied to the word कुल in the sense of a descendant, exempli gratia, for example कुलीनः, आढ्यकुलीन:; confer, compare P. IV. 1.139; (2) applied to the words अवार, पार, पारावार and अवारपार in the Śaīṣika senses, e. g. अवारीणः, पारीणः et cetera, and others; confer, compare P.IV.2.93 and Vārttikas 2, 3 on it; (3) applied to words ending in the word वर्ग ( which does not mean 'sound' or 'letter' ) in the sense of 'present there,' e. g. वासुदेववर्गीणः, युधिष्ठिरवर्गीणः; confer, compare P. IV. 3.64; (4) applied to the words सर्वधुर and एकधुर in the sense of 'bearing,' and to ओजसू , वेशोभग, यशोभग and पूर्व, exempli gratia, for example ओजसीनः et cetera, and others, confer, compare P.IV.4.78, 79, 130, 132, 133; (5) applied in the sense of 'favourable to' to the words आत्मन् , विश्वजन, et cetera, and others (P.V.1.9), to विंशतिक, (32) to अाढक, अाचित, पात्र and others (53-55), to समा (85-86), to रात्रि, अहन् , संवत्सर and वर्ष (87-88) and संवत्सर and परिवत्सर (92); e. g. आत्मनीनः, आढकीनः पात्रीणः, समीनः, संवत्सरीणः et cetera, and others; (6) to the words सर्वचर्मन्, यथामुख et cetera, and others e. g. सर्वचर्मीणः confer, compare P.V. 2.5 to 17; (7) to the words अषडक्ष, अशितंगु et cetera, and others confer, compare P.V.4.7,8. e. g. अषडक्षीणः. (8) ख is also a technical term in the sense of elision or लोप in the Jainendra Grammar confer, compare Jain I. 1.61. (9) The word ख is used in the sense of 'glottis' or the hole of the throat ( गलबिल ) in the ancient Prātiṣākhya works.
khackṛt affix अ in the sense of 'agent' applied to the roots वद्, ताप् , and यम् when preceded by certain उपपद words standing as objects. Before this affix खच्, the augment मुम् ( म् ) is added to the preceding उपपद if it is not an indeclinable. e. g. प्रियंवदः, वशंवदः, द्विषंतपः परंतपः वाचंयम: et cetera, and others cf P.III. 2.38-47.
khamuñkṛt affix अम् applied to the root कृ when preceded by a word standing as the object of the root, provided an abuse is meant, e. g. चोरंकारं आक्रोशति; confer, compare P. III. 4.25.
khaythe pratyāhāra खयू standing for the first and second consonants of the five classes; confer, compare शर्पूर्वाः खयः P.VII.4.6; also confer, compare P. VIII.3.6, VIII.4.54.
kharthe pratyāhāra खर् standing for hard consonants viz. the first and second letters of the five classes and the sibilants, before which, स् at the end of a word becomes विसर्ग, and soft consonants i. e. the third and fourth consonants of the five classes become hard; confer, compare खरवसानयोर्विसर्जनीय; P. VIII.3.15, and खरि च P. VIII.4.55
khaśkṛt affix added to the roots यज् (causal), ध्मा, धे,रुज्, वह्, लिह्, पच् , दृश् , तप्, मन् et cetera, and others preceded by certain specified upapada words. The root undergoes all the operations such as the addition of the conjugational sign et cetera, and others before this खश् on account of the mute letter श् which makes खश् a Sārvadhātuka affix, and the augment म् is added to the preceding उपपद if it is not an indeclinable on account of the mute letter ख्; e. g. जनमेजयः, स्तनंधयः, नाडिंधमः, असूयै. पश्यः पण्डितंमन्यः etc,; confer, compare Pāṇ. III2.28-37, 83.
khitcharacterized by the mute letter ख्, applied to kṛt affixes which, by reason of their being खित् , cause (a) the addition of the augment मुम् ( म् ) to the preceding words अरुस् , द्विषद् and words ending in a vowel, and (b) the shortening of the long vowel of the preceding word if it is not an indeclinable; confer, compare P. VI. 3.66-68.
gaṅgādhara[GANGADHARA SHASTRI TELANG] (l)a stalwart grammarian and Sanskrit scholar of repute who was a pupil of Bālasarasvatī of Vārāṇaśī and prepared in the last century a host of Sanskrit scholars in Banaras among whom a special mention could be made of Dr. Thebaut, Dr. Venis and Dr. Gaṅgānātha Jhā. He was given by Government of India the titles Mahāmahopādhyāya and C. I.E. His surname was Mānavallī but he was often known as गङाधरशास्त्री तेलङ्ग. For details, see Mahābhāṣya, D.E. Society Ed.Poona p.p.33, 34; (2)an old scholar of Vyākarana who is believed to have written a commentary on Vikṛtavallī of Vyādi; (3) a comparatively modern scholar who is said to have written a commentary named Induprakāśa on the Śabdenduśekhara; (4) author of the Vyākaraṇadīpaprabhā, a short commentary on the Vyākaraṇa work of Cidrūpāśramin. See चिद्रूपाश्रमिन्.
gaṅgeśaśarmāwriter of Kātantra-kaumudī possibly different from the reputed Gaṅgeśa Upādhyāa who is looked upon as the founder of the Navyanyāya school of modern Naiyāyikas, and who lived in the twelfth century A. D.
gaṇapāṭhathe mention individually of the several words forming a class or gaṇa, named after the first word said to have been written by Pāṇini himself as a supplementary work to his great grammar called Aṣṭaka or Pāṇini's Aṣṭādhyāyī., the Sikṣā,the Dhātupātha and the Lingānuśāsana being the other ones. Other grammarians such as शाकटायन, अापिशलि and others have their own gaṇapāthās. The gaṇapāthā is traditionally ascribed to Pāṇini; the issue is questioned, however, by modern scholars. The text of the gaṇapāṭha is metrically arranged by some scholars. The most scholarly and authoritative treatise on gaṇapāṭha is the Gaṇaratnamahodadhī of Vardhamāna.
gaṇasūtraa statement of the type of a Sūtra in the Gaṇapāṭha of Pāṇini where mention of a word or words in the Gaṇapāṭha is made along with certain conditions; e. g. पूर्वपुरावरo, स्वमज्ञातिधनाख्यायाम् , in the सर्वादिगण, and क्त्वातोसुन्कसुनः, तसिलादय: प्राक्पाशपः in the स्वरादिगण. Some of the gaṇasūtras are found incorporated in the Sūtrapāṭha itself Many later grammarians have appended their own gaṇapāṭha to their Sūtrapāṭha.
gati(1)literally motion; stretching out, lengthening of a syllable. The word is explained in the Prātiśakhya works which define it as the lengthening of a Stobha vowel with the utterance of the vowel इ or उ after it, exempli gratia, for example हाइ or हायि for हा; similarly आ-इ or अा -यि ; (2) a technical term used by Pāṇini in connection with prefixes and certain indeclinables which are called गति, confer, compare P.I.4.60-79. The words called gati can be compounded with the following word provided the latter is not a verb, the compound being named tatpuruṣa e.g, प्रकृतम् , ऊरीकृत्य confer, compare P.II.2.18; the word गति is used by Pāṇini in the masculine gender as seen in the Sūtra गतिरनन्तरः P.VI. 2.49 and hence explained as formed by the addition of the affix क्तिच् to गम्, the word being used as a technical term by the rule क्तिच्क्तौ च संज्ञायाम् P.III.3.174; (3) realization, understanding; confer, compare उभयगतिरिह भवति Paribhāṣenduśekhara of Nāgeśa. Pari.9; सांप्रतिकाभावे भूतपूर्वगतिः Paribhāṣenduśekhara of Nāgeśa. Pari 76; अगत्या हि परिभाषा अाश्रीयते Puruṣottamadeva's Paribhāṣāvṛtti.adeva Pari. Pāṭha 119.
gatisamāsaa compound with the preceding gati word prescribed by the rule कुगतिप्रादयः P.II. 2.18; confer, compare गतिसमास । निष्कौशाम्बिः, निर्वाराणसि: M.Bh. on II. 4. 26 .
galatpadathe word occurs in the Prātiśākhya works in connection with the definition of संक्रम, in the kramapātha. The word संक्रम means bringing together two words when they are combined according to rules of Samdhi. (See the word संक्रम). In the Kramapātha, where each word occurs twice by repetition, a word occurring twice in a hymn or a sentence is not to be repeated for Kramapātha, but it is to be passed over. The word which is passed over in the Kramapātha is called गलत्पद; e. g. दिशां च पतये नमो नमो वृक्षेभ्यो हरिकेशेभ्यः पशूनां पतये नमो नमः सस्पिञ्जराय त्विषीमतॆ पथीनां पतये नमः । In the Kramapātha पतये नमः and नमः are passed over and पशूनां is to be connected with सस्पिञ्जराय. The words पतये नमः and नमः are called galatpada; confer, compare गलत्पदमतिक्रम्य अगलता सह संधानं संक्रम; Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.IV. 197. There is no गलत्पद in पदपाठ.
gitmarked with the mute letter ग्; affixes that are गित् prevent guna or vrddhi in the preceding word; confer, compare क्क्ङिति च P. I. 1.5; confer, compare also Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). I. 3.10; III. 2.I39: confer, compare also गकारोप्यत्र चर्त्वभूतो निर्दिश्यते Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. I. 1.5.
guṇa(1)degree of a vowel; vocalic degree, the second out of the three degrees of a vowel viz. primary degree, guna degree and vrddhi degree exempli gratia, for example इ, ए and ऐ or उ, ओ and औ. अ is given as a guna of अ; but regarding अ also,three degrees can be stated अ, अ and आ. In the Pratisakhya and Nirukta ए is called गुण or even गुणागम but no definiti6n is given ; confer, compare गुणागमादेतनभावि चेतन R.Pr.XI.6;शेवम् इति विभीषितगुणः। शेवमित्यपि भवति Nir.X.17: (2) the properties of phonetic elements or letters such as श्वास,नाद et cetera, and others: confer, compareṚgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) Ch.XIII : (3) secondary, subordinate;confer, compare शेषः,अङ्गं, गुणः इति समानार्थाः Durgācārya's commentary on the Nirukta.on Nirukta of Yāska.I.12: (4) properties residing in a substance just as whiteness, et cetera, and others in a garment which are different from the substance ( द्रव्य ). The word गुण is explained by quotations from ancient grammarians in the Maha bhasya as सत्वे निविशतेsपैति पृथग्जातिषु दृश्यते । अाघेयश्चाक्रियाजश्च सोSसत्त्वप्रकृतिर्गुणः ॥ अपर आह । उपैत्यन्यज्जहात्यन्यद् दृष्टो द्रव्यान्तरेष्वपि। वाचकः सर्वलिङ्गानां द्रव्यादन्यो गुणः स्मृतः ; Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on IV.1.44;cf also शब्दस्पर्शरूपरसगन्धा गुणास्ततोन्यद् द्रव्यम् ,M.Bh.on V.1.119 (5) properties of letters like उदात्तत्व, अनुदात्तत्व, स्वरितत्व, ह्र्स्वत्व, दीर्घत्व, प्लुतत्व, अानुनासिक्य et cetera, and others; confer, compare भेदकत्वाद् गुणस्य । आनुनासिक्यं नाम गुणः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.1.1.. Vart, 13: (6) determinant cf भवति बहुव्रीहौ तद्गुणसंविज्ञानमपि Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I. 1.27; (7) technical term in Panini's grarnmar standing for the vowels अ, ए and ओ, confer, compare अदेङ्गुणः P.I.1.2. For the various shades of the meaning of the word गुण, see Mahabhasya on V.1.119. " गुणशब्दोयं बह्वर्थः । अस्त्येव समेष्ववयवेषु वर्तते ।...... चर्चागुणांश्च ।
guṇakarmana term used by the ancient grammarians for the गौणकर्मन् or indirect object of a verb. having two objects.The word is found quoted in the Mahabhaya; confer, compare कथिते लादयश्चेत्स्युः षष्टीं कुर्यात्तदा गुणे । गुणे गुणकर्मणि । confer, compare also गुणकर्मणि लादिविधि: सपरे M.Bh. on I. 4.51.
guṇabhedadifference in properties; confer, compare एकोयमात्मा उदकं नाम तस्य गुणभेदादन्यत्वं भवति । अन्यदिदं शीतमन्यदिदमुष्णमिति । Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I, 1.2.
guṇavacanaliterally expressing quality; words expressing quality such as शुक्ल, नील, et cetera, and others; confer, compare गुणवचनब्राह्मणादिभ्यः कर्मणि च P.V. 1.124. See page 369 Vyākarana Mahabhasya Vol. VII. D.E. Society edition, Poona.
guṇībhūtasubordinate, literally which has become subordinated, which has become submerged, and therefore has formed an integral part of another; e. g. an augment ( अागम ) with respect to the word to which it has been added;confer, compareयदागमास्तद्गुणी भूतास्तद्ग्रहणेन गृह्यन्ते । Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). I.1.20 Vart. 5; Par. Sek. Pari. 11.
guru(1)possessed of a special effort as opposed to लघु; confer, compare तद् गुरु भवति Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). Ahnika 1। (2) heavy, a technical term including दीर्घ (long) vowel as also a ह्रस्व (short) vowel when it is followed by a conjunct consonant, (confer, compare संयोगे गुरु । दीर्घ च। P. I. 4.11, 12) or a consonant after which the word terminates or when it (the vowel) is nasalized; confer, compare Tai. Pr. XXII. 14, confer, compare also Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) I. 5.
gūḍhaphakkikāprakāśaa short gloss on the Siddhāntakaumudi of Bhattoji Diksita, by Indradatta,
gūḍhabhāvavṛttia commentary on Ramacandra's Prakriya Kaumudi by Krsnasesa of the famous Sesa family of grammarians. The date of this Krsnasesa is the middle of the sixteenth century. For details about Krsnasesa and the Sesa family see introduction to Prakriyakaumudi B. S. S. No. 78.
goṇikāputraa grammarian whose wiew in connection with the correctness of the expressions नेताश्वस्य स्त्रुघ्नं and नेताश्वस्य स्त्रुघ्नस्य is given by the Mahabhasyakara in the words 'both expressions are justified' ( उभयथा गेणिकापुत्रः ). Nagesa has observed that गेोणिकापुत्र is nobody else but the Mahabhasyakara himself; confer, compare गोणिकापुत्रः भाष्यकार इत्याहुः । NageSa's Mahābhāṣya-Pradīpoddyota by Nāgeśa.on Mahabhasyapradipa on P. I. 4.5I.
gonardīyaliterally inhabitant of Gonarda which was the name of a district. in the province of Oudh in the days of the Mahabhasyakara according to some scholars. Others believe that Gonarda was the name of the district named Gonda at present The expression गोनर्दीय अाह occurs four times in the Mahabhasya where it refers to a scholar of grammar in Patafijali's time; cf M.Bh. on I. 1.21 ; I. 1.29; III. I.92; VII. 2.101. As Kaiyata paraphrases the words गेानर्दीयस्त्वाह as भाष्यकारस्त्वाह, scholars say that गेीनर्दीय was the name taken by the Mahabhasyakara himself who was a resident of Gonarda. Hari Diksita, however, holds that गोनर्दीय was the term used for the author of the . Varttikas; confer, compare Brhacchabdaratna.
gopāla( देव )known more by the nickname of मन्नुदेव or मन्तुदेव who lived in the eighteenth century and wrote several commentary works on well-known grammatical treatises such as the Vaiyakaranabhusanasara, Laghusabdendusekhara, Paribhasendusekhara et cetera, and others He is believed to have written a treatise on Ganasutras also; (2) a grammarian different from the a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page. मन्नुदेव who has written an explanatory work on the Pratisakhyas;.(3) a scholar of grammar, different from the a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page. who is believed to have written a gloss named Visamarthadipika on the Sarasvata Vyakarana at the end of the sixteenth century.
gopīcandraknown also by the name गेयींचन्द्र who .has written several commentary works on the grammatical treatises of the Samksipatasara or Jaumāra school of Vyakarana founded by Kramdisvara and Jumaranandin in the 12th century, the well-known among them being the संक्षिप्तसाटीका, संक्षितसारपरिभात्रासूत्रटीका and तद्धितपरिशिष्टटीका. He is believed to have lived in the thirteenth century A. D.
govardhanaa grammarian who has written a work on Katantra Grammar called कातन्त्रकौमुदी and also a commentary on the Ganaratnamahodadhi of Vardhamana. A gloss on the Unadisutras is also assigned to Govardhana who is likely to be the same as a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page..
govindarāmawriter of 'Sabdadipika,' a commentary on the Mugdhabodha Vyakarana of Bopadeva.
goṣṭhaca taddhita affix.affix applied to words like गो and others in the sense of 'a place'; confer, compare गेष्ठजादयः स्थानादिषु पशुनाम। पशुनामादिभ्य उपसंख्यानम् | गवां स्थानं गोगोष्ठम्, अश्वगोष्ठम्: महिषीगोष्ठम् Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana.on P.1. varia lectio, another reading,2.29 It is very likely that words like गोष्ठ, दघ्न and others were treated as pratyayas by Panini and katyayana who followed Panini, because they were found always associated with a noun preceding them and never independently.
gauṇa(l)a word subordinate in syntax or sense to another; adjectival; उपसर्जनीभूतः (2) possessing a secondary sense, e. g the word गो in the sense of 'a dull man';confer, compareगौणमुख्ययेार्मुख्ये कार्यसम्प्रत्ययः, Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.1.15, I.4. 108, VI. 3. 46. See also Par. Sek Pari. 15; (3) secondary, as opposed to primary; confer, compare गौणे कर्मणि दुह्यादे; प्रधाने नीहृकृष्वहाम् ।.
grastaa fault of pronunciation due to the utterance of a letter hindered or held back at the throat; confer, compare जिह्वामूलनिग्रहे ग्रस्तमेतत् R.Pr.XIV.3; confer, compare also ग्रस्तं निरस्तमवलम्बितम् । ग्रस्तः जिह्वामूले गृहीतः । अव्यक्त इत्यपरे । Pradipa on Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). Ahnika 1.
grahaṇavatspecifically mentioned in a rule, individually mentioned; confer, compare ग्रहणवता प्रातिपदिकेन तदन्तविधिर्नास्ति Par. Sek.Pari.31. See the word ग्रहण.
grāsaa fault in the utterance of a letter which makes it indistinct by being held up at the throat.Seeग्रस्त.
gh(1)fourth consonant of the guttural class of consonants having the properties कण्ठसंवृतत्व, घोष, नादानुप्रदानत्व and महाप्राणत्व; (2)the consonant घ at the beginning of a taddhita affix. affix which is always changed into इय्; confer, compare P. VII. 1. 9; (3) substitute for ह् at the end of roots beginning with द्, as also of the root नह् under certain conditions; confer, compare P.VIII.2.32,33,34; (4) substitute for the consonant व् of मतुव् placed after the pronouns किम् and इदम् which again is changed into इय् by VII.1.9: exempli gratia, for example कियान्, इयान्: confer, compare P.V. 2.40.
gha(l)consonant घ्, अ being added at the end for facility of pronunciation; confer, compareTai. Pr.I.21; (2) technical term for the taddhita affix. affixes तरप् and तमप्, confer, compare P.I.1.22, causing the shortening of ई at the end of bases before it, under certain conditions, confer, compare P. VI. 3.43-45, and liable to be changed into तराम् and तमाम् after किम्, verbs ending in ए, and indeclinables; confer, compare P.V.4.11; (3) taddhita affix. affix घ ( इय) in the sense of 'a descendant' applied to क्षत्र, and in the sense of 'having that as a deity' applied to अपोनप्तृ अपांनप्तृ and also to महेन्द्र and to the words राष्ट्र et cetera, and others, exempli gratia, for example क्षत्रियः, अपोनाप्त्रिय:, अपांनप्त्रियः, महेन्द्रियम्,राष्ट्रियः et cetera, and others; confer, compare P. IV.1.138, IV.2.27, 29, 93; (4) taddhita affix. affix घ, applied to अग्र, समुद्र and अभ्र in the sense of 'present there', to सहस्र in the sense of 'possession', to, नक्षत्र without any change of sense, and to यज्ञ and ऋत्विज् in the sense of 'deserving'; confer, compare P.IV.4.117,118,135, 136,141, V.1.71 ; (5) krt affix अ when the word to which it has been applied becomes a proper noun id est, that isa noun in a specific sense or a technical term; confer, compare III.3. 118, 119,125.
ghañkrt affix अ causing the substitution of vrddhi for the preceding vowel applied in various senses as specified in P.III.3. 16-42, III.3. 45-55,III.3.120-125, exempli gratia, for example पाद:, रोग:, आयः, भावः, अवग्राहृः प्रावारः, अवतारः, लेखः रागः etc
ghanaa variety of the क्रमपाठ or recital of the Vedic hymns to show the serial order of words there; one of the eight vikrtis of the padapātha.
ghastad, affix इय, occurring in Vedic Literature,applied to the word ऋतु, exempli gratia, for example अयं ते योनिऋत्वीयः; confer, compare Kās on P. V.1.106.
ghi(1)a tech. term applied to noun bases or Prātipadikas ending in इ and उ excepting the words सखि and पति and those which are termed नदी; confer, compare P. I. 4.79; (2) a conventional term for लधु ( a short vowel) found used in the Jainendra Vyakarana.
ghinuṇkrt affix इन् causing the substitution of Vrddhi for the preceding vowel, as also to the penultimate vowel अ, applied to the eight roots शम्,तम्, दम् et cetera, and others, as also to संपृच्, अनुरुध् et cetera, and others and कस्, लष् लप्, et cetera, and others. e. g. शमी,तमी, दमी, संपर्की, संज्वारी, प्रलापी et cetera, and others; confer, compare P. III.2.141-145.
ghua tech. term applied to the roots दा and धा, as also to those like दे or दो which become दा by the substitution of अा for the final diphthong vowel, barring the root दाप् (to cut) and दैप् (to purify): दाधा ध्वदाप् P.I. 1.20.
(1)fifth letter of the guttural class of consonants having the properties कण्ठसंवृतत्व, घोष, नादानुप्रदान, अल्पप्राणत्व and अानुनासिक्य; (2) the consonant ङ् getting the letter ,क as an augment added to it, if standing at the end of a word and followed by a sibilant, e. g. प्राङ्कूशेते confer, compare ङ्णो: कुक् टुक् शरि P. VIII. 3.28; (3) the consonant ङ् which, standing at the end of a word and preceded by a short vowel, causes the vowel following it to get the augment ङ् prefixed to it; e. g, प्रत्यङ्ङास्ते confer, compare ङमो ह्रस्वादचि ङमुण् नित्यम् P. VIII.3.32.
ṅaña short term or Pratyahara standing for the letters ङ्, ण्, न् , झ् , and भू , casually mentioned in the Mahabhasya; confer, compare एतदप्यस्तु ञकारेण ङञो ह्र्स्वादचि ङञुण्नित्यमिति । Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on Mahesvara Sutras 8, 9.
ṅamudaugment ङम् i. e. ङ्, ण् or न् prefixed to a vowel at the beginning of a word provided that vowel is preceded by ङ्, ण् or न् standing at the end of the preceding word. See ङ् (3).
ṅasending of the genitive case singular; स्य is substituted for ङस् after bases ending in अ; cf P. IV. l . 2 and VII. 1. 12.
ṅasicase-ending of the ablative case, changed into अात् after bases ending in अ and into स्मात् after pronouns; confer, compareP.IV.1.2,VII.1.12,15.
ṅicase-ending of the locative case, changed into (a) अाम् after bases termed Nadi, feminine. bases ending in अा and the word नी, (b) into औ after bases ending in इ and उ, and (c) into स्मिन् after bases of pronouns;confer, compare P.IV. 1. 2, VII. 3. 116, 117, 118, 119 and VII. 1. 15, 16.
ṅit(l)affixes with the mute letter ङ् attached to them either before or after, with a view to preventing the guna and vrddhi substitutes for the preceding इ, उ, ऋ, or लृ, as for example, the affixes चङ्, अङ् and others (2) affixes conventionally called ङित् after certain bases under certain conditions; confer, compare गाङ्कुटादिम्यो ञ्णिन्ङित् P. I. 2. 1-4; (3) roots marked with the mute letter ङ् signifying the application of the Atmanepada terminations to them: (4) substitutes marked with mute ङ् which are put in the place of the last letter of the word for which they are prescribed as substitutes; (5) case affixes marked with mute letter ङ् which cause the substitution of guna to the last vowel इ or उ of words termed घि.
ḍīṃnfeminine. affix ई added to words in the class headed by शार्ङ्गरव: confer, compare P. IV. 1. 73. Words ending with this affix ङीन् have their first vowel accented acute.
ṅīpfeminine. affix ई which is anudatta (grave) added (a) to words ending in the vowel ऋ or the consonant न् (confer, compareP.IV.1.5), (b) to words ending with affixes marked with mute उ,ऋ or लृ; confer, compareP.IV.1.6 (c) to words ending with affixes marked with mute ट् as also ending with the affixes ढ, अण्, अञ्, द्वयसच् दघ्नच्,मात्रच्, तयप्, ठक्, ठञ्, कञ् and क्वरप् (confer, compareP.IV.1.15) and to certain other words under certain conditions; confer, compare P. IV. 1.16-24.
ṅīṣfeminine. afix ई, which is udatta, applied to words in the class of words headed by गौर, as also to noun bases ending in affixes marked with.mute ष्, as also to words mentioned in the class headed by बहुः confer, compare P.IV.1.41-46.It is also added in the sense of 'wife of' to any word denoting a male person; confer, compare P. IV. 1. 48, and together with the augment आनुक् (आन्) to the words इन्द्र, वरुण etc exempli gratia, for example इन्द्राणी, वरुणानि, यवनानि meaning 'the script of the Yavanas' confer, compare P. IV. 1.49. It is also added words ending in क्रीत and words ending in क्त and also to words expressive of ' limbs of body ' under certain conditions; confer, compare P.IV.1. 50-59 and IV. 1.61-65.
ṅedative case termination changed into य after bases ending in short अ and into स्मै after pronouns; confer, compare P.IV.1.2, VII, 1.13, 14.
ṅyantanoun bases ending with the feminine. affix ङी (ङीप्, ङीत्र्, or ङीन्); confer, compare ङ्यन्तादित्येवं भविष्यति M.Bh. on P.I. 1.89 Vart. 16.
ca(l)the letter च्, the vowel अ being added for facility of utterance, cf Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.I. 21; (2) a Bratyahara or short term standing for the palatal class of consonants च्, छ्, ज्,झ् and ञ्; cf इचशेयास्तालौ Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.I. 66; (3) indeclinable च called Nipata by Panini; confer, compare चादयोSसत्त्वे P. I. 4.57, च possesses four senses समुच्चय, अन्वाचय, इतरेतरयोग and समाहार confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on II. 2.29. See also Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on II. 2.29 Vart. 15 for a detailed explanation of the four senses. The indeclinable च is sometimes used in the sense of 'a determined mention' or avadharana; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on II. 1.48 and 72. It is also used for the purpose of अनुवृत्ति or अनुकर्षण i. e. drawing a word from the previous rule to the next rule; (confer, compare Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. VI. 1.90) with a convention that a word drawn thus, does not proceed to the next rule; confer, compare चानुकृष्टं नोत्तरत्र Par. Sek Pari. 78; (4) a conventional term for अभ्यास (reduplicative syllable) used in the Jainendra Vyakarana; confer, compare चविकारेषु अपवादा उत्सर्गान्न बाधन्ते Kat. Pari. 75.
cakoraa grammarian who .wrote a commentary on the 'Sabdalingarthacandrika of Sujanapandita. चक्कनशर्मा a grammarian who is said to have written a work named Dhatusamgraha.
cakrakaa kind of fault in the application of operations, resulting in confusion; a fault in which one returns to the same place not immediately as in Anavastha but after several steps; confer, compare पुनर्ऋच्छिभावः पुनराट् इति चक्रकमव्यवस्था प्राप्नोति । Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I. 3.60 Vart 5.
cakrina grammarian who has written a small disquisition on the correctness of the form जाग्रहीता. See जाग्रहीतेतिवाद.
caṅa Vikarana affix of the aorist substituted for च्लि after roots ending in the causal sign णि, as also after the roots श्रि, द्रु and others; this चङ् causes reduplication of the preceding root form; confer, compare P. III 1.48-50, e. g. अचूचुरत्, अशिश्रियत्; confer, compare also P. VII. 4.93.
caṇthe indeclinable च (with ण् as a mute letter added to it which of course disappears) possessing the sense of चेत् or condition. exempli gratia, for example अयं च मरिष्यति confer, compare Kas, on P. VIII. 1.30.
caturthīsamāsathe tatpurusa compound with the first word in the dative case in its dissolution; confer, compare वतुर्थीसमासे सति पूर्वपदकृतिस्वरत्वेन भवितव्यम् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on II. 1.36.
candraa famous Buddhist Sanskrit grammarian whose grammar existing in the Tibetan script, is now available in the Devanagar script. The work consists of six chapters or Adhyayas in which no technical terms or sanjnas like टि, घु are found. There is no section on Vedic Grammar and accents. The work is based on Panini's grammar and is believed to have been written by Candra or Candragomin in the 5th centnry A. D. Bhartrhari in his Vakyapadiya refers to him; confer, compare स नीतो बहुशाखत्वं चन्द्राचार्यादिभिः पुनः Vakyapadiya II. 489. A summary of the work is found in the Agnipurana, ch. 248-258.
candragominnamed also चन्द्र, a Buddhist scholar who has written an easy Sanskrit Grammar based on the Astadhyayi of Panini. He is believed to have lived in North India in the fifth century A.D. See चन्द्र.
candrācāryaa grammarian mentioned by Bhartrhari in his Vakyapadiya as one who took a leading part in restoring the traditional explanation of Panini's Vyakarana which, by the spread of rival easy treatises on grammar, had become almost lost: confer, compare यः पतञ्जलिशिष्येभ्यो भ्रष्टो ब्याकरणागमः । काले स दाक्षिणात्येषु ग्रन्थमात्रे व्यवस्थित: ॥ पर्वतादागमं लब्ध्वा भाष्यबीजानुसारिभि: । स नीतो बहुशाखत्वं चन्द्राचार्यादिभिः पुनः ॥ Vakyapadiya II. 488-489. See चन्द्र and चन्द्रगोमिन्.
caraṇaexplained as a synonym of the word शाखा which means a branch or a school of Vedic Learning; confer, compare चरणशब्दाः कठकलापादय:: Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.IV.2.46.
caritārthawhich has got already a scope of application; the term is used by commentators in connection with a rule or a word forming a part of a rule which applies in the case of some instances and hence which cannot be said to be ब्यर्थ (superfluous) or without any utility and as a result cannot be said to be capable of allowing some conclusion to be drawn from it according to the dictum ब्यर्थं सज्ज्ञापयति confer, compare अपवादो यद्यन्यत्र चरितार्थस्तर्ह्यन्तरङ्गेण बाध्यते Par. Sek. Pari. 65.
carkarītaa term used by the ancient grammarians in connection with a secondary root in the sense of frequency; the term यङ्लुगन्त is used by comparatively modern grammarians in the same sense. The चर्करीत roots are treated as roots of the adadi class or second conjugation and hence the general Vikarana अ ( शप् ) is omitted after them.The word is based on the 3rd person. sing form चर्करीति from .the root कृ in the sense of frequency; exempli gratia, for example चर्करीति, चर्कर्ति, बोभवीति बोभोति; confer, compare चर्करीतं च a gana-sutra in the gana named ’adadi’ given by Panini in connection with अदिप्रभृतिभ्य; शपः Pāṇini. II.4.72; confer, compare also चर्करीतमिति यङ्लुकः प्राचां संज्ञा Bhasa Vr. on P. II. 4.72, The word चेक्रीयित is similarly used for the frequentative when the sign of the frequentative viz. य ( यङ् ) is not elidedition See चेक्रीयित.
carcā(1)splitting up of a word into its component parts, which is generalty shown in the Padaptha by अवग्रहं (S). The word, hence means पदपाठ or recital by showing separately the constitutent words of the Samhita or the running text of the Veda. The word is used almost in the same sense in the Mahabhasya in respect of showing the words of a sutra separately; confer, compare न केवलानि चर्चापदानि व्याख्यानं वृद्धिः आत् ऐजिति । किं तर्हि । उदाहरणं प्रत्युदाहरणं वाक्याध्याहारः इत्येतत्समुदितं व्याख्यानं भवति M.Bh. on Mahesvara Sutra 1 Wart. 6l ; (2) a repeated word; confer, compare इतिकरणात् पुरतो यत् पुनः पदवचनं तत् चर्चाशब्देनोच्यते. Uvvata on Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.III.20; (3) a discussion or a debate where consideration is given to each single word; confer, compare प्रर्यायशब्दानां लाघवगौरवचर्चा नाद्रियते Par. Sek. Pari. 115.
cāṅgudāsathe same as चङ्गु or चाङ्गु or चङ्गुदास,a grammarian who composed a compendium on grammar called वैयाकरणजीवातु and also a commentary on it.
cātuḥsvāryathe view that there are four accents-the udatta, the anudatta, the svarita and the pracaya held by the Khandikya and the Aukhiya Schools.
cāndraname of a treatise on grammar written by Candra, who is believed to have been the same as Candragomin. The Grammar is based upon that of Panini, but it does not treat Vedic forms and accents. See the word चन्द्र a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.. For details see pp. 375376 Patanjali Mahabhasya. Vol. VII, D.E. Society's Edition.
cāpthe feminine. affix आ, applied to words ending in the taddhita affix. affixes ञ्यङ् and ष्यङ्; e. g. कौसल्या, वाराह्या, गौकक्ष्या; cf Kas, on P. IV. 1. 74.
cārthathe meaning of the indeclinable च to convey which, as existing in different individuals, the dvandva compound is prescribeditionOut of the four senses possessed by the inde clinable च, the Dvandva compound is prescribed in two senses viz.इतरेतरयोग and समाहार out of the four समुच्चय, अन्वाचय, इतरेतरयोग and समाहार: confer, compare कः पुनश्चेन कृतोर्थः समुच्चयोन्वाचय इतरेतरयोगः समाहार इति Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P.II.2.29; confer, compare also Candra Vyakarana II.2.48
cidasthimālāname of a commentary on the Laghusabdendusekhara by Vaidyanatha Payagunde,one of the distinguished disciples of Nagesabhatta.
cullibhaṭṭia grammarian who is supposed to have written a gloss ( वृत्ति ) on the Sutras of Panini; confer, compare तत्र च वृतिः पाणिनिप्रणीतानां सूत्राणां विवरणं चुल्लिभट्टिनल्लूरादि( V. 1. निर्लूरादि-) विरचितम् , Nyasa, on the benedictory verse of Kasika: वृत्तौ भाष्ये तथा घातुनामपारायणादिषु at the very beginning.
cūrṇia gloss on the Sutras of Panini referred to by Itsing and Sripatidatta, Some scholars believe that Patanjali's Mahabhasya is referred to here by the word चूर्णि, as it fully discusses all the knotty points. Others believe that चूर्णि,stands for the Vrtti of चुल्लिभाट्टि. In Jain Religious Literature there are some brief comments on the Sutras which are called चूर्णि and there possibly was a similar चूर्णि on the sutras of Panini.
codaka(1)an objector; the word is common in the Commentary Literature where likely objections to a particular statement are raised, without specific reference to any individual objector, and replies are given, simply with a view to making matters clear; (2) repetition of a word with इति interposed: confer, compare चेदकः परिग्रहः इत्यनर्थान्तरम्. See अदृष्टवर्ण and परिग्रह.
coradthe crude form of the word चोर with the mute consonant ट् added to signify the addition of ङीप् to form the feminine base e. g. चोरी; confer, compare P. IV. 1. 15.
cphañtaddhita affix. affix अायन causing a vrddhi substitute for the first vowel of the word to which it is added, The affix ( च्फञ् ) is added in the sense of 'a descendant except the direct son or daughter’ to words कुञ्ज and others; confer, compare P. IV. I. 98.
cvitaddhita affix. affix ( of which nothing remains ) to signify the taking place of something which was not so before; after the word ending in च्वि the forms of the root कृ, भू or असू have to be placed; e. g. शुक्लीकरोति; confer, compare P. V. 4. 50
chthe second consonant of the palatal class of consonants ( चवर्ग ), which is possessed of the properties श्वास, अघोष, मह्याप्राण and कण्ठविवृतकारित्व. छ् , placed at the beginning of affixes, is mute; while ईय् is substituted for छ् standing at the beginning of taddhita affixes; confer, compare P. I. 3.7 and VII. 1.2. छ् at the end of roots has got ष्, substituted for it: confer, compare P. VIII. 2.36.
chataddhita affix. affix ईय, added ( 1 ) to the words स्वसृ, भ्रातृ and to words ending with the taddhita affix. affix फिञ्: confer, compare P. IV. 1.143,144 and 149; (2) to the dvandva compound of words meaning constellations,to the words अपोनप्तृ, अपांनप्तृ, महेन्द्र, द्यावापृथिवी, शुनासीर et cetera, and others as also to शर्करा, उत्कर , नड et cetera, and others in certain specified senses, confer, compare P. IV. 2.6, 28, 29, 32, 48, 84, 90 &91 ;(3) to words beginning with the vowel called Vrddhi (आ,ऐ or औ),to words ending with गर्त, to words of the गह class, and to युष्मद् and अस्मद् in the शैषिक senses, confer, compare P. IV. 3.114, 137-45 and IV. 3.1 ; (4) to the words जिह्वामूल, अङ्गुलि, as also to words ending in वर्ग in the sense of 'present there '; confer, compare P.IV.3.62-64; (5) to the words शिशुक्रन्द, यमसम, dvandva compounds, इन्द्रजनन and others in the sense of 'a book composed in respect of', confer, compare P.IV. 3.88; (6)to words meaning warrior tribes, to words रैवतिक etc, as also अायुध, and अग्र, in some specified senses: cf P.IV. 3.91, 131, IV. 4.14, 117; (7) to all words barring those given as exceptions in the general senses mentioned in the second. V.I.1-37; (8) to the words पुत्र, कडङ्कर, दक्षिण, words ending in वत्सर, अनुप्रवचन et cetera, and others होत्रा, अभ्यमित्र and कुशाग्र in specified senses; confer, compare P. V. 1. 40, 69,70,91,92, 111,112,135, V. 2.17, V.3.105; (9) to compound words in the sense of इव; e. g. काकतालीयम् , अजाकृपाणीयम् et cetera, and others confer, compare V. 3. 106;and (10) to words ending in जति and स्थान in specified senses; confer, compare P. V.4, 9,10.
chakārathe letter छ, the word कार being looked upon as an affix added to the consonant छ् which, by the addition of अ, is made a complete syllable; confer, compare Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.I. 16, 21.
chandas(1)Vedic Literature in general as found in the rule बहुलं छन्दसि which has occurred several times in the Sutras of Panini, confer, compare छन्दोवत्सूत्राणि भवन्ति Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.1.1, and I.4.3; confer, compare also Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.I. 1, 4; (2) Vedic Samhita texts as contrasted with the Brahmana texts; confer, compareछन्दोब्राह्मणानि च तद्विषयाणि P, IV.2.66; () metre, metrical portion of the Veda.
chandobhāṣāVedic language as contrasted with भाषा (ordinary language in use); confer, compare गुरुत्वं लघुता साम्यं ह्रस्वदीर्घप्लुतानि च...एतत्सर्व तु विज्ञेयं छन्दोभाषां विजानता Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.XXIV. 5.
chav'a short term or Pratyahara standing for छ्, ठ्, थ्, च्, ट् and त्: confer, compare नश्र्छन्यप्रशान् P. VIII.3.7.
chāndasafound in the Vedic Literature; Vedic; cf छान्दसा अपि क्वचिद् भाषायां प्रयुज्यन्ते Bhasavrtti on P. IV.4.143; confer, compare also छान्दसमेतत् । दृष्टानुविधिश्च च्छन्दसि भवति; Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.1.5.
chāyāa learned commentary on Nagesa's Mahabhasyapradipoddyota written by his pupil बाळंभट्ट (possibly the same as, or the son of, वैद्यनाथ पायगुण्डे) who lived in the eighteenth century.
jagannātha(1)the well-known poet and scholar of Vyakarana and Alam kara who wrote many excellent poetical works. He lived in the sixteenth century. He was a pupil of कृष्णशेष and he severely criticised the views of Appaya Diksita and Bhattoji Diksita. He wrote a sort of refutation of Bhattoji's commentary Praudha-Manorama on the Siddhānta Kaumudi, which he named प्रौढमनेारमाखण्डन but which is popularly termed मनोरमाकुचमर्दन. His famous work is the Rasagangadhara on Alankrasastra; (2) writer of a commentary on the Rk-Pratisakhya by name Varnakramalaksana; (3) writer of Sarapradipika, a commentary on the Sarasvata Vyakarana.
jaṭāa kind of Vedic recital wherein each word is repeated six times. जटा is called one of the 8 kinds ( अष्टविकृति) of the Kramapatha, which in its turn is based on the Padapatha; confer, compare जटा माला शिखा रेखा ध्वजो दण्डो रथो घनः। अष्टौ बिकृतय: प्रोक्ताः क्रमपूर्वा मनीषिभिः । जटा is defined as अनुलोमविलोमाभ्यां त्रिवारं हि पठेत् क्रमम् । विलोमे पदवत्संधिः अनुलोमे यथाक्रमम् । The recital of ओषधयः संवदन्ते संवदन्ते सोमेन can be illustrated as ओषधयः सं, समोषधयः, ओषधयः सं, सं वदन्ते, वदन्ते सं, सेवदन्ते, वदन्ते सोमेन,सोमेन वदन्ते , वदन्ते सोमेन ।
jayakṛṣṇaa famous grammarian of the Mauni family who lived in Varanasi in the seventeenth century. He wrote विभक्त्यर्थनिर्णय, स्फोटचन्द्रिका, a commentary on the Siddhantakaumudi called सुबोधिनी and a commentary on the Madhya Kaumudi named विलास. He wrote a commentary on the Laghukaumudi also.
jayadevaa grammarian, ( of course different from well-known poet), to whom a small treatise on grammar by name इष्टतन्त्रव्याकरण is attributedition
jayantaauthor of तत्वचन्द्र a commentary on पाणिनिसूत्रवृत्ति written by Vitthala; (2) writer of a commentary named Vadighatamudgara on the Sarasvataprakriya.
jahatsvārthā( वृत्ति )a composite expression where the constituent members give up their individual sense. In compound words such as राजपुरुष in the sentence राजपुरुषमानय the word राजन् gives up its sense in as much as he, the king,is not brought; पुरुष also gives up its sense as every man is not brought. It is of course to be noted that although the sense is given up by cach word, it is not completely given up: cf जहदप्यसेो स्वार्थ नात्यन्ताय जहाति; Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. II. 1.1. Vart. 2. For detailed explanation see Mahabhasya on P. II. I. I. Vart. 2.
jāgrahitetivādaa short disguisition on the correctness of the word जाग्रहीता, written by a grammarian named Cakrin; confer, compare भट्टोजिदीक्षितग्राहग्रस्तं माधवदिग्गजम्। अमूमुचत् सत्यवर्यश्चक्री चक्रिप्रसादभाक्, colophon.
jātabahiraṅgāsiddhatvainvalidity of a Bahiranga operation that has already taken place by virtue of the Antaranga-paribhasa-असिद्धं बहिरङ्गमन्तरङ्ङ्गेthat which is ' bahiranga' is regarded as not having taken effect when that which is 'antarahga' is to take effect. For details see Par. Sek. Paribhasa 50.
jātābhīyāsiddhatvainvalidity of a grammatical operation prescribed by a rule in the अाभीय section (P. VI. 4.22 upto the end of the fourth pada ) which, although it has taken place, is to be looked upon as not having taken place when any other operation in the same section is to take effect. See आभीयासिद्व.
jātigenus; class;universal;the notion of generality which is present in the several individual objects of the same kindeclinable The biggest or widest notion of the universal or genus is सत्ता which, according to the grammarians, exists in every object or substance, and hence, it is the denotation or denoted sense of every substantive or Pratipadika, although on many an occasion vyakti or an individual object is required for daily affairs and is actually referred to in ordinary talks. In the Mahabhasya a learned discussion is held regarding whether जाति is the denotation or व्यक्ति is the denotation. The word जाति is defined in the Mahabhasya as follows:आकृतिग्रहणा जातिर्लिङ्गानां च न सर्वभाक् । सकृदाख्यातनिर्गाह्या गोत्रं च चरणैः सह ॥ अपर आह । ग्रादुभीवविनाशाभ्यां सत्त्वस्य युगपद्गुणैः । असर्वलिङ्गां बह्वर्थो तां जातिं कवयो विदुः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on IV. 1.63. For details see Bhartphari's Vakyapadiya.
jātisvarathe acute accent for the last vowel of a word ending with क्त of the past passive participle. denoting a genus; confer, compare P. VI. 2.170.
jit(l)literally affix marked with the mute letter ज्; e. g. जस्, जसि, जुस्. the word जित् is not however found used in this sense; (2) a word supposed to be marked with the mute indicatory letter ज्.The word is used in this sense by the Varttikakara saying that such a word does not denote itself but its synonyms; confer, compare जित् पर्यायवचनस्यैव राजांद्यर्थम् P.I.1.68 Vart. 7. In the Sutra सभा राजामनुष्यपूर्वा P.II. 4. 23, the word राजन् is supposed to be जित् and hence it denotes इन्, ईश्वर et cetera, and others; but not the word राजन् itself; (3) In the Pratisakhya works जित् means the first two consonants of each class (वर्ग); exempli gratia, for example क्, ख्,च्, छ्. et cetera, and others which are the same as खय् letters in Panini's terminology; confer, compare द्वौ द्वौ प्रथमौ जित्, V. Pr.I.50;III.13.
jinendrabuddhia reputed Buddhist Grammarian of the eighth century who wrote a scholarly commentary on the Kasikavrtti ofJayaditya and Vamana. The commentary is called न्यास or काशिकाविवरणपञ्जिका and the writer is referred to as न्यासकार in many later grammar works Some scholars identify him with पूज्यपाददेवनन्दिन् the writer of the जैनेन्द्रव्याकरण, but this is not possible as पूज्यपाददेवनन्दिन् was a Jain Grammarian who flourished much earlier.
jainendravyākaraṇaname of a grammar work written by Pujyapada Devanandin, also called Siddhanandin, in the fifth century A.D. The grammar is based on the Astadhyay of Panini,the section on Vedic accent and the rules of Panini explaining Vedic forms being,of course, neglectedition The grammar is called Jainendra Vyakarana or Jainendra Sabdanusasana. The work is available in two versions, one consisting of 3000 sutras and the other of 3700 sutras. it has got many commentaries, of which the Mahavrtti written by Abhayanandin is the principal one. For details see Jainendra Vyakarana, introduction published by the Bharatiya Jnanapitha Varadasi.
jainendravyākaraṇamahāvṛttiname of a commentary on the Jainendra Vyakarana, written by Abhayanandin in the ninth century A. D. see जैनेन्द्रव्याकरण a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page..
jaumāra( व्याकरण )a treatise on vya'karana written by Jumaranandin. See जुमरनन्दिन् a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page. The Jaumara Vyakarana has no Vedic section dealing with Vedic forms or accents,but it has added a section on Prakrita just as the Haima Vyakaraha.
jaumārasaṃskaraṇathe revised version by Jumuranandin of the original grammar treatise in verse called संक्षिप्तसार written by KramadiSvara, The Jaumarasamskarana is the samc as.jaumara Vyakarana, which see a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page..
jñāpakaliterallyindirect or implicit revealer; a word very commonly used in the sense of an indicatory statement. The Sutras, especially those of Pinini, are very laconic and it is believed that not a single word in the Sutras is devoid of purpose. If it is claimed that a particular word is without any purpose, the object of it being achieved in some other way, the commentators always try to assign some purpose or the other for the use of the word in the Sutra. Such a word or words or sometimes even the whole Sutra is called ज्ञापक or indicator of a particular thing. The Paribhasas or rules of interpretation are mostly derived by indication(ज्ञापकसिद्ध) from a word or words in a Sutra which apparently appear to be व्यर्थ or without purpose, and which are shown as सार्थक after the particular indication ( ज्ञापन ) is drawn from them. The ज्ञापक is shown to be constituted of four parts, वैयर्थ्य, ज्ञापन, स्वस्मिञ्चारितार्थ्य and अन्यत्रफल. For the instances of Jñāpakas, see Paribhāșenduśekhara. Purușottamadeva in his Jñāpakasamuccaya has drawn numerous conclusions of the type of ज्ञापन from the wording of Pāņini Sūtras. The word ज्ञापक and ज्ञापन are used many times as synonyms although ज्ञापन sometimes refers to the conclusions drawn from a wording which is ज्ञापक or indicator. For instances of ज्ञापक, confer, compareM.Bh. on Māheśvara Sūtras 1, 3, 5, P. Ι.1. 3, 11, 18, 23, 51 et cetera, and others The word ऊठ् in the rule वाह ऊठ् is a well known ज्ञापक of the अन्तरङ्गपरिभाषा. The earliest use of the word ज्ञापक in the sense given a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page., is found in the Paribhāșāsūcana of Vyādi. The Paribhāșā works on other systems of grammar such as the Kātantra; the Jainendra and others have drawn similar Jñāpakas from the wording of the Sūtras in their systemanuscript. Sometimes a Jñāpaka is not regularly constituted of the four parts given a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.;it is a mere indicator and is called बोधक instead of ज्ञापक्र.
jñāpakasamuccayaa work giving a collection of about 400 Jñāpakas or indicatory wordings found in the Sūtras of Pānini and the conclusions drawn from them. It was written by Purușottamadeva, a Buddhist scholar of Pāņini's grammar in the twelfth century A. D., who was probably the same as the famous great Vaiyākaraņa patronized by Lakșmaņasena.See पुरुषेत्तमदेव.
jñāpakasādhyarealizable, or possible to be drawn, from a wording in the Sūtra of Pāņini in the manner shown a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.. See ज्ञापक.
jñāpakasiddharealized from the ज्ञापक wording; the conclusion drawn from an indicatory. word in the form of Paribhāșās and the like. Such conclusions are not said to be universally valid; confer, compare ज्ञापकसिद्धं न सर्वत्र Paribhāṣenduśekhara of Nāgeśa. Pari, 110.7.
jñāpitaconcluded or proved by means of a ज्ञापक word or wording: confer, compare हन्तेः पूर्वत्रप्रतिषेधो वार्तिकेनैव ज्ञापितः M.Bh. on ΙΙΙ. 4.37 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 3.
jñāpyamānaindicated or suggested: confer, compare उत्पातेन ज्ञाप्यमाने ( चतुर्थी वाच्या )। वाताय कपिला विद्युत् et cetera, and others M.Bh. on ΙΙ. 3.13 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 3.
jvalitistanding for ज्वलादि, name of a class of 30 roots headed by the root ज्वल दीप्तौ and given as चल कम्पने, जल घातने etc; cf: ज्वलितिकसन्तेभ्यो णः P. III. 1.140.
jhaa verbal ending of the 3rd person. Atm. for ल ( id est, that is लकार ); cf P.III.4. 78;for the letter झ् , अन्त् is substituted; confer, compare झोन्तः P. VIII.1.3, but ईरे in the perfect tense; confer, compare P. III. 4.81 and रन् in the potential and benedictive moods; confer, compare P. III. 4.85.
jhacwording of the affix झ (see a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.) suggested by the Varttikakara to have the last vowel of अन्त acute, by चितः (P.VI.1.163) the property चित्व being transferred from the original झ to अन्त; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. तथा च झचश्चित्करणमर्थवद् भवति on P.VII.1.3.
jhaya short term ( प्रत्याहार ) for the fourth, third, second and first consonants of the five classes, after which ह् is changed into the cognate of the preceding consonant while श्, is changed into छ् optionally; confer, compare P. VIII. 4.62, 63.
jhi(1)verb-ending of the 3rd person. plural Parasmaipada, substituted for the लकार of the ten lakaras, changed to जुस in the potential and the benedictive moods, and optionally so in the imperfect and after the sign स् of the aorist; confer, compareP,III. 4. 82, 83, 84, 108, 109, 110, 111, 112: (2) a conventional term for अव्यय (indeclinable) used in the Jainendra Vyakaraha.
ñ(1)the nasal (fifth consonant) of the palatal class of consonants possessed of the properties नादानुप्रदान, घोष, कण्टसंवृतत्व, अल्पप्राण and अानुनासिक्य; (2) mute letter, characterized by which an affix signifies वृद्धि for the preceding vowel; ञ् of a taddhita affix, however, signifies वृद्धि for the first vowel of the word to which the affix is added; (3) a mute letter added to a root at the end to signify that the root takes verb-endings of both the padas.
ñia mute syllable prefixed to a root in the Dhatuptha of Panini' signifying the addition of the affix त (क्त) to the root, in the sense of the present time; exempli gratia, for example क्ष्विण्णः, धृष्ट: et cetera, and others; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. III. 2.187.
ñit(1)an afix marked with the mute letter ञ्; causing the substitution of vrddhi for the preceding vowel and acute accent for the first vowel of the word to which it is added, but, causing vrddhi for the first vowel of the word to which it is added in case the affix is a taddhita affix. affix: confer, compare P.VII.2, 115, 116, 117; (2) a root marked with the consonant ञ् , taking verb-endings of both the Parasmaipada and the Atmanepada kinds; exempli gratia, for example करोति, कुरुते, बिभर्ति, बिभृते, क्रीणाति, क्रीणीते elc.; confer, compare स्वरितञितः कत्राभिप्राये, क्रियाफले P.I.3.72.
ñīta root marked with the mute syllable ञि prefixed to it, signifying the addition of the affix क्त in the present tense. See ञि.
ñyataddhita affix य signifying the substitution of vrddhi as also the acute accent for the first vowel of the word to which it is addedition It is added (1) to words headed by प्रगदिन् in the four senses termed वंतुरर्थ exempli gratia, for exampleप्रागृद्यम्, शारद्यम् et cetera, and others;confer, compareP.IV. 2.80; (2).to the word गम्भीर and अव्ययीभाव compounds in the sense of present there', exempli gratia, for example गाम्भीर्यम् , पारिमुख्यम् et cetera, and others confer, compare P.IV.3.58, 59 (3) to the word विदूर exempli gratia, for example वैदुर्य; confer, compare P. IV.3.84;.(4) to the words headed by शण्डिक in the sense of 'domicile of', exempli gratia, for example शाण्डिक्यः ; confer, compare P. IV.3.92; (5) to the words छन्दोग, औक्थिक, नट et cetera, and others in the sense of duty (धर्म) or scripture (अाम्नाय) e. g. छान्दोग्यम् , औविथक्यम् नाट्यम् et cetera, and others; confer, compare P. IV. 3.129; (6) to the word गृहपति in the sense of ’associated with'; exempli gratia, for example गार्हपत्यः (अग्निः);confer, compareP.IV.4.90;(7) to the words ऋषभ and उपानह् ; confer, compare P. V.1.14; .(8) to the words अनन्त, आवसथ et cetera, and others,confer, compare P. V.4.23; (9) to the word अतिथि; confer, compare P.V.4.26; and (10) to the words in the sense of पूग(wandering tribes for earning money), as also to the words meaning व्रात (kinds of tribes) as also to words ending with the affix च्फञ् under certain conditions; confer, compare P.V.3. 112, 113.
ñyaṅtaddhita affix. affix in the sense of 'a descendant' added to words beginning with अा, ऐ, ओ or ending with इ, as also to the words कौसल and अजाद् provided they mean a country and a Ksatriya too; exempli gratia, for example सौवीर्यः, आवन्त्यः, कौन्त्यः कौसल्यः, अाजाद्यः; confer, compare P. IV.1.171.
ñyaṭtaddhita affix. affix य .causing वृद्धि to the first vowel of the word to which it is added and the addition of ई ( ङीप् ) in the sense of feminine gender, added to words meaning warrior tribes of the Vahika country but not Brahmanas or Ksatriyas. exempli gratia, for example क्षौद्रक्यः, क्षौद्रक्री et cetera, and others; cf P. V. 3. 114.
ñyuṭkrt affix added to the root वह् in Vedic Literature preceded by the words कव्य, पुरीष, पुरीष्य or हव्य, exempli gratia, for example कव्यवाहनः, पुरीषवाहनः, हव्यवाहनः confer, compare P. III,2.65, 66.. .
the first consonant of the lingual class ( टवर्ग ) possessed of the properties श्वासानुप्रदान, अघोष, विवृतकण्ठत्व and अल्पप्राणत्व. When prefixed or affixed to an affix as an indicatory letter, it signifies the addition of the feminine. affix ङीप् ( ई ); confer, compare P. IV. 1.15, When added to the conjugational affixes ( लकार ) it shows that in the Atmanepada the vowel of the last syllable is changed to ए. confer, compare P. III. 4.79. When added to an augment ( अागम ), it shows that the augment marked with it is to be prefixed and not to be affixed; e. g. नुट्, तुट् et cetera, and others; cf P. I. 1.46.
ṭa(1)the consonant ट्, the vowel अ being added for facility of utterance; confer, compare अकारो व्यञ्जनानाम्, Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.I. 21; (2) short term, (प्रत्याहार) standing for टवगे or the lingual class of consonants, found used mostly in the Pratisakhya works; confer, compare RT. 13, Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.I. 64, Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.I. 27: (3) taddhita affix. affix ( अ ) added to the word फल्गुनी in the sense ' तत्र जातः' e. g. फल्गुनी, confer, compare P. IV. 3.34, Vart. 2; (4) krt affix ( अ ) added to the root चर्, सृ and कृ under certain conditions; e. g. कुरुचर:, अग्रेसुर:, यशस्करी ( विद्या ) दिवाकरः, वेिभकरः कर्मकरः et cetera, and others confer, compare P. III. 2.16-23.
ṭakkrt affix अ, not admitting गुण or वृद्धि to the preceding vowel and causing ङीप् in the feminine ( by P.IV. 1.15), added to the roots गा, पा and हन् under certain conditions; e. g. समग;, सुरापः, पतिघ्नी et cetera, and others; confer, compare P. IV. 2.8, 52, 53, 54, 55.
ṭācase ending of the third case (तृतीया) singular. number; confer, compare P. IV.1.2,
ṭāṅshort term for affixes beginning with टाप् in P. IV. 1.4 and ending with ष्यङ् in P. IV. 1.78: confer, compare टाङिति प्रत्याहारग्रहणम् । टापः प्रभृति आ ष्यङो ङकारात् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I. 2.48 V. 2.
ṭāpfeminine affix अा added to masculine nouns ending in अ by the rule अजाद्यतष्टाप् IV. 1.4 excepting those nouns where any other affix prescribed by subsequent rules becomes applicable.
ṭitmarked or characterized by the mute letter ट्. For the significance of the addition of ट्, see ट्.
ṭu(1)mute syllable टु prefixed to roots to signify the addition of the affix अथुच् in the sense of verbal activity; e. g. वेपथुः, श्वयथु:, confer, compare P.III. 3.89; (2) the class of lingual consonants ट्, ठ्, ड्, ढ् and ण्; cf चुटू P. I. 3.7.
ṭyaṇtaddhita affix. affix य, causing वृद्धि for the initial vowel and the addition of the feminine. affix ई, applied to the word सोम in the sense of 'having that as a deity,' e. g. सौम्यं हविः, सौमी ऋक्: confer, compare P.IV. 2.30.
ṭayultaddhita affix. affix added in the same way as टयु a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page., making only a difference in the accent. When the affix टयुल् is added, the acute accent is given to the last vowel of the word preceding the affix.
ṭlañtaddhita affix. affix ल, causing vrddhi for the initial vowel of the word to which it is added and also the addition of the feminine.affix ई,applied to the word शमी in the sense of 'विकार,' e. g. शामीली स्रुक्; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. IV. 3.142.
ṭhthe second consonant of the lingual class possessed of the properties श्वासानुप्रदान, अघोष, विवृतकण्टत्व and महाप्राणत्व. For the syllable ठ at the beginning of taddhita affixes, the syllable इक is substituted; if however the affix (beginning with ठ ) follows upon a word ending in इस्, उस्, उ, ऋ, लृ and त् then क is added instead of इक; e. g. धानुष्क:, औदश्वित्कः et cetera, and others; confer, compare टस्येकः, इसुसुक्तान्तात् कः, P. VII. 3.50, 51. Some scholars say that इक् and क् are substituted for ठ् by the sutras quoted a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.; confer, compare KS. on VII. 3.50.
ṭhaka very common taddhita affix. affix इक, or क in case it is added to words ending in इस् , उस् , उ, ऋ, ल् and त् according to P. VII. 3. 51, causing the substitution of vrddhi for the first vowel of the word to which it is addedition ठक् is added to (1) रेवती and other words in the sense of descendant ( अपत्य ) e. g. रैवतिकः:, दाण्डग्राहिकः, गार्गिकः, भागवित्तिकः यामुन्दायनिकः, confer, compare P. IV. 1.146-149; (2) to the words लाक्षा,रोचना et cetera, and others in the sense of 'dyed in', e. g. लाक्षिकम्, रौचनिकम् ; confer, compare P. IV. 2.2; (3) to the words दधि and उदश्वित् in the sense of संस्कृत 'made better ', e. g. दाधिकम् , औदश्वित्कम् ( क instead of इक substituted for टक् ), confer, compare P. IV.2. 18, 19; (4) to the words अाग्रहायुणी, अश्वत्थ et cetera, and others; confer, compare P. IV. 2. 22, 23; (5) to words expressive of inanimate objects, to the words हस्ति and धेनु, as also to the words केश and अश्व in the sense of 'multitude '; confer, compare P. IV. 2. 47, 48; (6) to the words क्रतु, उक्थ and words ending in सूत्र, वसन्त et cetera, and others, in the sense of 'students of' ( तदधीते तद्वेद ), confer, compare P. IV. 2.59, 60, 63; (7) to the words कुमुद and others as also to शर्करा as a चातुरर्थिक affix; confer, compare P. IV. 2.80, 84; (8) to the words कन्था, भवत् and वर्षा in the Saisika senses; confer, compare P. IV. 2.102, 115, IV. 3.18; (9) to the words उपजानु and others in the sense 'generally present '; confer, compare P. IV. 3. 40; (10) to the words consisting of two syllables, and the words ऋक्, ब्राह्मण et cetera, and othersin the sense of 'explanatory literary work'; confer, compare P. IV.3.72: ( 11) to words meaning 'sources of income ' in the sense of 'accruing from’; confer, compare P. IV. 3.75; (12) to words denoting inanimate things excepting words showing time or place in the sense of ' भक्ति ', cf P. IV. 8.96; and (13) to the words हल् and सीर in the sense of 'belonging to', confer, compare P. IV. 3.124. The taddhita affix. affix ठक् is added as a general termination, excepting in such cases where other affixes are prescribed, in specified senses like 'तेन दीव्यति, ' 'तेन खनति,' 'तेन संस्कृतम्' et cetera, and others; cf P. IV. 4.1-75, as also to words हल, सीर, कथा, विकथा, वितण्डा et cetera, and others in specified senses, confer, compare P. IV.4. 81, 102 ठक् is also added as a general taddhita affix. affix or अधिकारविहितप्रत्यय, in various specified senses, as prescribed by P. V.1.19-63,and to the words उदर, अयःशूल,दण्ड, अजिन, अङ्गुली, मण्डल, et cetera, and others and to the word एकशाला, in the prescribed senses; confer, compare P. V. 2.67,76, V. 3.108,109; while, without making any change in sense it is added to अनुगादिन् , विनय, समय, उपाय ( औपयिक being the word formed), अकस्मात्, कथंचित्; (confer, compareआकस्मिक काथंचित्क), समूह,विशेष, अत्यय and others, and to the word वाक् in the sense of 'expressed'; confer, compare P. V. 4.13, 34, 35. The feminine. affix ङीप् ( ई ) is added to words ending in the affix टक् to form feminine. bases.
ṭhakpādaa popular name given to the fourth pada of the fourth adhyaya of Panini's Astadhyayi.The pada begins with the rule प्राग्वहतेष्ठक् P.IV.4.1 prescribing the taddhita affix ठक् in the senses prescribed in rules be. ginning with the next rule ' तेन दीव्यति खनति जयति जितम् ' and ending with the rule 'निकटे वसति' P.IV.4.73.
ṭhañtaddhita affix. affix इक or क (by P.VII.3.51) causing Vrddhi and acute accent for the first vowel of the word to which it is added, applied (1) to महृाराज, प्रोष्ठपद and क्वाचिन् in the specifieditionsenses, confer, compare P. IV.2.35, 4l e. g. माहृाराजिक, प्रौष्ठपदिक et cetera, and others; (2) to words काशि, चेदि, संज्ञा and others, along with ञिठ, e. g. काशिकी, काशिका, also with ञिठ to words denoting villages in the Vahika country exempli gratia, for example शाकलिकी शाकलिका; as also to words ending in उ forming names of countries in all the Saisika senses confer, compare P. IV.2.116-120; (3) to compound words having a word showing direction as their first member, to words denoting time, as also to the words शरद्, निशा and प्रदोष in the Saisika senses; cf P. IV.3.6, 7, 1115; (4) to the words वर्षा (1n Vedic Literature), and to हेमन्त and वसन्त in the Saisika senses; confer, compare P.IV.3.1921; (5) to संवत्सर, अाग्रहायणी, words having अन्तः as the first member, to the word ग्राम preceded by परि or अनु, to multisyllabic words having their last vowel accented acute, to words denoting sacrifices, to words forming names of sages, to words ending in ऋ and to the word महाराज in the specific senses which are mentioned; confer, compare P. IV.3.50, 60, 61, 67, 68, 69, 78, 79, 97; (6) to the words गोपुच्छ, श्वगण, आक्रन्द, लवण, परश्वध, compound words having a multisyllabic words as their first member, and to the words गुड et cetera, and others in the specified senses;confer, compareP.IV.4.6,II, 38, 52, 58, 64, 103;(7) to any word as a general taddhita affix. affix (अधिकारविहित), unless any other affix has been specified in the specified senses ' तेन क्रीतम् ' ' तस्य निमित्तम्' ... ' तदर्हम्' mentioned in the section of sutras V. 1. 18. to 117; (8) to the words अय:शूल, दण्ड, अजिन, compound words having एक or गो as their first member as also to the words निष्कशत and निष्कसहस्र; confer, compare P.V.2.76, 118,119.
ṭhantaddhita affix. affix इक or क (according to P. VII.3.51), causing the addition of आ, and not ई,..for forming the feminine base, applied (1) to the word नौ and words with two syllables in the sense of 'crossing' or 'swimming' over; confer, compare P.IV.4. 7; exempli gratia, for example नाविकः नाविका, बाहुकः बाहुक्रा; (2) to the words वस्र, क्रय, and विक्रय and optionally with छ to अायुघ in the sense of maintaining (तेन जीवति) ; confer, compare P. IV. 4.13, 14; (3) to the word प्रतिपथ, words ending with अगार, to the word शत, to words showing completion ( पूरणवाचिन् ), to the words अर्ध, भाग, वस्त्र, द्रव्य, षण्मास and. श्राद्ध in specified senses; confer, compare P. IV 4.42, 70, V. 1.21, 48, 49, 51, 84, V. 2, 85, and 109; (4) to words ending in अ as also to the words headed by व्रीहि, and optionally with the affix इल्च् to तुन्द and with the affix व to केशin the sense of मतुप्(possession); cf P.V. 2. 115, 116, 117 and 109.
ṭhitmarked with the mute letter ठ्. There is no affix or word marked with mute ठ् (at the end) in Panini's grammar, but to avoid certain technical difficulties, the Mahabhasyakara has proposed mute ठ् instead of 'ट् in the' case of the affix इट् of the first person. singular. perf Atm. and ऊठ् prescribed as Samprasarana substitute by P. VI. 4.132 e: g. प्रष्ठौहः, प्रष्ठौहा; confer, compare M.Bh. on III.4.79 and VI.4.19.
(1)third letter of the lingual class of consonants possessed of the properties नादानुप्रदान, घोष, संवृतकण्ठत्व, and अल्पप्राण; (2) mute letter applied to affixes by Panini to show the elision of the टि part (confer, compare P. 1. 1.64.) of the preceding word viz. the penultimate vowel and the consonant or consonants following it; cf, टेः ; ( लोप: डिति प्रत्यये परे ) VI.4.143. The syllable ति of विंशति is also elided before an affix markwith the mute letter ड्.
ḍa(1)krt affix अ applied to the root गम् preceded by अन्त, अत्यन्त, अध्वन् et cetera, and others, as also to the roots हन् and जन् under certain conditions; confer, compare P. III.2,48,49, 50, 97-101 and to the root क्रन् to form the word नक्र confer, compare P. VI. 3.75; (2) taddhita affix. affix अ applied to words ending in दशन्, words ending in शत् and the word विंशति in the sense of 'more than' exempli gratia, for example एकादशं शतम्, एकत्रिंशम्, एकविंशम्, cf P.V.2.45, 46.
ḍaṭtaddhita affix. अ, affix in the sense of पूरण applied to a numeral to form an ordinal numeral; e. g. एकादशः, त्रयोदशः, confer, compare P.V.2.48
ḍatamactaddhita affix. affix अतम in the sense of determination or selection of one out of many, applied to the pronouns किं, यत् and तत्; e,g. कतमः confer, compare P.V.3.93,as also to एक according to Eastern Grammarians; exempli gratia, for example एकतमो भवतां देवदत्तः; confer, compare P.V.3.94.
ḍatitaddhita affix. affix अति affixed to the word किम् to show number or measurement; exempli gratia, for example कति ब्राह्मणाः, confer, compare P.V.2.41. The words ending with the affix डति are termed संख्या and षट् for purposes of declension et cetera, and others; confer, compare P.I.1.23,25
ḍāverb-ending आ, causing elision of the penultimate vowel as also of the following consonant, substituted for the 3rd person. sing, affix तिप् of the first future; exempli gratia, for example क्रर्ता ; confer, compare P.II.4.85; (2) case ending आ substituted in Vedic Literature for any case affix as noticed in Vedic usages; exempli gratia, for example नाभा पृथिव्याम्: confer, compare P. VII.1.39
ḍāctaddhita affix. affix आ applied to dissyllabic words, used as imitation of sounds, or used as onomatopoetic, when connected with the root कृ or भू or अम्. The word to which डाच् is applied becomes generally doubled; c. g पटपटाकरोति, पटपटाभवति पटपटास्यात्; confer, compare P.V.4.57. The affix डाच् is also applied to द्वितीय, तृतीय, to compound words formed of a numeral and the word गुण, as also to the words सपत्र, निष्पत्र, सुख, प्रिच etc when these words are connected with the root कृ;exempli gratia, for example द्वितीयाकरोति,तृतीया करोति, द्विगुणाकरोति, सपत्राकरोति, सुखाकरोति et cetera, and others; confer, compareP.V.4. 58 to 67.
ḍāpfeminine. affix आ added optionally to words ending in मन् and to Bahuvrihi compounds ending in अन् to show feminine gender, the words remaining as they are when the optional affix डाप् is not applied; exempli gratia, for example दामा, सीमा, सुपर्वा; confer, compare P. IV. I.l l, 12, 13.
ḍit(l)possessed of the mute letter ड् added for the purpose of the elision of डि (last vowel and the consonant or consonants after it) of the preceding word. See ड.
ḍinitaddhita affix. affix applied to अवान्तरदीक्षा, तिलव्रत et cetera, and others in the sense of चरति (observing); exempli gratia, for example तिलव्रती, confer, compare P. V. 1. 94 Vart 3; (2) applied in the sense of 'having as measurement'applied to numeral words ending in शत् or शिन् and the word विंशति; exempli gratia, for example त्रिंशिनो मासाः, विंशिनोङ्गिरसः; confer, compare Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. V. 2.37.
ḍiyāccase affix इया for Inst.singular.seen in Vedic Literature: exempli gratia, for example सुक्षेत्रिया, सुगात्रिया; cf Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.VII.1.39.
ḍupactad affix उप added to the word कुतू in the sense of diminutive: exempli gratia, for example कुतुपः a small oil-pot ( कुतू );confer, compare V.3. 89.
ḍumsunUnadi affix उम्स् added to the root पा to form the word पुंंस्: confer, compare पांते डेम्सुन् Unadi Sutra IV.177.
ḍyācase affix या seen in vedic Literature e. g. अनुष्ठथा उच्च्यावयतात् confer, compare S. K. on P. VII. 1.39.
ḍvita root marked with the mute syllable डु (at the beginning) to Signify the application of the krt affix त्रि which is invariably followed by the addition of म ( मप् ), in the sense of 'achieved by' e. g. पक्त्रिमम् ; कृत्रिमम्: confer, compare P. III. 3.88 ; and IV. 4.20.
(1)fourth consonant of the lingual class of consonants possessed of the properties नादानुप्रदान, घोष, संवृतकण्ठत्व and महृाप्राणत्व; (2) the consonant ढ् which is elided when followed by ढ् and the preceding vowel is lengthened; e. g. गाढा, confer, compare P. VIII. 3.13 and VI. 3.111 ; (3) substitute ढ् for ह् at the end of a पद, or, if followed by any consonant excepting a semivowel or a nasal excepting in the cases of roots beginning with द् or the roots द्रुह्, मुह् et cetera, and others as also वह् and अाह् confer, compare P. VIII. 2.31, 32, 33, 34; (4) ढ् at the beginning of a taddhita affix. affix which has got एय् substituted for it; confer, compare गाङ्गेय:, वैनतेयः ; confer, compare P. V. 3.102.
ḍhataddhita affix. affix ढ (1) applied to the word सभा in the sense of 'fit for' ( तत्र साधुः ) in Vedic literature;. e. g. सभेयः; confer, compare IV. 4.106; (2) applied to the word शिला in the sense of इव; e. g. शिलेयं दधि ; confer, compare P. V. 3.102; (3) common term ( ढ ) for the affixes ढक्, ढञ् and ढ also, after the application of which the affix ङीप् (ई) is , added in the sense of feminine gender; confer, compare P. IV. 1.15.
ḍhaktaddhita affix. affix एय causing the substitution of vrddhi for the first vowel of the word to which it is addedition ढक् is added in the sense of अपत्य (descendant) (I) to words ending in feminine affixes, to words ending in the vowel इ, excepting इ of the taddhita affix. afix इञ्, to words of the class headed by शुभ्र, to words मण्डूक, विकर्ण, कुषीतक, भ्रू , .कुलटा and to words headed by कल्याणी which get इन substituted for its !ast vowel; exempli gratia, for example सौपर्णेयः, दात्तेयः शौभ्रेय, माण्डूकेयः, , वैकर्णेयः, कौषीतकेयः, भ्रौवेयः,.कौलटेयः, काल्याणिनेयः etc: cf Kas on P. IV.I. 1 19-127; (2) to the words पितृष्वसृ and मातृष्वसृ with the vowel ऋ elided and to the word . दुष्कुल, पितृष्वसेय:, मातृष्वसेयः, दौष्कुलेयः, confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. IV. 1.133, 134, 142: (3) to the word कलि in the sense of Sama, to the word अग्नि in the sense of 'dedicated to a deity' ( सास्य देवता ) as also to the words नदी, मही, वाराणसी, श्रावस्ती and others in the Saisika senses; e. g. कालेयं साम, आग्नेयः, नादेयम् महियम् et cetera, and others cf Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. IV. 2.8, 33, 97: (4) to the words तूदी, धुर् , कपि, ज्ञाति, व्रीहि and शालि in the specified senses; confer, compare P. IV. 3.94, IV. 4.77, V. 1.127, V. 2.2.
ḍhañtaddhita affix. affix एय causing Vrddhi substituted for the first vowel of the base and the addition of the feminine. affix ङीप् (इ), applied (1) to words meaning quadrupeds and words in the class of words headed by गृष्टि in the sense of अपत्य; e. g. कामण्डलेयः, गार्ष्टेयः, हालेय:, बालेयः etc; confer, compare P. IV.1.135,136; (2) to the word क्षीर, words of the class headed by सखि, the words कोश, दृति, कुक्षि, कलशि, अस्ति, अहि,ग्रीवा,वर्मती,एणी,पथि,अतिथि,वसति,स्वपति, पुरुष, छदि्स, उपधि, बलि, परिखा, and वस्ति in the various senses mentioned in connection with these words; exempli gratia, for exampleक्षेरेयः, .साखेयम् कौशेयम् दात्र्ऱेयम् , कौक्षेयम् etc, cf Kas'. on P. IV. 2. 20, 80, IV. 3. 42, 56, 57, 94, 159, IV.4.1 04, V.1.10,13,17, V.3.101.
ḍhraktaddhita affix. affix एर ( एय् + र ) applied in the sense of offspring to the word गोधा and optionally with ढक् to words meaning persons having a bodily defect or a low social status; e. g. गौधेरः, काणेरः दासेरः; काणेयः, दासेयः, cf Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. IV. 1. 129, 131.
(1)fifth consonant of the lingual class of consonants possessed of the properties, नादानुप्रदान, घोष, संवृतकण्ठत्व, अल्पप्राण and अानुनासिक्यः (2) the mute letter ण् indicating the substitution of vrddhi ( confer, compare P. VII. 2. 115-117) when attached to affixes; (3) the consonant ण् at the beginning of roots which is changed into न्; the roots, having ण् at the beginning changeable to न्, being called णोपदेशः (4) ण् as a substitute for न् following the letters ऋ, ॠ, र्, and ष् directly, or with the intervention of consonants of the guttural and labial classes, but occurring in the same word, Such a substitution of ण् for न् is called णत्व; confer, compare P.VIII.4. I-39. For णत्व in Vedic Literature; confer, compare Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.)V.20-28, T.Pr.VII.1-12. V.Pr.III.84-88;(5) the consonant ण् added as an augment to a vowel at the beginning of a word when it follows the consonant ण् at the end of the previous word; confer, compare P. VIII. 3. 32. In the Vedic Pratisakhyas this augment ण् is added to the preceding ण् and looked upon as a part of the previous word.
ṇa(1)krt affix अ, added optionally to the roots headed by ज्वल् and ending with कस् in the first conjugation (see ज्वलिति a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.) in the sense of agent, and necessarily to the root श्यै, roots ending with अा and the roots व्यध्, आस्रु, संस्रु, इ with अति, सो with अव, हृ with अव, लिह्, श्लिष् and श्वस्, to the roots दु and नी without any prefix and optionally to ग्रह्: e. g. ज्वालः or ज्वलः, अवश्यायः, दायः, धायः, व्याधः, अास्त्रावः, संस्त्रवः, अत्यायः, अवसायः, अवहार:, लेहः, श्लेष:, श्वास:, दावः, नाय:, ग्रहः or ग्राहः: ; in the case of the root ग्रह् the affix ण is applied by ब्यवस्थितविभाषा, the word ग्रहः meaning a planet and the word ग्राहः meaning a crocodile; cf Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. III. 1.140-143; (2) krt affix अ in the sense of verbal activity ( भाव ) applied along with the affix अप् to the root अद् with नि; exempli gratia, for exampleन्यादः निघसः; confer, compare P. III.3.60; (3) krt affix ण prescribed by the Varttikakara after the roots तन्, शील्. काम, भक्ष् and चर् with आ; confer, compare P.III.1.140 Vart 1, and III. 2.l Vart. 7; (4) taddhita affix. affix अ in the sense of अपत्य added along with टक् also, to a word referring to a female descendant (गेीत्रस्त्री) if the resultant word indicates censure ; e. g. गार्भ्यः गार्गिकः confer, compare P. IV.1.147, 150; (5) taddhita affix. affix अ in the sense of अपत्य added also with the affix फिञ्, to the word फाण्टाहृति: (6) taddhita affix. affix अ in the sense of 'a game' added to a word meaning 'an instrument in the game'; exempli gratia, for example दाण्डा, मौष्टा: confer, compare P. IV.2.57: {7) taddhita affix. affix अ added to the word छत्त्र and others in the sense of 'habituated to' exempli gratia, for example छात्र:, शैक्षः, पौरोहः चौर:: confer, compare P.IV. 4.62: (8) taddhita affix. affix अ added to the words अन्न, भक्त, सर्व, पथिन् , यथाकथाच, प्रज्ञा, श्रद्धा, अर्चा, वृत्तिं and अरण्य in the senses specified with respect to each ; exempli gratia, for example आन्नः (मनुष्यः) भाक्तः ( शालिः ), सार्वे ( सर्वस्मै हितम् ), पान्थः, याथाकथाचं (कार्यम्), प्राज्ञः or प्रज्ञावान् , श्राद्धः or श्रद्धावान् , अार्चः or अर्चावान् , घार्त्तः or वृत्तिमान् and अारण्याः ( सुमनसः ); confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.IV. 4.85, 100, V.1.10, 76, 98, V.2.101 and IV.2.104 Varttika.
ṇatvacerebralization; lingualization ; the substitution of ण् for न् under certain conditions; confer, compare P. VIII.4. 1-39. See ण.
ṇamulkrt affix अम्, causing vrddhi to the final vowel or to the penultimate अ, (!) added to any root in the sense of the infinitive in Vedic Literature when the connected root is शक्: exempli gratia, for example अग्निं वै देवा विभाजं नाशक्नुवन; cf Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. III. 4.14; (2) added to any root to show frequency of a past action, when the root form ending with णमुल् is repeated to convey the sense of frequency : exempli gratia, for example भोजं भोजं व्रजति, पायंपायं व्रजति, confer, compare Kas on P. III. 4.22; (3) added to a root showing past action and preceded by the word अग्रे, प्रथम or पूर्व, optionally along with the krt affix क्त्वा; exempli gratia, for example अग्रेभोजं or अग्रे भुक्त्वा व्रजति; cf Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.III.4.24;(4) added in general to a root specified in P.III.4.25 to 64, showing a subordinate action and having the same subject as the root showing the main action, provided the root to which णमुल् is added is preceded by an antecedent or connected word, such as स्वादुम् or अन्यथा or एवम् or any other given in Panini's rules; confer, compare P. III.4.26 to III.4.64; exempli gratia, for example स्वादुंकारं भुङ्क्ते, अन्यथाकारं भुङ्क्ते, एवंकारं भुङ्क्ते, ब्राह्मणवेदं भोजयति, यावज्जीवमधीते, समूलकाषं कषति, समूलघातं हन्ति, तैलपेषं पिनष्टि, अजकनाशं नष्टः et cetera, and others; cf Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.III.4.26-64. When णमुल् is added to the roots कष्, पिष्, हन् and others mentioned in P. III. 4. 34 to 45, the same root is repeated to show the principal action. The word ending in णमुल् has the acute accent (उदात) on the first vowel (confer, compare P.VI.I. 94) or on the vowel preceding the affix; confer, compare P. VI.1.193.
ṇalpersonal ending अ substituted for तिप् and मिप् in लिट् or the perfect, and in the case of विद् and ,ब्रू in लट् or the present tense. tense optionally; cf P. III, 4. 82, 83, 84. The affix णल् on account of being marked by the mute letter ण् causes vrddhi to the preceding vowel; the vrddhi is, however, optional in the case of the 1st person. ( मिप् ) confer, compare P. VII.1.91. अौ is substituted for णल् after roots ending in आ; confer, compare P. VII .1.34.
ṇiṅaffix इ causing vrddhi, prescribed after the root कम् , the base ending in इ i. e. कामि being called a root: confer, compare P. III. 1.30, 32. The mute letter ङ् signifies that the root कामि is to take only the Atmanepada affixes e. g. कामयते, अचीकमत.
ṇicaffix इ causing Vrddhi (1) applied to roots of the tenth conjugation ( चुरादिगण ) such as चुर् , चित् et cetera, and others e. g. चोरयति, चोरयते; confer, compare P. III. 1.25: (2) applied to any root to form a causal base from it, e. g. भावयति from भू, गमयति from गम्: confer, compare हेतुमति च P. III. 1.26: (3) applied to the words मुण्ड, मिश्र etc, in the sense of making, doing, practising et cetera, and others ( करण ); e. g. मुण्डं करोति मुण्डयति, व्रतयति (eats something or avoids it as an observance), हलं गृह्नाति हलयति et cetera, and others; cf P. III. 1.21; (4) applied to the words सत्य, पाश, रूप, वीणा, तूल, श्लोक, सेना, लोमन, त्वच्, वर्मन्, वर्ण and चूर्ण in the various senses given by the Varttikakara to form denominative roots ending in इ: e. g. सत्यापयति, पाशयति etc; confer, compare P. III.1.25: (5) applied to suitable words in the sense of composing, exempli gratia, for example सूत्रं करोति सूत्रयति, et cetera, and others: (6)applied to a verbal noun ( कृदन्त ) in the sense of 'narrating' with the omission of the krt affix and the karaka of the verbal activity put in a suitable case; e. g. कंसं घातयति for the sentence कंसवधमाचष्टे or बलिं बन्धयति for बलिबन्धमाचष्टे,or रात्रिं विवासयति, सूर्यमुद्गमयति, पुष्येण योजयति et cetera, and others: confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. III. 1.26. Roots ending in णिच् (णिजन्त) take the conjugational endings of both the Parasmaipada and the, Atmanepada: confer, compare णिचश्च P. I. 3.74. They have perfect forms by the addition of अाम् with a suitable form of the perfect tense of the root कृ, भू or अस् placed after अाम्, the word ending with अाम् and the verbal form after it being looked upon as separate words e. g. कारयां चकार कारयां चक्रे et cetera, and others; cf P. III.1.35, 40. They have the aorist form, with the substitution of the Vikarana चङ् ( अ ) for च्लि before which the root is reduplicated; e. g. अचीकरत्, अबीभवत् et cetera, and others: confer, compare P.III.1.48, VI.1.11 as also VII.4.93-97.
ṇijantaroots ending in णिच्; the term is generally applied to causal bases of roots. See णिच्.
ṇit(1)an affix with the mute con.sonant ण् added to it to signify the substitution of vrddhi for the preceding vowel or for the penultimate अ or for the first vowel of the word if the affix applied is a taddhita affix; confer, compare P. VII.2.115117: e. g. अण्, ण, उण्, णि et cetera, and others: (2) an affix not actually marked with the mute letter ण् but looked upon as such for the purpose of vrddhi; e. g. the Sarvanamasthana affixes after the words गो and सखि, confer, compare P. VII.1.90, 92.
ṇinikrt affix इन् signifying vrddhi (1) applied to the roots headed by ग्रह् ( i. e. the roots ग्रह्, उद्वस्, स्था et cetera, and others ) in the sense of an agent;e. g. ग्राही, उद्वासी, स्थायी. confer, compare P. III.1.134; (2) applied to the root हन् preceded by the word कुमार or शीर्ष as उपपद: e. g. कुमारघाती, शीर्षघाती, confer, compare P. III.2.51: (3) applied to any root preceded by a substantive as upapada in the sense of habit, or when compari son or vow or frequency of action is conveyed, or to the root मन्, with a substantive as उपपद e. gउष्णभोजी, शीतभोजी, उष्ट्रकोशी, ध्वाङ्क्षरावीः स्थण्डिलशायी, अश्राद्धभोजीः क्षीरपायिण उशीनराः; सौवीरपायिणो वाह्रीकाः: दर्शनीयमानी, शोभनीयमानी, confer, compare P. III.2.78-82; (4) applied to the root यज् preceded by a word referring to the करण of यागफल as also to the root हन् preceded by a word forming the object ( कर्मन् ) of the root हन् , the words so formed referring to the past tense: e. g. अग्निष्टो याजी, पितृव्याघाती, confer, compare P. III 2.85, 86; (5) applied to a root when the word so formed refers to a kind of necessary activity or to a debtor; confer, compare अवश्यंकारी, शतंदायी, सहस्रदायी confer, compare P. III.4. 169-170: (6) tad-affix इन् , causing vrddhi for the first vowel, applied to the words काश्यप and कौशिक referring to ancient sages named so, as also to words which are the names of the pupils of कलापि or of वैशम्पायन, as also to the words शुनक, वाजसनेय et cetera, and others in the sense of 'students learning what has been traditionally spoken by those sages' e. g. काश्यपिनः, ताण्डिनः, हरिद्रविणः शौनकिनः, वाजसनेयिनः et cetera, and others; cf P. IV.3, 103 104, 106; (7) applied to words forming the names of ancient sages who are the speakers of ancient Brahmana works in the sense of 'pupils studying those works' as also to words forming the names of sages who composed old Kalpa works in the sense of those कल्प works; e. g. भाल्लविनः, एतरेयिणः । पैङ्गी कल्पः अरुणपराजी कल्पः; cf Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. IV. 3.105: (8) applied to the words पाराशर्य and शिलालिन् in the sense of 'students reading the Bhiksusutras (of पाराशार्य) and the Nata sutras ( of शिलालिन् ) respectively; e. g. पाराशरिणो भिक्षव:, शैलालिनो नटाः: cf Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. IV.3.110.
ṇuṭaugment ण्, prefixed to the initial vowel when it follows upon the consonant ण् at the end of the preceding word; e. g. सुगण्णीशः for सुगण् + ईशः cf P. VIII. 3.82.
ṇyataddhita affix.affix य (l) applied in the sense of 'descendant' as also in a few other senses, mentioned in rules from IV. 1. 92 to IV.3.168, applied to the words दिति, अदिति, अादित्य and word; with पति as the उत्तरपद in a compound, c. g. दैत्यः, आदित्यः, प्राजापत्यम् et cetera, and others confer, compareKāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana.on P. IV.1 84; (2) applied in the sense of a descendant ( अपत्य ) applied to the words कुरु, गर्ग, रथकार, कवि, मति, दर्भ et cetera, and others, e.gकौरव्यः, गार्ग्यः et cetera, and others confer, compare Kas:, on P. IV. I.15I ; (3) applied in the sense of अपत्य or descendant to words ending in सेना,to the word लक्षण and to words in the sense of artisans, e.gकारिषेण्यः, लाक्षण्यः, तान्तुवाय्यः, कौम्भकार्यः; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.IV.1.152; (4) applied in the Catuararthika senses to the words संकाश, काम्पिल्थ, कश्मीर et cetera, and others, exempli gratia, for example साङ्काश्यम्, काम्पिल्यम् et cetera, and others; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. IV. 2.80; (5) applied to the word परिषद् and optionally with the affix ठक् to the word सेना in the specified senses; e. g. परिषदं समवैति, परिषदि साधुर्वा पारिषद्य्ः, सेनां समवेति सैन्यः सैनिको वा; confer, compare Kas on P. IV. 44, 45, 101 ; (6) applied as a taddhita affix. affix called ' tadraja , to the word कुरु and words beginning with न e. g. कौरव्यः नैषध्यः; confer, compare Kas on P. IV. 1.172; कुरवः, निषधाः et cetera, and others are the nominative case. plural formanuscript.
ṇyatkrtya affix य which causes vrddhi and which has the circurmflex accent (1) applied to a root ending with ऋ or any consonant to form the pot. passive voice.participle: e. g. कार्यम्, हार्यम् , वाक्यम् et cetera, and others confer, compare Kas on P. IV. 1.124; (2) applied to a root ending in उ if a necessity of the activity is to be indicated, e. g. अवश्यलाव्यम् , अवश्यपान्यम् confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. IV. 1.125; (3) taddhita affix. affix य applied to the word षण्मास्र optionally with यप् and ठञ् affixes: e. g. षाण्मास्यः, षण्मास्यः, षाण्मासिकः; cf Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. V. 1.84.
ṇvikrt, affix ण्वि i. e. zero, causing vrddhi, applied to the root भज् and to सह् and वह् in Vedic Literature if the root is preceded by any preposition ( उपसर्ग ) or a substantive as the upapada ; e. g. अर्द्धभाक्, प्रभाक्, तुराषाट् , दित्यवाट्; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. III, 2.62, 63, 64.
ṇvinkrt affix व् or zero, seen applied in Vedic Literature to the root वह् preceded by श्वेत, to शंस् preceded by उक्थ, to दाश् preceded by पुरस् and to यज् preceded by अव. e. g. श्वेतवा इन्द्रः, उक्थशा यजमानः, पुरोडाः, अवयाः; cf Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. III. 2.71, 72.
ṇvul(1)a very general krt affix अक, causing vrddhi and acute accent to the vowel preceding the affix, applied to a root optionally with तृ (i. e. तृच् ) in the sense of an agent e. g कारकः हारकः also कर्ता, हर्ता ; Cf P. III. 1.33; (2) krt. affix अक applied optionally with the affix तुम् to a root when it refers to an action for which another action is mentioned by the principal verb; e. g. भोजको व्रजति or भोक्तुं व्रजति; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on तुमुन्ण्वुलौ क्रियायां क्रियार्थायाम्; P. III. 3.10; (3) krt affix अक, necessarily accompanied by the feminine. affix अा added to it, applied to a root if the sense given by the word so formed is the name of a disease or a proper noun or a narration or a query ; e. g. प्रवाहिका, प्रच्छर्दिका, शालभञ्जिका, तालभञ्जिका, कारिक, confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. III. 3.108, 109, 110.
tthe first consonant of the dental class of consonants which has got the properties श्वासानुप्रदान, अघोष, विवृतकण्ठत्व and अल्पप्राणत्व. When used as a mute letter by Panini, त् signifies the Svarita accent of the vowel of that affix or so, which is marked with it: e. g. कार्यम्, हार्यम्, पयस्यम् confer, compare P. VI.1.185. When appied to a vowel at its end, त् signifies the vowel of that grade only, possessed by such of its varieties which require the same time for their utterance as the vowel marked with त् , e. g. अात् stands for अा with any of the three accents as also pure or nasalised; अात् does not include अं or अ 3 confer, compare तपरस्तत्कालस्य P. I. 1. 70. The use of the indicatory mute त् for the a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page. purpose is seen also in the Pratis akhya works; confer, compare Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.I. 114 Ṛktantra Prātiśākhya. 234.
t(1)personal ending of the third pers singular. Atm: confer, compare P. III. 4.78, which is changed to ते in the perfect tense and omitted after the substitute चिण् for च्लि in the aorist; confer, compare P.VI.4.04: (2) personal ending substituted for the affix थ of the Paras. 2nd person. plural in the imperative, imperfect, potential, benedictive, aorist and conditional for which, तात्, तन and थन are substituted in Vedic Literature, and also for हि in case a repetition of an action is meant; confer, compare P. III. 4. 85, 10l as also VII. 1. 44, 45 and III. 4. 2-5. cf P. III. 4. 85 and III. 4. 10I ; (3) taddhita affix. affix त applied to the words कम् and शम् e. g. कन्तः, शन्त:, confer, compare P. V. 2. 138: (4) taddhita affix. affix त applied to दशत् when दशत् is changed to श; confer, compare दशानां दशतां शभावः तश्च प्रत्ययः । दश दाशतः परिमाणमस्य संधस्य शतम्, Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. V. l. 59; (5) .general term for the affix क्त of the past passive voice. part, in popular use: (6) a technical term for the past participle affixes (त) क्त and तवत् ( क्तवतु ) called निष्ठा by Panini; confer, compare P. I.1.26; the term त is used for निष्ठI in the Jainendra Vyakararna.
takārathe consonant त्, the vowel अ and the word कार being placed after it for facility in understanding; confer, compare Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.I. 17, 21.
taṅ(1)a short term used for the nine personal endings of the Atmanepada viz. त,अाताम्...महिङ् which are themselves termed Atmanepada; confer, compare तङानौ अात्मनेपदम् P. 1.4. 100 (2) the personal-ending त of the 2nd person. plural (substituted for थ by III.4 101) looked upon as तङ् sometimes, when it is lengthened in the Vedic Literature: confer, compare तङिति थादेशस्य ङित्त्वपक्षे ग्रहणम् । भरता जातवेदसम् Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. VI. 3. 133.
tattvacandraname of a commentary on Ramacandra's Prakriyakaumudi.
tattvabodhinīname of the well-known commentary on Bhattoji's Siddhnta Kaumudi written by his pupil Jnanendrasarasvati at Benares. Out of the several commentaries on the Siddhantakaumudi, the Tattvabodhini is looked upon as the most authoritative and at the same time very scholarly.
tattvādarśaname of a commentary on the Paribhasendusekhara written by M. M. Vasudev Shastri Abhyankar in 1889 A. D. The commentary is more critical than explanatory,wherein the author has given the purpose and the gist of the important Paribhasas and has brought out clearly the differences between the school of Bhattoji and the school of Nagesa in several important matters.
tatpuruṣaname of an important kind of compound words similar to the compound word तत्पुरुष id est, that is ( तस्य पुरुषः ), and hence chosen as the name of such compounds by ancient grammarians before Panini. Panini has not defined the term with a view to including such compounds as would be covered by the definition. He has mentioned the term तत्पुरुष in II.1.22 as Adhikara and on its strength directed that all compounds mentioned or prescribed thereafter upto Sutra II.2.22 be called तत्पुरुष. No definite number of the sub-divisions of तत्पुरुष is given;but from the nature of compounds included in the तत्पुरुष-अधिकार, the sub-divisions विभक्तितत्पुरुष confer, compare P.II.1.24 to 48, समानाधिकरणतत्पुरुष confer, compare P. II.1.49 to 72 (called by the name कर्मधारय; acc.to P.I. 2. 42), संख्यातत्पुरुष (called द्विगु by P.II.1.52), अवयत्रतत्पुरुष or एकदेशितत्पुरुषं confer, compare P.II.2.1-3, ब्यधिकरणतत्पुरुष confer, compare P. II 2.5, नञ्तत्पुरुष confer, compare P.II.2.6, उपपदतत्पुरुष confer, compare P. II.2.19, प्रादितत्पुरुष confer, compare P.II.2 18 and णमुल्तत्पुरुष confer, compareP.II.2.20 are found mentioned in the commentary literature on standard classical works. Besides these, a peculiar tatpurusa compound mentioned by'Panini in II.1.72, is popularly called मयूरव्यंसकादिसमास. Panini has defined only two out of these varieties viz. द्विगु as संख्यापूर्वो द्विगुः P.II. 1.23, and कर्मधारय as तत्पुरुषः समानाधिकरणः कर्मधारयः P. I.2.42. The Mahabhasyakara has described तत्पुरुष as उत्तरपदार्थप्रधानस्तत्पुरुषः: confer, compare M.Bh. on II.1.6, II.1.20, II.1.49, et cetera, and others, and as a consequence it follows that the gender of the tatpurusa compound word is that of the last member of the compound; confer, compare परवल्लिङ द्वन्द्वतत्पुरुषयोः P. II.4. 26; cf also तत्पुरुषश्चापि कः परवल्लिङं प्रयोजयति । यः पूर्वपदार्थप्रधानः एकदेशिसमासः अर्धपिप्पलीति । यो ह्युत्तरपदार्थप्रधानो दैवकृतं तस्य परवल्लिङ्गम्, Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on II.4.26. Sometimes, the compound gets a gender different from that of the last word; confer, compare P.II.4.19-31, The tatpurusa compound is optional as generally all compounds are, depending as they do upon the desire of the speaker. Some tatpurusa compounds such as the प्रादितत्पुरुष or उपपदतत्पुरुष are called नित्य and hence their constitutent words, with the case affixes applied to them, are not noticed separately; confer, compare P.II.2.18,19, In some cases अ as a compound-ending ( समासान्त ) is added: exempli gratia, for example राजघुरा, नान्दीपुरम् ; confer, compare P. V.4.74; in some cases अच् ( अ ) is added: confer, compare P.V-4 75 o 87: while in some other cases टच् ( अ ) is added, the mute letter ट् signifying the addition of ङीप् ( ई) in the feminine gender; confer, compareP.V.4. 91-1 12. For details See p.p. 270-273 Mahabhasya Vol.VII published by the D. E. Society, Poona.
tadantavidhia peculiar feature in the interpretation of the rules of Panini, laid down by the author of the Sutras himself by virtue of which an adjectival word, qualifying its principal word, does not denote itself, but something ending with it also; confer, compare येन विधिस्तदन्तस्य P.I.1.72.This feature is principally noticed in the case of general words or adhikaras which are put in a particular rule, but which Occur in a large number of subsequent rules; for instance, the word प्रातिपदिकात्, put in P.IV.1.1, is valid in every rule upto the end of chapter V and the words अतः, उतः, यञः et cetera, and others mean अदन्ताद् , उदन्तात् , यञन्तात् et cetera, and others Similarly the words धातोः (P.III.1.91) and अङ्गस्य (P.VI. 4.1 ) occurring in a number of subsequent rules have the adjectival words to them, which are mentioned in subsequent rules, denoting not only those words,but words ending with them. In a large number of cases this feature of तदन्तविधि is not desirable, as it, goes against arriving at the desired forms, and exceptions deduced from Panini's rules are laid down by the Varttikakara and later grammarians; confer, compare Par. Sek. Pari. 16,23, 31 : also Mahabhasya on P.I.1.72.
tadguṇībhūtaliterally made subordinated to (the principal factor); completely included so as to form a portion The word is used in connection with augments which, when added to.a word are completely included in that word, and, in fact, form a part of the word: cf यदागमास्तद्भुणीभूतास्तद्ग्रहणेन गृह्यन्ते Par. Sek. Pari. 11.
taddhitaa term of the ancient prePaninian grammarians used by Panini just like सर्वनामन् or अव्यय without giving any specific definition of it. The term occurs in the Nirukta of Yaska and the Vajasaneyi-Pratisakhya ; confer, compare अथ तद्वितसमासेषु एकपर्वसु चानेकपर्वसु पूर्वे पूर्वमपरमपरं प्रविभज्य निर्ब्रूयात् । द्ण्डय्ः पुरुषः । दण्डमर्हतीति वा, दण्डेन संपद्यते इति वा Nirukta of Yāska.II.2; also confer, compare तिङ्कृत्तद्धितचतुथ्यसमासाः इाब्दमयम् Vaj Prati.I. 27. It is to be noted that the word तद्वित is used by the ancient grammarians in the sense of a word derived from a substantive ( प्रातिपादक ) by the application of suffixes like अ, यत् et cetera, and others, and not in the sense of words derived from roots by affixes like अन, ति et cetera, and others which were termed नामकरण, as possibly contrasted with the word ताद्धित used by Yaska in II. 5. Panini has used the word तद्धित not for words, but for the suffixes which are added to form such words at all places (e. g. in I. 1.38, IV.1.17, 76, VI.1.61 et cetera, and others). in fact, he has begun the enumeration of taddhita affixes with the rule तद्धिता: (P.IV.1. 76) by putting the term तद्धित for affixes such as ति, ष्यङ्, अण् et cetera, and others which are mentioned thereafter. In his rule कृत्तद्धितसमासाश्च and in the Varttika समासकृत्तद्धिताव्यय(I.4.1Vart. 41) which are similar to V.Pr.1. 27 quoted a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page. the word तद्धित appears to be actually used for words derived from nouns by secondary affixes, along with the word कृत् which also means words derived from roots, although commentators have explained there the terms कृत् and तद्धित for कृदन्त and तद्धितान्त. The term तद्वित is evidently echoed in the Sutra तस्मै हितम् which, although it is not the first Sutra there were possibly long lists of secondary nouns with the senses of secondary suffixes, and तद्धित was perhaps,the first sense given there. The number of taddhita suffixes mentioned by Panini is quite a large one; there are in fact 1110 rules given in the taddhita section covering almost two Adhyayas viz. from P. IV. 1.76 to the end of the fifth Adhyaya. The main sub-divisions of taddhita affixes mentioned by commentators are, Apatyadyarthaka (IV. 1.92 to 178), Raktadyarthaka (IV.2.1 to 91), Saisika {IV.2. 92 to IV.3.133), Pragdivyatiya (IV. 3 134 to 168), Pragvahatiya (IV.4.1 to IV.4.74), Pragghitiya (IV.4.75 to IV.4.109), Arhiya (V.1.1 to 71),Thanadhikarastha (V. 1.72 to V. 1.1.114), Bhavakarmarthaka (V. 1.115 to V.1.136), Pancamika (V. 2.1 to V. 2.93), Matvarthiya (V. 2.94 to V. 2. 140), Vibhaktisamjaaka (V. 3.1 to V. 3.26) and Svarthika (V. 3.27 to V. 4.160). The samasanta affixes (V.4.68 to V.4.160) can be included in the Svarthika affixes.
tana(1)personal ending for त of the second person. plural Parasmaipada in the imperative in Vedic Literature e.g जुजुष्टन for जुषत confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. On P VII. 1.45; (2) taddhita affix. affixes टयु and टयुल् id est, that is अन which, with the augment त्, in effect becomes तन exempli gratia, for example सायंतन, चिरंतन, et cetera, and others: confer, compare P. IV. 3.23.
tanap'Personal ending for त of the Second Pers.. plural e. g. दधातन for धत्त. Cf Kas on P. VII. 1.45. See तन.
tap(1)taddhita affix. affix त added to the words पर्वन् and मरुत् to form the words पर्वतः and मरुत्तः; confer, compare P. V. 2.122 Vart. 10; (2) personal ending in Vedic Literature substitutcd for त of the imperative second. person. plural e. g. श्रुणोत ग्रावाणः confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. VII. 1.45.
taparakaraṇaaddition of the mute letter त् after a vowel to signify the inclusion of only such varieties of the vowel as take the same time for their utterance as the vowel marked with त्; confer, compare P. I. 1.70. See त्.
tampersonal ending तम् substituted for थम् in the imperative imperfeminine. potential, benedictive, aorist and conditional; confer, compare P. III. 4.85, 101
tamaṭtaddhita affix. affix तम added optionally with the affix डट् ( अ ) to विंशति, त्रिंशत् et cetera, and others, as also to words ending with them, in the sense of पूरण (completion), and necessarily (नित्यं) to the words शत, सहस्र, षष्टि, सप्तति et cetera, and others e. g. एकविंशतितमः एकविंशः, त्रिंशत्तमः, त्रिंशः, शततमः, षष्टितम:, विंशी, त्रिंशी et cetera, and others; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on V. 2.56-58.
taltad, affix त (l) added in the sense of collection (समूह) to the words ग्राम, जन, बन्धु and सहाय and गज also, exempli gratia, for example ग्रामता, जनता et cetera, and others; (2) added in the sense of 'the nature of a thing' ( भाव ) along with the affix त्व optionally, as also optionally along with the affixes इमन्, ष्यञ् et cetera, and others given in P. V. 1.122 to 136; e. g. अश्वत्वम्, अश्वता; अपतित्वम्, अपतिता; पृथुत्वम्, पृथुता, प्रथिमा; शुक्लता, शुक्लत्वम्, शौक्ल्यम्, शुक्लिमा; et cetera, and others, cf Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.V.1.119 to 136. Words ending with the affix तल् are always declined in the feminine gender with the feminine. affix अा ( टाप् ) added to then; confer, compare तलन्तः (शब्दः स्त्रियाम् ), Linganusasana 17.
taveṅkrt affix तवे for the infinitive affix तुम् in Vedic Literature: exempli gratia, for example दशमे मासि सूतवे; confer, compare P.III 4.9.
tavenkrt affix तवे for the infinitive affix तुम् in Vedic Literature; exempli gratia, for exampleगन्तवे, कर्तवे, हर्तवे; confer, compare P.III. 4.9.
tavai(1)krt affix तवै for the infinitive affix तुम् in Vedic Literature. The affix तवै has a peculiarity of accent, namely that the word ending in तवै has got both the initial and ending vowels accented acute (उदात्त); exempli gratia, for example सोममिन्द्राय पातवै, हर्षसे दातवा उ; confer, compare P.III.4.9; and VI. 1.200; (2) krtya affix in Vedic Literature, exempli gratia, for example परिघातवै for परिघातव्यम्; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. III. 4.14.
tas(1)personal ending of the third person. dual Parasmaipada substituted technically for ल् (लकार); cf P. III.4.78; (2) taddhita affix. affix तस् ( तसि or तसिल् ). See तसि and तसिल्.
tasi(1)taddhita affix.affix तस् showing direction by means of a thing exempli gratia, for example वृक्षमूलतः, हिमवत्तः; confer, compare Kas on P.IV.3.114,115; (2) taddhita affix.affix तस् applied in the sense of the ablative case. case and substituted for the ablative case. case affix: exempli gratia, for example ग्रामतः अागच्छति, चोरतो विभेति; sometimes the affix is applied instead of the instrumental or the genitive case also. e. g. वृत्ततः न व्यथते for वृत्तेन न व्यथते; देवा अर्जुनतः अभवन्, for अर्जुनस्य पक्षे अभवन् confer, compare Kas, on P.V.4.44-49.
(1)a technical term for the genitive case affix used in the Jainendra Vyakarana; (2) the taddhita affix. affix तल् which is popularly called ता as the nouns ending in तल् id est, that is त are declined in the feminine. gender with the feminine. affix अा added to them.
tāt(1)the same as तातङ् substituted for तु and हि of the imperative second. and third singular. Parasmaipada; confer, compare P.VII.1.35; (2) substitute तात् for त of the imperative 2nd plural in Vedic Literature; exempli gratia, for example गात्रं गात्रमस्यानूनं कृणुतात् confer, compare Kas on P.VII.1.44.
tātiltaddhita affix. affix ताति in the very sense of the word to which it is applied occurring in Vedic Literature after the words सर्व and देव, as also after शिव, शम् and अरिष्ट in the sense of 'bringing about' and in the sense of भाव (presence) after the same words शिव, शम् and अरिष्ट; exempli gratia, for example सर्वतातिः, देवतातिः, शिवतातिः et cetera, and others confer, compare P.IV.4.142-144.
tāthābhāvyaname given to the grave (अनुदात्त) vowel which is अवग्रह id est, that is which occurs at the end of the first member of a compound and which is placed between two acute vowels id est, that is is preceded by and followed by an acute vowel; exempli gratia, for example तनूSनप्त्रे, तनूSनपत्: confer, compare उदाद्यन्तो न्यवग्रहस्ताथाभाव्यः । V.Pr.I.120. The tathabhavya vowel is recited as a kampa ( कम्प ) ; confer, compare तथा चोक्तमौज्जिहायनकैर्माध्यन्दिनमतानुसारिभिः'अवग्रहो यदा नीच उच्चयॊर्मध्यतः क्वचित् । ताथाभाव्यो भवेत्कम्पस्तनूनप्त्रे निदर्शनम्'. Some Vedic scholars hold the view that the ताथाभाव्य vowel is not a grave ( अनुदात्त ) vowel, but it is a kind of स्वरित or circumflex vowel. Strictly according to Panini "an anudatta following upon an udatta becomes Svarita": confer, compare P.VIII.4.66, V.Pr. IV. 1.138: cf also R.Pr.III. 16.
tāmpersonal ending substituted for तस् of the 3rd person. dual in the imperative, imperfect, potential, benedictive, aorist and conditional; confer, compare P. III.4.85, 101.
tārānāthacalled तर्कवाचस्पति; a Bengali modern Sanskrit scholar and grammarian of the nineteenth century who has written a commentary called Sarala on the Siddhanta Kaumudi. He has edited many important Sanskrit works consisting of many kosas.
tāsconjugational sign or Vikarana (तासि) added to a root in the first future before the personal endings which become accented grave (अनुदात्त); confer, compare P.VI.1.186; it has the augment इ prefixed, if the root, to which it is added, is सेट्, confer, compare P. VI. 4. 62.
ti(1)personal ending तिप् of the 3rd person. singular.; (2) common term for the krt affixes क्तिन् and क्तिच् as also for the unadi affix ति; see क्तिन् and क्तिच्; (3) feminine. affix ति added to the word युवन्. e. g. युवतिः confer, compare P. IV. 1.77; (4) taddhita affix. affix ति as found in the words पङ्क्ति and विंशति confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.V.1.59; (5) taddhita affix. affix added to the word पक्ष in the sense of 'a root,' and to the words कम् and शम् in the sense of possession (मत्वर्थे ); exempli gratia, for example पक्षतिः, कन्तिः, शान्तिः, confer, compare Kas, on P. V.2.25, 138; (6) a technical term for the term गति in Panini's grammar, confer, compare उपसर्गाः क्रियायोगे; गतिश्च P. 1.4.59, 60. The term ति for गति is used in the Jainendra Vyakarana.
tiṅ(1)a brief term (प्रत्याहार) for the 18 personal endings. Out of these eighteen personal endings, which are common for all tenses and moods, the first nine तिप्, तस् et cetera, and others all called Parasmaipada, while the other nine त, अाताम् et cetera, and others are named Atmanepada and तङ् also; confer, compare तङानावात्मनेपदम्; (2) a verbal form called also अाख्यातक; confer, compare तिङ् खलु अाख्यातका भवान्ति । पचति पठति । V.Pr.I.27.
tiṅanta(1)a word ending in तिङ्; a Verb; (2) a popular name given to the section which deals with verbs in books on grammar as contrasted with the term सुबन्त which is used for the section dealing with nouns.
tiṅarthasenses possessed by the personal endings of verbs, viz. कारक ( कर्ता or कर्म ) संख्या and काल. For details see Vaiyakaranabhusanasara. तिङ्निघात the grave accent for the whole word (सर्वेनिघात्) generally possessed by a verbal form when it is preceded by a word form which is not a verb; confer, compare तिङतिङ: P. VIII. 1.28.
titan affix to which the mute indicatory letter त् is added signifying the circumflex accent of that affix; e. g. the affixes यत्, ण्यत् et cetera, and others; confer, compare P. VI. 1.185.
tipthe personal ending of the 3rd person. singular. substituted for ल (लकार) in the Parasmaipada. For substitutes for तिप् in special cases, see P. VI.1.68, III.4.82, 83, 84.
tirumallaa southern writer of the commentary named सुमनोरमा on the Siddhānta Kaumudi of Bhattoji Diksita.
tiltaddhita affix. affix ति added in Vedic Literature to the word वृक when superior quality is meant, exempli gratia, for example वृकतिः confer, compare P. V. 4.41.
tīyataddhita affix. affix तीय in the sense of पूरण added to the words द्वि and त्रि before which त्रि is changed into तृ. e, g. द्वितीयः, तृतीयः confer, compare P. V. 2.54, 55; the taddhita affix. affix अन् ( अ ) is added to the words ending in तीय to mean a section e. g. द्वितीयॊ भागः confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. V. 3.48.
tu(1)short term ( प्रत्याहार ) for the dental consonants त्, थ्, द्, ध् and न् confer, compare P. I. 1.69; (2) personal-ending substituted for ति in the 2nd person. imper. singular. Parasmaipada confer, compare P. III, 4.86; (3) taddhita affix. affix तु in the sense of possession added in Vedic Literature to कम् and शम् e. g. क्रन्तुः, शन्तु: confer, compare P. V. 2.138; (4) unadi affix तु ( तुन्) prescribed by the rule सितनिगमिमसिसच्यविधाञ्कुशिभ्यस्तुन् ( Unadi Sitra I.69 ) before which the augment इ is not added exempli gratia, for example सेतुः सक्तुः et cetera, and others confer, compare P. VII. 2.9
tugvidhia rule prescribing the addition of the augment त् ; e. g. नलोपः सुप्स्वरसंज्ञातुग्विधिषु कृति P. VIII. 2. 2 See तुक्.
tununadi affix तु, added to the roots सि, तन् , गम् et cetera, and others See तु (4).
tṛ(1)substitute prescribed for the last vowel of the word अर्वन् so as to make it declinable like words marked with the mute letter ऋ; (2) common term for the krt affixes तृन् and तृच् prescribed in the sense of the agent of a verbal activity; the taddhita affix. affixes ईयस्, and इष्ठ are seen placed after words ending in तृ in Vedic Literature before which the affix तृ is elided; exempli gratia, for example करिष्ठः, दोहीयसी; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. V. 3.59.
tṛjantaa word ending in the affix तृच् and hence getting the guna vowel (i. e. अ ) substituted for the final vowel ऋ before the Sarvanamasthana (i. e. the first five) case affixes; confer, compare तृजन्त आदेशॊ भविष्यति, Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on VII. 1.96.
tṛjvadbhāvatreatment of a word as ending with the affix तृच् although, in fact, it does not so end; e. g. the word क्रोष्टु; confer, compare तृज्वत्क्रोष्टु:, P. VII. 1.95 ; confer, compare also तृज्वद्भावस्यावकाशः क्रोष्ट्रा क्रोष्टुना; M.Bh, on VII. 1.95 Vart. 10.
tṛtīyāthe third case; affixes of the third case ( instrumental case or तृतीयाविभक्ति ) which are placed (1) after nouns in the sense of an instrument or an agent provided the agent is not expressed by the personal-ending of the root; e. g. देवदत्तेन कृतम्, परशुना छिनत्ति: confer, compare P. III. 3.18; (2) after nouns connected with सह्, nouns meaning defective limbs, nouns forming the object of ज्ञा with सम् as also nouns meaning हेतु or a thing capable of produc ing a result: e. g. पुत्रेण सहागतः, अक्ष्णा काणः, मात्रा संजानीते, विद्यया यशः; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. II.3.19,23; (3) optionally with the ablative after nouns meaning quality, and optionally with the genitive after pronouns in the sense of हेतु, when the word हेतु is actually used e. g. पाण्डित्येन मुक्तः or पाण्डित्यान्मुक्त:; केन हेतुना or कस्य हेतोर्वसति; it is observed by the Varttikakara that when the word हेतु or its synonym is used in a sentence, a pronoun is put in any case in apposition to that word id est, that is हेतु or its synonym e.g, केन निमित्तेन, किं निमित्तम् et cetera, and others; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. II. 3. 25, 27; (4) optionally after nouns connected with the words पृथक्, विना, नाना, after the words स्तोक, अल्प, as also after दूर, अन्तिक and their synonyms; exempli gratia, for example पृथग्देवदत्तेन et cetera, and others स्तोकेन मुक्तः, दूरेण ग्रामस्य, केशैः प्रसितः; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.II.3.32, 33, 35, 44; (5) optionally with the locative case after nouns meaning constellation when the taddhita affix. affix after them has been elided; exempli gratia, for example पुष्येण संप्रयातोस्मि श्रवणे पुनरागतः Mahabharata; confer, compare P.II.3.45; (6) optionally with the genitive case after words connected with तुल्य or its synonyms; exempli gratia, for exampleतुल्यो देवदत्तेन, तुल्यो देवदत्तस्य; confer, compare P. II.3.72.
tṛn(1)krt affix तृ with the acute accent on the first vowel of the word formed by its application, applied to any root in the sense of 'an agent' provided the agent is habituated to do a thing, or has his nature to do it, or does it well; exempli gratia, for example वदिता जनापवादान् , मुण्डयितारः श्राविष्ठायना -भवन्ति वधूमूढाम् , कर्ता कटम्; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. III.2.135; words ending with तृन् govern the noun connected with them in the accusative case; (2) the term तृन् , used as a short term ( प्रत्याहार ) standing for krt affixes beginning with those prescribed by the rule लटः शतृशानचौ (P.III.2.124) and ending with the affix तृन् (in P.III.3.69); confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.III.4.69.
taittirīyaprātiśākhyacalled also कृष्णयजुःप्रातिशाख्य and hence representing possibly all the different branches or Sakhas of the कृष्णयजुर्वेद, which is not attributed definitely to a particular author but is supposed to have been revised from time to time and taught by various acaryas who were the followers of the Taittiriya Sakha.The work is divided into two main parts, each of which is further divided into twelve sections called adhyayas, and discusses the various topics such as letters and their properties, accents, euphonic changes and the like, just as the other Pratisakhya works. It is believed that Vararuci, Mahiseya and Atreya wrote Bhasyas on the Taittiriya Pratisakhya, but at present, only two important commentary works on it are available(a) the 'Tribhasyaratna', based upon the three Bhasyas mentioned a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page. as the title shows, written by Somayarya and (b) the 'Vaidikabharana' written by Gopalayajvan. For details see Introduction to 'Taittiriya Pratisakhya' edition Govt Oriental Library Series, Mysore.
tolappadīkṣitaa southern grammarian who has written a gloss called प्रकाश on the Siddhāntakaumudi of Bhattoji Diksita.
tosunkrt affix तोस् in the sense of the infinitive ( तुम् ) seen in Vedic Literature; e. g. ईश्वरोभिचरितो:. The word ending with तोसुन् becomes an indeclinable.
tnataddhita affix. affix त्न added to the words चिर, परुंत् and परारि showing time, as also to the word प्रग in Vedic Literature: e. g. चिरत्नम्, परुत्नम् , परारित्नम्, प्रत्नम् ( where ग is elided ); confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. IV. 3. 23.
tya(1)taddhita affix. affix त्य standing for त्यक् and त्यप् which see below; (2) a technical term for प्रत्यय ( a suffix or a termination ) in the Jainendra Vyakarana.
traa common term for the krt affixes ष्ट्रन् and इत्र (P.III. 2. 181-186) in case the vowel इ of इत्र is looked upon as equivalent to an augment, as also for the unadi affix ष्ट्रन् and the taddhita affix. affixes त्र and त्रल् (P. IV. 2.51 and V.3.10); the tad, affix त्र is added in the sense of समूह or collection to the word गॊ, exempli gratia, for example गोत्रा; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.IV.2.51.
trātaddhita affix. affix त्रा in the sense of something donated, as also to the words देव, मनुष्य, पुरुष, पुरु and मर्त्य ending in the accusative or the locative case; e. g. व्राह्मणत्रा करोति, देवत्रा वसतिः confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. V.4.55,56. ’There is avagraha before the taddhita affix. affix त्रा. देवत्रेति देवSत्रा्; confer, compare V.Pr. V.9.
trikaliterally triad; a term used in the Mahabhasya in connection with the Vibhakti affixes id est, that is case endings and personal endings which are in groups of three; confer, compare त्रिकं पुनर्विभक्तिसंज्ञम् M.Bh. on P.I.1,38: confer, compare also कस्यचिदेव त्रिकस्य प्रथमसंज्ञा स्यात् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). om P.I.4.101 ; confer, compare also Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on II.2.23, V.1.52, V.1.58.
tripādīterm usually used in connection with the last three Padas (ch. VIII. 2, VIII. 3 and VIII. 4) of Panini’s Ashtadhyayi, the rules in which are not valid by convention to rules in the first seven chapters and a quarter, as also a later rule in which (the Tripadi) is not valid to an earlier one; confer, compare पूर्वत्रासिद्धम् P. VIII.2.1; (2) name of a critical treatise on Panini's grammar ("The Tripadi") written by Dr. H. E. Buiskool recently.
tribhāṣyaratnaname of a commentary on the Taittiriya Pratisakhya written by Somayarya. The commentary is said to have been based on the three Bhasya works attributed to the three ancient Vedic scholarsVararuci, Mahiseya and Atreya.
tvatkrt affix त्च in the sense of the potential passive voice. participle. in Vedic Literature; e. g. कर्त्वे हविः । कर्तव्यम्: also confer, compare Kas, on P.III. 4.14;cf also कृतानि या च कर्त्वा R. V. IX. 47.2.
th(1)personal-ending of the 2nd person. plural Parasmaipada,substituted for the ल् of the ten lakara affixes; (2) substitute ( थल् ) for the 2nd pers singular. personal ending सिप् in. the perfect tense: (3) unadi affix ( थक् ) added to the roots पा, तॄ, तुद् et cetera, and others e. g. पीथः, तीर्थः, et cetera, and others; cf unadi sutra II. 7; (4) unadi affix ( क्थन् ) | added to the roots हन्, कुष् ,नी et cetera, and others; e. g, हथः, कुष्टं, नीथः et cetera, and others cf unadi sutra II. 2: (5) unadi affix (थन्) added to the roots उष्, कुष्, गा and ऋ, e. g. ओष्ठः, कोष्ठम् et cetera, and others cf unadi sutra_II. 4; (6) a technical term for the term अभ्यस्त or the reduplicated wording of Panini ( confer, compare उभे अभ्यस्तम् ) P. VI. 1. 5, used in the Jainendra Vyakarana.
thaṭtaddhita affix. affix थ added to numerals ending in न् in Vedic Literature; e. g. पञ्चथ, सप्तथः, पर्णमयानि पञ्चथानि भवन्ति: confer, compare P. V. 2.50.
thanapersonal-ending थन substituted for त of the 2nd person. plural of the imperative Parasmaipada in Vedic ' Literature, e. g. यदिष्ठन for यदिच्छथ: confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. VII. 1.45.
thamutaddhita affix. affix थम् in the sense of प्रकार (manner) added to the pronouns इदम्, and किम्, the words ending in थम् becoming indeclinables; e. g, इत्थम्, कथम् confer, compare P. V. 3.24, 25.
thalpersonal ending थ substituted for सिप् of the 2nd person.singular. Parasmaipada in the perfect tense as also in the present tense in specific cases; confer, compare P. III. 4.82, 88,84.
thaspersonal ending of the 2nd person. dual Parasmaipada, which is substituted for ल् of the lakara affixes; confer, compare P. III 4.78.
thā(1)taddhita affix. affix था in the sense of question or reason ( हेतु ) added to the pronoun किम् in Vedic Literature; exempli gratia, for example कथा देवा आसन् ; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.V.3.26; (2) taddhita affix. affix था (थाल् according to Panini) which gets caesura or avagraha after प्रत्न, पूर्व, विश्व, इम and ऋतु; exempli gratia, for example प्रत्नथेतिं प्रत्नSथा, पूर्वथेति पूर्वऽथा et cetera, and others: confer, compare Vij. Pr.V.12: (3) taddhita affix. affix थाल् in the sense of इव added to the words प्रत्न, पूर्व, विश्व and इम in Vedic Literature, exempli gratia, for example तं प्रत्नथा पूर्वथा विश्वथेमथा; cf Kas, on P. V.3.111: (4) taddhita affix. affix थाल् in the sense of mannar ( प्रक्रार) added to किन् , pronouns excepting those headed by द्वि, and the word बहु; exempli gratia, for example सर्वथा, confer, compare P V.3.23.
thāspersonal ending of the 2nd person. singular. Atmanepada, substituted for ल् of the lakara affixes.
thīma(THIEME, PAUL)a sound scholar of the present day, well versed in Sanskrit Grammar and Vedic Literature, who has written a critical treatise named "Panini and the Veda."
dthird consonant of the dental class of consonants possessed of the properties नादानुप्रदान, घोष, संवृतकण्ठत्व and अल्पप्राणता;(2) consonant द् substituted for the final letter of nouns ending with the affix वस् as also for the final letter of स्रंस्, ध्वंस् and अनडुह् provided the final letter is at the end of a pada; exempli gratia, for example विद्वद्भयाम् et cetera, and others; cf Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P, VIII. 2.72; (3) consonant द् substituted for the final स् of roots excepting the root.अस्, before the personal ending तिप् of the third person. singular.; e. g. अचकाद् भवान् ; confer, compare P. VIII. 3.93.
dagghaa fault of pronunciation where the letters are uttered indistinct ( अस्पष्ट ).
daṇḍaone of the eight artificial Vedic recitations.
dntyaproduced at the teeth, dental; formed at the teeth by the tip of the tongue; exempli gratia, for example the letters लृ ल् ,स् and तवर्ग; confer, compare लृलसिता दन्ते V.Pr.I.69. According to Panini's grammar लॄ(long) does not exist. According to Taittirya Prtisakhya र् is partly dental and partly lingual; cf T.Pr.II.41, while व् is partly dental and partly labial; confer, compare T.Pr. II.43; confer, compare दन्त्या जिह्वाग्रकरणाः V. Pr.I. 76; confer, compare लुग्वा दुहदिहलिहगुहामात्मनेपदे दन्त्ये P. VII. 3.73.
dayānandasarasvatia brilliant Vedic scholar of the nineteenth century belonging to North India who established on a sound footing the study of the Vedas and Vyakarana and encouraged the study of Kasikavrtti. He has written many books on vedic studies.
daśakaa name given to the treatise on grammar written by व्याघ्रपाद which consisted of 10 chapters; confer, compare दशकं वैयाघ्रपदीयम् Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P V. 1.58. The word also means students reading the work दशक; confer, compare दशका वैयाघ्रपदीया: Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. IV.2.65.
daśagaṇī(1)a section of grammatical treatises dealing with the ten conjugations of roots. e.g the first section of the second part ( उत्तरार्ध ) of the Siddhanta Kaumudi; (2) name of the dhatupatha of Panini which gives ten classes of roots; confer, compare भूवादयो दशगणीपरिपठिता गृह्यन्ते Nyasa on I.3.1.
dākṣāyaṇaname, by which व्याडि, the author of the grammar work संग्रह is referred to. The word दाक्षायण indicates that व्याडि was a descendant of दक्ष, and, as Panini is called दाक्षीपुत्र, critics say that Panini and Vyadi were relatives; confer, compare शोभना खलु दाक्षायणस्य दाक्षायणेन वा संग्रहस्य कृतिः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. II.3.66.
dānīmtaddhita affix. affix called विभक्ति, applied word also means students reading the work दशक; confer, compare दशका वैयाघ्रपदीया: Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. IV.2.65.
daśagaṇī(1)a section of grammatical treatises dealing with the ten conjugations of roots. e.g the first section of the second part ( उत्तरार्ध ) of the Siddhanta Kaumudi; (2) name of the dhatupatha of Panini which gives ten classes of roots; confer, compare भूवादयो दशगणीपरिपठिता गृह्यन्ते Nyasa on I.3.1.
dākṣāyaṇaname, by which व्याडि, the author of the grammar work संग्रह is referred to. The word दाक्षायण indicates that व्याडि was a descendant of दक्ष, and, as Panini is called दाक्षीपुत्र, critics say that Panini and Vyadi were relatives; confer, compare शोभना खलु दाक्षायणस्य दाक्षायणेन वा संग्रहस्य कृतिः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. II.3.66.
duḥśliṣṭaa word, or words whose case affixes can be syntactically connected only with some difficulty; confer, compareबहुव्रीहौ सक्थ्यक्ष्णोः स्वाङ्गात् षच्। स्वाङ्गवाची यः सक्थिशब्दः अक्षिशब्दश्च तदन्ताद् बहुव्रीहेः षच् भवति । सूत्रे तु दुःश्लिष्टविभक्तीनि पदानि Kas, on P. V. 4.I13. .
durgasiṃhathe famous commentator of the Katantra sutras, whose Vrtti on the sutras is the most popular one. It is called , कातन्त्रसूत्रवृत्ति or कातन्तवृत्ति or दौर्गसिंहीवृत्ति , also. A work on Paribhasas named परिभाषावृति, in which Paribhasas are explained and established as based on the Katantra Vyakarana sutras, is attributed to Durgasimha. It is doubtful whether this commentator Durgasimha is the same as Durgacarya, the famous commentator of Yaska's Nirukta. There is a legend that Durgasimha was the brother of Vikramaditya, the founder of the Vikrama Era. Besides the gloss on the Katantra sutras, some grammar works such as a gloss on the unadi sutras, a gloss ( वृत्ति ) on Kalapa-Vyakarana Sutras, a commentary on Karakas named षट्कारकरत्न, Namalinganusasana and Paribhasavrtti are ascribed to Durgasimha. Some scholars believe that the term अमरसिंह was only a title given to Durgasimha for his profound scholarship, and it was Durgasimha who was the author of the well-known work Amarakosa.
durghaṭavṛttiname of a grammar work explaining words which are difficult to derive according to rules of Panini. The work is written in the style of a running commentary on select sutras of Panini, devoted mainly to explain difficult formations. The author of it, Saranadeva, was an eastern grammarian who, as is evident from the number of quotations in his work, was a great scholar of the 12th or the 13th century.
durghaṭavṛttisaṃskaraṇaa grammar work on the formation of difficult words attributed to शर्वरक्षित or सर्वरक्षित.
dṛṣṭaseen in use in Vedic Literature, or Classical Literature, or in the talk of cultured people; said in connection with words which a grammarian tries to explain; confer, compare दृष्टानुविधिश्छन्दसि भवति' Vyadi Pari. Patha 68.
dṛṣṭāpacāradiscrepant, characterized by discrepancy; confer, compare यद्यपि तावदयं पराशब्दो दृष्टापचार उपसर्गश्चानुपसर्गश्च अयं तु खलु विशब्दोऽदृष्टापचार उपसर्ग एव; Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. 1. 3. 19.
devatādvandvaa compound word called द्वन्द्व whose members are names of deities; the peculiarities of this Dvandva compound are (a) that generally there are changes at the end of the first member, by virtue of which it appears similar to a word ending in the dual number, and (b) that both the words retain their original accents.exempli gratia, for example इन्द्रासोमौ, सौमापूषणा, अग्नीषोमाभ्यां, मित्रावरुणाभ्याम् ; for changes, confer, compare P. VI.3.25-31; for accent, confer, compare देवताद्वन्द्वानि चानामन्त्रितानि (द्विरुदात्तानिं) । इन्द्राबृहस्पतिभ्याम्, इन्द्राबृहस्पती इति त्रीणि Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.II.48, 49; confer, compare also देवताद्वन्द्वे च P. VI, 2.141.
devaśarmana grammarian who has written a disquisition on the philosophy of Vyakarana in verse, and added a commentary of his own on it which he has named as समन्वयप्रदीपसंकेत.
deśya(1)taddhita affix. affix in the sense of almost similar; see देशीयर् a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.; (2) (words) current in popular use or language, although not sanctioned by rules of grammar; confer, compare देश्याः सूत्रनिबन्धाः क्रियन्ते M.Bh. on P. V. 3.55: confer, compare देश्या देष्टव्याः साधुत्वेन प्रतिपाद्या:, Kaiyata on V. 3.55; probably Kaiyata had a difficulty in explaining the word देश्य in the old way meaning ' current in use', as many words called bad words, introduced from other languages were current at his time which he was reluctant to term देश्य.
dyotakaindicative, suggestive; not directly capable of expressing the sense by denotation; the nipatas and upasargas are said to be 'dyotaka' and not 'vacaka' by standard grammarians headed by the Varttikakara; confer, compare निपातस्यानर्थकस्यापि प्रातिपदिकत्वम् P.I.2.45 Varttika 12; confer, compare Kaiyata also on the a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.; cf also निपाता द्योतकाः केचित्पृथगर्थाभिधायिनः Vakyapadiya II.194;, गतिवाचकत्वमपि तस्य ( स्थाधातोः ) व्यवस्थाप्यते, उपसर्गस्तु तद्योतक एव commentary on Vakyapadiya II. 190; confer, compare पश्चाच्छ्रोतुर्बोधाय द्योतकोपसर्गसंबन्ध: Par. Sek. on Pari. 50; cf also इह स्वरादयो वाचकाः चादयो द्योतका इति भेदः Bhasa Vr. om P.I.1.37.The Karmapravacaniyas are definitely laid down as dyotaka, confer, compare क्रियाया द्योतको नायं न संबन्धस्य वाचकः । नापि क्रियापदाक्षेपीं संबन्धस्य तु भेदकः Vakyapadiya II.206; the case affixes are said to be any way, 'vacaka' or 'dyotaka'; confer, compare वाचिका द्योतिका वा स्युर्द्वित्त्वादीनां विभक्तयः Vakyapadiya II. 165.
dyotanaconveyance of sense indirectly or by suggestion, and not directly. See द्योतक a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page..
dyotya(sense)conveyed by suggestion indirectly and not directly expressed, as in the case of karmapravacaniyas, the krt affixes and the tad, affixes: confer, compare अनुशब्दो लक्षणे द्योत्ये कर्मप्रवचनीयसंज्ञो भवति Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. I. 4.84.
dravyasubstance, as opposed to गुण property and क्रिया action which exist on dravya. The word सत्त्व is used by Yaska, Panini and other grammarians in a very general sense as something in completed formation or existence as opposed to 'bhava' or kriya or verbal activity, and the word द्रव्य is used by old grammarians as Synonymous with सत्त्व; confer, compare चादयोSसत्वे। चादयो निपातसंज्ञा भवन्ति न चेत्सत्वे वर्तन्ते, confer, compare Kas on P. I. 4.57; confer, compare S.K. also on P. I.4.57. (2)The word द्रव्य is also found used in the sense of an individual object, as opposed to the genus or generic notion ( अाकृति ); confer, compare द्रव्याभिधानं व्याडिः, Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I. 2. 64. Vart. 45.(3)The word द्रव्य is found used in the sense of Sadhana or means in Tait. Prati. confer, compare तत्र शब्दद्रव्याण्युदाहरिष्यामः । शब्दरूपाणि साधनानि वर्णयिष्यामः Tai, Pr. XXII. 8.
dravyapadārthikaa grammarian who maintains that 'dravya' or 'individual object' is the sense of words; confer, compare न ह्याकृतिपदार्थिकस्य द्रव्ये न पदार्थो, द्रव्यपदार्थिकस्य वाकृतिर्न पदार्थः । Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.2.64 Vart. 53. See द्रव्य.
dravyābhidhānadenotation of द्रव्य or individual object as the sense of words as opposed to आकृत्यभिधान i, e. denotation of the general form possessed by objects of the same class; of द्रव्याभिधानं व्याडिः P. I.2.64 Vart. 45. See द्रव्य.
drutaliterally rapid; the vice of rapidity in utterance;a fault of speech especially in connection with the utterance of vowels in Vedic recital when on account of haste the utterance of letters becomes indistinct. confer, compare संदृष्टमेणीकृतमर्धकं द्रुतं विकीर्णमेताः स्वरद्रोषभावनाः । Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). Ahnika 1 vart. 18.
dvikarmakaa term used in connection with roots governing two objects or two words in the accusative case, exempli gratia, for example दुह् in, गां दोग्धि पयः; the term कर्म according to the strict definition of the term कर्तुरीप्सिततमं कर्म or अाप्यं कर्म applies to one of the two, which is called the प्रधानकर्म or the direct object, the other one, which, in fact, is related to the verbal activity by relation of any other karaka or instrument is taken as karmakaraka and hence put in the accusative case. For details see Mahabhasya and Kasika on P.I.4.51. Some roots in their causal formation govern two objects out of which one object is the actual one while the other is the subject of the primitive root. exempli gratia, for example गमयति माणवकं ग्रामम्; बोधयति माणवकं धर्मम्; cf Kas on P.I.4.52. See for details Mahabhasya on P. I. 4.52.
dvikhaṇḍaa compound expression or word separated into two by avagraha in the Padapatha; the word is misstated as दुखण्ड by some vedic reciters.
dviguname of a compound with a numeral as the first member. The compound is looked upon as a subdivision of the Tatpurusa comPoundThe dvigu compound, having collection as its general sense, is declined in the neuter gender and singular number; when it ends in अ the feminine. affix ङी is added generally, e. g. पञ्चपात्रम्, त्रिभुवनम्, पञ्चमूली. The Dvigu comPound also takes place when a karmadharaya compound, having a word denoting a direction or a numeral as its first member, (a) has a taddhita affix. affix added to it exempli gratia, for example पञ्चकपाळः (पुरोडाशः), or (b) has got a word placed after it in a compound e. g. पशञ्चगवधनः or (c) has a collective sense exempli gratia, for example पञ्चपूली; confer, compare तद्वितार्थोत्तरपदसमाहारे च ( P. II.1.51 ) also, cf Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. and S. K. om P.II.1.51,52.
dvitvadoubling, reduplication prescribed for (I) a root in the perfect tense excepting the cases where the affix अाम् is added to the root before the personal ending: exempli gratia, for example बभूव, चकार, ऊर्णुनाव et cetera, and others cf P. VI. 1.1,2; (2) a root before the vikarana affixes सन्, यङ्, श्लु and चङ् e. g. बुभूषति, चेक्रीयते, चर्करीति, जुहोति, अचीकरत् et cetera, and others confer, compare P. VI. 1.9l l ; (3) a word ending in अम् . ( णमुल् ) in the sense of repetition, e. g. स्मारं स्मारं वक्ष्ये, भोजं भोजं व्रजति confer, compare आभीक्ष्ण्ये द्वे भवतः P. VIII. 1.12 Vart. 7; (4) any word (a) in the sense of constant or frequent action, (b) in the sense of repetition, (c) showing reproach, or scorn, or quality in the sense of its incomplete possess-, ion, or (d) in the vocative case at the beginning of a sentence in some specified senses; reduplication is also prescribed for the prepositions परि, प्र, सम्, उप, उद्, उपरि, अधि, अघस् in some specified senses confer, compare P. VIII. 1.1 to 15. A letter excepting हृ and र्, is also repeated, if so desired, when (a) it occurs after the letter ह् or र् , which is preceded by a vowel e g. अर्क्कः अर्द्धम् et cetera, and others cf VIII. 4.46; or when (b) it is preceded by a vowel and followed by a consonant e. g. दद्ध्यत्र, म्द्धवत्र confer, compare P. VIII. 4.47. For details see Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on VIII. 4.46-52. The word द्वित्व is sometimes used in the sense of the dual number; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. I.2.51. The words द्वित्व, द्विर्वचन and द्विरुक्त are generally used as synonymanuscript. Panini generally uses the word द्वे. For द्वित्व in Vedic Literature confer, compare Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) VI. 1.4; Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.XIV. 1-8 V, Pr. IV. 101-118.
dvisvarapossessed of two vowels,dissyllabic; confer, compare न पदे द्विस्वरे नित्यम् Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.XVI. 17. द्विस्स्पृष्ट a term used for an upadhmaniya letter or a phonetic element resulting from a visarga followed by the letter प्, or फ़्. See उपध्मांनीय.The word is also used sometimes for the pronunciation ळ् of ड्, and ळ्ह् of ढ्. See दुःस्पृष्ट.
dvyaca word possessed of two vowels in it; dissyllabic words; the word is frequently used in Panini's Astadhyayi and Patanjali's Mahabhasya, Kasika Vrtti and other works on Panini's grammar.
dharmadefined as ऋषिसंप्रदाय, the traditional practices laid down by the sages for posterity; confer, compareकेवलमृषिसंप्रदायो धर्म इति कृत्वा याज्ञिक्राः शास्त्रेण अनुविदधते Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). I. 1. Ahnika I ; cf also धर्मशास्त्रं in एवं च कृत्वा धर्मशास्त्रं प्रवृत्तम् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I. 2.64, as also धर्मसूत्रकाराः in नैवेश्वर आज्ञापयति नापि धर्मसूत्रकाराः पठन्ति अपवादैरुत्सर्गा बाध्यन्तामिति Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I. l.47; (2) religious merit, confer, compare धर्मोपदेशनमिदं शास्त्रमस्मिन्ननवयवेन शास्त्रार्थः संप्रतीयते , Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. VI. I. 84, cf also ज्ञाने घमै इति चेत्तथाSधर्मः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). I. 1. Ahnika l ; ' 3) property possessed by a thing or a letter or a word. e. g. वर्णधर्म; cf Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. I. 2.29; cf also Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. II. 1, 55, II. 3.33, VIII. 1. 4. confer, compare also Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) III. 8, 13 XIV. 1 et cetera, and others: ( 4 ) the characteristic of being in a substance; in the phrase अयं घटः the dharma viz.घटत्व is predicated of this (इदम्) or, in other words the designation pot ( घटसंज्ञा ) is the predication; the explanation in short, can be given as घटत्ववान् इदंपदार्थः or घटाभिन्नः इदंपदार्थ:
dhamekīrtia Jain scholar called by the name कीर्ति also, who was the author of धातुप्रत्ययपञ्जिक्रा and रूपावतार a well-known treatise on roots; confer, compare बोपदेवमहाग्राहग्रस्तो वामनदिग्गजः । कीर्तेरेव प्रसङ्गेन माधवेन समुद्धृतः । He is believed to have been the first grammarian who arranged the sutras of Panini according to the subject matter.
dharmin(1)a thing possessed of properties, द्रव्यः confer, compare धर्मशब्देन धर्मी भण्यते Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.III.3.77;cf also the common expression धर्मिग्राहकमानात् Par. Sek. on Pari. 55, 66, 79, 82: (2) the same as dharma in rare cases according to the dictum धर्मघर्मिणोरभेदोपचारः e. g. वर्णैकं देहि, पुराणैकं देहि; confer, compare Durghata Vr. on P. II. 1. 49.
dhātaddhita affix.affix (l) applied to a numeral in the sense of a kind ( प्रकार ) or a division of time, exempli gratia, for exampleएकधा, द्विधा, त्रिधा et cetera, and others: confer, compare P.V.3.42, 43; (2) applied to बहु to show divisions of a short time;exempli gratia, for example बहुधा दिवसस्य भुङ्क्क्ते and बहुधा मासस्य भुङ्क्ते;confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.V.4.20.
dhātua root; the basic word of a verbal form,defined by the Bhasyakara as क्रियावचनो धातुः or even as भाववचने धातु:, a word denoting a verbal activity. Panini has not defined the term as such, but he has given a long list of roots under ten groups, named dasagani, which includes about 2200 roots which can be called primary roots as contrasted with secondary roots. The secondary roots can be divided into two main groups ( l ) roots derived from roots ( धातुजधातवः ) and (2) roots derived from nouns ( नामधातवः ). The roots derived from roots can further be classified into three main subdivisions : (a) causative roots or णिजन्त, (b) desiderative roots or सन्नन्त, (c) intensive roots or यङन्त and यङ्लुगन्त: while roots derived from nouns or denominative roots can further be divided into क्यजन्त, काम्यजन्त, क्यङन्त, क्यषन्त, णिङन्त, क्विबन्त and the miscellaneous ones ( प्रकीर्ण ) as derived from nouns like कण्डू( कण्ड्वादि ) by the application of the affix यक् or from nouns like सत्य,वेद, पाश, मुण्ड,मिश्र, et cetera, and others by the application of the affix णिच्. Besides these, there are a few roots formed by the application of the affix अाय and ईय (ईयङ्). All these roots can further be classified into Parasmaipadin or Parasmaibhasa, Atmanepadin or Atmanebhasa and Ubhayapadin. Roots possessed of a mute grave ( अनुदात्त ) vowel or of the mute consonant ङ् added to the root in the Dhatupatha or ending in the affixes यड्, क्यङ् et cetera, and others as also roots in the passive voice are termed Atmanepadin: while roots ending with the affix णिच् as also roots possessed of a mute circumflex vowel or a mute consonant ञ़़् applied to them are termed Ubhayapadin. All the rest are termed Parasmaipadin. There are some other mute letters or syllables applied by Panini to the roots in his Dhatupatha for specific purposes; exempli gratia, for example ए at the end to signify prohibition of vrddhi to the penultimate अ in the aorist, exempli gratia, for example अकखीत् confer, compare P. VII.2.5; इर् to signify the optional substitution of अ or अङ् for the affix च्लि of the aorist, exempli gratia, for example अभिदत्, अभैत्सीत् ; confer, compare P.III. 1.57; उ to signify the optional application of the augment इ ( इट् ) before क्त्वा exempli gratia, for example शमित्वा, शान्त्वा; confer, compare P.VII. 2. 56; ऊ to signify the optional application of the augment इ ( इट् ) exempli gratia, for example गोप्ता, गेीपिता, confer, compare P.VII.2.44; अा to signify the prohibition of the augment इट् in the case of the past passive voice. participle. exempli gratia, for example क्ष्विण्णः, स्विन्नः, confer, compare P. VII.2.16; इ to signify the addition of a nasal after the last vowel e. g. निन्दति from निदि, confer, compare P. VII.1.58: ऋ to signify the prohibition of ह्रस्व to the penultimate long vowel before णिच्, e. g. अशशासत्, confer, compare P.VII. 4.2;लृ to signify the substitution of अङ् for च्लि in the aorist, exempli gratia, for example अगमत् confer, compare P. III.1.55: ओ to signify the substitution of न् for त् of the past passive voice.participle. exempli gratia, for example लग्नः, अापीनः, सूनः, दून: et cetera, and others; confer, compare P. VIII. 2.45. Besides these,the mute syllables ञि, टु and डु are prefixed for specific purposes; confer, compare P. III.2.187, III.3.89 and III. 3.88. The term धातु is a sufficiently old one which is taken by Panini from ancient grammarians and which is found used in the Nirukta and the Pratisakhya works, signifying the 'elemental (radical)base' for nouns which are all derivable from roots according to the writers of the Nirukta works and the grammarian Siktaayana; confer, compare नाम च धातुजमाह निरुक्ते व्याकरणे शकटस्य च तोकम् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. III.3.1. Some scholars have divided roots into six categories; confer, compare तत्र धातवः षोढा (a) परिपठिताः भूवादयः, (b) अपरिपठता अान्दोलयत्यादयः, (c) परिपठितापरिपठिताः ( सूत्रपठिताः ) स्कुस्कम्भस्तम्भेत्यादयः, (d) प्रत्ययधातवः सनाद्यन्ताः, (e) नामघातवः कण्ड्वादयः, (f) प्रत्ययनामधातवः होडगल्भक्ली. बप्रभृतयः; cf Sringara Prak. I. For details see M.Bh. on P.I.3.I as also pp 255, 256 Vol. VII Vyakarana-Mahabhasya published by the D.E. Society, Poona.
dhātukalpalatikāa short treatise on the roots of the different conjugations written by a grammarian named Dhananjaya.
dhātupāṭha(1)name given in general to the several collections of roots given generally with their meanings by grammarians belonging to the various different schools of grammar. These collections are given as necessary appendices named खिल to their grammars by the well known grammarians of Sanskrit such as Panini, Sakatayana, and others; (2) a small treatise on roots written by Bhimasena of the 14th century.
dhātupārāyaṇaa grammatical treatise dealing with roots written as a supplementary work by Jumaranandin to his grammar work called Rasavati,which itself was a thoroughly revised and enlarged edition of the रसवती a commentary written by Kramadisvara on his own grammar named संक्षिप्तसार.Jumaranandin is believed to have been a Jain writer who lived in the fifteenth century A.D.
dhātupradīpaa work dealing with verbal forms written by Maitreya Raksita, a Buddhist writer and a famous grammarian belonging to the eastern part of India who lived in the middle of the twelfth century. He is believed to have written many scholarly works in connection with Panini's grammar out of which the Tantrapradipa is the most important one. The work Dhatupradipa is quoted by Saranadeva, who was a contemporary of Maitreya Raksita, in his Durghatavrtti on P. II. 4. 52.
dhātuvṛttia general term applied to a treatise discussing roots, but specifically used in connection with the scholarly commentary written by Madhavacārya, the reputed scholar and politician at the court of the Vijayanagara kings in the fourteenth century, on the Dhatupatha ot Panini. The work is generally referred to as माधवीया-धातुवृति to distinguish it from ordinary commentary works called also धातुवृत्ति written by grammarians like Wijayananda and others.
dhātvartheliterally meaning of a root, the verbal activity, named क्रिया or भावः . confer, compare धात्वर्थः क्रिया; Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on III.2. 84, III.2.115. The verbal activity is described generally to be made up of a series of continuous subordinate activities carried on by the different karakas or agents and instruments of verbal activity helping the process of the main activity. When the process of the verbal activity is complete, the completed activity is looked upon as a substantive or dravya and a word denoting it, such as पाक,or याग does not get conjugational affixes, but it is regularly declined like a noun.Just as स्वार्थ, द्रब्य, लिङ्ग, संख्या, and कारक are given as प्रातिपदिकार्थ, in the same manner क्रिया, काल, पुरुष, वचन or संख्या, and कारक are given as धात्वर्थ, as they are shown by a verbal form, although strictly speaking verbal activity (क्रियorभाव) alone is the sense of a root, as stated in the Mahbhasya. For details see Vaiyak.Bh.Sara, where it is said that fruit ( फल) and effort ( ब्यापार ) are expressed by a root, confer, compare फलव्यापारयोर्धातुः. The five senses given a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page. are in fact conveyed not by a root, but by a verb or अाख्यात or तिडन्त.
dhi(1)a technical term used for sonant consonants in the Pratisakhya and old grammar works; confer, compare धि शेषः V. Pr.I.53, explained by Uvvata as वर्गाणां उत्तरास्त्रय: यरलवहकाराश्च धिः V.Pr. I.53; the term धि corresponds to हश् of Panini; (2) personal ending धि substituted for हि of the imperative 2nd singular. exempli gratia, for example जुहुधि, छिन्द्धि, भिन्द्धि, श्रुधि, रारन्धि et cetera, and others; confer, compareP.V.4.101-103.
dhuṭ(1)the augment ध् prefixed to the consonant स् following upon the consonant ड् or न् occurring at the end of a word; exempli gratia, for example श्वलिट्त्साये, महान्त्साये et cetera, and others; confer, compare P. VIII.3.29; (2) technical short term for धातु (root); the technical term is धुष् , but the nominative case. singular. used is धुट्; (3) a technical term standing for cononants excepting semi-vowels and nasals; confer, compare धुटश्च धुटि Kat. III.6.51. The term is used in the Katantra Vyakarana. It corresponds to the term झर् of Panini.
dhyaikrt afix ध्यै seen in Vedic Literature, substituted for त्या optionally; e. g. साढयै, साढ्वा; cf P. VI. 3.113.
dhvani(1)sound; confer, compare ध्वनिं कुर्वन्नेवमुच्यतेशब्दं कुरु शब्दं मा कार्षीः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). I. 1. Ahnika 1; confer, compare also Vākyapadīya of Bhartṛhari. I. 77; confer, compare also स्फोटः शब्दः, ध्वनिः शब्दगुणः, M.Bh. on I. 1.70 Vart. 5. ध्वनि or sound is said to be the indicator (सूचक्र or व्यञ्जक) of स्फोट the eternal sound.
dhvanitasuggested, as opposed to उक्त expressed; the word is found frequently used in the Paribhasendusekhara and other works in connection with such dictums as are not actually made, but indicated in the Mahabhasya.
dhvampersonal-ending of the second. person. plural Atmanepada, substituted for ल् of the 10 lakaras.
dhvātpersonal-ending in Vedic Literature, substituted for ध्वम् of the second. person. plural Atmanepada; exempli gratia, for exampleवारयध्वात् for वारयध्वम् confer, compare P. VII. 1.42.
dhvePersonal-ending of the second. person. Pl. Atmanepada in the present and perfect tenses. न् fifth consonant of the dental class of consonants which is possessed of the properties घोष, नादानुप्रदान, अल्पप्राणत्व, संवृतकण्ठत्व and अानुनासिक्य. In Panini's grammar the nasal consonant न् (a)is added as an augment prescribed\ \नुट् or नुम् which originally is seen as न्, but afterwards changed into अनुस्वार or परसवर्ण as required, as for example in पयांसि, यशांसि, निन्दति, वन्दति et cetera, and others; confer, compare P. VII. 1.58-73, VII. 1.7983; VIII. 3.24; (b) is changed into ण् when it directly follows upon ऋ, ॠ, र् or ष् or even intervened by a vowel, a semivowel except ल् , a guttural consonant, a labial consonant or an anusvara; confer, compare P. VIII. 4.1.1-31. (c) is substituted for the final म् of a root, e. g. प्रशान्, प्रतान् confer, compare P. VIII. 2.64, 65.
na(1)the consonant न् (see न् a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.) with the vowel added to it for facility of utterance, confer, compare Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.I. 21 ; (2) taddhita affix. affix न added to words headed by पामन् in the sense of possession; exempli gratia, for example पामनः, हेमनः et cetera, and others, cf P. V. 2.100; (3) taddhita affix. affix न as found in the word ज्योत्स्ना derived from ज्योतिष्, cf P. V. 2.114; (4) unadi affix न as found in the word स्योनः; cf Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. VI.4.19; (5) the krt affix नङ् as also नन् prescribed after the roots यज्, याच्, यत्, विच्छ्, प्रच्छ्, रक्ष् and स्वप् , e g. यज्ञ:, याञ्चा, प्रश्नः et cetera, and others, cf P. III. 3.90, 91; (6) the negative particle न given by Panini as नञ् and referred to in the same way, which (id est, that is न.) when compounded with a following word is changed into अ or अन् or retained in rare cases as for instance in नभ्राट्, नासत्यौ, नक्षत्रम् et cetera, and others cf P. VI.3.73-75;(7) taddhita affix.affix न (नञ्) applied to the words स्त्री and पुंस् in senses given from P. IV. 1.92 to V. 2.1 e. g. स्त्रैणं, पौंस्नम् confer, compare IV. 1.87.
natiliterallyinclination, bending down; the word is used generally in the technical sense of 'cerebralization' but applied to the change of न् into ण् as also that of स् into ष्; confer, compare दन्त्यस्य मूर्धन्यापत्तिर्नतिः, V. Pr.I. 42. The root नम् is used in the sense of 'cerebralizing ' or 'being cerebralized' very frequently in the Pratisakhya works; exempli gratia, for example the word नम्यते is used in the sense of 'is cerebralized'; नमयति in the sense of 'cerebralizes' and नामिंन् in the sense of 'causing cerebralization'; confer, compare ऋकारादयो दश नामिन: स्वराः, पूर्वो नन्ता नतिषु नम्यमुत्तरम् Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) I. 27.
nadīa technical term applied in Panini's grammar to words in the feminine gender ending in ई and ऊ excepting a few like स्त्री,श्री, भ्रू and others; it is optionally applied to words ending in इ and उ, of course in the feminine. gender, before case affixes of the dative, ablative, genitive and locative singular. The term was probably in use before Panini and was taken from the feminine. word नदी which was taken as a model. Very probably there was a long list of words like नद् ( नदट्) चोर ( चोरट् ) et cetera, and others which were given as ending in ट् and to which the affix ई (ङीप्) was added for forming the feminine base;the first word नदी so formed, was taken as a model and all words in the list and similar others were called नदी; confer, compare P. I 4. 3-6.
naddhaa fault of pronunciation when a letter, although distinctly pronounced inside the mouth, does not become audible, being held up ( बद्ध ) by the lips or the like. The fault is similar to अम्बूकृत: confer, compare ओष्ठाभ्यामम्बूकृतमाह नद्धम् R.Pr.XIV.2.
napuṃsaka1it. a word which is neither in the masculine nor in the feminine gender; a word in the neuter gender; confer, compare R.Pr.XIII.7,Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.II. 32; III.138; confer, compare P. VI.3.75, on which the Siddhanta Kaumudi observes न स्त्री पुमान् नपुंसकम् । स्त्रीपुंसयोः पुंसकभावो निपातनात् ।
naraperson; personal ending; the term is used in connection with (the affixes of) the three persons प्रथम, मध्यम, and उत्तम which are promiscuously seen sometimes in the Vedic Literature confer, compare सुतिङुपग्रहलिङ्गनराणां ... व्यत्ययमिच्छति ... Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on III.1.85.
narendrasūrian old grammarian believed to have been the original writer of the Sarasvata Vyakarana, on the strength of references to him in the commentary on the Sarasvata Vyakarana written by क्षेमेन्द्र as also references in the commentary on the Prakriykaumudi by Vitthalesa. He is believed to have lived in the tenth century A;D.
navyamataa term used for the differentiation in views and explanations held by the comparatively new school of Bhattoji Diksita, as contrasted with those held by Kasikakara and Kaiyata; the term is sometimes applied to the differences of opinion expressed by Nagesabhatta in contrast with Bhagttoji Diksita. For details see p.p. 23-24 Vol.VII of the Patanjala Mahabhasya edition D.E. Society, Poona.
(1)taddhita affix. affix ना as also नाञ् prescribed respectively after वि and नञ् (negative particle न ) in the sense of separation; e. g. विना, नाना ; (2) case ending ना substituted for the inst. instrumental case. singular. affix टा (called also अाङ् in ancient grammars) in the masculine gender after words called घि i. e. words ending in इ or उ excepting such as are called नदी.
nāgeśathe most reputed modern scholar of Panini's grammar, who was well-versed in other Sastras also, who lived in Benares in the latter half of the seventeenth and the first half of the eighteenth century. He wrote many masterly commentaries known by the words शेखर and उद्द्योत on the authoritative old works in the different Sastras, the total list of his small and big works together well nigh exceeding a hundredition He was a bright pupil of Hari Diksita, the grandson of Bhattoji Diksita. He was a renowned teacher also, and many of the famous scholars of grammar in Benares and outside at present are his spiritual descendants. He was a Maharastriya Brahmana of Tasgaon in Satara District, who received his education in Benares. For some years he stayed under the patronage of Rama, the king of Sringibera at his time. He was very clever in leading debates in the various Sastras and won the title of Sabhapati. Out of his numerous works, the Mahābhāṣya-Pradīpoddyota by Nāgeśa.on Kaiyata's Mahabhasyapradipa, the Laghusabdendusekhara on the Siddhanta Kaumudi and the Paribhasendusekhara are quite wellknown and studied by every one who wishes to get proficiency in Panini's grammar. For details see pp. 21-24 and 401-403, Vol. VII of the Patanjala Mahabhasya edition D. E. Society, Poona.
nānāpadadifferent words as opposed to समानपद or a single word; confer, compare Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.III. 80; T.Pr. XXIV. 3, XX. 3.
nāmannoun, substantive; one of the four categories of words given in the Nirukta and other ancient grammer works; confer, compare चत्वारि पदजातानि नामाख्याते चोपसर्गनिपाताश्च, Nirukta of Yāska.I.1. The word is defined as सत्त्वप्रधानानि नामानि by standard grammarians; confer, compare Nirukta of Yāska.I. 1.; confer, compare also सत्त्वाभिधायकं नाम, Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XIII.8; Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.VIII. 49 and commentary thereon. Panini divides words into two categories only, viz. सुबन्त and तिङन्त and includes नामन् ,उपसर्ग and निपात under सुबन्त. The Srngarapraksa defines नामन् as follows-अनपेक्षितशब्दव्युत्पत्तीनि सत्त्वभूतार्थाभिधायीनि नामानि। तानि द्विविधानि। आविष्टलिङ्गानि अनाविष्टलिङ्गानि च । The word नामन् at the end of a sasthitatpurusa compound signifies a name or Samjna e. g. सर्वनामन्, दिङ्नामन् , छन्दोनामन्; confer, compare also. Bhasavrtti on संज्ञायां कन्थोशीनरेषु P. II.4. 20 and संज्ञायां भृत्. P. III. 2.46 where the author of the work explains the word संज्ञायां as नाम्नि. The word is used in the sense of 'a collection of words' in the Nirukta, confer, compare अन्तरिक्षनामानि, अपत्यनामानि, ईश्वरनामानि, उदकनामानि, et cetera, and others
nāmaliṅgānuśāsanaa treatise in which words with their genders are given. The term is usually used in connection with the great dictionary by अमरसिंह which is called नामालिङ्गानुशासन or अमरकोष.
nārāyaṇa(1)name of a grammarian who wrote a commentary on the Mahabhsya-Pradipa; (2) a grammarian who is said to have written a gloss named Sabdabhusana on the Sutras of Panini as also some minor works named शब्दमञ्जरी, शब्दभेदनिरूपण, et cetera, and others
ni(1)personal ending substituted for मि (मिप्) of the 1st person. singular. in the imperative; (2) a technical term in the Jainendra Vyakarana for the term निपात of Panini.
nigamaa statement in the Vedic passage; a Vedic passage; sacred tradition or Vedic Literature in general; confer, compare the frequent expression इत्यपि निगमो भवति where निगम means 'a vedic word, given as an instance'; if also means 'Veda'; confer, compare निगम एव यथा स्यात् । Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on VII. 2. 64. Durgacarya says that the word it also used in the sense of 'meaning';confer, compare तत्र खले इत्येतस्य निगमा भवन्ति Nirukta of Yāska.III.9. Durgacarya has also explained the word as गमयन्ति मन्त्रार्थान् ज्ञापयन्ति इति निगमाः, those that make the hidden meaning of the Mantras very clear.
nighaṇṭua name given to a collection of words which are mainly Vedic. In ancient times such collections were possibly very general and numerous and the works or treatises on derivation such as the Nirukta of Yaska were based upon them; confer, compare निघण्टवः कस्मात् । निगमा इमे भवन्ति । छन्दोभ्यः समाहृत्य समाहृत्य समाम्नातास्ते निगन्तव एव सन्तो निगमनान्निघण्टव उच्यन्ते इत्यौपमन्यवः । अपि वा आहननादेव स्युः | समाहता भवन्ति । यद्वा समाहृता भवन्ति (Nir.I.1) where the word is derived from गम्,or हन् or हृ. The word निघण्टु is taken as synonymous with निगम by Durgacarya.
nicṛtless by one syllable; the word is used as an adjective to the name of a Vedic metre which has got one syllable less than the normal; confer, compare एकद्-व्यूनाधिकः सैव निचृदूनाधिका भुरिक् R.Pr.XVII.1.
nitan affix possessed of the mute indicatory letter न्, the word characterized by which has the acute accent on the vowel of the first syllable; e. g. गार्ग्यः, वात्स्यः, cf Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.VI.1.197.
nitya(1)eternal, as applied to word or Sabda in contrast with sound or dhvani which is evanescent (कार्य ). The sound with meaning or without meaning,made by men and animals is impermanent; but the sense or idea awakened in the mind by the evanescent audible words on reaching the mind is of a permanent or eternal nature; confer, compare स्फोटः शब्दो ध्वनिस्तस्य व्यायामादुपजायते; confer, compare also व्याप्तिमत्त्वा्त्तु शब्दस्य Nir.I.1 ; (2) constant; not liable to be set aside by another; confer, compare उपबन्धस्तु देशाय नित्यम्, न रुन्धे नित्यम्। नित्यशब्दः प्राप्त्यन्तरानिषेधार्थः T.Pr.I.59, IV.14; (3) original as constrasted with one introduced anew such as an augment; confer, compare Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.VI.14; (4) permanently functioning, as opposed to tentatively doing so; confer, compare नित्यविरते द्विमात्रम् Ṛktantra Prātiśākhya.37; (5) unchangeable, permanent, imperishable; confer, compare अयं नित्यशब्दोस्त्येव कूटस्थेष्वविचालिषु भावेषु वर्तते M.Bh. on P. VIII. 1.4; (6) always or invariably applying, as opposed to optional; the word in this sense is used in connection with rules or operations that do not optionally apply; confer, compare उपपदसमासो नित्यसमासः, षष्ठीसमासः पुनार्वेभाषा; Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P.II.2.19; (7) constant,as applied to a rule which applies if another simultaneously applying rule were to have taken effect, as well as when that other rule does not take effect; confer, compare क्वचित्कृताकृतप्रसङ्गमात्रेणापि नित्यता Par. Sek. Pari 46. The operations which are nitya according to this Paribhasa take effect in preference to others which are not 'nitya', although they may even be 'para'; confer, compare परान्नित्यं बलवत् Par. Sek. Pari. 42.
nityasamāsaan invariably effective compound; the term is explained as अस्वपदविग्रहो नित्यसमासः i. e. a compound whose dissolution cannot be shown by its component words as such; e. g. the dissolution of कुम्भकारः cannot be shown as कुम्भं कारः, but it must be shown as कुम्भं करोति स: । The upapadasamasa, the gatisamsa and the dative tatpurusa with the word अर्थ are examples of नित्यसमास.
nityānandaparvatīyaa scholar of Sanskrit Grammar who wrote glosses on the Mahabhasyapradipa, on the Laghusabdendusekhara and on the Paribhasendusekhara. He was a resident of Benares where he coached many pupils in Sanskrit Grammar. He lived in the first half of the nineteenth century.
nipātaa particle which possesses no gender and number, and the case termination after which is dropped or elidedition Nipata is given as one of the four categories of words viz नामन्, आख्यात, उपसर्ग and निपात by all the ancient writers of Pratisakhya, Vyakarana and Nirukta works;confer, compare Nirukta of Yāska.I. 4, M.Bh. on I. 1. Ahnika l, Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XII. 8 et cetera, and others The word is derived from the root पत् with नि by Yaska who has mentioned three subdivisions of Niptas उपमार्थे, कर्मोपसंग्रहार्थे and पदपूरणे; confer, compare अथ निपाताः । उच्चावचेष्वर्थेषु निपतन्ति । अप्युपमार्थे । अपि कर्मोपसंग्रह्यार्थे । अपि पदपूरणाः । Nirukta of Yāska.I. 4. The Nipatas are looked upon as possessed of no sense; confer, compare निपातः पादपूरणः Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XII. 8, Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.VIII. 50, ( commentary by Uvvata ). Panini has not given any definition of the word निपात, but he has enumerated them as forming a class with च at their head in the rule चादयोऽसत्वे where the word असत्वे conveys an impression that they possess no sense, the sense being of two kinds सत्त्व and भाव, and the Nipatas not possesssing any one of the two. The impression is made rather firm by the statement of the Varttikakra'निपातस्यानर्थकस्य प्रातिपदिकत्वम्' P. I. 2. 45 Vart. 12. Thus, the question whether the Nipatas possess any sense by themselves or not, becomes a difficult one to be answeredition Although the Rkpratisakhya in XII.8 lays down that the Nipatas are expletive, still in the next verse it says that some of them do possess sense; confer, compare निपातानामर्थवशान्निपातनादनर्थकानामितरे च सार्थकाः on which Uvvata remarks केचन निपाताः सार्थकाः, केचन निरर्थकाः । The remark of Uvvata appears to be a sound one as based on actual observation, and the conflicting views have to be reconciledition This is done by Bhartrhari who lays down that Nipatas never directly convey the sense but they indicate the sense. Regarding the sense indicated by the Nipatas, it is said that the sense is never Sattva or Dravya or substance as remarked by Panini; it is a certain kind of relation and that too, is not directly expressed by them but it is indicatedition Bhoja in his Srngaraprakasa gives a very comprehensive definition of Nipata as:-जात्यादिप्रवृत्तिनिमित्तानुपग्राहित्वेनासत्त्वभूतार्थाभिधायिनः अलिङ्गसंख्याशक्तय उच्चावचेष्वर्थेषु निपतन्तीत्यव्ययविशेषा एव चादयो निपाताः । He gives six varieties of them, viz. विध्यर्थ, अर्थवादार्थ, अनुवादार्थ, निषेधार्थ, विधिनिषेधार्थ and अविधिनिषेधार्थ, and mentions more than a thousand of them. For details see Bhartrhari's Vakyapadiya II. 189-206.
nipātadyotakatvathe view that the nipatas and the upasargas too, as contrasted with nouns,pronouns and other indeclinables, only indicate the sense and do not denote it; this view, as grammarians say, was implied in the Mahabhasya and was prominently given in the Vakyapadiya by Bhartrhari which was followed by almost all later grammarians. See निपात.
nipātanaa word given, as it appears, without trying for its derivation,in authoritative works of ancient grammarians especially Panini;confer, compareदाण्डिनायनहास्तिनयनo P. VI.4.174, as also अचतुरविचतुरo V.4.77 et cetera, and others et cetera, and others The phrase निपातनात्सिद्धम् is very frequently used by Patanjali to show that some technical difficulties in the formation of a word are not sometimes to be taken into consideration, the word given by Panini being the correct one; confer, compare M.Bh.on I.1.4, III.1.22 et cetera, and others et cetera, and others; cf also the usual expression बाधकान्येव निपातनानि. The derivation of the word from पत् with नि causal, is suggested in the Rk Pratisakhya where it is stated that Nipatas are laid down or presented as such in manifold senses; cf Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.)XII.9; cf also घातुसाधनकालानां प्राप्त्यर्थं नियमस्य च । अनुबन्घविकाराणां रूढ्यर्थ च निपातनम् M. Bh Pradipa on P. V.1.114: confer, comparealso Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on II.1.27.
nipātanasvarathe accent, with which the Nipatana word is expressed in the Sutra, which is said to prevail over the accent which ordinarily should be possessed by the word; confer, compare स निपातनस्वरः प्रकृतिस्वरस्य बाधको भविष्यति M.Bh. on P.I.1.56 Vart. 23; confer, compare also M.Bh. on I.3.3, VI.1.123 et cetera, and others .
nipātānarthakatvathe view prominently expressed by the Varttikakara that nipatas do not possess any sense, which was modified by Bhartrhari who stated that they do possess sense which, of course, is indicated and not expressedition See निपात.
nimitta(1)the formal cause of a grammatical operation; confer, compare निमित्ताभावे नैमित्तिकस्याप्यभाव; given as a Paribhasa by many grammarians like Vyadi, Siradeva and others; confer, compare also प्रकृत्युपपदोपाधयो निमित्तं प्रत्ययेा निमित्ती M.Bh. on III.1.1 Vart. 2; (2) distinguishing sign यः प्रेक्षापूर्वकारी भवति स: अध्रुवेण निमित्तेन ध्रुवं निमित्तमुपादत्ते वेदिकां पुण्डरीकं वा, M.Bh. on I.1.26 Vart.5.
nimittāpāyaparibhāṣāa popular name given by grammarians to the maxim निमित्तापाये नैमित्तिकस्याप्यपायः,. a thing, which is brought into existence by a cause, disappears on the disappearance of the cause. The maxim is not, of course, universally applicable. For details see Par. Sek. Pari. 56, Sira. Pari. 99.
niyatasvara(1)an affix whose accent is definitely given by an indicatory mute letter applied to it; confer, compare M.Bh. on I.1.3; (2) the grave accent; a syllable with a grave accent; grave vowel; confer, compare नियतस्वरोदये R.Pr.XI.25; (3) name of a Samdhi when a visarga is changed into रेफ and then omitted and the preceding vowel is lengthened; cf ह्रस्वस्याकामनियता उभाविमौ R.Pr. IV.9; confer, compare also P. VIII.3.14 and VI.3.111.
niyama(1)restriction; regulation; binding; the term is very frequently used by grammarians in connection with a restriction laid down with reference to the application of a grammatical rule generally on the strength of that rule, or a part of it, liable to become superfluous if the restriction has not been laid down; confer, compare M.Bh. on I. 1. 3, Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on I. 3.63, VI. 4.11; confer, compare also the frequently quoted dictum अनियमे नियमकारिणी परिभाषा; (2) limitation as contrasted with विकल्प or कामचार; confer, compare अनेकप्राप्तावेकस्य नियमो भवति शेषेष्वनियम; पटुमृदुशुक्लाः पटुशुक्लमृदव इति; Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on II. 2. 34 Vart. 2; (3) a regulating rule; a restrictive rule, corresponding to the Parisamkhya statement of the Mimamsakas, e. g. the rule अनुदात्तङित आत्मनेपदम् P. I.3.12; the grammarians generally take a rule as a positive injunction avoiding a restrictive sense as far as possible; confer, compare the dictum विधिनियमसंभवे विधिरेव ज्यायान्. Par. Sek. Pari. 100; the commentators have given various kinds of restrictions,. such as प्रयोगनियम,अभिधेयनियम,अर्थनियम, प्रत्ययनियम, प्रकृतिनियम, संज्ञानियम et cetera, and otherset cetera, and others; (4) grave accent or anudatta; confer, compare उदात्तपूर्वं नियतम् Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) III. 9; see नियत (2).
niranubandhakapossessed of no mute indicatory letter; not possessed of any mute indicatory letter; confer, compare क्वपुनरयं (आकारः) सानुबन्धकः क्व निरनुबन्धकः । M.Bh. on I. 1.14.
nirastaa fault of pronunciation when a vowel is harshly pronounced and hence is not properly audible; confer, compare निरस्तं निष्ठुरम् Pradipa on M.Bh. I. 1. Ahn. 1. The fault occurs when the place and the means of utterance are pressed and drawn in;confer, compare निरस्तं स्थानकरणापकर्षे Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XIV. 2.
niruktaname of a class of works which were composed to explain the collections of Vedic words by means of proposing derivations of those words from roots as would suit the sense. The Nirukta works are looked upon as supplementary to grammar works and there must have been a good many works of this kind in ancient times as shown by references to the writers of these viz. Upamanyu, Sakatayana,Sakapuni,Sakapurti and others, but, out of them only one work composed by Yaska has survived; the word, hence has been applied by scholars to the Nirukta of Yaska which is believed to have been written in the seventh or the eighth century B. C. i. e. a century or two before Panini. The Nirukta works were looked upon as subsidiary to the study of the Vedas along with works on phonetics ( शिक्षा ), rituals ( कल्प ), grammar (व्याकरण) prosody (छन्दस्) and astronomy(ज्योतिष)and a mention of them is found made in the Chandogyopanisad. As many of the derivations in the Nirukta appear to be forced and fanciful, it is doubtful whether the Nirukta works could be called scientific treatises. The work of Yaska, however, has got its own importance and place among works subsidiary to the Veda, being a very old work of that kind and quoted by later commentators. There were some glosses and commentary works written upon Yaska's Nirukta out of which the one by Durgacarya is a scholarly one.It is doubtful whether Durgacarya is the same as Durgasimha, who wrote a Vrtti or gloss on the Katantra Vyakarana. The word निरुक्त is found in the Pratisakhya works in the sense of 'explained' and not in the sense of derived; confer, compare Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XV 6; V.Pr. IV. 19, 195.
nirbaddhaseparated,dissociated, disconnected; confer, compare न निर्बद्धा उपसर्गा अर्थान्निराहुरिति शाकटायनः Nirukta of Yāska.I.3.
nirmaladarpaṇaname of a commentary on the Prakriya-Kaumudi.
nirvartyaone of the many kinds of karman or object governed by a transitive verb or root, which has got the nature of being produced or brought into existence or into a new shape; confer, compare त्रिविधं कर्म निर्वर्त्य विकार्य प्राप्यं चेति । निर्वर्त्य तावत् कुम्भकारः नगरकारः। The word निर्वर्त्य is explained as यदसज्जन्यते यद्वा प्रकाश्यते तन्निर्वर्त्यम् । कर्तव्यः कटः । उच्चार्यः शब्दः Sr. Prakasa; confer, compare also Vakyapadiya III.7.78; confer, compare also इह हि तण्डुलानोदनं पचतीति द्व्यर्थः पचिः । तण्डुलान्पचन्नोदनं निर्वर्तयति । Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.4.49. For details see the word कर्मन्; also see M.Bh. on I.4.49.
nirhrāsa(1)abridgment, diminution; confer, compareसर्ववचनं प्रकृतिनिह्लासार्थम् । निर्ह्लासः अपचयः अल्पत्वमित्यर्थः । Kaiyata on M.Bh. on IV.3.100; (2) being turned into a short (vowel); confer, compare स्पर्शान्तस्थाप्रत्ययौ निर्ह्रसेते R.Pr.IV.39.
nivartakaliterally expeller, excluding other forms which are otherwise, that is, incorrect; confer, compare समाने चार्थे शास्त्रान्वितः अशास्त्रान्वितस्य निवर्तको भवति । M.Bh. on I.1. Siva Sutra 2.
nihitaseparated with the intervention of a consonant. The word is used in connection with the detached first part of a compound word not followed immediately by a vowel; confer, compare अनिहतं अव्यवहितम् Uvvata on Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.V. 30.
nīlakaṇṭhaauthor of वैयाकरणसिद्धान्तरहस्य a commentary on the Siddhanta Kaumudi of Bhattoji Diksita.
nīlakaṇṭhamakhinnephew of Appaya Diksita who has written a commentary on Kaiyata's Mahabhasyapradipa.
nukaugment न् (l) affixed to the words अन्तर्वत् and पतिवत् before the feminine affix ङीप् e. g. अन्तर्वत्नी, पतिवत्नी, confer, compare P. IV. 1.32; (2) affixed to the root ली before the causal affix णिच् , e. g. विलीनयति, confer, compare P. VII. 3.39; (3) affixed to the reduplicative syllable of roots ending in a nasal consonant and having the penultimate अ as also of the roots जप्, जभ् , दह् , दश्, भञ्ज्, पश्, चर्, and फल् in the intensive; e. g. जङ्गम्यते, तन्तन्यते, यंयमीति, जङ्गमीति, जञ्जप्यते, दन्दह्यते, दन्दशीति. चञ्चूर्यते, पम्फु लीति confer, compare P. VII 4.85, 86, 87.
nuṭaugment न् prefixed (l) to the genitive case plural ending in अाम् after a crude base ending in a short vowel, or in ई or ऊ of feminine bases termed nadi, or in अा of the feminine affix ( टाप् डाप् or चाप्); e g. वृक्षाणाम्, अग्नीनाम् , कर्तॄणाम् , कुमारीणाम् , मालानाम् et cetera, and others; confer, compare P. VII.1.54; (2) to the affix अाम् after numerals termed षट् and the numeral चतुर् as also after the words श्री, ग्रामणी and गो in Vedic Literature, e. g. षण्णाम् , पञ्चानाम् , चतुर्णाम्, श्रीणाम्, ग्रामणीनाम्, गोनाम्; confer, compare P. VII.1.55,56, 57; (3) to the part of a root possessed of two consonants, as also of the root अश् of the fifth conjugation after the reduplicative syllable ending in अा, which is substituted for अ; exempli gratia, for example अानञ्ज, व्यानशे; confer, compare P.VII.4. 71,72; (4) to the affix मतुप् after a base ending in अन् as also to the affixes तरप् and तमप् after a base ending in न् in Vedic Literature, exempli gratia, for example मूर्धन्वती, अक्षण्वन्तः, सुपथिन्तरः et cetera, and others;confer, compare P. VIII. 2.16, 17: (5) to the initial vowel of the second member of a compound having अ of नञ् as the first member; e. g. अनघः, confer, compare P.VI. 3.74; (6) to any vowel after न् which is preceded by a short vowel and which is at the end of a word exempli gratia, for example कुर्वन्नास्ते, confer, compare P. VIII. 3.32.
numaugment न् inserted after the last vowel (1) of a root given in the Dhātupātha as ending with mute इ; exempli gratia, for example निन्दति, क्रन्दति, चिन्तयति, जिन्वति et cetera, and others; confer, compare P VII.1.58; (2) of roots मुच् and others before the conjugational sign अ ( श ); e. g. मुञ्चति, लुम्पति; confer, compare P. VII.1.59; (3) of the roots मस्ज्, नश्, रध्, जभ् and लभ् under certain specified conditions, exempli gratia, for exampleमङ्क्त्वा, नंष्टा, रन्धयति, जम्भयति, लम्भयति, आलम्भ्यः et cetera, and others confer, compare P.VII. 1.60-69; (4) of declinable bases marked with the mute indicatory letter उ, ऋ or ऌ as also of the declinable wording अञ्च् from the root अञ्च् and युज्, exempli gratia, for exampleभवान्, श्रेयान् , प्राङ्, युङ्, confer, compare Kās. on P. VII.1. 70, 71; (5) of the declinable base in the neuter gender, ending with a vowel or with any consonant excepting a semivowel or a nasal, before a case-ending termed Sarvanāmasthāna; exempli gratia, for example यशांसि, वनानि, जतूनि et cetera, and others, confer, compare Kās. on VII.1.72; (6) of the declinable base in the neuter gender, ending with इ, उ,ऋ or ऌ before a case-ending beginning with a vowel; exempli gratia, for example मधुने, शुचिने et cetera, and others, confer, compare Kās, on P. VII.1.73; (7) of the affix शतृ ( अत् of the present tense. participle.) under certain conditions याती यान्ती; पचन्ती, सीव्यन्ती, confer, compare I .VII.78-8 : (8) of the word अनडुह् before the nominative case. and vocative case. singular. affix सु;exempli gratia, for example अनड्वान् , हे अनड्वन्, confer, compare P. VII.1. 82; (9) of the words दृक्, स्ववस् and स्वतवस् before the nominative case. and vocative case.singular.affix सु in Vedic Literature, e. g. यादृङ्, स्ववान् , स्वतवान् , confer, compare P.VII.1.83.
naigama(1)belonging to the Veda, Vedic as opposed to लौकिक or भाषिक; confer, compare नैघण्टुकानि नैगमानीहेह Nir.I. 20; (2) name given to Kāndas 4, 5 and 6 of the Nirukta of Yāska; confer, compare अनवगतसंस्कारा जहादयो यस्मिन्निगम्यन्ते तन्नैगमं Durga Vr. on Nir IV.1.
naimittikaeffect; one that is caused; confer, compare निमित्ताभावे नैमित्तिकस्याप्यभावः a Paribhāsā given by Vyādi, Siradeva and others.
nyacgoing lower, subordinate, the word is used in the sense of upasarjana as a technical term in the Jainendra Vyākarana, confer, compare वोक्तं न्यक् Jain. Vy.I.1.93.
nyāyamaxim, a familiar or patent instance quoted to explain similar cases; confer, compare the words अग्नौकरवाणिन्याय Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. II 2.24, अपवादन्याय Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I. 3.9, अविरविकन्याय Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. IV. 1. 88, 89, IV. 2.60, IV.3.131, V. 1.7, 28, VI 2. 11 ; कुम्भीधान्यन्याय M.Bh. on P.I. 3.7, कूपखानकन्याय M.Bh. I. 1. Āhnika 1, दण्डिन्याय M.Bh. on P. VIII.2.83, नष्टाश्वदग्धरथन्याय Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I.1.50 प्रधानाप्रधानन्याय M.Bh.on P.II.1.69,VI. 3. 82, प्रासादवासिन्याय Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P.I . 1.8, मांसकण्टकन्याय M.Bh. on P.I.2.39, लट्वानुकर्षणन्याय M.Bh. on Siva Sūtra 2 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 5, शालिपलालन्याय M.Bh on P. 1.2.39,सूत्रशाटकन्याय M.Bh. on P. I.3. 12. The word came to be used in the general sense of Paribhāsās or rules of interpretation many of which were based upon popular maxims as stated in the word लोकन्यायसिद्ध by Nāgesa. Hemacandra has used the word न्याय for Paribhāsa-vacana. The word is also used in the sense of a general rule which has got some exceptions, confer, compare न्यायैर्मिश्रानपवादान् प्रतीयात् Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) which lays down the direction that 'one should interpret the rule laying down an exception along with the general rule'.
nyāyasaṃhitacombined euphonically according to rules of grammar; confer, compare तद्वति तद्धिते न्यायसंहितं चेत् explained as व्याकरणशास्त्रोक्तसंधिमत् Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.V. 8 commentary
nyāyyaproper; fully justified न्यायादनपेतम् confer, compare P.IV.4.92; correct; regular; confer, compare यञञ्भ्यामुक्तत्वादर्थस्य न्याय्योत्पत्तिर्न भविष्यति Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on II.3.1 where Kaiyata however, explains the word differently. Kaiyata states that न्याय्य means a general rule; confer, compareउत्सर्गः पूर्वाचार्यप्रसिद्ध्या न्याय्य उच्यते Kaiyata on P. II. 3.1. By Pūrvācārya he possibly refers to the writers of the Prātiśākhyas and other similar works by ancient grammarians, where the word nyāya is used in the sense of 'a general rule '. See the word न्याय a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page..
nyāsa(1)literally position, placing;a word used in the sense of actual expression or wording especially in the sūtras; confer, compare the usual expression क्रियते एतन्न्यास एव in the Mahābhāșya, confer, compare Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I. 1.11, 1.1.47 et cetera, and others; (2) a name given by the writers or readers to works of the type of learned and scholarly commentaries on vŗitti-type-works on standard sūtras in a Śāstra; e. g. the name Kāśikāvivaraṇapañjikā, a commentary on the Kāśikāvṛtti by Jinendrabuddhi, called Nyāsa. is given to the learned commentaries on the Vŗtti on Hemacandra's Śabdānuśasana as also on the Paribhāşāvŗtti by Hemahamsagani. Similarly the commentary by Devanandin on Jainendra grammar and that by Prabhācandra on the Amoghāvŗtti on Śākatāyana grammar are named Kāśikāvivaraṇapañjikā, a commentary on the Kāśikāvṛtti by Jinendrabuddhi, called Nyāsa.. In the same way, the learned commentary on the Kāśikāvŗtti by Jinendrabuddhi, named Kāśikāvivaranapaňjikā by the author, is very widely known by the name Kāśikāvivaraṇapañjikā, a commentary on the Kāśikāvṛtti by Jinendrabuddhi, called Nyāsa.. This commentary Kāśikāvivaraṇapañjikā, a commentary on the Kāśikāvṛtti by Jinendrabuddhi, called Nyāsa. was written in the eighth century by the Buddhist grammarian Jinendrabuddhi, who belonged to the eastern school of Pānini's Grammar. This Kāśikāvivaraṇapañjikā, a commentary on the Kāśikāvṛtti by Jinendrabuddhi, called Nyāsa. has a learned commentary written on it by Maitreya Rakșita in the twelfth century named Tantrapradipa which is very largely quoted by subsequent grammarians, but which unfortunately is available only in a fragmentary state at present. Haradatta, a well-known southern scholar of grammar has drawn considerably from Kāśikāvivaraṇapañjikā, a commentary on the Kāśikāvṛtti by Jinendrabuddhi, called Nyāsa. in his Padamañjarī, a commentary on the Kāśikāvṛtti by Haradatta., which also is well-known as a scholarly work.
nyūnaincomplete in sense or wording as opposed to Pūrņa; confer, compare अयवावे न्यूने ( पादे न संनिकृष्येते ) Ṛktantra Prātiśākhya. 76.
pa,pakārathe consonant प्, the vowel अ and the affix कार being added for facility of understanding and pronunciation; cf T.Pr. I. 17, 21 ; प is also used as a short term for consonants of the fifth class (पवर्ग); confer, compare Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.1.27; Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.I. 64 and Ṛktantra Prātiśākhya. 13.
pañcamī(1)the fifth case;ending of the fifth or ablative case as prescribed by rules of Pāņini confer, compare अपादाने पञ्चमी, P. II. 3-7, 10, et cetera, and others (2) the imperative mood; confer, compare Kāt.III.1.18.
pañcālapadavṛttithe usage or the method of the Pañcālas; the eastern method of euphonic combinations, viz. the retention of the vowel अ after the preceding vowel ओ which is substituted for the Visarga; e. g. यो अस्मै; confer, compare Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) II. 12; Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.XI. 19. This vowel अ which is retained, is pronounced like a short ओ or अर्धओकार by the followers of the Sātyamugri and Rāņāyaniya branches of the Sāmavedins; confer, compare commentary on Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.XI. 19 as also Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). Āhnika 1.
paṭhanaoral recital, the word is used in connection with the use of words by the author himself in his text which he is supposed to have handed over orally to his disciples, as was the case with the ancient Vedic and Sūtra works; confer, compare the words पठित, पठिष्यते, पठ्यते and the like, frequently used in the Mahābhāșya in connection with the mention of words in the Sūtras of Pāņini.
patañjalithe reputed author of the Mahābhāșya, known as the Pātañjala Mahābhāșya after him. His date is determined definitely as the second century B.C. on the strength of the internal evidence supplied by the text of the Mahābhāșya itselfeminine. The words Gonardiya and Gonikāputra which are found in the Mahābhāșya are believed to be referring to the author himself and, on their strength he is said to have been the son of Goņikā and a resident of the country called Gonarda in his days. On the strength of the internal evidence supplied by the Mahābhāșya, it can be said that Patañjali received his education at Takșaśila and that he was,just like Pāņini, very familiar with villages and towns in and near Vāhika and Gāndhāra countries. Nothing can definitely be said about his birthplace, and although it might be believed that his native place was Gonarda,its exact situation has not been defined so far. About his parentage too,no definite information is available. Tradition says that he was the foster-son of a childless woman named Gonikā to whom he was handed over by a sage of Gonarda, in whose hands he fell down from the sky in the evening at the time of the offering of water-handfuls to the Sun in the west; confer, compareपतत् + अञ्जलि, the derivation of the word given by the commentators. Apart from anecdotes and legendary information, it can be said with certainty that Patañjali was a thorough scholar of Sanskrit Grammar who had studied the available texts of the Vedic Literature and Grammar and availed himself of information gathered personally by visiting the various schools of Sanskrit Grammar and observing the methods of explanations given by teachers there. His Mahābhāșya supplies an invaluable fund of information on the ways in which the Grammar rules of Pāņini were explained in those days in the various grammar schools. This information is supplied by him in the Vārttikas which he has exhaustively given and explainedition He had a remarkable mastery over Sanskrit Language which was a spoken one at his time and it can be safely said that in respect of style, the Mahābhāșya excels all the other Bhāșyas in the different branches of learning out of which two, those of Śabaraswāmin and Śańkarācārya,are selected for comparison. It is believed by scholars that he was equally conversant with other śāstras, especially Yoga and Vaidyaka, on which he has written learned treatises. He is said to be the author of the Yogasūtras which,hence are called Pātañjala Yogasūtras, and the redactor of the Carakasamhitā. There are scholars who believe that he wrote the Mahābhāșya only, and not the other two. They base their argument mainly on the supposition that it is impossible for a scholar to have an equally unmatching mastery over three different śāstras at a time. The argument has no strength, especially in India where there are many instances of scholars possessing sound scholarship in different branches of learning. Apart from legends and statements of Cakradhara, Nāgesa and others, about his being the author of three works on three different śāstras, there is a direct reference to Patañjali's proficiency in Grammar, Yoga and Medicine in the work of King Bhoja of the eleventh century and an indirect one in the Vākyapadīya of Bhartŗhari of the seventh century A. D. There is a work on the life of Patañjali, written by a scholar of grammar of the South,named Ramabhadra which gives many stories and incidents of his life out of which it is difficult to find out the grains of true incidents from the legendary husk with which they are coveredition For details,see Patañjala Mahābhāșya D.E.Society's edition Vol. VII pages 349 to 374. See also the word महाभाष्य.
padaa word; a unit forming a part of a sentence; a unit made up of a letter or of letters, possessed of sense; confer, compare अक्षरसमुदायः पदम् । अक्षरं वा । V.Pr. VIII. 46, 47. The word originally was applied to the individual words which constituted the Vedic Samhitā; confer, compare पदप्रकृतिः संहिता Nir.I.17. Accordingly, it is defined in the Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya as ' अर्थः पदम् ' (Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.III. 2) as contrasted with ' वर्णानामेकप्राणयोगः संहिता ' (V.Pr.I.158). The definition ' अर्थः पदम् ' is attributed to the ancient grammarian 'Indra', who is believed to have been the first Grammarian of India. Pāņini has defined the term पद as ' सुप्तिङन्तं पदम् ' P.I.4.14. His definition is applicable to complete noun-forms and verb-forms and also to prefixes and indeclinables where a case-affix is placed and elided according to him; confer, compare अव्ययादाप्सुपः P. II. 4. 82. The noun-bases before case affixes and taddhita affix. affixes, mentioned in rules upto the end of the fifth adhyāya, which begin with a consonant excepting य् are also termed पद by Pāņini to include parts of words before the case affixes भ्याम् , भिस्, सु et cetera, and others as also before the taddhita affix. affixes मत्, वत् et cetera, and others which are given as separate padas many times in the pada-pātha of the Vedas; confer, compare स्वादिष्वसर्वनामस्थाने P. I. 4. 17. See for details the word पदपाठ. There are given four kinds of padas or words viz. नाम, अाख्यात, उपसर्ग and निपात in the Nirukta and Prātiśākhya works; confer, compare also पदमर्थे प्रयुज्यते, विभक्त्यन्तं च पदम् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I. 2. 64 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 19, वर्णसमुदायः पदम् M.Bh. on I.1.21 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 5, पूर्वपरयोरर्थोपलब्धौ पदम् Kātantra vyākaraṇa Sūtra.I.1.20, पदशब्देनार्थ उच्यते Kaiyata on P.I.2.42 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 2; confer, compare also पद्यते गम्यते अर्थः अनेनेति पदमित्यन्वर्थसंज्ञा Kāśikāvivaraṇapañjikā, a commentary on the Kāśikāvṛtti by Jinendrabuddhi, called Nyāsa. on P.III. 1.92. The verb endings or affixs ति, तस् and others are also called पद. The word पद in this sense is never used alone, but with the word परस्मै or अात्मने preceding it. The term परस्मैपद stands for the nine affixes तिप्, तस्, ...मस्,while the term आत्मनेपद stands for the nine affixes त, आताम् ... महिङ्. confer, compare ल: परमैपदम्, तङानावात्मनेपदम्. It is possible to say that in the terms परस्मैपद and अात्मनेपद also, the term पद could be taken to mean a word, and it is very likely that the words परस्मैपद and अात्मनेपद were originally used in the sense of 'words referring to something meant for another' and 'referring to something meant for self' respectively. Such words, of course, referred to verbal forms, roughly corresponding to the verbs in the active voice and verbs in the passive voice. There are some modern scholars of grammar, especially linguists, who like to translate परस्मैपद as 'active voice' and आत्मनेपद as ' passive voice'. Pāņini appears, however, to have adapted the sense of the terms परस्मैपद and आत्मनेपद and taken them to mean mere affixes just as he has done in the case of the terms कृत् and तद्धित. Presumably in ancient times, words current in use were grouped into four classes by the authors of the Nirukta works, viz. (a) कृत् (words derived from roots)such as कर्ता, कारकः, भवनम् et cetera, and others, (b) तद्धित (words derived from nouns ) such as गार्ग्यः , काषायम् , et cetera, and others, (c) Parasmaipada words viz. verbs such as भवति, पचति, and (d) Ātmanepada words id est, that is verbs like एधते, वर्धते, et cetera, and othersVerbs करोति and कुरुते or हरति and हरते were looked upon as both परस्मैपद words and आत्मनेपद words. The question of simple words, as they are called by the followers of Pāņini, such as नर, तद् , गो, अश्व, and a number of similar underived words, did not occur to the authors of the Nirukta as they believed that every noun was derivable, and hence could be included in the kŗt words.
padakāṇḍa(1)a term used in connection with the first section of the Vākyapadīya named ब्रह्मकाण्ड also, which deals with padas, as contrasted with the second section which deals with Vākyas; (2) a section of the Așțadhyāyī of Pāņini, which gives rules about changes and modifications applicable to the pada, or the formed word, as contrasted with the base (अङ्ग) and the suffixes. The section is called पदाधिकार which begins with the rule पदस्य P.VIII.1.16. and ends with the rule इडाया वा VIII. 3. 54.
padakāraliterally one who has divided the Samhitā text of the Vedas into the Pada-text. The term is applied to ancient Vedic Scholars शाकल्य, आत्रेय, कात्यायन and others who wrote the Padapātha of the Vedic Samhitās. The term is applied possibly through misunderstanding by some scholars to the Mahābhāsyakāra who has not divided any Vedic Samhitā,but has, in fact, pointed out a few errors of the Padakāras and stated categorically that grammarians need not follow the Padapāțha, but, rather, the writers of the Padapāțha should have followed the rules of grammar. Patañjali, in fact, refers by the term पदकार to Kātyāyana, who wrote the Padapātha and the Prātiśākhya of the Vājasaneyi-Samhitā in the following statement--न लक्षणेन पदकारा अनुवर्त्याः। पदकारैर्नाम लक्षणमनुवर्त्यम्। यथालक्षणं पदं कर्तव्यम् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. III.1. 109; VI. 1. 207; VIII. 2.16; confer, compare also अदीधयुरिति पदकारस्य प्रत्याख्यानपक्षे उदाहरणमुपपन्नं भवति ( परिभाषासूचन of व्याडि Pari. 42 ) where Vyādi clearly refers to the Vārtika of Kātyāyana ' दीधीवेव्योश्छन्दोविषयत्वात् ' P. I. 1.6 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). I. The misunderstanding is due to passages in the commentary of स्कन्दस्वामिन् on the Nirukta passage I. 3, उब्वटटीका on ऋक्प्रातिशाख्य XIII. 19 and others where the statements referred to as those of Patañjali are, in fact, quotations from the Prātiśākhya works and it is the writers of the Prātiśākhya works who are referred to as padakāras by Patañ jali in the Mahābhāsya.
padapāṭhathe recital of the Veda text pronouncing or showing each word separately as detached from the adjoining word. It is believed that the Veda texts were recited originally as running texts by the inspired sages, and as such, they were preserved by people by oral tradition. Later on after several centuries, their individually distinct words were shown by grammarians who were called Padakāras. The पदपाठ later on had many modifications or artificial recitations such as क्रम, जटा, घन et cetera, and others in which each word was repeated twice or more times, being uttered connectedly with the preceding or the following word, or with both. These artificial recitations were of eight kinds, which came to be known by the term अष्टविकृतयः.
padaprabhedalit, divisions of words: parts of speech. There are four parts of speech viz.नामन् , आख्यात, उपसर्ग and निपात given by ancient grammarians and the authors of the Prātiśākhya works, while there are given only two, सुबन्त and तिङन्त by Pāņini. For details see pp. 145, 146 Vol. VII. Mahābhāșya D. E. Society's edition.
padavākyaratnākaraa disquisition on grammar dealing with the different ways in which the sense of words is conveyedition The work consists of a running commentary on his own verses by the author Gokulanātha Miśra who, from internal evidence, appears to have flourished before Koņdabhațța and after Kaiyața.
padavidhian operation prescribed in connection with words ending with case or verbal affixes and not in connection with noun-bases or root-bases or with single letters or syllables. पदविधि is in this way contrasted with अङ्गविधि ( including प्रातिपदिकविधि and धातुविधि ), वर्णविधि and अक्षरविधि, Such Padavidhis are given in Pāņini's grammar in Adhyāya2, Pādas l and 2 as also in VI.1.158, and in VIII. 1.16 to VIII.3.54 and include rules in connection with compounds, accents and euphonic combinations. When, however, an operation is prescribed for two or more padas, it is necessary that the two padas or words must be syntactically connectible; confer, compare समर्थः पदविधिः P. II.1.1.
padasaṃskārapakṣaan alternative view with वाक्यसंस्कारपक्ष regarding the formation of words by the application of affixes to crude bases. According to the Padasamskāra alternative, every word is formed independently, and after formation the words are syntactically connected and used in a sentence. The sense of the sentence too, is understood after the sense of every word has been understood; confer, compare सुविचार्य पदस्यार्थं वाक्यं गृह्णन्ति सूरयः Sira. on Pari. 22. According to the other alternative viz. वाक्यसंस्कारपक्ष, a whole sentence is brought before the mind and then the constituent individual words are formed exempli gratia, for example राम +सु, गम् + अ + ति । Both the views have got some advantages and some defects; confer, compare Par. Sek. Pari. 56.
padasphoṭaexpression of the sense by the whole word without any consideration shown to its division into a base and an affix. For instance, the word रामेण means 'by Rama' irrespective of any consideration whether न is the affix or इन is the affix which could be any of the two, or even one, different from the two; confer, compare उपायाः शिक्षमाणानां वालानामपलापनाः Vākyapadīya II.240.
padārthameaning of a word, signification of a word; that which corresponds to the meaning of a word; sense of a word. Grammarians look upon both-the generic notion and the individual object as Padārtha or meaning of a word, and support their view by quoting the sūtras of Pāņini जात्याख्यायामेकस्मिन् बहुवचनमन्यतरस्याम् I. 2.58 and सरूपाणामेकशेष एकविभक्तौ I. 2.64; confer, compare किं पुनराकृतिः पदार्थ अाहोस्विद् द्रव्यम् । उभयमित्याह । कथं ज्ञायते । उभयथा ह्याचार्येण सूत्राणि प्रणीतानि । अाकृतिं पदार्थे मत्वा जात्याख्यायामित्युच्यते | द्रव्यं पदार्थे मत्वा सरूपाणामित्येकशेष अारभ्यते, Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). in I. 1. first Āhnika. In rules of grammar the meaning of a word is generally the vocal element or the wording, as the science of grammar deals with words and their formation; confer, compare स्वं रूपं शब्दस्याशब्दसंज्ञा, P. I. 1. 68. The possession of vocal element as the sense is technically termed शब्दपदार्थकता as opposed to अर्थपदार्थकता; confer, compare सोसौ गोशब्दः स्वस्मात्पदार्थात् प्रच्युतो यासौ अर्थपदार्थकता तस्याः शब्दपदार्थकः संपद्यते Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). I. 1.44 V. 3. The word पदार्थ means also the categories or the predicaments in connection with the different Śāstrās or lores as for instance, the 25 categories in the Sāmkhyaśāstra or 7 in the Vaiśeșika system or 16 in the NyayaŚāstra. The Vyākaranaśāstra, in this way to state, has only one category the Akhandavākyasphota or the radical meaning given by the sentence in one strok
paraṃkāryatvaor परंकार्यत्वपक्ष the view that the subsequent संज्ञा or technical term should be preferred to the prior one, when both happen to apply simultaneously to a word. The word is frequently used in the Mahaabhaasya as referring to the reading आ काडारात् परं कार्यम् which is believed to have been an alternative reading to the reading अा कडारादेका संज्ञा;confer, compare ननु च यस्यापि परंकार्यत्वं तेनापि परग्रहणं कर्तव्यम्; Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.4.1; also भवेदेकसंज्ञाधिकारे सिद्धम् | परंकार्यत्वे तु न सिद्ध्यति: M.Bh. on II. 1.20, II.2.24.
paratvanyāyaapplication of the later rule before the former one, according to the dictum laid down by Paanini in the rule विप्रतिषेधे परं कार्यम् P. I. 4.2 ; confer, compare परत्वन्यायो 'न लङ्कितो भवति Sira. Pari. 84,
paranipātaliterallyplacing after; the placing of a word in a compound after another as contrasted with पूर्वनिपात . A subordinate word is generally placed first in a compound, confer, compare उपसर्जनं पूर्वम्; in some exceptional cases however, this general rule is not observed as in the cases of राजदन्त and the like, where the subordinate word is placed after the principal word, and which cases, hence, are taken as cases of परनिपात. The words पूर्व and पर are relative, and hence, the cases of परनिपात with respect to the subordinate word ( उपसर्जन ) such as राजद्न्त, प्राप्तजीविक et cetera, and others can be called cases of पूर्वनिपात with respect to the principal word ( प्रधान ) confer, compare परश्शता: राजदन्तादित्वात्परनिपात: Kaas. on P. II.1.39.
paramaprakṛtithe most original base; the original of the original base; the word is used in connection with a base which is not a direct base to which an affix is added, but which is a remote base;confer, compare अापत्यो वा गेात्रम् | परमप्रकृतश्च अापत्यः । Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P.IV.1.89; confer, compare also Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). om IV.1.93,98,163.
paramāṇua time-unit equal to one-half of the unit called अणु, which forms one-half of the unit called मात्रा which is required for the purpose of the utterance of a consonant; confer, compare परमाणु अर्धाणुमात्रा V. Pr.I.61. परमाणु, in short, is the duration of very infinitesimal time equal to the pause between two individual continuous sounds. The interval between the utterances of two consecutive consonants is given to be equivalent to one Paramanu; confer, compare वर्णान्तरं परमाणु R.T.34.
paravipratiṣedhathe conflict between two rules (by occurrence together) when the latter prevails over the former and takes place by. Virtue of the dictum विप्रतिषेधे परं कार्यम् P.I. 4.2; confer, compare कथं ये परविप्रतिषेधाः M.Bh. on I.4.2.
parasavarṇacognate of the latter vowel or consonant. The word is frequently used in grammar in connection with a substitute or आदेश which is specified to be cognate ( सवर्ण ) of the succeeding vowel or consonant: confer, compare अनुस्वरस्य यथि परसवर्ण: P.VIII. 4. 58.
parāthe highest eternal voice or word, the highest and the most lofty of the our divisions of language (वाक), viz. परा,पश्यन्ती, मध्यमा and वैखरी, which, (परा), philosophically is identified with नाद ( व्रह्म ) or शब्दब्रह्म . It is described as वर्णादि -विशेषरहिता चेतनमिश्रा सृष्ट्युपयोगिनी जगदुपादानभूता कुण्डलिनीरूपेण प्राणिनां मूलाधारे वर्तते | कुण्डलिन्याः प्राणवायुसंयोगे परा व्यज्यते | इयं निःष्पन्दा पश्यन्त्यादयः सस्पन्दा अस्या विवर्तः । इयमेव सूक्ष्मस्फोट इत्युच्यते ।
paribhāṣāan authoritative statement or dictum, helping (1) the correct interpretation of the rules (sūtras) of grammar, or (2) the removal of conflict between two rules which occur simultaneously in the process of the formation of words, (पदसिद्धि), or (3) the formation of correct words. Various definitions of the word परिभाषा are given by commentators, the prominent ones beingपरितो व्यापृतां भाषां परिभाषां प्रचक्षते(न्यास);or, परितो भाष्यते या सा परिभाषा प्रकीर्तिता. The word is also defined as विधौ नियामकरिणी परिभाषा ( दुर्गसिंहवृत्ति ). परिभाषा can also be briefiy defined as the convention of a standard author. Purusottamadeva applies the word परिभाषा to the maxims of standard writers, confer, compare परिभाषा हिं न पाणिनीयानि वचनानि; Puru. Pari. 119; while Haribhaskara at the end of his treatise परिभाषाभास्कर, states that Vyaadi was the first writer on Paribhaasas. The rules तस्मिन्निति निर्दिष्टे पूर्वस्य, तस्मादित्युत्तरस्य and others are in fact Paribhaasa rules laid down by Panini. For the difference between परिभाषा and अधिकार, see Mahabhasya on II.1.1. Many times the writers of Sutras lay down certain conventions for the proper interpretation of their rules, to which additions are made in course of time according to necessities that arise, by commentators. In the different systems of grammar there are different collections of Paribhasas. In Panini's system, apart from commentaries thereon, there are independent collections of Paribhasas by Vyadi, Bhojadeva, Purusottamadeva, Siradeva, Nilakantha, Haribhaskara, Nagesa and a few others. There are independent collections of Paribhasas in the Katantra, Candra, Sakatayana,Jainendra and Hemacandra systems of grammar. It is a noticeable fact that many Paribhasas are common, with their wordings quite similar or sometimes identical in the different systemanuscript. Generally the collections of Paribhasas have got scholiums or commentaries by recognised grammarians, which in their turn have sometimes other glosses or commentaries upon them. The Paribhaasendusekhara of Nagesa is an authoritative work of an outstanding merit in the system of Paninis Grammar, which is commented upon by more than twenty five scholars during the last two or three centuries. The total number of Paribhasas in the diferent systems of grammar may wellnigh exceed 500. See परिभाषासंग्रह.
paribhāṣāvṛttia general name given to an explanatory independent work on Paribhasas of the type of a gloss on a collection of Paribhasas,irrespective of the system of grammar, whether it be that of Panini, or of Katantra, or of Jainendra or of Hemacandra. The treatises of Vyadi (Panini system), Durgasimha and BhavamiSra (Katantra system), Purusottamadeva and Siradeva (Panini system), Abhyankar (Jainendra system) and others are all known by the name Paribhasavritti.
paribhāṣāsegraha'a work containing a collection of independent works on Paribhasas in the several systems of Sanskrit Grammar, compiled by M. M. K. V. Abhyankar. The collectlon consists of the following works (i) परिभाषासूचन containing 93 Paribhasas with a commentary by Vyadi, an ancient grammarian who lived before Patanjali; ( ii ) ब्याडीयपरिभाषापाठ, a bare text of 140 Paribhaasaas belonging to the school of Vyadi (iii) शाकटायनपरिभाषासूत्र a text of 98 Paribhasa aphorisms, attributed to the ancient grammarian Saka-tayana, or belonging to that school; [iv) चान्द्रपरिभाषासूत्र a text of 86 Paribhasa aphorisms given at the end of his grammar work by Candragomin; (v) कातन्त्रपरिभाषासूत्रवृत्ति a gloss on 65 Paribhas aphorisms of the Katantra school by Durgasimha; (vi) कातन्त्रपारभाषासूत्रवृत्ति a short gloss on 62 Paribhasa aphorisms of the Katantra school by Bhavamisra; (vii) कातन्त्रपरिभाषासूत्र a text of 96 Paribhasa rules belonging to the Katantra school without any author's name associated with it; (viii) कालापपरिभाषासूत्र a text of 118 Paribhasa rules belonging to the Kalapa school without any author's name associated with it; (ix) जैनेन्द्रपरिभाषावृत्ति a gloss written by M. M. K. V. Abhyankar ( the compiler of the collection), on 108 Paribhasas or maxims noticeable in the Mahavrtti of Abhayanandin on the Jainendra Vyakarana of Pujyapada Devanandin; (x) भोजदेवकृतपरि-भाषासूत्र a text of 118 Paribhasa rules given by Bhoja in the second pada of the first adhyaaya of his grammar work named Sarasvatikanthabharana; (xi) न्यायसंग्रह a bare text of 140 paribhasas(which are called by the name nyaya) given by Hema-hamsagani in his paribhasa.work named न्यायसंग्रह; (xii) लधुपरिभाषावृत्ति a gloss on 120 Paribhasas of the Panini school written by Puruso-ttamadeva; (xiii) वृहत्परिभाषावृत्ति con-taining 130 Paribhasas with a commentary by Siradeva and a very short,gloss on the commentary by Srimanasarman ( xiv ) परिभाषावृत्ति a short gloss on 140 Paribhasas of the Panini school written by Nilakantha; (xv) परिभाषाभास्कर a collection of 132 Paribhasas with a commentary by Haribhaskara Agnihotri; (xvi) bare text of Paribhasa given and explained by Nagesabhatta in his Paribhasendusekhara. The total number of Paribhasas mentioned and treated in the whole collection exceeds five hundredition
paribhāṣāsūcanaan old work on the Paribhasas in the system of Panini's Grammar, believed to have been written by Vyaadi, who lived after Kaatyayana and before Patanjali. The work is written in the old style of the MahabhaSya and consists of a short commentary on 93 Paribhasas.
paribhāṣenduśekharathe reputed authoritative work on the Paribhasas in the system of Paanini's grammar written by Nagesabhatta in the beginning of the 18th century A.D. at Benares. The work is studied very widely and has got more than 25 commentaries written by pupils in the spiritual line of Nagesa. Well-known among these commentaries are those written by Vaidyanatha Payagunde ( called गदा ), by BhairavamiSra ( called मिश्री), by Raghavendraacaarya Gajendragadakara ( called त्रिपथगा ), by Govindacarya Astaputre of Poona in the beginning of the nineteenth century (called भावार्थदीपिका), by BhaskaraSastri Abhyankar of Satara (called भास्करी ), and by M. M. Vaasudevasaastri Abhyankar of Poona (called तत्त्वादर्श ). Besides these, there are commentaries written by Taatya Sastri Patawardhana,Ganapati Sastri Mokaate, Jayadeva Misra, VisnuSastri Bhat, Vishwanatha Dandibhatta, Harinaatha Dwiwedi Gopaalacarya Karhaadkar, Harishastri Bhagawata, Govinda Shastri Bharadwaja, Naarayana Shastri Galagali, Venumaadhava Shukla, Brahmaananda Saraswati, ManisiSeSaSarma,Manyudeva, Samkarabhatta, Indirapati, Bhimacarya Galagali, Madhavacarya Waikaar, Cidrupasraya, Bhimabhatta, LakSminrsimha and a few others. Some of these works are named by their authors as Tikaas, others as Vyaakhyaas and still others as Tippanis or Vivrtis.
parisamāptiapplication of the complete sense; the word is found used in the three alternative views about the application of the full sense of a sentence,collectively, individually or in both the ways, to the individuals concerned ; confer, compareप्रत्येकं वाक्यपरिसमाप्ति:, समुदाये वाक्यपरिसमाप्तिः, उभयथा वाक्यपरिसमाप्तिः ; confer, compare Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). I. 1.1 Vart12; ( 2 ) completion ; confer, compare वृत्करणं ल्वादीनां प्वादीनां च परिसमाप्त्यर्थमिति Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on VII. 3.80.
parihāra(1)removal of a difficulty, confer, compare अन्यथा कृत्वा चोदितमन्यथा कृत्वा परिहारं: Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. IV. 1.7. Vart. 3: (2) repetition in the Padapatha, Kramapatha et cetera, and others e. g अकरित्यक:. In this sense the word is found in the neuter gender ; confer, compare रेफपरिहाराणि Atharvaveda Prātiśākhya. III. 1.1.
parjanyavallakṣaṇapravṛttithe application of a grammatical rule or operation like the rains which occur on dry land as also on the sea surface: confer, compare कृतकारि खल्वपि शास्त्रं पर्जन्यवत् । तद्यथा । पर्जन्यो यावदूनं पूर्णे च सर्वमभिवर्षति । M.Bh. on P.I. 1.29 ; VI. 1.127: cf also यथा पर्जन्यः यावदूनं पूर्णे वाभिवर्षति एवं लक्षणमपि दीर्घस्य दीर्घत्वम् । चिचीषति, बुभूषति। Vyaadi. Pari. 58, confer, compare कृतकारि शास्त्रं मेघवत् न चाकृतकारि दहनवत् Puruso. Pari. 86.
paśyantīname of the second out of the four successive stages in the origination or utterance of a word from the mouth. According to the ancient writers on Phonetics, sound or word ( वाक् ) which is constituted of air ( वायु ) originates at the Mulaadhaaracakra where it is called परा. It then springs up and it is called पश्यन्ती in the second stage. Thence it comes up and is called मध्यमा in the third stage; rising up from the third stage when the air strikes against the vocal chords in the glottis and comes in contact with the different parts of the mouth, it becomes articulate and is heard in the form of different sounds. when it is called वैखरी; confer, compare वैखर्या मध्यमायाश्च पश्यन्त्याश्चैतदद्भुतम् । अनेकतीर्थभेदायास्त्रय्या वाचः परं पदम् Vaakyapadiya I. 144, and also confer, compare पश्यन्ती तु सा चलाचलप्रतिबद्धसमाधाना संनिविष्टज्ञेयाकारा प्रतिलीनाकारा निराकारा च परिच्छिन्नार्थप्रत्ययवभासा संसृष्टार्थप्रत्यवभासा च प्रशान्तसर्वार्थप्रत्यवभासा चेत्यपरिमितभेदा । पश्यन्त्या रूपमनपभ्रंशामसंकीर्ण लोकव्यवह्यरातीतम् । commentary on Vaakyapadiya I. 144. confer, compare also तत्र श्रोत्रविषया वैखरी । मध्यमा हृदयदशेस्था पदप्रत्यक्षानुपपत्त्या व्यवहारकारणम् । पश्यन्ती तु लोकव्यवहारातीता। योगिनां तु तत्रापि प्रकृतिप्रत्ययविभागावगतिरस्ति | परायां तु न इति त्रय्या इत्युक्तम् । Mahābhāṣya-Pradīpoddyota by Nāgeśa.on चत्वारि वाक्परिमिता पदानि । Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). Ahnika 1.
pāṭha(1)recital of a sacred Vedic or Sastra work; the original recital of an authoritative text;(2) the various artificial ways or methods of such a recital; c.g. पदपाठ, क्रमपाठ et cetera, and others in the case of Vedic Literature: (3) an original recital such as the सुत्रपाठ, धातुपाठ, गणपाठ, वार्तिकपाठ and परिभाषापाठ in the case of the several systems of Sanskrit Grammar; the five Paathas are called पञ्चपाठी; (4) recitation; confer, compare नान्तरेण पाठं स्वरा अनुबन्धा वा शक्या विज्ञातुम् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P.I.3.1 Vaart. 13; (5) reading, variant: confer, compare चूर्णादीनि अप्राण्युपग्रहादिति सूत्रस्य पाठान्तरम् Kaas. on P.V.2.134.
pāṇinithe illustrious ancient grammarian of India who is wellknown by his magnum opus, the Astaka or Astaadhyaayi which has maintained its position as a unique work on Sanskrit grammar unparalleled upto the present day by any other work on grammar, not only of the Sanskrit language, but ofany other language, classical as well as spoken. His mighty intelligence grasped, studied and digested not only the niceties of accentuation and formation of Vedic words, scattered in the vast Vedic Literature of his time, but those of classical words in the classical literature and the spoken Sanskrit language of his time in all its different aspects and shades, noticeable in the various provinces and districts of the vast country. The result of his careful study of the Vedic Literature and close observation ofeminine.the classical Sanskrit, which was a spoken language in his days, was the production of the wonderful and monumental work, the Astaadhyaayi,which gives an authoritative description of the Sanskrit language, to have a complete exposition of which,several life times have to be spent,in spite of several commentaries upon it, written from time to time by several distinguished scholars. The work is a linguist's and not a language teacher's. Some Western scholars have described it as a wonderful specimen of human intelligence,or as a notable manifestation of human intelligence. Very little is known unfortunately about his native place,parentage or personal history. The account given about these in the Kathaasaritsaagara and other books is only legendary and hence, it has very little historical value. The internal evidence, supplied by his work shows that he lived in the sixth or the seventh century B. C., if not earlier, in the north western province of India of those days. Jinendrabuddhi, the author of the Kaasikavivaranapanjikaa or Nyasa, has stated that the word शलातुर् mentioned by him in his sUtra ( IV. 3.94 ) refers to his native place and the word शालातुरीय derived by him from the word शलातुर by that sUtra was, in fact his own name, based upon the name of the town which formed his native placcusative case. Paanini has shown in his work his close knowledge of, and familiarity with, the names of towns, villages, districts, rivers and mountains in and near Vaahika, the north-western Punjab of the present day, and it is very likely that he was educated at the ancient University of Taksasilaa. Apart from the authors of the Pratisaakhya works, which in a way could be styled as grammar works, there were scholars of grammar as such, who preceded him and out of whom he has mentioned ten viz., Apisali, Saakataayana, Gaargya, Saakalya, Kaasyapa, Bharadwaja, Gaalava, Caakravarmana Senaka and Sphotaayana. The grammarian Indra has not been mentioned by Paanini, although tradition says that he was the first grammarian of the Sanskrit language. It is very likely that Paanini had no grammar work of Indra before him, but at the same time it can be said that the works of some grammarians , mentioned by Panini such as Saakaatyana, Apisali, Gaargya and others had been based on the work of Indra. The mention of several ganas as also the exhaustive enumeration of all the two thousand and two hundred roots in the Dhaatupaatha can very well testify to the existence of systematic grammatical works before Paarnini of which he has made a thorough study and a careful use in the composition of his Ganapaatha and Dhaatupatha. His exhaustive grammar of a rich language like Sanskrit has not only remained superb in spite of several other grammars of the language written subsequently, but its careful study is felt as a supreme necessity by scholars of philology and linguistics of the present day for doing any real work in the vast field of linguistic research. For details see pp.151154 Vol. VII of Paatanjala Mahaabhsya, D. E. Society's Edition.
pāṇinisūtracalled also by the name अष्टक or पाणिनीय-अष्टक; name given to the SUtras of Paanini comprising eight adhyaayaas or books. The total number of SUtras as commented upon by the writers of the Kasika and the Siddhaantakaumudi is 3983. As nine sUtras out of these are described as Vaarttikas and two as Ganasutras by Patanjali, it is evident that there were 3972 SUtras in the Astaka of Paanini according to Patanjali. A verse current among Vaiyakarana schools states the number to be 3996; confer, compare त्रीणि सूत्रसहस्राणि तथा नव शतानि च । षण्णवतिश्च सूत्राणां पाणिनिः कृतवान् स्वयम् । The traditional recital by Veda Scholars who look upon the Astadhyayi as a Vedaanga, consists of 3983 Sutras which are accepted and commented upon by all later grammarians and commentators. The SUtras of Paanini, which mainly aim at the correct formation of words, discuss declension, conjugation, euphonic changes, verbal derivatives, noun derivatives and accents. For details see Vol.VII, Vyaakarana Mahaabhaasya, D. E. Society's edition pp. 152-162.
pāṇinisūtravārtikaname given to the collection of explanatory pithy notes of the type of SUtras written. mainly by Kaatyaayana. The Varttikas are generally written in the style of the SUtras, but sometimes they are written in Verse also. The total number of Varttikas is well-nigh a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page. 5000, including Varttikas in Verse.There are three kinds of Varttikas; confer, compareउक्तानुक्तदुरुक्तानां चिन्ता यत्र प्रवर्तते । तं ग्रन्थं वार्तिकं प्राहुर्वार्तिकज्ञा मनीषिणः । Naagesa appears to have divided Varttikas into two classes as shown by his definition 'सूत्रेऽ नुक्तदुरुक्तचिन्ताकरत्वं वार्तिकत्वम् '. If this definition be followed, many of the Vaarttikas given in the Maahibhaasya as explaining and commenting upon the Sutras will not strictly be termed as Vaarttikaas, and their total number which is given as exceeding 5000, will be reduced to about 1400 or so. There are some manuscript copies which give this reduced number, and it may be said that only these Vārttikas were written by Kātyāyana while the others were added by learned grammarians after Kātyāyana. In the Mahābhāșya there are seen more than 5000 statements of the type of Vārttikas out of which Dr. Kielhorn has marked about 4200 as Vārttikas. At some places the Mahābhāșyakāra has quoted the names of the authors of some Vārttikas or their schools, in words such as क्रोष्ट्रीयाः पठन्ति, भारद्वाजीयाः पठन्ति, सौनागाः पठन्ति. et cetera, and others Many of the Vārttikas given in the Mahābhāșya are not seen in the Kāśikāvŗtti, while some more are seen in the Kāśikā-vŗtti, which, evidently are composed by scholars who flourished after Patańjali, as they have not been noticed by the Mahābhāșyakāra. It is very difficult to show separately the statements of the Bhāșyakāra popularly named 'ișțis' from the Vārttikas of Kātyāyana and others. For details see Vol. VII Mahābhāșya, D.E. Society's edition pp. 193-224.
pāṇinisūtravṛttia gloss on the grammer rules of Pāņini. Many glosses were written from time to time on the Sûtras of Pāņini, out of which the most important and the oldest one is the one named Kāśikāvŗtti, written by the joint authors Jayāditya and Vāmana in the 7th century A.D. It is believed that the Kāśikāvŗtti was based upon some old Vŗttis said to have been written by कुणि, निर्लूर, चुल्लि, श्वोभूति, वररुचि and others.Besides Kāśikā,the famous Vŗtti, and those of कुणि,निर्लूर and others which are only reported, there are other Vŗttis which are comparatively modern. Some of them have been printed, while others have remained only in manuscript form. Some of these are : the Bhāșāvŗtti by Purusottamadeva, Vyākaranasudhānidhi by Viśveśvara, Gūdhārthadīpinī by Sadāsivamiśra, Sūtravŗtti by Annambhatta, Vaiyākaraņasarvasva by Dharaņīdhara, Śabdabhūșaņa by Nārāyaņa Paņdita, Pāņinisūtravŗtti by Rāmacandrabhațța Tāre and Vyākaranadīpikā by Orambhațța. There are extracts available from a Sūtravŗtti called Bhāgavŗtti which is ascribed to Bhartŗhari, but, which is evidently written by a later writer (विमलमति according to some scholars) as there are found verses from Bhāravi and Māgha quoted in it as noticed by Sīradeva's Paribhāṣāvṛttiin his vŗtti on Pari.76. Glosses based upon Pāņini Sūtras, but having a topical arrangements are also available, the famous ones among these being the Praķriyākaumudī by Rāmacandra Śeșa and the Siddhāntakaumudī by Bhațțojī Dĩkșita. The मध्यमकौमुदी and the लघुकौमुदी can also be noted here although they are the abridgments of the Siddhānta Kaumudī. There are Vŗttis in other languages also, written in modern times, out of which those written by Bōhtlingk, Basu and Renou are well-known.
pādaliterally foot; the term is applied to a fourth part of a section such as अध्याय, or of a verse which is divisible into four parts or lines; cf प्रकृत्यान्तःपादमव्यपरे P. VI.1.115, also गोः पादान्ते P. VII. 1.57.
pāriṣadaliterally belonging to the assembly; the term पारिषद refers to the results of the discussions held at the assemblies of specially prominent scholars or learned persons ; confer, compare सर्ववेदपारिषदं हीदं शास्त्रं (ब्याकरणम्) तत्र नैकः पन्था: शक्य आस्थातुम् । Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on II. 1. 58; VI. 3.14.
pārokṣyaremoteness; literally being out of sight; in grammar, पारोक्ष्य is a condition for the use of the perfect tense ( लिट् ). See परोक्ष.
pitmarked with the mute letter प् which is indicative of a grave accent in the case of affixes marked with it, as for example, the affixes तिप् , सिप् and मिप् ; confer, compare अनुदात्तौ सुप्पितौ P. III. 1.4. A Sarvadhātuka affix, marked with the mute consonant प्, in Pāņiņi's Grammar has been described as instrumental in causing many operations such as (a) the substitution of guņa; (cf P. VII. 3 84,9l). (b) the prevention of guņa in the case of a reduplicative syllable as also in the case of the roots भू and सू ( confer, compare P. VII. 3.87, 88 ); (c) the substitution of Vŗddhi, (confer, compare P. VII. 3.89, 90 ), (d) the augments इ and ई in the case of the roots तृह् and ब्रू respectively ( confer, compare P. VII. 3.92, 93, 94 ), and (e) acute accent for the vowel preceding the affix in the case of the roots भी, हृी, भृ and others ( confer, compare P. VI. 1.192 ). A short vowel (of a root) gets त् added to it when followed by a kŗt affix marked with प्: exempli gratia, for example, विजित्य​, प्रकृत्य, et cetera, and others:(confer, compare P. VI. 1.71 ).
puṃvadbhāvarestoration of the masculine form in the place of the feminine one as noticed in compound words, formed generally by the Karmadhāraya and the Bahuvrīhi compounds, where the first member is declinable in all the three genders; e. g. दीर्घजङ्घः. This restoration to the masculine form is also noticed before the taddhita affix. affixes तस्, तर, तम्, रूप्य, पा​श, त्व as also before क्यङ् and the word मानिन्. For details, see P. VI, 3.34 to 42 and commentaries thereon. See also page 334, Vol. VII of the Pātańjala Mahābhāșya D. E. Society's edition.
pukthe augment प् added to the roots ऋ, हृी, क्नूय् et cetera, and others as also to all roots ending in अा before the causal sign णिच् ( इ ); e. g. अर्पयति, ह्वेपयति, क्नोपयति, दापयति, et cetera, and others: confer, compare अर्त्तिह्रीब्लीरीक्नूयीक्ष्माय्यातां पुङ् णौ P. VII.3.36.
putraṭ(1)the word पुत्र as given in the ancient list of masculine words marked with the mute letter ट् to signify the addition of the feminine. affix ई ( ङीप् ): confer, compare P. IV.1.15: (2) the substitute पुत्रट् ( i. e. पुत्री ) for the word दुहितृ optionally prescribed after the words सूत, उग्र, राज, भोज, कुल and मेरु in the simple sense of 'girl' and not ' daughter ' e. g. राजपुत्री, सूतपुत्री; confer, compare P.VI.3.70 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 9.
punaḥprasaṅgavijñānaoccurrence or possibility of the application of a preceding grammatical rule or operation a second time again, after once it has been set aside by a subsequent opposing rule or rules in conflict; confer, compare पुनःप्रसङ्गविज्ञानात् सिद्धम् Paribhāṣenduśekhara of Nāgeśa. Pari. 39; confer, compare Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I. 4.2 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 7; confer, comparealso Puru. Pari. 40.
punargrahaṇarecital of a word again in the Krama and other Pāțhas for a special purpose, although such a recital after three times is generally discouraged; confer, compare एवमर्थविशेषात् पुनरुक्तस्य ग्रहणं भवति ... Uv Bhāşya on Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.IV. 177.
punarvacanause of the same word or expression, which, if noticed in the writing of the Sūtrakāra, is indicative of something in the mind of the Sūtrakāra; confer, compare अणः पुनर्वचनमपवादविषये अनिवृत्त्यर्थम् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). of P III. 3. 12 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini).1; cf also पुनर्वचनमनित्यत्वज्ञापनार्थम् । Kāś. on P. I. 41"
pum.or पुंस् masculine. It appears that both पुभ्, and पुंस् were current terms meaning 'masculine ' in ancient days. confer, compare पुमः खय्यम्परे P.VIII. 3.12. and पुंसोसुङ् P. VII. 1.89. Although पुभ् is changed to पुंस् before a word beginning with a hard consonant, still पुंस् is given as an independent word derived from the root पा confer, compare पातेर्डुम्सुन् Unādi S IV. 177; confer, compare also the expressions पुंवचन, पुंलिङ्ग and पुंयोग.
purastātoccurring beforehand, preceding: confer, compare पुरस्तादपवादा अनन्तरान् विधीन् बाध​न्ते , नोत्तरान् Par. Sek. Pari. 59, also M.Bh. on VII. 2.100; confer, compare also the expression पुरस्तादुपकर्ष which means the same as अपकर्ष which is opposed to अनुवृत्ति.
puruṣaa grammatical term in the sense of 'person:' confer, compare करोतिः पचादीनां सर्वान् कालान् सर्वान् पुरुषान्सर्वाणि वचनान्यनुवर्तते, भवतिः पुनर्वर्तमानकालं चैकत्वं च. These persons or Purușas are described to be three प्रथम, मध्यम and उत्तम corresponding to the third second and first persons respectively in English Grammar; confer, compare also Nirukta of Yāska.VII. l and 2.
puṣkaraṇaa popular term used for the treatise on grammar by an ancient grammarian Apisali. confer, compare अापिशलं पुष्करणम् Kas on P. IV. 3. 15. It was called Puskarana probably because it was very extensive and widely read before Panini. For the reading दुष्करण for पुष्करण, and other details see Mahabhasya Vol. VII. pp. 132-133, D. E. Society's edition.
pūraṇaan ordinal numeral; literally the word means completion of a particular number ( संख्या ); confer, compare येन संख्या संख्यानं पूर्यते संपद्यते स तस्याः पूरणः । एकादंशानां पूरणः एकादशः । Kas, on P.V. 2.48. The word is used also in the sense of an affix by the application of which the particular number ( संख्या ) referring to an object, is shown as complete; confer, compare यस्मिन्नुपसंजाते अन्या संख्या संपद्यते स प्रत्ययार्थः Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. V.2.48. These Purana pratyayas are given in P. V. 2. 48-58, confer, compare पूरणं नामार्थः । तमाह Xतीयशव्दः । अतः पूरणम् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P.II.2.3. The word also means 'an ordinal number'; confer, compare पूरणगुणसुहितार्थसदव्ययतव्यसमानाधिकरणेन P.II.2.11.
pūraṇāntaending with an ordinal affix: the same as पूरणप्रत्ययान्त; confer, compare योसौ पूर्णान्तात् स्वार्थ अन् सोपि पूरणमेव M.Bh.on P. II. 2.3.
pūrva(l)ancient, old: (2) belonging to the Eastern districts. The word is frequently used as qualifying the word अाचार्य where it means ancient.
pūrvatrāsiddhavacanathe dictum of Panini about rules in his second, third and fourth quarters (Padas) of the eighth Adhyaya being invalid to (viz. not seen by) all the previous rules in the first seven chapters and the first quarter of the eighth as laid down by him in the rule पूर्वत्रासिद्धम् VIII.2.1. The rule पूर्वत्रासिद्धम् is taken also as a governing rule id est, that is अधिकार laying down that in the last three quarters also of his grammar, a subsequent rule is invalid to the preceding rule. The purpose of this dictum is to prohibit the application of the rules in the last three quarters as also that of a subsequent rule in the last three quarters, before all such preceding rules, as are applicable in the formation of a word, have been given effect to; confer, compare एवमिहापि पर्वेत्रासिद्धवचनं अादेशलक्षणप्रतिषेधार्थमुत्सर्गलक्षणभावार्थं च M.Bh. on P. VIII.2.1 Vart. 8.
pūrvanighātathe grave accent for the preceding acute vowel as a result of the following vowel made acute, and the preceding , as a result, turned into grave by virtue of the rule अनुदात्तं पदमेकवर्जम् VI.1.198: confer, compare मतुब्विभक्त्युदात्तत्वं पूर्वनिघातस्यानिमित्तं स्यात् । अग्निमान् । वायुमान् । Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P.I.1.39 Vart. 16.
pūrvavipratiṣedhaconflict of two rules where the preceding rule supersedes the latter rule, as the arrival at the correct form requires it. Generally the dictum is that a subsequent rule should supersede the preceding one; cf विप्रतिषेधे परं कार्यम् P. I. 4. 2; but sometimes the previous rule has to supersede the subsequent one in spite of the dictum विप्रतिषेधे परम्. The author of the Mahabhasya has brought these cases of the पूर्वविप्रतिषेध, which are, in fact, numerous, under the rule विप्रतिषेधे परं कार्यम् by taking the word पर in the sense of इष्ट 'what is desired '?; confer, compare इष्टवाची परशब्दः । विप्रतिषेधे परं यदिष्टं तद्भवतीति l Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I. 1.3; I.2, 5: I. 4.2: II.1.69, IV.1.85et cetera, and others confer, comparealso पूर्वविप्रतिषेधो नाम अयं र्विप्रतिषेधे परमित्यत्र परशब्दस्य इष्टवाचित्वाल्लब्धः सूत्रार्थः परिभाषारुपेण पाठ्यते Puru. Pari 108; for details see page 217 Vol. VII Mahabhasya D. E. Society's edition.
pūrvāntaend of the previous. The word is used in connection with a vowel which is substituted for two vowels (एकादेश.). Such a substitute is looked upon as the ending vowel of the preceding word or the initial vowel of the succeeding word; it cannot be looked upon as both at one and the same time; confer, compare अन्तादिवच्च P. VI. 1. 85 and उभयत अाश्रयेण नान्तादिवत् Sira. Pari. 60; confer, compare also किं पुनरयं पूर्वान्तः अहोस्वित् परादिः अाहोस्विदभक्तः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I. 1. 47 Vart. 3.
pṛthakseparately as far as hearing is concerned; distinctly separate from another; confer, compare सप्त स्वरा ये यमास्ते पृथग्वा Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XIII. 17.
pedubhaṭṭaa grammarian.who has written a treatise named औणादिकपदार्णव on the Unadi sutras.
paurvāparya(1)a relation between two operations or rules based upon their anterior and ulterior positions, which is many times taken into consideration for deciding their relative strength; (2) the order of words; cf शब्देनार्थान्वाच्यान् दृष्ट्वा बुद्धौ कुर्यात् पौर्वापर्यम् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ).on P 1.4.109 Vart. 10 cf also पौर्वापर्यमकालव्यपेतं सेहिता, P. I. 4.109 Vart. 8.
prakampadepression of the voice after raising it as noticed in connection with the utterance of the svarita vowels in certain cases and in certain Vedic schools with a view to show the svarita nature of the vowel distinctly, in spite of the fact that such a depression is generally looked upon as a.fault; confer, compare असन्दिग्धान् स्वरान् ब्रूयादविकृष्टानकाम्पितान् Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) III.18 as also जात्योभिानिहितश्चैव क्षैप्रः प्रश्लिष्ट एव च । एते स्वराः प्रकम्पन्ते यत्रोच्चस्वरितोदयाः Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) III. 19.
prakaraṇagranthaliterary works in which the treatment is given in the form of topics by arranging the original sutras or rules differently so that all such rules as relate to a particular topic are found together: the Prakriykaumudi, the Siddhantakumudi and others are called प्रकरणग्रन्थs. Such works are generally known by the name प्राक्रयाग्रन्थ as opposed to वृतिग्रन्थ.
prakalpaka(fem. प्रकल्पिका )a word or expression causing a change in the nature of another word or expression which has to be taken as changed accordingly; confer, compare प्रकल्पक्रमिति चेन्नियमाभावः P.I. 1.68 Vart. 15; प्रत्ययविधिरयं न च प्रत्ययविधौ पञ्चम्यः प्रकल्पिक्रा भवन्ति M.Bh. on P.I.1.27 Vart.1,I.1. 62 Vart.7; II.2.3 Vart.1, IV. 1.60; cf also रुधादिभ्यः इत्येषा पञ्चमी शप् इति प्रथमायाः षष्ठीं प्रकल्पयिष्यति, Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on II 2.3, Vart. 1, III.1.33.
prakāra(l)attribute, attribute which differentiates, manner, difference; differentiating description: confer, compare कंचित्प्रकारं प्राप्तः इत्थंभूत: Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.II.3.21: (2) resemblance, similarity of one thing with another with slight deficiency: confer, compare प्रकारे गुणवचनस्य । प्रक्रारो भेदः सादृश्यं च। तदिह सादृश्यं प्रकारो गृह्यते । प्रकारे वर्तमानस्य गुणवचनशब्दस्य द्वे भवतः । पटुपटुः मृदुमृदुः । अपरिपूर्णगुण इत्यर्थः । परिपूर्णगुणेन न्यूनगुणस्य उपमाने सत्येवं प्रयुज्यते Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. VIII.1.12; (3) differentiating attribute; confer, compare प्रकारवचने थाल् V. 3.23, प्रकारवचने जातीयर् V. 3.69, स्यूलादिभ्यः प्रकारवचने कन् V. 4.3 where Kasika defines the word प्रकार as सामान्यस्य भेदको विशेषः प्रकार: Ka, on V. 3.23 and 69; (4) type, confer, compare इतिशब्दः प्रकारार्थः Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on V. 2.93: confer, compare also अदिशब्दः प्रकारे Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on देवपथादिभ्यश्च P.V.3.100; cf also अादिइाब्दः प्रकारे वर्तते । देवदत्तादय आढ्याः । देवदत्तप्रकारा इत्यर्थः M.Bh. on I.3.1 Vart. 11.
prakāśaname of commentary on Bhartrhari's Vakyapadiya by Punjaraja.
prakīrṇakāṇḍaname given to the third Kanda or book of Bhartrhari's Vakyapadiya where miscellaneous topics are treatedition The third Kanda consists of 14 sections called by the name Samuddesa. For details see pp. 381-382 Mahabhasya Vol. VII. D. E. Society's edition.
prakṛta(1)in context, in question; the word is frequently used in connection with words in the preceding rules which are drawn on to the following rules by anuvrtti or continuation; confer, compare प्रकृतं गुणवृद्धिग्रहणमनुवर्तते, M.Bh. on I.1.3 Vart. 2: (2) found or available in a large quantity; confer, compare तत्प्रकृतवचने मयट् । प्राचुर्येण प्रस्तुतं प्रकृतम् । Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. V. 4.21.
prakṛti(1)material cause: confer, compare. तदर्थे विकृते: प्रकृतौ । प्रकृतिरुपादानकारणं तस्यैव उत्तरमवस्थान्तरं विकृतिः Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana.on P.V.1.12; (2) original, as opposed to modified' ( विकृति ); the original base of a word which is used in language by the addition of affixes. There are mentioned three kinds of such original words in grammar, roots ( धातु ), noun bases ( प्रातिपदिक ) and affixes (प्रत्यय). प्रकृति is defined as शास्त्रप्रक्रियक्रियाव्यवहारे प्रकृतिप्रत्ययविभागकल्पनय शब्दार्थभावनायां प्रत्ययात् प्रथममुपादानकारणामिव या उपादीयते तां प्रकृतिरिति व्यापदिशन्ति' in the Sringaraprakasa; confer, compare अपशब्दो ह्यस्य प्रकृति: । न चापशब्द: प्रकृतिः , न ह्यपशब्दा उपदिश्यन्ते न चानुपदिष्टा प्रकृतिरस्ति । M.Bh. on Siva Sutra 2; confer, compare also कृत्प्रकृतिर्धातु: M.Bh. on P. VI. 2. 139 Vart. 2; पदप्रकृति: संहिता । पदप्रक्तीनि सर्वचरणानां पार्षदानि Nirukta of Yāska.I.17.
prakṛtiniyamarestriction regarding the base, as contrasted with प्रत्ययनियम, confer, compare किमयं प्रत्ययनियम: प्रकृतिपर एव प्रत्ययः प्रयोक्तव्यः अप्रकृतिपरो नेति । अाहोस्वित् प्रकृतिनियमः । प्रत्ययपरैव प्रकृतिः प्रयोक्तव्या अप्रत्ययप्ररा नेति [ M.Bh. on P.III. 1.2.
prakṛtipratyayavibhāgadivision of a word (in use in a language) into the base and the affix, which is looked upon as the main function of grammar.
prakṛtibhāvaphonetical maintenance of a wording without allowing any euphonic modifications as found in the case of a dual form ending in ई,ऊ or ए,as also in other specified cases; confer, compareईदूदेद्विवचनं प्रगृह्यम् and the following rules P.I. 1.11 to 19, as also प्लुतप्रगृह्या अचि नित्यम् VI.1.125
prakṛtyantaradifference in the radical base; a different radical base; confer, compare कथमुपबर्हणम् l बृहिः प्रकृत्यन्तरम् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I.1.4; cf also प्रत्ययार्थस्याव्यतिरेकात्प्रकृत्यन्तरेषु मन्यामहे धातुरेव क्रियामाहेति M.Bh. on P.I. 3.1.
prakṛtyarthaniyamarestriction regarding the sense of the radical base; confer, compare प्रकृत्यर्थनियमे अन्येषां प्रत्ययानामभावः । अनुदात्तङितस्तृजादयो न प्राप्नुवन्ति M.Bh. on P. I. 3.12 Vart. 5
prakrama(l)the place of articulation, the place of the production of sound, such as throat, chest, palate and the like; confer, compare प्रक्रम्यन्ते अस्मिन्वर्णा इति प्रक्रमः स्थानमुच्यते Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). Pradipa on सिद्धं तु समानप्रक्रमवचनात् P.I.2.30 Vart.2; (2) recital of Veda, described as क्रमपाठ confer, compare उभयथा च प्रक्रमे दोषो भवति M.Bh.on P. VIII. 4.28 confer, compare also "अष्टसु प्रक्रमेषु दोषो भवति"quoted in the Mahabhasya on P.VI. 1.172; (3) regularity in the position of words, regular order of words.
prakriyākaumudīa well-known work on Sanskrit Grammar by रामचन्द्रशेष of the 15th century, in which the subject matter of the eight chapters of Panini's grammar is arranged into several different sections forming the different topics of grammar. It is similar to, and possibly. the predecessor of, the Siddhanta Kaumudi which has a similar arrangement. The work was very popular before the Siddhinta Kaumudi was written. it has got many commentaries numbering about a dozen viz. प्रक्रियाप्रसाद, प्रक्रियाप्रकाश, प्रक्रियाप्रदीप, अमृतस्तुति, प्रक्रियाव्याकृति,निर्मलदर्पण,तत्वचन्द्र, प्रक्रियारञ्जन, प्रक्रियाविवरण and others of which the Prasada of Vitthalesa and the Prakasa of Srikrsna are the wellknown ones.
prakriyākaumudīvṛtticalled also प्रक्रियाकौमुदीव्याख्या or even कृष्णपण्डिता ( वृत्ति ) written by a learned grammarian named Krsnapandita belonging to the famous Sesa family of grammarians.
prakriyāprasādaname of the scholarly commentary on Ramacandra's Prakriyakaumudi, written by Vitthalesa, the grandson of Ramachandra.
prakriyāsaṃgrahaa work on grammar by Abhayacandra in which the Sutras of Sakatayana's Sabdanusasana are arranged in the form of different sections dealing with the different topics of grammar.
pragāthaa couple of Vedic hymns divided into three hymns for purposes of singing as Saman; confer, compare यत्र द्वे ऋचौ प्रग्रथनेन तिस्रः क्रियन्ते स प्रगाथनात् प्रकर्षगानाद्वा प्रगाथ इत्युच्यते Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.IV 2.55.
pragṛhītapadāa description of the Samhhita text of the Veda in which a pragrhya vowel preceding another vowel is held up ( प्रगृह्य ) id est, that is kept as it is, without any euphonic combination; confer, compare सहोदयास्ताः प्रग्रहीतपदाः सर्वत्रैव त्र्यक्षरान्तास्तु नैव Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) II. 27.
praghaṭṭakaname given to the subdivisions of chapters or sections in certain books.
pracaya(1)a specific feature or quality ( धर्म ) of the grave (अनुदात्त) accent when a vowel, accented grave, is preceded by a स्वरित (circumflex . vowel) and is followed upon by another grave-accented vowel. These grave vowels in succession, id est, that is the grave vowels which are not followed by an acute or a circumflex vowel are uttered neither distinctly circumflex nor distinctly grave; cf also R. Pr, III.II-14. They are uttered like the acute, but slightly so; e. g. the vowels after मे and before ति in इमं मे गङ्गे' यमुने सरस्वति; confer, compare स्वरितात्संहितायामनुदात्तानां प्रचय उदात्तश्रुतिः Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.XXI.10, 11 also confer, compare P.I.2.39, where the term एकश्रुति is used for the word प्रचय; (2) the connection of one word with many words; exempli gratia, for example राज्ञो गोश्चाश्वश्च पुरुषश्च where राज्ञः is connected with गौ, अश्व and पुरुष; confer, compare प्रचये समासप्रतिषेधो: वक्तव्य: Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on II.1.1 Vart, 6.
pratipattiknowledge, understanding; confer, compare तस्मादनभ्युपायः शब्दानां प्रतिपत्तौ प्रतिपदप्राठः। M.Bh. on Ahn. 1 ; also confer, compare MBh. on P. I. 1. 20. Vart.5 I.1 44,46 et cetera, and others
pratipattigarīyastvadifficulty in understanding; requiring an effort to understand the sense; confer, compare योगविभागे तु प्रतियोगं भिन्नबुद्ध्युदयाद् व्यक्तं प्रतिपतिगरीयस्त्वम् Puru. Pari. 98.
pratipattigauravadifficulty in understanding; requiring a longer time in understanding the sense: confer, compare एवं हि प्रतिपत्तिगौरवंं स्यात् Sira. Pari. 50. See प्रतिपत्तिगरीयस्त्व.
pratipattilāghavafacility of understanding: confer, compare प्रतिपत्तिलाघवार्थं ज्ञाजनोर्जा इति दीर्घान्तादेशविधानम् Sira. Pari. 91.
pratipadavidhānaexpress statement by a definite wording; confer, compare एवं तर्हि उभयमनेन क्रियते अपवादविषये चानिवृत्तिः उत्सर्गविषये च प्रतिपदविधानम् । Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on III 3. 12. Vart.l: confer, compare also प्रतिपदविधाना च षष्ठी न समस्येत । का पुनः षष्ठी प्रतिपदविधाना का कृद्योगा । सर्वा षष्ठी प्रतिपदविधाना शेषलक्षणां वर्जयित्वा । क्रतृकर्मणोः कृति इति या षष्ठी सा कृद्योगा; Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. II. 2.8 and II.2.10.
pratiyeginnegative counterpart;confer, compare न चान्तरेण प्रतियोगिनं स्पर्धा भवति Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on II. 1.69. Vart. 6; also M.Bh.on VIII. 8.4 Vart. 8; corresponding term; ct. प्रथमग्रहणं च तियोग्यपेक्षत्वान्नोपयुज्यते Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on V. 3.1.
prativarṇafor every letter; corresponding to every letter; confer, compare अनर्थकास्तु वर्णाः प्रतिवर्णमर्थानुपलब्धेः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on Ahnika 2, Siva sutra 5.
pratividhānacounteraction; solving a difficulty by taking the necessary action; confer, compare अयमिदानीं स प्रतिविधानकालः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. VII. 4.60 Vart. 4; confer, compare also तत्र प्रातविधानं द्विर्वचननिमित्ते अचीत्युच्यते, Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. VI. 1.2; confer, compare also the usual expression प्रतिविधेयं दोषेषु Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on I. 1.39, I. 3.10, 4.1.l etc,
pratisaṃskaraṇaediting with improvement, with an attempt to restore the correct version or the original text in the place of the corrupt one sometimes suitable additions and improvements are also made; e. g. चरकप्रतिसंस्करण attributed to Patanjali.
pratyayaaffix, suffix, a termination, as contrasted with प्रकृति the base; confer, compare प्रत्याय्यते अर्थः अनेन इति प्रत्ययः; confer, compare also अर्थे संप्रत्याययति स प्रत्ययः M.Bh. on III. 1.l Vart. 8; The word प्रत्यय is used in the Pratisakhya works in the sense of 'following' or 'that which follows', e. g. स्पर्शे चोषः प्रत्यये पूर्वपद्यः Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) I. 30 which is explained by Uvvata as उषः इत्ययं ( शब्दः ) पूर्वपदावयवः सन् स्पर्शे प्रत्यये परभूते इति यावत्; रेफिसंज्ञो भवति; Uvvata on Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) I.30; confer, compare प्रत्येति पश्चादागच्छति इति प्रत्ययः परः Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.V. 7; cf also V. Pr, III. 8. Pratyaya or the suffix is generally placed after the base; cf, प्रत्ययः, परश्च P. III. I. 1,2; but sometimes it is placed before the base; e. g. बहुपटुः confer, compare विभाषा सुपो बहुच् पुरस्तात्तु P. V. 3.68. The conjugational signs (शप् , श्यन् et cetera, and others), the signs of tenses and moods ( च्लि, सिच् , स्य, ताम् et cetera, and others) and the compound endings(समासान्त) are all called pratyayas according fo Panini's grammar, as they are all given in the jurisdiction(अधिकार) of the rule प्रत्ययः III.1.1, which extends upto the end of the fifth chapter ( अध्याय ). There are six main kinds of affixes given in grammar सुप्प्रत्यय, तिङ्प्रत्यय, कृत्प्रत्यय , तद्धितप्रत्यय, धातुप्रत्यय (exempli gratia, for example in the roots चिकीर्ष, कण्डूय et cetera, and others) and स्त्रीप्रत्यय. The word प्रत्यय is used in the sense of realization, in which case the root इ in the word त्यय means'knowing' according to the maxim सर्वे गत्यर्था ज्ञानार्थाः; confer, compare मन्त्रार्थप्रत्ययाय Nirukta of Yāska.I.15.
pratyayagrahaṇaparibhāṣāthe guiding rule that when an affix ( प्रत्यय ) is given in a rule as a निमित्त (causing something), the affix denotes a word-form which begins with that to which that affix has been added and ends with the affix itself; confer, compare प्रत्ययग्रहणे यस्मात् स विहितस्तदादेस्तदन्तस्य च ग्रह्यणम् Par. Sek. Pari. 23. The rule यञियोश्च, which prescribes the affix फक् (आयन), has the word यञ् and इञ् which respectively mean यञन्त and इञन्त; in the word परमगार्ग्यायण from परमगार्ग्य the word गार्ग्य is looked upon as यञन्त to which फक् (अायन) is affixed and hence the word परमगार्ग्यायण is arrived at and not पारमगार्ग्य.
pratyayadhātua term applied to secondary roots which are formed by adding affixes like णिच् , सन् , यङ् et cetera, and others to primary roots or by the addition of affixes like क्विप्, क्यच् , कायच् et cetera, and others to nouns; e. g. कामय, ह्यारय, चिकीर्ष, जिहीर्ष, जेघ्रीय,चेकीय, गङ्गीय, राजाय, पुत्रकाम्य et cetera, and others; confer, compare सनाद्यन्ता धातवः P.1II.. 1.32; cf also प्रत्ययधातु । गोपायति, धूपायति, ऋतीयते Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on VI. 1.162 Vart.3.
pratyayalakṣaṇaan operation caused by an affix which takes place even though the affix is elided: exempli gratia, for example the term षद is applied to अग्निचित्, सोमसुत् et cetera, and others on account of the words ending with a case affix although the affix of the nominative case. singular. has been elided; confer, compare प्रत्ययलोपे प्रत्ययलक्षणम्. P.I.1. 62 and Kas, thereon.
pratyayavidhia rule prescribing the addition of a suffix; confer, compare यस्मात्प्रत्ययाविधिस्तदादि प्रत्ययेङ्गम्, P.I.3.13.
pratyayānta( प्रकृति )a base ending in an affix, a secondary base as opposed to the original base, which is described to be of six kinds. सुप्प्रत्ययान्ता (प्रकृतिः) as in अहंयुः, सायंतनम् et cetera, and others; तिङ्प्रत्ययान्ता as in पचतितराम् , आस्तिकः, पचतभृज्जता et cetera, and others; कृत्प्रत्ययान्ता as in कृत्रिमम् सांराविणम् et cetera, and others; तद्धितप्रत्ययान्ता as in गार्ग्यायणः, तत्रत्यः et cetera, and others; धातुसंज्ञाप्रत्ययान्ता as in चिकीर्षा, कण्डूया et cetera, and others; स्त्रीप्रत्ययान्ता as in गङ्गेयः, गौरेयः, काद्रवेयः et cetera, and others
pratyākhyānapakṣaan alternative which proposes the rejection of something such as a rule or its part; confer, compare यदि प्रत्याख्यान पक्षः इदमपि प्रत्याख्यायते Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on Siva Sutra 4; cf also अदीवयुरिति पदकारस्च प्रत्याख्यानपक्षे उदाहरणमुपपन्नं भवति Vyadi Pari. 42.
pratyāpattirestitution, restoration to the previous wording; confer, compare प्रातिपदिकस्य च प्रत्यापत्तिर्वक्तव्या Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. VI.3.34 Vart.2; restoration to the previous nature; confer, compare अकारस्य प्रत्यापत्तौ दीर्घप्रतिषेधः । खट्वा,माला । M.Bh. on P. VIII.4.68.
pratyāmnāyaliterally, repetition in a contrary way; in the Pratisakhya literature, the word refers to the repetition of a Vedic passage; repetition by pupils after hearing from the preceptor ; confer, compare प्रत्याम्नायः पुनर्वचनं Uvvata on Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XV. 9.
pratyāsattiimmediate proximity; close contact; the same as प्रत्यासङ्ग which see a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.; confer, compare हेतुमण्णिचो विधिः प्रतिषेधोपि प्रत्यासत्तेस्तस्यैव न्याय्यः Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. I 3.88. confer, compare also Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on VII.1.95.
pratyāsattinyāyaor प्रत्यासतिवचन a dictum that a word should, as fair as possible, be construed with the nearest word; confer, compare अनन्तरस्य विधिः प्रतिषेधो वेत्यर्थः प्रतिपत्तिन्यायलभ्यः Sira. Pari. 48.
pratyāhāraliterally bringing together; bringing together of several letters ( or words in a few cases, such as roots or nouns ) by mentioning the first and the last only for the sake of brevity; the term प्रत्याहार is generally used in connection with brief terms such as अण्, अक् , अच् , हल् and the like, created by Panini in his grammar by taking any particular letter and associating it with any mute final letter ( अनुबन्ध ) of the fourteen Sivasutras, with a view to include all letters beginning with the letter uttered and ending with the letter which precedes the ( mute ) letter. The practice of using such abbreviations was in existence before Panini, possibly in the grammar attributed to Indra. The term प्रत्याहार is not actually used by Panini; it is found in the Rk. Tantra; confer, compare प्रत्याहारार्थो वर्णोनुबन्धो व्यञ्जनम् R.T.I.3. The term appears to have come into use after Panini. Panini has not given any definition of the term प्रत्याहार. He has simply given the method of forming the Pratyaharas and he has profusely used them; confer, compare आदिरन्त्येन सहेता P. I. 1.71. The word कृञ् in P. III.1.40 and तृन् in P. II. 3.69 are used as Pratyaharas. For a list of the Pratyharas which are used by Panini see Kasika on the Maheswara Sutras.
pratyāhārāhnikaname given to the second Ahnika of the Mahabhasya which explains the Siva Sutras अइउण्, ऋऌक् , et cetera, and others, and hence naturally discusses the Pratyaharas.
pratyudāharaṇacounter instance. In order to explain the wording of a grammatical rule clearly, it is customary to give along with the instances of the rule (where the rule has been effectively employed), a few words which would have resulted into other faulty words by the application of the particular rule in case that rule had not been stated or a word or more of it had been omitted; confer, compare न केवलानि चर्चापदानि व्याख्यानं वृद्धिः आत् ऐच् इति । किं तर्हि । उदाहरणं प्रत्युदाहरणं वाक्याध्याहारः इत्येतत् समुदितं व्याख्यानं भवति । Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). in Ahnika 1.
pradīpapopular name of the famous commentary on the Mahabhasya of Patanjali written by the reputed grammarian Kaiyata in the eleventh century A. D. The cornmentary is a very scholarly and critical one and really does justice to the well-known compliment given to it, viz. that the Pradipa has kept the Mahabhasya alive which otherwise would have remained unintelligible and consequently become lost. The commentary प्रदीप is based on the commentary महाभाष्यदीपिका,or प्रदीपिका written by Bhartrhari, which is available at present only in a fragmentary form. The Pradipa is to this day looked upon as the single commentary on the Mahabhasya in spite of the presence of a few other commentaries on it which are all thrown into the back-ground by it.
pradeśaliterally district; sphere of application, place of the application of a rule. The word is frequently used in this sense in the Kasika Vritti; confer, compare प्रत्ययप्रदेशाः प्रत्ययलोपे प्रत्ययलक्षणमित्येवमादयः Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. III.1.1 . confer, compare also अनुदात्तप्रदेशाः अनुदात्तौ सुप्पितौ इत्यादयः Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. I. 2.30. The word प्रदेश is also used in the sense of the place of use or utility; confer, compare संज्ञाशास्त्रस्य तु कार्यकालपक्षे न पृथग्वाक्यार्थबोधः किं तु प्रदेशवाक्येन सहैव । ... कार्यज्ञानं च प्रदेशदेश एव Par. Sek. Pari. 3.
pradhāna(1)the principal thing as opposed to the subordinate one; something which has got an independent purpose of its own and is not meant for another; प्रधानमुपसर्जनमिति च संबन्धिशब्दावेतौ M.Bh. on P. I.2.43 V.5; confer, compare also प्रधानाप्रधानयोः प्रधाने कार्यसंप्रत्ययः Par. Sek. Pari. 97; (2) predominant of main importance; confer, compare पूर्वपदार्थप्रधानोव्ययीभावः et cetera, and others Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on II. 1.6, 20, 49 II.2.6 etc; (3) primary as opposed to secondary; confer, compare गौणे कर्मणि दुह्यादेः प्रधाने नीहृकृष्वहाम् । confer, compare also प्रधानकर्मण्याख्येये लादीनाहुर्द्विकर्मणाम् । अप्रधाने दुहादीनाम् M.Bh.on I.4.51
pradhānaśiṣṭaprominently mentioned as opposed to अन्वाचयशिष्टः confer, compare कर्तुः क्यङ् सलोपश्च । प्रधानशिष्टः क्यङ् अन्वाचयशिष्टः सलोपः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on III.1. 11; confer, compare also प्रधानान्वाचयशिष्टयोः प्रधाने संप्रत्ययः Vyadi Pari. 67.
pradhvaṃsindisappearing; confer, compare उच्चरितप्रध्वंसिनोनुबन्धाः Vyadi Pari. ll.
prapāṭhakaa term used for a division of a work by an ancient writer, as for instance in the case of the Atharvapratisakhya.
prabhā(1)name of a commentary on the Sabdakaustubha by Raghavendracarya Gajendragadkar; (2) name of a commentary on Kaiyata's Mahabhasyapradipa.
prabhedasmaller division, sub-division.
prayatna(1)effort; the word is used in connection with the effort made for producing sound; confer, compare तुल्यास्यप्रयत्नं सवर्णम् P.1.1.9 these efforts are described to be of two kinds बाह्य and आभ्यन्तर of which the latter are considered in determining the cognate nature of letters ( सावर्ण्य ); confer, compareअाभ्यन्तरप्रयत्नाः सवर्णसंज्ञायामाश्रीयन्ते;Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. I. 1.9; (2) specific measure taken for a particular purpose such as marking a letter with a particular tone or accent or dividing a rule, or laying down a modificatory rule or the like; confer, compare सैवाननुवृत्तिः शब्देनाख्यायते प्रयत्नाधिक्येन पूर्वसूत्रेपि संबन्धार्थम् Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. IV. 3.22.
prayoganiyamageneral rules or principles laid down regarding the use of words in language and literature such as (l) a word recognised as correct should always be used, confer, compare एवमिहापि समानायामर्थगतौ शब्देन चापशब्देन च धर्मनियमः क्रियते शब्देनैवार्थोभिधेयो नापशब्देनेति । एवंक्रियमाणमभ्युदयकारि भवति Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I. I. Ahnika l, (2) never a base alone or an affix alone should be used, but always a base with the necessary affix should be used; confer, compare यावता समयः कृतो न केवला प्रकृतिः प्रयोक्तव्या न केवलः प्रत्ययः M. Bh, on P. I. 2.64 Vart. 8, also on P. III. 1.94 Vart. 3; (3) when the sense is already expressed by a word, a word repeating the sense should not be used; confer, compare उक्तार्थानामप्रयोगः. Besides these, many minor regulations of the type of Paribhasas are laid down by grammarians. For details see Paribhashasamgraha Introduction.
prayogamukhamaṇḍanaknown also by the name प्रयोगविवेक, an elementary treatise on syntax, attributed to वररुचि, who must, of course, have been different from the ancient grammarian वररुचि.
prayogaratnamālāname of a recognised treatise on grammar written by पुरुषोत्तमविद्यावागीश of Bengal in the fourteenth century. The treatise explains many words which, although current in language and literature, cannot be easily formed by rules of grammar. The author has tried to form them by applying rules of grammar given in the grammatical systems of Panini and Katantra. The alphabet given in this treatise is according to the system of the Tantra Sastra which shows a scholarship of the author in that branch The grammar was studied much in Bengal and Assam.
prayogaviṣayasphere or domain of the use of words; the whole Vedic and classical recognized literature: cf महान् हि शब्दस्य प्रयोगविषयः । सप्तद्वीपा वसुमती त्रयो लोकाः चत्वारो वेदाः साङ्गाः सरहस्याः बहुधा विाभन्नाः, एकशतमध्वर्युशाखाः, सहस्रवर्त्मा सामवेदः, एकविंशतिधा बाह् वृच्यम् , नवधाथर्वणो वेदो वाकोवाक्यामितिहासः पुराणं वैद्यकमित्येतावाञ्शब्दस्य प्रयोगविषयः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). Ahnika 1. Vrt. 5
prayojanaobject, motive or purpose in undertaking a particular thing; the word is used although rarely, in the sense of a cause also; confer, compare इमान्यस्य प्रयोजनानि अध्येयं व्याकरणम् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). Ahnika 1. For the advantages of the study of Vyakarana, see Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). Ahnika 1. See also Vyakarana Mahabhasya Vol. VII pp.226,227, D.E. Society's edition.
pravacana(1)recital of Vedic texts; confer, compare अथैके प्राहुरनुसंहितं तत् पारायणे प्रवचनं प्रशस्तम् Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XV. 16; cf also इति प्र बाभ्रव्य उवाच च क्रमं क्रमप्रवक्ता ( बाभ्रव्यः ) प्रथमं शशंस च , Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XI 33; (2) the reading of the Samhita text प्रावचनो वा यजुषि । प्रवचने भवः स्वरः प्रावचनः ; प्रवचनशब्देनार्षपाठ उच्यते 1 Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.I. 132.
pravādaa grammatical explanation; detailed explanation by citing the gender, number, krt affix, taddhita affix.affix and the like: confer, compare लिङ्गसंख्यातद्धितकृतरूपभेदाः प्रवादाः । पाण्यादिशब्दानां प्रवादेषु प्रथमो (original) नकारो णत्वमाप्नोति स च प्राकृतः । Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.XIII. 9. The word is explained as a change in the form of a word, as for instance, by the substitution of स् for विसर्ग where विसर्ग is, in fact, expected; confer, compare कबन्धं पृथु इत्येतेषां पदानां प्रवादा रूपभेदा उदये परत्रावस्थिताः दिव इत्येतस्य उपचारं जनयन्ति । यथा दिवस्कबन्धम् , दिवस्पृथुः Uvvata on Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) IV. 22; confer, compare also प्रवादाः षडितः परे, Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) IX. 18. In the Nirukta, the word is used in the sense of 'distinct mention'; confer, compare एवमन्यासामपि देवतानामादित्यप्रवादाः स्तुतयो भवन्ति ( deities are mentioned under the name of Aditya) Nir II.13; cf also वैश्वानरीयाः प्रवादाः Nir, VII. 23.
pravigrahaseparate or distinct uterance of several words of a sentence which are joined together by Sandhi rules in a compound ( समास ) or otherwise, with a very short pause ( अवग्रह ) after each word. e. g. उद् उ एति instead of उद्वेति; confer, compare प्रविग्रहेण मृदूवग्रहेण चर्चयेयुः Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XV.10, where Uvvata remarks प्रविग्रहेषु प्रश्लिष्टं विश्लिष्टं कुर्यात् । कालाधिक्येन कुर्यात्। तथा च उद् उ एति इति पठेन्न तु उद्वेति.
pravṛttibhedadifference regarding the cause of application; confer, compare पूर्वमिति वर्तमाने पुनः पूर्वग्रहणं प्रवृत्तिभेदेन नियमप्रतिपत्त्यर्थम्; Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. VI.2:174.
praśśliṣṭa(l)an additional letter (vowel or consonant) read on splitting up a euphonic combination; confer, compare प्रश्लिष्टा. वर्णावेतौ M.Bh.on P.I.1.9 Vart. 2; (2) ; contracted combination; name of a Samdhi where two vowels coalesce into one single vowel, confer, compare R.Pr. । II. 15-19.
praśleṣa(l)coalescence of two vowels into one, as given in Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) II.6, and 7, corresponding to the गुण, वृद्वि and दीर्घ substitutes prescribed by the rules आद्गुणः P.IV 1.87; अकः सवर्णे दीर्घः VI.1.101; and वृद्धिरेचि VI. 1.88 which are stated under the jurisdiction of the rule एकः पूर्वपरयोः VI.1.84; (2) finding out the presence of a letter in addition to the letters already present as coalesced, after splitting the combination into its different constituent 1etters. This Practice of finding out an additional letter is resorted to by the commentators only to remove certain difficulties in arriving at some correct forms which otherwise could not be obtained; e. g. see क्ङिति च where क्ङ् is believed to be a combination of ग्, क् and ङ् See प्रश्लिष्ट and प्रश्लिष्टनिर्देश.
prasāraṇaa term used by ancient grammarians for संप्रसारण, i.e, the substitution of a corresponding vowel for a semivowel; exempli gratia, for example इ for य्, उ for व्, ऋ for र् and लृ for ल्: confer, compare रकि ज्यः प्रसारणम् P.I.1.4. Vart. 6.
prākṛta(1)original, primary,belonging to the Prakrti as contrasted with a वैकृत modification or a modified thing; cf प्रकृतिः स्वभावः, तत्संबन्धी प्राकृतः. commentary on Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.XIV. 28: confer, compare एतद्विकारा एवान्ये, सर्वे तु प्राकृताः समाः Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XVII. 23; confer, compare also तहीन् ... पशूंस्तकारपरः ( नकारः ) सकारं प्राकृतो नित्ये Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.VI. 14; (2) natural, which can be so ordinarily, without any specific effort; confer, compare तस्मात् प्राकृतमेवैतत् कर्म यथा कटं करोति, Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. II. 3.5, confer, compare also Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. III 1.5 Vart. 8, 9.
prākkītīyaname given to a group of tad, affixes छ, यत् and others prescribed in the different senses ( हित and others) given in rules upto तेन क्रीतम् P.V. 1.37 from तस्मै हितम् P. V. 1.5.
prāgghitīyaname given to taddhita affix. affixes prescribed by rules beginning with प्राग्हिताद्यत् P. IV. 4.75 and ending with सोदराद्यः P. IV. 4.109.
prāgdīvyatīyaname given to taddhita affix. affixes prescribed by rules beginning with तस्य विकारः P. IV. 3.134 and ending with the rule कंसीयपरशव्ययोर्यञञौ लुक् च P. IV. 3.168.
prāgdeśadistricts of the east especially districts to the east of Ayodhya and Pataliputra, such as Magadha, Vanga and others; nothing can definitely be said as to which districts were called Eastern by Panini and his followers Katyayana and Patanjali. A Varttika given in the Kasika but not traceable in the Mahabhasya defines Pragdesa as districts situated to the east of शरावती (probably the modern river Ravi or a river near that river ): confer, compare प्रागुदञ्चौ विभजते हंसः क्षीरोदके यथा । विदुषां शब्दसिद्ध्यर्थे सा नः पातु शरावती ॥ Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on एङ् प्राचां देशे P. I. 1.75. There is a reading सरस्वती in some manuscript copies and सरस्वती is a wellknown river in the Punjab near Kuruksetra, which disappears in the sandy desert to the south: a reading इरावती is also found and इरावती may stand for the river Ravi. शरावती in Burma is simply out of consideration. For details see Vyakarana Mahabhasya Vol. VII. pp. 202-204 and 141-142 D. E. Society's Edition.
prācīnamatathe view or doctrine of the former or rather older grammarians. The word is used in many commentary books and the meaning of the word is to be decided according to the context. For example in the works of Ramacandra, the author of the Prakriyakaumudi and his followers, the word refers to the view given by the writers of the Kasikavrtti and the commentaries thereon in the works of Bhattoji and his pupils, it refers to the writer of the Prakriyakaumudi in addition to the writers of the Kasika, while in the works of Nagesa it refers to the writings of Bhattoji and his pupils. For details see Vyakarana Mahabhasya Vol. V1I pp. 23-24 D. E. Society's Edition.
prācyāvaiyākaraṇaan eastern grammarian; the term प्राच्य (eastern) being a relative term, the east is to be taken with respect to the place in the context. The word प्राचां occurs many times in Panini's Sutras and the term प्राक् may refer to countries east of the river शरावती or सरस्वती in the Punjab. See प्राग्देश a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.. प्राचां is understood by some commentators as referring to time, in which case, the word may refer to ancient grammarians आपिशलि, शाकटायन, इन्द्र and others who lived before Panini; confer, compare प्राचीनवैयाकरणतन्त्रे वाचनिकानि ...Par. Sek. Pari. 1. The word प्राचीन is, of course, mostly used in the sense of ancient, rather than the word प्राच्. For specific peculiarities of the eastern grammarians see pp. 148-149 Vyakarana Mahabhasya Vol. VII. D. E. Society's Edition.
prāṇapaṇāa gloss on the Mahabhasya of Patanjali, written by the famous easterm grammarian Purusottamadeva of the 12th century A. D., of which only a fragment of a few pages is available. As the legend goes, the name प्राणपणा was given to the gloss as it was accompanied by an oath on the part of the author that his life was at stake if he did even the slightest injustice to the author of the Mahabhasya.
prātiśākhyaa work on Vedic grammar of a specific nature, which is concerned mainly with the changes, euphonic and others, in the Pada text of the Samhita as compared with the running text, the Samhita itselfeminine. The Pratisakhya works are neither concerned with the sense of words, nor with their division into bases and affixes, nor with their etymology. They contain, more or less,Vedic passages arranged from the point of view of Samdhi. In the Rk Pratisakhya, available to-day, topics of metre, recital, phonetics and the like are introduced, but it appears that originally the Rk Pratisakhya, just like the Atharva Pratisakhya, was concerned with euphonic changes, the other subjects being introduced later on. The word प्रातिशाख्य shows that there were such treatises for everyone of the several Sakhas or branches of each Veda many of which later on disappeared as the number of the followers of those branches dwindledition Out of the remaining ones also, many were combined with others of the same Veda. At present, only five or six Pratisakhyas are available which are the surviving representatives of the ancient ones - the Rk Pratisakhya by Saunaka, the Taittiriya Pratisakhya, the Vajasaneyi PratiSakhya by Katyayana, the Atharva Pratisakhya and the Rk Tantra by Sakatayana, which is practically a Pratisakhya of the Sama Veda. The word पार्षद or पारिषद was also used for the Pratisakhyas as they were the outcome of the discussions of learned scholars in Vedic assemblies; cf परिषदि भवं पार्षदम्. Although the Pratisakhya works in nature, are preliminary to works on grammar, it appears that the existing Pratisakhyas, which are the revised and enlarged editions of the old ones, are written after Panini's grammar, each one of the present Prtisakhyas representing, of course, several ancient Pratisakhyas, which were written before Panini. Uvvata, a learned scholar of the twelfth century has written a brief commentary on the Rk Pratisakhya and another one on the Vajasaneyi Pratisakhya. The Taittiriya PratiSakhya has got two commentaries -one by Somayarya, called Tribhasyaratna and the other called Vaidikabharana written by Gopalayajvan. There is a commentary by Ananta bhatta on the Vajasaneyi Pratisakhya. These commentaries are called Bhasyas also.
prātihataname given to the circumflex vowel, standing at the beginning of a word and following the final vowel of the previous word which is acute ( उदात्त ); confer, compare अपि चेन्नानापदस्थमुदात्तमथ चेत्सांहितेन स्वर्यते स प्रतिहतः Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.xx. 3.
prādeśikabelonging to the root; the word प्रदेश has here the peculiar sense of a root which has the meaning of the noun (under discussion). confer, compare तद्यत्र स्वरसंस्कारौ समर्थौ प्रादेशिकेन गुणेन अन्वितौ स्यातां संविज्ञातानि तानि Nir I. 12.
prādhānyapreponderance, principal nature as opposed to the subordinate one ( विशेषण्त्व ); confer, compare यत्र प्राधान्येन अल् आश्रीयते तत्रैव प्रतिषेधः स्यात् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I. 1. 56. confer, compare also प्राधान्येन व्यपदेशा भवन्ति ।
prāpakaapplying in the usual way; literally Ieading to the injunction or विधिशास्त्र; confer, compare किं पुनरिदं नियमार्थे आहोस्वित् प्रापकम् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I. 1.70; confer, compare also Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. III. 4. 110.
prasādavāsinyāyainclusion of a thing even though it possesses an additional factor, or consideration, other than what is referred to; cf प्रासादवासिन्यायेन ग्रहणं भवति । तद्यथा केचित्त् प्रासादवासिनः । केचिद् भूमिवासिनः । केचिदुभयवासिन: । ये प्रासादवासिनः गृह्यन्ते ते प्रसादवासिग्रहणेन । ये भूमिवासिनः गृह्यन्ते ते भूमिवासिग्रहणेन । ये उभयवासिनः गृह्यन्ते ते प्रासादवासिग्रहणेन भूमिवासिग्रहणेन च । Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I. 1.8.
prepsudesiderative adjective; a word formed by adding the affix उ in the sense of ' an agent ' to a desiderative root by the rule सनाशंसभिक्ष उः P.III.2.168. The term प्रेप्सु was used for such nouns by ancient grammarians.
prauḍhamanoramāpopularly called मनोरमा also; the famous commentary on the Siddhantakaumudi of Bhattoji Diksita written by the author himself to explain fully in a scholarly manner the popular grammar written by him; , the word प्रौढमनेारमा is used in contrast with बालमनोरमा another commentary on the Siddhantakaumudi by Vasudevadiksita. On account of the difficult nature of it, it is usual to read the प्रौढमनेारमा upto the end of the Karaka-prakarana only in the Sanskrit PathaSalas before the study of the Sabdendusekhara and the Paribhsendusekhara is undertaken.
prauḍhamanoramāṭīkāa commentary on Bhattoji DikSita's Praudhamanorama written by Bhattoji's grandson Hari Diksita. The commentary is called लघुशब्दरत्न or simple शब्दरत्न which is an abridgment of the author's work बृहच्छब्दरत्न. The Laghusabdaratna is widely studied along with the Praudhamanorama in the Pathasalas.
plākṣāyaṇaan ancient Vedic scholar who presumably wrote a work on Vedic grammar (of the type of the Pratisakhya works).For a difference of view he is quoted in the Taittiriya Pratisakhya: confer, compareन प्लाक्षिप्लाक्षायणयेाः T.Pr. IX.6.
phak(1)taddhita affix.affix फ marked with mute क् for effecting the वृद्धि substitute for the initial vowel of the word to which it is appliedition The initial letter फ् of all the affixes beginning with फ् in Panini's grammar is always changed into आयन्. The taddhita affix. affix फक् is affixed (1) in the sense of गोत्रापत्य grandchild and his issues, to the words नड and others as also to the words ending with the affixes यञ् and इञ् and words शरद्वत्, दर्भ, द्रोण et cetera, and others exempli gratia, for example नाडायनः, शालङ्कायनः, दाक्षायणः प्लाक्षायणः, द्रोणायनः, वैदः, अौर्वः et cetera, and others; cf P.IV. 1.99-103; (2) as a caturarthika affix in the four senses mentioned in P. IV. 2.67-70 to the words पक्ष and others e. g. पाक्षायणः, तौषायणः; confer, compare P.IV. 2.80.
phala(1)fruit or benefit of an action which goes to the agent; confer, compare फलव्यापारयोर्धातुः Vaiyakarana-bhusana. A root which is given as Ubhayapadin in Panini's Grammar takes the Atmanepada affixes when the fruit of the activity is meant for the agent, while otherwise it takes the Parasmaipada affixes; (2) The word फल also means the result of a grammatical operation or grammatical injunction.
phiñtaddhita affix. affix आयनि applied to the word मिमत in the sense of offspring exempli gratia, for example मैमतायनिः ; confer, compare P.IV.1.150; it is also added in the same sense of (offspring) to the words तिक and others as also to the word कौसल्य, twosyllabled words ending with अण् and to words वाकिन and others; exempli gratia, for example तैकायनिः, कौसल्यायनिः, वाकिनकायनिः et cetera, and others; confer, compare P.IV.1.159.
phiṭsūtraa small work on accents attributed to Santanava,an ancient Vedic scholar who lived before Patanjali if not before Panini, as the latter has not referred to him. There is an anonymous commentary upon it.
phintaddhita affix. affix आयनि in the sense of offspring added according to the Eastern grammarians to words not beginning with आ, ऐ or औ, exempli gratia, for example ग्लुचुकायनिः,confer, compare IV.1.160.
phaḍegan[ FADDEGON, BAREND ]a scholar of Sanskrit Grammar, who has written a book 'Studies in Panini's Grammar'.
barnel[ BURNELL., Dr.]a European Sanskrit scholar who has written a learned booklet 'Aindra School of Sanskrit Grammarians' which discusses the problem of the Aindra grammar. See ऐन्द्र.
bahiraṅgāsiddhatvainvalidity i. e. nonoccurrence or non-application of a bahiranga rule or operation before the antaranga operation which is looked upon as stronger occurring earlier to the mind, or in the wording, as it does.
bahuvrīhia compound similar in meaning to the word बहुव्रीहि ( possessed of much rice ) which, in sense shows quite a distinct object than those which are shown by the constituent members of the compound; a relative or adjective compound. There are various kinds of the Bahuvrihi compound such as समानाधिकरणबहुव्रीहि, व्यधिकरणबहुव्रीहि, संख्याबहुव्रीहि, दिग्बहुव्रीहि, सहबहुव्रीहि, नञ्बहुव्रीहि, and अनेकपदबहुव्रीहि which depend upon the specific peculiarity noticed in the various cases. Panini in his grammar has not given any definition of बहुव्रीहि, but has stated that a compound other than those already given viz. अव्ययीभाव, द्वन्द्व and तत्पुरुष, is बहुव्रीहि and cited under Bahuvrihi all cases mentioned a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.; cf शेषो बहुव्रीहिः II. 3.23-28; also confer, compare अन्यपदार्थप्रधानो बहुव्रीहिः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. II. 1.6; II. 1.20; II. 1.49.
bahvapekṣaliterally depending on many; the word is used in the sense of depending on many causal factors ( निमित्तानि ) and given as the definition of a kind of बहिरङ्ग by some grammarians; confer, compare अल्पापेक्षमन्तरङ्गं बह्वपेक्षं बहिरङ्गम् . This kind of अन्तरङ्गबहिरङ्गत्व, cited by Kaiyata is, however, disapproved by Nagesabhatta; confer, compare बहुिरङ्गान्तरङ्गाशब्दाभ्यां बह्वपेक्षत्वाल्पापेक्षत्वयोः शब्दमर्यादया अलाभाच्च । तथा सति असिद्धं बह्वपेक्षमल्पापेक्षे इत्येव वदेत् । Par. Sek. on Pari. 50.
bālaṃbhaṭṭa( बाळंभट्ट )surnamed Payagunda or Payagunde, who has written a commentary on the commentary Mitaksara on the याज्ञवल्क्यस्मृति. Some scholars say that he was also a great grammarian and identical with वैद्यनाथ पायगुंडे who has written the commentary काशिका or गदा on the Paribhasendusekhara, the Cidasthimala on the Laghusabdendusekhara and commentaries on the Vaiyakaranabhusana,Sabdakaustubha and Bhasyapradipoddyota. Other scholars believe that Balambhatta was the son of Vaidyanatha and that he wrote only the commentary on Mitaksara called Balambhatti after him. (2) There was also a comparatively modern grammarian of Tanjore who has written small grammar works बालबोधिनी and बालरञ्जनी.
bālamanoramāname of a commentary on the Siddhanta-kaumudi of Bhattoji Diksita by Vasudeva Diksita, a grammarian of Tanjore. There is also another commentary called Balamanorama written by Anantadeva on the Siddhantakaumudi.
bāhulakathe application of a grammatical rule as a necessity to arrive at some forms in literature especially in the Vedic Literature as also in the works of standard writers, which cannot be explained easily by the regular application of the stated rules; confer, compare सुप्तिङुपग्रहलिदनराणां कालहलच्स्वरकर्तृयङां च । व्यत्ययमिच्छति शास्त्रकृदेषां सोपि च सिध्यति बाहुलकेन M.Bh. on P. III. 1.85; also confer, compare बाहुलकं प्रकृतेस्तनुदृष्टेः प्रायसमुच्चयनादपि तेषाम् । कार्यसशेषविधेश्च तदुक्तं नैगमरूढिभवं हि सुसाधु M.Bh. on P. III.3.1. In many sutras, Panini has put the word बहुलम् to arrive at such forms; e.g see P.II.1.32,57; II.3.62. II.4.39,73,76,84 et cetera, and others
bāhya(प्रयत्न)external effort; the term is used many times in connection with the external effort in the production of articulate sound, as different from the internal effort अाभ्यन्तरप्रयत्न. The external effort is described to be consisting of 11 kinds; confer, compare बाह्यप्रयत्नस्त्वेकादशधा । विवारः संवारः श्वासो नादो घोषोSघोषोSल्पप्राणो महाप्राण उदात्तोनुदात्तः स्वरितश्चेति S.K.on P. I.1.9.
binduanusvara, letter pronounced only through the nose; a dot to indicate the nasal phonetic element shown in writing a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page. or sometimes after that letter or vowel, after which it is uttered; confer, compare अं इत्यनुस्वारः । अकार इह उच्चारणार्थः इति बिन्दुमात्रो वर्णोनुस्वारसंज्ञो भवति ।। Kat. I.1.19.
buiskūla[ BUISKOOL H. E. )A European grammarian who has written an essay on the last three Padas of Panini's Astadhyayi (त्रिपादी) under the title 'The Tripadi'.
buddhinotion, mental understanding; mental inclination; confer, compare बुद्धि: संप्रत्यय इत्यनर्थान्तरम् | Or अस्तेर्भूर्भवतीत्यस्तिबुद्ध्यां भवतिबुद्धिं प्रतिपद्यते M. Bh on P. I.1.56 Vart. 14; (2) mental inclusion; confer, compare यां यां विभक्तिं आश्रयितुं बुद्धिरुपजायते सा साश्रयितव्या M.Bh. on P. I. 1. 57: confer, compare अथ बुद्धिः अविशेषात्स्मपुरा हेतू, Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on III.2.118 Vart. 4.
buddhikarmanactivity of the mind of the type of understanding as contrasted with the activity of the sense organs; confer, compare इन्द्रियकर्म समासादनं बुद्धिकर्म व्यवसायः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P.III. 3. 133 Vart. 8.
bṛhacchabdaratnaa learned commentary on the commentary मनोरमा of भट्टोजीदीक्षित; the commentary was written by हरिदीक्षित the grandson of Bhattoji. The work is called बृहच्छब्दरत्न in contrast with the लघुशब्दरत्न of the same author (हरिदीक्षित) which is generally studied at the Pathasalas all over the country. The work बृहच्छब्दरत्न is only in a Manuscript form at present. Some scholars believe that it was written by Nagesabhatta, who ascribed it to his preceptor Hari Diksita, but the belief is not correct as proved by a reference in the Laghusabdaratna, where the author himself remarks that he himself has written the बृहच्छब्दरत्न, and internal evidences show that लबुशब्दरत्न is sometimes a word-forword summary of the बृहच्छब्दरत्न. confer, compareविस्तरस्तु अस्मत्कृते बृहच्छब्दरत्ने मदन्तेवासिवृतलधुशब्देन्दुशेखरे च द्रष्टव्यः Laghusabdaratna. For details see Bhandarkar Ins. Journal Vol. 32 pp.258-60.
bṛhatīa Vedic metre consisting of four padas and 36 syllables. There are three padas of eight syllables and the fourth has twelve syllables. It has got further subdivisions known as पुरस्ताद्बृहती, उपरिष्टाद्बृहती, न्यङ्कुसारिणी or उरोबृहती, ऊर्ध्वबृहती विष्टारबृहती, पिपीलिकमध्यमा and विषमपदा. For details see R.Pr. XVI. 31-37.
belavalakara[ SHRIPAD KRISHNA BELVALKAR ]a well-known Sanskrit scholar of the present day who has been the General Editor of the Mahabharata published by the Bhandarkar Oriental Research Institute, Poona. He has written a book on grammar reviewing very briefly the various systems of Sanskrit grammar, which is named "Systems of Sanskrit Grammar".
bothaliṃgka[BOHTLINGK, OTTO]a German Sanskrit scholar and Grammarian of St.Petersberg, who has written a short gloss in German on Panini's Astadhyayi under the title "Panini's Grammatik" with an introduction and various indexes at the end. He has also critically edited Mugdhabodha of Bopadeva.
brahmakāṇḍaname given to the first section or Kanda of Bhartrhari's Vakyapadiya. It deals with Sphota, and in a way it contains in a nutshell the philosophy of Sanskrit Grammar.
brahmarāśithe sacred Sanskrit alphabet given in the fourteen sutras of Mahesvara, named Aksarasamamnaya which is called ब्रह्मराशि as it contains the basic letters of शब्द which is Brahma according to Grammarians; confer, compare सोयमक्षरसमाम्नायो वाक्यसमाम्नायः पुष्पितः फलितश्चन्द्रतारकवत् प्रतिमण्डितो वेदितव्यो ब्रह्मराशिः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). Ahnika 2 end; confer, compare also एते पञ्चषष्टिवर्णा ब्रह्मराशिरात्मवाचः V. Pr.VIII. 25.
bha(1)the letter or sound भ् with the vowel अ added for facility of utterance; (2) a technical term in the Grammar of Panini given to a noun base before such case and taddhita affixes as begin with any vowel or with the consonant य्. The utility of this designation of भ to the base is (l) to prevent the substitutes which are enjoined for the final vowel or consonant of a pada (a word ending with a case-affix or a base before case and taddhita affix. affixes beginning with any consonant excepting य् ) just as the substitution of Visarga, anusvara, the first or third consonant, and others given in P. VIII. 4.37 and the following. For the various changes and operations for a base termed भ see P. VI. 4.129 to 175.
bhaktaforming a part or portion (of something in connection with which it has been prescribed as an augment) confer, compare तद्भक्तस्तद्ग्रहणेन गृह्यते Vyadi Pari. 17; confer, compare also अामः सुडयं भक्त: अाम्ग्रहणेन ग्राहृष्यते Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. VII. 1.33.
bhakti(1)name given to two of the five divisions of a Saman which are प्रस्तावभक्ति, उद्गीथ, प्रतिहार, उपद्रव and निधानभाक्ति; (2) the vowel portion surrounding, or placed after, the consonant र् or ल् which (consonant) is believed to be present in the vowel ऋ or ऌ respectively forming its important portion, but never separately noticed in it. The vowels ऋ and ऌ are made up of one matra each. It is contended by the grammarians that the consonants र् and ल् forming respectively the portion of ऋ and ऌ, make up halfa-matra, while the remaining half is made up of the भाक्ति of the vowel surrounding the consonant or situated after the consonant. The word which is generally used for this 'bhakti is 'ajbhakti' instead of which the word स्वरभक्ति is found in the Pratisakhya works; confer, compare यत्तद्रेफात्परं भक्तेस्तेन व्यवहितत्वान्न प्राप्नेति | ...... यच्चात्र रेफात्परं भुक्तेर्न तत् क्वचिदपि व्यपवृक्तं दृश्यते | Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. VIII. 4.1 Vart 2; confer, compare स्वरभक्तिः पूर्वभागक्षराङ्गं Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) I. 17; also confer, compare रेफात्स्वरोपहिताद् व्यञ्जनोदयाद् ऋकारवर्णी स्वरभक्तिरुत्तरा ) Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) VI. 13.
bhakṣyaniyamarestriction regarding edibles of a particular kindeclinable The word is quoted to illustrate the नियमविधि or restrictive rule in grammar. Although the restriction in the instance पञ्च पञ्चनखा भक्ष्याः is of the kind of परिसंख्या and called परिसंख्या, and not नियम, by the Mimamsakas, the grammarians call it a niyamavidhi. There is no परिसंख्याविधि according to grammarians; they cite only two kinds of vidhi viz. simple vidhi or apurva vidhi and niyamavidhi.
bhaṭṭojīsurnamed Diksita; a stalwart grammarian of the Panini system who flourished in the first half of the seventeenth century and wrote many independent books and commentaries such as the Siddhantakaumudi, the Praudhamanorama, the Vaiyakaranasiddhantakarika, the Sabdakaustubha and others. The most reputed work out of these, however, is the Siddhantakaumudi which is very popular even today and which has almost set aside other works of its kind such as the Prakriyakaumudi and others. Bhattoji was a Telagu Brahmana, as generally believed, and although he belonged to the South, he made Varanasi his home where he prepared a school of learned Grammarians. Although he carried on his work silently in Varanasi, he was envied by the reputed rhetorician of his time Pandita Jagannātha, who criticised his work ( Bhattojis work ) named Manorama very severely. See प्रौढमनोरमा a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.. The Siddhāntakaumudi has got many commentaries of which the Tattvabodhini written by Bhattoji's pupil Jnanendrasarasvati is appreciated much by learned grammarians.
bhartṛharia very distinguished Grammarian who lived in the seventh century A. D. He was a senior contemporary of the authors of the Kasika, who have mentioned his famous work viz. The Vakyapadiya in the Kasika. confer, compare शब्दार्थसंबन्धोयं प्रकरणम् | वाक्यपदीयम् Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. IV.3.88. His Vyakarana work "the Vakyapadiya" has occupied a very prominent position in Grammatical Literature. The work is divided into three sections known by the name 'Kanda' and it has discussed so thoroughly the problem of the relation of word to its sense that subsequent grammarians have looked upon his view as an authority. The work is well-known for expounding also the Philosophy of Grammar. His another work " the Mahabhasya-Dipika " is a scholarly commentary on Patanjali's Mahabhasya. The Commentary is not published as yet, and its solitary manuscript is very carelessly written. Nothing is known about the birth-place or nationality of Bhartrhari. It is also doubtful whether he was the same person as king Bhartrhari who wrote the 'Satakatraya'.
bhavat( भवन्त् )ancient term for the present tense found in the Brhaddevata and other works, The term 'vartamana' for the present tense was also equally common. The word is found in the Mahabhasya, the Unadisutravrtti of Ujjvaladatta and in the Grammar of Jainendra confer, compare P.II.3.1 Vart 11, Unadi III. 50 Jain Vyak. I.1.471.
bhavantīancient term for the present tense or लट् according to Panini confer, compare अस्तिर्भवन्तीपरः प्रथमपुरुषः अप्रयुज्यमानेप्यस्ति Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. II.3.1 . Vart. 4: confer, compare also प्रवृत्तस्याविरामे शासितव्या भवन्ती | इहाधीमहे | इह वसाम: | इह पुष्यमित्रं याजयामः | Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. III. 2.123. See भवत् (भवन्त्).
bhāṇḍārakara[ Sir Ramakrishna Gopal Bhandarkar 1837-1925 A. D. ]a well-known scholar of Sanskrit Grammar who has written learned articles on many grammatical topics. He was a distinguished Professor of Sanskrit in the latter half of the nineteenth century. He was one of the pioneers of Sanskrit studies in India.
bhāradvāja(1)an ancient grammarian quoted by Panini in his rules to show differences of opinion; confer, compare ऋतो भारद्वाजस्य VII. 2.63; (2) name of a country in the days of Panini confer, compare कृकणपर्णाद्भारद्वाजे P. IV. 2.145,
bhāva(1)becoming; existence. The word is used many times in the sense of धात्वर्थthe sense of a root which is 'incomplete activity' or 'process of evolving'; confer, compare तदाख्यातं येन भावं स धातु: Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XII. 5; confer, compare also षड् भावविकारा भवन्ति Nirukta of Yāska.I. 36; पूर्वापरीभूतं भावमाख्यातेन आचष्टे व्रजतिपचतीत्युपक्रमप्रभृति अपवर्गपर्यन्तम् Nirukta of Yāska.I. 1 ; (2) activity as opposed to instruments ( साधन or कारक ); confer, compare भावगर्हायाम् । धात्वर्थगर्हायाम् Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. III. 1.24; confer, compare also भावः क्रिया, Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on यस्य च भावेन भावलक्षणम् P. II. 3.37; (3) completed action which is shown, not by a verb, but by a verbal derivative noun; confer, compare धात्वर्थश्च धातुनैवोच्यते | यस्तस्य सिद्धता नाम धर्मस्तत्र घञादयः प्रत्यया विधीयन्ते Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on 'भावे' P. III. 3.18; confer, compare also कृदभिहितो भावो द्रव्यवद्भवति Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. II. 2.19, III. 1.67, IV. 1.3, V. 4.19; confer, compare also भावस्त्वेक: Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. III. 1.67; (4) the radical factor for the use of a word; प्रवृत्तिनिमित्त; confer, compare भवतोत्मादभिधानप्रत्ययौ इति भावः | शब्दस्य प्रवृत्तिनिमित्तं भावशब्देनोच्यते | अश्वत्वम् , अश्वता | Kāś, on P. 5.1.119; (5) thing, object cf सिद्धशब्दः कूटस्थेषु भावेष्वविचालिषु वर्तते Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). I. 1. Āhnika l; (6) transformation, substitution; change into the nature of another; confer, compare तत्र प्रथमास्तृतीयभावम् Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) II. 4. confer, compare also the words मूर्धन्यभाव, अभिनिधानभाव et cetera, and others {7) possession of the qualities, nature; तदर्थस्य भाव: तादर्थ्यम्: Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. II. 3.13; (8) relationship; confer, compare गुणप्रधानभाव, प्रकृतिविकृतिभाव et cetera, and others
bhāvabhedthe different activities such as igniting a hearth, placing a rice-pot on it, pouring water in it et cetera, and others, which form the different parts of the main activity viz. cooking; confer, compare उक्तो भावभेदो भाष्ये Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. III. 3.19, III. 4.67.
bhāvavikārakinds of verbal activity which are described to be six in number viz. production, existence, transformation, growth, decay and destruction. These six modes of existence first mentioned by Vāŗșyayani and quoted by Yāska are explained philosophically by Bhartŗhari as a mere appearance of the Śabdabrahman or Sattā when one of its own powers, the time factor ( कालशक्ति ) is superimposed upon it, and as a result of that superimposition, it (id est, that is the Śabdabrahman) appears as a process; confer, compare षड् भावाविकारा भवन्ति इति वार्ष्यायणि: | जायते अस्ति विपरिणमते वर्धते अपक्षीयते विनश्यति इति । Nir.I.2; confer, compare also Vākyapadiya III.30.
bhāvyamānalit, which is to be produced; which is prescribed by a rule, like an affix; hence, an affix or an augment or a substitute prescribed by a rule as contrasted with the conditions or the original wording for which something is substituted, or after which an affix is placed, or to which an addition is made, or which is deleted; confer, compare भाव्यमानेन सवर्णानांग्रहृणं न Par. Sek. Pari, 19; also confer, compare M.Bh. on P.I. 1.50, I.1. 69,VI.1.85, VI.4.160.
bhāṣāspoken language as opposed to the archaic Vedic Language; confer, compare भाषायां सदवसश्रुवः;P.III2.108;प्रत्यये भाषायां नित्यम् . P. VIII. 4, 45 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 1 ; confer, compare also Ṛktantra Prātiśākhya. 96, 212; cf also नेति प्रतिषेधार्थीयो भाषायाम् , उभयमन्वध्यायम् Nirukta of Yāska.I.4.
bhāṣāvṛttia short gloss on the Pāṇini's Aṣṭādhyāyī. of Pāṇini in the l2th century by Puruṣottamadeva's Paribhāṣāvṛtti.adeva, a reputed scholar belonging to the Eastern school of grammarians which flourished in Bengal and Behar in the 10th, 11th and 12th centuries, The gloss is very useful for beginners and it has given a clear explanation of the different sūtras without going into difficult niceties and discussions. The treatise does not comment upon Vedic portions or rules referring to Vedic Language because, as the legend goes, king Lakṣmaṇa Sena, for whom the gloss was written, was not qualified to understand Vedic Language; confer, compare वैदिकभाषानर्हत्वात् Com. on Bhāṣāvṛtti by Sṛṣṭidhara. There is a popular evaluation of the Bhāṣāvṛtti given by the author himself in the stanza "काशिकाभागवृत्त्योश्चेत्सिद्धान्तं बोद्धुमस्ति धीः ! तदा विचिन्त्यतां भ्रातर्भाषावृत्तिरियं मम " at the end of his treatise; for details see पुरुषोत्तमदेव.
bhāṣikabelonging to, or used in spoken language as contrasted with the Vedic Language or निगम; confer, compare अथापि भाषिकेभ्यो धातुभ्यो नैगमाः कृतो भाष्यन्ते Nirukta of Yāska.II.2.
bhāskaraśāstrīsurnamed Abhyankar (1785-1870) a great grammarian in the line of the pupils of Nāgeśa who was educated at Poona and lived at Sātārā. He taught many pupils, a large number of whom helped the spread of Vyākaraṇa studies even in distant places of the country, such as Vārāṇasi and others. For details see Vyākaraṇa The Volume of the introduction in Marathi to the Pātañjala Mahābhāṣya, written by K. V. Abhyankar and published by the O. E. Society, Poona. pp. 27-29, D. E. Society's Edition.
bhisaffix of the instrumental plural before which the base is looked upon as a Pada and sometimes split up in the Padapāṭha, especially when the preceding word has got no change for its last letter or syllable.
bhugnaname of a Saṁdhi or coalescence given by the writers of the Prātiśākhya works where the diphthong vowels ओ and औ, followed by any vowel which is not labial, are turned respectively into अव् and आव्: exempli gratia, for example ऋतेन मित्रावरुणावृतावृधावृतस्पृशा (Ṛ. Saṁh.I.2.8); confer, compare ओष्ठ्ययोन्योर्भुग्नमनोष्ठये वकारोत्रान्तरागमः । यथा ऋतेन मित्रावरुणावृतावृधावृतस्पृशा | अनोष्ठये इति किम्| वायो उक्थेभि: 2.2. (R.Saṁh. I.2.2). इत्यतः वाय उक्थेभि confer, compare Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) II.11.
bhūtaliterally what has become or happened, The word is used in books on grammar in the sense of past tense in general, which has been subdivided into (a) unseen past (परीक्षभूत or लिट् ), (b) past, not of today (अनद्यतनभूत or लङ् ) and (c) past in general (सामान्यभूत or लुङ्),confer, compare भूते P.III.2.84, परोक्षे लिट् P.III.2.116 and अनद्यतने लङ् P.III.2.111.
bhūtapūrvagatiliterally denotation of something which formerly was existing; a consideration of that form of a word which was formerly present. The word is used frequently by commentators when they try to apply a rule of grammar to a changed wording under the plea that the wording required by the rule was formerly there; confer, compareभूतपूर्वगत्या (पकारलोपे कृतेपि ) दाप् भविष्यति, Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P.I.1.20 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 9; confer, compare also Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P.I.1.56, VII.1.9 and VII.3.103; confer, comparealso सांप्रतिकाभावे भूतपूर्वगतिः Par. Śeḵ. Pari. 76.
bhūmanplurality of the individuals referred to; confer, compare बहोर्नञ्वदुत्तरपदभूम्नि P. VI.2.175.
bhedadifference, differentiation; .confer, compare सति भेदे र्किचित्समानमिति कृत्वा सवर्णसंज्ञा भविष्यति Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I.1.9, Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 2.
bhedaka(1)literallydistinguishing; differentiating; cf भेदकत्वात्स्वरस्य | भेदका उदात्तादय: | Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I. 1.1 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 13; (2) adjective; confer, compare भेदकं विशेषणं भेद्यं विशेष्यम् Kāś. on P. II: 1.57; (3) variety; kind; confer, compare सामान्यस्य विशेषो भेदकः प्रकार: Kāś. on P.V. 3.23; (4) indicating, suggesting, as contrasted with वाचक; confer, compare संबन्धस्य तु भेदक: Vākyapadīya.
bhedyathat which is distinguished; the word which is qualified; confer, compare भेद्यं विशेष्यम् Kāś. on P. II. 1.57.
bhairavamiśraone of the reputed grammarians of the latter half of the eighteenth century and the first half of the nineteenth century who wrote commentaries on several prominent works on grammar. He was the son of भवदेव and his native place was Prayāga. He has written the commentary called Candrakalā on the Laghuśabdenduśekhara, Parikṣā on the Vaiyākaraṇabhũṣanasāra, Gadā called also Bhairavī or Bhairavīgadā on the Paribhāṣenduśekhara and commentaries (popularly named Bhairavī) on the Śabdaratna and Lingānuśāsana. He is reported to have visited Poona, the capital of the Peśawas and received magnificent gifts for exceptional proficiency in Nyāya and Vyākaraṇa. For details see pp. 24 and 25 Vol. VII . Pātañjala Mahābhāṣya D. E. Society's Edition.
m(1)fifth letter of the labial class of consonants which is possessed of the properties नादानुप्रदान, घोष, कण्ठसंवृतत्व, अल्पप्राणत्व and अानुनासिक्य ; (2) substitute म् ( मश् ) for अम् of the 1st. person. singular. in Vedic literature; exempli gratia, for example वधीं वृत्रम्| confer, compare अमो मश् P. VII, 1.40;
maṇḍūkagatiliterallythe gait of a frog; jump; the continuation of a word from a preceding Sūtra to the following Sūtra or Sūtras in the manner of a frog by omitting one or more Sūtras in the middle; the word मण्डूकप्लुति is also used in the same sense especially by later grammarians; confer, compare अथवा मण्डूकगतयोधिकाराः | यथा मण्डूका उत्प्लुत्योत्प्लुत्य गच्छन्ति तद्वदधिकाराः || Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P.I.1.3 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini).2, II. 3.32, II. 4.34, VI.1.16, VI.3.49,VII. 2.117.
madhyakaumudīcalled also मध्यमकौमुदी a work on grammar which is an abridgment, to a certain extent, of Bhaṭṭojī's Siddhāntakaumudī. The treatise was written by Varadarāja, a pupil of Bhaṭṭojī for facilitating the study of the Siddhānta-kaumudi.
madhyama(1)the middle person ( मध्यमपुरुष ), confer, compare युष्मद्युपपदे...मध्यम: P. I. 4.105; confer, compare also Nirukta of Yāska.VII. 7; (2) middling tone or effort confer, compare मध्यमेन स वाक्ययोग: Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.XVIII. 4, where the commentator explains the word as उच्चनीचसमाहारविलक्षण: वाक्प्रयोगः | the word मध्यमा is used in this sense as qualifying a mode of utterance. वृत्ति; confer, compare अभ्यासार्थे द्रुतां वृत्तिं प्रयोगार्थे तु मध्यमाम् ! Ṟ. Pr. XIII. 19; cf also चतुष्कला मध्यमायार्म् Ṛktantra Prātiśākhya. 32; (3) one of the seven modes of speech or tones. cf सप्त वाचः स्थानानि भवन्ति | उपांशुध्वाननिमदेापव्दिमन्मन्द्रमध्यमताराणि Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.XXIII.4 and 5 and also कण्ठे मध्यमम् XVIII.11 where the commentatator explains मध्यम as यत्र कण्ठे स्थाने प्रयोग उपलभ्यते तन्मध्यमं नाम षष्ठं वाचस्स्थानम् | (4) one of the seven musical notes originating or proceeding from the Svarita accent confer, compare, स्वारतप्रभवा ह्येते षड्जमध्यमपञ्चमाः Pāṇ Śikṣā.
madhyepavādaa rule forming an exception to other general rules being placed between them, one or many of which are placed before and the others afterwards. Such a rule sets aside the previous rules and not the succeeding ones. The statement laying down this dictum is मध्येपवादाः पूर्वान् विधीन् बाधन्ते नोत्तरान् Paribhāṣenduśekhara of Nāgeśa.Pari. 60, also Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P.VI.4.148 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 5.
man(1)the affix मनिन् generally found in Vedic Literature added to roots ending in अा and preceded by a noun; exempli gratia, for example सुदामा, अश्वत्थामा; confer, compare आतो मनिन्कनिब्वनिपश्च P.III.2.74,75; (2) Uṇādi affix in ओद्म; confer, compare औद्म इति उन्देरौणादिके मन्प्रत्यये नलोपो गुणश्च निपात्यते Kāś. on P. VI.4.29.
manoramā(1)the popular name given to the commentary प्रौढमनेारमा on the Siddhāntakaumudī of भट्टोजीदीक्षित by the author himself the commentary is a scholarly one and very extensive; and its first portion only upto the end of Kāraka is generally read in the Sanskrit Pāṭhaśālās;(2) name of a commentary on the Madhyasiddhāntakaumudī by Rāmasarman; (3) name given to a treatise discussing roots given in the Kātantra Grammar written by रमानाथशर्मा in the sixteenth century. The work is called कातन्त्रधातुवृत्ति also.
mantraname given to the Samhitā portion of the Veda works especially of the Ṛgveda and the Yajurveda as different from the Brāhmaṇa, Āraṇyaka and other portions of the two Vedas as also from the other Vedas; confer, compare मन्त्रशब्द ऋक्शब्दे च यजु:शब्दे च; Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P.I. 1.68 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 4. The word मन्त्र occurs several times in the rules of Pāṇini ( confer, compare P. II. 4. 80, III.2.71, III.3.96, VI. 1. 151, VI.1.210, VI.3.131, VI.4.53, VI. 4.141) and a few times in the Vārttikas. (confer, compare I. 1. 68 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 4, IV.3.66 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 5 and VI. 4. 141 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 1). It is, however, doubtful whether the word was used in the limited sense by Pāṇini and Kātyāyana. Later on, the word came to mean any sacred text or even any mystic formula, which was looked upon as sacredition Still later on, the word came to mean a secret counsel. For details see Goldstūcker's Pāṇini p. 69, Thieme's 'Pāṇini and the Veda ' p. 38.
mayataddhita affix. affix मयट् (1) in the sense of proceeding therefrom (तत आगत: P. IV.3.92) added to words showing cause or meaning human being; exempli gratia, for example सममयम्, देवदत्तमयम्: (2) in the sense of product (विकार) or part (अवयव) added optionally with अण् to any word, exempli gratia, for example अश्ममयम् , आश्मनम् मूर्वामयम् मौर्वम्, and necessarily to words beginning with आ, ऐ and औ, words of the class headed by the word शर and the words गो, पिष्ट, व्रीहि, तिल and some others: confer, compare P. IV. 3. 143-150; (3) in the sense of proportion, added to a numeral; e. g. द्विमयमुदश्विद्यवानाम्; confer, compare P. V. 2.47; (4) in the sense of "made up of' added to the thing of which there is a large quantity; exempli gratia, for example अन्नमयम्, अपूपमयम् cf; तत्प्रकृतवचने मयट् P.V.4.21,22.
maśpersonal ending म् substituted for अम् in Vedic Literature; exempli gratia, for example वधीं वृत्रम्; confer, compare अमो मश् P. VII. 1.40; See म्.
maspersonal ending of the first person (उत्तमपुरुष) plural; exempli gratia, for example भवाम:, कुर्मः; confer, compare तिप्तस्झिसिप्o III.4.78.
masipersonal ending formed by adding इ to मस् of the 1st person (उत्तमपुरुष) plural in Vedic Literature दीपयामसि, भजयामसि, confer, compare Kāś. on इदन्तो मसि P.VII.1.46.
mahānyāsaname of a commentary on the Kāśikāvivaranapanjikā (popularly named Kāśikāvivaraṇapañjikā, a commentary on the Kāśikāvṛtti by Jinendrabuddhi, called Nyāsa.), mentioned by Ujjvaladatta in his Unādisūtravṛtti.
mahābhāṣyaliterally the great commentary. The word is uniformly used by commentators and classical Sanskrit writers for the reputed commentary on Pāṇini's Sūtras and the Vārttikas thereon by Patañjali in the 2nd century B. C. The commentary is very scholarly yet very simple in style, and exhaustive although omitting a number of Pāṇini's rules. It is the first and oldest existing commentary on the Pāṇini's Aṣṭādhyāyī. of Pāṇini, and, in spite of some other commentaries and glosses and other compendia, written later on to explain the Sutras of Panini, it has remained supremely authoritative and furnishes the last and final word in all places of doubt: confer, compare the remarks इति भाष्ये स्थितम्, इत्युक्तं भाष्ये, इत्युक्तमाकरे et cetera, and others scattered here and there in several Vyaakarana treatises forming in fact, the patent words used by commentators when they finish any chain of arguments. Besides commenting on the Sutras of Paanini, Patanjali, the author, has raised many other grammatical issues and after discussing them fully and thoroughly, given his conclusions which have become the final dicta in those matters. The work, in short, has become an encyclopedic one and hence aptly called खनि or अकर. The work is spread over such a wide field of grammatical studies that not a single grammatical issue appears to have been left out. The author appears to have made a close study of the method and explanations of the SUtras of Paanini given at various academies all over the country and incorporated the gist of those studies given in the form of Varttikas at the various places, in his great work He has thoroughly scrutinized and commented upon the Vaarttikas many of which he has approved, some of which he has rejected, and a few of which he has supplementedition Besides the Vaarttikas which are referred to a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page., he has quoted stanzas which verily sum up the arguments in explanation of the difficult sUtras, composed by his predecessors. There is a good reason to believe that there were small glosses or commentaries on the SUtras of Paanini, written by learned teachers at the various academies, and the Vaarttikas formed in a way, a short pithy summary of those glosses or Vrttis. . The explanation of the word वृत्तौ साधु वार्तिकम् given by Kaiyata may be quoted in support of this point. Kaiyata has at one place even stated that the argument of the Bhaasyakaara is in consonance with that of Kuni, his predecessor. The work is divided into eighty five sections which are given the name of lesson or आह्लिक by the author, probably because they form the subject matter of one day's study each, if the student has already made a thorough study of the subject and is very sharp in intelligence. confer, compare अह्ला निर्वृत्तम् आह्लिकम्, (the explanation given by the commentatiors).Many commentary works were written on this magnum opus of Patanjali during the long period of twenty centuries upto this time under the names टीका, टिप्पणी, दीपिका, प्रकाशिका, व्याख्या, रत्नावली, स्पूर्ति, वृत्ति, प्रदीप, व्याख्यानं and the like, but only one of them the 'Pradipa' of कैयटीपाध्याय, is found complete. The learned commentary by Bhartrhari, written a few centuries before the Pradipa, is available only in a fragment and that too, in a manuscript form copied down from the original one from time to time by the scribes very carelessly. Two other commentaries which are comparatively modern, written by Naarayanasesa and Nilakantha are available but they are also incomplete and in a manuscript form. Possibly Kaiyatabhatta's Pradipa threw into the background the commentaries of his predecessors and no grammarian after Kaiyata dared write a commentary superior to Kaiyata's Pradipa or, if he began, he had to abandon his work in the middle. The commentary of Kaiyata is such a scholarly one and so written to the point that later commentators have almost identified the original Bhasya with the commentary Pradipa and many a time expressed the two words Bhasya and Kaiyata in the same breath as भाष्यकैयटयोः ( एतदुक्तम् or स्पष्टमेतत् ).
mahābhāṣyadīpikāa very learned old commentary on the Mahabhasya of Patanjali written by the reputed grammarian Bhartrhari or Hari in the seventh century A. D. The commentary has got only one manuscript preserved in Germany available at present, of which photostat copies or ordinary copies are found here and there. The first page of the manuscript is missing and it is incomplete also, the commentary not going beyond the first seven Aahnikas. For details see page 383 Vol. VII Vyaakarana Mahabhasya D. E. Society's edition.
mahābhāṣyapradīpaa very scholarly commentary on Patanjali's MahabhaSya written by Kaiyatabhatta in the eleventh century, The commentary has so nicely explained every difficult and obscure point in the Mahabhasya, and has so thoroughly explained each sentence that the remark of later grammarians that the torch of the Mahabhasya has been kept burning by the Pradipa appears quite apt and justifiedition Kaiyata's commentary has thrown much additional light on the original arguments and statements in the Mahabhasya. There is a learned commentary on the Pradipa written by Nagesabhatta which is named vivarana by the author but which is well known by the name 'Uddyota' among students and teachers of Vyakarana. For details see pp. 389, 390 Vol VII, Patanjala Mahabhasya, D. E. Society's Edition.
mahābhāṣyapradīpaṭīkaname given to each of the various commentaries on the Pradipa of Kaiyata written by grammarians, out of which the commentaries of चिन्तामणि,रामचन्द्रसरस्वती, नारायण, नित्यानन्दपर्वतीय and one or two more are available in a manuscript form and those too quite incomplete.
mahābhāṣyapradīpaprakāśacalled also कैयटप्रकाश, name of the commentary on the Pradipa of Kaiyata by Nilankanthamakhi a versatile writer of the 17th century.
mahābhāṣyapradīpavivaraṇa(1)original name of the learned commentary on the 'Pradipa' of Kaiyata written by Nagesabhatta, a stalwart and epoch-making grammarian of the 18th century. The commentary is known popularly by the name 'Uddyota' or Pradipoddyota; (2) name of the commentary on Kaiyata's Pradipa by Nityaananda Parvatiya. The commentary is also known by the name दीपप्रभा.
mahiṅpersonal ending of the Atmanepada first person (उत्तमपुरुष) plural;confer, compare तिप्तस्झि ... वहिमहिङ् P. III.4.78. महिष्यादि a class of words headed by the word महिषी to which the taddhita affix. affix अ (अण्) is added in the sense Of 'proper for' ( धर्म्यम् ); exempli gratia, for example माहिषम् पौरोहितम् , हौत्रम्: confer, compare Kas,on P.IV.4.48.
mācākīyaan ancient writer of a Pratisakhya work, who is quoted in the Taittiriya Pratisakhya as one, holding the view that य and व् preceded by अ and followed by उ and ओ respectively, are dropped provided they stand at the beginning of a Pada ( word ). माचाकीय, who belonged to the Yajurveda school, is said to have held this view which is generally held by the followers of the Rgveda: confer, compare उकारौकारपरौ लुप्यते माचाकी यस्य(Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.X.29) on which the commentator adds वह्वृचानामयं पक्षः.
māṇikyadevaa Jain writer who has written a gloss on the Unadisutras consisting of ten chapters popularly called उणादिसूत्रदशपादी.
mātrā(1)measure, quantity ; cf भवति हि तत्र या च यावती च अर्थमात्रा Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P.I.2.45 and II.1.1 ; (2) mora, prosodial unit of one instant id est, that is the length of time required to pronounce a short vowel: confer, compare भूयसी मात्रा इवर्णोवर्णयोः, अल्पीयसी अवर्णस्य, M.Bh. on I.1.48 Vart. 4: confer, compare मात्रा ह्रस्वस्ता वदवग्रहान्तरं, द्वे दीर्धः,तिस्रः प्लुत उच्यते स्वरः Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.)I.16: cf also Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) I.34, T.Pr.I.37, V.Pr.I.59, R.T.28 also cf अर्धमात्रालाघवेन पुत्रोत्सवं मन्यन्ते वैयाकरणाः Par. Sek. Pari. 132. The instant is taken to be equal to the throbbing of the eye, or a flash of lightning, or a note of a wood-cock.
māhendraname of very ancient,prePaninian grammar ascribed to इन्द् of which some references only are available. The grammar work is also referred to as ऐन्द्र: confer, compare यान्युञ्जह्यार् महेन्द्राद् व्यासो व्याकरणार्णवात् | पदरत्नानि किं तानि सन्ति पाणिनिगेाष्पदे Devabodha's commentary on the Mahabharata. For details see p. 124-27 Vol. VII Mahaabhaasya, D. E. Society's Edition.
māheśasutrthe fourteen sutras अइउण्, ऋलृक् et cetera, and others which are believed to have been composed by Siva and taught to Paanini, by means of the sounds of the drum beaten at the end of the dance; confer, compare नृत्तावसाने नटराजराजेा ननाद ढक्कां नवपञ्चवारम् । उद्धर्तुकामः सनकादिसिद्धानेतद्विमशौ शिवसूत्रजालम् Nandikeswara-kaarikaa 1. For details see Vol. VII Vyaakarana Mahaabhaasya, D. E. Society's edition.
mi( मिप् )pcrsonal ending of the first person ( उत्तमपुरुष ) singular; confer, compare तिप्तस्झ तरिझ । P.III.4.78.
mit(1)characterized by the mute letter म्; augments So characterized such as नुम् , अम् and the like, are inserted after the last vowel of a word to which they are to be added; confer, compare मिदचोन्त्यात् परः P. I. 1.47; (2) a technical term applied to the fifty-five roots which are headed by the root घट् and which belong to the first corjugation, to the roots ज्वळ et cetera, and others, as also to the roots जन्, जू, क्नूस्, रञ्ज् and roots ending in अम्. These roots are not really characterized by the mute letter म्, but they are given the designation मित्. The use of the designation मित् is (a) the shortening of the penultimate vowel which : has been lengthened by Vrddhi , before the causal sign णि and (b) ; the optional lengthening of the ; penultimate vowel before the affix ) चिण् and णमुल्, For a complete list ] of 'mit' roots see Dhaatupaatha.
mippersonal ending मि of the first person ( उत्तमपुरुष ) singular. Parasmaipada: confer, compare तिप्तस्झि...महिङ् P. III.4.78.
miśraroots taking personal endings of both the Padas; Ubhayapadin roots: this term मिश्र is given in Bopadeva's grammar.
mukhanāsikāvacanadefinition of अनुनासक, a letter which is pronounced through both-the mouth and the nose-as contrasted with नासिक्य a letter which is uttered only through the nose; exempli gratia, for example ड्, ञ् , ण्, न् , म् and the nasalized vowels and nasalized य् , व् and ल्; confer, compare मुखनासिक्रावचनेीSनुनासिकः Paan. I. 1.8: confer, compare also अनुस्वारोत्तम अनुनासिकाः (Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.II.30), where the fifth letters and the anusvaara are called anunaasika. According to Bhattoji, however, anusvaara cannot be anunaasika as it is pronounced through the nose alone, and not through both-the mouth and the nose. As the anusvaara is pronounced something like a nasalized ग् according to the Taittiriyas it is called a consonant in the Taittiriya Praatisaakhya: confer, compare ' अनुस्वारोप्युत्तमवह्यञ्जनमेव अस्मच्छाखायाम् ! अर्धगकाररूपत्वात् / Com. on Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.II. 30.
mukhyaviśeṣyathe principal word in a sentence which comes last in the technical expression of the import or शाब्दबोध. It is described as primary and not subordinated to any other thing ( अन्याविशेषणीभूत). This मुख्यविशेष्य is, in a way,the crucial point in the various theories of import; exempli gratia, for example according to the grammarians the verbal activity is the principal word while,according to the Mimaamsakas the bhaavanaa is the principal word.and according to the Naiyayikas it is the subject that is the principal word.
mugdhabodhaliterally instructions to the ignorant: a treatise on grammar similar to the Astadhyayi of Panini but much shorter, written by Bopadeva or Vopadeva an inhabitant of the greater Maharastra in the Vardha district, in the thirteenth century. After the fall of the Hindu rulers in Bengal, treatises like भाषावृत्ति and others written by eastern grammarians fell into the back-ground and their place was taken up by easier treatises written by Bopadeva and others.Many commentaries were written upon the Mugdhabodha, of which the Vidyanivsa is much known to grammarians
mumthe augment म् inserted immediately after the final vowel of the word for which it is prescribed: confer, compare अरुर्द्विषदजन्तस्य मुम् P.VI.3.67; confer, compare also P.III.2.26, V. 4.7 and VI.3.69-72.
mūlaprakṛtithe original base of the word used in language; the root and the praatipadika; the word परमप्रकृति , is also used in the same sense.
mṛtathe crude base of a declinable word; the pratipadika; the term is found used in the Jainendra Vyakarana; cf Jain. Vyak. I..1.5.
mṛdu(1)soft in utterance ; the term is used in the Vajasaneyi Pratisakhya for the क्षैप्र, प्रश्लिष्ट, तैरोव्यञ्जन, and पादवृत्त varieties of the circumflex accent (स्वरित) out of which the पादवृत्त is the softest ( मृदुतम ) and consequently always called मृदु, while the others are called मृदु only with respect to the preceding one in the order given a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.; viz.अभिनिहत, क्षैप्र et cetera, and othersconfer, compareसर्वतीक्ष्णोभिनिहत:प्राश्लिष्टस्तदनन्तरम् । ततो मृदुतरौ स्वरौ जात्यक्षेप्रावुभौ स्मृतौ | ततो मृदुतर: स्वारस्तैरोव्यञ्जन उच्यते | पादवृत्तो मृदुतमस्त्वेतत्स्वारबलाबलम् Uvvata on V.Pr. I. !25; (2) soft, as opposed to hard; the term is used in connection with the first,third and fifth consonants of the five classes.
makḍonel[MACDONELL,ARTHUR ANTHONY ]a deep scholar of Vedic Gram. and Literature who has written an exhaustive Vedic Grammar; in treatment, at places he differs from Panini and follows a different method, but the manner of thinking and argument is on original lines.
meghavijayaa Jain grammarian of the seventeenth century who has written a grammar work, similar to the Siddhanta Kaumudi, on the Sabdanusasana of Hemacandra. The grammar work is called हैमकौमुदी, or चन्द्रप्रभा also.
metreyarakṣitaa recognised scholar of Paninis' grammar who belonged to the Eastern part of India and fourished in the beginning of the twelfth century. As it appears from the name Maitreya Raksita he appears to have been a Buddhist grammarian. Subsequent writers in their works refer to him by the name Raksita alone, as also by the name Maitreya, but very rarely by the name Maitreya Raksita.He wrote many works on grammar of which the 'tantrapradipa'a learned commentary on Jinendrabuddhi's Nyasa on Kasika was a reputed one, which, although available in a fragmentary manuscript form today, has been profusely quoted by prominent grammarians after him.
y(1)a consonant of the palatal class, called semivowel or अन्तःस्थ( spelt as अन्तस्थ also ), possessed of the properties संवृतत्व, नाद, घोष and अनुनासिकत्व in addition; (2) a substitute for म् when that म् is followed by ह् which is followed by य्. e. g.किंय्ह्य: confer, compare यवलपरे यवला वा. P. VIII.3. 26 Vart.l ; (3) य् looked upon as possessed of a very little effort in production i. e. which appears as almost dropped but not completely dropped when its elision is prescribed at the end of a word. e. gभोय् अच्युत; confer, compare व्योर्लधुप्रयत्नतर: शाकटायनस्य P. VIII. 3.18.
y(1)the consonant य् with अ added to it merely for the sake of facility in pronunciation; यकार is also used in the same sense: e. g. लिटि वयो यः: P.VI.1.38 confer, compare T.Pr.I: 17,21;(2) krt affix (यत्) prescribed as कृत्य or potential passive participle; exempli gratia, for exampleचेयम्, गेयम्, शाप्यम् , शक्यम् , गद्यम् , अजर्यम् पण्यम् et cetera, and others: confer, compare अचो यत्...अजर्यं संगतम् P.III. 1.97-105; (3) krt. affix क्यप् which is also an affix called krtya; e. gब्रह्मोद्यम् , भाव्यम्, घात्यम् , स्तुत्यम् , कल्प्यम् , खेयम् , भृत्यः:, भिद्यः, पुष्य:, कृत्यम्,also कार्यम् ; confer, compare P. III. 1.106-128:(4) krt affix ण्यत् ( which is also कृत्य ), e. g कार्यम् , हार्यम् , वाक्यम् , लाव्यम्, कुण्डपाय्यम्. et cetera, and others: cf P. III. 1.124-132: (5) taddhita affix. affix य affixed (a) in the sense of collection to पाश, वात et cetera, and others, as also to खल, गो and रथ, e. g. पाद्या, रथ्या et cetera, and others confer, compare P. IV. 2. 49, 50ः (b) in the चातुरर्थिक senses to बल, कुल, तुल et cetera, and others e. g. वल्यः,.कुल्यम् efeminine. P V.2. 80, (c) as a Saisika taddhita affix. affix to ग्राम्यहः' along with the affix खञ्ज e. g. ग्राम्यः, ग्रामीणः: cf P: IV. 2.94 (d) in the sense of 'good therein' ( तत्र साधुः ) and other stated senses affixed to सभा, सोदर पूर्व, and सोम: e. g. सभ्य:, पूर्व्यः; .et cetera, and others. confer, compare P. IV. 4.105, 109, 133, 137, 138: (e) in the sense of 'deserving it' to दण्ड and other words, e. g. दण्ड्य, अर्ध्र्य, मध्य, मेध्य, et cetera, and others: cf P. V. 1.66: ( f ) in the sense of quality or action to सखि e. g. सख्यम् ; cf P. V. 1.126: (6) taddhita affix. affix यत् applied to (a) राजन् श्वशुर, कुल, मनु in the sense of offspring, (b) शूल्, उखा, वायु, ऋतु and others, under certain conditions; confer, compare P. IV. 2.17, 31, 32, 101, (c) to अर्ध, परार्ध, words in the class headed by दि्श, छन्दस and others in specific senses; cf P. IV. 3-46, 54 et cetera, and others and (d) in specific senses to specific words mentioned here and there in a number of sUtras from IV.4, 75 to V.4.25; (e) to शाखा, मुख, जघन and others in the sense of इव (similar to) exempli gratia, for example शाख्यः, मुख्य:, et cetera, and others: confer, compare P. V. 3. 103; (7) case-ending य substituted for ङे of the dative sing; e. g. रामाय confer, compare P. VII. 3.102: (8) verb-affix यक् applied to the nouns कण्डू and others to make them ( denominative ) roots; e. g. कण्डूय,सन्तूय et cetera, and others confer, compare कण्ड्वादिभ्यो यक् P. III. 1.27 (9) | Vikarana य ( यक् ) applied to any root before the Saarvadhaatuka personal endings to form the base for the passive voice as also the base for the 'Karmakartari' voice e g क्रियते, भूयते, confer, compare सार्वधातुके यक् P. III. 1.67 (10) Unaadi affix य ( यक् ) applied to the root हृन् to form the Vedic word अघ्न्य: cf अघ्न्यादयश्च: ( 11 ) augment य ( यक् ) added to the affix क्त्वा in Vedic Literature: e. g. दत्त्वायः confer, compare क्त्वो यक् P. VII.1.47; (12) verb affix यङ् added to a root to form its Intensive base ( which sometimes is dropped ) and the root is doubledition e. g. चेक्रीयते,चर्करीति;. confer, compare P. III. 1.22,24; (13) short term ( प्रत्याहृार ) supposed to be beginning with य in the affix यइ in the sUtra धातेरेकाचो ... यङ् III. 1.22, and ending with ङ् in the sUtra लिड्याशिष्यङ्क III. 1.86, with a view to include the various verb affixes and conjugational signs.
yaḍantaa secondary root formed by adding the affix यङ् in the sense of repetition and intensity, to roots having one syllable and beginning with a consonant: confer, compare धातोरेकाचो हृलादे: क्रियासमभिहारे यङ् P. III. 1.22, 23,24. See य (12) a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page..
yaḍlugantaa secondary root formed by adding the affix यङ् to roots specified in P. III. 1.22,23,24, which affix is sometimes dropped: confer, compare यङोचि च ; P. II. 4. 74. The yanluganta roots take the parasmaipada personal endings and not the atmanepada ones which are applied to yananta roots.
yaḍlugantaśiromaṇia grammar work dealing with the frequentative roots written by Pandita Sesakrsna.
yañ(1)short term ( प्रत्याहृार ) formed by the letter य of हृयवरट् and the mute letter ञ्ज of इभञ् including serni-vowels and the third and the fourth consonants excepting घ् , ढ् and ध् of the five consonant groups: confer, compare अतो दीर्घो याञि P. VII. 3. 10l ; (2) taddhita affix. affix added (a) in the sense of गोत्र (grand-children and their descendants) to words of the गर्ग class and some other words under specific conditions, exempli gratia, for example गार्ग्यः: वात्स्य:, काप्यः et cetera, and others, confer, compare गर्गादिभ्यो यञ् and the following P.IV. 1. 105-108: (b) in the sense of collection to केदार, गणिका, केश and अश्व, confer, compare P.IV.2.40 and the Varttika.thereon and IV. 2.48; (c) in the Saiska senses to the word द्वीप, confer, compare P.IV.3.10: (d) to the word कंसीय e. g. कांस्यम् confer, compare P.IV.3.168, and (e) to the words अभिजित्, विदभृत् and others when they have the taddhita affix. affix अण् added to them : exempli gratia, for example अाभजित्य: confer, compare P. V. 3. 118.
yatna(1)effort in the utterance of a letter: the word which is generally used for such an effort is प्रयत्न. This effort is described to be oftwo kinds अाभ्यन्तर internal id est, that is below the root of the tongue and बाह्य a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page. the root of the tongue id est, that is inside the mouth; confer, compare यत्नं द्विधा | अाभ्यन्तरो बाह्यश्च | S. K. on P. I. 1.9; (2) specific effort, by adding a word to a rule for drawing some inference, with a view to removing some technical difficulty: cf तेन पये धावतीत्यादौ यत्नान्तरमास्थेयम् Kaas. on P. VIII. 2. 25. The phrase कर्तव्योत्र यत्न: often occurs in the Mahaabhaasya.
yatprakaraṇaliterally the topic or the section of यत्; the section where the taddhita affix. affix यत् is prescribedition This taddhita affix. affix यत् is prescribed in the fifth adhyaaya of Paanini in a number of rules in different and different senses ; confer, compare यत्प्रक्ररणे रथाच्च P.V. 1.6 Vaart.1 ; यत्प्रकरणे व्रह्मवर्चसान्त्व P.V.1.39 Vaart. 1.
yathāgṛhītaṃas they are actually found in Vedic recital with some irregularties of euphonic changes,lengthening of the vowel and the like. Specimens of such phrases are given in R.Pr.II.33 to 39.
yathānyāsaṃas it is actually put in the rule or a treatise by the author. The phrase is often used in the Mahaabhaasya when after a long discussion, involving further and further difficulties, the author reverts to the original stand and defends the writing of the sUtra as it stands. सिध्यत्येवमपाणिनीयं तु भवति or सूत्रं भिद्यते । तर्हि यथान्यासमेवास्तु is the usual expression found in the Mahaabhaasya; cf, M.Bh. I.1. Aahnika 1, I.1.1, 9, 20, 62, 65 et cetera, and others
yathālakṣaṇaṃas formed according to rules. The phrase यथालक्षणमप्रयुक्ते is very often found in the Mahaabhaasya as a general guiding remark that noun-forms or wordforms which are not found in use in the language of the people or in literature should be understood as they are derived by observing all the rules that are applicable.
yathāśrutārthagrāhinone who grasps the sense as given by the actual wording without going into details re: the use or application et cetera, and others: cf यथाश्रुतग्राहिप्रतिपत्रपेक्षोयम् यथोद्देशपक्षः इति कैयटः : Par. Sek. Pari. 2
yathāsaṃkhyamin respective order, the first for the first, the second for the second, and so on; when the number of subjects and predicates is the same, they should connect in the same order: confer, compareयथासंख्यमनुदेशः समानाम् P. I .3 .10.
yathodeśa( परिभाषा)a short phrase or term for the Paribhaasaa or guiding statement यथोद्देशं संज्ञापरिभाषम् 'technical terms and Paribhaasaas are to be interpreted at the place where they are stated, and not at the place or places of their application or utility'.
yadāgama( परिभाषा )short familiar wording for the dictum or Paribhaasaa यदागमास्तद्गुणीभूतास्तद्ग्रहणेन गृह्यन्ते ' Par. Sek. Pari. 11.
yayshort term (प्रत्याहार) for sonants beginning with य् ( in हयवरट्) and ending before the ; mute letter य् ( in कपय् ) id est, that is all consonants except! श्, ष्, स्, and ह्; confer, compare अनुस्वारस्य ययि परसवर्णः P.VIII 4. 58 by which an anusvara is changed into a cognate letter of the following which is a letter included in यय्.
yara short term ( प्रत्याहृार ) for any consonant except ह् standing at the end of a word is optionally changed to the nasal consonant of its class if followed by a nasal letter; confer, compare यरोनुनासिकेनुनासिकेा वा P. VIII.4.45: and (2) is doubled if preceded by र् or ह् as also if preceded by a vowel but not followed by a vowel; exempli gratia, for example अर्क्कः, दद्धयत्र: confer, compare अन्वॊ रहाभ्यां द्वे; अनचिच P. VIII.4.46,47.
yaltaddhita affix. affix य in the sense of possession found in Vedic Literature added optionally with the affix ख (ईन)to the words वेशोभग and यशोभग; e.g वेशोभग्य; वेशोभगीनः यशोभग्य:, यशोभागिन:; confer, compare P.IV.4.131.
yalopadropping of the consonant य् which prevents the validity of a changed letter ( स्थानिवद्भाव ); confer, compare न पदान्तद्विर्वचनवरेयलोप......विधिषु P.I.1.58.
yastaddhita affix. affix य with mute स् to indicate the application of the term पद् to the preceding base as a consequence of which the final म् of the words कम् and शम्, after which यस् is prescribed, gets changed into anusvara e. g. कंयु:, दंयु:: cf P.W.2.138.
substitute for a case affix in Vedic Literature; exempli gratia, for example उरुया, धृष्णुया for उरुणा, धृष्णुना, confer, compare सुपां सुलुक्o P.VII. 1.39.
yācsubstitute for a case affix found and the in Vedic Literature; e. g. साधुया for साधु: confer, compare सुपां सुलुक् .. ... याजाल: P. VII. 1. 39.
yājakādeia class of words headed by the words याजक, पूजक, परिचारक and others with which a word in the genitive case is compounded, in spite of the prohibition of compounds with such words, laid down by the rule कर्तरि च P. II. 2.16; exempli gratia, for exampleब्राह्मणयाजकः. ब्राह्मणपूजक: et cetera, and others: cf Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. II.2.9. These words, याजक and others standing as the second members of compounds have their last vowel accented acute;confer, compareP.VI . 2.151.
yāṭaugment या prefixed to the caseaffixes marked with the mute letter ङ् (i,e. the dative case singular. the ablative case. sing the genitive case singular. and the loc singular.) after a feminine base ending in आ; e. g. रमायै, रमाया:, रमायाम्: cf याडापः P.VII.3.113.
yāsuṭaugment यास् prefixed to the parasmaipada case-endings of लिङ् (the potential and the benedictive) which is accented acute; exempli gratia, for example कुर्यात्, क्रियात्.
yāskaa reputed ancient Niruktakara or etymologist, of the 6th century B.C. or even a few centuries before that, whose work, the Nirukta, is looked upon as the oldest authoritative treatise regarding derivation of Vedic words. Yaska was preceded by a number of etymologists whom he has mentioned in his work and whose works he has utilisedition Yaska's Nirukta threw into the back-ground the older treatises on etymology, all of which disappeared gradually in the course of time.
yugeneral wording including the affixes युच्, युट्, ट्युत्, ट्युट् and ण्युट् of which only यु remains as the affix, which is changed into अन by the rule युवोरनाकौ P.VII.1.1.
yukaugment य् (1) added to a verbbase or a root ending in अा before the affix चिण् and krt affixes marked with mute ञ् or णु: exempli gratia, for example अदायि, दायक: confer, compare आतो युक् चिण्कृतोः, P.VII.3.33; (2) added to the roots शा, ( शो ), छा ( छो ), सा ( सो ), ह्वा ( ह्वे ), व्या ( व्ये ) वा ( वै ) and पा ( पा and पे ) before the causal affix णिच् ; e. g. निशाययति पाययति et cetera, and others cf शाच्छासाह्वाव्यावेपां युक् P. VII.3.37; (3) added in Vedic Literature to the frequentative base of the root मृज् of which मर्मज्य is the form of perf Ist and 3rd person. singular. instead of ममार्ज: confer, compare दाधर्ति...ममृज्यागनीगन्तीति च P.VII.4.65.
yugapatprasaṅgasimultaneous possibility of the application of two rules or operations, when in grammar no option re : their application is admissible as it is admissible according to Mimamsa rules re : two operations enjoined by Vedic behests. In Grammar, only one of such rules applies, the priority of application being based upon the criteria of परत्व, नित्यत्व, अन्तरङ्गत्व and अपवादत्व: confer, compare शब्दपरविप्रतिषेधो नाम भवति यत्रोभयोर्युगप्रसङ्ग: | M.Bh. on VI. 1.158 Vart, 12.
yuckrt affix यु changed into अन, (1) applied in the sense of 'a habituated agent' to intransitive roots in the sense of movement or utterance, to Atmanepadi roots beginning with a consonant, to the roots जु, चेकम् सृ, शुच्, कुघ्, as also to roots in the sense of decoration: exempli gratia, for example चलन:, शब्दन:: cf P.III. 2. 148-15I: (2) applied to causal roots, as also to the roots आस् श्रन्थ् and others in the sense of verbal activity when the word so formed has always the feminine gender; exempli gratia, for example कारणा, हृरणा, आसना, घट्टना,वेदना et cetera, and others; confer, compare P.III.3.107 and the Varttikas thereon; (3) applied to roots ending in अा and preceded by the indeclinables ईषद्, दुस् or सु in the sense of easy or difficult for obtainment and, wherever seen to any root in the Vedic language, as also to some other roots as found in actual use in the classical literature; e. g. ईषद्दानो गौर्मवता, दु्ष्पानः, सुपान: et cetera, and others सूपसदन:, दुर्योधनः, दुर्मर्षण: et cetera, and others, confer, compare P.III.8.128-130.
yuvanliterally young person; masculine; the word is given as a technical term in grammar in the sense of one, who is the son of the grandson or his descendant, provided his father is alive; the term is also applied to a nephew, brother, or a paternal relative of the grandson or his descendant, provided his elderly relative, if not his his father, is alive; it is also applied to the grandson, in case respect is to be shown to him: confer, compare P. IV. 1.163-167. The affixes prescribed in the sense of युवन् are always applied to a word ending with a taddhita affix. affix applied to it in the sense of an offspring (अपत्य) or grandson (गोत्र), in spite of the ruling that in the sense of grandson or his descendant (गोत्र), one affix only इञ् or अण् or the like is added to the base; exempli gratia, for example गार्ग्यस्यापत्यं गार्ग्यायण:, दाक्षेरपत्यं दाक्षाय्ण: गार्ग्ये जीवति तस्य भ्राता सपिण्डो वा गाम्यार्यण: तत्रभवान् गार्ग्यः; गार्ग्यायणो वा.
yuvapratyayataddhita affix. affix फक् ( अायन ), फिञ् ( अायनि ) or any other in the sense of युवन् which is to be applied to a base ending with an affix in the sense of offspring ( अपत्यप्रत्ययान्त ) or with an affix in the sense of a grandson ( गोत्रप्रत्ययान्त ). The affix is not applied when a female offspring is meant.
yogavibhāgadivision of a rule which has been traditionally given as one single rule, into two for explaining the formation of certain words, which otherwise are likely to be stamped as ungrammatical formations. The writer of the Varttikas and the author of the Mahabhasya have very frequently taken recourse to this method of योगविभाग; confer, compare P.I.1.3 Vart. 8, I.1.17 Vart.1,I.1.61, Vart. 3; I. 4.59 Vart. 1, II. 4. 2. Vart.2, III.1.67 Vart. 5, III.4.2. Vart. 6, VI.I. I Vart. 5, VI.1.33 Vart.1 et cetera, and others Although this Yogavibhaga is not a happy method of removing difficulties and has to be followed as a last recourse, the Varttikakara has suggested it very often, and sometimes a sutra which is divided by the Varttikakara into two,has been recognised as a couple of sutras in the Sutrapatha which has come down to us at present.
r(1)second letter of the यण् class ( semi-vowels ) which has got the properties नादभागित्व, घोषवत्त्व,' संवृतत्व and अल्पप्राणता i. e. it is a sonant, inaspirate consonant. Regarding its स्थान or place of production, there is a difference of opinion : generally the consonant र् is looked upon as a cerebral or lingual letter (मूर्धन्य); cf ऋटुरषाणां मूर्धा, S.K.also Pāṇini. Siksa; but it is called by some as दन्त्य or दन्तमूलीय: cf रेफस्तु दस्त्ये दन्तमूले वा RT. 8, by others as दन्तमूलीय and and by still others as वर्स्त्य gingival. In the Vajasaneyi-Pratisakhya it is described as दन्तमूलीय: cf रो दन्तमूल I. 68, while in the Taittiriya Pratisakhya it is said to be produced by the touch of the middle part of the tip of the tongue just a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page. the root of the teeth;confer, compare रेफे जिह्वाग्रमध्येन प्रत्यग्दन्तमूलेभ्यः Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.II. 41; (2) substitute र् (रेफ ) for the final letter of the word अहन्, as also for the final of अम्रस्, ऊधस्, अवस् and भुवस् optionally with रु, which ( रु) is dropped before vowels, and changed to ओ before अ and soft consonants, while it is changed into visarga before hard consonants and surds.exempli gratia, for example अम्नरेव, अम्र एवः ऊधरेव, ऊधएव: confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. VIII, 2-70: (3) the consonants र् (technically) called र् in Panini's grammar ) which is substituted for the consonant स् and for the consonant न् of the word अहन् when the consonant स् or न् stands at the end of a word. This substitute रु, unlike the substitute र् is liable to be changed into visarga, or the consonant य्, or the vowel उ by P. VIII.3.15, 17, VI.1.113, 114.
r(1)the consonant र, generally cited as रेफ; the vowel अ is added to र् for facility of utterance: confer, compare T. Pr.' I.21 ; (2) short term ( प्रत्याहृार ) for र् and ल्; confer, compare उरण् रपरः, P. I. 1.51: (3) krt affix र applied to the roots नम्रः, कम्प्रः et cetera, and others in the sense of agent who is habituated to, or expert in the action expressed by the root; e. g, नम्रः, कम्प्र:; confer, compare नमिकम्पिस्म्यजसकमहिंसदीपो रः P. III. 2. 167; (4) taddhita affix. affix र as a Caturarthika affix applied to the words headed by अश्मन्: e. g. अश्मरः; confer, compare वुञ्छण् P. IV. 2. 80; (5) tad affix र in the sense of possession affixed to the words ऊष, सुषि, मुष्क, मधु, and तमस् with अ of तमस् changed to इ: e. g. ऊषरम्, सुषिरम्, मधुर:, तमिस्रा: confer, compare Kas on. P.V. 2.107 and 114: (6) taddhita affix. affix र in the sense of diminution affixed to the words कुटी, शमी and शुण्डा: exempli gratia, for example कुटीर:, शमीर, शुण्डार:: confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. V. 3. 88: (7) taddhita affix. affix रक् which see below; (8) krt affix रक् which see below; (9) a term for द्विगुसमास in the Jainendra Vyakarana.
ratnārṇavaname of a commentary on the Siddhantakaumudi written by Krsnamitra, a famous grammarian and Naiyayika who lived in the eighteenth century and wrote many commentary works on books in the Vyakarana and Nyāya Sastras.
rathaname of one of the eight kinds of recitals of the Veda Samhita by dividing it into the component words ( पद ) and reciting the component words by repeating them, in their regular order and reverse order too.
ranpersonal ending रन् substituted for the personal ending झ of the प्रथमपुरुष (third person) Atmanepada of 'lin' (potential and benedictive); confer, compare झस्य रन् P.III. 4.105.
raparawith the letter र inserted after it; the term is used in connection with the guna and vrddhi substitutes for ऋ. These substitutes are respectively अ and अा, which, by the addition of र्, always become अर् and अार्: cf उरण् रपरः P.I. 1. 51, confer, compare ऋकारस्य गुणवृद्वीं रेफाशिखा अरारावेवेति confer, compare also वृद्धिर्भवति गुणो भवतीति रेफशिरा गुणवृद्धिसंज्ञकोभिनिर्वर्तते; M.Bh. on P.VI. 4.121, VIII.2.42.
raspersonal ending of the third person. ( प्रथमपुरुष ) substituted for the affix झि in the first future ( लुट् ): confer, compare लुट: प्रथमस्य डारौरस: II.4.85.
rasavatīname of a commentary on his own work ' Sanksiptasara Vyakarana' by KramadiSvara,a sound scholar of grammar in the thirteenth century A.D.
rāghavendracārya( गजेन्द्रगडकर)a famous scholar of Grammar in the nineteenth century, who taught many pupils and wrote some commentary works, the well-known being प्रभा on the Sabdakaustubha, विषमपदव्याख्या on the Laghusabdendusekhara and त्रिपथगा on the Paribhisendusekhara. For details see p. 27 Vyakarana Mahbhasya Vol. VII D. E. Society's Edition.
rāmaor रामभट्ट who wrote a commentary on the Prakriykaumudi of Ramacandra Sesa.
rāmakiṃkasarasvatīa grammarian who wrote a small grammar treatise named अायुबोधव्याकरण which is different from the well-known अाशुबोध of तारानाथतर्कवाचस्पति.
rāmakṛṣṇabhaṭṭaa grammarian of the 17th century who wrote वैयाकरणसिद्धान्तरत्नाकर, a commentary on the different portions of the Siddhānta Kaumudi
rāmacandra(1)रामन्वन्द्राचार्य (son of कृष्णाचार्य) the well-known author of the Prakriyakaumudi. He belonged to the Sesa family and the latter half of the fifteenth century is assigned as his date. He is believed to have been a resident of Andhra. His work, the Prakriyakaumudi, was a popular grammar treatise for some time before Bhattoji's SiddhantaKaumudi got its hold, and it had a number of commentaries written upon it especially by his descendants and members of his family which became well-known as the Sesa family of grammarians. The Prakriyakaumudi is named कृष्णर्किकरप्राक्रिया also. (2) There was a grammarian named Ramacandra who wrote a small treatise on grammar named विदग्धबोध. (3) There was another grammarian of the same name who was a pupil of Nagesabhatta of the eighteenth century and who wrote a small commentary called वृतिसंग्रह on Panini's Astadhyayi. (4) There was also another Ramacandra who was a scholar of Vedic grammar and who wrote the commentary named ज्योत्स्ना on the Vjasaneyi-Pratisakhya.
rāmacandra dīkṣitaa grammarian who wrote (l) Unadikosa, ( 2 ) Manidipika, a commentary on the Unadisutras, and (3) Sabdabhedaniruipana.
rāmacandrasarasvatīpupil of वासुदेवेन्द्रसरस्वती of the sixteenth century who has written a gloss named विवरण on the Mahabhasyapradipa of Kaiyata.
rāmatarkavāgīśaa learned grammarian who held the titles महामहोपाध्याय and भट्टाचार्य, He was an advocate of the Mugdhabodha School and wrote commentaries on (1) the Mugdhabodha, (2) the Kavikalpadruma, (3) the Amarakosa and (4) the Unadi sutras. He also wrote a short gloss on case-relations, his treatise on the subject being named कारकटिप्पणी,
rāmanātha( विद्यावाचस्पति )a Sanskrit scholar of the 17th century who studied Vyakarana,. Dharma, Alamkara and other Sastras and wrote a grammar work कातन्त्ररहस्य, besides many books on other Sastras.
rāmabhadṛwriter of a commentary on the Prakriyakaumudi.
rāmānanda grammarian of the seventeenth century who wrote a commentary on Bopadeva's Mugdhabodha. He was possibly the same as Ramarama (see a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.) and Ramānandatirtha who wrote the Katantrasamgraha, although different from the well-known रामानन्दतर्थि of the sixteenth century who was a sanyasin and who wrote many philosophical and religious booklets.
rāmālaṃkārapossibly the same as रामराम (see a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.) who wrote Dhatudipika, a commentary on the Kavikalpadruma of Bopadeva.
rāmeśvaraa grammarian who wrote a small compendium on grammar named शुद्धाशुबोध.
rāśiusually used in the sense of a collection or a heap or a lunar constellation; the word is often used after the word वर्ण when it means the traditional collection of letters or the alphabet. The words अक्षरराशि, ब्रह्मराशि and अक्षरसमाम्नाय are also used in the same sense.
riṅsubstitute रि for a verbal base ending in ऋ before श (the sign of the 6th conjugation) यक् (sign of the passive voice. voice) and a लिङ् affix beginning with य which is not a Sārvadhātuka affix; e. g. अाद्रियते, क्रियते, क्रियात्; confer, compare रिङ् शयग्लिङ्क्षु P.VII.4.28.
ru(1)substitute र् for the consonant स् at the end of a word as also for the ष् of सजुत्र् , न् of अहन् and optionally with र् for the final स् of अम्नस्, ऊधस् and अवस् in Veda; exempli gratia, for example अग्निरत्र, वायुरत्र, सजूर्देवोभिः confer, compare P.VIII.2.66; the र् of this रु (as contrasted with the substitute र् which see a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.) is further changed into उ before a soft consonant and before the vowel अ provided it is preceded by the vowel अ, while र् , prescribed as substitute र (which see a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.), remains unchanged; e g. शिवोर्च्यः, शिवो वन्द्य: as contrasted with अहरत्र, अहर्गण:; (2) substitute र् for the final ज् of अवयज् (e. g, अवयाः), for ह् of श्वेतवह् (exempli gratia, for example श्वेतवाः), and for श् of पुरोडाश् (exempli gratia, for example पुगेडा:) before the case affix सु ; confer, compareP.VIII.4.67;(3)substitute र् (or द्) for the final स् or द् of a verb-form ending with the personal ending सिप् of the 2nd person. sing; confer, compare P. VIII.2.74,75;(4)substitute र् for the final न् of words ending with the affix मत् or वस् in Veda; exempli gratia, for example मरुत्व: हरिवः ; confer, compare Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.VIII.3.1; (5) substitute र् for the final न् at the end of a word when it is followed by a छव् letter id est, that is the first or a second consonant excepting ख् and फ्; exempli gratia, for example भवांश्चिनोति; confer, compare P.VIII. 3.7; (6) substitute र् for the final न् of नॄन् before the letter प् as also for the final न् of स्वतवान् and कान् under certain conditions; confer, compare P. VIII.3. 10.12.
ruṭaugment र्, prefixed to the person. ending झ of the प्रथमपुरुष (3rd person. plural) after the root शी, विद् and in Vedic literature after a few other roots exempli gratia, for example शेरते, संविद्रते,अदुह्व;confer, compare शीङो रुट्; P.VII. 1.6-8.
rūḍhaconventional; traditional; one of the four senses in which words are usedition The senses are यौगिक (derivative ), रूढ (conventional), योगरूढ and यौगिकरूढ; The term रूढ is also used in the sense of ' a conventional word ' confer, compare प्रथमाशब्दो विभक्तिविशेषे रूढः Kās. on P. VI. 1.102.
rūpamālā(1)an elementary work on Sanskrit grammar composed by Vimalasarasvatī, in which the Sūtras of Pāņini are arranged in different topics many of which are called माला, such as अजन्तमाला, हलन्तमाला, छान्दसमाला, अव्ययमाला and so on.(2) the name रूपमाला is also found given to a work giving collections of formed words written by Puņyanandana.
rūpya(1)a taddhita affix. affix applied to a word meaning 'a cause' or expressing 'a human being' in the sense of 'proceeding therefrom' exempli gratia, for example समादागतं समरूप्यम्; देवदत्तरूप्यम् ; confer, compare हेतुमनुष्येभ्येन्यतरस्यां रूप्यः P. IV. 3.81 ; (2) a taddhita affix. affix applied to a word in the genitive case in the sense of भूतपूर्व, 'formerly belonging to' ; e. g. देवदत्तस्य भूतपूर्वो गौः देवदत्तरूप्य:; confer, compare Kāś. on षष्ठया रूप्य च P. V. 3.54.
re(रेश्)personal ending in Vedic Literature, substituted for त of the प्रथमपुरुष ( 3rd person. ) plural in the Perfect tense; confer, compare लिटस्तझयो रेश् इरेच् P. III. 4.81.
rekhātermed also 'लेखा '; one of the subdivisions of the krama-pāțha.
rephina term applied(1)to the Visarjasnīya letter preceded by any vowel excepting अ and अा, ( 2 ) to the Visarjanīya preceded by अ in some specified words such as प्रातः, भाः, अविभः, अाद:, क: et cetera, and others under certain conditions, as also, (3) to the Visarjanīya in हातः, सनितः et cetera, and others For details see Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) I.30-36.
raupersonal ending substituted for the प्रथमपुरुषद्विवचन ( 3rd pers, dual affix तस्) in the periphrastic or first future;e. g. कर्तारौ; confer, compare लुट; प्रथमस्य डारौरसः P. II. 4.85.
rauḍhīyaa term jocularly used with the word घृत preceding it,for students of a famous scholar named धृतरौढि; confer, compare ओदनपाणिनीया: घृतरौर्ढायाः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. 1.1.73.
l(1)a consonant of the dental class which is a semi-vowel ( यण् ) with liquid contact in the mouth, and which is inaspirate ( अल्पप्राण ),voiced ( घोष ) and both nasalised and unnasalised; (2) name in general ( लकार ) given to the personal endings applied to roots in the ten tenses and moods which take different substitutes ति, त:, अन्ति et cetera, and others and have various modifications and augments in the different tenses and moods; (3) substituted as a semi-vowel ( यण् ) for the vowel ऌ followed by any other vowel in the euphonic combinations; (4)applied at the beginning of nontaddhita affixes as a mute letter indicating the acute accent for the vowel preceding the affix; confer, compare लिति; P. VI. 1.193; ( 5 ) substituted for त्, थ्, द्, घ् or न् before ल्, confer, compare P.VIII.4. 60; (6) substituted under certain conditions for the consonant र् (a) of the root कृप्, (b) of prefixes प्र and परा before the root अय्, (c) of the root गॄ in frequentative forms and optionally before affixes beginning with a vowel, and (d ) of the word परि before घ and अङ्क; confer, compare P. VIII. 2. 18 to 22. _ ल (1) consonant ल्; see ल् a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.' (2) a general term usually used by ancient grammarians to signifyलोप (elision or disappearance) of a letter or a syllable or a word; confer, compare सर्वसादेर्द्विगोश्च ल: | सवार्तिक:, द्वितन्त्र: Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P.IV.2.60; (3) taddhita affix. affix ल added to the word क्लिन्न when चिल् and पिल् are substituted for the word क्लिन्न; e.g, चिल्लः, पिल्ल: confer, compare P. V. 2.33 Vārt 2.
lakāra(1)the consonant ल्.; see ल् (1) a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.; (2) the personal endings affixed to roots; see ल् (2).
lakṣaṇa(1)a rule or a sūtra composed by the ancient Sūtrakāras; the word is very frequently used in this sense by the Bhāşyakāra and later commentators; confer, compare लक्ष्यलक्षणे व्याकरणम्; confer, compare also लक्षणं हि नाम ध्वनति, भ्रमति मुहूर्तमपि नावतिष्ठते M.Bh on P.I.1.3 Vārt 10; (2) characteristic or sign; confer, compare लक्षणेनाभिप्रती आभिमुख्ये P. II. 1. 14; confer, compare also P.I.4.90 and III. 2.12; (3) indirect way of expression; confer, compare लक्षणप्रतिपदोक्तयोः प्रतिपदोक्तत्यैव ग्रहणम् Paribhāṣenduśekhara of Nāgeśa. Pari. 105.
lakṣaṇapratipadoktaa short term used for the well-known Paribhāşā लक्षणप्रतिपदोक्तयोः प्रतिपदोक्तस्यैव ग्रहणम् Par. Sek. Pari. I05, laying down that when a question arises as to which of the two words लक्षणोक्त (arrived at by certain changes or modifications) and प्रतिपदोक्त, (directly expressed) be accepted, the latter should be preferredition
lakṣaṇāimplication; potentiality of implication; this potentiality of words viz. लक्षणा is not recognised by grammarians as a potentiality different from the अभिधाशक्ति or the power of denotation. Later grammarians, however, like the Ālamkārikas, have used the word in the sense of potentiality of implication as different from that of denotation; confer, compare अन्त्यशब्द लक्षणा न च Paribhāşenduśekhara.
lakṣmaṇasūria grammarian who has written a booklet on the six dialects, which is named षड्भाषाचन्द्रिका.
laghukaumudīknown as लघुसिद्धान्तकौमुदी also, an abridged work based upon the Siddhāntakaumudi of Bhațțojī Dīkşita, written by Bhațțojī's pupil Varadarāja. The work is very valuable and helpful to beginners in grammar. It has got the same topics as the Siddhāntakaumudī, but arranged differently. The work, named सारसिद्धान्तकौमुदी is the same as लघुसिध्दान्तकौमुदी. Possibly सारसिद्धान्तकौमुदी was the original name given by the author.
laghunyāsa(1)short writing, brief putting in, brief expression; confer, compare सोयमेवं लघुना न्यासेन सिद्धे et cetera, and others; (2) the word is given as a name to a grammatical work, written by देवेन्द्रसूरि on the शब्दानुशासन of Hemacandra, possibly in contrast with the बृहन्न्यास written by Hemacandra himself or with Kāśikāvivaranapańjikā popularly called न्यास written by Jinendrabuddhi on the Kāśikāvŗti of Jayāditya and Vāmana. See न्यास.
laghuprakriyāname of a grammar treatise based on the Sabdānuśāsana of Hemacandra written by Vinayavijaya where the sūtras of Hemacandra are arranged in different topics as in the Siddhāntakaumudī of Bhoțțojī.
laghuprayatnatararequiring still less effort for utterance than that required for the usual utterance; the term is used in connection with the utterance of the consonant य् which is substituted for Visarga following upon long अा and followed by any vowel. In such cases य् is not pronounced at all according to Śākalya, while it is somewhat audibly pronounced according to Śākațāyana; confer, compare व्योर्लघुप्रयत्नतरः शाकटायनस्य P. VIII. 3.18.
laghuśabdenduśekharaname of a commentary on Bhațțojī's Siddhāntakaumudī written by Nāgeśa Bhațța, the stalwart Grammarian of the eighteenth century. The work is named लघुशब्देन्दुशेखर which differentiates it from the author's another work बृहच्छब्देन्दुशेखर of which the former is an abridgment. As the study of the Laghuśabdenduśekhara is very common and as the Bŗhatśabdenduśekhara is seldom studied, it is always the Laghuśabdenduśekhara that is understood by the simple and popular name Śekhara.
laṅname given to the affixes of the imperfect tense; confer, compare अनद्यतने लङ् P. III. 2.111, explained by Bhațțoji as भूतानद्यतने लङ् स्यात् in his SiddhāntaKaumudi.
lactaddhita affix. affix ल applied optionally with the affix मतुप् to words ending in अा and meaning a detachable or undetachable part of an animal, ; as also to words mentioned in the group headed by the word सिध्म,as also to words वत्स and अस showing affection and strength respectively ; e. g. चूडाल:, सिध्मल:, वत्सल:, et cetera, and others; confer, compare P. V. 2. 96-98.
laṭgeneral personal ending applied to roots (1 ) to show the present time for which the personal endings ति त:...महि are substituted for the formation of verbs and अत् ( शतृ ) and आन or मान ( शानच् ) for the formation of the present participle; (2) to show past time when the indeclinable स्म is used in the sentence along with the verbal form or when the indeclinables ननु, न, नु, पुरा, यावत्, कदा, कर्हि et cetera, and others are used along with the verbal form under specific conditions; e. g. कटं करोति देवदत्त:, यजति स्म युधिष्ठिर:, अहं नु करोमि, वसन्तीह पुरा छात्रा:, यावद् भुङ्क्ते et cetera, and others; confer, compare P. III. 2.118-123, III. 3.4-9.
lasārvadhātukaa personal ending substituted for ल् which in certain cases gets the grave accent in, spite of the general rule that affixes ( which include personal endings ) are acute; confer, compare तास्यनुदात्तेन्डिद्दुपदेशाल्लसार्वधातुकमह्न्विङोः P. VI. 1. 186.
lādeśasubstitutes तिप्, तस् झि (अन्ति) सिप् .....महिङ् for ल्, signifying the ten ल् affixes or lakaras लट्, लिट्, लुट् et cetera, and others, applied to roots in the senses of the different tenses and moods; confer, compare P.III.4.78.
lāvasthāthe original condition of ल् or the personal endings before the affixes तिप्, तस् and others are substituted for them in accordance with the time or mood, as also the person and the number in view;confer, compare लावस्थायामेव स्यादयः, सार्वधातुके श्यनादयः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P.III. 1. 33.
liṅgeneral term for the affixes called लिङ् (optative) which includes the potential ( विधिलिङ् ) and the conditional ( अाशीर्लिङ् ) affixes; .confer, compare विधिनिमन्त्रणामन्त्रणाधीष्टसंप्रश्र्नप्रार्थनेषु लिङ् and अाशिषि लिङ्लोटौ P. III. 3.161 and 173.
liṅga(1)sign or characteristic mark; generally the mute letter prefixed or suffixed to roots,affixes, or augments and their substitutes with a specific purpose; confer, compare किंचिल्लिङ्गमासज्य वक्ष्यामि Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ).on I.1.1 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini).7, अवयवे कृतं लिङ्ग समुदायस्य विशेषकं भवति Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P.I.3.62 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 5; (2) proof, evidence ( प्रमाण ); the word is often used in the Paribhāșendușekhara and other works in connection with a rule or part of a rule quoted as an evidence to deduce some general dictum or Paribhāșā; (3) gender; confer, compare लिङ्ग स्त्रीलिङ्गपुंलिङ्गनपुंसकानि Kāś. on P. II. 3. 46; confer, compare also प्रातिपदिकग्रहणे लिङ्गविशिष्टस्यापि ग्रहणम्. Paribhāṣenduśekhara of Nāgeśa.Pari.71.The gender of a word in Sanskrit language does not depend on any specific properties of a thing; it simply depends on the current usage; confer, compare लोकाश्रयत्वाल्लिङ्गस्य which is often quoted in the Mahābhāsya; confer, compare Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. II. 1.36, II.2.29, II.4.12, IV. 1.3, V.3.66, V.4.68, VIII.1.15. For details see Mahābhāșya on P.IV.1. 3 where after a long enlightening discussīon the definition संस्त्यानप्रसवौ लिङ्गम् is given.
liṅgaviśiṣṭagrahaṇainclusion of the feminine form of a word when a word in the masculine gender is used in a rule, for certain operations such as the application of affixes and the like;confer, compare the usual dictum regarding this practice viz. the Paribhāșā प्रातिपदिकग्रहणे लिङ्गविशिष्टस्यापि ग्रहणम् Paribhāṣenduśekhara of Nāgeśa. Pari. 71. as also Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. IV. 1. 1 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 5 to Vārt, 15 for places of the application of the dictum and those of its rejection.
liṅgaviśiṣṭaparibhāṣāthe dictum to include the feminine form of a word when in a rule the word is used in the masculine gender : प्रातिपदिकग्रहणे लिङ्गविशिष्टस्यापि ग्रहणम् Paribhāṣenduśekhara of Nāgeśa. Pari. 71. See लिङ्गविदिाग्रहण.
liṅgavyatyayatransposition of genders, as noticed often in Vedic language; e. g. मधोर्गृह्लाति or मधोस्तृप्ताः for मधुन:; confer, compare M.Bh. on P. I. 4.9.
liṭan affix of the perfect tense; confer, compare परोक्षे लिट् P.III.2.115 for which the specific affixes णल्, अतुस् उस् et cetera, and others are substituted after roots which take Parasmaipada affixes. Before the lit affixes, a monosyllabic root is reduplicated while dissyllabic roots and denominative and other secondary roots, formed by adding an affix to an original root,take the affix अाम् after which all 'liț' personal endings are dropped and the forms of the roots कृ,भू and अस् with the necessary personal-endings, are placed immediately after the word ending in अाम् , but often with the intervention of a word or more in the Vedic language and rarely in the classical language; confer, compare तं पातयां प्रथममास पपात पश्चात् ; confer, compare कास्प्रत्ययादाममन्त्रे लिटि P.III.I. 35 to 42.
litan affix marked with the mute letter ल् such as ल्युट्, तातिल्, तल्, तसिल्, विधल्, भक्तल् et cetera, and others where the mute ल् signifies the acute accent for the vowel of the base which immediately precedes the affix; e. g. चिकीर्षक:;in which the vowel ई is acute; confer, compare लिति VI.1.193.
litsvarathe acute accent for the vowel immediately preceding the affix caused by that affix being marked with the mute consonant ल्. See लित् a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.; confer, compare अनुदात्तत्वं क्रियतां लित्स्वर इति किमत्र कर्तव्यम् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. II. 4.33.
lībiś[ LIEBICH, BRUNO ]a European grammarian belonging to Breslau who lived in the last quarter of the nineteenth and the first quarter of the twentieth century. He made a critical study of Sanskrit grammar and edited | the Cāndra Vyākaraņa and the Kșīratarańgiņī.
luelision of an affix or its part in the process of the formation of a word as prescribed by the specific mention of the words लुक्, श्लु and लुप् which have the syllable लु as common. The specific feature of the elision by the use of these letters is the prohibition of any such operation for the preceding base as is conditioned by the elided affix; confer, compare प्रत्ययलोपे प्रत्ययलक्षणम् | न लुमताङ्गस्य P.I.1.62,63.
luk(1)disappearance (लुच्यते इति लुक्); a term used by Pāņini for the disappearance of an affix or its part under specified conditions as prescribed by a grammar rule with the mention of the word लुक्; exempli gratia, for example प्रत्ययस्य लुक्श्लुलुप: P. I.1.61 ; (2) augment ल् added to the root ला in the sense of melting (an oily thing); confer, compare घृतं विलालयति. See Kās, on P.VII.3. 39.
luṅan affix applied to a root, showing action of immediate past time as contrasted with affixes called लिट् or लङ्. The affix लुङ् is found used, however, in the sense of the past time in general, and irrespective of time in Vedic Literature; confer, compare छन्दसि लुङ्लङ्लिटः P. III. 4.6. The conjugational affixes ति, त:, et cetera, and others are substituted for लुङ् as for the lakāras of other tenses and moods and the distinguishing sign or विकरण is added to a root before the affix called लुङ्; confer, compare च्लि लुङि and the following P. III. 1.43 et cetera, and others
luṭgeneral name for affixes of the first future which are added to roots when the future time is not the present day, but the next and the succeeding ones; confer, compare अनद्यतने लुट् P. III. 3.15. The affixes ति, त: et cetera, and others replace the affix लुट् in accordance with the number and person in view; confer, compare तिप्तस्झिसिप् .... P. III. 4 78.
lupdisappearance ( लुप्यते इति लुप् ); a term used by Pāņini with reference to the disappearance of an affix or its part under specified conditions by the express mention of the word लुप्. Although after the disappearance of an affix no operation for the base before, can take place as conditioned by the affix, i. e. although there is no प्रत्ययलक्षण, still, when the disappearanee is mentioned as लुप्, the base gets the gender and number of that original form of it which existed before the affix, which has disappeared, was applied; confer, compare कुरव: दश:, चञ्चेव पुरुष: चञ्चा; confer, compare लुपि युक्तवद् व्यक्तिवचने. P. I. 2.51 and Kāśikā thereon.
lumatliterally possessed of the syllable or wording लु. The word is applied to the terms लुक्, श्लु, and लुप् which contain the letter लु and which all mean the disappearance of a wordelement; confer, compare न लुमताङ्गस्य । लुक् श्लु लुप् एते लुमन्त: S.K. on P. I. 1.63.
lṛcommon term for the affixes लृट् ( second Future ) and लृङ् (conditional), the remnant being लृ after the mute consonants ङ् and ट् have been droppedition
lṛṅgeneral term for the personal affixes of the conditional, which are applied to a root to show the happening of an action only if there was another preceding action, both the actions being expressed by लृङ् or conditional affixes; exempli gratia, for example देवश्चेदवर्षिष्यत् सुभिक्षमभविष्यत्; confer, compare लिङ्निमित्ते लृङ् क्रियातिपत्तौ P. III.3. 139, 140. लृङ् is also used under certain other conditions when some specific partīcles are used; confer, compare P.III.3.141-146, 151.
lṛṭa general term for the general affix ल् of the second future which is applied in the sense of future time in general, without any specific conditions, the affixes ति, त:, अन्ति being substituted for the ल् and the sign (vikaraņa) स्य being added to the root; confer, compare P.III.3.13 and III. 3. 133. The terminations अत् and अान are substituted for the affix लृट् to form future participles; exempli gratia, for example भविष्यत्, एधिष्यमाण, confer, compare लृट; सद्वा P.III.3.14.
leṭa general term for the affixes of the Vedic subjunctive, the usual personal-endings ति, तस् et cetera, and others being substituted for लेट् as in the case of other tenses and moods. The augments अट् and आट् are sometimes prefixed to the लेट् affix and the sign ( विकरण ) स् ( सिप् ) is sometimes added to the roots. The forms of लेट् are to be arrived at as they are found actually used in Vedic language, even by placing personal-endings of a person or number different from what is actually requiredition
leśasuch a slow or indistinct utterance or pronunciation of the letter य् or व् preceded by अ, as shows that it is almost droppedition This indistinct or slurred utterance of य् or व, which is described as advocated by the Prātiśākhyakāra Vātsapra, corresponds to the utterance of य् or व् with a very low tone as mentioned by Pāņini in the rule व्योर्लघुप्रयत्नतरः शाकटायनस्य; exempli gratia, for example अाप उन्दन्तु; या जाता ओषधयः et cetera, and others; confer, compare लेशो वात्सप्रस्य एतयोः T.Pr. 10.23; confer, compare also लेशेन प्रयत्नशैथिल्येन ब्यञ्जनानां वचनमुच्चारणं क्रियते Uvvața on R.Pr. XIV.5.
lokavijñānause or understanding of a word current among the people; confer, compare अन्तरेणैव वचनं लोकविज्ञानात्सिद्धमेतत् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I.1.2I Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 5.
lokāśrayatvadependence upon the people for the use.The phrase लोकाश्रयत्वाल्लिङ्गस्य, referring to the fixation of gender depending entirely on the people's usage, is very common in the Mahābhāșya; confer, compare M.Bh. on P. II.1.36, II.2.29, et cetera, and others
lopadisappearance of a word or part of a word enjoined in grammar for arriving at the required forms of a word; confer, compare अदर्शनं लोपः P. I.1.52: confer, compare अदर्शनमश्रवणमनुच्चारणमनुपलब्धिरभावो वर्णविनाश इत्यनर्थान्तरम् । एतैः शब्दैर्योर्थोभिधीयते तस्य लोप इतीयं संज्ञा भवति Kāś. on P.I.1. 52. This disappearance in the case of an affix is tantamount to its notional presence or imaginary presence, as operations caused by it do take place although the word element has disappeared; confer, compare प्रत्ययलोपे प्रत्ययलक्षणम् । प्रत्यये लुप्तेपि तद्धेतुकं कार्ये भवति Kāś. on P. I.1.62.
v(1)the semivowel व्: see व्; (2) personal-ending substituted for वस् in the perfect ( लिट् ) first person (उत्तमपुरुष), and in the present tense in the case of the root विद्; confer, compare परस्मैपदानां णलतुसुस्० and विदो लटो वा. P. III. 4.82,83; (3) krt affix क्विप् , क्विन् or वि of which only व् remains; confer, compare अनिगन्तोञ्चतौ वप्रत्यये P. VI. 2.52; confer, compare also विष्वग्देवयोश्र्च टेरद्यञ्चतौ वप्रत्यये VI.3.92.the affix is mentioned as वप्रत्यय by Panini, but, in fact, it is व् , अ being added for ease in pronunciation; (4) taddhita affix. affix in the sense of possession added along with the other affixes इन् , इक, and वत् to the word केश and to some other words such as मणि, हिरण्य, राजी, अर्णस् et cetera, and others as also to गाण्डी and अजग; confer, compare P. V. 2. 109, 110.
vaktavyathat which ought to be stated or prescribed; the word is frequently found used by the Varttikakāra when he suggests any addition to, or modification in Panini's rules. Sometimes,the word is added by the author of the Mahabhasya in the explanation of a Varttika after stating what is lacking in the Varttika.
vacana(1)literally statement; an authoritative statement made by the authors of the Sutras and the Varttikas as also of the Mahabhasya; confer, compare अस्ति ह्यन्यदेतस्य वचने प्रयोजनम् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on Siva Sutra 1 Vart. 1 The word is also used predicatively in the sense of वक्तव्यम् by the Varttikakara; confer, compare ऌति ऌ वावचनम् , ऋति ऋ वावचनम् ; (2) number, such as एकवचन, द्विवचन, बहुवचन et cetera, and others; confer, compare वचनमेकत्वद्वित्वबहुत्वानि Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana.on P.I.2.51 ; cf लुपि युक्तिवद् व्यक्तिवचने | लुकि अभिधेयवल्लिङ्गवचनानि भवन्ति। लवणः सूपः। लवणा यवागू:। M.Bh.on P.I. 2.57; (3) expressive word; confer, compare गुणवचनब्राह्मणादिभ्यः कर्मणि च P. V.1.124 where the Kasika explains the word गुणवचन as गुणमुक्तवन्तो गुणवचनाः; confer, compare also the terms गुणवचन, जातिवचन, क्रियावचन et cetera, and others as classes of words; confer, compare also अभिज्ञावचने लृट् P.III.2.112; (4) that which is uttered; confer, compare मुखनासिकावचनोनुनासिक:। मुखसहिता नासिका मुखनासिका । तया य उच्चार्यते असौ वर्ण: Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. I.1.8.
vati(1)taddhita affix. affix वत् in the sense of similar activity or thing; e. g. राजवद्वर्तते, मथुरावत् स्त्रुघ्ने प्राकार:; confer, compare तेन तुल्यं क्रिया चेद्वतिः | तत्र तस्येव P.V.1.115, 116; (2) taddhita affix. affix वत् in the sense of deserving;e.g, राजवत् पालनम् ; confer, compare तदर्हम् P.V.1.117; (3) taddhita affix. affix वत् applied to prefixes in Vedic Literature without any sense of its own ; e.g यदुद्वतो निवतो याति बप्सत् ; confer, compare उपसर्गाच्छन्दसि धात्वर्थे P.V. 1. 118.
vatuor वतुप् taddhita affix. affix वत् applied to the pronouns यत्, तद्, एतद् , क्रिम् and इदम् in the sense of measurement; e.g, यावान् , तावान् , एतावान् , कियान् | इयान् , कीवान् ;confer, compare यत्तदेतेभ्यः परिमाणे वतुप् , किमिदंभ्यां वो घ: P. V. 2.39,40.Words ending with this affix वतु are designated संख्या: confer, compare बहुगणवतुडति संख्या P.I.1.23.
vanipkrt affix वन् applied in the sense of agent in Vedic literature to a root ending in अा and in spoken language to any root where forms are seen;exempli gratia, for exampleभूरिदावा, विजावा;confer, compare अातो मनिन्क्वनिब्वनिपश्च । अन्येभ्योपि दृश्यते P. III. 2. 74, 75
varadarājaa scholar of grammar and a pupil of Bhattoji Diksita who flourished in the end of the seventeenth century and wrote abridgments of the Siddhanta-kaumudi for beginners in grammar named लघुसिद्धान्तकौमुदी and मध्यसिद्धान्तकौमुदी as also धातुकारिकावली and गीर्वाणपदमञ्जरी. The work under the name सारसिद्धान्तकौमुदी, which is the shortest abridgment, is, in fact, the लघुसिद्धान्तकौमुदी itselfeminine. It is possible that the auother first prepared the सारसिद्धान्तकौमुदी and then, he himself or a pupil of his, put additional necessary matter and prepared the Laghusiddhanta-kaumudi.
vararuci(1)a reputed ancient grammarian who is identified with Katyayana, the prominent author of the Varttikas on the Sutras of Panini. Both the names वररुचि and कात्यायन are mentioned in commentary works in connection with the Varttikas on the Sutras of Panini, and it is very likely that Vararuci was the individual name of the scholar, and Katyayana his family name. The words कात्य and कात्यायन are found used in Slokavarttikas in the Mahabhasya on P.III.2.3 and III.2.118 where references made are actually found in the prose Varttikas (see कविधेो सर्वत्र प्रसारणिभ्यो ड: P.III. 2. 3 Vart and स्मपुरा भूतमात्रे न स्मपुराद्यतने P.III.2.118 Vart. 1)indicating that the Slokavarttikakara believed that the Varttikas were composed by Katyayana. There is no reference at all in the Mahabhasya to Vararuci as a writer of the Varttikas; there is only one reference which shows that there was a scholar by name Vararuci known to Patanjali, but he was a poet; confer, compare वाररुचं काव्यं in the sense of 'composed' ( कृत and not प्रोक्त ) by वररुचि M.Bh. on P. IV. 2.4. ( 2 ) वररुचि is also mentioned as the author of the Prakrta Grammar known by the name प्राकृतप्रकाश or प्राकृतमञ्जरी, This वररुचि, who also was कात्यायन by Gotra name, was a grammarian later than Patanjali, who has been associated with Sarvvarman, (the author of the first three Adhyayas of the Katantra Sutras), as the author of the fourth Adhyaya. Patanjali does not associate वररुचि with Kityayana at alI. His mention of वररुचि as a writer of a Kavya is a sufficient testimony for that. Hence, it appears probable that Katyayana, to whom the authorship of the Vajasaneyi Pratisakhya and many other works allied with Veda has been attributed, was not associated with Vararuci by Patanjali, and it is only the later writers who identified the grammarian Vararuci,who composed the fourth Adhyaya of the Katantra Grammar and wrote a Prakrit Grammar and some other grammar' works, with the ancient revered Katyayana, the author of Varttikas, the Vijasaneyi Pratisakhya and the Puspasutra; (3) There was a comparatively modern grammariannamed वररुचि who wrote a small treatise on genders of words consisting of about 125 stanzas with a commentary named Lingavrtti, possibly written by the author himselfeminine. (4) There was also another modern grammarian by name वररुचि who wrote a work on syntax named प्रयोगमुखमण्डन discuss^ ing the four topics कारक, समास, तद्धित and कृदन्त.
varganame given to the different classes of consonants which are headed by an unaspirate surd; e. g. कवर्ग, चवर्ग, टवर्ग, तवर्ग and पवर्ग. The several consonants in each group or class, are, in their serial order, named वगेप्रथम, वर्गद्वितीय et cetera, and others On the analogy of these five classes, the semivowels are called by the name यवर्ग and sibilants, are called by the name शवर्ग,
varṇavikārachange of one letter into another ( in the formation of a word ) the discussion of which is looked upon as one of the features of grammar; confer, compare लोपागमवर्णविकारज्ञो हृि सम्यग्वेदान्परिपालायिष्यति.M.Bh. Ahnika 1.
varṇavicāladisappearance of a letter: cf वर्णाश्रयः प्रत्ययो वर्णविचालस्यानिमित्तम् ; दाक्षि: I M.Bh. on. P.I.1. 39 Vart. 10.
varṇavidhian injunction or operation conditioned by a single letter: लादेशो वर्णविधेर्भवत्यन्तरङ्गतः M.Bh. on P.1.4.2.
varṇasamāmnāyaa collection of letters or alphabet given traditionally. Although the Sanskrit alphabet has got everywhere the same cardinal letters id est, that is vowels अ, इ et cetera, and others, consonants क्, ख् etc : semivowels य्, र्, ल्, व, sibilants श् ष् स् ह् and a few additional phonetic units such as अनुस्वार, विसर्ग and others, still their number and order differ in the different traditional enumerations. Panini has not mentioned them actually but the fourteen Siva Sutras, on which he has based his work, mention only 9 vowels and 34 consonants, the long vowels being looked upon as varieties of the short ones. The Siksa of Panini mentions 63 or 64 letters, adding the letter ळ ( दुःस्पृष्ट ); confer, compare त्रिषष्टि: चतुःषष्टिर्वा वर्णाः शम्भुमते मताः Panini Siksa. St.3. The Rk Pratisakhya adds four (Visarga, Jihvamuliya, Upadhmaniya and Anusvara ) to the forty three given in the Siva Sutras and mentions 47. The Taittiriya Pratisakhya mentions 52 letters viz. 16 vowels, 25class consonants, 4 semivowels,six sibilants (श्, ष् , स्, ह् , क्, प् , ) and anusvara. The Vajasaneyi Pratisakhya mentions 65 letters 3 varieties of अ, इ, उ, ऋ and लृ, two varieties of ए, ऐ, ओ, औ, 25 class-consonants, four semivowels, four sibilants, and जिह्वामूलीय, उपध्मानीय, अनुस्वार, विसर्जनीय, नासिक्य and four यम letters; confer, compare एते पञ्चषष्टिवर्णा ब्रह्मराशिरात्मवाचः Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.VIII. 25. The Rk Tantra gives 57 letters viz. 14 vowels, 25 class consonants, 4 semivowels, 4 sibilants, Visarga,.Jihvamuliya, Upadhmaniya, Anunasika, 4_yamas and two Anusvaras. The Rk Tantra gives two different serial orders, the Uddesa (common) and the Upadesa (traditional). The common order or Uddesa gives the 14 vowels beginning with अ, then the 25 class consonants, then the four semivowels, the four sibilants and lastly the eight ayogavahas, viz. the visarjanya and others. The traditional order gives the diphthongs first, then long vowels ( अा, ऋ, लॄ, ई and ऊ ) then short vowels (ऋ, लृ, इ, उ, and lastly अ ), then semivowels, then the five fifth consonants, the five fourths, the five thirds, the five seconds, the five firsts, then the four sibilants and then the eight ayogavaha letters and two Ausvaras instead of one anuswara. Panini appears to have followed the traditional order with a few changes that are necessary for the technigue of his work.
varṇānarthavattvathe view that letters do not possess the sense, as individually in every letter no separate sense ; is seen: confer, compare अनर्थकास्तु et cetera, and others Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on Siva Sutra 5, Vart.14 and 15.
varṇārthavattvathe theory or view that individual letters are severally possessed of different senses. For instance, the difference in the meanings of the words कूप, यूप, and सृप is due to the difference in their initial letter. The theory is not acceptable to the Vaiyakaranas nor the theory वर्णानर्थवत्व given a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.. They follow the theory of संघातार्थवत्त्व i. e. sense given by a group of words together. See M.Bh, on Siva Sutra 5, Varttikas 9 to 15.
varṇāśrayaa grammatical operation depending upon a single letter id est, that is an operation caused by a letter singly; cf, वर्णाश्रये नास्ति प्रत्ययलक्षणम् |ParSek.Pari.21; confer, comparealso वर्णाश्रयः प्रत्ययो वर्णविचालस्यानिमित्तम् । दाक्षि:l M.Bh.onP. I.1.39 Vart.10.
varṇaukadeśaa part or a portion of a combined letter id est, that isसंयुक्तस्वर or संयुक्तव्यञ्जन. The diphthongs or संयुक्तस्वरs are divisible into two Svaras, for instance ऐ into अा and ए, औ into अा and ओ. Similarly double consonants like क्कू, च्च्, क्म्, क्त् et cetera, and others are also divisible. Regarding the point raised whether the individual parts can be looked upon as separate letters for undergoing or causing a grammatical operation,the decision of the grammarians is that they cannot be looked upon as separate, when they are completely mixed as the dipthongs; confer, compareनाक्यपवृक्तस्यावयवस्य तद्वधिर्यथा द्रव्येषु Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on Siva Sutra 3, 4 Vart. 6.
vartsyaliterally gingival, or produced at the gums; the letter र् according to some scholars who believe that र् is produced at the root of the teeth id est, that is at the gums; confer, compare एके अाचार्या रेफं वर्त्स्यमिच्छन्ति। वर्त्से भवो वर्त्स्य: ! वर्त्सशब्देन दत्तमूलादुपरिष्टादुच्छूनः प्रदेश: (gums) उच्यते Uvvata on R.Pr.I.20.
vardhamāna(1)a long vowel;(2)name of a famous ]ain grammarian, disciple of Govindasuri, who lived in the beginning of the twelfth century A.D.and wrote a metrical work on ganas or groups of words in grammar, named गणरत्नमहोदधि, and also a commentary on it. The work consists of 8 chapters and has got some commentaries besides the well-known one by the author himselfeminine. He also wrote two other works on grammar कातन्त्रविस्तर and क्रियागुप्तक as also a few religious books.
vaśaṃgamaname given in the Pratisakhya works to letter-combinations where a consonant gets a change suitable to the neighbouring consonants as given in the Rk.Pratisakhya in IV.1 to IV.5 including जश्त्व, अनुनासिकादेश, छत्व, परसवर्ण, अनुस्वार and others, as given in P. VIII.2.39, VIII.3.7, VIII. 3.23, VIII.4.40, 46, 58,59, 62, 63; confer, compare न ह्यत्र अवशंगमसंधाविव अपरिणतानि व्यञ्जनानि संयोगं गच्छन्ति Uvvata on R.Pr.IV.5.
vas(1)pres participle affix वसु substituted for शतृ applied to the root विद्: exempli gratia, for example विद्वस्, confer, compare विदेः शतृर्वसुः P.VII. l.36; (2) perf part, affix क्वसु substituted for the general affix लिट् mostly in Vedic Literature, but in specific cases in spoken language; e. g.see सेदिवस्, शुश्रुवस् उपेयिवस् confer, compare P III.2. 107-9. See क्वसु.
vahiatmanepada personal-ending of the first person ( उत्तमपुरुष) dual, substituted for the general ल् affix; confer, compare तिप्तसझि... महि़्ङ् P.III.4.78.
vākaranāgal[WACKERNAGELL]German Professor and scholar of Sanskrit Grammar who collaborated in the work of editing 'Altindisch Grammatik'.
vākyaa sentence giving an idea in a single unit of expression consisting of the verb with its karakas or instruments and adverbs; confer, compareअाख्यातं साब्ययं सकारकं सकारकविशेषणं वाक्यसंज्ञं भवतीति वक्तव्यम् | साव्ययम् | उच्चैः पठति | सकारकम् | ओदनं पचति | Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. II. 1.1. Vart. 10. Regarding the different theoretical ways of the interpretation of a sentence see the word शाब्दबोध. For details, see वाक्यपदीय II. 2 where the different definitions of वाक्य are given and the अखण्डवाक्यस्फोट is established as the sense of a sentence.
vākyakāṇḍaname given to the second chapter of Bhartrhari's Vakyapadiya in which problems regarding the interpretation of a sentence are fully discussedition
vākyakāraa term used for a writer who composes a work in pithy, brief assertions in the manner of sutras, such as the Varttikas. The term is found used in Bhartrhari's Mahabhasyadipika where by contrast with the term Bhasyakara it possibly refers to the varttikakara Katyayana; confer, compare एषा भाष्यकारस्य कल्पना न वाक्यकारस्य Bhartrhari Mahabhasyadipika. confer, compare also Nagesa's statement वाक्यकारो वार्तिकरमारभते: confer, compare also चुलुम्पादयो वाक्यकारीया ; Madhaviya Dhatuvrtti.
vākyapadīyaa celebrated work on meanings of words and sentences written by the famous grammarian Bhartrhari ( called also Hari ) of the seventh century. The work is looked upon as a final authority regarding the grammatical treatment of words and sentences,for their interpretation and often quoted by later grammarians. It consists of three chapters the Padakanda or Brahmakanda, the Vakyakanda and the Samkirnakanda, and has got an excellent commentary written by Punyaraja and Helaraja.
vākyapadīyaṭīkāname of a commentary on Bhartrhari's Vakyapadiya written by Punyaraja on the first and the second Kanda. Some scholars hold the view that the commentary on the first knda was written by Bhartrhari himselfeminine.
vākyapadīyaprakīrṇaprakāśaname given to the commentary on the third Kanda or book of Bhartrhari's Vakyapadiya by Helaraja.
vākyaparisamāpticompletion of the idea to be expressed in a sentence or in a group of sentences by the wording actually given, leaving nothing to be understood as contrasted with वाक्यापरिसमाप्ति used in the Mahabhasya: confer, compare वाक्यापरिसमाप्तेर्वा P.I.1.10 vart. 4 and the Mahabhasya thereon. There are two ways in which such a completion takes place,singly and collectively; cf प्रत्येकं वाक्यपरिसमाप्तिः: illustrated by the usual example देवदत्तयज्ञदत्तविष्णुमित्रा भोज्यन्ताम् where Patanjali remarks प्रत्येकं ( प्रत्यवयवं) भुजिः परिसमाप्यते; cf also समुदाये वाक्यपरिसमाप्तिः where Patajali remarks गर्गा: शतं दण्ड्यन्ताम् | अर्थिनश्च राजानो हिरण्येन भवन्ति न च प्रत्येकं दण्डयन्ति | Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ).on P.I.1.1Vart.12: cf also M.Bh. on P.I.1.7, I.2.39, II.2.l et cetera, and others वाक्यप्रकाश a work on the interpretation of sentences written with a commentary upon it by उदयधर्ममुनि of North Gujarat who lived in the seventeenth century A.D.
vākyapradīpaa term sometimes seen (wrongly) applied to the Vakyapadiya of Bhartrhari. It may have been the name of the commentary on the vakyaprakasa.
vākyabhedaa serious fault of expression when a sentence is required to be divided into two sentences for the sake of its proper interpretation: cf केचिद्वा सुप्यापिशलेरित्यनुवर्तयन्ति तद्वाक्य भेदेन सुब्धातौ विकल्पं करोति Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. onP.VI. 1.94: cf also तद्धि ( स्थानेग्रहणं ) तृतीयया विपरिणमय्य वाक्यभेदेन स्थानिन: प्रसङ्गे जायमानः et cetera, and others Par. Sek. on Pari. 13.
vākyaśeṣacomplement of a sentence: something reguired to be understood to complete the sense of a sentence generally according to the context confer, compareकल्प्यो हि वाक्यशेषो वाक्यं वक्तर्यघीनं हि । M.Bh. on P. I. 1.57 Vart. 6, confer, compare कामचारश्च वतिनिर्देशे वाक्यशेषं समर्थयितुंम् | तद्यथा । उशीनखन्मद्रेषु गावः । सन्ति न सन्तीति i मातृवदस्याः कलाः ! सन्तिं न सन्तीति ! M.Bh. on P.I.3.62.
vākyasaṃskārapakṣathe grammarian's theory that as the individual words have practically no existence as far as the interpretation or the expression of sense is concerned, the sentence alone being capable of conveying the sense, the formation of individual words in a sentence' is explained by putting them in a sentence and knowing their mutual relationship. The word गाम् cannot be explained singly by showing the base गो and the case ending अम् unless it is seen in the sentence गाम् अानय; confer, compare यथा वाक्यसंस्कारपक्षे कृष्णादिसंबुद्धयन्त उपपदे ऋधेः क्तिनि कृते कृष्ण ऋध् ति इति स्थिते असिद्धत्वात्पूर्वमाद्गुणे कृते अचो रहाभ्यामिति द्वित्वं .. Pari. Bhaskara Pari. 99The view is put in alternation with the other view, viz. the पदसंस्कारपक्ष which has to be accepted in connection with the गौणमुख्यन्याय; cf पदस्यैव गौणार्थकत्वस्य ग्रहेण अस्य ( गौणमुख्यन्यायस्य) पदकार्यविषयत्वमेवोचितम् | अन्यथा वाक्यसंस्कारपक्षे तेषु तदनापत्तिः Par. Sek. on Pari. 15, The grammarians usually follow the वाक्यसंकारपक्ष.
vākyārthathe meaning of a sentence, which comes as a whole composite idea when all the constituent words of it are heard: confer, compare पदानां सामान्ये वर्तमानानां यद्विशेषेSवस्थानं स वाक्यार्थ:, M.Bh. on P.I.2.45 Vart. 4. According to later grammarians the import or meaning of a sentence ( वाक्यार्थ ) flashes out suddenly in the mind of the hearer immediately after the sentence is completely uttered, The import is named प्रतिभा by Bhartrhari, confer, compare Vakyapadiya II.45; confer, compare also वाक्यार्थश्च प्रतिभामात्रविषय: Laghumanjusa. For details and the six kinds of vakyartha, see Vakyapadiya II.154.
vāc(1)expression from the mouth ; speech; series of sounds caused by expelling the air from the lungs through differently shaped positions of the mouth and the throat: cf स संघातादीन् प्राप्य वाग्भवति Vaj. Pr.I.9; see the word वाणी; (2) the sacred or divine utterance referring to the Veda: confer, compare त्रय्या वाचः परं पदम् ; (3) term used for उपपद in the Jainendra Vyākarana: confer, compare वाग्विभक्ते कारकविभक्तिर्बलीयसी Jain Pari 104.
vācakaexpressive, as contrasted with द्योतक्र, व्यञ्जक, सूचक and भेदक which ७ mean suggestive; the term is used in connection with words which directly convey their sense by denotation, as opposed to words which convey indirectly the sense or suggest it as the prefixes or Nipatas do.
vācikāexpressing directly, denoting: (feminine. of वाचक ): confer, compare तयेारभिसंबन्धस्य षष्ठी वाचिका भवति Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P.II. I.1 Vart. 4.
vācya(1)directly expressed (sense) as contrasted with व्यङ्ग्य or ध्वनित: confer, compare शब्देनार्थान् वाच्यान् दृष्ट्वा बुद्धौ कुर्यात्पौर्वापर्यम् | M.Bh. on P. I.4.109 Vart. 10; (2) which should be stated or which deserves to be stated, The word वाच्य is generally put in connection with the additions or corrections to the sutras by the Varttikakara and the Mahbhasyakara in their explanations: confer, compare तत्रैतावद्वाच्यम्, M.Bh. on P. I.4.1 ; confer, compare also वाच्य ऊर्णोर्णुवद्भावःM.Bh. on P. III.1. 22 Vart. 3; III. I. 36 Vart. 6.
vājapyāyanaan ancient grammarian who holds the view that words denote always the jati i.e they always convey the generic sense and that the individual object or the case is understood in connection with the statement or the word,as a natural course,when the purpose is not served by taking the generic sense; confer, compare अाकृत्यभिधानाद्वा एकं शब्दं विभक्तौ वाजप्यायन अाचार्यो न्याय्यं मन्यते Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I.2.64 Vart. 35.
vāṇīspeech; utterance; the same as वाच् which is believed to be of four kinds as cited by the grammarians and explained by Bhartrhari; the four kinds are based upon the four places of origin, the three first places belonging to the inarticulate speech and the fourth belonging to the articulate one: cfचत्वारि वाक्परिमिता पदानि तानि विदुर्ब्राह्मण य मनीषिणः | गुहा त्रीणि निहिता नेङ्गयन्तिं तुरीयं वाचेी मनुष्या वदन्ति, Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). I Ahnika l and the Pradipa and Mahābhāṣya-Pradīpoddyota by Nāgeśa.thereon.
vātsapraan ancient writer of Pratisakhya works who believed in the very feeble utterance ( लघुप्रयत्नतर ) of the consonants य and व, when preceded by अ and standing at the end of a word. See लघुप्रयत्न.
vāyuair or प्राण, which is believed to spring up from the root of the navel and become a cause (even a material cause according to some scholars) of sound of four kinds produced at four different places, the last kind being audible to us; confer, compare प्राणे वाणिनभिव्यज्य वर्णेष्वेवोपलीयते Vakyapadiya I.116;confer, compare also R.Pr.XIII. 13, V.Pr. I.7-9; T.Pr.II.2: Siksa of Panini st. 6.
vāraṇāvateśaa grammarian of the seventeenth century who wrote a gloss named अमृतस्त्रुति on the Prakriya-kaumudi.
vārarucaa work attributed to वररुचि: confer, compare वाररुचे काव्यम् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ).on P. IV.3.101 cf also वाररुनो ग्रन्थ: S.K.on P.IV.3. 101 This work possibly was not a grammar work and its author also was not the same as the Varttikakara Katyayana. See वरुरुचि a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.. The name वाररुचव्याकरण was given possibly to Katyayana's Prakrit Grammar, the author of which was वररुचि surnamed Katyayana. For details see p.395 Vyakarana Mahabhasya Vol. VII. D. E. Society's Edition.
vārarucakārikāan ancient grammarwork in verse believed to have been written by an ancient scholar of grammar, who, if not the same as Katyayana who wrote the Varttikas, was his contemporary and to whom the authorship of the Unadi Sutras is ascribed by some scholars. See वररुचि.
vārttikaa statement which is as much authoritative as the original statement to which it is given as an addition for purposes of correction, completion or explanation. The word is defined by old writers in an often-guoted verseउक्तानुक्तदुरुक्तनां चिन्ता यत्र प्रवर्तते | तं ग्रन्थं वार्तिकं प्राहुर्वार्तिकज्ञा मनीषिण:|This definition fully applies to the varttikas on the Sutras of Panini. The word is explained by Kaiyata as वृत्तौ साधु वार्त्तिकम् which gives strength to the supposition that there were glosses on the Sutras of Panini of which the Varttikas formed a faithful pithy summary of the topics discussedition The word varttika is used in the Mahabhasya at two places only हन्तेः पूर्वविप्रविषेधो वार्तिकेनैव ज्ञापित: M.Bh. on P.III. 4.37 and अपर आह् यद्वार्त्तिक इति M.Bh. on P. II.2.24 Vart. 18. In अपर अहृ यद्वार्त्तिक इति the word is contrasted with the word वृत्तिसूत्र which means the original Sutra (of Panini ) which has been actuaIly quoted, viz. संख्ययाव्ययासन्नाo II.2. 25. Nagesa gives ' सूत्रे अनुक्तदुरुक्तचिन्ताकरत्वं वार्तिक्रत्वम् as the definition of a Varttika which refers only to two out of the three features of the Varttikas stated a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.. If the word उक्त has been omitted with a purpose by Nagesa, the definition may well-nigh lead to support the view that the genuine Varttikapatha of Katyayana consisted of a smaller number of Varttikas which along with a large number of Varttikas of other writers are quoted in the Mahabhasya, without specific names of writers, For details see pages 193-223 Vol. VII Patanjala Mahabhasya, D.E, Society's Edition.
vārttikakārabelieved to be Katyayana to whom the whole bulk of the Varttikas quoted in the Mahabhasya is attributed by later grammarians. Patafijali gives the word वार्तिककार in four places only (in the Mahabhasya on P.I.1.34, III.1.44: III.2.118 and VII.1.1) out of which his statement स्यादिविधिः पुरान्तः यद्यविशेषणं भवति किं वार्तिककारः प्रातिषेधेनं करोति in explanation of the Slokavarttika स्यादिविधिः...इति हुवता कात्यायनेनेहृ, shows that Patanjali gives कात्यायन as the Varttikakara (of Varttikas in small prose statements) and the Slokavarttika is not composed by Katyayana. As assertions similar to those made by other writers are quoted with the names of their authors ( भारद्वाजीयाः, सौनागाः, कोष्ट्रियाः et cetera, and others) in the Mahabhasya, it is evident that the Varttikas quoted in the Mahabhasya(even excluding the Slokavarttikas) did not all belong to Katyayana. For details see pp. 193-200, Vol. VII, Vyakarana Mahabhasya, D. E. Society's Edition.
vārtikapāṭhathe text of the Varttikas as traditionally handed over in the oral recital or in manuscripts As observed a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.(see वार्त्तिक),although a large number of Varttikas quoted in the Mahabhasya are ascribed to Katyayana, the genuine Varttikapatha giving such Varttikas only, as were definitely composed by him, has not been preserved and Nagesa has actually gone to the length of making a statement like " वार्तिकपाठ: भ्रष्टः" ; confer, compare . Mahābhāṣya-Pradīpoddyota by Nāgeśa.on P.I.l.I2 Varttika 6.
vārttikasiddhāntacategorical conclusive statements made by the Varttikakara many of which were cited later on as Paribhasas by later writers For details see pp. 212220 Vol. VII, Vyakarana Mahbhasya, D. E. Society's edition.
vārṣyāyaṇian ancient grammarian quoted in the Mahabhasya and the Nirukta in connection with the six-fold division of bhava or verbal activity; confer, compare षड् भावविकारा भवन्तीति वाप्यार्यणि: l जायते अस्ति विपरिणमते वर्धते अपक्षीयते विनश्यतीति Nirukta of Yāska.I. 3.
vāvidhiवाविधान also, laying down an option regarding a grammatical operation; confer, compare स्वस्तियोगे चतुर्थी कुशालार्थेराशिषि वाविधानात् P.II.3.16 Vart.1 ; confer, compare also अविशेषेण अयादनिां वाविधिमुक्त्वा सार्वधातुके नित्यमिति वक्ष्यामि M.Bh.on P.III. 1.31 Vart, 2; confer, compare also M.Bh. on P. III.1.94.
vāsarūpanyāyathe dictum of applying optionally any two or more krt affixes to a root if they become applicable at one and the same time, only provided that those affixes are not in the topic of स्त्रियाम् (P.III.3.94 et cetera, and others) and are not the same in appearance such as ण, अ, क etc , which are the same viz. अ; confer, compare वासरूपेSस्त्रियाम् P.III.1.94; confer, compare also वासरूपन्यायेन ण्वुलपि भावेष्यति M.Bh. on P.III.2.146 Vart.1;confer, comparealso M.Bh. on P.III.2.150 Vart. 1, The word वासरूप and वासरूपविधि are also used in the same sense: confer, compare ताच्छीलिका वासरूपेण न भवन्तीति M.Bh. on P.III. 2.150 Vart. 2, as also ताच्छीलिकेषु वासरूपविधिर्नास्ति Par. Sek. Pari. 67.
vāsudeva dīkṣitason of महादेव दीक्षित, the author of the Balamanorarma, a commentary on the Siddhantakaumudi. Vasudevadiksita was a resident of Tanjore who lived in the beginning of the eighteenth century A.D. and wrote a few works on Purvamimamsa.
vāsudeva( शास्त्री)surnamed Abhyankar, who lived from 1863 to l942 and did vigorous and active work of teaching pupils and writing essays, articles, commentary works and original works on various Shastras with the same scholarship, zeal and acumen for fifty years in Poona. He wrote गूढार्थप्रकाश a commentary on the LaghuSabdendusekhara and तत्त्वादर्श a commentary on the Paribhasendusekhara in 1889. His edition of the Patanjala Mahabhasya with full translation and notes in Marathi can be called his magnum opus. See अभ्यंकर.
vi(1)Unadi affix वि quoted by Panini in the rule जाग्रोsविचिण्णल्ङित्सुत्सु VII. 1.85; exempli gratia, for example जागृविः; confer, compare जृशृस्तृजागृभ्यः क्विन् Unadi IV. 54; also वृदृभ्यां विन् IV.53; (2) common term for the affixes क्विप् , क्विन् , च्वि, ण्वि, ण्विन् , विच् and विट्. See व्,
vikaraṇaan affix placed between a root and the personal ending, for showing the specific tense or mood or voice to convey which, the personal ending is applied; e. g. the conjugational signs शप् , श्यन् , श्रु, श, श्नम्, उ, श्ना and यक्, आम् , as also स्य, तास् , सिप् , अाम् and च्लि with its substitutes. Although the term विकरण is used by ancient grammarians and freely used by the Mahabhsyakara in connection with the affixes, mentioned in the sutras of Panini, such as शप् , श्यन् and others, the term is not found in the Sutras of Panini. The vikaranas are different from the major kinds of the regular affixes तिङ्, कृत्य and other similar ones. The vikaranas can be called कृत्; so also, as they are mentioned in the topic (अधिकार) of affixes or Pratyayas,they hold the designation ' pratyaya '. For the use of the word विकरण see M.Bh. on P. I.3. 12, III, 1.31 and VI. 1.5. The term विकरण is found . in the Yājñavalkya Siksa in the sense of change, ( confer, compare उपधारञ्जनं कुर्यान्मनोर्विकरणे सति ) and possibly the ancient grammarians used it in that very sense as they found the root कृ modified as करु or कुरु, or चि as चिनु, or भू as भव before the regular personal endings तिप् , तस् et cetera, and others
vikāraliterally change: modification; modification of a word-base or an affix, caused generally by the addition of suffixes: confer, compare प्रकृतेरवस्थान्तरं विकार: Kas, on P. IV.3.134: confer, compare also लेपागमवर्णविकारज्ञो हि सम्यग्वेदान् परिपालयिष्यति Mahabhasya Ahnika 1.
vikāryaliterally changeable; that which gets changed in its nature; a variety or subdivision of कर्म or the object confer, compare त्रिविधं कर्म । निर्वर्त्य विकार्य प्राप्यं चेति | Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P. III. 2.1. The विकार्यकर्म is explained as यस्य प्रकृत्युच्छेदो गुणान्तरं वा उत्पद्यते तद्विकार्यम् ! यथा भुक्त ओदन: | लूयमान: केद[र: | Srngaraprakasa II ; cf also, Vakyapadiya III. 7.78.
vikīrṇaa fault in the utterance of a vowel when one vowel appears, or is heard as another, confer, compareविकीर्णो वर्णान्तरे प्रसृतः । एकोप्यनेकनिभसीत्यपरे Pradipa on the Mahabhasya Ahn. 1 end.
vikṛtichange, modification as different from the original which is called प्रकृतिः confer, compareप्रकृतिरुपादानकारणं । तस्यैव उत्तरमवस्थान्तरं विकृतिः Kāśikā of Jayāditya and Vāmana. on P.V.I.12. विकृतिवल्ली a work on the modified recital of the Veda words, or पदपाठविकृति, ascribed to Vyadi who is believed to have been a pupil of वर्ष.
vikṛtivallīṭīkāname of a commentary on विकृतिवल्ली (which see a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page.) written by a Vedic scholar गङ्गाधर.
vigrahalit, separation of the two parts of a thing; the term is generally applied to the separation of the constituent words of a compound word: it is described to be of two kinds : ( a ) शास्त्रीयविग्रहृ or technical separation; e. g. राजपुरुष्: into राजन् ङस् पुरुष सु and ( 2 ) लौकिकविग्रहं or common or popular separation ; e. g. राजपुरूष: into राज्ञ: पुरुष:. It is also divided into two kinds according to the nature of the constituent words (a) स्वपदाविग्रह separation by means of the constituent words, exempli gratia, for example राजहितम् into राज्ञे हृितम्;(b) अस्वपदविग्रह, e. g. राजार्थम् into राज्ञे इदम् ;or exempli gratia, for example सुमुखीं into शोभनं मुखं अस्याः confer, compare M.Bh. on P.V.4.7. The compounds whose separation into constituent words cannot be shown by those words (viz. the constituent words) are popularly termed nityasamsa. The term नित्यसमास is explained as नित्यः समासो नित्यसमासः | यस्य विग्रहो नास्ति । M.Bh. on P.II.2.19 Vart. 4. The upapadasamsa is described as नित्यसमास. Sometimes especially in some Dvandva compounds each of the two separated words is capable of giving individually the senses of both the words exempli gratia, for example the words द्यावा and क्षामा of the compound द्यावाक्षामा. The word विग्रह is found used in the Pratisakhya works in the sense of the separate use of a word as contrasted with the use in a compound; cf अच्छेति विग्रहे प्लुतं भवति R.Pr.VII.1. विग्रहृ is defined as वृत्यर्थावबोधकं वाक्यं विग्रहः in the Siddhantakaumudi.
vighnakṛtimpediment to an operation caused by something preceding on account of its coming in the way: a vyavaya or vyavadhana or intervention which is not admissible just as the interruption of palatals, linguals, dentals and sibilants excepting हू for the change of न् into ण् : confer, compare अव्यवेतं विग्रहे विघ्नकृद्भिः R.Pr. V.25.
vickrt affix वि (which also becomes nil or zero) applied to a root in the sense of an agent, as observed in Vedic and classical use, as also to the root यज् with उप and roots ending in अा generally in Vedic Literature but sometimes in popu1ar language; confer, compare विजुपे छन्दसि । आतो मनिन्कनिबवनिपश्च। अन्येभ्योपि दृश्यन्ते | कीलालपाः, शुभ्ंयाः et cetera, and others Kas on P. III. 2.73, 74, 75.
vijñānaspecific knowledge or understanding: confer, compare सिद्धं तु धर्मोपदेशने अनवयवविज्ञानाद्यथा लौकिकवैदिकेषु: Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. VI.1. 84 Vart.5.
vijñeyaa matter of special understanding; the phrase अवश्यं चैतद्विज्ञेयम् very frequently occurs in the Mahabhasya; cf M.Bh. on P.I.1.1, 3, 5, 22, I.2.47, 48, 64, I.4.23 et cetera, and others
viṭkrt affix ( वि, व् or nil) applied to the roots जन्, सन्, खन् , कम् and गम् and to the root अद् in special cases as seen in Vedic Literature; exempli gratia, for example अब्जाः, गोषाः, कूपखा:, दधिक्रा:, et cetera, and others
viṭhṭhalaor विठ्ठलेश grandson of रामचन्द्रशेष the author of the प्राक्रियाकौमुदी. He was aTelagu Brahmana of Andhra who lived in the beginning of the sixteenth century and wrote a commentary named प्रसाद on the Prakriya-Kaumudi and two small works अव्ययार्थनिरूपण and पाणिनिसूत्रवृत्ति.
vidyāvinodagrandson of Rameswarabhatta of Pratisthana who wrote a grammar of the Prakrta dialects.
vidharmakapossessed of different phonetic properties.
vidheya;(1)predicate as constrasted with उद्देश्य; confer, compareसमर्थाधिकारस्य विधेयसामानाधिकरण्यनियमोनर्थकः M.Bh. on P.II.1. 1 Vart. 17: (2) that which should be prescribed as contrasted with प्रतिषेध्य: confer, compare तिङ् च कश्चिद्विडधेयः कश्चित् प्रतिषेध्य: M.Bh. on P.I. 2.64 Vart.9.
vintaddhita affix. affix ( विनी ) in the sense of possession applied to the words तपस् , सहस्र, ऊर्जस्, माया, मेधा, स्रज् and words ending in अस्, as also wherever it is seen ( बहुलं ) in Vedic literature: e. g. तपस्विन् , ऊर्जस्विन् , मायाविन्, स्रग्विन् , पयस्विन् et cetera, and others: confer, compare P. V. 2.102, 114, 121, 122.
vināśadisappearance, elision; the word is frequently used in the sense of lopa; confer, compare एतच्च नित्येषु शब्देषु नेापपद्यते यस्सतो नाम विनाशः स्यादसतो वा प्रादुर्ब्भाव: M.Bh. on P. I.1.56 Vart.12.
vinimittacaused by different conditions; due to different causes confer, compare बह्वनड्वांहि ब्राह्मणकुलानि विनिमित्तावेतौ Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P.VII.1.72 Vart. 3.
viniyogaemployment separately of different persons or things for different purposes; confer, compare अहेति विनियोगे च P.VIII. 1.61;confer, compare also अह विनियोगे । विनियेागो नाम द्वयोः पुरुषयोंरेकस्मिन्कर्मणि एकस्य पुरुषस्य संबन्धः अन्यस्मिन्कर्मणि अपरस्य V.Pr.VI.21.
vinivartakaliterally sending away: causing prohibition: confer, compare विशेषेण , निवर्तयतीति विनिवर्तकः । त्वयैवेति विनिवर्तकाधिकारकावधारकाः T.Pr. XXII.6.
viparīta(1)in the opposite or reverse way: confer, compare विपरीताच्चेति वक्तव्यम् । पारावारीणः M.Bh. on P.IV.2.93 Vart. 2; (2) change of ऋ into इ, seen sometimes in Vedic Literature when that ऋ is preceded or followed by a palatal letter; exempli gratia, for example श्रृङगे into शिङ्गे (Ṛk. Saṁh. V-2.9) बिभृयात् into बिभियात् (Ṛk.Saṁh. x.x.9) विचृत into विचित्त Ṛg. Veda II.27.16; confer, compare अनन्तरे तद्विपरीतमाहुस्तालव्ये श्रृङगे बिभृयाद्विचृत्ताः R.Pr.XIV.17.
viprakarṣadistance, standing at a distance; confer, compare न च कालनक्षत्रयोः संनिकर्षविप्रकर्षौ स्त: M.Bh. on P.IV.2.8.
viprakṛṣṭaremote; at a distance,with a word or two intervening: confer, compare संनिकृष्टविप्रकृष्टयेाः संनिकृष्टस्य । given like a Paribhāṣā-Sūtra V.Pr.I.144.
vipratiṣiddhastanding in conflict; conflicting contradictory; confer, compare परस्परविरुद्धं विप्रतिषिद्धम् Kāś. on P. II.4.13.
vipratiṣedhaconfict, opposition; opposition or conflict between two rules of equal strength, which become applicable simultaneously when Pāṇini's dictum विप्रतिषेधे परं कार्यम् applies and the rule mentioned later on, or subsequently, in the Pāṇini's Aṣṭādhyāyī. is allowed to apply: confer, compare विप्रतिषेधे परं कार्यम् P.I.4.2: confer, compare also यत्र द्वौ प्रसङ्गौ अन्यार्थौ एकस्मिन्युगपत् प्राप्नुतः स तुल्यबलविरोधी विप्रतिषेध: Kāś. on P.I. 4.2: confer, compare also विप्रतिषेध उत्तरं बलवदलोपे Vājasaneyi Prātiśākhya.I.159. The dictum of the application of the subsequent rule is adopted only if the conflicting rules are of equal strength; hence, rules which are either nitya, antaraṅga or apavāda, among which each subsequent one is more powerful than the preceding one and which are all more powerful than the पर or the subsequent rule, set aside the पर rule. There is another dictum that when by the dictum about the subsequent rule being more powerful, an earlier rule is set aside by a later rule, the earlier rule does not apply again in that instance, barring a few exccptional cases; confer, compare सकृद्गतौ विप्रतिषेधे यद् वाधितं तद् बाधितमेव | पुनःप्रसङ्गविज्ञानात् सिद्वम् Paribhāṣenduśekhara of Nāgeśa. Pari. 40, 39.
vibhaktiliterally division, separation; separation of the base id est, that is that factor which shows the base separately। The word विभक्ति is generally used in the sense of case affixes; but in Pāṇini's grammar the term विभक्ति is applied also to personal endings applied to roots to form verbs; confer, compareविभक्तिश्च । सुप्तिङौ विभक्तिसंज्ञौ स्तः S.K.on Pāṇ. I.4.104. The term is also applied to taddhita affix.affixes which are applied to pronouns, किम् and बहु, ending in the ablative or in the locative case or in other cases on rare occasions. Such affixes are तस् (तसिल् ), त्र, (त्रल्), ह, अत्, दा, ऋहिल्, दानीम्, था ( थाल् ) and थम् given in P.V.3.1 to V.3.26.The case affixes are further divided into उपपदविभक्ति affixes and कारकविभक्ति affixes. For details see P.II.3.1 to 73.
vibhaktipratirūpakaa term applied to such words ending with kṛt affixes as appear similar to words ending with case-affixes; such words have no further case affixes put after them, and hence, they are called by the term 'avyaya'; exempli gratia, for example कर्तुम् confer, compare विभक्तिप्रतिरूपकमव्ययम् similar to उपसर्गविभक्तिस्वरप्रतिरूपकाश्च निपाताः gaṇasūtra inside the Cādigaṇa P. I.4.57.
vibhāktisvarapratirūpakasimilar in form to a word ending in a case-affix or to a vowel. Such words are looked upon, and are treated as indeclinables exempli gratia, for example शनै:, चिरेण, अस्ति, उ, ए et cetera, and others; confer, compare the usual expressions तिडन्तप्रतिरूपकमव्ययम् et cetera, and others confer, compare विभक्तिस्वरप्रतिरूपकाश्च निपाता भवन्ति Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. VIII.3.1: confer, compare also उपसर्गविभक्तिस्वरप्रतिरूपकाश्च निपाताः । a gaṇasūtra inside the चादिगण mentioned in P.I.4.57.
vibhaktyarthaliterally the sense of a case-affix, as also of a personal affix; the term is applied to the Kāraka Prakarana or Kāraka chapter or topic in grammar where senses of the विभक्ति affixes are fully discussed and illustrated; confer, compare विभक्त्यर्था: a chapter in the Siddhānta-kaumudi of Bhaṭṭojī Dīkṣita.
vibhaktyarthanirṇayaa general term given to a chapter on case-affixes as also to treatises discussing the sense and relations of case-affixes. There is a treatise of this name written by Giridhara and another written by Jayakṛṣna Maunī.
vibhajyānvākhyānaa method of forming a word, or of arriving at the complete form of a word by putting all the constituent elements of the word such as the base, the affix, the augment, the modification, the . accent, et cetera, and others one after another and then arriving at the form instead of completing the formation stage by stage; e. g. in arriving at the form स्नौघ्नि the wording स्नौघ्न + अ +ई is to be considered as it stands and not स्नौघ्न + अ = स्नौघ्न and then स्नौघ्न +ई. The विभज्यान्वाख्यानपक्ष in connection with the formation of a word corresponds to the पदसंस्कारपक्ष in connection with the formation of a sentence.
vibhāga(1)lit, division, splitting; the splitting of a sentence into its constituent parts viz. the words; , the splitting of a word into its constituent parts viz. the base, the affix, the augments and the like: (2) understanding or taking a thing separately from a group of two or more; confer, compareअवश्यं खल्वपि विभज्योपपदग्रहणं कर्तव्यं यो हि बहूनां विभागस्तदर्थम् ! सांकाश्यकेभ्यश्च पाटलिपुत्रकेभ्यश्च माथुरा अभिरूपतराः, Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P.V.3.57: (3) splitting of a Saṁhitā text of the Vedas into the Pada text: confer, compare अथादावुत्तरे विभागे ह्रस्वं व्यञ्जनपरः Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.III.l, where विभाग is explained as पदविभाग by the commentator confer, compare also R.Pr.XVII.15; (4) the capacity of the Kārakas (to show the sense) confer, compare कारकशक्तिः विभागः Kāśikāvivaraṇapañjikā, a commentary on the Kāśikāvṛtti by Jinendrabuddhi, called Nyāsa. on Kāś.I.2.44.
vibhāṣāoptionally, alternatively; the word is explained by Pāṇini as नवा in the rule न वेति विभाषा (P.I.1.44)in consonance with its derivation from the root भाष् with वि; confer, compare नेति प्रतिषेधे वेति विकल्पस्तयोः प्रतिषेधविकल्पयोर्विभाषेत्ति संज्ञा भवति । विभाषाप्रदेशेषु प्रतिषेधविकल्पावुपतिष्ठते | तत्र प्रतिषेधेन समीकृते विषये प्रश्चाद्विकल्पः प्रवर्तते. The option (विभाषा) is further divided into three kind प्राप्ते विभाषा, अप्राप्ते विभाषा and उभयत्र विभाषा. For details see Mahābhāṣya on P. I.1.44.
vimokṣaliberation of the last letter (especially a class consonant) of a word from phonetic modifications by coalescence with the initial letter of the following word, or liberation of modification of a consonant or vowel standing at the end of a verse or sometimes even in the middle of a verse: exempli gratia, for example तत् नो मित्रः,सम् यौमि, संमधुमतीर्मधुमतीभिः पृच्यन्ताम् शुक्रं दुदुह्रे अह्नय; confer, compare V. Pr.I.90,91.
virāmaan ancient term used in the Prātiśākhya works for a stop or : pause in general at the end of a word, or at the end of the first member of a compound, which is shown split up in the Padapāṭha, or inside a word, or at the end of a word, or at the end of a vowel when it is followed by another vowel. The duration of this virāma is different in different circumstances; but sometimes under the same circumstances, it is described differently in the different Prātiśākhyas. Generally,there is no pause between two consonants as also between a vowel and a consonant preceding or following it.The Taittirīya Prātiśākhya has given four kinds of विराम (a) ऋग्विराम,pause at the end of a foot or a verse of duration equal to three mātrās or moras, (b) पदविराम pause between two words of duration equal to two matras; e. g. इषे त्वा ऊर्जे त्वा, (c) pause between two words the preceding one of which ends in a vowel and the following begins with a vowel, the vowels being not euphonically combined; this pause has a duration of one matra e,g. स इधान:, त एनम् , (d) pause between two vowels inside a word which is a rare occurrence; this has a duration of half a mātrā;e.gप्रउगम्, तितउः; confer, compare ऋग्विरामः पदविरामो विवृत्तिविरामः समानपदविवृत्तिविरामस्त्रिमात्रो द्विमात्र एकमात्रोर्धमात्र इत्यानुपूर्व्येण Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.XXII. 13. The word विवृत्ति is explained as स्वरयोरसंधिः. The vivṛttivirāma is further divided into वत्सानुसति which has the preceding vowel short and the succeeding long, वत्सानुसारिणी which has the preceding vowel a long one and the succeeding vowel a short one, पाकवती which has both the vowels short, and पिपीलिका which has got both , the vowels long. This fourfold division is given in the Śikṣā where their duration is given as one mātrā, one mātrā, three-fourths of a mātrā and one-fourth of a mātrā respectively. The duration between the two words of a compound word when split up in the पदपाठ is also equal to one mātrā; confer, compare R.Pr.I.16. The word विराम occurs in Pāṇini's rule विरामोs वसानम् P.I. 4.110 where commentators have explained it as absence; confer, compare वर्णानामभावोवसानसंज्ञः स्यात् S.K.on P. I.4.110: confer, compare also विरतिर्विरामः । विरम्यते अनेन इति वा विरामः Kāś. on P.I.4.110. According to Kāśikā even in the Saṁhitā text, there is a duration of half a mātrā between the various phonetic elements, even between two consonants or between a vowel and a consonant, which, however, is quite imperceptible; confer, compare परो यः संनिकर्षो वर्णानां अर्धमात्राकालव्यवधानं स संहितासंज्ञो भवति Kāś. on P. I.4.109 confer, compare also विरामे मात्रा R.T.35; confer, compare also R.Pr.I.16 and 17. For details see Mahābhāṣya on P.I.4.109 and I.4.110.
virodhaopposition or conflict between two rules where, the rule which is subsequen tly mentioned is regarded as stronger and given preference to, as far as its application is concerned; confer, compare तुल्यबलयोर्विरोधो विप्रतिषेधः । विप्रतिषेधे परं कार्यम् P.I.4.2: (2) contradiction where one thing prevents another confer, compare सर्वनामस्थाने इति अनुवर्तमानमपि विरोधादिह न संबध्यते Kāś.on P.VII.1.86.
vilambitā vṛttiretarding or slow manner of speech in which the letters are uttered quite distinctly; this kind of speech is followed by the preceptor while teaching Veda to his pupils; confer, compare अभ्यासार्थे द्रुतां वृत्ति प्रयोगार्थे तु मध्यमाम् । शिष्याणामुपदेशार्थे कुर्याद् वृत्तिं विलम्बिताम् Ṛgvedaprātiśākhya by Śaunaka ( Sanskrit Sāhityapariṣad Edition, Calcutta.) XIII. 19. confer, compare also Taittirīya Prātiśākhya.XXIII. 24. See विलम्बित a reference to some preceding word, not necessarily on the same page..
viliṅga(1)a substantive which is declined in all the three genders confer, compare Hemacandra III. 1.142: (2) of a different gender (although in the same case); confer, compare विलिङ्ग हि भवान् लोके निर्देशे करोति M.Bh. on P. I. 1.44 Vārt 5.
vivibhaktipossessed of a different caseaffix confer, compare एवमपि विविभक्तीनां न प्राप्नोति । समर्थात् समर्थे पदात् पदे इति Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. II. 1.1. Vārt 19; confer, compare also Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P. I. 1.27, VI.4.1; VII. 2.82.
vivṛtakaṇṭhaproduced by fully extending the chords of the throat. The first and the second classconsonants are described as विवृतकण्ठ; confer, compare तत्र वर्गाणां प्रथमद्वितीया विवृतकण्ठाः श्वासानुप्रदाना अघोषाः Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on P.I.1.9. Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 2.
vivṛtatarapossessed of the internal effort viz. विवृत which is specially strengthenedition The diphthongs have got at the time of their production the internal effort विवृत specially strengthened; confer, compare यदत्रवेर्णं, विवृततरं तदन्यस्मादवर्णात् Mahābhāṣya of Patañjali on the Sūtras of Pāṇini (Dr. Kielhorn's edition ). on Māheśvarasūtras. 3,4 Vārttika (on the Sūtra of Pāṇini). 10.
vivṛttaseparated, disjoined; the word is used in connection with the separated elements of a euphonic combination; the words विक्लिष्ट, अनेकीभूत and पृथग्भूत